Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane will help the students to improve their math skills easily. Answers are provided for Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane along with the explanation. All the solutions are explained clearly step-by-step in a simple manner. Every topic is explained by the math experts and given with real-time examples. Therefore, make your preparation simple by referring to our Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane.

Big Ideas Math Book 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane Answer Key

Students who are struggling to solve Big Ideas Math Book 5th Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane have reached the correct place. This BIM Book 5th Grade 12th Chapter Answer Key gives the most accurate answers to all the questions related to this chapter. Different methods of solving every question are given on this page. Verify the below links to know the different methods to solve problems. Be the first to learn the concepts and practice all the questions available here.

Lesson: 1 Plot Points in a Coordinate Plane

Lesson: 2 Relate Points in a Coordinate Plane

Lesson: 3 Draw polygons in a Coordinate Plane

Lesson: 4 Graph Data

Lesson: 5 Make and Interpret Line Graphs

Lesson: 6 Numerical Patterns

Lesson: 7 Graph and Analyze Relationships

Chapter: 12 – Patterns in the Coordinate Plane

Lesson 12.1 Plot Points in a Coordinate Plane

Explore and Grow

Choose a location for your buried treasure on the grid. Choose a point where two grid lines My Treasure intersect. An example is shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 1
Take turns with a partner guessing the location of each other’s buried treasure. Keep track of your guesses on the grid. After each guess, give a clue to help yourMy Guessespartner, such as “my treasure is northwest of your guess.”This is an image Continue to guess until a treasure is located.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 2
Reasoning
The point where the horizontal number line and the vertical number line intersect is called the origin. Why do you think it is called that?

Think and Grow: The Coordinate Plane

Key Idea
A coordinate plane is formed by the intersection of a horizontal number line and a vertical number line. An ordered pair is a pair of numbers that is used to locate a point in a coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 3
Example
Write the ordered pair that corresponds to point M.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 4
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 5
The horizontal distance from the origin to point M is __ units. So, the x-coordinate is __.
The vertical distance from the origin to point M is ___ units. So, the y-coordinate is ___. The ordered pair is __.

Answer:
The horizontal distance from the origin to point M is 5 units. So, the x-coordinate is 5.
The vertical distance from the origin to point M is 5units. So, the y-coordinate is 3. The ordered pair is (5, 3).

Show and Grow

Write the ordered pair corresponding to the point.

Question 1.
Point B
Answer:(4,2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-6 12.1-1
Explanation:
The horizontal distance from the origin to point B is _4_ units.
So, the x-coordinate is _4_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point B is __2_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _2__. The ordered pair is _(4,2)_.

Question 2.
Point S

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 6
Answer:(0,4)
Explanation:
The horizontal distance from the origin to point S is 0  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _0_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point S is __4_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _4__.
The ordered pair is _(0,4)_.

Plot and label the point in the coordinate plane.

Question 3.
F(5, 4)
Answer:(5,4)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 3
Start the Origin. Move  Units right and units up. Then plot and label the point.
The point can be labeled as Y,(5,4)

Question 4.
P(3, 0)
Answer:(3,0)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 4
Start the Origin. Move  Units right and units up. Then plot and label the point.
The point can be labeled as Y,(3,0)

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the coordinate plane to write the ordered pair corresponding to the point.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 6.1

Question 5.
Point M
Answer:(8,8)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 6.1
The horizontal distance from the origin to point M is  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _8_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point M is __8 units.
So, the y-coordinate is 8_.
The ordered pair is _(8,8)_.

Question 6.
Point Q
Answer:(2,7)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 6.1
The horizontal distance from the origin to point Q is 2  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _2_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point Q is __7_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _7__.
The ordered pair is _(2,7)_.

Question 7.
Point N
Answer: (7,6)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 6.1
The horizontal distance from the origin to point N is 7 units.
So, the x-coordinate is _7_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point N is _6_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _6__.
The ordered pair is _(7,6)_.

Question 8.
Point R
Answer:(2,0)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 6.1
The horizontal distance from the origin to point R is 2  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _2_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point R is __0_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _0_.
The ordered pair is _(2,0)_.

Question 9.
Point P
Answer:(6,1)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 6.1
The horizontal distance from the origin to point P is 6  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _6_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point P is __1_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _4__.
The ordered pair is _(6,1)_.

Question 10.
Point T
Answer: (0,5)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 6.1
The horizontal distance from the origin to point T is  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _0_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point P is __5_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _5__.
The ordered pair is _(0,5)_.

Plot and label the point in the coordinate plane above.

Question 11.
S(0, 3)
Answer: The Point can be labeled as (0,3)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 11
Start the Origin. Move Units right and  3 units up then plot and label the point.
The point can be labeled as Y,(0,3)

Question 12.
F(2, 5)
Answer: (2,5)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 12
Start the Origin. Move  Units right and  5 units up then plot and label the point.
The point can be labeled as Y,(2,5)

Question 13.
W(0, 0)
Answer:(0,0)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 13
Start the Origin. Move Units right and  0 units up then plot and label the point.
The point can be labeled as Y,(0,0)

Name the point for the ordered pair.

Question 14.
(5, 2)
Answer: D(5,2)
Explanation:
Start the Origin. Move Units right and  2 units up then label the point.
The point can be Named as D(5,2)

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 7.1

Question 15.
(8, 4)
Answer: E(8,4)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 7.1
Start the Origin. Move Units right and  4 units up then label the point.
The point can be Named as E(8,4)

Question 16.
(0, 3)
Answer: F(0,3)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 7.1
Start the Origin. Move Units right and  3 units up then label the point.
The point can be Named as D(5,2)

Question 17.
Reasoning
How are the locations of the points A(0, 4) and B(4, 0) different in a coordinate plane?
Answer: A(0,4) is in Y axis as x is 0 and y is 4. B(4,0) is in X axis as x is 4 and y is 0.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton buries a bone in a park at the location shown. How can he use a coordinate plane to describe its location?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 8

Answer:
He can use the x-coordinate and y-coordinate to describe the location.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
In a video game, you move an aircraft carrier and a tugboat away from your base. Use the directions to plot and label the locations of the aircraft carrier and the tugboat.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 9
• Aircraft carrier: Located 3 miles east and 4 miles north of your base.
• Tugboat: Located 8 miles east and twice as many miles north of your base as the aircraft carrier.
To find the location of the aircraft carrier, start at your base, which is at the origin.

Move __ units east, or right, and ___ units north, or up.
Plot and label the point as A(___, ___ ).
To find the location of the tugboat, start at your base, which is at the origin.
Move ___ units east, or right, and ___ × __ = ___ units north, or up.
Plot the label the point as T(__, ___).
Answer: Mov

Show and Grow

Question 19.
A guidebook describes how to get to various statues in Chicago, Illinois, from Willis Tower. Plot and label the location of each statue on the map.
Dubuffet’s Monument with Standing Beast: Walk 2 blocks east and 5 blocks north.
• Miró’s Sun, Moon, and One Star: Walk twice as many blocks east as you do to get to the Standing Beast, and 3 blocks north.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 10

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-10

Question 20.
DIG DEEPER!
Which statue is closer to Moon, and One Star, Cloud Gate or Flamingo? Explain.

Plot Points in a Coordinate Plane Homework & practice 12.1

Use the coordinate plane to write the ordered pair corresponding to the point.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 11

Question 1.
Point E
Answer: (5,7)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 11
The horizontal distance from the origin to point E is 5  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _5_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point E is __7_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _7__.
The ordered pair is _(5,7)_.

Question 2.
Point H
Answer: (0,7)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 11
The horizontal distance from the origin to point H is 0  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _0_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point H is __7_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _7__.
The ordered pair is _(0,7)_.

Question 3.
Point F
Answer: (3,3)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 11
The horizontal distance from the origin to point F is 3  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _3_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point F is __3 units.
So, the y-coordinate is _3__.
The ordered pair is _(3,3)_

Question 4.
Point J
Answer: (1,0)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 11
The horizontal distance from the origin to point J is 1  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _1_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point J is __0_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _0__.
The ordered pair is _(1,0)_.

Question 5.
Point G
Answer: (7,2)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 11
The horizontal distance from the origin to point G is 7  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _7_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point G is __2_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _2__.
The ordered pair is _(7,2)_.

Question 6.
Point K
Answer: (8,5)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 11
The horizontal distance from the origin to point K is 8  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _8_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point K is __5_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _5_.
The ordered pair is _(8,5)_.

Plot and label the point in the coordinate plane above.

Question 7.
Z(8, 0)
Answer: The Point can be labeled as (8,0)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 E 7
Start the Origin. Move  Units right and  0 units up then plot and label the point.
The point can be labeled as Y,(8,0)

Question 8.
B(5, 5)
Answer: The Point can be labeled as (5,5)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 E 8
Start the Origin. Move  Units right and  5 units up then plot and label the point.
The point can be labeled as Y,(5,5)

Question 9.
M(1, 2)
Answer: The Point can be labeled as (1,2)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 E 9
Start the Origin. Move  Units right and  2 units up then plot and label the point.
The point can be labeled as Y,(1,2)

Name the point for the ordered pair.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 12

Question 10.
(5, 4)
Answer: Q(5,2)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 12
Start the Origin. Move Units right and units up then label the point.
The point can be Named as Q(5,4)

Question 11.
(0, 8)
Answer: P(0,8)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 12
Start the Origin. Move Units right and  8units up then label the point.
The point can be Named as P(0,8)

Question 12.
(3, 1)
Answer: N(5,2)
Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 12
Start the Origin. Move Units right and  1 units up then label the point.
The point can be Named as N(3,1)

Question 13.
Open-Ended
Use the coordinate plane above. Point T is 3 units from point M. Name two possible ordered pairs for point T.
Answer: T(7,8), (7,0)&(0,8)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 Q13
The horizontal distance from the origin to point M is 4  units.
So, the x-coordinate is _4_.
The vertical distance from the origin to point M is _5_ units.
So, the y-coordinate is _5_.
The ordered pair is _(4,5)_.
Point T is 3 units from point M
The horizontal distance from  point M is 4  units to add 
So, the x-coordinate is _4+3=7_.
The vertical distance from the point M is 5  units to add 3 units.
So, the y-coordinate is _5+3=8_.
The ordered pair is _(7,8)_.
The two possible ordered pairs for point T is (0,7)& (8,0).

Question 14.
Writing
Explain why the order of the x- and y-coordinates is important when identifying or plotting points in a coordinate plane.
Answer: Locations on the coordinate plane are described as ordered pairs. An ordered pair tells you the location of a point by relating the point’s location along the x-axis (the first value of the ordered pair) and along the y-axis (the second value of the ordered pair).

Question 15.
To get from the school to the arcade, you walk 4 blocks east and 3 blocks north. To get from the school to the skate park, your friend walks 2 blocks east and twice as many blocks north as you. Plot and label the locations of the arcade and the skate park.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 13

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
Which building is closer to the bus station, the library or the post office? Explain.

Review & Refresh

Multiply.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 14
Answer: 5/3=1 2/3

Explanation: First Multiply with the whole number(1) with the denominator(4) then add numerator (4+1=5)
and denominator is same as original. i.e, 5/4
then same as next mixed fraction Multiply with the whole number(1) with the denominator(3) then add numerator (3+1=4)
and denominator is same as original. i.e, 4/3
Multiply 5/4*4/3=20/12
This fraction can be reduced by dividing both the numerator and denominator by the Greatest Common Factor of 20 and 12 using 4 i.e, 5/3=1 2/3

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 15

Answer: 7/2= 3 1/2

Explanation: First Multiply with the whole number(1) with the denominator(5) then add numerator (5+2=7)
and denominator is same as original. i.e, 7/5
then same as next mixed fraction Multiply with the whole number(2) with the denominator(2) then add numerator (4+1=5)
and denominator is same as original. i.e, 5/2
Multiply 7/5*5/2=35/10
This fraction can be reduced by dividing both the numerator and denominator by the Greatest Common Factor of 35 and 10 using 5 i.e, 7/2=3 1/2

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 16

Answer: 527/48=10 47/48

Explanation: First Multiply with the whole number(2) with the denominator(6) then add numerator (12+5=17)
and denominator is same as original. i.e, 17/6
then same as next mixed fraction Multiply with the whole number(3) with the denominator(8) then add numerator (24+7=31)
and denominator is same as original. i.e, 31/8
Multiply 17/6*31/8= 527/48.
therefore we can write it as 10 47/48.

Lesson 12.2 Relate Points in a Coordinate Plane

Plot and label the points in the coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 17
Draw a line segment to connect each pair of points.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 18
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 19
Plot and label more points that lie on the line segments you drew. What do you notice about the coordinates?
A and C
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 12-2 01
In A and C line segment we observed that the y- Coordinate of A and C is same.

B and G
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 12-2 0
In B and G line segment we observed that the X- Coordinate of B and G is same.
D and E
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 12-2 03
In D and E line segment we observed that the Y- Coordinate of D and E is same.
F and H
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 12-2 04
In F and H line segment we observed that the X- Coordinate of F and H is same.

Construct Arguments
How can you find the distance between each pair of points? Explain your reasoning.

Think and Grow: Relate Points in a Coordinate Plane

Key Idea
Points on a horizontal line have the same-coordinates. Points on a vertical line have the same x-coordinates.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 20
You can count units or use subtraction to find the distance between two points when they lie on the same horizontal line or vertical line.

Example
Find the distance between points G and H.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 21
One Way: Count units.
Step 1: Identify the locations of the points: Point G is located at (2, 3). Point H is located at (8, 3).
Step 2: Draw a line segment to connect the points.
Step 3: Count horizontal units: There are __ units between points G and H.
So, the distance between points G and H is ___.

Another Way: Use subtraction

Points G and H have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
8 – 2 = _6__
So, the distance between points G and H is 6___.

Show and Grow

Find the distance between the points in the coordinate plane above.

Question 1.
E and F
Answer: 4 Units
Explanation
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-21 12.2 -1A
Points E and F have the same X-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line. Subtract the Y-coordinates to find the distance.
5 – 1 = __4_
So, the distance between points E and F is _4__ units

Question 2.
P and Q
Answer: 3 Units
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-21 12.2 -1B
Points P and Q have the same Y-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line. Subtract the X-coordinates to find the distance.
3 – 0 = __3_
So, the distance between points P and Q is _3__ units.

Question 3.
S and T
Answer: 7 Units
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-21 12.2 -1C
Points S and T have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
7 – 0 = __7_
So, the distance between points S and T is _7_ Units.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the distance between the points in the coordinate plane.

Question 4.
E and F
Answer: 7 Units
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-21 12.2 -1 4
Points E and F have the same X-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line. Subtract the Y-coordinates to find the distance.
8 – 3 = __5
So, the distance between points E and F is _5_ units

Question 5.
J and G
Answer: 7 Units
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-21 12.2 -1 4 B
Points J and G have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
8 – 0 = __8_
So, the distance between points J and G is _8_ Units.

Question 6.
F and K
Answer: 7 Units
Explanation:

Points F and K have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
8 – 5 = __3_
So, the distance between points F and K is _3_ Units.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 23

Question 7.
Which is longer, \(\overline{J M}\) or \(\overline{H R}\)?

Find the distance between the points.

Question 8.
(1, 7) and (7, 7)
Answer: 6 Units
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-18 12-2 08A
Lets take point A is (1,7) and Point B is (7,7)
Points A and B have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
7 – 1 = __6_
So, the distance between points A and B is _6_ Units.

Question 9.
(0, 1) and (3, 1)
Answer: 3 Units
Explanation:

Lets take point C is (0,1) and Point D is (3,1)
Points C and D have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
3 – 0 = __3_
So, the distance between points C and D is _3_ Units.

Question 10.
(0, 0) and (6, 0)
Answer: 7 Units
Explanation:

Lets take point E is (0,0) and Point F is (6,0)
Points E and F have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
6 – 0 = __6_
So, the distance between points E and F is _6_ Units.

A line passes through the given points. Name two other points that lie on the line.

Question 11.
(0, 6) and (5, 6)
Answer: (1,6),(2,6),(3,6),(4,6)
Explanation:
Lets take point A is (0,6) and Point B is (5,6)
Points A and B have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line.
So the other points lie on the line are (1,6),(2,6),(3,6),(4,6)

Question 12.
(4, 2) and (4, 8)
Answer: (4,3),(4,4),(4,5),(4,6)
Explanation:
Lets take point C is (4,2) and Point D is (4,8)
Points C and D have the same X-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line.
So the other points lie on the line are (4,3),(4,4),(4,5),(4,6) etc

Question 13.
(3, 3) and (3, 6)
Answer: (3,4),(3,5)
Explanation:
Lets take point E is (3,3) and Point F is (3,6)
Points E and F have the same X-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line.
So the other points lie on the line are (3,4),(3,5)

Question 14.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton plots the points (2, 7) and (6, 7) and connects them with a line segment. Descartes says that (10, 7) also lies on the line segment. Is he correct? Explain.
Answer: Yes
Explanation:
Points on a Vertical line have the same-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
Which pair of points does not lie on a line that is parallel to x-axis? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 23.1
Answer:  (1,2) and (1,6)
Explanation:
Points on a Vertical line have the same-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Except (1,2) and (1,6) , these two
Points on a horizontal line have the same-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
An archaeologist uses rope to section off a rectangular dig site. How many meters of rope does the archaeologist use?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 24
To find how many meters of rope the archaeologist uses, find the perimeter of the rectangular dig site.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 25
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 26
Use a formula to find the perimeter of the site.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 27
So, the archaeologist uses __ meters of rope.

Show and Grow

Question 16.
The owner of an animal shelter uses fencing to create a rectangular dog pen. How many yards of fencing does the owner use?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 28
Answer:
yards of fencing the owner use
To find how many yards of fencing the owner use, to find the perimeter of the rectangular dog pen.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
You run 5 laps around the edges of the volleyball court. How far do you run in feet? in yards?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 29

Answer:
10 × 6 = 60 feet
Convert from foot to yards
1 feet = 0.33 yards
60 feet = 20 yards

Relate Points in a Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 12.2

Find the distance between the points in the coordinate plane.

Question 1.
P and M
Answer: 6 Units
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-21 12.2 -P1 A
Points P and M have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
7 – 1 = __6_
So, the distance between points P and M is _6_ Units.

Question 2.
B and Z
Answer: 3 Units
Explanation:

Points B and Z have the same X-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line. Subtract the Y-coordinates to find the distance.
3 – 0 = _0 
So, the distance between points B and Z is _0_ units

Question 3.
K and T
Answer: 5 Units
Explanation:

Points K and T have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
6 – 1 = __5_
So, the distance between points K and T is _5_ Units.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 30

Question 4.
Which is longer, \(\overline{C D}\) or \(\overline{K P}\)?

Answer: \(\overline{C D}\) longer than \(\overline{K P}\)

Find the distance between the points.

Question 5.
(1, 5) and (6, 5)
Answer: 5 Units
Explanation:

Lets take point A is (1,5) and Point B is (6,5)
Points A and B have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line. Subtract the x-coordinates to find the distance.
6 – 1 = _5_
So, the distance between points A and B is _5_ Units.

Question 6.
(3, 4) and (3, 6)
Answer: 2 Units
Explanation:

Lets take point C is (3,4) and Point D is (3,6)
Points C and D have the same X-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line. Subtract the Y-coordinates to find the distance.
6 – 4 = _2 
So, the distance between points C and D is _2_ Units.

Question 7.
(0, 2) and (0, 9)
Answer: 7 Units
Explanation:

Lets take point E is (0,2) and Point F is (0,9)
Points E and F have the same X-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line. Subtract the Y-coordinates to find the distance.
9 – 2 = _7 
So, the distance between points E and F is _7_ Units.

A line passes through the given points. Name two other points that lie on the line.

Question 8.
(6, 0) and (6, 7)
Answer: (6,1),(6,2),6,3)
Explanation:
Lets take point A is (6,0) and Point B is (6,7)
Points A and B have the same X-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line.
So the other points lie on the line are (6,1),(6,2),(6,3)

Question 9.
(5, 3) and (1, 3)
Answer: (2,3),(3,3)(4,3)
Explanation:
Lets take point C is (5,3) and Point D is (1,3)
Points C and D have the same y-coordinates. They lie on a horizontal line.
So the other points lie on the line are (2,3),(3,3)(4,3)

Question 10.
(2, 2) and (2, 9)
Answer: (2,3),(2,4),(2,5)
Explanation:
Lets take point E is (2,2) and Point F is (2,9)
Points E and F have the same X-coordinates. They lie on a Vertical line.
So the other points lie on the line are (2,3),(2,4),(2,5)

Question 11.
Structure
Name four different points that are 3 units away from (5, 4).

Answer:
A distance of 5 units from the origin represents the hypotenuse of a right triangle with sides 3- 4 – 5
If the x-coordinate is 4 then the y-coordinate is | 3 | = ± 3
the coordinates are (4, 3 ) and (4, – 3 )

Question 12.
Number Sense
Which point is farther from (3, 4)? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 31

Answer: K(9, 4)

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
A farmer builds a coop for his chickens. He uses poultry netting to enclose the coop. How many feet of netting does he use?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 32

Answer: 6 feet

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
A giant chessboard is painted on the ground in a park. How many square yards of space does the chessboard occupy?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 33

Answer: 81 yards

Review & Refresh

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.

Question 15.
23.6 ÷ 4 = ___

Answer:
Divide 23.6 by 4
We get
23.6/4 = 5.9
Thus the quotient is 5.9

Question 16.
36.9 ÷ 3 = ___

Answer:
Divide the two numbers 36.9 and 3.
36.9 ÷ 3 = 12.3

Question 17.
114.87 ÷ 7 = ___

Answer:
Divide the two numbers 114.87 and 7
114.87 ÷ 7 = 16.41

Lesson 12.3 Draw polygons in a Coordinate Plane

Explore and Grow

Plot and label three points in which two of the ordered pairs have the same x-coordinates and two of the ordered pairs have the same y-coordinates.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 34
The points represent the vertices of a polygon. Describe the polygon.

Structure
Explain how you can plot another point above to form a rectangle.

Think and Grow: Draw Polygons in a Coordinate Plane

Key Idea
You can use ordered pairs to represent vertices of polygons. To draw a polygon in a coordinate plane, plot and connect the vertices.
Example
The vertices of a polygon are A (2, 2), B(3, 5), C(6, 6), and D(6, 2). Draw the polygon in a coordinate plane. Then identify it.
Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 35
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 352

Show and Grow

Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane. Then identify it.

Question 1.
J(0, 8), K(4, 7), L(5, 0)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 36
Answer: Triangle
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-6 12.3-1A
Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon J,K,L is a Triangle.

Question 2.
P(1, 4), Q(2, 7), R(6, 7), S(7, 4), T(4, 1)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 37
Answer: Pentagon.
Explanation:

Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon P,Q,R,S,T is a Pentagon.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane. Then identify it.

Question 3.
C(1, 6), D(4, 6), E(4, 1), F(1, 1)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 37.1
Answer: Rectangle.
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-6 12.3-1D
Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon C,D,E,F is a Rectangle.

Question 4.
J(2, 2), K(2, 4), L(4, 6), M(6, 4), N(6, 2), P(4, 1)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 38
Answer: Hexagon.
Explanation:

Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon J,K,L,M,N,P is a Hexagon. 

Identify the polygon with the given vertices.

Question 5.
A(2, 6), B(6, 2), C(3, 2)
Answer: Triangle.
Explanation:

Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon A ,B , C is a  Tringle.

Question 6.
G(0, 3), H(6, 3), I(4, 1), J(2, 1)
Answer: Isosceles Trapezoid
Explanation:

Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon G,H,I,J is a Isosceles Trapezoid .

Question 7.
P(1, 1), Q(1, 6), R(6, 6), S(6, 1)
Answer: Square
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-6 12.3- 7
Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon P, Q ,R, S is a Rectangle.

Question 8.
X(0, 0), Y(0, 7), Z(2, 0)
Answer: Triangle.
Explanation:

Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon X ,Y, Z is a Triangle. 

Plot (6, 3), (6, 8), and (9, 3) in a coordinate plane. Plot another point to form the given quadrilateral. Name the point.

Question 9.
rectangle
Answer:
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-6 12.3-9

Question 10.
trapezoid
Answer:
Explanation:

Question 11.
Open-Ended
Write four ordered pairs that represent the vertices of a square

Answer:
(2, 2), (4, 2), (2, 4), (4, 4)

Question 12.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend draws the polygon shown. She names the polygon. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 39

Answer:
No your friend is incorrect because the given figure has 4 sides so it is a quadrilateral not a polygon.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You and a friend use computer software to create a symmetric company logo using a coordinate plane. Your friend completes one half of the logo as shown. Draw the other half. Then list the vertices of the logo.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 40
Step 1: Plot the vertices for the other half of the logo on the opposite side of the line of symmetry.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 41

Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-40

Show and Grow

Draw the other half of the symmetric logo. Then list its vertices.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 42

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-42

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 43

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-43

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
One half of the design for a symmetric flower garden is shown in the coordinate plane. The line of symmetry is represented by the walkway. Draw the other half of the design for the flower garden. Then list its vertices.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 44

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-44

Draw polygons in a Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 12.3

Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane. Then identify it.

Question 1.
A(2, 3), B(2, 6), C(5, 6), D(5, 3)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 45
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-6 12.3-1 A

Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon A, B, C, D is a Trapezoid..

Question 2.
J(3, 2), K(3, 5), L(6, 5)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 46
Answer: Triangle
Explanation:

Step 1: Plot and label the vertices.
Step 2: Draw line segments to connect the points. Be sure to connect the points in order to draw the polygon.
Polygon J, K, L is a Triangle.

Identify the polygon with the given vertices.

Question 3.
M(2, 6), N(4, 4), P(4, 0), Q(2, 2)
Answer:
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-6 12.3-1 A3

Question 4.
A(1, 2), B(1, 6), C(4, 6), D(6, 4), E(4, 2)
Answer:
Explanation:

Question 5.
P(4, 1), Q(0, 1), R(1, 4), S(5, 5)
Answer:
Explanation:

Question 6.
E(1, 2), F(1, 3), G(6, 3), H(6, 2)

Plot (1, 2), (4, 2), and (3, 4) in a coordinate plane. Plot another point to form the given quadrilateral. Name the point.

Question 7.
trapezoid

Question 8.
parallelogram

Question 9.
Open-Ended
Write the coordinates of the vertices of a rectangle that has a perimeter of 12 units and an area of 5 square units.

Question 10.
Reasoning
Five ordered pairs represent the vertices of a polygon. Will the polygon always be a pentagon?

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Draw the other half of the symmetric logo. Then list its vertices.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 47

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You complete one fourth of an image with graphic design software. The computer generates the rest of the image with the two lines of symmetry. Draw the rest of the image.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 48

Review & Refresh

Estimate the sum or difference.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 49
Answer: 1/4

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 50

Answer:
The fractions have, unlike denominators. First, find the Least Common Denominator and rewrite the fractions with the common denominator.
77/80

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 51

Answer:
The fractions have, unlike denominators. First, find the Least Common Denominator and rewrite the fractions with the common denominator.
= 3/40

Lesson 12.4 Graph Data

Explore and Grow

The table shows the amount of snow that falls each day for 7 days. Show how you can use ordered pairs in the coordinate plane to represent this information. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 52
What conclusions can you make from your data display?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 53
Answer:(1,2), (2,4), (3,6),(4,6),(,5,8),(6,10),(7,14)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-59 12.4.00 A
Lets take A(1,2), B(2,4), C(3,6), D(4,6), E(,5,8), F(6,10), G(7,14)
The horizontal distance from the origin to points A.B.C.D.E.F.G.H  are 1,2,3,4,5,6,7_ units respectively. So, the x-coordinates are 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 .
The vertical distance from the origin to points  A.B.C.D.E.F.G.H are 2,4,6,6,8,10,14 _ units. So, the y-coordinate are __2,4,6,6,8,10,14_. The ordered pair is _A(1,2), B(2,4), C(3,6), D(4,6), E(,5,8), F(6,10), G(7,14)_.
Reasoning
On Day 8, 1 inch of snow falls. How can you represent this information in the coordinate plane?
https://ccssmathanswers.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-59-12.4.00-A1-1.png

Answer: (8,16)
Explanation:
Start the Origin. Move  Units right and  16 units up. label the point.
The point can be labeled as H,(8,16).

Think and Grow: Graph Data

Key Idea
Data are values collected from observations or measurements. You can use a coordinate plane to graph and interpret two categories of related data.
Example
The table shows how many gold bars you collect at each level of a video game. Graph the data in a coordinate plane. In how many levels do you collect more than 30 gold bars?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 54
Step 1: Write the ordered pairs from the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 55
Step 2: For each axis, choose appropriate numbers to represent the data in the table.
Step 3: Write a title for the graph and label each axis.
Step 4: Plot a point for each ordered pair.
Three points are above the grid line that represents 30 bars. So, you collect more than 30 gold bars in __ levels.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
The table shows the water levels of a portion of a river during a flood. Graph the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 57
What does the point (5, 7) represent?
Answer: In 5 hours time span 7 feet water level during flood.
Explanation:
https://ccssmathanswers.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-59-12.4.1A.png

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
The table shows how many cars a salesman sells in each of 6 months. Graph the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 58
What does the point (1, 7) represent?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 59
What is the difference of the greatest number of cars sold and the least number of cars sold? Explain.

Use the graph.
Answer: in month of span salesman sells 7 cars.
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-59 12.4.2A

Question 3.
The graph shows how many receiving yards a football player has in each of seven games. How many receiving yards does he have in Game 3?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 60
How many times as many receiving yards does he have in Game 4 as in Game 2?
In how many games does he have more than 40 receiving yards?
Answer:
Explanation:
In each game receiving yards are lets label it as A,B,C,D,E,F,G.
A(1,30), B(2,20), C(3,50), D(4,80), E(5,60), F(6,40), G(7,100).
receiving yards a football player has in each of game 30,20,50,80,60,40,100.
In Game 3Receiving yards are 50
So, the distance between points Game 4 and game 2 is 80-60=60
60 times as many receiving yards does he have in Game 4 as in Game 2.
There are 4 games more than 40 receiving yards.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
The player has 75 receiving yards in Game 8. The player has \(\frac{1}{5}\) of this number of receiving yards in Game 9. Graph the data in the coordinate plane above.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The table shows the ages of eight students and the time they spend on the Internet for 1 week. Graph the data. Of the students who spend more than 15 hours on the Internet, how many are older than 10?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 61
Step 1: Write the ordered pairs from the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 62
Step 2: For each axis, choose appropriate numbers to represent the data in the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 63
Step 3: Write a title for the graph and label each axis.
Step 4: Plot a point for each ordered pair.
Five points are above the grid line that represents points represents 15 hours. Of those, ___ points represents students older than 10.
So, __ students older than 10 spend more than 15 hours on the Internet.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
The table show much five students sleep the night before a quiz and their quiz scores. Graph the data. Of the students who sleep more than 7 hours, how many score higher than 8 points?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 64
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 65
Answer:
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-59 12.4.5A
The students who sleep more than 7 hours are 3(B,C,D)
3 members score higher than 8 points

Graph Data Homework & Practice 12.4

Question 1.
The table shows how many students are in a choir club in each of 6 years. Graph the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 66
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 67
What does the point (2, 20) represent?

What is the difference of the greatest number of students and least number of students? Explain.
Answer: In 2 years 20 students are joined in a choir club
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-5th-Grade-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-67 12.4.Paractice1 A
What is the difference of the greatest number of students and least number of students
Grates number of students joined in the year of 6th that is 35 members
least number of students joined in the year of 1st that is 15 members
The difference of the greatest number(6,65) of students and least number of students(1,15) is 35-15=20

Use the graph.

Question 2.
The graph shows how many students earn an A on each of seven tests. How many students earn an A on Test 4?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 68
How many times as many students earn an A on Test 6 as on Test 2?
On how many tests do fewer than 20 students earn an A? more than 20 students?

Answer: students earn an A on Test 4 is 18 students
students earn an A on Test 6 as on Test 2 is 10
5 students  are fewer than 20students earn an A
1 test only More than 20 students earn A.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Twenty-five students take Test 1. How many students do not earn an A on the test?
Answer:
25 – 12 = 13

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
The table shows the ages of five students and how many baby teeth each of them has lost. Graph the data. Of the students who are older than 10 years, how many lost more than 18 baby teeth?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 69
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 70
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-5th-Grade-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-67 12.4.Paractice4 AAA
Baby teeth lost from each team A,B ,C,D.E respectively 18,20,18,14,20
B,C,E are older than 10 years
2 (B&E) students are lost more than 18 baby teeth.

Review & Refresh

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.

Question 5.
5 ÷ 0.8 = ___

Answer:
Divide two numbers 5 and 0.8
5 ÷ 0.8 = 6.25

Question 6.
91.2 ÷ 15 = __

Answer:
Divide two numbers 91.2 and 15
91.2 ÷ 15 = 6.08

Question 7.
14.4 ÷ 3.2 = ___

Answer:
Divide two numbers 14.4 and 3.2
14.4 ÷ 3.2 = 4.5

Lesson 12.5 Make and Interpret Line Graphs

Explore and Grow

The table shows the heights of a bamboo plant over several days. Show how you can use a coordinate plane to represent this information. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 71
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 72
How can you use your graph to estimate the height of the plant on Day 4? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 73

Reasoning
What could the height of the bamboo plant be on Day 10? Explain your reasoning.

Answer 42 on day 10

Think and Grow: Make and Interpret Line Graphs

Key Idea
A line graph is a graph that uses line segments to show how data values change over time.
Example
The table shows the weights of a dog over 6 months. Make a line graph of the data. Between which two months of age does the dog gain the most weight?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 74
Step 1: Write the ordered pairs from the table.
(1, 10), (2, 20), (3, 30), (4, 50), (5, 55), (6, 58)
Step 2: For each axis, choose appropriate numbers to represent the data in the table.
Step 3: Write a title for the graph and label each axis.
Step 4: Plot a point for each ordered pair. Then connect the points with line segments.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 75
The greatest difference in weights occurs between the points (___, ___ ) and (___, ___ ).
So, the dog gains the most weight between ___ and ___ months of age.
Answer: 3&4 months age
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-5th-Grade-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-75 12.5 KA
The greatest difference in weights occurs between the points (_3__, __30_ ) and (__4_, __50_ ).
So, the dog gains the most weight between __3_ and _4__ months of age.

Show and Grow

Use the graph above.

Question 1.
Between which two months of age does the dog gain the least amount of weight? Explain.
Answer: 55 & 58
Explanation:
The Least difference in weights occurs between the points (5__, __55_ ) and (__6_,  _58_ ).
So, the dog gains the least amount of weight __5 and _6_ months of age.

Question 2.
How much do you think the dog weighs when it is 7 months of age? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: 60

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the graph.

Question 3.
The table shows the height of a seedling over 7 days. Make a line graph of the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 76
Between which two days did the seedling grow the most? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 77
How tall do you think the seedling will be after 8 days? Explain.
Answer: 3& 4 days,
Explanation
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-5th-Grade-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-75 12.5-3 A
The greatest difference in seedling grow occurs between the points (_3__, __8_ ) and (__4_, _18_ ).
So, the Seeding grow between __3_ and _4__ days.
After 8 days Seeding may decrease.

Question 4.
Reasoning
Interpret the point (0, 0) in the context of the situation.

Use the graph.

Question 5.
The graph shows the total numbers of likes a social media page has over 8 days. How many likes does the page have after 4 days?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 78
What is the difference of likes on Day 7 and Day 3?
Answer: After 4 days Social media likes are 225.
Difference between 7th day Social media likes and 3rd day Social media likes are=175.
Explanation:
Given that 8th day Social media likes are 300
4th day Social media likes are 75
Difference between 8th day Social media likes and 4th day Social media likes =300-75=225
After 4 days Social media likes are 225.
Given that 7th day Social media likes are 225
3rd day Social media likes are 50
Difference between 7th day Social media likes and 3rd day Social media likes are =225-50=175.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You track the likes between Days 7 and 8 by each hour. Does the total number of likes at every hour fall between 225 and 300? Explain.
Answer: Yes:
Explanation:
The graph shows between 7th and 8th day the social media likes are increased 225 to 300.
So, the total number of likes at every hour fall between 225 and 300.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The table shows your heart rate during an exercise routine. Make a line graph of the data. Use the graph to estimate your heart rate after exercising for 15 minutes.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 80
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 81
Step 1: Write the ordered pairs from the table.
(0, 80), (10, 110), (20, 140), (30, 148), (35, 135)
Step 2: For each axis, choose appropriate numbers to represent the data in the table. You can show a break in the vertical axis between 0 and 80 because there are no data values between 0 and 80.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 81.1
Step 3: Write a title for the graph and label each axis.
Step 4: Plot a point for each ordered pair. Then connect the points with line segments. Use the line segment that connects (10, 110) and (20, 140) to estimate your heart rate after exercising for 15 minutes.
After exercising for 15 minutes, your heart rate is about __ beats per minute.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
The table shows how many views a video has over several hours. Make a line graph of the data. Use the graph to estimate the total number of views the video has after 2 hours.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 82
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 83

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-5th-Grade-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-83

Make and Interpret Line Graphs Homework & Practice 12.5

Example
The table shows the temperatures of a city over several hours during a snowstorm. Make a line graph of the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 84
Between which two hours does the temperature decrease the most? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 85
The greatest difference in temperatures occurs between the points (2, 28) and (3, 24). So, the temperature decreases the most between Hours 2 and 3.
Estimate the temperature at 4 hours and 30 minutes.
23 degrees Fahrenheit

Question 1.
The table shows the total number of pieces of beach glass you find during an hour at the beach. Make a line graph of the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 86
Between which two times did you find the most pieces of beach glass? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 87
Estimate how many pieces you had after 25 minutes.

Use the graph.

Question 2.
The graph shows the total amounts of money your class raises over 8 days. How much money does your class raise after 6 days?
How much money does your class raise between Days 2 and 7?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 88

Answer:
120 – 30 = 90

Question 3.
Logic
Your friend says that your class raises $115 after 9 days. Explain why your friend’s statement does not make sense.

Answer Your friend’s statement makes sense.

Use the graph.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
The table shows a bald eagle’s heights above the ground after several seconds. Make a line graph of the data. Use the graph to estimate the eagle’s height above the ground after 6 seconds.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 89
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 90

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
The eagle flies past her nest, which is 120 feet above the ground. After how many seconds do you think the eagle flies past her nest? Explain.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 91

Answer: 8

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 92

Answer: 12

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 93

Answer: 50

Lesson 12.6 Numerical Paterns

Explore and Grow

Newton saves $10 each month. Descartes saves $30 each month. Complete each table. What patterns do you notice?
Newton:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 94

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-94
Descartes:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 95

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-95

Repeated Reasoning
How much will Newton have saved when Descartes has saved $300? Explain your reasoning.

Answer: 10 months

Think and Grow: Numerical Paterns

Example
You use 2 pounds of beef to make a batch of empanadas. Each batch makes eight servings. Complete the rule that relates the number of servings to the number of pounds of beef.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 96
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 97
Step 1: Create each pattern and complete the table.
Use the rule “Add __” to find the number of pounds of beef.
0, 2, 4, ___, ___, ___
Use the rule “Add __” to find the number of servings.
0, 8, 16, ___, ___, ___
Step 2: Write ordered pairs that relate the number of servings to the number of pounds of beef.
(0, 0), (8, 2), (16, 4), ___, ___, ___
Step 3: Write a rule. As you make each batch, the number of pounds of beef is always __ as much as the number of servings.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 97.1
So, divide the number of servings by __ to find the number of pounds of beef.

Answer:
Step 1: Create each pattern and complete the table.
Use the rule “Add __” to find the number of pounds of beef.
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Use the rule “Add __” to find the number of servings.
0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40
Step 2: Write ordered pairs that relate the number of servings to the number of pounds of beef.
(0, 0), (8, 2), (16, 4), (24, 6), (32, 8), (40, 10)
Step 3: Write a rule. As you make each batch, the number of pounds of beef is always __ as much as the number of servings.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use the given rules to complete the table. Then complete the rule that relates the number of hours worked to the amount earned.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 98
Multiply the number of hours worked by __ to find the amount earned.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-98 (1)
Multiply the number of hours worked by 8 to find the amount earned.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the given rules to complete the table. Then complete the rule.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 99
Divide the number of cups of water __ by to find the number of cups of lemon juice.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-99
Divide the number of cups of water 7 by to find the number of cups of lemon juice.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 100
Multiply the number of push-ups by __ to find the number of sit-ups.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-100
Multiply the number of push-ups by 2 to find the number of sit-ups.

Question 4.
Complete the rule. Then use the rule to complete the table.
Multiply the amount of money that Newton saves by __ to find the amount of money that Descartes saves.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 101

Answer:
Multiply the amount of money that Newton saves by 3 to find the amount of money that Descartes saves.

Question 5.
Structure
The ordered pairs (3, 2), (6, 4), and (9, 6) relate the number of avocados to the number of plum tomatoes in a guacamole recipe. Use the relationship to complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 102

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-102

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
For each $1 bill you pay, you get 4 tokens and can play 2 games. You have 60 tokens. How many games can you play?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 103
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Use a rule to create each pattern. Use a table to organize the information.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 104
Write ordered pairs that relate the number of tokens to the number of games you can play.
(4, 2), ___, ___, ___
Write a rule. The number of games you can play is always ___ as much as the number of tokens.
So, divide the number of tokens by __ to find the number of games you can play.
60 ÷ __ = ___
So, you can play games.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-104
(4, 2), (8,2), (12,6), (16,8)
Write a rule. The number of games you can play is always half as much as the number of tokens.
So, divide the number of tokens by 2 to find the number of games you can play.
60 ÷ 2= 30
So, you can play 30 games.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
Each day, you read 33 pages and your friend reads 11 pages. How many pages does your friend read when you read 396 pages?

Answer: 132 pages

Explanation:
Given that,
Each day, you read 33 pages and your friend reads 11 pages.
33/11 = 3
396/3 = 132
Thus your friend read 132 pages when you read 396 pages.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Each pack of trading cards has 1 hero card, 5 combination cards, and 30 action cards. You buy packs of trading cards and get 35 combination cards. How many hero cards and action cards do you get?

Answer: 7 hero cards

Numerical Paterns Homework & Practice 12.6

Question 1.
Use the given rules to complete the table. Then complete the rule.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 105
Multiply the number of candles sold by __ to find the amount of money raised.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-105
Multiply the number of candles sold by 8 to find the amount of money raised.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 106
Multiply the number of servings by __ to find the number of pretzels.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-106
Multiply the number of servings by 20 to find the number of pretzels.

Question 3.
Complete the rule. Then use the rule to complete the table.
Divide the number of contestants by __ to find the number of winners.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 107

Answer:
Divide the number of contestants by 4 to find the number of winners.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw Figure 4. How many red squares are in Figure 8? How many yellow squares are in Figure 8? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 108

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-108

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Each person at a baseball game receives 3 raffle tickets and a $2 certificate for the team store. A group of people receives 39 raffle tickets. How much money in certificates does the group receive?

Answer:
Given,
Each person at a baseball game receives 3 raffle tickets and a $2 certificate for the team store. A group of people receives 39 raffle tickets.
39 × 2 = $78

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
Write a rule that relates the number of months to the cost of a gym membership. What is the cost of a 1-year membership?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 109

Answer:
Given,
1 month $15
12 months = 15 × 12
= $180

Review & Refresh

Convert the mass.

Question 7.
7 g = __ mg

Answer:

Question 8.
92 g = ___ kg

Answer:
convert from grams to kgs.
92 grams = 0.92 kg

Convert the capacity

Question 9.
800 mL = __ L

Answer:
Convert from ml to l
1 ml = 0.001
800 ml = 0.8 liters

Question 10.
3 L = __ mL

Answer:
Convert from liters to ml
1 liter = 1000 ml
3 liter = 3 × 1000 ml = 3000 ml

Lesson 12.7 Graph and Analyze Relationships

Explore and Grow

Complete each table and graph the data in the coordinate plane. What do you notice about the points?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 110
Structure
How can you use the graphs to find the number of feet in 7 yards and the number of pints in 6 gallons? Explain your reasoning.

Think and Grow: Graph and Analyze Relationships

Example
For each glass of iced tea Newton makes, he uses 2 spoonfuls of iced-tea mix and 10 fluid ounces of water. Newton uses 16 spoonfuls of iced-tea mix. How many fluid ounces of water does he use?
Step 1: Find the first several numbers in the numerical patterns for the amounts of iced-tea mix and water.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 112
Step 2: Write the ordered pairs from the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 113
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 114
Step 3: Plot the ordered pairs. Connect the points with line segments.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 115
Because the ordered pairs follow a pattern, you can extend the line to the point where the x-coordinateis 16.
When the x-coordinate is 16, the y-coordinate is ___
So, Newton uses __ fluid ounces of water.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-112
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 113
(2, 10), (4, 20), (6, 30), (8, 40), (10, 50), (12, 60), (14, 70), (16, 80)
Because the ordered pairs follow a pattern, you can extend the line to the point where the x-coordinate is 16.
When the x-coordinate is 16, the y-coordinate is 80
So, Newton uses 80 fluid ounces of water.

Show and Use

Question 1.
Use the graph above. Newton uses 18 spoonfuls of iced-tea mix. How many fluid ounces of water does he use? Explain your reasoning

Answer: 100
When the x-coordinate is 18, the y-coordinate is 100
So, Newton uses 100 fluid ounces of water.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the given information to complete the table. Describe the relationship between the two numerical patterns and plot the points.

Question 2.
A slime recipes calls for 120 milliliters of vegetable oil and 30 grams of cornstarch. You measure 600 milliliters of vegetable oil. How many grams of cornstarch do you need?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 116
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 117

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-116
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-117

Question 3.
A sponsor donates $5 for every 4 laps walked around a track. How much money does the sponsor donate for 28 laps walked?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 118
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 119

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-118
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-119

Question 4.
Writing
How can you use the graph to determine the number of cups in 4 gallons?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 120

Answer: (4, 64)

Question 5.
Number Sense
What does the ordered pair (0, 0) represent in the graph?

Answer: Origin

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
Use the graph to determine the number of cups in 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) gallons.

Answer: 40 cups

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Some friends plan to go to a trampoline park for 2 hours. They want to go to the park that costs less money. Which park should they choose? What is the cost for each person?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 121
Graph the relationship between time and cost at both parks. Park A has been done for you.
Step 1: Make a table for time and cost at Park B.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 122
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 123
Step 2: Write the ordered pairs from the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 124
Step 3: Plot the ordered pairs. Connect the points with line segments.

Use the graph to compare the costs for 2 hours at the parks.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 125
So, the group of friends should choose Trampoline Park __
The cost for each person is $ ___.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-122
So, the group of friends should choose Trampoline Park A.
The cost for each person is $ 15.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
On your map, every centimeter represents 20 kilometers. On your friend’s map, every 2 centimeters represents 50 kilometers. On whose map does 6 centimeters represent a greater distance? How much greater? Explain.
Answer:
Given that,
On your map, every centimeter represents 20 kilometers.
On your friend’s map, every 2 centimeters represents 50 kilometers.
4 cm = 100 kilometers
6 cm = 150 kilometers

Graph and Analyze Relationships Homework & Practice 12.7

Question 1.
Use the graph above. You plan to park your car for 140 minutes. How much money do you put into the meter?

Answer: $35 for 140 minutes

Question 2.
A boxer exercises by jumping rope. He completes 150 repetitions every minute. He completes 750 repetitions. For how many minutes does he jump rope?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 126

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-126

Question 3.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says a baker makes 60 plain bagels in 5 hours. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 127
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 128

Answer: Yes, your friend is correct

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Some friends plan to rent bicycles for 6 hours. They want to choose the option that costs less money. Which option should they choose? What is the cost for each person?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 129
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 129.1

Answer: They should choose option B.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-129.1

Review & Refresh

Convert the length.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 130

Answer:
Convert from feet to inches
3.3 feet = 39.6 inches

Question 6.
6 mi = __ yd

Answer:
Convert from miles to yards
1 mile = 1760 yards
6 miles = 10560 yards

Patterns in the Coordinate Plane Performance Task 12

You use a series of commands on an app to create an animation of Descartes dancing and jumping.

Question 1.
a. Complete the animation commands to moveDescartes. Plot the points to show his movement.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 131
b. Connect the points. Describe the animation in your own words.

Question 2.
You play the animation commands to make Descartes dance.
a. It takes 4 seconds for Descartes to move through the animation commands 1 time. Complete the table and graph the data in the coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 132
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 133
b. You want Descartes to dance for an exact number of seconds. How can you find the number of times to play the animation commands? Use an example to justify your reasoning.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-132
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-133

Patterns in the Coordinate Plane Treasure Hunt

Directions:

  1. Each player arranges four Treasure Hunt Gold Bars on the My Treasure coordinate plane, horizontally or vertically.
  2. On your turn, name an ordered pair in the coordinate plane. If your partner says you found part of a gold bar, then plot the ordered pair in red. Otherwise, plot the ordered pair in black. Your turn is over.
  3. On your partner’s turn, if your partner finds part of a gold bar, then plot a red on the ordered X pair in the coordinate plane. Tell your partner when all parts of a gold bar have been found.
  4. The first player to find all parts of the partner’s gold bars wins!

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 134

Patterns in the Coordinate Plane Chapter Practice 12

12.1 Plot Points in a Coordinate Plane

Use the coordinate plane to write the ordered pair corresponding to the point.

Question 1.
Point A

Answer: The ordered pair of Point A is (4, 6)

Question 2.
Point D

Answer: The ordered pair of Point B is (0, 0)

Question 3.
Point B

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 135

Answer: The ordered pair of Point B is (2, 3)

Question 4.
Point E

Answer: The ordered pair of Point E is (2, 0)

Question 5.
Point C

Answer: The ordered pair of Point C is (8, 3)

Question 6.
Point F

Answer: The ordered pair of Point F is (8, 7)

Plot and label the point in the coordinate plane above.

Question 7.
N(3, 0)

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12

Question 8.
P(1, 5)

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12 img_2

Question 9.
R(2, 1)

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12 img_3

Name the point for the ordered pair.

Question 10.
(0, 8)

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 136

Answer: G is the point for the ordered pair (0, 8)

Question 11.
(5, 6)

Answer: J is the point for the ordered pair (5, 6)

Question 12.
(4, 2)

Answer: H is the point for the ordered pair (4, 2)

Question 13.
Open-Ended
Use the coordinate plane above. Point S is 2 units from point J. Name two possible ordered pairs for point S.

Answer: The two possible ordered pairs for point S are (6, 2) or (4, 4)

12.2 Relate Points in a Cooordinate Plane

Find the distance between the points in the coordinate grid.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 136.1

Question 14.
A and B

Answer:
The distance between the two points A and B is 2 units.

Question 15.
E and F

Answer: The distance between the two points E and F is 3 units.

Question 16.
C and D

Answer: The distance between the two points C and D is 7 units.

Question 17.
Which is longer, \(\overline{A C}\) or \(\overline{G E}\) ?

Answer: \(\overline{A C}\) is longer than \(\overline{G E}\).

Find the distance between the points.

Question 18.
(0, 0) and (0, 4)

Answer:
The formula for distance between the points is √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
= √(0 – 0)² + (4 – 0)²
= √16
= 4
Thus the distance between the points is 4.

Question 19.
(3, 2) and (3, 9)

Answer:
The formula for distance between the points is √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
= √(3 – 3)² + (9 – 2)²
= √49
= 7
Thus the distance between the points is 7.

Question 20.
(0, 5) and (7, 5)

Answer:
The formula for distance between the points is √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
= √(7 – 0)² + (5 – 5)²
= √49
= 7
Thus the distance between the points is 7.

A line passes through the given points. Name two other points that lie on the line.

Question 21.
(0, 1) and (0, 7)

Answer: (0, 5) and (0, 6) these two points lie on the same line.

Question 22.
(5, 2) and (5, 8)

Answer: (5, 3) and (5, 7) these two points lie on the same line.

Question 23.
(6, 3) and (0, 3)

Answer: (4, 3) and (3, 3) these two points lie on the same line.

12.3 Draw Polygons in a Coordinate Plane

Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane. Then identify it.

Question 24.
A(2, 5), B(5, 5), C(5, 0), D(2, 0)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 137

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-137

Question 25.
D(1, 3), E(1, 5), F(3, 6), G(5, 5), H(5, 3), J(3, 2)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 138

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-137

12.4 Graph Data

Question 26.
The table shows how many home runs your team scores in each of six kickball games. Graph the data.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 139
What does the point (6, 3) represent? What is the difference of the greatest number of home runs and the least number of home runs? Explain.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-139
(2, 1) is the least number of home runs.

12.5 Make an Interpret Line Graphs

Question 27.
The table shows the total numbers of coupon books you sell over 7 days. Make a line graph of the data.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 140
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 141
On which day do you sell the most books? Explain.

Answer: 7th day
How many books do you think you sell after 9 days? Explain.

Answer: 29 books

12.7 Numerical Patterns

Question 28.
Use the given rules to complete the table. Then complete the rule.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 142
Multiply the number of ounces of pudding mix by __ to find the number of ounces of pumpkin.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-142

12.7 Graph and Analyze Relationships

Question 29.
An employee earns $80 every 8 hours. How much money does she earn after 40 hours?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 143
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 144

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-143
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-12-Patterns-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-144

Question 30.
Modeling Real Life
A group of friends wants to play laser tag for 60 minutes. They want to go to the facility that costs less money. Which facility should they choose? What is the cost for each person?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 145
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane 146

Answer: They need to choose Facility B.

Final Words:

Learn the Big Ideas Math Book 5th Grade Solution Key Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane provided and improve your math as well as problem-solving skills. You can achieve greater heights and fall in love with Math with our Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 12 Patterns in the Coordinate Plane. Bookmark our ccssmathanswers.com to get the solutions of Big Ideas Math Grade 5 Chapters from 1 to 13.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11

Big Ideas Math 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure and Estimate Lengths Answers: Have a look at the free step-by-step explanation for all questions on Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure and Estimate Lengths Book is provided here. The answers for the questions of grade 2 chapter 11 are in pdf format. So, download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths PDF for free of cost and begin the preparation.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths

Students who want to improve their math skills can refer to this Big Ideas Math 2nd Grade 11th Chapter Measure And Estimate Lengths Solutions and prepare well. By solving the questions, you can know how to use a ruler to measure lengths, compare the measurements of different objects. One can finish their homework easily by checking Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths. Click on the topic-wise links mentioned below to get the answers for all types of questions related to Measure And Estimate Lengths.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Measure Lengths in Centimeters

Lesson: 2 Measure Objects Using Metric Length Units

Lesson: 3 Estimate Lengths in Metric Units

Lesson: 4 Measure Lengths in Inches

Lesson: 5 Measure Objects Using Customary Length Units

Lesson: 6 Estimate Lengths in Customary Units

Lesson: 7 Measure Objects Using Different Length Units

Lesson: 8 Measure and Compare Lengths

Chapter 11: Measure And Estimate Lengths 

Measure And Estimate Lengths Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths v 1
Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths v 2

Answer: Tree is measured bu Height and Bird is measured by Length

Define It
Use your vocabulary cards to match.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths v 3

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths v 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths v 5

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths v 6
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths v 7

Lesson 11.1 Measure Lengths in Centimeters

Explore and Grow

Use a centimeter cube to find the length of each string.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 1
Answer:

Explain how you measured.
______________________
______________________
______________________
Answer: The centimeters were measured by Scale.

Show and Grow

Measure.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 2
about _______ centimeters
Answer: 1 centimeters

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 3
about ________ centimeters
Answer: 12 centimeters

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 4
about ______ centimeters
Answer: 20 centimeters

Apply and Grow: Practice

Measure.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 5
about ______ centimeters
Answer: 15 centimeters

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 6
about ______ centimeters
Answer: 4 centimeters

Question 6.
Draw a pencil that is about 9 centimeters long.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Answers Chapter 11 img_1

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says the ribbon is about 14 centimeters long. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 7
_______________________
_______________________
Answer: No. It is not correctly measured on a scale. It should be measured from 0 cm to 14 cms.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Will the hammer fit inside a toolbox that is 40 centimeters long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 8
______________________
______________________
Answer: The toolbox will be around 50 centimeters long, So the Hammer with 40 centimeters will fit in it.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Will the sunglasses fit inside a case that is 10 centimeters long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 9
________________________
________________________
Answer: Yes, Sunglasses will fit inside the case that is 10 centimeters as Sunglasses will be around 9 centimeters.

Measure Lengths in Centimeters Homework & Practice 11.1

Measure.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 10
about ______ centimeters
Answer: about 8 centimeters

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 11
about _______ centimeters
Answer: about 15 centimeters

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 12
about _______ centimeters
Answer: about 3 centimeters

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 13
about _______ centimeters
Answer: about 6 centimeters

Question 5.
Precision
Which crayon is shorter than 8 centimeters?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 14
Answer: Yellow and Green crayons are shorter than 8 centimeters.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Will the pen fit inside a pouch that is 18 centimeters long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 15
______________________
_______________________
Answer: Yes the pen will fit inside a pouch that is 18 centimeters long as the pen is around 15 centimeters.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 16
Answer: 55
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-11-Measure-And-Estimate-Lengths-11.1-0-Answer

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 17
Answer: 90
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-11-Measure-And-Estimate-Lengths-11.1-01-Answer

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.1 18
Answer: 101
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-11-Measure-And-Estimate-Lengths-11.1-02-Answer

Lesson 11.2 Measure Objects Using Metric Length Units

Explore and Grow

Which real-life objects are shorter than a centimeter ruler?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-11-Measure-And-Estimate-Lengths-11.2-1-Answer

Show and Grow

Find and measure the object shown in your classroom.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 2
about _______ meter
Answer: 3 meter

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 3
meter ______ centimeters
Answer: 3 centimeters

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 4
about _______ meters
Answer: 2 meter

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find and measure the object shown in your classroom.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 5
about _______ meters
Answer: 3 meters

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 6
about ______ centimeters
Answer: 15 centimeters

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 7
about _______ meters
Answer: 2 meters

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 8
about ______ centimeters
Answer: 30 centimeters

Question 8.
Choose Tools
Would you measure the length of a bus with a centimeter ruler or a meter stick? Why?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 9
________________________
________________________
Answer: The length of a bus can be measured with a meter stick because the bus is big inside.
The centimeter-scale is small and the meter scale is big.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your friend says a car has a length of about 4. Is the car about 4 meters long or about 4 centimeters long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 10
The car is about 4 ________ long.
________________________
________________________
Answer: The car is about 4 meters long.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Your friend says a shoe has a length of about 12. Is the shoe about 12 centimeters long or about 12meters long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 11
The shoe is about 12 ____________ long.
______________________
______________________
Answer: The shoe is about 12 centimeters long.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend places 2 of the same real objects end to end. Together, they have a length of about 18 centimeters. Which object did your friend use? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 12
_________________________
_________________________
Answer: 1st and 2nd object together will be 18 centimeters. As 3rd object will be larger than 18 centimeters.

Measure Objects Using Metric Length Units Homework & Practice 11.2

Find and measure the object.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 13
about ______ meters
Answer: 7 meters

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 14
about ______ centimeters
Answer: about 1000 centimeters

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 15
about ______ centimeters
Answer: 20 centimeters

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 16
about ______ meters
Answer: 3 meters

Question 5.
Number Sense
Complete the sentences using centimeters or meters.
A window is about 2 ________ long.
Answer: A window is about 2 meters long.
A finger is about 8 ______ long.
Answer: A finger is about 8 centimeters long.
A zucchini is about 12 _______ long.
Answer: A zucchini is about 12 centimeters long.
An airplane is about 20 _______ long.
Answer: An airplane is about 20 meters long.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend says that the length of a soccer field is about 91. Is the soccer field about 91 centimeters long or about 91 meters long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 17
The soccer field is about 91 _______ long.
______________________
_______________________
Answer: The soccer field is about 91 meters long.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Order the lengths from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.2 18
_________, _________, _________
Answer: 3 centimeters, 1 meter, 200 centimeter.

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
3 + 7 = _____ + 3
Answer: 7+3
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
So, 3 + 7 = 7 + 3

Question 9.
5 + 4 = 4 + ______
Answer: 4+5
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
So, 5 + 4 = 4 + 5

Question 10.
6 + 0 = ____ + 6
Answer: 0+6
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
So, 6 + 0 = 0 + 6

Question 11.
1 + 2 = 2 + ____
Answer: 2+1
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
So, 1 + 2 = 2 + 1

Lesson 11.3 Estimate Lengths in Metric Units

Explore and Grow

Find an object that is shorter than the string.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 1
Without using a ruler, tell how long you think the object is.

Answer: Pencil
______ centimeters

Answer: 12 centimeters
Explain.
________________________
________________________
Answer: The Pencil is around 12 centimeters which is shorter than the 13 centimeters string.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
The chalk is about 8 centimeters long. What is the best estimate of the length of the toothpick?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 2
Answer: 6 centimeters

Question 2.
The fishing pole is about 1 meter long. What is the best estimate of the length of the alligator?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 3
Answer: 3 meters

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
The hover board is about 1 meter long. What is the best estimate of the length of the surfboard?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 4
Answer: 2 meters

Question 4.
The pineapple is about 25 centimeters long. What is the best estimate of the length of the asparagus?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 5
Answer: 20 centimeters

Question 5.
What is the best estimate of the length of a piece of notebook paper?
21 centimeters
1 meter
5 centimeters
Answer: 21 centimeters

Question 6.
What is the best estimate of the height of a traffic light?
1 meter
5 meter
30 centimeters
Answer: 5 meter

Question 7.
Precision
Match.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-11-Measure-And-Estimate-Lengths-11.3-6-Answer

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

The leaf is about 8 centimeters long. Draw a tree branch that is about 16 centimeters long.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-11-Measure-And-Estimate-Lengths-11.1-Answer

Show and Grow

Question 8.
The piece of celery is about 10 centimeters long. Draw a carrot that is about 5 centimeters long.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-11-Measure-And-Estimate-Lengths-11.3-8

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Each bead is about 2 centimeters long. Draw a rectangular bead that is about 3 centimeters long.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 9
How did you use the length of the given beads to draw the rectangular bead?
________________________
__________________________
Answer:
The length of given rectangular beads were measured with scale.

Estimate Lengths in Metric Units Homework & Practice 11.3

Question 1.
The swimming pool is about 12 meters long. What is the best estimate of the length of the raft?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 10
Answer: 2 meters
Explanation: The length of the Swimming pool is 12 meters long, the raft length will be 2 meters as it is very small.

Question 2.
What is the best estimate of the height of a tulip?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 11
Answer: 4 meters
Explanation: The height of the tulip is big so, It can be estimated by 4 meters.

Question 3.
What is the best estimate of the height of a giraffe?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 12
Answer: 50 meters.
Explanation: The height of the giraffe is big so it can be estimated by 50 meters.

Question 4.
Logic
Newton says the best estimate for the height of a skyscraper is 4 meters. Do you agree? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 13
_______________________
_______________________
Answer: No, The skyscraper’s estimated height is 150 meters.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A granola bar is about 9 centimeters long. Draw its wrapper that is about 12 cm long.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 14
Answer:
BIM Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 2 img_2

Review & Refresh

Is the equation true or false?
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 15
Answer: True
Explanation: 13-5=8 and 15-7=8, they are equal.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 16
Answer: False
3+6=9 and 11-3=8, They are not equal.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 17
Answer: True
Explanation: 2+10=12 and 6+6=12

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.3 18
Answer: False
14-9=5 and 4+9=13

Lesson 11.4 Measure Lengths in Inches

Explore and Grow

Use an inch tile to find the length of each string.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 1
Explain how you measured.
______________________
______________________
Answer: It is measured with inch scale.

Show and Grow

Measure.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 2
about _______ inches
Answer: about 3 inches

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 3
about ______ inch
Answer: about 1 inch

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 4
about _______ inches
Answer: about 6 inches.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Measure.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 5
about ______ inches
Answer: about 6 inches

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 6
about ______ inches
Answer: about 2 inches

Question 6.
Draw a crayon that is about 4 inches long.
Answer:

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the watch is about 6 inches long. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 7
Answer: It is 6 inches but it should be measured from 0 inch to 6 inches.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Will the toothbrush fit inside a case that is 4 inches long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 8
_________________________
_________________________
Answer: No
Explantion: It cannot be fit in 4 inches case because the toothbrush is about 8 inches long.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Will the colored pencil fit inside a pencil box that is 8 inches long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 9
________________________
__________________________
Answer: Yes
Explanation: The colored pencil can be fit in pencil box as colored pencil will be about 5 inches long.

Measure Lengths in Inches Homework & Practice 11.4

Measure.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 10
about _____ inch
Answer: About 2 inch.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 11
about _______ inches
Answer: about 3 inches.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 12
about _____ inches
Answer: about 6 inches.

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says the highlighter is about 5 centimeters long. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 13
______________________
_______________________
Answer: No, The highlighter will be about 11 centimeters long,  So Newton is wrong as 5 centimeters is very small.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Will the screwdriver fit inside a case that is 5 inches long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 14
____________________________
____________________________
Answer: Yes
Explanation: The screwdriver will be about 4.5 inches long so it will fit in 5 inches case.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Write how many tens. Circle groups of 10 tens. Write how many hundreds. Then write the number.
_____ tens ______ hundreds _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.4 15
Answer: 50 tens 5 hundreds 500

Lesson 11.5 Measure Objects Using Customary Length Units

Explore and Grow

Which real-life objects are longer than an inch ruler?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-11-Measure-And-Estimate-Lengths-11.5-1-Answer

Show and Grow
Find the object shown in your classroom. Choose an inch ruler, a yardstick, or a measuring tape to measure the object. Then measure.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 2
Tool: _______
Length: about _________
Answer: Tool: Inch ruler
Length: about 14 inches

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 3
Tool: _______
Length: about ________
Answer: Tool: Yardstick
Length: 2 meters

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 4
Tool: _______
Length: about _________
Answer: Toot: Measuring tape
Length: about 15 centimeters

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the object shown in your classroom. Choose an inch ruler, a yardstick, or a measuring tape to measure the object. Then measure.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 5
Tool: __________
Length: about ________
Answer: Tool: inch ruler
Length: about 3 inches

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 6
Tool: _________
Length: about ____________
Answer: Tool: measuring tape
Length: about 200 centimeters

Question 6.
Find and measure an object using a measuring tape.
Object: _________
Length: about __________
Answer: Object: Chair
Length: about 100 centimeters

Question 7.
Find and measure an object using an inch ruler.
Object: ________
Length: about _________
Answer: Object: Phone
Length: about 6 inches

Question 8.
Choose Tools
Would you measure the length of the playground with an inch ruler or a yardstick? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 7
______________________
______________________
Answer: The length of the playground can be measured with a yardstick because the yardstick is long and it will be easy to measure long objects like length of playground.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your friend says her height is about 4. Is she about 4 inches tall, about 4 feet tall, or about 4 yards tall? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 8
She is about 4 ______ tall.
______________________
______________________
Answer: She is about 4 feet tall
Explanation: The height of a person is measured in feet.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Your friend says the length of a baseball bat is about 1. Is the bat about 1 inch long, about 1 foot long, or about 1 yard long? Explain.
________ long.
_________________________
_________________________
Answer: 1 foot long
Explanation: The length a baseball bat is 1 foot long.

Question 10.
Your friend says the length around an orange is about 9. Is the length about 9 inches long, about 9 feet long, or about 9 yards long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 9
The length is about 9 ________ long.
________________________
_________________________
Answer: The length is about 9 inches long.
Explanation: The orange is small object so it can be measured in inches.

Measure Objects Using Customary Length Units Homework & Practice 11.5

Find the object shown. Choose an inch ruler, a yardstick, or a measuring tape to measure the object. Then measure.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 10
Tool: ______
Length: about _______
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 11
Tool: _______
Length: about ____________
Answer: Object: Basket
Tool: Measuring tape
Length: about 60 centimeters

Question 3.
Find and measure an object using an inch ruler.
Object: _________
Length: about __________
Answer: Object: Pencil
Length: about 8 inches

Question 4.
Find and measure an object using a yard stick.
Object: ____________
Length: about __________
Answer:Object: Door
Length: about 3 meter

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says the best tool to measure the length around a basketball is an inch ruler. Is he correct? Explain.
________________________
________________________
Answer: No
Explanation: The length of the basketball cannot be measured with inch ruler, it can be measured with measuring tape.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend says that the length of a toothbrush is about 8. Is the toothbrush about 8 inches, about 8 feet, or about 8 yards long? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 12
The toothbrush is about 8 _______ long.
________________________
________________________
Answer: The toothbrush is about 8 inches long
Explanation: The toothbrush is small object so it can be measured with inch ruler.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Order the lengths from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.5 13
Answer: 2 feet       1 yard       39 inches
Explanation: 1 feet=12 inches, 12+12=24 inches
1 yard=36 inches

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
You read for 55 minutes. Your friend reads 28 fewer minutes. How many minutes does your friend read?
_____ minutes
Answer: 27 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
You read for 55 minutes. Your friend reads 28 fewer minutes.
28 – 55 = 27
Thus your friend read for 27 minutes

Question 9.
You score 23 points. Your two friends score 56 and 18 points. How many points do you and your friends score in all?
______ points
Answer: 97 points

Explanation:
Given,
You score 23 points. Your two friends score 56 and 18 points.
23 + 56 + 18 = 97 points
Thus you and your friend score 97 points in all/

Lesson 11.6 Estimate Lengths in Customary Units

Explore and Grow

Find an object that is shorter than the string. Draw the object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 1
Without using a ruler, tell how long you think the object is.
______ inches
Explain
____________________________
____________________________
Answer: Crayon, 4 inches
Explanation: The crayon is about 4 inches and it is shorter than 5 inches string.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
The pipe cleaner is about 3 inches long. What is the best estimate of the length of the craft stick?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 2
Answer: The length of craft stick is 4 inches.

Question 2.
The dog leash is about 5 feet long. What is the best estimate of the length of the dog collar?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 3
Answer: The length of the dog collar is about 1 foot.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
The poster is about 18 inches long. What is the best estimate for the length of the bed?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 4
Answer: The length of bed is about 75 inches.

Question 4.
The jump rope is about 6 feet long. What is the best estimate of the length of the dog?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 5
Answer: The length of the dog is about 4 feet.

Question 5.
What is the best estimate of the length of a garage?
8 inches
8 feet
8 yards
Answer: The length of a garage is about 8 yards.

Question 6.
What is the best estimate of the height of a flag pole?
20 inches
20 feet
20 yards
Answer: The height of a flag pole is about 20 yards.

Question 7.
Precision
Match
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 6
Answer:
Convert from feet and yards to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
5 feet = 60 inches
1 yard = 36 inches
5 yard = 180 inches

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

The sticker is about 1 inch long. Draw another sticker that is about 2 inches long.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Chapter 11 Answer Key img_3

Show and Grow

Question 8.
The worm is about 4 inches long. Draw a caterpillar that is about 2 inches long.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-11-Measure-And-Estimate-Lengths-11.6-8

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Each toy truck is about 2 inches long. Draw a building block that is about 3 inches long.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 9
How did you use the length of the toy trucks to draw the building block?
__________________________
____________________________
Answer: You can expand the length of the toy trucks to draw the building block.

Estimate Lengths in Customary Units Homework & Practice 11.6

Question 1.
The driveway is about 20 yards long. What is the best estimate of the length of the truck?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 10
Answer: The length of the truck is about 15 yards.

Question 2.
What is the best estimate of the height of a basketball hoop?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 11
Answer: The height of the basket hoop is about 3 yards.

Question 3.
What is the best estimate of the length of a hair brush?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 12
Answer: The length of a hair brush is about 8 inches.

Question 4.
Logic
Descartes says the best estimate for the height of the Statue of Liberty is 5 yards. Do you agree? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 13
_______________________
_______________________
Answer: No, The height of the Statue of Liberty is 5 yards.
Explanation: The height of the statue of liberty is very tall, it is about 100 yards.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
The bug is about 4 inches long. Draw a bug that is about 2 inches long.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 14
Answer:
BIM Grade 2 Chapter 11 Answer Key img_4

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
Each paperclip is about 2 inches long. Draw a pen that is about 5 inches long.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.6 15
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
12 − 4 = ______
Answer: 8

Question 8.
15 − 6 = ________
Answer: 9

Lesson 11.7 Measure Objects Using Different Length Units

Explore and Grow

Measure the length of the string in inches then in centimeters.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 1
______ inches _______ centimeters
Are there more inches or centimeters? Why?
_____________________________
______________________________
Answer: 4.72 inches 12 centimeters

Show and Grow

Find and measure the object shown in your classroom two ways.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 2
about ______ centimeters
Answer: about 30 centimters
about ______ inches
about 15 inches
Did you use fewer centimeters or fewer inches to measure?
centimeters inches
Answer: inches

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 3
about _______ meters
about _______ feet
Did you use fewer meters or fewer feet to measure?
meters feet
Answer: about 2 meters
about 6 feet
meters.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find and measure the object shown in your classroom two ways.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 4
about _____ centimeters
about ______ inches
Did you use fewer centimeters or fewer inches to measure?
centimeters inches
Answer: about 2 centimeters
about 1 inch
inch

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 5
about _____ meters
about ______ feet
Did you use more meters or more feet to measure?
meters feet
Answer: about 3 meters
about 9 feet
feet

Question 5.
Would you use more centimeters, inches, or feet to measure the length of a calculator?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 6
Answer: Centimeters

Question 6.
Writing
What do you notice about the relationship between inches and centimeters? feet and meters?
________________________
_________________________
Answer: 1 inch is equal to 0.39 centimeters
1 foot is equal to 0.30 meters

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Do you use fewer centimeters or fewer meters to measure the length of your house? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 7
centimeters meters
__________________________
__________________________
Answer: Meters
Explanation: 1 meter is equal to 100 centimeter, The length of the house is big So, it is easy to measure with meter.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
Do you use fewer feet or fewer yards to measure the length of a football field? Explain.
feet yards
_________________________
_________________________
Answer: Yards.
1 yard=36 inches
1 feet= 12 inches
The length of the football field is big. So, it is measured with yards.

Question 8.
Do you use more meters or more feet to measure the length of your school? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 9
meters feet
______________________
______________________
Answer: Feet
Explanation: 1 feet=12 inches
1 meter=39 inches
We use more feet to measure the length of the school.

Measure Objects Using Different Length Units Homework & Practice 11.7

Find and measure the object shown in two ways.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 10
about _______ centimeters
about _____ inches
Did you use more centimeters or more inches to measure the length of the umbrella?
centimeters inches
Answer: about 100 centimeters
about 40 inches
We use more centimeters to measure the length of the umbrella.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 11
about _____ meters
about _____ feet
Did you use fewer meters or fewer feet to measure the height of the cabinet?
meters feet
Answer: about 3 meters
about 10 feet
meter

Question 3.
Would you use more centimeters, inches, or feet to measure the height of a lamp?
centimeters
inches
feet
Answer: centimeters

Question 4.
Would you use fewer inches, meters, or feet to measure the length of a sink?
inches
meters
feet
Answer: Feet

Question 5.
Reasoning
Order the lengths from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 12
_______, ________, _________
Answer: 12 centimeter, 12 inches, 12 feet

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 13
________, ________, ________
Answer: 2 centimeter, 2 feet, 2 meters

Question 7.
Precision
What is the best estimate of the height of a maraca?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.7 14
9 inches
10 centimeters
3 centimeters
Answer: 10 centimeters

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Do you use fewer feet or fewer yards to measure the length of a hallway? Explain.
______________________
______________________
Answer: fewer feet

Review & Refresh

Circle the values of the underlined digit.
Question 9.
634
4
4 ones
4 hundreds
Answer: 4 ones

Question 10.
918
900
9 hundreds
100
Answer: 9 hundreds

Question 11.
257
0
5 tens
50
Answer: 5 tens

Lesson 11.8 Measure and Compare Lengths

Explore and Grow

Measure the fish. Circle the longer fish.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.8 1
Answer: 10 centimeters

Show and Grow

Question 1.
How many centimeters longer is the marker than the paper clip?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.8 2
Answer: 10-4=6 centimeters.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
How many centimeters shorter is the binder clip than the stick of gum?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.8 3
Answer: 4-1=3 inches

Question 3.
A finger is 4 centimeters longer than the finger nail. How long is the finger?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.8 4
_______ centimeters
Answer: 1 centimeters

Question 4.
Writing
Explain how you found the length of the finger in Exercise 3.
______________________
______________________
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Whose path to school is longer? How much longer is it?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.8 5
Addition equations:
Whose path is longer: Your path Friend’s path
Subtraction equation:
______ yards
Answer: Addition equations: your path 12+16=28 yards, your friend’s path 56+4=60 yards.
Whose path is longer: Your path Friend’s path
Subtraction equation: 60-28=32 yards

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Whose path to the pond is shorter? How much shorter is it?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.8 6
Your path Friend’s path
______ meters
Answer: your path: 6+28=34 meters, your friend’s path: 7+15=22 meters
Your friend’s path to the pond is shorter.
It is shorter than 12 meters.

Measure and Compare Lengths Homework & Practice 11.8

Question 1.
How many inches longer is the branch than the worm?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.8 7
Answer: 15 inches Branch
5 inches worm
15-5=10 inches

Question 2.
DIG DEEPER!
The length of a piece of string is 8 inches long. You cut off 5 inches. Draw the length of the string that is left.
Answer: _____________________________________________________________________________ – 8 inches
___________________________________________________ – 5 inches
8-5 inches=3 inches.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Whose path to the playground is longer? How much longer is it?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 11.8 8
Your path Friend’s path
_____ yards
Answer: Your path: 12+53=65 yards, Your friend’s path: 61+7=68 yards.
Your friend’s path is longer.
68-65=3 yards, It is longer by 3 yards.

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
Count by ones.
_____, _____, 71, _____, 73, _____, _____, 76
Answer: 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76
Explanation: There is difference of one number arranged in ascending order.

Question 5.
Count by fives.
85, 90, ____, _____, ______, _____, ______, ______
Answer: 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120.
Explanation: There is difference of five numbers arranged in ascending order.

Question 6.
Count by tens.
_____, 43, 53, _____, _____, ______, 93, ______
Answer: 33, 43, 53, 63, 73, 83, 93, 103.
Explanation: There is difference of ten numbers arranged in ascending order.

Measure And Estimate Lengths Performance Task

You are planting a rooftop garden. You want to build a fence around the garden. You have a piece of wood that is 16 feet long.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 1
Question 1.
a. Which designs can you make?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 1
b. You choose the rectangular design. Use repeated addition to find the length of each side in inches.
5 ft = _____ + ____ + ____ + _____ + _____ = in.
2 ft = ______ + ______ = in.
Answer: 5 ft =12 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12= in
2 ft= 12 + 12 = in

Question 2.
Each seed you plant must be 6 inches apart and 6 inches away from the sides. Draw to find the number of seeds you can plant in your garden.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 3
_____ seeds
Answer: 20 seeds

Measure And Estimate Lengths Activity

Spin and Cover
To Play: Players take turns. On your turn, spin one spinner. Then cover the item you would measure using that unit. Continue playing until all objects are covered.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths 4

Measure And Estimate Lengths Chapter Practice

11.1 Measure Lengths in Centimeters

Measure.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 1
about ______ centimeters
Answer: about 2 centimeters

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 2
about ______ centimeters
Answer: about 4 centimeters

11.2 Measure Objects Using Metric Lengths

Find and measure the object
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 3
about ______ meters
Answer: 1.5 meters

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 4
about _______ centimeters
Answer: about 15 centimeters

11.3 Estimate Lengths in Metric Units

Question 5.
The book is about 20 centimeters long. What is the best estimate of the length of the bookmark?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 5
Answer: 10 centimeters

Question 6.
What is the best estimate of the length of a paintbrush?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 6
Answer: 22 centimeters

11.4 Measure Lengths in Inches

Measure.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 7
about ______ inches
Answer: about 30 inches

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 8
about ______ inches
Answer: about 4 inches

11.5 Measure Objects Using Customary Length Units

Find the object shown. Choose an inch ruler, a yardstick, or a measuring tape to measure the object. Then measure.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 9
Tool: ______
Length: about _______
Answer: Object: Pencil stand
Tool: Measuring tape
Length: about 15 centimeters

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 10
Tool: _____
Length: about _______
Answer: Object: Calender
Tool: inch ruler
Length: about 10 inch

11.6 Estimate Lengths in Customary Units

Question 11.
The couch is about 8 feet long. What is best estimate of the length of the end table?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 11
Answer: The length of the end table is 2 feet.

Question 12.
What is the best estimate of the length of a pond?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 12
Answer: The length of a pond is 30 feet.

11.7 Measure Objects Using Different Length Units

Question 13.
Would you use more centimeters, meters, or inches to measure the length of a pencil?
centimeters
meters
inches
Answer: centimeters

Question 14.
Would you use fewer centimeters, meters, or feet to measure the length of the teacher’s desk?
centimeters
meters
feet
Answer: meters

Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says he uses more feet than meters to measure the length of a bicycle. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 15
______________________
________________________
Answer: Yes Newton uses more feet than meters to measure the length of a bicycle.

11.8 Measure and Compare Lengths

Question 16.
A guinea pig cage is 51 centimeters longer than the guinea pig. How long is the cage?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths chp 17
_______ centimeters
Answer: 20 centimeters

Conclusion:

I wish the information prevailed in Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths is beneficial for all. Tap the links and kickstart your preparation. Share the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 11 Measure And Estimate Lengths pdf to your friends and help them to overcome their difficulties. Stay tuned to our site to get the solutions of all Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 | Big Ideas Math Book 8th Grade Answer Key

The Big Ideas Math Modeling Real Life helps students in learning and engaging innovative programs. Students of Grade 8 can cover all the middle school content with the help of Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Answers. BIM Grade 8 Answer Key is prepared by mathematical experts. Hence go through the Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapterwise and finish your homework or assignments. The solutions for all the chapters are provided in pdf format. Thus Download BIM Textbook Grade Answer Key Pdf and start your preparation.

Big Ideas Math Book 8th Grade Answer Key | Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Solutions Pdf

The solutions for Bigideas Math Grade are prepared from the Common Core 2019 Student edition. Students who feel difficulty in solve the problems can quickly understand the concepts with the help of Big Ideas Math 8th Grade Answer Key. Keep these solutions pdf aside and kickstart your preparation for the exams. This will enhance your performance in chapter tests, practice tests, assessments, and assignments. Go through the table of contents shown in the below section.

Top 5 Exam Preparation Tips

Follow the below-given tips which help to reduce the exam pressure.

  • Use flow charts and diagrams to understand the subject
  • Practice model papers
  • Take regular breaks
  • Prepare timetable
  • Drink lots of water

What is the Importance of Middle School Big Ideas Math 8th Grade Answer Key?

There are many benefits of using the BIM Grade 8 Answer Key Middle School. Check out the importance of using Bigideas Math Grade 8 solutions from the below section.

  1. With the help of the solutions provided in the Bigideas Math 8th Grade Answers, you can have a grip over the subject in depth.
  2. You can fulfill your dream of becoming a master in math by referring to the BIM Grade 8 Answer Key.
  3. Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answers helps to improve your score and performance.

FAQs on Bigideas Math Grade 8 Answer Key

1. What is the use of Middle School BIM 8th Grade Answer Key?

The BIM Grade 8 Solutions helps the students to enhance the skills and also to secure a good percentage in the exams.

2. Where do I find the best Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Answers Chapterwise?

Students of 8th standard can get the best solutions with step by step explanation on ccsmathanswers.com

3. How to Download Common Core 2019 Grade 8 Bigideas Math Answers?

You can download the solutions of Bigideas Math Answers Textbook Grade 8 Chapterwise for free on CCSS Math Answers website for free.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K is the best solution to overcome the difficulties in maths for elementary school students. Learn the basics of maths before you join the school with the help of the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100. In order to excel in the exam, you have to prepare well and practice the problems a number of times. Thus Refer to Big Ideas Math Book Solution Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 to enhance your math skills and to score good marks in the exams.

Big Ideas Math Book Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100

Check out the topics discussed in this chapter before your start preparing for the exams. The topics included in this chapter are Count to 30 by Ones, Count to 50 by Ones, Count to 100 by Ones, Count by Tens and Ones, etc. Tap the links of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 and begin your preparation.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Count to 30 by Ones

Lesson: 2 Count to 50 by Ones

Lesson: 3 Count to 100 by Ones

Lesson: 4 Count to 100 by Tens

Lesson: 5 Count by Tens and Ones

Lesson: 6 Count by Tens from a Number

Chapter: 10 – Count to 100

Count to 100 Vocabulary

Directions:
Circle 10 balloons. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many balloons there are in all.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 v 1

Answer:


Explanation:
In the above picture 10 balloons are circled and the 5bvalloons without circle around them.If we add 10 with 5 we get 15.So, there are 15 balloons in all.

Vocabulary Cards

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 v 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 v 3

Lesson 10.1 Count to 30 by Ones

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Point to each number as you count to 30. Color the number 30

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 1

Answer:
color 30

Explanation:
I point to the 1 and is counted as 1, point to the 2 and is counted as  2, point to the 3 and is counted as 3 and so on till 30 and coloured the number 30.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the missing number. Count to 30 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 2
Answer:
circle and color

Explanation:
In the above question, the first grid has an empty box after 22. So, what comes after 22? -23 comes after 22. Therefore circle 23, color, and count the number boxes from 23 to 30.
The second grid has an empty box after 8. So, what comes after 8? -9 comes after 8. Therefore circle 8, color, and count the number boxes from 8 to 30.
The third grid has an empty box after 19. So, what comes after 19? -20 comes after 19. Therefore circle 20, color, and count the number boxes from 20 to 30

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the missing number. Count to 30 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. 2 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike. 3 Find and circle the number twenty-three.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 3
Answer:
circle 14 and color from 14 to 30

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 13. So, what comes after 13? -14 comes after 13. Therefore circle 14, color and count the number boxes from 14 to 30

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 4

Answer:
circle 26,27,28.

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 26,27,28. The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 5
Answer:
Find and circle 23

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 23 circle it.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Circle the missing date for each sticker on the calendar. Circle the sticker that covers the earliest missing date. Underline the sticker that covers the latest missing date.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 6
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing date of each sticker are 14 in the flag sticker, 3 in the hat sticker and 29 in the balloons sticker.
The earliest missing date is 3 So, the hat sticker is circled and the latest missing date is 29 So, the balloons sticker is underlined.

Count to 30 by Ones Homework & Practice 10.1

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the missing number. Count to 30 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 7
Answer:
circle 28 and color number boxes from 28 to 30.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 27. So, what comes after 27? -28 comes after 27. Therefore circle 28, color and count the number boxes from 28 to 30

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 8
Answer:
circle 13 and color number boxes from 13 to 30.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 12.So, what comes after 12? -13 comes after 12. Therefore circle 13, color and count the number boxes from 13 to 30

Directions:
3 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike. 4 Find and circle the number fourteen. 5 Circle the missing date for each sticker on the calendar. Circle the sticker that covers the earliest missing date. Underline sticker that covers the latest missing date.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 9
Answer:
circle 17,18,19.

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 17,18,19.The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 10
Answer:
Find and circle 14

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 14 circle it.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 11
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing date of each sticker are 16 in the man sticker,13 in the balloons sticker.
The earliest missing date is 13 So, the balloons sticker is circled and the latest missing date is 16 So, the man sticker is underlined.

Lesson 10.2 Count to 50 by Ones

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Point to each number as you count to 50. Color the number 50.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 1
Answer:
circle 50

Explanation:
I point at 1 and count it as 1, I point at and count it as 2, I point at 3 and count it as 3, so on till 50 and color the number 50.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the missing number. Count to 50 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 2
Answer:
circle and color

Explanation:
In the above question, the first grid has an empty box after 26.So, what comes after 26? -27 comes after 26. Therefore circle 27, color and count the number boxes from 27 to 50.
The second grid has an empty box after 43.So, what comes after 43? -44 comes after 43. Therefore circle 44, color and count the number boxes from 44 to 50.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the missing number. Count to 50 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. 2 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike. 3 Find and circle the numbers thirty-two and forty-seven.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 3
Answer:
circle 21 and color from 21 to 30.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 20.So, what comes after 20? -21 comes after 20. Therefore circle 21, color and count the number boxes from 21 to 50.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 4
Answer:
Circle 37,38,39.

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 37,38,39. The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 5
Answer:
Find and circle 23 and 47.

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 32 circle it and continue counting the numbers by pointing each number again when you reach number 47 circle it.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Circle the missing floor number for each color on the elevator keypad. Circle the color that covers the lowest missing floor number. Underline the color that covers the highest missing floor number.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 6
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing floor number for each color on the elevator keypad are 31 in blue color,18 in yellow color and 35 in green color. Circle the yellow color as it covers the lowest missing floor number. Underline the green color as it covers the highest missing floor number

Count to 50 by Ones Homework & Practice 10.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the missing number. Count to 50 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 7
Answer:
Circle 34 and color from 34 to 50.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 33.So, what comes after 34? -34 comes after 33. Therefore circle 34, color, and count the number boxes from 34 to 50.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 8
Answer:
circle 30 and color from 30 to 50.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 29.So, what comes after 29? -30 comes after 29. Therefore circle 30, color, and count the number boxes from 30 to 50.

Directions:
3 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike. 4 Find and circle the numbers twenty-six and forty-two. 5 Circle the missing floor number for each color on the elevator keypad. Circle the color that covers the lowest missing floor number. Underline the color that covers the highest missing floor number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 9
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 41,42,43. The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 10
Answer:
Find and circle 26 and 42.

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 26 circle it and continue counting the numbers by pointing each number again when you reach the number 42 circle it also.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 11
Answer:

Explanation:
Circle the missing floor number 40 for blue color on the elevator keypad and 41 for yellow color on the elevator keypad. Circle the blue color as it covers the lowest missing floor number 40. Underline the yellow color as it covers the highest missing floor number 41.

Lesson 10.3 Count to 100 by Ones

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Point to each number as you count to 100. Color the numbers30, 50, and 100.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 1
Answer:
count and color 30,50,100.

Explanation:

I point at 1 and is count as 1, point to the 2 and is count it as  2, the point at 3 and is count it as 3 and so on till 30 and colour the number 30.
I point at 31 and count it as 31, the point at 32 and count 32 and so on till 50 and color the number  50.
I point at 51 and count as 51, the point at 52 and count it as 52 and so on till 100 and color the number 100.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the first missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the other missing numbers as you count and color to 100.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 2
Answer:
Circle 36, 59,73 and color from 36 to 100.

Explanation:
In the above question, the first missing number is 36, circle the number 36, count and color till you find the second missing number  59, circle 59 and continue counting and coloring numbers until you find the number third missing number 73, circle 73, and count and color the numbers till 100.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the first missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the other missing numbers as you count and color to 100.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 3
Answer:
Circle 47,61,93 and color from 47 to 100.

Explanation:
In the above question, the first missing number is 47 circle the number 47, count and color till you find the second missing number 61, circle 61 and continue counting and coloring numbers until you find the number third missing number 93, circle 93 and count and color the numbers till 100.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: Your friend, Newton, and Descartes each have 10 prize tickets. They each lose 1 ticket.

  • Circle the owner of each lost ticket.
  • The winning ticket number is 1 more than 70. Circle the winning ticket number. Who is the winner? Circle the face of the winning ticket holder.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 4
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above question the circle the owner of the lost ticket.
The owner of ticket 78 is Newton, 67 is me and 86 is Descartes.
The winning ticket is 71 so, circle ticket 71, the winner is Newton, and circle the face of Newton.

Count to 100 by Ones Homework & Practice 10.3

Directions:
1 Circle the first missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the other missing number as you count and color to 100.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 5
Answer:
Circle 53,83.

Explanation:

In the above question, the first missing number is 53 circle the number 53, count and color till you find the second missing number is 83, circle 83 and continue counting and coloring numbers until you reach 100.

Directions:
2 Circle the missing numbers. 3 Newton and Descartes both have 10 prize tickets. They both lose 1 ticket. Circle the owner of each lost ticket. The winning ticket number is 1 more than 50. Circle the winning ticket number. Who is the winner? Circle the face of the winning ticket holder.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 6
Answer:
Circle the missing numbers  79,80,81.

Explanation:
Find the missing numbers and choose the missing numbers from the options and circle them.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 7
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 53 and 68.
The owner of lost ticket 53 is Newton and 68 is Descartes. circle the winning ticket number 51.
Newton is the winner and circle Newton.

Lesson 10.4 Count to 100 by Tens

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Count to 10. Circle the number. Count 10 more. Circle the number. Repeat this process until you reach 100.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 1
Answer:
Count and circle 10,20,30,——100.

Explanation:
Count the numbers up to 10 and circle 10, count next up to 20 and circle 20, count again up to 30 and circle 30 and so on till you reach 100 and circle 100.

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Count to 100 by tens. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the missing decade number.
  • Count the linking cubes. Circle the number that tells how many.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 2
Answer:
Circle the missing decade number 90 and circle 70 after counting the linking cubes.

Explanation:
Count the decades 10,20,30,—- to find 90 and circle 90 and color the boxes you counted.
count the linking cubes and circle the number 70.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. 3 Count to 100 by tens. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the missing decade numbers.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 3
Answer:
Count and circle 30.

Explanation:
Count the objects there are 3 linking cubes of ten cubes each so, circle 30.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 4
Answer:
Count and circle 80.

Explanation:
Count the grapes bunches, there are 8 bunches of grapes and each bunch has 10 grapes.So, circle 80.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 5
Answer:
Count, color all the decade boxes and circle 20,30,40.

Explanation:
Count to 100 by tens. Color the boxes 10,20,30—-till 100 as you count. Circle the missing decade numbers 20,30,40.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: Newton and Descartes each toss 6 balls. Each time a ball lands in their bucket, they earn 10 points. The player with the most points wins.

  • Newton gets 3 balls in his bucket. Circle the number of points Newton earns. Draw a picture to show how you found your answer.
  • Descartes gets 5 balls in his bucket. Circle the number of points Descartes earns. Draw a picture to show how you found your answer.
  • Who earns more points? Circle the face of the winning player.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 6

Answer:
Descartes wins more points.

Explanation:
Newton gets 3 balls in his bucket. Circle the number of points 30. The picture is shown with 3 balls circled.
Descartes gets 5 balls in his bucket. Circle the number of 50. The picture is shown with 5 balls circled.
Descartes wins more points as he has more balls in his bucket and Descartes is the winner.

Count to 100 by Tens Homework & Practice 10.4

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 7
Answer:
Circle 50.

Explanation:
Count the linking cubes of tens there are 5 lines of ten cubes each.So, circle the number 50.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 8
Answer:
Circle 70

Explanation:
Count the balloons bunches by tens and as there are 10 balloons in each bunch circle the number 70.

Directions:
4 Count the bowling pins. Circle the number that tells how many. 5 Count to 100 by tens. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the missing decade numbers. 6 Each time a ball sticks to the wall you earn 10 points. Four of your balls stick to the wall. Circle the number of points you earn. Draw a picture to show how you found your answer.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 9
Answer:
circle 100

Explanation:
There are 10 groups of bowling pins and each group has 10 bowling pins.So, there are 100 bowling pins in all and circle 100.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 10
Answer:
Circle 70,80,90.

Explanation:
Count the numbers by tens and color all the decades up to 100 and circle the missing numbers 70,80,90.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 11
Answer:
circle 40.

Explanation:
When a ball sticks to the wall I earn 10 points, there are 4 balls on the wall. So, I earned 40 points in all. I found this from the picture and circled the 4 balls and the number 40.

Lesson 10.5 Count by Tens and Ones

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Circle groups of 10 ladybugs. Count the ladybugs. Circle the number in the chart that tells how many. Color to show how you counted.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 1
Answer:
Circle, count and color.

Explanation:
Count the ladybugs by tens, make 10 ladybugs as a group and circle them. There are 2 groups of ladybugs and there are 4 ladybugs left.Finally there are 24 ladybugs so, color 10,20,21,22,23 and 24.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the linking cubes. Find the number in the hundred chart that tells how many. Color the number. Tell how you counted.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 2
Answer:
Color 47,68 and 72.

Explanation:
Count linking cubes count by tens and ones. There are 4 lines of ten red cubes and 7 cubes. So, there are 47 red linking cubes in all. Therefore color 47. There are 6 lines of ten blue cubes and 8 cubes. So, there are 68 red linking cubes in all. Therefore color 68. There are 7 lines of ten green cubes and 2 cubes. So, there are 72 red linking cubes in all. Therefore color 72.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
13 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. Tell how you counted.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 3
Answer:
Circle 53

Explanation:
Count the number by tens and ones. In the above set of cube, there are 5 lines of ten linking cubes and 3 cubes. There are 53 linking cubes in all. So, circle 53.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 4
Answer:
Circle 29

Explanation:
Count the number by tens and ones. In the above set of crayons, there are 2 sets of ten crayons each and 9  crayons. There are 29 crayons in all. So, circle 29.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 5
Answer:
Circle 84

Explanation:
Count the number by tens and ones. In the above picture, there are 8 flower vases with 10 flowers each and 4  flowers. There are 84 flowers in all. So, circle 84.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: A toy store sells bouncy balls individually and in bags of 10.

  • Count the bouncy balls. Circle the number that tells how many.
  • The store orders 2 more bags of bouncy balls. Draw the new bags of balls.
  • Circle the number that tells how many bouncy balls the store has now.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 6
Answer:

Explanation:
count by tens and ones
The toy store has 5 sets of 10 bouncy balls each and it has 9 individual bouncy balls. There are 59 balls in all. So, circle 59.
When the toy store orders 2 more bags of balls. The toy store now will have 20 more balls than 59. So, now the toy store has 79 bouncy balls in all. So, circle 79.

Count by Tens and Ones Homework & Practice 10.5

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. Tell how you counted.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 7
Answer:
Circle 19

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There is a line of ten linking cubes and 9 individual cubes. There are 19 linking cubes in all. So, circle 19.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 8
Answer:
Circle 47

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 4 packs of 10 ball each and there are 7 individual balls. There are 47 balls in all. So, circle 47.

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. Tell how you counted. 5 Count the bottles of bubbles. Circle the number that tells how many. Draw 3 more packs of bubbles. Circle the number that tells how many bottles of bubbles there are now.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 9
Answer:
Circle 92

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 9 packs of ten markers each and 2 individual markers. There are 92 markers in all. So, circle 92.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 10
Answer:
Circle 63

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 6 packs of 10 packs of clay each and 3 individual packs of clay. There are 63 packs of clay in all. So, circle 63.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 11
Answer:
circle 36 and 66

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 3 packs of 10 bottles of bubbles and 6 individual bottles of bubbles. There are 36 bottles of bubbles in all. So, circle 36.
When I draw 3 more packs of bottles of bubbles we will have 30 bottles more than the first. So, we will have 36+30 =66 bottles in all. So, circle 66.

Lesson 10.6 Count by Tens from a Number

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Count each group of linking cubes. Circle the numbers in the chart that tell how many for each group. What is the same in each number? What is different in each number?

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 1
Answer:
Circle 7,17,27.

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are three groups of linking cubes.
In the first group, there are 7 linking cubes. So, circle 7.
In the second group, there is 1 line of 10 linking cubes and 1 line of 7 linking cubes. There are 17 cubes in all in the second group. So, circle 17.
In the second group, there are 2 lines of 10 linking cubes and 1 line of 7 linking cubes. There are 27 cubes in all in the third group. So, circle 27.
In the three numbers, the ones place is the same and the tens place is different.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the correct group of missing numbers.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 2
Answer:
Circle 14,24,34 and 58,68,78.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 4 then the next decades are 14,24,34.So, circle 14,24,34.
Count by tens from the number 48 then the next decades are 58,68,78.So, circle 58,68,78.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the numbers that tell how you counted. 4 Circle the missing number. Tell how you counted.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 4
Answer:
Circle 17.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 17 then the next decades are 27,37,47.So, circle 27,37,47.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 5
Answer:
Circle 34.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 34 then the next decades are 44,54,64.So, circle 44,54,64.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 6
Answer:
Circle  56,66,76.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 46 then the next decades are 56,66,76.So, circle 56,66,76.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 7
Answer:
Circle 69.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 59 then the next decade is 69.So, circle 69.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
A grocery store sells milk cartons individually and in boxes of 10.

  • Count the milk cartons. Circle the number that tells how many.
  • You need 75 milk cartons in all. Draw to show how many more boxes of milk cartons you need.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 8
Answer:
Circle 25

Explanation
Count by tens and ones. There are 2 boxes of 10 packs of milk and 5 individual milk packets in a grocery store. There are 25 milk packets in all. So, circle 25.
If we need 75 milk packets in all we have to draw 5 more boxes of 10 packs of milk each.

Count by Tens from a Number Homework & Practice 10.6

Directions:
1 Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the missing numbers.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 9
Answer:
Circle 21,31,41.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 11 then the next decades are 21,31,41.So, circle 21,31,41.

Directions:
2 – 4 Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the numbers that tell how you counted. 5 Circle the missing number. Tell how you counted. 6 Count the cups of applesauce. Circle the number that tells how many. You need 36 cups of applesauce in all. Draw to show how many more boxes you need.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 10
Answer:
Circle 72,82,92.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 62 then the next decades are 72,82,92.So, circle 72,82,92.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 11
Answer:
Circle 29,39,49.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 19 then the next decades are 29,39,49.So, circle 29,39,49.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 12
Answer:
Circle 63,73,83.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 53 then the next decades are 63,7,83.So, circle 63,73,83.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 13
Answer:
Circle 87.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 77 then the next decade is 87. So, circle 87.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 14
Answer:
circle 16

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There is a pack of 10 cups of apple sauce and there are 6 individual cups. There are 16 cups of apple sauce in all. So, circle 16.
If we need 36 cups we have to draw 2 more packs of 1o cups of sauce. Then the number of cups will be 36.

Count to 100 Performance Task

Directions:
A store sells gift bags and party blowers in packages of 10 and individually. 1 Count the gift bags. Circle the number that tells how many. 2 You buy an equal number of party blowers and gift bags. Draw more party blowers to complete the picture. 3 You buy 3 more packages of party blowers for the adults. Circle the number that tells how many party blowers there are in all. Circle the group of numbers that tells how you counted.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 1
Answer:
Circle 56

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 5 boxes of 10 gift bags each and there are 6 individual bags. There are 56 gift bags in all. So, circle 56.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 2
Answer:
24 more party blowers are needed.

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 32 party blowers in the above picture. We need 56 blowers. Subtract 32 from 56, we get 24. So, we need to draw 24 more party blowers so that they will be equal to the number of gift bags.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 3
Answer:
Circle 66,76,86.

Explanation:
When I buy 3 more packages of party bombs count by tens. We already have 56 bombs so, count by tens ie 66,76,86.So, circle 66,76,86.

Count to 100 Activity

Hundred Chart Puzzle
Directions:
Cut out the Hundred Chart Puzzle Pieces. Put the pieces together to complete the hundred chart.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 4

Count to 100 Chapter Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the missing number. Count to 30 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. 2 Find and circle the number twenty-nine. 3 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike.

10.1 Count to 30 by Ones

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 1
Answer:
Circle 17 and color from 17 to 30.
Th

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 16. What comes after 16? -17 comes after 16. Therefore circle 17 and count and color the number boxes from 17 to 30.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 2
Answer:
Circle 29

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 29 circle it.

10.2 Count to 50 by Ones

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 3
Answer:
Circle 21,22,23.

Explanation:
Count numbers by ones. The missing numbers are 21,22,23. The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence.

Directions:
4 Circle the first missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the other missing numbers as you count and color to 100.

10.3 Count to 100 by Ones

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 4
Answer:
Circle 22,55,71,89

Explanation:
In the above question, the first missing number is 22, circle the number 22, count and color till you find the second missing number 55, circle 55 and continue counting and coloring numbers until you find the number third missing number 71, circle 71, and count and color the numbers till you find the last missing number 89, circle 89 and count and color the numbers again till 100.

Directions:
5 and 6 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. 7 Count the crayons. Circle the number that tells how many. Tell how you counted.

10.4 Count to 100 by Tens

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 5
Answer:
Circle 40

Explanation:
Count the numbers by tens. There are 4 groups of 10 balls each. So, circle 40.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 6
Answer:
Circle 60

Explanation:
Count by tens. There are 6 bunches of grapes of 10 grapes each. So, circle 60.

10.5 Count by Tens and Ones

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 7
Answer:
circle 99

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 9 packs of crayons which contain 10 crayons in each pack and 9 individual crayons. So, circle 99.

Directions:
8 Count the apples. Circle the number that tells how many. Draw 2 more bags of apples. Circle the number that tells how many apples there are now. 9 and 10 Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the numbers that tell how you counted. 11 Count the water bottles. Circle the number that tells how many. You need 42 water bottles in all. Draw to show how many more cases you need.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 8
Answer:
Circle 34,54.

Explanation:
count by tens and ones. There are 3 packs of 10 apples and 4 individual apples. So, circle 34. If I draw 2 more packs of apples then I will have 54 apples.

10.6 Count by Tens from a Number

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 9
Answer:
Circle 19,29,39.

Explanation:
Count by tens. After 9 the next tens is 19, after 19 the next tens is 29 and after 29 the next tens is 39.Circle 19,29,39.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 10
Answer:
Circle 56,66,76

Explanation:
Count by tens. After 46 the next tens is 56, after 56 the next tens is 66 and after 66 the next tens is 76.So, circle 56,66,76.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 11
Answer:
Circle 32

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 3 cases of 10 water bottles each and 2 separate water bottles. So, circle 32. If I need 42 water bottles I need to draw 1 more case of 10 water bottles.

Count to 100 Cumulative Practice

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 1 and 2 Which number tells how many? 3 Which number completes the addition sentence?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 1
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones. There are 20 markers in the above picture. So, shade the circle next to 20.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 2

Answer:

Explanation:
Count by tens. There are 9 lines of 10 linking cubes each. So, shade the circle next to 90.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 3
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones.After 3 comes 4 or 3+1=4.So, shade the circle next to 4.

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 4 Which number sentence does not tell how many flowers there are in all? 5 Which number is not greater than 7? 6 Which ten frame shows the number of tomatoes?

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 4
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones. There are 10 flowers in the first box and 5 flowers in the second box. Add the flowers in both the boxes ie 10+5 or 5+10 =15. Therefore there are 15 flowers in all. The number sentence 15-10=5 is wrong. So, shade the circle next to the number sentence 15-10=5.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 5
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones. Number 9 is 2 more than number 7. Number 8 is 1 more than number 7.Number 10 is 3 more than number 7. Number 6 is one less than number 7.So, shade the circle next to 6.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 6
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones. In the above picture, there are 2 sets of 5 tomatoes each. There are 10 tomatoes in all. So, shade the circle next to option 10.

Directions:
7 Count the peaches. Say the number. Write the number. 8 Circle the missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color boxes as you count. Then circle a number in the chart that is greater than the missing number. 9 Draw 19 leaves on the ground. Write the number.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 7
Answer:

Explanation:
Count the given peaches by ones. there are 11 peaches in all. So, write 11.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 8
Answer:
Circle 84 and 93.

Explanation:
There is an empty box after 83.84 comes after 83. So, circle 84 and count and color from 54 t0 100. As 93 is greater than 84 circle the number 93.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 9
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones and draw 19 leaves. So, write the number 19.

Directions:
10 Count forward from 9 and stop at 14. Write the numbers you count. 11 Take apart the linking cubes. Circle the parts. Then write a subtraction sentence by taking one of the parts from the whole. 12 Count the granola bars. Circle the number that tells how many. You need 48 granola bars in all. Draw to show how many more boxes you need.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 10
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones.After 9 comes 10,11,12,13.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 11
Answer:

Explanation:
Separate the linking cubes. Count by ones. There are 9 linking cubes in all. If we separate 1 cube from whole cubes the number sentence will be 9-1=8.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 12
Answer:
Circle 18

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There is 1 box of granola bars and 8 individual granola bars. So, there are 18 bars in all. Therefore circle 18. If I need 48 granola bars in all then I have to add 3 more boxes of bars. So, draw 3 boxes of granola bars.

Final Words:

Our aim is to provide quality education for the students. Keeping this in mind we have prepared the solutions for each and every question in a simple manner. We hope Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 are beneficial for all the students. The concepts of maths are applicable in modeling Real life so compare the questions with real-life and understand the concepts. Keep in touch with our page to get the latest information regarding BIM Kth Grade Answer Key from Chapters 1 to 13.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13

Large Collection of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes is provided on this page. We have listed detailed explanations for all the Problems in Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes. Learning will be much simple using the Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two – and Three-Dimensional Shapes. You can get the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes free of cost here to kick start your preparation.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes PDF is written in a simple and easy to understand language. Solutions provided covers the Cumulative Practice, Practice Test, of Bigideas Math Book Grade 1 Answers Ch 13 Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes. Score better grades in exams with the help of the BIM grade 1 Chapter 13 Answer Key and we don’t charge any amount for that. All you need to do is simply tap the links and get a grip on them.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Sort Two-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 2 Describe Two-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 3 Combine Two-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 4 Create More Shapes

Lesson: 5 Take Apart Two-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 6 Sort Three-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 7 Describe Three-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 8 Combine Three-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 9 Take Apart Three-Dimensional Shapes

Chapter – 13: Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes

Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
hexagon
square

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-1
Explanation:
Above given figures are
Square : A Square is a flat shape with 4 equal sides and every angle is a right angle (90°).
Hexagon : A regular hexagon is a closed shape polygon which has six equal sides and six equal angles. In case of any regular polygon, all its sides and angles are equal.
Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to identify the words. Find each word in the word search.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-2

Explanation:
Cone : A cone is a three- dimensional geometric shape that tapers smoothly from a flat base (frequently, though not necessarily, circular) to a point called the apex or vertex. In the above figure, the arrow is pointing towards the apex or vertex.
Cube: A line segment formed where two edges meet. A cube has 12 edges. Because all faces are squares and congruent to each other, all 12 edges are the same length. In the above figure, the arrow is pointing towards edge.
Triangle: In geometry, a triangle is a closed two- dimensional shape with three straight sides. A triangle is also a polygon. In the above figure the arrow is pointing towards side.

Lesson 13.1 Sort Two-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Sort the Shape Sort Cards. Explain how you sorted.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-3
Explanation:
Sort the Shape Sort Cards means we need some shapes, we take print out shapes(in color) and then cut them out, or print shapes(black and white) on different colors of paper or card, cut them out, then mix them up. Or we might like to color them by our self.  Now we have our shapes, let’s sort them by color. In the above figure we are given with shapes and shapes in color now we sort shapes according to colors as shown above.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Circle the closed shapes with 4 vertices.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-4
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have closed shapes with 4 vertices, so I have circled them. 2 are rectangles, one without color, one with blue color, one is square with no color, One is rhombus with blue in color these are closed shapes with 4 vertices.

Question 2.
Circle the closed shapes with no straight sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-5
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have closed shapes with no straight sides so I have circled them.
3 are circles, one without color, one with green color small in shape, One more circle in green color with little big in shape, these are closed shapes with no straight sides.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Circle the closed shapes with only 3 vertices.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-6
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have closed shapes with 3 vertices, so I have circled them. 3 are triangles, one without color, one with green color and one shape is right angled triangle these are closed shapes with 3 vertices.

Question 4.
Circle the closed shapes with only L-shaped vertices.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-7
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have closed shapes with only L-shaped vertices, so I have circled them. one rectangle without color, one square with purple color and one shape is right angled triangle with purple color these are closed shapes with only L-shaped vertices.

Question 5.
Circle the shapes with more than 4 straight sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-8
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have shapes with more than 4 straight sides, so I have circled them. one rectangle without color, one trapezium with no color
and one square with orange color are shapes with more than 4 straight sides.

Question 6.
Circle the shapes with 6 straight sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-9
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have shapes with 6 straight sides, so I have circled them. one little big hexagon without color  and one small hexagon with blue color are shapes with 6 straight sides.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw 2 different two-dimensional shapes that have only 4 straight sides.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-10

Explanation:
I have drawn 2 different two-dimensional shapes that have only 4 straight sides are square shape with no color and rectangle shape in green color both are two-dimensional shapes with only 4 straight sides.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Use the clues to color the picture.
Only 3 straight sides: blue
Only 4 straight sides: green
No straight sides: yellow
More than 4 vertices: red
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-11

Explanation:
I have used the given clues to color the picture.
Only 3 straight sides triangles with blue,
Only 4 straight sides square and rhombus with green,
No straight sides circles with yellow,
More than 4 vertices hexagon with red.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Use the clues to color the picture.
Only 3 vertices: green
All L-shaped vertices: orange
Only 4 straight sides and
no L-shaped vertices: blue
6 straight sides: yellow
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-12

Explanation:
I have used the given clues to color the picture.
Only 3 vertices triangles with green,
All L-shaped vertices rectangle with orange,
Only 4 straight sides rhombus and
no L-shaped vertices with blue,
6 straight sides hexagon with yellow.

Sort Two-Dimensional Shapes Practice 13.1

Question 1.
Circle the closed shapes with no straight sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 11
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-13
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have shapes with no straight sides, so I have circled them. one small circle with blue color, one little big circle with no color and one curve are shapes with no straight sides.

Question 2.
Circle the closed shapes with 4 sides of the same length.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-14Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-14
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have shapes with 4 sides of the same length, so I have circled them. one small rhombus with no color, one little big rhombus with green color and one square with no color are shapes with 4 sides of the same length.

Question 3.
Circle the shapes with no vertices.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 13
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-15
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have shapes with no vertices, so I have circled them. one small circle with no color, one little big circle with red color and one big circle with red color are shapes with vertices.

Question 4.
Circle the shapes with more than 4 vertices.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 14
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-16
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have shapes with more than 4 vertices, so I have circled them.
One is Pentagon with no color, one hexagon with orange color are shapes with more than 4 vertices.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw 2 different two-dimensional shapes with
2 long straight sides and 2 short straight sides.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-17
Explanation:
In the above figures we have drawn 2 different two-dimensional shapes one triangle  shape with 2 long straight sides and one rectangle shape  with 2 short straight sides.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Use the clues to color the picture.
Only 3 vertices: yellow
Only 4 sides: black
Only 1 straight side: orange
No straight sides: blue
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 15
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-18
Explanation:
Using the clues to colored the picture,
Only 3 vertices triangle with yellow,
Only 4 sides square with black,
Only 1 straight side semi circles with orange,
and no straight sides circles with blue.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-19
Explanation:
In the given images tennis bat is longer than the color brush so circled it with circle.

Lesson 13.2 Describe Two-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Which shape has three sides?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 17

Which shapes have 4 sides and 4 L-shaped vertices?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 18

Which shapes have 4 sides and no L-shaped vertices?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 19
Use your materials to build each shape you circled.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-20
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-21
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-22

Explanation:
Triangle shape has three sides,
Rectangle and Square shapes have 4 sides as 1,2,3,4 and
4 L-shaped vertices as a, b, c, d.
1 Trapezium, 2 rhombus are shapes have 4 sides as 1,2,3,4 and
no L-shaped vertices pointed them.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 20
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-23
Explanation:
Given Hexagon shape which has 6 straight sides as 1,2,3,4,5,6 and 6 vertices as a, b, c, d ,e, f.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 20
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-24
Explanation:
Given Hexagon shape which has 6 straight sides as 1,2,3,4,5,6 and 6 vertices as a, b, c, d ,e, f.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 22
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-25
Explanation:
Given right angled triangle has 3 straight sides as
1,2,3 and 3 vertices as a, b, c.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 23
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-26
Explanation:
Given rhombus has 4 straight sides as 1,2,3,4 and
4 vertices as a, b, c, d.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 24
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 13 Two - and Three - Dimensional Shapes-27
Explanation:
Given rhombus has 4 straight sides as 1,2,3,4 and
4 vertices as a, b, c, d.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 25
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-26
Explanation:
Given right angled triangle has 3 straight sides 1,2,3 and 3 vertices as a, b, c.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-27

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 27
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-28
Explanation:
Given Hexagon shape which has 6 straight sides as 1,2,3,4,5,6 and 6 vertices as a, b, c, d ,e, f.

Circle the attributes of the shape.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-29

Explanation:
Triangle has 3 straight sides and 3 vertices so circled the attributes of the shape.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 29
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-30
Explanation:
Square has 4 straight sides of the same length , 4 vertices and its closed shape so circled the attributes of the shape.

Question 11.
MP Precision
Match each shape with an attribute that describes it.
Circle                           Rectangle                   Hexagon
6 straight sides           0 vertices                    only 4 vertices
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-31
Explanation:
We know Circle has 0 vertices,
Rectangle has only 4 vertices and
Hexagon has 6 straight sides so matched
according to their attributes that describe shape about them.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A board game has ‘4 sides and 4 L-shaped vertices.
Name and draw two shapes for the board game.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 30
Circle: Square        Hexagon        Trapezoid      Rectangle
Draw shapes:
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-32
Explanation :
Circled Square and Rectangle.
Given a board game has ‘4 sides and 4 L-shaped vertices.
we can draw two shapes for the board game as
Square and Rectangle
with Square shape of 4 sides as 1,2,3,4 and
4 L-shaped vertices as a, b, c, d
and Rectangle shape of 4 sides as 1,2,3,4 and
4 L-shaped vertices as a, b, c, d.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
A board game has 4 sides and no L-shaped vertices.
Name and draw two shapes for the board game.
Circle: Triangle      Trapezoid       Rhombus      Square
Draw shapes:
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-33
Explanation:
Given a board game has 4 sides and no L-shaped vertices.
we can draw two shapes for the board game as
Trapezoid and Rhombus with as Trapezoid shape has 4 sides
as 1,2,3,4 and no L-shaped vertices
and Rhombus shape of 4 sides as 1,2,3,4 and
no L-shaped vertices.

Describe Two-Dimensional Shapes Practice 13.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 31
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-34
Explanation:
Given Hexagon shape which has 6 straight sides as 1,2,3,4,5,6 and 6 vertices as a, b, c, d ,e, f.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 32
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-36
Explanation:
Given rhombus has 4 straight sides as 1,2,3,4 and 4 vertices as a, b, c, d.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 33
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-37
Explanation:
Given circle has no straight sides and no vertices.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 34
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-38
Explanation:
Given triangle has 3 straight sides and 3 vertices.

Circle the attributes of the shape.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 35
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-39
Explanation:
Trapezoid has 4 straight sides and its closed shape so circled the attributes of the Trapezoid shape.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 36
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-40
Explanation:
Rectangle has 4 straight sides
and 4 vertices circled the attributes of the  Rectangle shape.

Question 7.
MP Precision
Match each shape with an attribute that describes it.
Triangle                             Trapezoid               Circle
only 3 straight sides          0 straight sides       4 vertices
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-41
Explanation:
We know Triangle has only 3 straight sides,
Trapezoid has 4 vertices and
Circle has 0 straight sides, so matched
according to their attributes that describe shape about them.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A photograph has 4 straight sides of the same length and 4 vertices. Draw and name two possible shapes for the photograph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 37

_Square___ , __Rhombus__
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-42
Explanation:
Given a photograph has 4 straight sides of the same length and 4 vertices.
So two possible shapes for the photograph are one is Square and one
is Rhombus both has 4 straight sides of the same length and 4 vertices.
So drawn as shown in the figure above.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
MP Reasoning
Which sentences are correct?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 38
There are 5 ponies.
There are 7 deer.
There are more goats than ponies.
The numbers of deer and goats are the same.
Answer:
Sentences  2. There are 7 deer and
3. There are more goats than ponies are correct.

Explanation:
Given 4 sentences as
There are 5 ponies.
There are 7 deer.
There are more goats than ponies.
The numbers of deer and goats are the same.
1.There are 5 ponies. which is incorrect as there are only 4 ponies,
2. There are 7 deer yes correct as there are 7 deer,
3. There are more goats than ponies correct because 8 goats are there
and 4 ponies so goats are more,
4. The numbers of deer and goats are the same is incorrect
as number of deer are 7 and goats are 8 both are not the same,
Therefore Sentences  2. There are 7 deer and
3. There are more goats than ponies are correct.

Lesson 13.3 Combine Two-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Use 2 triangles to make a new two-dimensional shape. Draw your shape.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 39
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-43
Explanation:
Using 2 triangles to make a new two-dimensional shape
We got Rhombus shape.

Use 3 triangles to make a new two-dimensional shape. Draw your shape.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 40
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-44
Explanation:
Using 3 triangles to make a new two-dimensional shape
We got Trapezoid shape.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 41
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-45
Explanation:
2 Trapezoids make a Hexagon.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 42
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-46
Explanation:
3 Rhombus make a Hexagon.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 43
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-47
Explanation:
2 Semi Circles make a one Circle.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 44
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-48
Explanation:
2 Right Angled Triangles make a Rectangle.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 45
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-49

Explanation:
3 Triangles make a Trapezoid.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 46
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-50

Explanation:
2 Squares make a Rectangle.

Question 7.
Draw the shape you can use 2 times to make a Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 47.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-51
Explanation:
We take 2 times trapezoid to make a hexagon as
shown in the figure above.

Question 8.
Draw the shape you can use 3 times to make a Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 47.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-52

Explanation:
We take 3 times rhombus to make a hexagon as
shown in the figure above.

Question 9.
MP Choose Tools
Which shape can you use 2 times to make a Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 48 ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 49
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-53
Explanation:
Triangle shape can be used 2 times to make a Rhombus
as shown in the figure.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw to show 2 different ways you can use pattern blocks to make the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 50
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-54

Explanation:
We can use 2 different ways pattern blocks to make the shape
one is of triangle and another is square.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Use the number of pattern blocks to fill the shape on the sign. How many of each block do you use? Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 51
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-55

Explanation:
First time we use 3  blocks of trapezoid pattern blocks to fill the shape on the sign, second time we use 4 blocks in that 3 blocks of triangles and 1 block of hexagon to fill the shape on the sign.

Show and Grow

Question 11.
Use 3 pattern blocks to fill the shape on the sign. How many of each block do you use? Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 52
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 53
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-56
Explanation:
We use 3 pattern blocks to fill the shape on the sign.
Each block of triangle, one trapezoid and one rhombus to fill the shape on the sign.

Combine Two-Dimensional Shapes Practice 13.3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 54
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-57
Explanation:
2 triangles make a rhombus as shown in the figure.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 55
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-58
Explanation:
As shown above in the figure 2 rhombus fill the shape of
the given sign.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 56
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-59
Explanation:
6 triangles make a hexagon as shown in the figure.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 57
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-60
Explanation:
2 quadrant makes a half semi circle as shown
in the figure above.

MP Choose Tools
Which 2 pattern blocks can you use to make the shape?
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 58
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-61
Explanation:
We use one rhombus and one triangle blocks to make
the trapezoid shape as shown in the figure.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 59
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-62
Explanation:
We use one rhombus and one triangle blocks to make
the triangle shape as shown in the figure.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
Use 5 pattern blocks to fill the shape on the sign. How many of each block do you use? Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 60
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-63
Explanation:
We have used 5 pattern blocks to fill the shape on the sign and 4 blocks of triangles,1 block of square, 2 trapezoids, 1 rhombus and 1 hexagon to complete the Newton’s house.

Review & Refresh

Write the name

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 61
______6____: ____00______ :__00________
Answer:
6:00:00

Explanation:
The clock is showing 6 Hours, Zero Minutes and Zero Seconds.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 62
___8_______: ___30_______: ___00_______
Answer:
8:30:00

Explanation:
The clock is showing 8 Hours, Thirty Minutes and Zero Seconds.

Lesson 13.4 Create More Shapes

Explore and Grow

Use two or more shapes to make the center of the flower. Use more shapes to fill in the rest of the flower.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 63
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 64
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-64
Explanation:
Used trapezoid, rhombus and triangle shapes to make the center of the flower
and used more shapes to fill in the rest of the flower.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 65 to make a Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 66. Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 67
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-65
Explanation:
4 quadrants makes a circle as shown in the figure,
Step 1: Take one quadrant place it,
Step 2 : Take one more quadrant and place it makes semi circle,
Step 3 : Place one more quadrant as shown,
Step 4 : Now placing one more quadrant
and joining all together makes a full circle as shown.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Use Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 68 to make a Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 69. Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 70
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-66
Explanation:
4 right angled triangles makes rectangle as shown in the figure,
Step 1: Take one right angled triangle place it,
Step 2 : Take one more right angled triangle and place it
as shown it becomes square
Step 3 : Place one right angled triangle as shown,
Step 4 : Now place one more right angled triangle as shown
now joining all together makes a rectangle full as shown.

Question 3.
Use Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 71 and Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 72 to make a Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 73. Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 74
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-67
Explanation:
4 triangles makes rhombus as shown in the figure,
Step 1: Take one triangle place it,
Step 2 : Take one more triangle and place it
as shown it becomes rhombus
Step 3 : Place one triangle as shown, it becomes trapezoid
Step 4 : Now place one more triangle as shown
now joining all together makes a rhombus full as shown.

Question 4.
Draw the shape you can use 3 times to make a Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 75.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-68
Explanation:
We take 3 quadrants to make a shape as shown in the figure,
Step 1: Take one quadrant place it,
Step 2 : Take one more quadrant and place it makes semi circle,
Step 3 : Place one more quadrant as shown,
and joining all together makes a shape as required.

Question 5.
Draw the shape you can use 4 times to make a Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 76.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-68
Explanation:
We can use triangle 4 times to make a Triangle as
shown in four steps above.
Step 1: Take one triangle place it,
Step 2 : Take one more triangle and place it beside
the first one we get rhombus,
Step 3 : Place one more triangle beside rhombus as shown,
we get trapezoid,
Step 4: Now we place one more triangle on top of
trapezoid after joining all together makes a triangle shape.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw to show two different ways you con join the shapes on the left to make the larger shape.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 77
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-69
Explanation:
First Way
Step 1: We take rectangle as shown
Step 2: We take one right angled triangle and join
Step 3: We take one more right angled triangle and place
with another right angled triangle as shown above we get the larger shape.
Second Way:
Step 1: Here we first place right angled triangle,
Step 2 : Take another right angled triangle and place as shown
beside the previous right angled triangle,
Step 3 : Now we join with a rectangle as shown ,
we get the larger shape.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Use pattern blocks to complete the puzzle. How many of each block do you use? Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 78
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 79
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-70
Explanation:
As shown above used 2 triangles, 1 square,
1 trapezoid, 3 rhombus and 1 more rhombus pattern
to complete the puzzle.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
Use pattern blocks to complete the puzzle. How many of each block do you use? Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 80
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 81
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-71

Explanation:
As shown above used 5 triangles, 1 square,
2 rhombus, 2 trapezoid and 1 more rhombus pattern
blocks to complete the puzzle.

Create More Shapes Practice 13.4

Question 1.
Use Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 82 to make a larger Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 82. Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 83
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-72

Explanation:
We can use square 4 times to make a Square as
shown in four steps above.
Step 1: Take one  square place it,
Step 2 : Take one more square and place it below
the first one we get rectangle,
Step 3 : Place one more square beside as shown,
Step 4: Now we place one more square as shown
after joining all together makes a square shape.

Question 2.
Use Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 84 to make a Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 85. Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 86
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-73
Explanation:
We can use right angled triangles 4 times to make a Rhombus as
shown in four steps above.
Step 1: Take one right angled triangle place it,
Step 2 : Take one more right angled  triangle and place it beside
the first one as shown
Step 3 : Place one more right angled triangle as shown,
Step 4: Now we place one more right angled triangle
after joining all together makes a rhombus shape.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw to show two ways you can combine the 3 shapes on the left to make the larger shape.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 87
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-74
Explanation:
First Way
Step 1: We take square as shown,
Step 2: We take one rectangle and join with square,
Step 3: We take one more square and place
as shown above we get the larger shape.
Second Way:
Step 1: Here we first place rectangle,
Step 2 : Take square and place as shown,
Step 3 : Now we take one more square and join
as shown in figure, we get the larger shape.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Use pattern blocks to complete the puzzle. How many of each block do you use? Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 88
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 89
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-75
Explanation:
As shown above used 1 triangle, 2 squares,
3 rhombus, 2 trapezoid and 1 more rhombus pattern
blocks to complete the puzzle.

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 90
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-76
17 is less than 19.

Explanation:
As 17 is less than < 19,  we select less than.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 91
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-77
12 is greater than 11.

Explanation:
As 12 is greater than > 11, we select greater than

Lesson 13.5 Take Apart Two-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Draw lines to take apart each figure.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 92
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-78
Explanation:
1. We draw lines to show two rectangles as
shown in the above figure,
2.  We draw lines to show four squares as
shown in the above figure,
3. We draw lines to show two triangles and one
rectangle as shown in the above figure,
4. We draw lines to show two triangles and two
square as shown in the above figure.

Show and Grow

Draw one line to show the parts.

Question 1.
2 triangles
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 93
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-79
Explanation:
Drawn one line in between rectangle,
as shown we get 2 triangles.

Question 2.
2 triangles
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 94
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-80
Explanation:
Drawn one line in between rectangle,
as shown we get 2 triangles.

Question 3.
2 trapezoids
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 95
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-81
Explanation:
Drawn one line in between trapezoid,
as shown we get 2 trapezoids.

Question 4.
1 triangle and 1 trapezoid
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 96
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-82
Explanation:
Drawn one line in between triangle
as shown we get 1 triangle and  1 trapezoid.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw one line to show the parts.

Question 5.
2 triangles
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 97
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-83

Explanation:
Drawn one line in between triangle
as shown we get 2 triangles.

Question 6.
2 squares
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 98
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-84
Explanation:
Drawn one line in between rectangle
as shown we get 2 squares.

Draw two lines to show the parts.

Question 7.
2 triangles and 1 trapezoid
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 99
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-86
Explanation:
Drawn two lines in between rectangle
as shown we get 2 triangles and 1 trapezoid.

Question 8.
2 triangles and 1 rectangle
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 100
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-87

Explanation:
Drawn two lines in between hexagon
as shown we get 2 triangles and 1 rectangle.

Question 9.
MP Reasoning
Show how to use the shapes to make the hexagon.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 101
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-88
Explanation:
In first hexagon shape we made 1 trapezoid and
3 triangles are made as shown in the figure.
In second hexagon shape we made 2 rhombus and
2 triangles as shown in the figure.

Question 10.
MP Reasoning
Show how to use the shapes to make a circle. How many of each shape do you use?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 102
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-89
Explanation:
In the first circle we need 4 quadrants to make a circle,
In second circle we need 2 semi circles to make a circle.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

How many squares can you find on the Four Square court?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 103
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 104
_____5_______ squares
Answer:
We have 5 squares in a Four Square Court.

Explanation:
We are given with a Four Square Court,
in that we have 4 squares and the outer boundary has
one square making in total 5 squares..

Show and Grow

Question 11.
How many squares can you find on the magic square?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 105
_____14_______ squares
Answer:
We have 14 squares on the magic square

Explanation:
We are given the magic square on that we have first 9 squares plus
one in the outer boundary, 4 squares of 4 blocks from the 9 squares.

Take Apart Two-Dimensional Shapes Practice 13.5

Draw one line to show the parts.

Question 1.
2 trapezoids
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 106
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-90

Explanation:
Drawn one line in between Hexagon,
as shown we get 2 trapezoids.

Question 2.
1 rectangle and 1 square
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 107
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-91

Explanation:
Drawn one line in between Rectangle,
as shown we get 1 rectangle and 1 square .

Draw two lines to show the parts.

Question 3.
3 triangles
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 108
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-92

Explanation:
Drawn two lines in between Trapezoid
as shown we get 3 triangles.

Question 4.
1 rectangle and 2 triangles
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 109
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-93

Explanation:
Drawn two lines in between Square
as shown we get 1 rectangle and 2 triangles.

Question 5.
MP Reasoning
Show how to use the shapes to make the Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 110.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 111
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-94

Explanation:
In first rhombus shape we made 1 rhombus and
2 triangles are made as shown in the figure.
In second rhombus shape we made 1 trapezoid and
1 triangle as shown in the figure.

Question 6.
MP Reasoning
Show how to use the shapes to make the hexagon. How many of each shape do you use?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 112
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-95

Explanation:
In first we use 3 rhombus to make a hexagon
as shown in the figure.
In second we use 6 triangles to make a hexagon
as shown in the figure.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
How many triangles are in Descartes’s design?

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-96
Explanation:
In Descartes’s design we have total 5 triangles,
4 inside the triangle and one outer boundary,
Making a total of 5 triangles in Descartes’s design.

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
Circle the three-dimensional shapes. Draw rectangles around the two-dimensional shapes.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 114
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-97
Explanation:
Circled the three -dimensional shapes cube, books and sphere. Drawn rectangle around the dollar because it is a two-dimensional shape.

Lesson 13.6 Sort Three-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Sort the Three-Dimensional Shape Cards. Explain how you sorted.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-98

Explanation:
Sort the Shape Cards means we need some shapes,
we take print out shapes(in color) and then cut them out,
or print shapes(black and white) on different colors of paper or card,
cut them out, then mix them up. Or we might like to color them
by our self.  Now we have our three dimensional shapes, let’s sort them by
shape and name. In the above figure we are given with shape name,
now we sort shapes according to their names as shown above.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Circle the shapes with flat surfaces that are circles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 115
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-99
Explanation:

Circled the shapes 2 cones, 3 cylinders as they have
flat surfaces that are circles.

Question 2.
Circle the shapes with both flat and curved surfaces.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 116
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-100
Explanation:
Circled the shapes with both flat and curved surfaces
as 2 cones, 2 cubes , 1 cuboid and 2 cylinders.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Circle the shapes with 1 or more flat surfaces.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 117
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-101
Explanation:
Circled the shapes with 1 or more flat surfaces,
as 2 cubes, 1 cone, 1 cuboid and 2 cylinders.

Question 4.
Circle the shapes with a curved surface.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 118
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-102

Explanation:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-103
We know Cylinder, Cone, Sphere have curved
face so circled 2 cones, 2 spheres and one cylinder
shapes as they have curved surface.

Question 5.
Circle the shapes with only 2 flat surfaces.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 119
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-104

Explanation:
Circled the shapes with only 2 flat surfaces are
2 cylinders as shown in picture above.

Question 6.
MP Structure
Match each shape to its group.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 120
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-105

Explanation:
Matched each shape according to its group as
Cube and Cuboid has only flat surfaces, Cone &
Cylinder have flat and curved surfaces and Sphere
have only a curved surface.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You need to find an object that has no flat surfaces for a scavenger hunt. Circle the objects you can use.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 121
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-106
Explanation:
Objects that has no flat surfaces for a scavenger hunt are
Big Ball, Cool Drink Tin and Cricket Ball circled them as
shown in the figure above.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
You need to find an object that has only two flat surfaces for a scavenger hunt. Circle the objects you can use.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 122
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-107
Explanation:
Object that has only two flat surfaces for a scavenger hunt are
1 Musical Drum, 1 Log and Colored Cylinder so circled them as
shown in the figure above.

Sort Three-Dimensional Shapes Practice 13.6

Question 1.
Circle the shapes with no flat surface.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 123
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-108
Explanation:
Circled the shapes with no flat surface
as 3 spheres as shown in the figure.

Question 2.
Circle the shapes with flat surfaces that are rectangles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 124
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-109
Explanation:
Circled the shapes with flat surfaces that are rectangles
as 3 cuboids as shown in the figure above.

Question 3.
Circle the shapes with more than 2 flat surfaces
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 125
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-110
Explanation:
Circled the shapes with more than 2 flat surfaces as
2 cuboids, 1 cube and one cylinder as shown in the figure above.

Question 4.
MP Structure
Match each shape to its group.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 126
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-111

Explanation:
Matched each shape according to its group as
Sphere have no flat surface, Cuboid, Cylinder and
Cube have more than 1 flat surface, Cone have only 1
flat surface.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You need to find an object that has both flat and curved surfaces for a scavenger hunt. Circle the objects you can use.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 127
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-112
Explanation:
Objects that has both flat and curved surfaces for a scavenger hunt
are one cuboid shaped, one cone shaped, one clay, one glass jar,
one glue stick, one tin so circled them as shown in the figure above.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
30 + 30 = ___60__
Answer:
30 + 30 = 60

Explanation:
Given expression as 30 + 30 we add we get
result as 60.

Question 7.
60 + 20 = ____80__
Answer:
60 + 20 = 80

Explanation:
Given expression as 60 + 20 we add we get
result as 80.

Question 8.
50 + 10 = ___60____
Answer:
50 + 10 = 60

Explanation:
Given expression as 50 + 10 we add we get
result as 60.

Question 9.
30 + 40 = ____70___
Answer:
30 + 40 = 70

Explanation:
Given expression as 30 + 40 we add we get
result as 70.

Lesson 13.7 Describe Three-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Use your materials to build one of the three dimensional shapes shown. Circle the shape you make. How many flat surfaces does your shape have? How many vertices does your shape have?

____6_____ flat surfaces

_____8_____ vertices
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 128
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-113
Explanation:
We have build three dimensional shape of a Cube as shown above,
A cube has 6 flat surfaces as (HEAD, GFBC, ABFE, DCGH, HEFG, ABCD),
A cube has 8 vertices as 8 (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H).

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 129
__6_______ flat surfaces ____8_____ vertices ____12_____ edges
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-114
Explanation:
A cuboid is a three dimensional shape has 6 flat surfaces,
8 vertices and 12 edges as shown above.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 130
__2______ flat surfaces _____0____ vertices ____0_____ edges
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-115
Explanation:
A cylinder is a three dimensional shape has 2 flat surfaces,
0 vertices and 0 edges as shown above.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 131
___6______ flat surfaces ____8_____ vertices ______12___ edges
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-116
Explanation:
A cuboid three dimensional shape  has 6 flat surfaces,
8 vertices and 12 edges as shown above.

Circle the attributes of the shape.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 132
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-117
Explanation:
Cone is a three dimensional shape,
A cone has 1 flat surfaces, 1 vertices so circled attributes as
1 flat surface.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 133
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-118
Explanation:
Cube is a three dimensional shape,
A cube has 6 flat surfaces , 8 vertices and 12 edges so
circled the attributes as 6 flat surfaces and 12 edges.

Question 6.
I am a three-dimensional shape that has no flat surfaces, no vertices, and no edges. What am I?
_Sphere.___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-119
Explanation:
A three-dimensional shape that has no flat surfaces,
no vertices, and no edges is a Sphere.

Question 7.
I am a three-dimensional shape that has I flat surface, I vertex, and no edges. What am I?
______Cone__.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-120
Explanation:
A three-dimensional shape that has 1 flat surface,
1 vertex and no edges is Cone.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton buys an item that has 2 more flat surfaces than edges. Which item does he buy?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 134
Answer:
Newton buys Dog Food which has 2 more
flat surfaces than edges.

Explanation:
As in given images we have Dog Food which is in cylinder
shape and has 2 more flat surfaces than edges So Newton
buys Dog Food.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Circle the object below the table that has 0 flat surfaces. Draw a line through the object above the basketball that has 12 edges.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 135
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-121
Explanation:
Circled the object basket ball below the table that has 0 flat surfaces
and I have drawn a line through the tissue paper box
above the basketball that has 12 edges which is in cuboid shape.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Circle the object in front of the campers that has more than 2 flat surfaces. Draw a line through the object behind the logs that has I vertex and I flat surface.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 136
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-122

Explanation:
Circled the objects in front of the campers that has more than 2 flat surfaces are First Aid Box, Dust Bin Box and Logs , drawn a line through the object
Foot Ball behind the logs that has I vertex and I flat surface are tent, 1 light display in cone shape as shown in the image above.

Describe Three-Dimensional Shapes Practice 13.7

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 137
____0_____ flat surfaces ____0_____ vertices ____0___ edges
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-123
0 flat surfaces, 0 vertices and 0 edges.

Explanation:
A sphere has 0 flat surfaces, 0 vertices and 0 edges.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 138
__6___ flat surfaces ____8___ vertices ___12__ edges
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-124
Explanation:
Cube is a three dimensional shape,
A cube has 6 flat surfaces , 8 vertices and 12 edges.

Question 3.
Circle the shape that has the same number of vertices as edges.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 139
Answer:
Cylinder
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-125
Explanation:
Cylinder has the same number of vertices as edges that
is zero. So we circled the shape cylinder.

Question 4.
Circle the shape that has the same number of faces as vertices.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 140
Answer:
Cone
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-126
Explanation:
Cone has the same number of faces as vertices as it has
1 flat surface and 1 vertices so we circled the shape cone.

Circle the attributes of the shape.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 141
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-127
Explanation:
Cylinder has 2 flat surfaces so circled the attributes of it.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 142
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-128
Explanation:
Given Rectangular Prism it is a three – dimensional shape,
with 12 edges so circled the attributes of them as shown above.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Descartes buys an item that has 2 fewer flat surfaces than vertices.
Which item does he buy?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 143
Answer:
Descartes buy CAT TREATS that has 2 fewer flat surfaces than vertices.

Explanation:
As CAT TREATS is in shape of cuboid shape,
as we know a cuboid has 6 flat surfaces and 8 vertices,
So Descartes buy CAT TREATS which has 2 fewer
flat surfaces than vertices.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Circle the object next to the hat that has 6 square flat surfaces. Draw a line through the object in front of the hat that has 0 edges and 1 vertex.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 144
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-129
Explanation:
Circled the objects next to the hat that has 6 square flat surfaces
are cube object and cuboid object which have 6 flat surfaces,
The objects in front of the hat is paint bucket so drawn a line to
objects that has 0 edges and 1 vertex are traffic cones, one small cone
as shown in the picture above.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
20 + 18 = ______38_____
Answer:
20 + 18 = 38

Explanation:
Given expression as 20 + 18 we add we get
result as 38.

Question 10.
40 + 25 = ____65______
Answer:
40 + 25 = 65

Explanation:
Given expression as 40 + 25 we add we get
result as 65.

Question 11.
36 + 69 = ___105________
Answer:
36 + 69 = 105

Explanation:
Given expression as 36 + 69 we add we get
result as 105.

Question 12.
9 + 90 = _____99______
Answer:
9 + 90 = 99

Explanation:
Given expression as 9 + 90 we add we get
result as 99.

Question 13.
18 + 70 = _____88______
Answer:
18 + 70 = 88

Explanation:
Given expression as 18 + 70  we add we get
result as 88.

Question 14.
27 + 50 = ____77_______
Answer:
27 + 50 = 77

Explanation:
Given expression as 27 + 50 we add we get
result as 77.

Lesson 13.8 Combine Three-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Which three-dimensional shapes can you make using cubes? Build one of the shapes.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 145
Answer:
Cuboid
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-130
Explanation:
Using cubes we came make three-dimensional shape as cuboid
as shown above.

Show and Grow

Circle the new shape that you can make.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 146
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-131
Explanation:
Given shapes are cube and cone using them we get new shape
cube with cone circled as shown in the picture above.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 147
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-132
Explanation:
Given shapes are cylinder and cuboid using them we get new shape
cylinder with cuboid circled as shown in the picture above.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Circle the new shape that you can make.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 148
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-133
Explanation:
Given shapes are cubes using them we get new shape
as cube on cube circled as shown in the picture above.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 149
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-134
Explanation:
Given shapes are cone and cuboid using them we get new shape
as cone with cuboid circled as shown in the picture above.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 150
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-135
Explanation:
Given shapes are cylinder and cube using them we get new shape
as cylinder with cube circled as shown in the picture above.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
How many cubes do you need in all to make the next shape?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 151
_____9_____ cubes
Answer:
9 cubes are needed to make the next shape

Explanation:
Given in first shape it is 3 cubes, next shape it is 5 cubes,
in 3rd shape it has 7 cubes as it is increasing by two
or  plus two so the next shape will have 7 + 2 = 9 cubes.
Therefore we need 9 cubes to make the next shape.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You build a wall. It is 5 cubes long and 2 cubes tall.
Your friend builds a wall. It is 4 cubes long and 2 cubes tall.
How many more cubes do you use than your friend?
Draw Pictures:     You                     Friend

Equation:

_____1_____ more cubes
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-136
I used 1 more cube than my friend.

Explanation:
Given I build a wall with 5 cubes long and 2 cubes tall
makes in total 7 blocks and friend builds a wall which has
4 cubes long and 2 cubes tall makes in total of 6 blocks,
So I used one more cube than my friend.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
You build a wall. It is 3 cubes long and 3 cubes tall. Your friend builds a wall.
It is 5 cubes long and 3 cubes tall. How many more cubes does your friend use than you?
Draw Pictures:      You                     Friend

Equation:

____2______ more cubes
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-137
Friend used 2 more cubes than mine.

Explanation:
Given I build a wall with 3 cubes long and 3 cubes tall makes in total 6 blocks and friend builds a wall which has 5 cubes long and 3 cubes tall makes in total of 8 blocks, So my friend used two more cubes than me.

Combine Three-Dimensional Shapes Practice 13.8

Circle the new shape that you can make.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 152
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-138
Explanation:
Given shapes are cone and cylinder using them we get new shape
as cone with cylinder circled as shown in the picture above.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 153
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-139
Explanation:
Given shapes are 2 cylinders using them we get new shape
as cylinder with cylinder circled as shown in the picture above.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
How many cubes do you need in all to make the next shape?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 154
______13_______ cubes
Answer:
13 cubes are needed to make the next shape

Explanation:
Given in first shape it is 1 cube, next shape it is 5 cubes,
in 3rd shape it has 9 cubes as it is increasing by four
or  plus four so the next shape will have 9 + 4 = 13 cubes.
Therefore we need 13 cubes to make the next shape.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You build a wall that is 2 cubes long and ‘4 cubes tall. Your friend builds a wall that is 4 cubes long and 3 cubes tall. How many more cubes does your friend use than you?

_____one________ more cubes
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-140
Friend used 1 more cube than mine.

Explanation:
Given I build a wall with 2 cubes long and 4 cubes tall makes in total 6 blocks and friend builds a wall which has 4 cubes long and 3 cubes tall makes in total of 7 blocks, So my friend used one more cube than me.

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 155
___black______, __green_______, __yellow_______
Answer:
Order from shortest to longest is black, green, yellow

Explanation:
Given color brushes we sort according to the order as among three colors green is least small next small is green brush and the most longest is yellow so order from shortest to longest is black, green, yellow.

Lesson 13.9 Take Apart Three-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Circle the three-dimensional shapes used to build the castle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 156
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-141
Cone, Cylinder and Cuboid.

Explanation:
We circled the three-dimensional shapes cone, cylinder and
cuboid which are used to build the castle.

Show and Grow

Circle the shapes that make up the structure.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 157
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-142
One Cylinder and One Cone

Explanation:
As shown we use 1 cylinder and 1 cone three-dimensional
shapes to make up the given structure.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 158
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-143
Two Cylinders

Explanation:
As shown we use 2 cylinders three-dimensional
shape to make up the given structure.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 159
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-144
Six Cubes and One Cylinder

Explanation:
As shown we use 6 cubes and 1 cylinder three-dimensional
shapes to make up the given structure.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 160
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-145
Three Cones, One Cuboid and Two Cylinders

Explanation:
As shown we use 3 cones, 1 cuboid and 2 cylinders
three-dimensional shapes to make up the given structure.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Circle the shapes that make up the structure.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 161
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-146
Four Cubes, One Cuboid and One Cone

Explanation:
As shown we use 4 cubes, 1 cuboid and 1 cone
three-dimensional shapes to make up the given structure.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 162
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-147
Four Cubes, Two Cuboids and One Cylinder

Explanation:
As shown we use 4 cubes, 2 cuboid and 1 cylinder
three-dimensional shapes to make up the given structure.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 163
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-148
Three Cubes, Three Cylinders and One Cone

Explanation:
As shown we use 3 cubes, 3 cylinders and 1 cone
three-dimensional shapes to make up the given structure.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 164
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-149
Three Cubes, Three Cylinders, Three Cones and One Cuboid

Explanation:
As shown we use 3 cubes, 3 cylinders, 3 cones and 1 cuboid
three-dimensional shapes to make up the given structure.

Question 9.
MP Reasoning
Which two structures are the same?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 165
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-150
Structure 1 and structure 3 are the same

Explanation:
Structure 1 has six cubes and structure 3 has three cubes with 1 cuboid
both make the same structure, So Structure 1 and  Structure 3 are the same.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

How many of each shape make up the gate?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 166
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-151
6 cubes, 1 rectangular prism, 2 cylinders and 2 cones.

Explanation:
The gate is made up of 6 cubes, 1 rectangular prism,
2 cylinders and 2 cones.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
How many of each shape make up the bridge?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 167
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-152
4 cubes and  7 rectangular prisms

Explanation:
The bridge is made up of 4 cubes and  7 rectangular prisms.

Take Apart Three-Dimensional Shapes Practice 13.9

Circle the shapes that make up the structure.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 168
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-153
Three Cubes

Explanation:
As shown we use 3 cubes three-dimensional shape
to make up the given structure.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 169
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-154
Two Cylinders and Two Cuboids

Explanation:
As shown we use 2 cylinders and 2 cuboids
three-dimensional shapes to make up the given structure.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 170
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-155
Three Cubes, Two Cylinders and Three Cones

Explanation:
As shown we use 3 cubes , 2 cylinders and 3 cones
three-dimensional shapes to make up the given structure.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 171
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-156
Two Cubes, One Cylinder, One Cuboid and One Cone

Explanation:
As shown we use 2 cubes , 1 cylinder, 1 Cuboid and 1 cone
three-dimensional shapes to make up the given structure.

Question 5.
MP Reasoning
Which two structures are the same?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 173
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-157
Structure 2 and structure 3 are the same

Explanation:
Structure 2 has six cubes and 1 cuboid and
structure 3 has three cuboids both make the same structure,
So Structure 2 and  Structure 3 are the same.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
How many of each shape make up the castle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 173
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-158
6 cubes, 5 rectangular prisms, 8 cylinders and 4 cones.

Explanation:
The gate is made up of 6 cubes, 5 rectangular prisms,
8 cylinders and 4 cones.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
12 + 7 = _____19______
Answer:
12 + 7 = 19

Explanation:
Given expression as 12 + 7 we add we get
result as 19.

Question 8.
42 + 14 = ___56________
Answer:
42 + 14 = 56

Explanation:
Given expression as 42 + 14 we add we get
result as 56.

Question 9.
25 + 32 = _____57______
Answer:
25 + 32 = 57

Explanation:
Given expression as 25 + 32 we add we get
result as 57.

Question 10.
68 + 11 = _____79______
Answer:
68 + 11 = 79

Explanation:
Given expression as 68 + 11 we add we get result as 79.

Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes Performance Task

Question 1.
Use the clues to finish the two-dimensional sand castle drawing.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 174

  • The flag on the castle is a closed shape with only 3 straight sides.
  • The handle of the shovel is a closed shape with L-shaped vertices and 4 sides of the same length.
  • The window on the castle is a closed shape with only 6 straight sides.
  • The door on the castle is a closed shape with 4 sides that you can use 2 times to make a square.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-159
Explanation:
Used the given clues to finish the two-dimensional sand castle drawing.
* The flag on the castle is a closed shape with only 3 straight sides is
triangle,
* The handle of the shovel is a closed shape with L-shaped vertices and
4 sides of the same length is a square,
* The window on the castle is a closed shape with only 6 straight sides
is a hexagon,
* The door on the castle is a closed shape with 4 sides so used
2 times rectangle to make a square.

Question 2.
You are building a sand castle using these three-dimensional shapes.

  • 4 shapes that have square flat surfaces
  • 5 shapes that have 2 flat surfaces and no vertices
  • 3 shapes that have the same number of flat surfaces as vertices

a. Which shape is missing from the sand castle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 175
Answer:
Hexagon three-dimensional shape is missing from the sand castle.

Explanation:
We can use Hexagon three-dimensional shape as missing from the sand castle. We can use for the windows on the castle as a closed shape
with only 6 straight sides.
So hexagon three-dimensional shape is missing from the sand castle.

b. Color a flat surface to show where you would stack the missing shape to
complete the sand castle.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-160
Colored hexagon shape.

Explanation:
Colored a flat surface windows to show where I would stack the missing shape hexagon to complete the sand castle.

Two – and Three – Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice

Sort Two-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 13.1

Question 1.
Circle the closed shapes with only 3 straight sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 176
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-161
Explanation:
In the above given figures we have closed shapes
with only 3 straight sides. so I have circled them.
2 are triangles, one triangle with orange color, one right angle triangle
with blue color these are triangles with closed shapes with only 3 straight sides.

Question 2.
MP Structure
Draw 2 different two-dimensional shapes that have 1 or more L-shaped vertices.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-162
Square and Rectangle

Explanation:
Drawn 2 different two-dimensional shapes one is Square and
other is Rectangle that have 1 or more L-shaped vertices as shown in
the picture above.

Describe Two-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 13.2

Circle the attributes of the shape.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 177
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-163

Explanation:
Hexagon has 6 straight sides of the
same length, its closed shape so
circled the attributes of the shape.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 178
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-164
Explanation:
Rhombus shape has 4 straight sides of the
same length and 4 vertices, so
circled the attributes of the shape.

Combine Two-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 13.3

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 179
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-165

Explanation:
6 triangles make a hexagon as shown in the figure.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 180
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-166
Explanation:
3 Triangles make a Trapezoid.

Create More Shapes Homework & Practice 13.4

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 181
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-167
Explanation:
We can use right angled triangles 4 times to make a Rectangle as
shown in four steps above.
Step 1: Take one right angled triangle place it,
Step 2 : Take one more right angled  triangle and place it beside
the first one as shown,
Step 3 : Place one more right angled triangle as shown,
Step 4: Now we place one more right angled triangle
after joining all together makes a Rectangle shape.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 182
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-168
Explanation:
We can use 2 times of quadrants and 2 squares to make the given
shape as shown in four steps above.
Step 1: Take one quadrants place it,
Step 2 : Take one more quadrants and place it beside
the first one as shown,
Step 3 : Place one square as shown,
Step 4: Now we place one more square beside the previous one
after joining all together makes a required shape as shown.

Take Apart Two-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 13.5

Draw two lines to show the parts.

Question 9.
1 square and 2 triangles
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 183
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-169
1 square and 2 triangles

Explanation:
Drawn one line in between rectangle
as shown we get 2 squares in one square
we draw one more line as shown we get 2 triangles
we get now 1 square and 2 triangles.

Question 10.
2 triangles and 1 square
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 184
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-170
2 triangles and 1 square

Explanation:
Drawn one line in between trapezoid
as shown we get 1 right angled triangle and
we draw one more line as shown we get 1 more
right angled triangle and center we get a square
we get now 2 right angled triangles and 1 square.

Sort Three-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 13.6

Question 11.
Circle the shapes with flat surfaces that are all squares.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 185
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-171
Explanation:
Circled the shapes with flat surfaces that are all squares are
2 cubes and 2 cuboids as shown in the figure above.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
You need to find an object that has only flat surfaces for a scavenger hunt. Circle the objects you can use.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 186
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-172
Explanation:
Objects that has only flat surfaces for a scavenger hunt are
Box and  Match Box so circled them as shown in the figure above.

Describe Three-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 13.7

Circle the attributes of the shape.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 187
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-173
Explanation:
Given Rectangular Prism shape it has 6 flat surfaces,
with 12 edges so circled the attributes of them as shown above.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 188
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-174
Explanation:
Given Sphere shape it has 0 flat surfaces,
with 0 edges so circled the attributes of them as shown above.

Combine Three-Dimensional Shapes Homework &
Practice 13.8

Question 15.
Circle the new shape that you can make.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 189
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-175
Explanation:
Given shapes are 1 cylinder and 1 cube using them we get new shape
as cylinder with cube so circled it as shown in the picture above.

Take Apart Three-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 13.9

Question 16.
Circle the shapes that make up the structure.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two-and Three-Dimensional Shapes 190
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-13-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-176

Explanation:
As shown we use 6 cubes, 1 cylinder and 2 cuboids three-dimensional shapes to make up the given structure.

Conclusion:

Hoping that Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 13 Two – and Three-Dimensional Shapes has helped you clear your queries. Access the BIM Grade 3 Answer Key Ch 13 for free of cost prepared by math experts. Stay glued to get the Solutions for all Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis & Displays

Need an opportunity to become math proficient? Then, this article will help you to turn like that. As this page holds benefitted Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays Questions to solve and improve subject knowledge. Students who want to practice all topics from ch 11 Data Analysis and Displays can explore BIM algebra 1 ch 11 solution key pdf. Enhance your math skills with the help of 11.1 to 11.5 Exercises Questions, Practice Tests, Cumulative Assessment, Review Tests, Quiz, etc. involve in the BigIdeas Math Book Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays Solution Key.

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Textbook Solutions for Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays

Make a great move at the time of your practice sessions or exam preparation by using the ultimate guide of Big Ideas Math Book Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays. This guide can help each and every learner by providing a deep level & step by step explanation about the concepts of Algebra 1 Ch 11. You can also make use of this BIM Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays as quick revision material during exams.

These solutions are prepared by the subject experts as per the Common Core Curriculum. Click on the direct links available here and start practicing the respective Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Textbook Answers of Chapter 11 concepts for better knowledge and performance in the annual exams.

Data Analysis and Displays Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

The table shows the results of a survey. Display the data in a histogram.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 1
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 2
Answer:

The table shows the results of a survey. Display the data in a circle graph.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 3
Answer:

Question 4.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Twenty people respond “yes” or “no” to a survey question. Let a and b represent the frequencies of the responses. What must be true about the sum of a and b? What must be true about the sum when “maybe” is an option for the response?
Answer:

Data Analysis and Displays Mathematical Practices

Mathematically proficient students use diagrams and graphs to show relationships between data. They also analyze data to draw conclusions.
Using Data Displays
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 4

Monitoring Progress
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 5
Question 1.
The table shows the estimated populations of males and females by age in the United States in 2012. Use a spreadsheet, graphing calculator, or some other form of technology to make two different displays for the data.
Answer:

Question 2.
Explain why you chose each type of data display in Monitoring Progress Question 1. What conclusions can you draw from your data displays?
Answer:

Lesson 11.1 Measures of Center and Variation

Essential Question
How can you describe the variation of a data set?

EXPLORATION 1
Describing the Variation of Data
Work with a partner. The graphs show the weights of the players on a professional football team and a professional baseball team.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 1
a. Describe the data in each graph in terms of how much the weights vary from the mean. Explain your reasoning.
b. Compare how much the weights of the players on the football team vary from the mean to how much the weights of the players on the baseball team vary from the mean.
c. Does there appear to be a correlation between the body weights and the positions of players in professional football? in professional baseball? Explain.
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Describing the Variation of Data
Work with a partner. The weights (in pounds) of the players on a professional basketball team by position are as follows.
Power forwards: 235, 255, 295, 245; small forwards: 235, 235;
centers: 255, 245, 325; point guards: 205, 185, 205; shooting guards: 205, 215, 185
Make a graph that represents the weights and positions of the players. Does there appear to be a correlation between the body weights and the positions of players in professional basketball? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Communicate Your Answer
Question 3.
How can you describe the variation of a data set?
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
WHAT IF?
The park hires another student at an hourly wage of $8.45. (a) How does this additional value affect the mean, median, and mode? Explain. (b) Which measure of center best represents the data? Explain.
Answer:

Question 2.
The table shows the annual salaries of the employees of an auto repair service. (a) Identify the outlier. How does the outlier affect the mean, median, and mode? (b) Describe one possible explanation for the outlier.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 2
Answer:

Question 3.
After the first week, the 25-year-old is voted off Show A and the 48-year-old is voted off Show B. How does this affect the range of the ages of the remaining contestants on each show in Example 3? Explain.
Answer:

Question 4.
Find the standard deviation of the ages for Show B in Example 3. Interpret your result.
Answer:

Question 5.
Compare the standard deviations for Show A and Show B. What can you conclude?
Answer:

Question 6.
Find the mean, median, mode, range, and standard deviation of the altitudes of the airplanes when each altitude increases by \(\frac{1}{2}\) miles.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 3
Answer:

Measures of Center and Variation 11.1 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
In a data set, what does a measure of center represent? What does a measure of variation describe?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a1

Question 2.
WRITING
Describe how removing an outlier from a data set affects the mean of the data set.
Answer:

Question 3.
OPEN-ENDED
Create a data set that has more than one mode.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a3

Question 4.
REASONING
What is an advantage of using the range to describe a data set? Why do you think the standard deviation is considered a more reliable measure of variation than the range?
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 5–8, (a) Find the mean, median, and mode of the data set and (b) determine which measure of center best represents the data. Explain. (See Example 1.)
Question 5.
3, 5, 1, 5, 1, 1, 2, 3, 15
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a5
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a13

Question 6.
12, 9, 17, 15, 10
Answer:

Question 7.
13, 30, 16, 19, 20, 22, 25, 31
Answer:

Question 8.
14, 15, 3, 15, 14, 14, 18, 15, 8, 16
Answer:

Question 9.
ANALYZING DATA
The table shows the lengths of nine movies.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 4
a. Find the mean, median, and mode of the lengths.
b. Which measure of center best represents the data? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a9

Question 10.
ANALYZING DATA
The table shows the daily changes in the value of a stock over 12 days.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 5
a. Find the mean, median, and mode of the changes in stock value.
b. Which measure of center best represents the data? Explain.
c. On the 13th day, the value of the stock increases by $4.28. How does this additional value affect the mean, median, and mode? Explain.
Answer:

In Exercises 11–14, find the value of x.
Question 11.
2, 8, 9, 7, 6, x; The mean is 6.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a11

Question 12.
12.5, -10, -7.5, x; The mean is 11.5.
Answer:

Question 13.
9, 10, 12, x, 20, 25; The median is 14.
Answer:

Question 14.
30, 45, x, 100; The median is 51.
Answer:

Question 15.
ANALYZING DATA
The table shows the masses of eight polar bears. (See Example 2.)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 6
a. Identify the outlier. How does the outlier affect the mean, median, and mode?
b. Describe one possible explanation for the outlier.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a15.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a15.2

Question 16.
ANALYZING DATA
The sizes of emails (in kilobytes) in your inbox are 2, 3, 5, 2, 1, 46, 3, 7, 2, and 1.
a. Identify the outlier. How does the outlier affect the mean, median, and mode?
b. Describe one possible explanation for the outlier.
Answer:

Question 17.
ANALYZING DATA
The scores of two golfers are shown. Find the range of the scores for each golfer. Compare your results. (See Example 3.)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a17

Question 18.
ANALYZING DATA
The graph shows a player’s monthly home run totals in two seasons. Find the range of the number of home runs for each season. Compare your results.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 8
Answer:

In Exercises 19–22, find (a) the range and (b) the standard deviation of the data set.
Question 19.
40, 35, 45, 55, 60
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a19

Question 20.
141, 116, 117, 135, 126, 121
Answer:

Question 21.
0.5, 2.0, 2.5, 1.5, 1.0, 1.5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a21

Question 22.
8.2, 10.1, 2.6, 4.8, 2.4, 5.6, 7.0, 3.3
Answer:

Question 23.
ANALYZING DATA
Consider the data in Exercise 17.
a. Find the standard deviation of the scores of Golfer A. Interpret your result.
b. Find the standard deviation of the scores of Golfer B. Interpret your result.
c. Compare the standard deviations for Golfer A and Golfer B. What can you conclude?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a23.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a23.2

Question 24.
ANALYZING DATA
Consider the data in Exercise 18.
a. Find the standard deviation of the monthly home run totals in the player’s rookie season. Interpret your result.
b. Find the standard deviation of the monthly home run totals in this season. Interpret your result.
c. Compare the standard deviations for the rookie season and this season. What can you conclude?
Answer:

In Exercises 25 and 26, find the mean, median, and mode of the data set after the given transformation.
Question 25.
In Exercise 5, each data value increases by 4.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a25

Question 26.
In Exercise 6, each data value increases by 20%.
Answer:

Question 27.
TRANSFORMING DATA
Find the values of the measures shown when each value in the data set increases by 14.
Mean: 62
Median: 55
Mode: 49
Range: 46
Standard deviation: 15.5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a27

Question 28.
TRANSFORMING DATA
Find the values of the measures shown when each value in the data set is multiplied by 0.5.
Mean: 320
Median: 300
Mode: none
Range: 210
Standard deviation: 70.6
Answer:

Question 29.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in finding the median of the data set.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a29

Question 30.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in finding the range of the data set after the given transformation.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 10
Answer:

Question 31.
PROBLEM SOLVING
In a bowling match, the team with the greater mean score wins. The scores of the members of two bowling teams are shown.
Team A: 172, 130, 173, 212
Team B: 136, 184, 168, 192
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 11
a. Which team wins the match? If the team with the greater median score wins, is the result the same? Explain.
b. Which team is more consistent? Explain.
c. In another match between the two teams, all the members of Team A increase their scores by 15 and all the members of Team B increase their scores by 12.5%. Which team wins this match? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a31.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a31.2

Question 32.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend says that when two data sets have the same range, you can assume the data sets have the same standard deviation, because both range and standard deviation are measures of variation. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer:

Question 33.
ANALYZING DATA
The table shows the results of a survey that asked 12 students about their favorite meal. Which measure of center (mean, median, or mode) can be used to describe the data? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a33

Question 34.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The dot plots show the ages of the members of three different adventure clubs. Without performing calculations, which data set has the greatest standard deviation? Which has the least standard deviation? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 13
Answer:

Question 35.
REASONING
A data set is described by the measures shown.
Mean: 27
Median: 32
Mode: 18
Range: 41
Standard deviation: 9
Find the mean, median, mode, range, and standard deviation of the data set when each data value is multiplied by 3 and then increased by 8.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a35

Question 36.
CRITICAL THINKING
Can the standard deviation of a data set be 0? Can it be negative? Explain.
Answer:

Question 37.
USING TOOLS
Measure the heights (in inches) of the students in your class.
a. Find the mean, median, mode, range, and standard deviation of the heights.
b. A new student who is 7 feet tall joins your class. How would you expect this student’s height to affect the measures in part (a)? Verify your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a37

Question 38.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
To find the arithmetic mean of n numbers, divide the sum of the numbers by n. To find the geometric mean of n numbers a1, a2, a3, . . . , an, take the nth root of the product of the numbers.
geometric mean = \(\sqrt[n]{a_{1} \cdot a_{2} \cdot a_{3} \cdot \ldots \cdot a_{n}}\)
Compare the arithmetic mean to the geometric mean of n numbers.
Answer:

Question 39.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The circle graph shows the distribution of the ages of 200 students in a college Psychology I class.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 14
a. Find the mean, median, and mode of the students’ ages.
b. Identify the outliers. How do the outliers affect the mean, median, and mode?
c. Suppose all 200 students take the same Psychology II class exactly 1 year later. Draw a new circle graph that shows the distribution of the ages of this class and find the mean, median, and mode of the students’ ages.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a39.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a39.2

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Solve the inequality.(Section 2.4)
Question 40.
6x + 1 ≤ 4x – 9
Answer:

Question 41.
-3(3y – 2) < 1 – 9y
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a41

Question 42.
2(5c – 4) ≥ 5(2c + 8)
Answer:

Question 43.
4(3 – w) > 3(4w – 4)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a43

Evaluate the function for the given value of x.(Section 6.3)
Question 44.
f(x) – 4x; x = 3
Answer:

Question 45.
f(x) = 7x; x = -2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a45

Question 46.
f(x) = 5(2)x; x = 6
Answer:

Question 47.
f(x) = -2(3)x; x = 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.1 a47

Lesson 11.2 Box-and-Whisker Plots

Essential Question How can you use a box-and-whisker plot to describe a data set?

EXPLORATION 1

Drawing a Box-and-Whisker Plot
Work with a partner. The numbers of first cousins of the students in a ninth-grade class are shown. A box-and-whisker plot is one way to represent the data visually.
a. Order the data on a strip of grid paper with 24 equally spaced boxes. Fold the paper in half to find the median.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 1
b. Fold the paper in half again to divide the data into four groups. Because there are 24 numbers in the data set, each group should have 6 numbers. Find the least value, the greatest value, the first quartile, and the third quartile.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 2
c. Explain how the box-and-whisker plot shown represents the data set.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 3
Answer:

CommunicateYour Answer

Question 2.
How can you use a box-and-whisker plot to describe a data set?
Answer:

Question 3.
Interpret each box-and-whisker plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 4
a. body mass indices (BMI) of students in a ninth-grade class
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 5
b. heights of roller coasters at an amusement park
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 6
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
A basketball player scores 14, 16, 20, 5, 22, 30, 16, and 28 points during a tournament. Make a box-and-whisker plot that represents the data.
Answer:

Use the box-and-whisker plot in Example 1.
Question 2.
Find and interpret the range and interquartile range of the data.
Answer:

Question 3.
Describe the distribution of the data.
Answer:

Question 4.
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the surfboard prices at Shop A and Shop B. Identify the shape of each distribution. Which shop’s prices are more spread out? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 7
Answer:

Box-and-Whisker Plots 11.2 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
WRITING
Describe how to find the first quartile of a data set.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 1

Question 2.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Consider the box-and-whisker plot shown. Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 8
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3–8, use the box-and-whisker plot to find the given measure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 9
Question 3.
least value
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 3

Question 4.
greatest value
Answer:

Question 5.
third quartile
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 5

Question 6.
first quartile
Answer:

Question 7.
median
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 7

Question 8.
range
Answer:

In Exercises 9–12, make a box-and-whisker plot that represents the data.
Question 9.
Hours of television watched: 0, 3, 4, 5, 2, 4, 6, 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 9

Question 10.
Cat lengths (in inches): 16, 18, 20, 25, 17, 22, 23, 21
Answer:

Question 11.
Elevations (in feet): -2, 0, 5, -4, 1, -3, 2, 0, 2, -3, 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 11

Question 12.
MP3 player prices (in dollars): 124, 95, 105, 110, 95, 124, 300, 190, 114
Answer:

Question 13.
ANALYZING DATA
The dot plot represents the numbers of hours students spent studying for an exam. Make a box-and-whisker plot that represents the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 13

Question 14.
ANALYZING DATA
The stem-and-leaf plot represents the lengths (in inches) of the fish caught on a fishing trip. Make a box-and-whisker plot that represents the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 11
Answer:

Question 15.
ANALYZING DATA
The box-and-whisker plot represents the prices (in dollars) of the entrées at a restaurant.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 12
a. Find and interpret the range of the data.
b. Describe the distribution of the data.
c. Find and interpret the interquartile range of the data.
d. Are the data more spread out below Q1 or above or Q3? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 15

Question 16.
ANALYZING DATA
A baseball player scores 101 runs in a season. The box-and-whisker plot represents the numbers of runs the player scores against different opposing teams.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 13
a. Find and interpret the range and interquartile range of the data.
b. Describe the distribution of the data. c. Are the data more spread out between Q1 and Q2 or between Q2 and Q3? Explain.
Answer:

Question 17.
ANALYZING DATA
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the monthly car sales for a year for two sales representatives.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 14
a. Identify the shape of each distribution.
b. Which representative’s sales are more spread out? Explain.
c. Which representative had the single worst sales month during the year? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 17

Question 18.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in describing the box-and-whisker plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 15
Answer:

Question 19.
WRITING
Given the numbers 36 and 12, identify which number is the range and which number is the interquartile range of a data set. Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 19

Question 20.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The box-and-whisker plot represents a data set. Determine whether each statement is always true. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 16
a. The data set contains the value 11.
b. The data set contains the value 6.
c. The distribution is skewed right.
d. The mean of the data is 5.
Answer:

Question 21.
ANALYZING DATA
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the battery lives (in hours) of two brands of cell phones.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 17
a. Identify the shape of each distribution.
b. What is the range of the upper 75% of each brand?
c. Compare the interquartile ranges of the two data sets.
d. Which brand do you think has a greater standard deviation? Explain.
e. You need a cell phone that has a battery life of more than 3.5 hours most of the time. Which brand should you buy? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 21

Question 22.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Create a data set that can be represented by the box-and-whisker plot shown. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 18
Answer:

Question 23.
CRITICAL THINKING
Two data sets have the same median, the same interquartile range, and the same range. Is it possible for the box-and-whisker plots of the data sets to be different? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 23

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Use zeros to graph the function. (Section 8.5)
Question 24.
f(x) = -2(x + 9)(x – 3)
Answer:

Question 25.
y = 3(x – 5)(x + 5)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 25

Question 26.
y = 4x2 – 16x = 48
Answer:

Question 27.
h(x) = -x2 + 5x + 14
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 27.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.2 a 27.2

Lesson 11.3 Shapes of Distributions

Essential Question How can you use a histogram to characterize the basic shape of a distribution?

EXPLORATION 1

Analyzing a Famous Symmetric Distribution
Work with a partner. A famous data set was collected in Scotland in the mid-1800s. It contains the chest sizes, measured in inches, of 5738 men in the Scottish Militia. Estimate the percent of the chest sizes that lie within (a) 1 standard deviation of the mean, (b) 2 standard deviations of the mean, and (c) 3 standard deviations of the mean. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 1
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Comparing Two Symmetric Distributions
Work with a partner. The graphs show the distributions of the heights of 250 adult American males and 250 adult American females.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 2
Answer:
a. Which data set has a smaller standard deviation? Explain what this means in the context of the problem.
b. Estimate the percent of male heights between 67 inches and 73 inches.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 3
Answer:

CommunicateYour Answer
Question 3.
How can you use a histogram to characterize the basic shape of a distribution?
Answer:

Question 4.
All three distributions in Explorations 1 and 2 are roughly symmetric. The histograms are called “bell-shaped.”
a. What are the characteristics of a symmetric distribution?
b.Why is a symmetric distribution called “bell-shaped?”
c. Give two other real-life examples of symmetric distributions.Shapes of Distributions.
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
The frequency table shows the numbers of pounds of aluminum cans collected by classes for a fundraiser. Display the data in a histogram. Describe the shape of the distribution.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 4
Answer:

Question 2.
You record the numbers of email attachments sent by 30 employees of a company in 1 week. Your results are shown in the table. (a) Display the data in a histogram using six intervals beginning with 1–20. (b) Which measures of center and variation best represent the data? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 5
Answer:

Question 3.
Compare the distributions using their shapes and appropriate measures of center and variation.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 6
Answer:

Question 4.
Why is the mean greater than the median for the men?
Answer:

Question 5.
If 50 more women are surveyed, about how many more would you expect to own between 10 and 18 pairs of shoes?
Answer:

Shapes of Distributions 11.3 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
Describe how data are distributed in a symmetric distribution, a distribution that is skewed left, and a distribution that is skewed right.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 1

Question 2.
WRITING
How does the shape of a distribution help you decide which measures of center and variation best describe the data?
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

Question 3.
DESCRIBING DISTRIBUTIONS
The frequency table shows the numbers of hours that students volunteer per month. Display the data in a histogram. Describe the shape of the distribution.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 1

Question 4.
DESCRIBING DISTRIBUTIONS
The frequency table shows the results of a survey that asked people how many hours they spend online per week. Display the data in a histogram. Describe the shape of the distribution.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 8
Answer:

In Exercises 5 and 6, describe the shape of the distribution of the data. Explain your reasoning.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 5

In Exercises 7 and 8, determine which measures of center and variation best represent the data. Explain your reasoning.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 12
Answer:

Question 9.
ANALYZING DATA
The table shows the last 24 ATM withdrawals at a bank.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 13
a. Display the data in a histogram using seven intervals beginning with 26–50.
b. Which measures of center and variation best represent the data? Explain.
c. The bank charges a fee for any ATM withdrawal less than $150. How would you interpret the data?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 9.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 9.2

Question 10.
ANALYZING DATA
Measuring an IQ is an inexact science. However, IQ scores have been around for years in an attempt to measure human intelligence. The table shows some of the greatest known IQ scores.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 14
a. Display the data in a histogram using five intervals beginning with 151–166.
b. Which measures of center and variation best represent the data? Explain.
c. The distribution of IQ scores for the human population is symmetric. What happens to the shape of the distribution in part (a) as you include more and more IQ scores from the human population in the data set?
Answer:

ERROR ANALYSIS In Exercises 11 and 12, describe and correct the error in the statements about the data displayed in the histogram.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 15
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 17
Answer:

Question 13.
USING TOOLS
For a large data set, would you use a stem-and-leaf plot or a histogram to show the distribution of the data? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 13

Question 14.
REASONING
For a symmetric distribution, why is the mean used to describe the center and the standard deviation used to describe the variation? For a skewed distribution, why is the median used to describe the center and the  ve-number summary used to describe the variation?
Answer:

Question 15.
COMPARING DATA SETS
The double histogram shows the distributions of daily high temperatures for two towns over a 50-day period. Compare the distributions using their shapes and appropriate measures of center and variation.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 15

Question 16.
COMPARING DATA SETS
The frequency tables show the numbers of entrées in certain price ranges (in dollars) at two different restaurants. Display the data in a double histogram. Compare the distributions using their shapes and appropriate measures of center and variation.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 19
Answer:

Question 17.
OPEN-ENDED
Describe a real-life data set that has a distribution that is skewed right.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 17

Question 18.
OPEN-ENDED
Describe a real-life data set that has a distribution that is skewed left.
Answer:

Question 19.
COMPARING DATA SETS
The table shows the results of a survey that asked freshmen and sophomores how many songs they have downloaded on their MP3 players.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 20
a. Make a double box-and-whisker plot that represents the data. Describe the shape of each distribution.
b. Compare the number of songs downloaded by freshmen to the number of songs downloaded by sophomores.
c. About how many of the freshmen surveyed would you expect to have between 730 and 1570 songs downloaded on their MP3 players?
d. If you survey100 more freshmen, about how many would you expect to have downloaded between 310 and 1990 songs on their MP3 players?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 19.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 19.2

Question 20.
COMPARING DATA SETS
You conduct the same survey as in Exercise 19 but use a different group of freshmen. The results are as follows.Survey size: 60; minimum: 200; maximum: 2400; 1st quartile: 640; median: 1670; 3rd quartile: 2150; mean: 1480; standard deviation: 500
a. Compare the number of songs downloaded by this group of freshmen to the number of songs downloaded by sophomores.
b. Why is the median greater than the mean for this group of freshmen?
Answer:

Question 21.
REASONING
A data set has a symmetric distribution. Every value in the data set is doubled. Describe the shape of the new distribution. Are the measures of center and variation affected? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 21

Question 22.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Match the distribution with the corresponding box-and-whisker plot.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 21
Answer:

Question 23.
REASONING
You record the following waiting times at a restaurant.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 22
a. Display the data in a histogram using five intervals beginning with 0–9. Describe the shape of the distribution.
b. Display the data in a histogram using 10 intervals beginning with 0–4. What happens when the number of intervals is increased?
c. Which histogram best represents the data? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 23.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 23.2

Question 24.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
The shape of a bimodal distribution is shown. Describe a real-life example of a bimodal distribution.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 23
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Find the domain of the function.(Section 10.1)
Question 25.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x+6}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 25 width=

Question 26.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{2x}\)
Answer:

Question 27.
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{4} \sqrt{x-7}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 a 27

Data Analysis and Displays Study Skills: Studying for Finals

11.1–11.3What Did YouLearn?
Core Vocabulary
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 24

Core Concepts
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 25

Mathematical Practices
Question 1.
Exercises 15 and 16 on page 590 are similar. For each data set, is the outlier much greater than or much less than the rest of the data values? Compare how the outliers affect the means. Explain why this makes sense.
Answer:

Question 2.
In Exercise 18 on page 605, provide a possible reason for why the distribution is skewed left.
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.3 26

Data Analysis and Displays 1.1–11.3 Quiz

Find the mean, median, and mode of the data set. Which measure of center best represents the data? Explain.(Section 11.1)
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays q 1
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays q 2
Answer:

Find the range and standard deviation of each data set. Then compare your results.(Section 11.1)
Question 3.
Absent students during a week of school
Female: 6, 2, 4, 3, 4
Male: 5, 3, 6, 6, 9
Answer:

Question 4.
Numbers of points scored
Juniors: 19, 15, 20, 10, 14, 21, 18, 15
Seniors: 22, 19, 29, 32, 15, 26, 30, 19
Answer:

Make a box-and-whisker plot that represents the data.(Section 11.2)
Question 5.
Ages of family members:
60, 15, 25, 20, 55, 70, 40, 30
Answer:

Question 6.
Minutes of violin practice:
20, 50, 60, 40, 40, 30, 60, 40, 50, 20, 20, 35
Answer:

Question 7.
Display the data in a histogram. Describe the shape of the distribution. (Section 11.3)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays q 7

Question 8.
The table shows the prices of eight mountain bikes in a sporting goods store. (Section 11.1 and Section 11.2)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays q 8.1
a. Find the mean, median, mode, range, and standard deviation of the prices.
b. Identify the outlier. How does the outlier affect the mean, median, and mode?
c. Make a box-and-whisker plot that represents the data. Find and interpret the interquartile range of the data. Identify the shape of the distribution.
d. Find the mean, median, mode, range, and standard deviation of the prices when the store offers a 5% discount on all mountain bikes.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays q 8
Answer:

Question 9.
The table shows the times of 20 presentations. (Section 11.3)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays q 9
a. Display the data in a histogram using five intervals beginning with 3–5.
b. Which measures of center and variation best represent the data? Explain.
c. The presentations are supposed to be 10 minutes long. How would you interpret these results?
Answer:

Lesson 11.4 Two-Way Tables

Essential Question How can you read and make a two-way table?

EXPLORATION 1

Reading a Two-Way Table
Work with a partner. You are the manager of a sports shop. The two-way tables show the numbers of soccer T-shirts in stock at your shop at the beginning and end of the selling season. (a) Complete the totals for the rows and columns in each table. (b) How would you alter the number of T-shirts you order for next season? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 1
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Making a Two-Way Table
Work with a partner. The three-dimensional bar graph shows the numbers of hours students work at part-time jobs.
a. Make a two-way table showing the data. Use estimation to find the entries in your table.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 2
b. Write two observations that summarize the data in your table.
Answer:

Communicate Your Answer
Question 3.
How can you read and make a two-way table?
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
You conduct a technology survey to publish on your school’s website. You survey students in the school cafeteria about the technological devices they own. The results are shown in the two-way table. Find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 3
Answer:

Question 2.
You survey students about whether they are getting a summer job. Seventy-five males respond, with 18 of them responding “no.” Fifty-seven females respond, with 45 of them responding “yes.” Organize the results in a two-way table. Include the marginal frequencies.
Answer:

Question 3.
Use the survey results in Monitoring Progress Question 2 to make a two-way table that shows the joint and marginal relative frequencies. What percent of students are not getting a summer job?
Answer:

Question 4.
Use the survey results in Example 3 to make a two-way table that shows the conditional relative frequencies based on the row totals. Given that a student is a senior, what is the conditional relative frequency that he or she is planning to major in a medical field?
Answer:

Question 5.
Using the results of the survey in Monitoring Progress Question 1, is there an association between owning a tablet computer and owning a cell phone? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Two-Way Tables 11.4 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
Each entry in a two-way table is called a(n) __________.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 1

Question 2.
WRITING
When is it appropriate to use a two-way table to organize data?
Answer:

Question 3.
VOCABULARY
Explain the relationship between joint relative frequencies, marginal relative frequencies, and conditional relative frequencies.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 3

Question 4.
WRITING
Describe two ways you can find conditional relative frequencies.
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

You conduct a survey that asks 346 students whether they buy lunch at school. In Exercises 5–8, use the results of the survey shown in the two-way table.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 3
Question 5.
How many freshmen were surveyed?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 5

Question 6.
How many sophomores were surveyed?
Answer:

Question 7.
How many students buy lunch at school?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 7

Question 8.
How many students do not buy lunch at school?
Answer:

In Exercises 9 and 10, find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 6
Answer:

Question 11.
USING TWO-WAY TABLES
You conduct a survey that asks students whether they plan to participate in school spirit week. The results are shown in the two-way table. Find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 11

Question 12.
USING TWO-WAY TABLES
You conduct a survey that asks college-bound high school seniors about the type of degree they plan to receive. The results are shown in the two-way table. Find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 8
Answer:

USING STRUCTURE In Exercises 13 and 14, complete the two-way table..
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 13

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 10
Answer:

Question 15.
MAKING TWO-WAY TABLES
You conduct a survey that asks 245 students in your school whether they have taken a Spanish or a French class. One hundred nine of the students have taken a Spanish class, and 45 of those students have taken a French class. Eighty-two of the students have not taken a Spanish or a French class. Organize the results in a two-way table. Include the marginal frequencies.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 15

Question 16.
MAKING TWO-WAY TABLES
A car dealership has 98 cars on its lot. Fifty-five of the cars are new. Of the new cars, 36 are domestic cars. There are 15 used foreign cars on the lot. Organize this information in a two-way table. Include the marginal frequencies. In Exercises 17 and 18, make a two-way table that shows the joint and marginal relative frequencies.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 11.1
Answer:

In Exercises 17 and 18, make a two-way table that shows the joint and marginal relative frequencies.
Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 11
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 17

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 12
Answer:

Question 19.
USING TWO-WAY TABLES
Refer to Exercise 17. What percent of students prefer aerobic exercise? What percent of students are males who prefer anaerobic exercise?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 19

Question 20.
USING TWO-WAY TABLES
Refer to Exercise 18. What percent of the sandwiches are on wheat bread? What percent of the sandwiches are turkey on white bread?
Answer:

ERROR ANALYSIS In Exercises 21 and 22, describe and correct the error in using the two-way table.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 13
Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 14
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 21

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 15
Answer:

Question 23.
USING TWO-WAY TABLES
A company is hosting an event for its employees to celebrate the end of the year. It asks the employees whether they prefer a lunch event or a dinner event. It also asks whether they prefer a catered event or a potluck. The results are shown in the two-way table. Make a two-way table that shows the conditional relative frequencies based on the row totals. Given that an employee prefers a lunch event, what is the conditional relative frequency that he or she prefers a catered event?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 23

Question 24.
USING TWO-WAY TABLES
The two-way table shows the results of a survey that asked students about their preference for a new school mascot. Make a two-way table that shows the conditional relative frequencies based on the column totals. Given that a student prefers a hawk as a mascot, what is the conditional relative frequency that he or she prefers a cartoon mascot?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 17
Answer:

Question 25.
ANALYZING TWO-WAYTABLES
You survey college-bound seniors and find that 85% plan to live on campus, 35% plan to have a car while at college, and 5% plan to live off campus and not have a car. Is there an association between living on campus and having a car at college? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 25.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 25.2

Question 26.
ANALYZING TWO-WAYTABLES
You survey students and find that 70% watch sports on TV, 48% participate in a sport, and 16% do not watch sports on TV or participate in a sport. Is there an association between participating in a sport and watching sports on TV? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 18
Answer:

Question 27.
ANALYZING TWO-WAY TABLES
The two-way table shows the results of a survey that asked adults whether they participate in recreational skiing. Is there an association between age and recreational skiing?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 19
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 27

Question 28.
ANALYZING TWO-WAY TABLES
Refer to Exercise 12. Is there an association between gender and type of degree? Explain.
Answer:

Question 29.
WRITING
Compare Venn diagrams and two-way tables.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 29

Question 30.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The graph shows the results of a survey that asked students about their favorite movie genre.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 20
a. Display the given information in a two-way table.
b. Which of the data displays do you prefer? Explain.
Answer:

Question 31.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A box office sells 1809 tickets to a play, 800 of which are for the main floor. The tickets consist of 2x + y adult tickets on the main floor, x – 40 child tickets on the main floor, x + 2y adult tickets in the balcony, and 3x – y – 80 child tickets in the balcony.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 21
a. Organize this information in a two-way table.
b. Find the values of x and y.
c. What percent of tickets are adult tickets?
d. What percent of child tickets are balcony tickets?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 31.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 31.2

Question 32.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Compare “one-way tables” and “two-way tables.” Is it possible to have a “three-way table?” If so, give an example of a three-way table.
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Tell whether the table of values represents a linear, an exponential, or a quadratic function. (Section 8.6)
Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 22
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 a 33

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.4 23
Answer:

Lesson 11.5 Choosing a Data Display

Essential Question How can you display data in a way that helps you make decisions?

EXPLORATION 1

Displaying Data
Work with a partner. Analyze the data and then create a display that best represents the data. Explain your choice of data display.
a. A group of schools in New England participated in a 2-month study and reported 3962 animals found dead along roads.
birds: 307
mammals: 2746
amphibiAnswer: 145
reptiles: 75
unknown: 689
b. The data below show the numbers of black bears killed on a state’s roads from 1993 to 2012.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 1
c. A 1-week study along a 4-mile section of road found the following weights (in pounds) of raccoons that had been killed by vehicles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 2
d. A yearlong study by volunteers in California reported the following numbers of animals killed by motor vehicles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 3
Answer:

Communicate Your Answer
Question 2.
How can you display data in a way that helps you make decisions?
Answer:

Question 3.
Use the Internet or some other reference to find examples of the following types of data displays.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 4
bar graph
circle graph
scatter plot
stem-and-leaf plot
pictograph
line graph
box-and-whisker plot
histogram
dot plot

Monitoring Progress

Tell whether the data are qualitative or quantitative. Explain your reasoning.
Question 1.
telephone numbers in a directory
Answer:

Question 2.
ages of patients at a hospital
Answer:

Question 3.
lengths of videos on a website
Answer:

Question 4.
types of flowers at a florist
Answer:

Question 5.
Display the data in Example 2(a) in another way.
Answer:

Question 6.
Display the data in Example 2(b) in another way.
Answer:

Question 7.
Redraw the graphs in Example 3 so they are not misleading.
Answer:

Choosing a Data Display 11.5 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
OPEN-ENDED
Describe two ways that a line graph can be misleading.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 1

Question 2.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which data set does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 5
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3–8, tell whether the data are qualitative or quantitative. Explain your reasoning.
Question 3.
brands of cars in a parking lot
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 3

Question 4.
weights of bears at a zoo
Answer:

Question 5.
budgets of feature films
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 5

Question 6.
file formats of documents on a computer
Answer:

Question 7.
shoe sizes of students in your class
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 7

Question 8.
street addresses in a phone book
Answer:

In Exercises 9–12, choose an appropriate data display for the situation. Explain your reasoning.
Question 9.
the number of students in a marching band each year
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 9

Question 10.
a comparison of students’ grades (out of 100) in two different classes
Answer:

Question 11.
the favorite sports of students in your class
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 11

Question 12.
the distribution of teachers by age
Answer:

In Exercises 13–16, analyze the data and then create a display that best represents the data. Explain your reasoning.
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 13.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 13.2
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 13.3

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 7
Answer:

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 15

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 9
Answer:

Question 17.
DISPLAYING DATA
Display the data in Exercise 13 in another way.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 17.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 17.2

Question 18.
DISPLAYING DATA
Display the data in Exercise 14 in another way.
Answer:

Question 19.
DISPLAYING DATA
Display the data in Exercise 15 in another way.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 19

Question 20.
DISPLAYING DATA
Display the data in Exercise 16 in another way.
Answer:

In Exercises 21–24, describe how the graph is misleading. Then explain how someone might misinterpret the graph.
Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 21

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 11
Answer:

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 23

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 13
Answer:

Question 25.
DISPLAYING DATA
Redraw the graph in Exercise 21 so it is not misleading.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 25

Question 26.
DISPLAYING DATA
Redraw the graph in Exercise 22 so it is not misleading.
Answer:

Question 27.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
A data set gives the ages of voters for a city election. Classmate A says the data should be displayed in a bar graph, while Classmate B says the data would be better displayed in a histogram. Who is correct? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 27

Question 28.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The manager of a company sees the graph shown and concludes that the company is experiencing a decline. What is missing from the graph? Explain why the manager may be mistaken.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 14
Answer:

Question 29.
REASONING
A survey asked 100 students about the sports they play. The results are shown in the circle graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 15
a. Explain why the graph is misleading.
b. What type of data display would be more appropriate for the data? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 29

Question 30.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Use a spreadsheet program to create a type of data display that is not used in this section.
Answer:

Question 31.
REASONING
What type of data display shows the mode of a data set?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 31

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Determine whether the relation is a function. Explain.(Section 3.1)
Question 32.
(-5, -1), (-6, 0), (-5, 1), (-2, 2), (3 , 3)
Answer:

Question 33.
(0, 1), (4, 0), (8, 1), (12, 2), (16, 3)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 a 33

Data Analysis and Displays Performance Task: College Students Study Time

11.4–11.5 What Did You Learn?

Core Vocabulary
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 16

Core Concepts
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 17

Mathematical Practices
Question 1.
Consider the data given in the two-way table for Exercises 5–8 on page 614. Your sophomore friend responded to the survey. Is your friend more likely to have responded “yes” or “no” to buying a lunch? Explain.
Answer:

Question 2.
Use your answer to Exercise 28 on page 622 to explain why it is important for a company manager to see accurate graphs.
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays 11.5 18

Data Analysis and Displays Chapter Review

11.1 Measures of Center and Variation (pp. 585–592)

Question 1.
Use the data in the example above. You run 4.0 miles on Day 11. How does this additional value affect the mean, median, and mode? Explain.
Answer:

Question 2.
Use the data in the example above. You run 10.0 miles on Day 11. How does this additional value affect the mean, median, and mode? Explain.
Answer:

Find the mean, median, and mode of the data.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays cr 1
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays cr 2
Answer:

Find the range and standard deviation of each data set. Then compare your results.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays cr 5
Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays cr 6
Answer:

Find the values of the measures shown after the given transformation.
Mean: 109 Median: 104 Mode: 96 Range: 45 Standard deviation: 3.6
Question 7.
Each value in the data set increases by 25.
Answer:

Question 8.
Each value in the data set is multiplied by 0.6
Answer:

11.2 Box-and-Whisker Plots (pp. 593–598)

Make a box-and-whisker plot that represents the data. Identify the shape of the distribution.
Question 9.
Ages of volunteers at a hospital:
14, 17, 20, 16, 17, 14, 21, 18, 22
Answer:

Question 10.
Masses (in kilograms) of lions:
120, 230, 180, 210, 200, 200, 230, 160
Answer:

11.3 Shapes of Distributions (pp. 599–606)

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays cr 7
Question 11.
The frequency table shows the amounts (in dollars) of money the students in a class have in their pockets.
a. Display the data in a histogram. Describe the shape of the distribution.
b. Which measures of center and variation best represent the data?
c. Compare this distribution with the distribution shown above using their shapes and appropriate measures of center and variation.
Answer:

11.4 Two-Way Tables (pp. 609–616)

Question 12.
The two-way table shows the results of a survey that asked shoppers at a mall about whether they like the new food court.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays cr 12
a. Make a two-way table that shows the joint and marginal relative frequencies.
b. Make a two-way table that shows the conditional relative frequencies based on the column totals.
Answer:

11.5 Choosing a Data Display (pp. 617–622)

Question 13.
Analyze the data in the table at the right and then create a display that best represents the data. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays cr 13
Answer:

Tell whether the data are qualitative or quantitative. Explain.
Question 14.
heights of the members of a basketball team
Answer:

Question 15.
grade level of students in an elementary school
Answer:

Data Analysis and Displays Chapter Test

Describe the shape of the data distribution. Then determine which measures of center and variation best represent the data.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays c 1
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays c 2
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays c 3
Answer:

Determine whether each statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain your reasoning.
a. The sum of the marginal relative frequencies in the “total” row and the “total” column of a two-way table should each be equal to 1.
b. In a box-and-whisker plot, the length of the box to the left of the median and the length of the box to the right of the median are equal.
c. Qualitative data are numerical.
Answer:

Question 5.
Find the mean, median, mode, range, and standard deviation of the prices.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays c 5
Answer:

Question 6.
Repeat Exercise 5 when all the shirts in the clothing store are 20% off.
Answer:

Question 7.
Which data display best represents the data, a histogram or a stem-and-leaf plot? Explain.
15, 21, 18, 10, 12, 11, 17, 18, 16, 12, 20, 12, 17, 16
Answer:

Question 8.
The tables show the battery lives (in hours) of two brands of laptops.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays c 8
a. Make a double box-and-whisker plot that represents the data.
b. Identify the shape of each distribution.
c. Which brand’s battery lives are more spread out? Explain.
d. Compare the distributions using their shapes and appropriate measures of center and variation.
Answer:

Question 9.
The table shows the results of a survey that asked students their preferred method of exercise. Analyze the data and then create a display that best represents the data. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays c 9
Answer:

Question 10.
You conduct a survey that asks 271 students in your class whether they are attending the class field trip. One hundred twenty-one males respond 92 of which are attending the field trip. Thirty-one females are not attending the field trip.
a. Organize the results in a two-way table. Find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
b. What percent of females are attending the class field trip?
Answer:

Data Analysis and Displays Cumulative Assessment

Question 1.
You ask all the students in your grade whether they have a cell phone. The results are shown in the two-way table. Your friend claims that a greater percent of males in your grade have cell phones than females. Do you support your friend’s claim? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays ca 1
Answer:

Question 2.
Use the graphs of the functions to answer each question.
a. Are there any values of x greater than 0 where f (x) > h(x)? Explain.
b. Are there any values of x greater than 1 where g(x) > f(x)? Explain.
c. Are there any values of x greater than 0 where g(x) > h(x)? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays ca 2
Answer:

Question 3.
Classify the shape of each distribution as symmetric, skewed left, or skewed right.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays ca 3
Answer:

Question 4.
Complete the equation so that the solutions of the system of equations are (-2, 4) and (1, -5).
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays ca 4
Answer:

Question 5.
Pair each function with its inverse.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays ca 5
Answer:

Question 6.
The box-and-whisker plot represents the lengths (in minutes) of project presentations at a science fair. Find the interquartile range of the data. What does this represent in the context of the situation?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays ca 6
A. 7; The middle half of the presentation lengths vary by no more than 7 minutes.
B. 3; The presentation lengths vary by no more than 3 minutes.
C. 3; The middle half of the presentation lengths vary by no more than 3 minutes.
D. 7; The presentation lengths vary by no more than 7 minutes.
Answer:

Question 7.
Scores in a video game can be between 0 and 100. Use the data set shown to fill in a value for x so that each statement is true.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays ca 7
a. When x = ____, the mean of the scores is 45.5.
b. When x = ____, the median of the scores is 47.
c. When x = ____, the mode of the scores is 63.
d. When x = ____, the range of the scores is 71.
Answer:

Question 8.
Select all the numbers that are in the range of the function shown.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays ca 8
Answer:

Question 9.
A traveler walks and takes a shuttle bus to get to a terminal of an airport. The function y = D(x) represents the traveler’s distance (in feet) after x minutes.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 11 Data Analysis and Displays ca 9
a. Estimate and interpret D(2).
b. Use the graph to find the solution of the equation D(x) = 3500. Explain the meaning of the solution.
c. How long does the traveler wait for the shuttle bus?
d. How far does the traveler ride on the shuttle bus?
e. What is the total distance that the traveler walks before and after riding the shuttle bus?
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Free PDF | Download BIM Algebra 1 Solution Key in PDF format

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers pdf

Engaging and Fun-learning ways are the best option for understanding the math concepts of Algebra 1. If you are excited to practice in one of these ways then this page is a perfect choice. Here, we have shared a useful Big Ideas Math Answers Book on Algebra 1 concepts. So grab this opportunity and become a pro in Algebra concepts without any fail. Also, this pdf formated chapter-wise Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers can be the great secret of your child’s success.

Hence, download the BIM Algebra 1 Solutions Book in Pdf and practice various questions from the Practice Test, Chapter Test, Cumulative Practice. Access this article and discover more advantages of BigIdeas Math Answers Algebra 1 Textbook. Make use of this pdf formatted Solutions of BIM Algebra 1 for a quick reference during the exams.

Download Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key for Free

Students who are wondering how to get on the success path of answering all algebra questions in exams with good results? The answer would be hard work along with smart work. If you plan and prepare all the concepts of Algebra in an effective way then anything can be possible in education. So, check out our experts prepared Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solution Key for all chapters and practice well before the exams. It helps students to clear their doubts without educators or parents’ help. Hence, access the available links of Big Ideas math Book Algebra 1 Answers and prepare the topics that you are lagging of.

Benefits of solving High School BIM Algebra 1 Solutions

Still confused to make use of the above presented Big Ideas Math Book Solutions of Algebra 1 then take a look at the below important points of BIM Algebra 1 Answers. Here is the list of High School BigIdeasMath Book Algebra 1 Solution Key benefits that make students realize how crucial is the Algebra 1 BIM Answer Key during practice & revision times:

  • BIM Algebra 1 Textbook Answer Key is quite a beneficial preparation resource for all students to clear their queries.
  • These solutions are explained by the subject experts as per the latest Common Core 2019 Curriculum edition.
  • However, you can enhance your conceptual knowledge by practicing the Step by Step Big Ideas Math Solutions for Algebra 1 and bridge the knowledge gap.
  • It covers questions from Practice Tests, Chapter Test, Cumulative Practice, etc., and helps students to improve their math skills and become pro in math solving.
  • Big Ideas Math Textbook Algebra 1 Answers is the great savior for all homework help-seeking kids.

FAQs on Common Core 2019 Curriculum Algebra 1 BIM Solutions

1. From where do I attain BIM Algebra 1 Answer Key?

From reliable and trustworthy websites like bigideasmathanswers.com, you can easily attain all chapters of the Algebra 1 BIM Solutions book for free of cost and access them online & offline.

2. How to Solve Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Textbook Questions easily?

Just tap on the respective chapter of available Big Ideas Math Book Algebra 1 Solution Key and download it offline to solve all textbook questions easily and efficiently.

3. Do Algebra 1 Big Ideas Math Solutions help students to score high?

Yes, Common Core Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 will surely assist students to get high scores as they are provided in detail by subject experts.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13

Big Ideas Math Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Answers: Students who are studing grade 3 must know about the geomteric shapes like square, triangle, rectangle and others before learning about two dimensional shapes. You can get the direct link to download Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Answers pdf in the below sections. By learning this chapter, you will be ab;e to define various two dimensional shapes, explain their features and compare one with another and draw shapes.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Solutions

Below provided BIM Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Answer Key helps the students in easy and quick learning. So, download Big Ideas Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes PDF for free to kickstartyour preparation. Find the solutions for all BIM 3rd Grade 13th Chapter questions in this article. The various lessons included in Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Chapter are Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals, Describe Quadrilaterals, Classify Quadrilaterals, and Draw Quadrilaterals.

After all these lessons, you can see performance task section where you can test your math skills. Improve your performance in the exam byreferring Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes AnswerKey. Scroll down to getthe quick links of all the topics of BIM Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes.

Lesson 1: Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals

Lesson 2: Describe Quadrilaterals

Lesson 3: Classify Quadrilaterals

Lesson 4: Draw Quadrilaterals

Performance Task

Lesson 13.1 Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals

Explore and Grow

Sort the Polygon Cards.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 1Structure
Does the sort change if you sort by the number of vertices? Explain.
Think and Grow: Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals

A polygon is a closed, two-dimensional shape with three or more sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 2

Answers:

A quadrilateral is a polygon with four sides. Quadrilaterals have four vertices and four angles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 3

Quadrilaterals can have parallel sides and right angles. Parallel sides are two sides that are always the same distance apart. A right angle is an L-shaped angle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 4

When two straight lines intersect each other at 90˚ or are perpendicular to each other at the intersection, they form the right angle. A right angle is represented by the symbol ∟.

Parallel lines are lines in a plane that are always the same distance apart. Parallel lines never intersect. Parallel lines are represented as ll.

Example
Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 5
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___
Answer:
fig1

Right angles: 2 (The symbol in pink shows right angles)
Pairs of parallel sides: 1 ( The sides in yellow shows parallel lines)

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 6
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

square

Right angles: 4 (The symbols in pink are right angles).
Pairs of parallel sides: 2 (yellow and green sides are 2 pairs of parallel sides)

Show and Grow
Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 7
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:


Explanation:
Right Angles : 0
Pairs of parallel sides: 2 (sides in yellow and green are 2 pairs of parallel sides)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 8
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answers:

quadilateral

Right angles: 2 (In L shape)
Pairs of parallel sides:0

Apply and Grow: Practice

Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 9
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answers:

q3

Right angles: 2
Pairs of parallel sides: 1 (1 II 2 as per figure).

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 10
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:
q4

Right angles: 4 (L shape)
Pairs of parallel sides: 2 (sides 1 ll 2 and 3 ll 4 as per above fig).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

q5

Right angles: 2 (L SHAPE)
Pairs of parallel sides: 2 (sides 1 ll 2 and 3 ll 4).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 12
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

q6

Right angles: 0
Pairs of parallel sides: 0

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 13
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

q7

Right angles: 1
Pairs of parallel sides: 0

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 14
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 1
Pairs of parallel sides: 0

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the yellow sides are parallel. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 15

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Use quadrilateral pattern blocks to complete the puzzle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 16

Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Use quadrilateral pattern blocks to complete the puzzle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 17

Answer:

Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals Homework & Practice

Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 18
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 0
Pairs of parallel side: 2 (side 1 ll 2 and 3 ll 4)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 19
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 2
Pairs of parallel side: 1 (side 1 ll 2).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 20
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 20

Right angles: 0
Pairs of parallel side: 0

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 21
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 1 (angle between side 1 and 2 )
Pairs of parallel side: 0

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 22
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 0
Pairs of parallel side: 3 (side 1 ll 5, 2 ll 6, 3 ll 7 and 4 ll 8 as per above figure)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 23
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 3 ( angles between side 2&3, side 4&5 and 1&5)
Pairs of parallel side: 1 ( sides 1 ll 4).

Question 7.
Reasoning
Can a quadrilateral have exactly three right angles? Explain.

Explanation:
The types of quadrilaterals that have 3 right angles are known as:
1.Squares
2.Rectangles
3.Other shapes where all angles are 90°.

The reason for this is:
All quadrilaterals interior angles must add up to exactly 360°.
So:
= 360−(90+90+90)
= 90°.
And thus, the fourth angle must be 90°.
Thefore, the only quadrilaterals where all angles are 90° are squares and rectangles.
Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Use pattern blocks to complete the puzzle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 24

Answer:

 

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Newton has 28 cards. Descartes has 24 cards. Newton divides his cards into 4 equal stacks and gives Descartes one stack. How many cards does Descartes have now?

Explanation:
Given:
Cards with Descartes  = 24 cards
Cards with Netwon = 28 cards
Cards divided into 4 stacks .
Each stack contains 7 cards

Total cards with Descartes= 24+7= 31 Cards.

Lesson 13.2 Describe Quadrilaterals

Explore and Grow

Sort the Quadrilateral Cards.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 25
Structure
What is another way you can sort the quadrilaterals?

Answer:

Think and Grow: Idenify Quadrilaterals

You can identify a quadrilateral using its sides and angles. A quadrilateral can have more than one name.
Quadrilateral
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 26
4 sides
4 angles
Trapezoid
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 27
exactly 1 pair of parallel sides
Parallelogram
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 28
2 pairs of parallel sides
Rectangle
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 29
2 pairs of parallel sides
4 right angles
Rhombus
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 30
2 pairs of parallel sides
4 equal sides
square
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 31
2 pairs of parallel sides
4 equal sides
4 right angles

Example
Circle all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Answer:

Show and Grow

Circle all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 33

Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 34

Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 35
Answer:
Rhombus
2 pairs of parallel sides
4 equal sides

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 36

Answer:
Trapezoid – only 1 pair of parallel sides

Name all of the quadrilaterals that can have the given attribute.

Question 5.
2 pairs of parallel sides

Answer:
Square, Rhombus , Rectangle and Parallelogram.

Question 6.
4 right angles

Answer:
Square and Rectangle.

Question 7.
Precision
Is the shape a rhombus? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 37

Answer:
No.
Explanation:
Rhombus contains 2 pairs of parallel sides and 4 equal sides but the given figure doesnot have equal sides and parallel sides.

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend not says the shape is a rhombus. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 38

Answer:
Yes .
Explanation:
Rhombus contain 2 pairs of parallel sides and 4 equal sides. but it doesn’t contain 4 right angles. so it is square not rhombus.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Write all of the names for the red quadrilateral in the painting.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 39

Show and Grow

Use the painting above.

Question 9.
Write all of the names for the blue quadrilateral.

Answer:
1 Square and 4 triangles.

Question 10.
What color is the rhombus that is not a square?
Answer:
Purple.

Question 11.
How many trapezoids are in the painting? Circle them.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 40

Answer:

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 4 squares and 8 rectangles in a floortile pattern. Find the total number of right angles in the pattern. Explain.

Answer:
one square contain 4 right angles
4 squares = 4×4=16 right angles
one rectangle contain 4 right angles
8 rectangles = 8×4=32 right angles.
Therefore Total Right angles = 16 +32 = 48 angles.

Describe Quadrilaterals Homework & Practice 13.2

Circle all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 41

Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 42

Answer:

Write all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 43

Answer:
Parallelogram.
Explanation:
It contains 2 pairs of parallel sides.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 44

Answer:
Square .

Explanation:
It contains 2 pairs of parallel sides, 4 equal sides and 4 right angles.

Name all of the quadrilaterals that can have the given attributes.

Question 5.
4 sides and 4 angles

Answer:
Quadilateral.

Question 6.
exactly 1 pair of parallel sides

Answer:
Trapezoid.

Question 7.
Writing
Explain how a trapezoid is different from a parallelogram.

Answer:
A Trapezoid contains only 1 pair of parallel sides where as, parallelogram contains 2 pairs of parallel sides .

Question 8.
Reasoning
Explain why the rectangle shown is not a square.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 45

Answer:
As per the figure only opposite sides are equal but where as square contains all 4 sides equal.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
What is Descartes’s shape?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 150

Answer:
Rectangle.

Question 10.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which not does belong with the other three? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 46

Answer:
Trapezoid as it contains one one parallel side.

Modeling Real Life
Use the mosaic

Question 11.
Write all of the names for the purple quadrilateral.
Answer:
Triangle and Rhombus

Question 12.
How many parallelograms are in the mosaic? Circle them.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 47

Answer:

Review & Refresh

Question 13.
Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 48
___6_ × __2_ = ______

Answer:
Area = _________12 sqft____

Explanation:
Area of rectangle is length x Breadth.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 49
_4___ ×  5__ = _____
Area = ____________

Answer:
Area=20 sqcms.

Explanation:
Area of rectangle is length x Breadth.

Lesson 13.3 Classify Quadrilaterals

Explore and Grow

Use each description to model a quadrilateral on your geoboard. Draw each quadrilateral.

Two pairs of parallel sides
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 50

Answer:

Exactly one pair of parallel sides
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 51

Answer:

Four right angles that do not form a square

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 52

Answer:

Two pairs of parallel sides and no right angles

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 53

Answer:

Structure
Compare your quadrilaterals to your partner’s. Are your quadrilaterals the same? Are you both correct? Explain.

Answer:
Different Answer for 1 condition because Two pairs of parallel sides are rectangle,square,rhombus and parallelogram.

Same Answers for 2,3 and 4 conditions.

Think and Grow:
How are the parallelograms and rhombuses alike? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 54
Ways they are alike:
Each has ___ sides.
Each has ___ angles.
Each has ___ pairs of parallel sides.

Answer:
A parallelogram is a rhombus if the diagonals are perpendicular.

Ways they are alike:
Each has __4_ sides.
Each has __2_ angles.
Each has __2_ pairs of parallel sides.

 

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 55
Ways they are different:
Rhombus always have __4__ equal sides.
What names can you use to classify all parallelograms and rhombuses?
Answer:
Squares and Rectangles.
A rectangle has two sets of parallel sides, so it is a parallelogram.
A rhombus has four congruent sides and a square has four congruent sides and angles. Therefore, a rhombus is a square when it has congruent angles.

Show and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 56

Question 1.
How are squares and rectangles alike? How are they different?

Answer:
Squares and rectangles both are a type of quadrilateral, both have their four interior angles equal to 90 degrees and opposite sides parallel to each other.

The difference between square and rectangle is that a square has all its sides equal whereas a rectangle has its opposite sides equal.

Question 2.
What names can you use to classify all squares and rectangles?

Answer:
Parallelogram because A Rectangle is a Parallelogram with all right angles. A Square is a Rectangle with adjacent sides equal.

Question 3.
Draw a quadrilateral that is not a square or a rectangle. Explain.

Answer:

q6

Explanation:
Trapezoids contain only 1 pair of parallel sides.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 57

Question 4.
How are trapezoids and parallelograms alike? How are they different?

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 58

Answer:
A trapezoid has one pair of parallel sides and a parallelogram has two pairs of parallel sides.
A trapezoid can be called a parallelogram when it has more than one pair of parallel sides.

Question 5.
What name can you use to classify all trapezoids and parallelograms?

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 59
Question 6.
How are rhombuses and squares alike? How are they different?

Answer:
Rhombuses and Square are alike as they contain 2 pairs of parallel sides and 4 equal sides. Different as Square have 4 right angles, but rhombus does not.

Question 7.
What names can you use to classify all rhombuses and squares?

Answer:
Parallelogram.

Question 8.
Draw a quadrilateral that is a rhombus but not a square.

Answer:

Question 9.
Draw a quadrilateral that is not a rhombus or a square. Explain.

Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
Sort the road signs into two groups by shape. What is alike and what is different between the two groups? What name can you use to classify all of the road sign shapes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 60

Answer:

Explanation:
Rectangles contain 2 pairs of parallel sides but where as , Trapezoid contain only 1 pair of parallel sides .

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Sort the road signs into two groups by shape. What is alike and what is different between the two groups? What names can you use to classify all of the road sign shapes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 61

Answer:

Explanation:
Square and Rectangles are alike as they contain 2 pairs of parallel sides and
4 right angles. they are different as square contain all sides equal but rectangle contain only opposite sides equal.

Classify Quadrilaterals Homework & Practice 13.3

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 151

Question 1.
How are rectangles and rhombuses alike? How are they different?

Answer:
Rectangle and Rhombus are alike because both contain 2 pairs of parallel lines. they are different because rectangle contain 4 right angles and opposite sides equal.Rhombus contain all sides equal with 0 right angles.

Question 2.
What names can you use to classify all rectangles and rhombuses?

Answer:
Parallelogram.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend says a shape is a rectangle. Newton says the same shape is a rhombus, and Descartes says it is a square. Can they all be correct? Explain.

Answer:
In rhombus,Square and Rectangle all the opposite sides are equal.

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 62

Answer:
Trapezoids have only one pair of parallel sides; parallelograms have two pairs of parallel sides. A trapezoid can never be a parallelogram.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Sort the earrings into two groups by shape. What is alike and what is different between the two groups? What name can you use to classify all of the earring shapes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 63

Answer:


Explanation:
Trapezoid contain only 1 pair of parallel sides .Square contains 2 pairs of parallel sides .

 

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Use the number line to find an equivalent fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 64

Answer:

Question 7.
Write two fractions that name the point shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 65

Answer:

Lesson 13.4 Draw Quadrilaterals

Explore and Grow

Model each quadrilateral on your geoboard. Move one vertex of each quadrilateral to create a new quadrilateral. Draw each new quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 66

Answer:

 


Structure
Create your own quadrilateral. Move one vertex to create a new quadrilateral. Draw your quadrilaterals. Name each quadrilateral
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 67

Answer:

Think and Grow: Draw Quadrilaterals
Example
Draw a quadrilateral that has four right angles. Name the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 68

Answer:
Square.

Example
Below are three rhombuses. Draw a quadrilateral not that is a rhombus. Explain why it is not a rhombus.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 69
The quadrilateral is not a rhombus because _______
______________________________________.

Answer:

Explanation:
The quadrilateral is not a rhombus because rectangle contains only opposite sides equal .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Draw a quadrilateral that has exactly one pair of parallel sides. Name the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 70

Answer:
Trapezoid.

Question 2.
Draw a quadrilateral that is not a square. Explain why it is not a square.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 71

Answer:

Explanation:
Square contains 2 pairs of parallel sides , 4 equal sides and 4 right angles.
Rectangle contains 2 pairs of parallel sides and 4 right angles .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Name the group of quadrilaterals. Then draw a quadrilateral that does not belong in the group. Explain why it does not belong.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 72

Answer:


Explanation:
Trapezoid contains only 1 pair of parallel side but whereas rhombus contain 2 pairs of parallel sides .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 73

Answer:

Explanation:
Rectangle and Square contains 2 pairs of parallel sides but whereas Trapezoid contains only 1 pair of parallel sides .

Question 5.
Precision
Circle the quadrilaterals that are not rhombuses.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 74

Answer:

Question 6.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend draws the shape and says it is a parallelogram because it has two pairs of parallel sides. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 152

Answer:
It is a pentagon as it contains 5 sides, whereas parallelogram contain only 4 sides.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw the quadrilateral with two pairs of parallel sides. One side is given.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 75

Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A helicopter travels to various Colorado cities. Draw to show a route that forms a parallelogram. Write the names of the cities you use.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 76

Answer:

Sterling, eckley, pritchett and La junta forms parallelogram .

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Use the map above. Drawtoshow a route that forms a trapezoid. Write the names of the cities you use.

Meeker,walden,loveland and cedaredge.

Question 9.
You have four markers of equal length. Name all of the quadrilaterals you can make using the markers as sides.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 77

Answer:
Rhombus and Square .

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Use a ruler to draw a trapezoid for each description.

  • one side length of 1 inch
  • one side length of 1 inch
  • one side length of 2 inches
  • one side length of 2 inches
  • two right angles
  • no right angles

Answer:

Trapezoid with 2 right angles

Draw Quadrilaterals Homework & Practice 13.4

Question 1.
Draw a quadrilateral that has two pairs of parallel sides. Name the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 78

Answer:

Question 2.
Draw a quadrilateral that is not a rhombus.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 79

Answer:

Question 3.
Name the group of quadrilaterals. Then draw a quadrilateral that does not belong in the group. Explain why it does not belong.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 153

Answer:

Explanation:
Square, Rhombus and Rectangle contains 2 pairs of parallel sides. where Trapezoid contains only 1 pair of parallel side .

Question 4.
Precision
Circle the quadrilaterals that are not trapezoids.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 80

Answer:

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A bus tour wants to travel to various locations. Draw to show a route that forms a rectangle. Write the names of the location drop-off points you use.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 81

 

Answer:

The Drop off point is The Discovery of king Tut exhibit .

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Tell whether the shape shows equal parts or unequal parts. If the shape shows equal parts, then name them
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 82
_____ parts _____

Answer:
11 square parts – equal parts .
8 rectangle parts – unequal parts .

Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Performance Task

Your class is learning about fossils.

Question 1.
Your teacher wants to create cards using the fossils below. Use each polygon description to write the fossil name on the correct card.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 83

Answer:

Question 2.
Your teacher uses the cards and a sandbox to create an archaeological dig site. Your teacher lays a grid with eight grid squares over the top of the sandbox. Each square has 10-inch side lengths. How many square inches is the bottom of the sandbox?

Answer:

 

Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Activity

Identify That Quadrilateral!

Directions:
1. Players take turns rolling a die.
2. On your turn, move your piece the number of spaces shown on the die.
3. Cover a space on the board that describes the shape where you landed.
4. If there are no spaces that match your shape, then you lose your turn.
5. The first player to cover six spaces wins!
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 87

Answer:

Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice

13.1 Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals

Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 90
Right angles: ____
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

Right angles: __0__
Pairs of parallel sides: __2_( sides 1 ll 2 and 3 ll 4 ) .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 91
Right angles: ____
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 2
Pairs of parallel sides: 0

Question 3.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the yellow sides are parallel. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 92

Answer:
Yes.
Explanation:
It is a Trapezoid it contains only 1 pair of parallel sides.

13.2 Describe Quadrilaterals

Question 4.
Write all of the names for the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 93

Answer:
Rectangle

Question 5.
Name all of the quadrilaterals that can have no right angles.

Answer:
Trapezoid, Rhombus and Parallelogram.

13.3 Classify Quadrilaterals

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 94

Question 6.
How are squares and trapezoids alike? How are they different?

Answer:
Both are quadrilaterals, so both of them have four sides. The square has two pairs of parallel sides, while the trapezoid only has one pair of parallel sides. So, we can say that both  have one pair of parallel sides in common.

squares have all sides equal . but whereas trapezoid sides are different.
squares have 4 right angles but whereas trapezoid have different angles.

Question 7.
What name can you use to classify all squares and trapezoids?

Answer:
Quadilaterals and Parallelogram.

13.4 Draw Quadrilaterals

Question 8.
Draw a quadrilateral that has four right angles. Name the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 95
Answer:
Square.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A helicopter travels to various locations in Wyoming. Draw to show a route that forms a square. Write the names of the locations you use.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 96

Answer:
lander, farson, points of rocks and sweetwater.

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes

I hope that the details prevailed in this page regarding Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Answer Key is useful for all the students and also for teachers. Make use of the answers to secure best grades in the exams. Stay in touch with oursite to get the latest solutions for other Big Ideas Grade 3 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions is an essential study material for students. Basic concepts of Multiplication of Whole Numbers and Fractions are clearly explained to score good marks for students. Also, in-depth knowledge of Chapter 9 Multiplies Whole Numbers and Fractions Big Ideas Grade 4 Math Answer Key mentioned with a clear explanation. Furthermore, BIM Grade 4 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions Answer Key is very convenient for students who are struggling to learn that concept. We have also given extra practice in small groups for the best practice of the students.

Big Ideas 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions Math Book Answer Key

Every problem is solved and given with a detailed explanation to help the students while their preparation. We have included the BIM Grade 4 Chapter 9 Solution Key in all the ways such as quiz, formative assessment, homework, or extra practice, etc. Practice in all the ways to get a complete grip on the concept. Provide a bright future for students, by giving the Chapter 9 Multiplies Whole Numbers and Fractions Big Ideas Grade 4 Math Answers as a reference.

Lesson: 1 Understand Multiples of Unit Fractions

Lesson: 2 Understand Multiples of Fractions

Lesson: 3 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions

Lesson: 4 Multiply Whole Numbers and Mixed Numbers

Lesson: 5 Problem Solving: Fraction Operations

Performance Task

Lesson 9.1 Understand Multiples of Unit Fractions

Explore and Grow

Draw a model of any fraction using unit fractions. Then write an addition equation to represent your model.
Reasoning
How can you rewrite the equation using multiplication? Explain.
Answer:
Let us take the fraction as \(\frac{3}{5}\) we draw a model using fractions as below

Addition equation to represent \(\frac{3}{5}\)  model is \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\) +
\(\frac{1}{5}\) +\(\frac{1}{5}\) to rewrite the equation using multiplication,
We write the equation as \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\) +\(\frac{1}{5}\) +
\(\frac{1}{5}\) = 3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) as the fraction \(\frac{3}{5}\)
represents 3 parts that are each \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the whole.

Think and Grow: Multiples of Unit Fractions

Any fraction can be written as a multiple of a unit fraction with a like denominator.
Example
Write \(\frac{5}{8}\) as a multiple of a unit fraction.
The fraction \(\frac{5}{8}\) represents 5 parts that are each \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the whole.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 500
Answer:

Show and Grow

Write the fraction as a multiple of a unit fraction.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 1
Answer:
\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\) +\(\frac{1}{3}\)
=  2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{2}{3}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{2}{3}\) =\(\frac{1}{3}\) +
\(\frac{1}{3}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{2}{3}\) represents 2 parts that are each
\(\frac{1}{3}\) of the whole, \(\frac{2}{3}\) =2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 2
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\) +\(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) +
\(\frac{1}{8}\) = 4 X \(\frac{1}{8}\).
Explanation:
We write \(\frac{4}{8}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\) +
\(\frac{1}{8}\)  + \(\frac{1}{8}\) +\(\frac{1}{8}\) and multiplication as
fraction \(\frac{4}{8}\) represents 4 parts that are each \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the whole,
\(\frac{4}{8}\) =4 X \(\frac{1}{8}\).

Question 3.
\(\frac{6}{5}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{6}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\) +\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\) = 6 X \(\frac{1}{5}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{6}{5}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{6}{5}\)= \(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\) +\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{6}{5}\) represents 6 parts
that are \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the whole \(\frac{6}{5}\) = 6 X \(\frac{1}{5}\).

Question 4.
\(\frac{7}{100}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{7}{100}\) = \(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\) +
\(\frac{1}{100}\)+ \(\frac{1}{100}\)+ \(\frac{1}{100}\)+ \(\frac{1}{100}\)
= 7 X \(\frac{1}{100}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{7}{100}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{7}{100}\)= \(\frac{1}{100}\) +
\(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\)+ \(\frac{1}{100}\)+
\(\frac{1}{100}\)+ \(\frac{1}{100}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{7}{100}\) represents
7 parts that are \(\frac{1}{100}\) of the whole, \(\frac{7}{100}\)= 7 X \(\frac{1}{100}\).

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the fraction as a multiple of a unit fraction.

Question 5.
\(\frac{2}{6}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= 2 X \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{2}{6}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{2}{6}\)= \(\frac{1}{6}\) +
\(\frac{1}{6}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{2}{6}\) represents 2 parts that are
\(\frac{1}{6}\) of the whole,\(\frac{2}{6}\) = 2 X \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Question 6.
\(\frac{6}{8}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\)+ \(\frac{1}{8}\)+ \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 6 X \(\frac{1}{8}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{6}{8}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\) +
\(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)+ \(\frac{1}{8}\)+ \(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{6}{8}\) represents 6 parts that are
\(\frac{1}{8}\) of the whole, \(\frac{6}{8}\) =6 X \(\frac{1}{8}\).

Question 7.
\(\frac{5}{4}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{5}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) +\(\frac{1}{4}\) +
\(\frac{1}{4}\) +\(\frac{1}{4}\) = 5 X \(\frac{1}{4}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{5}{4}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{5}{4}\)=\(\frac{1}{4}\) +
\(\frac{1}{4}\) +\(\frac{1}{4}\) +\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{5}{4}\) represents 5 parts that are \(\frac{1}{4}\)
of the whole, \(\frac{5}{4}\) = 5 X \(\frac{1}{4}\).

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{12}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{12}\)= \(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) =
3 X \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation :
We write \(\frac{3}{12}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{3}{12}\)= \(\frac{1}{12}\) +
\(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{3}{12}\)
represents 3 parts that are \(\frac{1}{12}\) of the whole, \(\frac{3}{12}\) =
3 X \(\frac{1}{12}\).

Question 9.
\(\frac{8}{100}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{8}{100}\) = \(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+
\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+
\(\frac{1}{100}\) = 8 X \(\frac{1}{100}\).

Explanation :
We write \(\frac{8}{100}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{8}{100}\) =
\(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+
\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+ \(\frac{1}{100}\)+
\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\) and multiplication as fraction
\(\frac{8}{100}\) represents 8 parts that are \(\frac{1}{100}\) of the whole,
\(\frac{8}{100}\)= 8 X \(\frac{1}{100}\).

Question 10.
\(\frac{7}{10}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\) +
\(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\)
= 7 X \(\frac{1}{10}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{7}{10}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{1}{10}\) +
\(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\) +
\(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{7}{10}\)
represents 7 parts that are \(\frac{1}{10}\) of the whole,\(\frac{7}{10}\) = 7 X \(\frac{1}{10}\).

Question 11.
Structure
When a fraction is written as a multiple of a unit fraction, what is the relationship between the numerator of the
fraction and the number that is multiplied by the unit fraction?
Answer:
When a fraction is written as a multiple of a unit fraction, the relationship between the numerator of the fraction
and the number that is multiplied by the unit fraction, is the whole number times the unit fraction.

Explanation : We know that the numerator of a unit fraction is always one. So When a fraction is
written as a multiple of a unit fraction the number will be always the whole number (whole number of times the unit fraction)
and is multiplied by unit fraction. For example \(\frac{3}{8}\) we write it as 3 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)
here it is 3 and this 3 is multiplied by unit fraction.

DIG DEEPER!
Write the mixed number as a multiple of a unit fraction.

Question 12.
1\(\frac{1}{8}\)
Answer:
1\(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{9}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)= 9 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) .

Explanation:
First we convert a mixed number to an improper fraction, It is to multiply the bottom number 8 by the
“regular” number 1, add in the top number 1, and then put this on top of the original bottom number as 9 by 8.
1\(\frac{1}{8}\) = 1+\(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{9}{8}\)
We write \(\frac{9}{8}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{9}{8}\)= \(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\) +\(\frac{1}{8}\)
and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{9}{8}\) represents 9 parts that are \(\frac{1}{10}\)
of the whole, \(\frac{9}{8}\) = 9 X \(\frac{1}{8}\).

Question 13.
3\(\frac{4}{5}\)
Answer:
3\(\frac{4}{5}\) = \(\frac{19}{5}\)=\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\) +\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)= 19 X \(\frac{1}{5}\).

Explanation:
First we convert a mixed number to an improper fraction, It is to multiply the bottom number 5 by the “regular”
number 3, add in the top number 4, and then put this on top of the original bottom number as 19 by 5.
3\(\frac{4}{5}\)=3+\(\frac{4}{5}\) = \(\frac{19}{5}\)
We write \(\frac{19}{5}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{19}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\) +\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{19}{5}\)
represents 19 parts that are \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the whole,\(\frac{19}{5}\)= 19 X \(\frac{1}{5}\).

Question 13.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A juice stand worker uses \(\frac{1}{2}\) of an orange to garnish each drink.
The worker has \(\frac{7}{12}\) of an orange left. How many more drinks can the worker garnish?
Write the fraction of orange left as a multiple of \(\frac{1}{12}\).
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 3
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 501
Answer:
The worker can garnish \(\frac{1}{12}\) more drinks,
\(\frac{7}{12}\) minus \(\frac{1}{2}\) means \(\frac{7}{12}\) – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{1}{12}\), Orange left is 7 X \(\frac{1}{12}\).

Explanation:
Given a juice stand worker uses \(\frac{1}{2}\) of an orange to garnish each drink.
The worker has \(\frac{7}{12}\) of an orange left. So the worker can garnish more \(\frac{7}{12}\)
minus \(\frac{1}{2}\) means \(\frac{7}{12}\) – \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\),
Given \(\frac{7}{12}\) of an orange is left , to write orange left as a multiple of \(\frac{1}{12}\)
we have orange left as \(\frac{7}{12}\) so write it as 7 parts that are \(\frac{1}{12}\) of the whole,
\(\frac{7}{12}\)= 7 X \(\frac{1}{12}\).

Show and Grow

Question 14.
A piece of rope is \(\frac{8}{5}\) meters long. You cut the rope into \(\frac{1}{5}\) meter long pieces.
How many pieces do you cut?
Answer:
8 pieces I have cut.

Explanation:
Given a piece of rope is \(\frac{8}{5}\) meters long and it has been cut into \(\frac{1}{5}\)
meter long pieces, therefore pieces of rope cut is \(\frac{8}{5}\) divided by \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= \(\frac{8}{5}\) X latex]\frac{5}{1}[/latex] = 8.

Question 15.
A restaurant serves \(\frac{4}{10}\) of a meatloaf to 4 customers. Each customer receives
the same amount of meatloaf. What fraction of the meatloaf does each customer receive?
Answer:
The fraction of the meatloaf each customer receives is \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Explanation:
Given a restaurant serves \(\frac{4}{10}\) of a meatloaf to 4 customers and each customer receives the same
amount of meatloaf so fraction of the meatloaf each customer receives is  \(\frac{4}{10}\)  divided by 4 =
\(\frac{4}{10}\) x \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{10}\).

Question 16.
You use 3\(\frac{3}{4}\) pounds of trail mix to make treat bags. You put \(\frac{1}{4}\)
pound of trail mix into each bag. How many treat bags do you make?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 4
Answer:
Total number of treat bags made are 15

Explanation:
I use 3\(\frac{3}{4}\) pounds of trail mix to make treat bags, We convert a mixed number to an
improper fraction,It is to multiply the bottom number 4 by the “regular” number 3, add in the top number 3,
and then put this on top of the original bottom number as 15 by 4, it becomes \(\frac{15}{4}\),Each bag i kept
\(\frac{1}{4}\) pound of trail mix so total number of treat bags required to make are \(\frac{15}{4}\)
divided by \(\frac{1}{4}\)=\(\frac{15}{4}\) X \(\frac{4}{1}\)=15 treat bags.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
You walk from home to school and then back home again each day for 5 days. Altogether, you walk \(\frac{10}{8}\) miles. What is the distance from your home to school? Explain.
Answer:
The distance from home to school is \(\frac{1}{8}\) miles

Explanation:
Total number of miles walked is \(\frac{10}{8}\) in 5 days that to from home to school and
then back home again means it is twice a day , Let us take X as the distance from home to school is,
Given 2X x 5=\(\frac{10}{8}\) miles, X = Then each day number of miles walked is  \(\frac{10}{8}\)
divided by 10 which is  equal to  \(\frac{10}{8}\) x \(\frac{1}{10}\) =\(\frac{1}{8}\),
Therefore X = \(\frac{1}{8}\) miles.

Understand Multiples of Unit Fractions Homework & practice 9.1

Write the fraction as a multiple of a unit fraction.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 5
Answer:
\(\frac{2}{12}\)= \(\frac{1}{12}\)+\(\frac{1}{12}\) = 2 X \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{2}{12}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{2}{12}\)= \(\frac{1}{12}\) +
\(\frac{1}{12}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{2}{12}\) represents 2 parts that are
\(\frac{1}{12}\) of the whole, \(\frac{2}{12}\)= 2 X \(\frac{1}{12}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 6
Answer:
\(\frac{5}{100}\)= \(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+
\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\) = 5 X \(\frac{1}{100}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{5}{100}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{5}{100}\)= \(\frac{1}{100}\)+
\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)+\(\frac{1}{100}\)
and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{5}{100}\) represents 5 parts that are \(\frac{1}{100}\) of the whole, \(\frac{5}{100}\) = 5 X \(\frac{1}{100}\).

Question 3.
\(\frac{3}{6}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{6}\)=\(\frac{1}{6}\)+\(\frac{1}{6}\)+\(\frac{1}{6}\)
= 3 X \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{3}{6}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{3}{6}\)=\(\frac{1}{6}\)+
\(\frac{1}{6}\)+\(\frac{1}{6}\) and multiplication as fraction \(\frac{3}{6}\)
represents 3 parts that are \(\frac{1}{6}\) of the whole,\(\frac{3}{6}\) = 3 X \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Question 4.
\(\frac{7}{10}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{7}{10}\) =\(\frac{1}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\)+
\(\frac{1}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\)
= 7 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{7}{10}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{7}{10}\)= \(\frac{1}{10}\)+
\(\frac{1}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\)+
\(\frac{1}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\) and multiplication as \(\frac{7}{10}\) represents
7 parts that are \(\frac{1}{10}\) of the whole,\(\frac{7}{10}\) = 7 X \(\frac{1}{10}\).

Question 5.
\(\frac{4}{5}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\) = 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{4}{5}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{4}{5}\)=\(\frac{1}{5}\)+
\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\)+\(\frac{1}{5}\) and multiplication as \(\frac{4}{5}\)
represents 4 parts that are \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the whole,\(\frac{4}{5}\)= 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\).

Question 6.
\(\frac{9}{2}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{9}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+
\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+
\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\) = 9 X \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{9}{2}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{9}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)+
\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+
\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)
and multiplication as \(\frac{9}{2}\) represents 9 parts that are \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the whole,
\(\frac{9}{2}\)= 9 X \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 7.
\(\frac{8}{8}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{8}{8}\)=1=\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{8}{8}\) = 8 X \(\frac{1}{8}\).

Explanation:
\(\frac{8}{8}\)= 1 ,but we write the fraction as a addition of a unit fraction and multiple of a unit fraction,
We write \(\frac{8}{8}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{8}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\)+\(\frac{1}{8}\) and multiplication as \(\frac{8}{8}\)
represents 8 parts that are \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the whole,\(\frac{8}{8}\)= 8 X \(\frac{1}{8}\).

Question 8.
\(\frac{6}{3}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{6}{3}\)=2,\(\frac{6}{3}\)= \(\frac{1}{3}\)+\(\frac{1}{3}\)+
\(\frac{1}{3}\)+\(\frac{1}{3}\)+\(\frac{1}{3}\)+\(\frac{1}{3}\)
= 6 X \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Explanantion:
\(\frac{6}{3}\)= 2 ,but we write the fraction as a addition of a unit fraction and multiple of a unit fraction,
We write \(\frac{6}{3}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{6}{3}\)= \(\frac{1}{3}\)+
\(\frac{1}{3}\)+\(\frac{1}{3}\)+\(\frac{1}{3}\)+\(\frac{1}{3}\)+
\(\frac{1}{3}\) and multiplication as \(\frac{6}{3}\) represents 6 parts that are
\(\frac{1}{3}\) of the whole,\(\frac{6}{3}\)= 6 X \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Question 9.
Logic
What is Newton’s fraction? Write the fraction as a multiple of a unit fraction.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 7
Answer:
Newton’s fraction = \(\frac{9}{12}\)=\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +
\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +
\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) = 9 X \(\frac{1}{12}\).

Explanation:
Given that Newton’s fraction as sum of 9 unit fractions and each unit fraction is one twelfth of a whole.
So Newton’s fraction is \(\frac{9}{12}\) we write \(\frac{9}{12}\) in addition equation as
\(\frac{9}{12}\)=  \(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +
\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) +
\(\frac{1}{12}\) +\(\frac{1}{12}\) and multiplication as \(\frac{9}{12}\) represents 9 parts
that are \(\frac{1}{12}\) of the whole,\(\frac{9}{12}\)= 9 X \(\frac{1}{12}\).

Question 10
Structure
Write a multiplication equation that represents the grapefruit halves.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 8
Answer:
\(\frac{6}{2}\)=\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+
\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 6 X \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Explanation:
Given 6 number of grapefruit halves so there are total grapefruit as \(\frac{6}{2}\) we write
\(\frac{6}{2}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{6}{2}\)=\(\frac{1}{2}\)+
\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+\(\frac{1}{2}\)+
\(\frac{1}{2}\),so the multiplication equation is \(\frac{6}{2}\) represents 6 parts that are
\(\frac{1}{2}\) of the whole,\(\frac{6}{2}\)= 6 X \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 11.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which expression does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 9
Answer:
4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) expression does not belong with the other three, as all the other expressions values results are same =\(\frac{5}{4}\) only 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) expression is not.

Explanation:
1. 5 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
2. \(\frac{1}{4}\)+\(\frac{1}{4}\)+\(\frac{1}{4}\)+\(\frac{1}{4}\)=
5 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)= \(\frac{5}{4}\)
3. \(\frac{5}{4}\) =\(\frac{5}{4}\)
4. 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\)= \(\frac{4}{5}\)≠  \(\frac{5}{4}\)
So in the above expressions only 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\)  does not belong with the other three expressions.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
You are making blueberry pancakes. You have \(\frac{6}{8}\) cup of blueberries. You put \(\frac{1}{8}\) cup of blueberries in each pancake. How many pancakes do you make?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 10
Answer:
6 pancakes i can make.

Explanation:
I have \(\frac{6}{8}\) cup of blueberries and i can put \(\frac{1}{8}\) cup of blueberries
in each pan cake so total number of pancakes made are \(\frac{6}{8}\) divided by \(\frac{1}{8}\) =
\(\frac{6}{8}\) X \(\frac{8}{1}\)= 6 pancakes.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
You cut a loaf of zucchini bread into 20 equal slices. You and your friends eat \(\frac{3}{10}\) of the slices.
You want to put each leftover slice into its own bag. How many bags do you need?
Answer:
14 bags are needed.

Explanation :
Given a loaf of zucchini bread is cut  into 20 equal slices and i ,friend eat \(\frac{3}{10}\) of the slices,
Total number of slices of zucchini bread =20, Number of slices ate = \(\frac{3}{10}\) means it says
out of 10 slices 3 were ate, so out of 20 slices  2 x 3= 6 slices were eaten. Number of slices left = 20 – 6 =14 slices
and one bag contains only one slice. Therefore number of bags needed are 14.

Question 14.
Is 46 a multiple of 45.
Answer:
No 46 is not a multiple of 45.

Explanation:
A multiple is a number that can be divided by another number a certain number of times without a remainder.
45 when divided by 46 a certain times will leave a remainder, So 46 is not a multiple of 45
or a factor is one of two or more numbers that divides a given number without a remainder.
As factors of 45 are 1,3,5,9,15 and factors of 46 are 1,2,23, both do not have common factors so 46 is not a multiple of 45.

Question 15.
Is 3 a factor of 75?
Answer:
Yes 3 is a factor of 75
Explanation:
We know that a factor is one that divides a given number without a remainder and 75 when divided by 3
leaves no remainder, So 3 is a factor of 75.

Lesson 9.2 Understand Multiples of Fractions

Draw a model for each expression. Then write a multiplication expression to represent each model.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 11
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 12
Answer:

The multiplication expression is \(\frac{2}{6}\) +\(\frac{2}{6}\) +\(\frac{2}{6}\) +
\(\frac{2}{6}\) = 4 X \(\frac{2}{6}\) =
\(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\)+ \(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\)+
\(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\)+ \(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\) =
8 X \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{6}\) +\(\frac{2}{6}\) +\(\frac{2}{6}\) +\(\frac{2}{6}\)
the multiplication equation is  4 parts that are \(\frac{2}{6}\) of the whole as  4 X \(\frac{2}{6}\)
\(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\)+ \(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\)+
\(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\)+ \(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\) =
8 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) the multiplication equation is 8 parts that are \(\frac{1}{6}\) of the whole as
8 X \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Structure
Compare your expressions. How are they the same? How are they different?
Same means the result of both expressions is same = \(\frac{8}{6}\)
Different means in one expression we take value of \(\frac{2}{6}\) 4 times and in another
expression we take \(\frac{1}{6}\) 8 times.

Explanation:
Same means \(\frac{2}{6}\) +\(\frac{2}{6}\) +\(\frac{2}{6}\) +\(\frac{2}{6}\) =
4 X \(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{8}{6}\) and \(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\)+
\(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\)+\(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\)+
\(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\) = 8 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) =\(\frac{8}{6}\) ,
both have results similar as \(\frac{8}{6}\), Different means here we are taking expressions as addition values of  \(\frac{2}{6}\) by 4 times and in other expression we are taking addition values of \(\frac{1}{6}\) by 8 times.

Think and Grow: Multiples of Fractions

A multiple of any fraction can be written as a multiple of a unit fraction with a like denominator.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 13
Answer:


Explanation:
To write 2 X \(\frac{3}{5}\) multiple of unit fraction first we write \(\frac{3}{5}\) as multiple of
3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) then we multiply it by 2 as 2 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\)=6 X \(\frac{1}{5}\).

Show and Grow

Write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction. Then find the product.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 14
Answer:
2 X \(\frac{4}{5}\) = 2 X 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 8 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{8}{5}\).

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{4}{5}\)  as  \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) +
\(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) then multiply it by 2
which is  2 X 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 8 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{8}{5}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 15
Answer:
3 X \(\frac{2}{10}\) = 3 X 2 X  \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 6 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) =\(\frac{6}{10}\).

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{2}{10}\) as \(\frac{1}{10}\) +\(\frac{1}{10}\) = 2 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)
then multiply it by 3 which is 3 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 6 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) =\(\frac{6}{10}\).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 16
Answer:
4 X \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 4 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 12 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{12}{2}\) = 6.

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{3}{2}\) as \(\frac{1}{2}\) +\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) then we multiply it by 4 which is 4 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)= 12 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)= \(\frac{12}{2}\)=6.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction. Then find the product.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 17
Answer:
5 X \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 5 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 10 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)=
\(\frac{10}{3}\).

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{2}{3}\) as \(\frac{1}{3}\)+\(\frac{1}{3}\)=
2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) then multiply it by 5 which is 5 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)=
10 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)= \(\frac{10}{3}\).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 18
Answer:
6 X \(\frac{5}{8}\)= 6 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)= 30 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) =
\(\frac{30}{8}\).

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{5}{8}\) as \(\frac{1}{8}\)+ \(\frac{1}{8}\)+
\(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)+ \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 5 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)
then multiply it by 6 which is 6 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)=30 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)= \(\frac{30}{8}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 19
Answer:
9 X \(\frac{7}{4}\) = 9 X 7 X\(\frac{1}{4}\)= 63 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
\(\frac{63}{4}\).

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{7}{4}\) as \(\frac{1}{4}\)+\(\frac{1}{4}\)+
\(\frac{1}{4}\)+ \(\frac{1}{4}\)+\(\frac{1}{4}\)+\(\frac{1}{4}\)+
\(\frac{1}{4}\) = 7 x \(\frac{1}{4}\)
then we multiply it by 9 which is 9 X 7 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)= 63 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
\(\frac{63}{4}\).

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 20
Answer:
7 X \(\frac{4}{12}\)=7 X 4 X \(\frac{1}{12}\)= 28 X \(\frac{1}{12}\)=
\(\frac{28}{12}\) also 7 X \(\frac{4}{12}\)= 7 X  \(\frac{1}{3}\)= \(\frac{7}{3}\).

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{4}{12}\) as \(\frac{1}{12}\)+ \(\frac{1}{12}\)+
\(\frac{1}{12}\)+\(\frac{1}{12}\)= 4 X \(\frac{1}{12}\) then we multiply it by 7
which is 7 X 4 X \(\frac{1}{12}\)= 28 X \(\frac{1}{12}\)=\(\frac{28}{12}\)
we can also simplify 7 X \(\frac{4}{12}\) as 4,12 can be divided by 4 we can also write
7 X \(\frac{4}{12}\) as 7 X  \(\frac{1}{3}\)= \(\frac{7}{3}\).

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 21
Answer:
\(\frac{9}{6}\) X 8 = 9 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) X 8 = 72 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) =
\(\frac{72}{6}\) =12.

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{9}{6}\) as \(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\) +
\(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\) +
\(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{6}\) =9 X \(\frac{1}{6}\)
then we multiply it by 8 which is 9 X 8 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 72 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) =
\(\frac{72}{6}\)  further as 6 can divide 72 and leaving no remainder we write \(\frac{72}{6}\) =12.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 22
Answer:
10 X \(\frac{20}{100}\) = 10 X \(\frac{2}{10}\)=2 X 10 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)=
20 \(\frac{1}{10}\)=\(\frac{20}{10}\)=2.

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{20}{100}\) = \(\frac{2}{10}\) as \(\frac{1}{10}\) +
\(\frac{1}{10}\) = 2 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) then multiply it by 10 which is
2 X 10 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)= 20 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)=\(\frac{20}{10}\)
and 10 can divide 20 leaving no remainder further we can write \(\frac{20}{10}\) as 2.

Number Sense
Find the unknown number.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 23
Answer:
The unknown number is 2.

Explanation:
___ X \(\frac{8}{10}\) = \(\frac{16}{10}\)= to get the unknown number we take it as P,
P X \(\frac{8}{10}\) = \(\frac{16}{10}\) means P = \(\frac{16}{10}\) X
\(\frac{10}{8}\)  we get 2 , so P=2.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 24
Answer:
The unknown number is 5.

Explanation:
Let us take unknown letter as P so 4 X \(\frac{P}{2}\) = \(\frac{20}{2}\) ,
4 X P= 2 X \(\frac{20}{2}\) to get value of P we take 4 to other side ,
Therefore P=20 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 5, so the unknown number is 5.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 25
Answer:
The unknown number is 100.

Explanation:
Let us take unknown number as P given 3 X \(\frac{9}{P}\) = \(\frac{27}{100}\) ,
27 X[ latex]\frac{1}{P}[/latex] = \(\frac{27}{100}\), Therefore P= 27 X \(\frac{100}{27}\)=100.

Question 13.
Reasoning
Without calculating, would you plot the product of 5 and \(\frac{3}{6}\) to the left or to the right of 5 on a number line? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 26
Answer:
Yes , without calculating we can plot 5 and \(\frac{3}{6}\) to the left of 5

Explanation:
5 X \(\frac{3}{6}\)= 5 X  \(\frac{1}{2}\) since the denominator of each given fraction is 2
divide the space between every pairs of two consecutive integers (on the number line) in 2 equal parts each part
so obtained will represent the fraction \(\frac{1}{2}\) , so on the number line we move 5 parts on the
right-side of zero as shown in the figure.

Question 14.
Patterns
Describe and complete the pattern.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 27
Answer:

Explanation:
We first write the expressions as multiple of unit fraction and find the product so
1. 3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) can be written as  product of 3 X 1 X  \(\frac{1}{5}\)=
3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
2. 3 X \(\frac{2}{5}\)  can be written as product of  3 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
6 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{6}{5}\)
3. 3 X \(\frac{3}{5}\) can be written as product of 3 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
9 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{9}{5}\)
4. 3 X \(\frac{4}{5}\) can be written as product of  3 X 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
12 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{12}{5}\)
5. 3 X \(\frac{5}{5}\) can be written as product of 3 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
15 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{15}{5}\) further can be simplified as 15,5 goes in 5,
so dividing by 5 we get \(\frac{15}{5}\) =  3.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A bird keeper uses a \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup scoop to feed 3 birds. He feeds each bird \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of birdseed. How many times does he fill the scoop?
Three birds each need \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of birdseed, so find 3 × \(\frac{2}{3}\).
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 28
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 29
Answer:

Explanation :
Given A bird keeper uses a \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup scoop to feed 3 birds each bird he feeds
\(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of birdseed, Three birds each need \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of birdseed
so the bird keeper fills the scoop as 3 X \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 3 X _____P______ X \(\frac{1}{3}\) here
P is the  number of times the bird keeper fills the cup scoop.
3 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =  3 X P X \(\frac{1}{3}\) , when we equate both sides,
we get 3 X 2 = 3 X P , therefore P = 2.
Show and Grow

Question 15.
A chef makes 4 servings of honey1oatmeal. She uses a \(\frac{1}{2}\) tablespoon measuring spoon to measure \(\frac{3}{2}\) tablespoons of honey for each serving. How many times does she fill the measuring spoon?
Answer:
3 times the chef fill the measuring spoon.

Explanation:
Chef uses a \(\frac{1}{2}\) table spoon as measuring spoon, To measure honey for each serving
she needed for each serving is \(\frac{3}{2}\) , so 4 X \(\frac{3}{2}\) ,
Let us take P as number of times of measuring spoon , Given 4 X \(\frac{3}{2}\) =
4 X _P_ X \(\frac{1}{2}\), 4 X ___3___ X \(\frac{1}{2}\)= 4 X _P_ X \(\frac{1}{2}\) ,
we equate both sides  we get value of P as 3 , therefore 3 times the chef fill the measuring spoon.

Question 16.
You have 7 magnetic blocks that are each \(\frac{9}{100}\) meter long. You connect the ends of the blocks to make a snake. What fraction of a meter is the block snake?
Answer:
\(\frac{63}{100}\) meter is the block snake.

Explanation:
Given 7 magnetic blocks and each are \(\frac{9}{100}\) meter long. After connecting the ends
of the blocks to make a snake is 7 X \(\frac{9}{100}\) = 7 X 9 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) =
63 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) = \(\frac{63}{100}\) meter.

Question 17.
Your friend roller-skates \(\frac{15}{10}\) miles each day for 5 days. How many miles does your friend roller-skate in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 30
Answer:
My friend roller skate \(\frac{15}{2}\) miles in all.

Explanation:
Given friend roller-skates \(\frac{15}{10}\) miles each day means \(\frac{3}{2}\) miles
each day so for 5 days it is 5 X \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 5 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) =
15 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{15}{2}\) miles.

Understand Multiples of Fractions Homework & Practice 9.2

Write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction. Then find the product.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 31
Answer:
2 X \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 2 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 4 X (\(\frac{1}{3}\)) =
\(\frac{4}{3}\)

Explanation:
To write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction we write it \(\frac{2}{3}\)
as 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) and multiply by 2 = 2 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =
4 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{3}\)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 32
Answer:
3 X \(\frac{5}{8}\) = 3 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 15 X (\(\frac{1}{8}\)) =
\(\frac{15}{8}\).

Explanation:
To write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction we write it \(\frac{5}{8}\) as
5 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) and multiply by 3 = 3 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 15 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)
= \(\frac{15}{8}\)

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 33
Answer:
4 X \(\frac{8}{2}\) = 4 X 8 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 32 X (\(\frac{1}{2}\)) =
\(\frac{32}{2}\) =16.

Explanation:
To write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction we write it \(\frac{8}{2}\) as
8 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) and multiply by 4 = 4 X 8 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) =
32 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{32}{2}\) = 16.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 34
Answer:
5 X \(\frac{9}{10}\) = 5 X 9 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 45 X (\(\frac{1}{10}\)) =
\(\frac{45}{10}\) = \(\frac{9}{2}\)

Explanation:
To write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction we write it \(\frac{9}{10}\) as
9 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) and multiply by 5 = 5 X 9 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) =
45 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) = \(\frac{45}{10}\) = \(\frac{9}{2}\).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 35
Answer:
8 X \(\frac{6}{5}\) = 8 X 6 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 48X (\(\frac{1}{5}\)) =
\(\frac{48}{5}\)

Explanation:
To write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction we write it \(\frac{6}{5}\) as
6 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) and multiply by 8 = 8 X 6 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
48 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{48}{5}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 36
Answer:
10 X \(\frac{2}{4}\) = 10 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 20 X (\(\frac{1}{4}\)) =
\(\frac{20}{4}\) = \(\frac{10}{2}\).

Explanation:
To write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction we write it \(\frac{2}{4}\) as 2 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)
and multiply by 10 = 2 X 10 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 20 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{20}{4}\) =
\(\frac{10}{2}\).

Question 7.
Number Sense
Which expression are equivalent to Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 37 ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 38
Answer:
The expressions equivalent to 4 X \(\frac{7}{8}\) are  (4 X 7) x \(\frac{1}{8}\) ,
\(\frac{28}{8}\),\(\frac{7}{8}\)+\(\frac{7}{8}\)+\(\frac{7}{8}\) +
\(\frac{7}{8}\).

Explanation:
We have the value of expression of 4 X \(\frac{7}{8}\) as \(\frac{28}{8}\) So
1.(4 X 7) x \(\frac{1}{8}\)= \(\frac{28}{8}\)
2. \(\frac{28}{8}\)=\(\frac{28}{8}\)
3. 4 X 7 ≠ \(\frac{28}{8}\)
4. \(\frac{32}{7}\) ≠ \(\frac{28}{8}\)
5. \(\frac{7}{8}\)+\(\frac{7}{8}\)+\(\frac{7}{8}\)+\(\frac{7}{8}\) =
\(\frac{28}{8}\), Therefore expressions 1,2,5 are equivalent to \(\frac{28}{8}\).
The expressions equivalent to 4 X \(\frac{7}{8}\) are  (4 X 7) x \(\frac{1}{8}\) , \(\frac{28}{8}\),\(\frac{7}{8}\)+\(\frac{7}{8}\)+\(\frac{7}{8}\)+\(\frac{7}{8}\)

Question 8.
Which is greater, Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 39 ? Explain.
Answer:
6 X \(\frac{6}{2}\) is greater

Explanation:
6 X \(\frac{6}{2}\)= 6 X 6 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)=36 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)=
\(\frac{36}{2}\) and 5 X \(\frac{7}{2}\) =5 X 7 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)=
35 X \(\frac{1}{2}\), Now comparing both sides 36 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) and
35 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) we see 36 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) > 35 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)
so 6 X \(\frac{6}{2}\) is greater.

Question 9.
Structure
Your friend fills a \(\frac{3}{4}\) – cup measuring cup with rice 2 times.
Write an equation to show how much rice she uses.

Answer:
Friend uses \(\frac{3}{2}\) cups.

Explanation:
Friend fills a \(\frac{3}{4}\) – cup with rice 2 times, so she uses 2 X \(\frac{3}{4}\) =
2 X 3 x \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 6 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)= \(\frac{6}{4}\)=
\(\frac{3}{2}\).

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
You are making a tornado in each of 2 bottles. Each bottle needs to contain \(\frac{20}{4}\) cups of water.
You only have a \(\frac{1}{4}\) – cup measuring cup. How many times do you need to fill the measuring cup?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 39.1
Answer:
To make a tornado we require 40 cups of water.

Explanation:
Each bottle needs \(\frac{20}{4}\) cups of water and have a \(\frac{1}{4}\) – cup
measuring cup, Now we take P as number of times for filling so \(\frac{20}{4}\) =
P X \(\frac{1}{4}\), 20 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)=P X \(\frac{1}{4}\),
Equating both sides we get  P = 20,  so it is 20 times to fill the measuring cups of water
for one bottle, Given that to make a tornado we require 2 bottles, 2 X 20 cups of water = 40 cups of water.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You and your friend are each selling 12 coupon books. So far, you have sold \(\frac{2}{6}\)
of your books. Your friend has sold 3 times as many as you. What fraction of your friend’s coupon books has she sold?

Answer:
We will get the fraction as whole 1 so friend has sold all the 12 coupon books.

Explanation:
So far i sold \(\frac{2}{6}\) books out of 12 coupon books. Lets us take P number of books,
i have sold P out of 12 coupon books, P= 12 X \(\frac{2}{6}\) =12 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) =
24 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{24}{6}\) =4 , So i have sold 4 coupon books,
Given friend has sold 3 times as many as I, Means 3 X 4 =12 means friend has sold all the coupon books

Review & Refresh

Find the product.

Question 12.
12 × 47 = ___
Answer:
12 X 47 = 564

Explanation:
When 12 is multiplied by 47 we get the product as 564.

Question 13.
35 × 31 = ___
Answer:
35 X 31 =1,085

Explanation:
When 35 is multiplied by 31 we get the product as 1,085.

Question 14.
58 × 49 = ___
Answer:
58 X 49 = 2,842

Explanation:
When 58 is multiplied by 49 we get the product as 2,842.

Lesson 9.3 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions

Explore and Grow

Use models to help you complete the table. What do you notice about each expression and its product?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 40
Construct Arguments
Explain how to find the product of a whole number and a fraction without using models.
Answer:

Explanation:

We notice that each expression can be written as the product as a multiple of a unit fraction,
The product of a number and a counting number is a multiple of the number. We can find multiples
of unit fractions. To find the product of a whole number and a fraction without using models,
First we multiply the numerator by the whole number, then rewrite the expression as a multiple
of a unit fraction and denominator stays the same we get the product results.

Think and Grow: Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions

You can find the product of a whole number and a fraction by multiplying the numerator by the whole number.
The denominator stays the same.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 41
Answer:

Explanation:
To find 4 X \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Method 1:  Multiply the numerator by the whole number as 4 X 2 and divide by 3= \(\frac{8}{3}\)
Method 2 : Then writing the expression as a multiple of unit fraction \(\frac{2}{3}\)=
4 X ( 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) ) applying associative property of multiplication
(4 X 2) X \(\frac{1}{3}\)= 8 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)=\(\frac{8}{3}\)

Show and Grow

Multiply.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 42
Answer:
4 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\) also equals to \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Explanation :
Already the expression is in multiple of unit fraction so 4 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\) and further simplification it is equal to \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 43
Answer:
3 X \(\frac{2}{4}\) = 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\).

Explanation:
3 X \(\frac{2}{4}\) can be simplified as 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) now the expression is in
multiple of unit fraction so  3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) =\(\frac{3}{2}\).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 44
Answer:
7 X  \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 7 x 3 X  \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 21 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) =
\(\frac{21}{2}\).

Explanation:
7 X \(\frac{3}{2}\)  first we write the expression as multiple of unit fraction so
7 X ( 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) ) applying associative property of multiplication
( 7 X  3) X \(\frac{1}{2}\) ) = 21 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{21}{2}\)

Apply and Grow: Practice

Multiply.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 45
Answer:
2 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{2}{5}\).

Explanation :
Already the expression 2 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) is a multiple of unit fraction so we multiply
the whole with the numerator and numerator is being same, 2 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
\(\frac{2}{5}\).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 46
Answer:
5 X \(\frac{3}{10}\) = \(\frac{15}{10}\)=\(\frac{3}{2}\).

Explanation:
5 X \(\frac{3}{10}\), we write the expression as multiple of unit fraction so
5 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)= 15 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)= \(\frac{15}{10}\)
further it can be simplified, as both numerator and denominator can be divided by 5 so
\(\frac{15}{10}\)=\(\frac{3}{2}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 47
Answer:
6 X \(\frac{7}{8}\)= \(\frac{42}{8}\)= \(\frac{21}{4}\).

Explanation:
6 X  \(\frac{7}{8}\), we write the expression as multiple of unit fraction so
6 X 7 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) applying associative property of multiplication
6 X ( 7 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) )= ( 6 X 7 ) X \(\frac{1}{8}\)= 42 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)=
\(\frac{42}{8}\) and further also the fraction can be simplified, as both numerator and denominator
can be divided by 2, making \(\frac{42}{8}\) as \(\frac{21}{4}\).

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 48
Answer:
8 X \(\frac{9}{10}\)= \(\frac{72}{10}\)=\(\frac{36}{5}\).

Explanation:
8 X  \(\frac{9}{10}\), we write the expression as multiple of unit fraction
so 8 X 9 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) applying associative property of multiplication
8 X ( 9 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) )= (8 X 9 ) X \(\frac{1}{10}\)=
72 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)= \(\frac{72}{10}\) and further also the fraction can be simplified,
as both numerator and denominator can be divided by 2, making \(\frac{72}{10}\) as \(\frac{36}{5}\).

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 49
Answer:
3 X \(\frac{60}{100}\) =\(\frac{180}{100}\) =\(\frac{18}{10}\).

Explanation:
3 X  \(\frac{60}{100}\),  we write the expression as multiple of unit fraction,
So 3 X 60 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) applying associative property of multiplication
3 X (60 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) )= (3 X 60 ) X \(\frac{1}{100}\)= 180 X \(\frac{1}{100}\)=
\(\frac{180}{100}\) and further also the fraction can be simplified,
as both numerator and denominator can be divided by 10, making \(\frac{180}{100}\)
as \(\frac{18}{10}\).

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 50
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{2}\) X 10 = 20.

Explanation :
\(\frac{4}{2}\) X 10 , we write the expression as multiple of unit fraction,
So 4 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) X 10= 40 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)=\(\frac{40}{2}\)
as the fraction can be further simplified as both numerator and denominator can be divided by 2, making it as 20.

Compare.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 51
Answer:
7 X \(\frac{2}{4}\) =\(\frac{14}{4}\) is smaller <  5 X \(\frac{3}{4}\)=
\(\frac{15}{4}\).

Explanation:
7 X \(\frac{2}{4}\), First we write expression as a multiple of unit fraction
7 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =14 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{14}{4}\)
Now 5 X \(\frac{3}{4}\) is also written as a multiple of unit fraction 5 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
15 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =\(\frac{15}{4}\) comparing \(\frac{14}{4}\) and
\(\frac{15}{4}\) as the denominators are same same 4 and in numerators 15 is great than 14,
So  \(\frac{14}{4}\)  is less than or smaller or < \(\frac{15}{4}\) ,
7 X \(\frac{2}{4}\) is smaller < 5 X \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 52

Answer:
4 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) is greater than > 4 X \(\frac{1}{10}\).

Explanation:
4 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) already the expression is in multiple of unit fraction,
we write as \(\frac{4}{8}\) and even the expression 4 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)
is in multiple of unit fraction we write as \(\frac{4}{10}\) because in order to compare
the fractions we must first turn their different denominators into the same denominators to make
denominators same we multiply 4 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) by 10 /10 the value will not change =
4 X 10 X \(\frac{1}{80}\)=40 X \(\frac{1}{80}\) =  \(\frac{40}{80}\)
now other expression 4 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) by 8/8 so that the value = 4 X 8 X \(\frac{1}{80}\) =
32 X \(\frac{1}{80}\) now as denominator are same we can compare only numerators
\(\frac{40}{80}\) with \(\frac{32}{80}\) as 40 is greater than 32,
So  \(\frac{4}{8}\) is greater than > \(\frac{4}{10}\) ,
4 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) is greater than > 4 X \(\frac{1}{10}\).

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 53
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{3}\) X 9 = 6 X \(\frac{6}{3}\) both are equal.

Explanation:
First we write expressions as a multiple of unit fraction \(\frac{4}{3}\) X 9 =
9 X 4 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =36 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =\(\frac{36}{3}\)
now other expression  6 X \(\frac{6}{3}\) as = 6 X 6 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =
36 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{36}{3}\) ,
As denominator is same in the both expression we compare numerators and even
the numerators are same in both the expression so given both products are equal .
Therefore \(\frac{4}{3}\) X 9 =, is equal to 6 X \(\frac{6}{3}\).

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the product of 6 and \(\frac{5}{8}\) is \(\frac{5}{48}\). Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer:
No she is not correct as the product of  6 X \(\frac{5}{8}\) ≠ \(\frac{5}{48}\).

Explanation:
We write the expression as a product  6 and \(\frac{5}{8}\) = 6 X \(\frac{5}{8}\)
to find the product of a whole number and a fraction we multiply the numerator by the whole number.
The denominator stays the same. 6 X 5 X  \(\frac{1}{8}\) =30 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) =
\(\frac{30}{8}\) now comparing with \(\frac{5}{48}\) as denominators are different in order
to compare the fractions we must first turn their different denominators into the same denominators
to make denominators same we multiply \(\frac{30}{8}\) with numerator and denominator
as 6= \(\frac{30}{8}\) X \(\frac{6}{6}\) we get \(\frac{180}{48}\),
now comparing with \(\frac{5}{48}\) being denominators same, now numerators 180,5 both are
not same so friend is not correct as the product of  6 X \(\frac{5}{8}\) ≠ \(\frac{5}{48}\).

Question 14.
Open-Ended
The product of a whole number and a fraction is \(\frac{24}{10}\). What could the two factors be?
Answer:
The product is given as \(\frac{24}{10}\) and the two factors can be (1,24) or (2,12) or (3,8) or (4,6)
with multiple of \(\frac{1}{10}\).

Explanation:
Given the product of a whole number and a fraction is \(\frac{24}{10}\) to find the two factors,
we first write the product as whole with multiple of unit fraction,\(\frac{24}{10}\),
we write as 24 X \(\frac{1}{10}\), now the whole part is 24 we find the factors for 24,
two more numbers that multiply to make 24 are 1 x 24 = 2 x 12 = 3 x 8 = 4 x 6 = 24.
This means the factors of 24 are 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12 and 24 so the two factors can be
(1,24) X \(\frac{1}{10}\) or  (2,12) X  \(\frac{1}{10}\) or (3,8) X \(\frac{1}{10}\)
or (4,6) X \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 24 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) = \(\frac{24}{10}\).

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A short roller-coaster track is \(\frac{3}{10}\) mile long. A longer roller-coaster track is about 4 times as long as the short track. About how long is the longer roller-coaster track?
Multiply the shorter roller-coaster track length by 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 54
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 54.1
So, the longer roller-coaster track is about _\(\frac{12}{10}\) _ miles long or \(\frac{6}{5}\) miles long
Answer:
The longer roller-coaster track is about \(\frac{12}{10}\) miles long or \(\frac{6}{5}\).

Explanation:
Given a short roller-coaster track is \(\frac{3}{10}\) mile long and longer roller-coaster
track is about 4 times as long as the short track to find how long is the longer roller-coaster track
we multiply short roller-coaster track  \(\frac{3}{10}\) mile by 4, 4 X \(\frac{3}{10}\)
now we write expression as a multiple of unit fraction so 4 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) =
12 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) =\(\frac{12}{10}\)  as numerator and denominator
can be further simplified as both can be divided by 2 making it as \(\frac{6}{5}\).

Show and Grow

Question 15.
The Renaissance Tower in Dallas, Texas is \(\frac{27}{100}\) kilometer tall. The Burj Khalifa is about 3 times as tall as the Renaissance Tower. About how tall is the Burj Khalifa?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 55
Answer:
The Burj Khalifa is \(\frac{81}{100}\) kilometers tall.

Explanation:
Given the Renaissance Tower in Dallas, Texas is \(\frac{27}{100}\) kilometer tall and
The Burj Khalifa is about 3 times as tall as the Renaissance Tower, To find how tall is the Burj Khalifa
we multiply the Renaissance Tower in Dallas, Texas length by 3,
3 X \(\frac{27}{100}\) we write expression as a multiple of unit fraction
3 X 27 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) = 81 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) =\(\frac{81}{100}\),
So the Burj Khalifa is \(\frac{81}{100}\) kilometers tall.

Question 16.
You water 6 plants using \(\frac{3}{5}\) liter of water for each. How many liters of water do you use?
Between which two whole numbers does your answer lie?
Answer:
\(\frac{18}{5}\) liters of water is used, The answer will lie in between 3 and 4.

Explanation:
Given \(\frac{3}{5}\) liter of water for each is watered, for 6 plants total number of liters of water
used is 6 X \(\frac{3}{5},now we write as multiple of unit fraction as 6 X 3 X [latex]\frac{1}{5}\) =
18 X \(\frac{1}{5}\)= \(\frac{18}{5}\) liters of water is used.

Now we divide \(\frac{18}{5}\) we get the value as 3.6,means between 3 and 4 whole numbers our answer will lie.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 6 cups of strawberries. You want to make 4 strawberry-banana smoothies and 4 strawberry-kiwi smoothies. Each smoothie needs \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of strawberries. Do you have enough? If not, how many more cups of strawberries do you need?
Answer:
Yes we have enough cups of strawberries, we dont require more cups of strawberries.

Explanation:
Given to make each smoothie we need \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of strawberries
first to make 4 strawberry-banana smoothies we need 4 X \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of strawberries
= 4 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)= 8 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =\(\frac{8}{3}\),
Now similarly for making 4 strawberry-kiwi smoothies we need 4 X \(\frac{2}{3}\)
cup of strawberries = 4 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)= 8 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =
\(\frac{8}{3}\),Now total cups of strawberries requried to make smoothie is
\(\frac{8}{3}\) + \(\frac{8}{3}\) = 2 X \(\frac{8}{3}\)=
2 X 8 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)=16 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)= \(\frac{16}{3}\) totals cups
of strawberries required to make smoothies. Now we compare \(\frac{16}{3}\) with 6,
To compare first we make both denominators same so we multiply 6 with \(\frac{3}{3}\)=
6 X \(\frac{3}{3}\)= 6 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)= 18 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)=
\(\frac{18}{3}\) as both the denominators are same we compare
\(\frac{16}{3}\) and \(\frac{18}{3}\) by seeing numerator
16 is less than 18 means we have enough cups of strawberries.

Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions Homework & practice 9.3

Multiply

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 56
Answer:
2 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)=\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Explanation:
As the given expression is already a unit fraction we multiply it as 2 X \(\frac{1}{4} =
\)\(\frac{2}{4}\) and further both numerator and denominator can be divided by 2
making it as \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 57
Answer:
3 X \(\frac{3}{5}\)= \(\frac{9}{5}\).

Explanation:
3 X \(\frac{3}{5}\) can be written as multiple of unit fraction as
3 X (3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\)) applying associative property of multiplication
( 3 X 3 ) X \(\frac{1}{5}\)= 9 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{9}{5}\).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 58
Answer:
1 X \(\frac{6}{8}\)= \(\frac{6}{8}\)= \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Explanation:
1 X \(\frac{6}{8}\) can be written as multiple of unit fraction as 1 X ( 6 X  \(\frac{1}{8}\))
applying associative property of multiplication ( 1 X 6 ) X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 6 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)=
\(\frac{6}{8}\) as numerator and denominator can be further simplified as both can be divided by 2
making as \(\frac{6}{8}\)= \(\frac{3}{4}\)X \(\frac{2}{2}\)=\(\frac{3}{4}\).

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 59
Answer:
4 X \(\frac{10}{12}\)= \(\frac{40}{12}\)= \(\frac{10}{3}\)

Explanation:
4 X \(\frac{10}{12}\) can be written as multiple of unit fraction as 4 X ( 10 X  \(\frac{1}{12}\))
applying associative property of multiplication ( 4 X 10 ) X \(\frac{1}{12}\) = 40 X \(\frac{1}{12}\)=
\(\frac{40}{12}\) as numerator and denominator can be further simplified as both can be divided by 4
as \(\frac{40}{12}\)= \(\frac{10}{3}\) X \(\frac{4}{4}\)=\(\frac{10}{3}\) X 1 =
\(\frac{10}{3}\).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 60
Answer:
7 X \(\frac{6}{10}\) = \(\frac{42}{10}\)= \(\frac{21}{5}\)

Explanation:
7 X \(\frac{6}{10}\) can be written as multiple of unit fraction as 7 X ( 6 X  \(\frac{1}{10}\))
applying associative property of multiplication ( 7 X 6 ) X \(\frac{1}{10}\) =
42 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)= \(\frac{42}{10}\) as numerator and denominator
can be further simplified as both can be divided by 2 as \(\frac{42}{10}\)=
\(\frac{21}{5}\) X \(\frac{2}{2}\)=\(\frac{21}{5}\) X 1 = \(\frac{21}{5}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 61
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{6}\) X 5 =\(\frac{20}{6}\) =\(\frac{10}{3}\).

Explanation:
\(\frac{4}{6}\) X 5  can be written as multiple of unit fraction as 5 X ( 4 X  \(\frac{1}{6}\))
applying associative property of multiplication ( 5 X 4 ) X \(\frac{1}{6}\) =
20 X \(\frac{1}{6}\)= \(\frac{20}{6}\) as numerator and denominator
can be further simplified as both can be divided by 2 as \(\frac{20}{6}\) =
\(\frac{10}{3}\) X \(\frac{2}{2}\)=\(\frac{10}{3}\) X 1 =\(\frac{10}{3}\).

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 62
Answer:
8 X \(\frac{5}{2}\) = \(\frac{40}{2}\) =20.

Explanation:
8 X \(\frac{5}{2}\) can be written as multiple of unit fraction as
8 X ( 5 X  \(\frac{1}{2}\)) applying associative property of multiplication
( 8 X 5 ) X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 40 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{40}{2}\)
further it can be simplified as \(\frac{40}{2}\)=20

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 63
Answer:
\(\frac{70}{100}\) X 6 = \(\frac{420}{100}\) = \(\frac{42}{10}\).

Explanation:
\(\frac{70}{100}\) X 6  can be written as multiple of unit fraction as
6 X ( 70 X  \(\frac{1}{100}\)) applying associative property of multiplication
( 6 X 70 ) X \(\frac{1}{100}\) = 420 X \(\frac{1}{100}\)= \(\frac{420}{100}\)
as numerator and denominator can be further simplified as both can be divided by 10 as \(\frac{420}{100}\)= \(\frac{42}{10}\) X \(\frac{10}{10}\)=\(\frac{42}{10}\) X 1 =\(\frac{42}{10}\).

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 64
Answer:
10 X \(\frac{9}{3}\)=\(\frac{90}{3}\)=30.

Explanation:
10 X \(\frac{9}{3}\) can be written as multiple of unit fraction as
10 X ( 9 X  \(\frac{1}{3}\)) applying associative property of multiplication
( 10 X 9 ) X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 90 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)= \(\frac{90}{3}\)
further it can be simplified  because 90 can be divided by 3 without leaving remainder making
\(\frac{90}{3}\) as 30.

Compare.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 65
Answer:
2 X \(\frac{4}{2}\) = 8 X \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Explanation:
2 X \(\frac{4}{2}\) we write as multiple of unit fraction 2 X 4 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) =
8 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) =  \(\frac{8}{2}\) and
8 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) is already multiple of unit fraction = latex]\frac{8}{2}[/latex]
now we can compare both sides  as the denominators are same and numerators are same
both the expressions are equal 2 X \(\frac{4}{2}\) = 8 X \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 66
Answer:
9 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) > \(\frac{9}{12}\)

Explanation:
9 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) already it is multiple of unit fraction we write it as \(\frac{9}{5}\)
and 9 X \(\frac{1}{12}\) is also a multiple of unit fraction we write it as \(\frac{9}{12}\)
now comparing first we make both denominators same so the multiples of 5 are 5,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,45,50,55,60,65
and multiples of 12 are 12,24,36,48,60,72 so the least common multiple of both 5 and 12 is 60 ,
So to get denominator 60 we multiply top and bottom by 12 for \(\frac{9}{5}\) =
\(\frac{9}{5}\) X \(\frac{12}{12}\)= \(\frac{108}{60}\) ,
So to get denominator 60 we multiply top and bottom by 5 for \(\frac{9}{12}\)=
\(\frac{9}{12}\) X \(\frac{5}{5}\)= \(\frac{45}{60}\)
Now comparing \(\frac{108}{60}\) with \(\frac{45}{60}\)  as both denominator are same,
As we see numerator it is clear that 108 is more than 45 so \(\frac{108}{60}\) > \(\frac{45}{60}\) ,
9 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) > \(\frac{9}{12}\).

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 67

Answer:
\(\frac{6}{10}\)X 4 < 9 X \(\frac{3}{10}\).

Explanation:
\(\frac{6}{10}\)X 4 we write as multiple of unit fraction 4 X 6 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)=
24 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) =\(\frac{24}{10}\) and 9 X \(\frac{3}{10}\) as
9 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)= 27 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)=\(\frac{27}{10}\),
We can compare both as denominators of both are 10 we compare numerators as 24 with 27
as 27 is great,\(\frac{24}{10}\) < \(\frac{27}{10}\),
\(\frac{6}{10}\) X 4 < 9 X \(\frac{3}{10}\).

Question 13.
Writing
Explain one way to multiply a whole number by a fraction.
Answer:
First we write fraction as multiple of unit fraction then applying associative property of multiplication
we multiply the whole numbers first then with the unit fraction,later writing product.

Explanation:
Let us take the whole number as 2 and fraction as \(\frac{3}{5}\),Here first we write fraction as
multiple of unit fraction as 2 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) now applying associative property of multiplication,
we multiply the whole numbers first then with the unit fraction,
6 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) as \(\frac{6}{5}\).

Question 14.
Number Sense
Between which two whole numbers does the product of 10 and \(\frac{5}{6}\) lie ?
Answer:
In between 8 and 9 whole numbers the product of 10 and \(\frac{5}{6}\) lies.

Explanation:
10 X \(\frac{5}{6}\) we first write it as multiple of unit fraction as
10 X ( 5 X \(\frac{1}{6}\)) applying associative property of multiplication,
We write (10 X 5) X \(\frac{1}{6}\)= 50 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{50}{6}\)
if we divide \(\frac{50}{6}\))  we get 8.333 which is in between 8 and 9 whole numbers.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
A seamstress makes fabric dog collars. An extra small dog collar is \(\frac{1}{3}\) yard long.
A large dog collar is 2 times as long as the extra small dog collar. How long is the large dog collar?
Answer:
The large dog collar is \(\frac{2}{3}\) yards long.

Explanation:
Given the extra small dog collar is \(\frac{1}{3}\) yard long and a large dog collar is
2 times as long as the extra small dog collar, so the large dog collar = 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)
as the fraction is multiple of unit fraction we write as \(\frac{2}{3}\) ,
therefore the large dog collar is \(\frac{2}{3}\) yards long.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton has 16 baseball cards. Descartes has \(\frac{1}{4}\) as many cards as Newton, and your friend has \(\frac{1}{2}\) as many cards as Descartes. How many baseball cards do Newton, Descartes, and your friend have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 68

Answer:
Newton has 16 baseball cards, Descartes has 4 baseball cards and my friend has 2 baseball cards,
over all there are total 22 baseball cards.

Explanation:
Given Newton has 16 baseball cards and Descartes has \(\frac{1}{4}\) as many cards as
Newton so\(\frac{1}{4}\) of 16 = 16 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) cards  it is already
as multiple of unit fraction we can write as \(\frac{16}{4}\) further can be simplified
because 16 can be divide by 4 so we get as 4 means Descartes has 4 cards.Now my friend has
\(\frac{1}{2}\) as many cards as Descartes So Descartes has 4 cards means my friend has
\(\frac{1}{2}\) out of 4= 4 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)  as it is already a multiple of unit fracrtion,
we take it as \(\frac{4}{2}\) further we can simplify as 4 is divisiblle by 2 we get 2 cards.
Newton has 16 baseball cards,Descartes has 4 baseball cards and my friend has 2 baseball cards,
over all there are total 22 baseball cards.

Review & Refresh

Divide

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 69
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 69= 19.

Explanation:

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70=81 with 4 as remainder.

Explanation:
Step 1:Start by setting it up with the divisor 7 on the left side and the dividend 571 on the right side,
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70
Step 2: The divisor (7) does not  goes into the first digit of the dividend (5), So we take second digit also , The divisor (7) goes into the two digits of the dividend (57) by 8 time(s),there fore put 8 on the top
8
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70
Step 3: Multiply the divisor by the result in the previous step. Therefore, put 8 on top (7 x 9 = 56) and write that answer below the dividend.
8
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70
56
Step 4: Subtract the result in the previous step from the two digits of the dividend (57 -56 = 1) and write the answer below.
8
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70
 56
1
Step 5: Move down the 3rd digit of the dividend (1)
8
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70
 56
11
Step 6:The divisor (7) goes into the bottom number (11),  time(s). Therefore, put 1 on top:
81
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70
     56
11
Step 7 : Multiply the divisor by the result in the previous step (7 x 1 = 7) and write that answer at the bottom:
81
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70
     56
11
07
Step 8 : Subtract the result in the previous step from the number written above it. (11 – 7 = 04) and write the answer at the bottom
81
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70
 56
11
    07
4
We stop here as 4 is less than 7 and further we get in decimals , So Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 70=81 with 4 as remainder
Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71= 184 with 3 as remainder.

Explanation:
Step 1:Start by setting it up with the divisor 5 on the left side and the dividend 923 on the right side,
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
Step 2: The divisor (5)   goes into the first digit of the dividend (9)  by 8 time there fore put 1 on the top
1
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
Step 3: Multiply the divisor by the result in the previous step  (5 x 1 = 5) and write that answer below the dividend.
1
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
5
Step 4: Subtract the result in the previous step from the first digit of the dividend (9 -5 = 4) and write the answer below.
1
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
   5
    4
Step 5: Move down the 2nd digit of the dividend (2),like below
1
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
   5
     42
Step 6:The divisor (5) goes into the bottom number (40),  8 time(s). Therefore, put 8 on top:
18
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
   5
     42
Step 7 : Multiply the divisor by the result in the previous step (5 x 8 = 40) and write that answer at the bottom:
18
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
   5
     42
40
Step 8: Subtract the result in the previous step from the number written above it. (42 – 40 = 04) and write the answer at the bottom
18
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
   5
     42
     40   
2
Step 9 :Move down the 3nd digit of the dividend (3),like below
18
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
   5
     42
     40   
23
Step 10 : The divisor (5) goes into the bottom number (20),  4 time(s). Therefore, put 4 on top:
184
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
     5
     42
     40   
23
20
Step 11 : Subtract the result in the previous step from the number written above it. (23 – 20 = 03) and write the answer at the bottom
184
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71
     5
     42
     40   
23
     20
       03
We stop here as 3 is less than 5 and further we get in decimals , So Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 71= 184 with 3 as remainder.

Lesson 9.4 Multiply Whole Numbers and Mixed Numbers

Explore and Grow

Use models to help you complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 72

Structure
How does the Distributive Property relate to your models? Explain.

Answer:

Explanation:
According to the distributive property, multiplying the sum of two or more addends by a number
will give the same result as multiplying each addend individually by the number and then adding the products together.
We use distribute property while relating the models first we draw each multiplying addend individually and
then add the products together to give the result.
Example : 2 X 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\) using the distributive property we write
2 X 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\) as 2 X ( 1 + \(\frac{3}{8}\) )here first we draw model of
2 X 1 then we draw model of 2 X \(\frac{3}{8}\) then we add the products together as
2 + \(\frac{6}{8}\)= 2 + \(\frac{3}{4}\)=\(\frac{11}{4}\).
Think and Grow: Multiply Whole Numbers and Mixed Numbers

You can find the product of a whole number and a mixed number by writing the mixed number as a fraction or by using the Distributive Property
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 73
One Way: Write the mixed number as a fraction, then multiply.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 74
Another Way: Use the Distributive Property.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 75
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 76
Answer:
3 X 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{9}{2}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) =
1+ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 2 x 1+1 by 2=  \(\frac{3}{2}\) now we multiply it with the whole ,
3 X \(\frac{3}{2}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  3 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)=
9 X  \(\frac{1}{2}\)= \(\frac{9}{2}\).

Show and Grow

Multiply

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 77
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 77 = \(\frac{27}{4}\)=6 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
2 + \(\frac{1}{4}\)=(2 X 4 + 1) by 4 = \(\frac{9}{4}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
3 X \(\frac{9}{4}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  3 X 9 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
27 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{27}{4}\), we can write the product as mixed fraction as
4 goes in 6 times. 6 will be our whole number 4 X 6 is 24 and we have 3 left over (2724),
3 will be our numerator and our denominator will stay the same 4= \(\frac{27}{4}\)=
6 \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 78
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 78 \(\frac{38}{12}\)= 3 \(\frac{2}{12}\).

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 1 \(\frac{7}{12}\)=
1 + \(\frac{7}{12}\)= (1 X 12 + 7 ) by 12 = \(\frac{19}{12}\)
now we multiply it with the whole, 2 X \(\frac{19}{12}\) now we write in unit fraction and
multiply  2 X 19 X \(\frac{1}{12}\)= 38 X \(\frac{1}{12}\) = \(\frac{38}{12}\),
we can write the product as mixed fraction as 12 goes in 3 times. 3 will be our whole number 12 X 3 is 36 and
we have 2 left over (38−36). 2 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 12
= \(\frac{38}{12}\)=  3 \(\frac{2}{12}\).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 79
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 79= \(\frac{116}{8}\)= 14 \(\frac{4}{8}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 3 \(\frac{5}{8}\)=
3 + \(\frac{5}{8}\)= (3 X 8 + 5) by 8 = \(\frac{29}{8}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
4 X \(\frac{29}{8}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  4 X 29 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)=
116 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{116}{8}\), we can write the product as mixed fraction as
8 goes in 14 times. 14 will be our whole number 8 X 14 is 112 and we have 4 left over (116−112).
4 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 8= \(\frac{116}{8}\)=
14 \(\frac{4}{8}\).

Apply and Grow: Practice

Multiply.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 80
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 80= \(\frac{50}{3}\)=16 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)=
1 + \(\frac{2}{3}\)= (1 X 3 + 2) by 3 = \(\frac{5}{3}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
10 X \(\frac{5}{3}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  10 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)=
50 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{50}{3}\), we can write the product as mixed fraction as
3 goes in 16 times. 16 will be our whole number 3 X 16 is 48 and we have 2 left over (50−48).
2 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 3= \(\frac{50}{3}\)= 16 \(\frac{2}{3}\).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 81
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 81= \(\frac{25}{2}\)=12 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)=
2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)= (2 X 2 + 1) by 2 = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
now we multiply it with the whole, 5 X \(\frac{5}{2}\) .
We write in unit fraction and multiply  5 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)=
25 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{25}{2}\), we can write the product as mixed fraction
as 2 goes in 12 times. 12 will be our whole number 2 X 12 is 24 and we have 1 left over (25−24).
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 2= \(\frac{25}{2}\)=
12 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 82
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 82= \(\frac{184}{6}\)=\(\frac{92}{3}\)=30 \(\frac{4}{6}\).

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 7 \(\frac{4}{6}\)=
7 + \(\frac{4}{6}\)=(7 X 6 + 4) by 6 = \(\frac{46}{6}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
4 X \(\frac{46}{6}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  4 X 46 X \(\frac{1}{6}\)=
184 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{184}{6}\), we can write the product as mixed fraction as
6 goes in 30 times. 30 will be our whole number 6 X 30 is 180 and we have 4 left over (184−180).
4 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 6= \(\frac{184}{6}\)=
30 \(\frac{4}{6}\) and \(\frac{184}{6}\) can also written as \(\frac{92}{3}\)
because both 184 and 6 can also be further divided by 2.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 83
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 83= \(\frac{243}{5}\)= 48 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 5 \(\frac{2}{5}\)=
5 + \(\frac{2}{5}\)= (5 X 5 + 2) by 5 = \(\frac{27}{5}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
9 X \(\frac{27}{5}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  9 X 27 X \(\frac{1}{5}\)=
243 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{243}{5}\), we can write the product as mixed fraction as
5 goes in 48 times. 48 will be our whole number 5 X 48 is 240 and we have 3 left over (243−240).
3 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 5= \(\frac{243}{5}\)=
48 \(\frac{3}{5}\).

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 84
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 84= \(\frac{312}{10}\)= 31 \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 3 \(\frac{9}{10}\)=
3 + \(\frac{9}{10}\)= (3 X 10 + 9) by 10 = \(\frac{39}{10}\)
now we multiply it with the whole, 8 X \(\frac{39}{10}\) now we write in unit fraction
and multiply  8 X 39 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)= 312 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) =
\(\frac{312}{10}\), we can write the product as mixed fraction as 10 goes in 31 times.
31 will be our whole number 10 X 31 is 310 and we have 2 left over (312−310).
2 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 10= \(\frac{312}{10}\)=
31 \(\frac{2}{10}\).

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 85
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 85= \(\frac{5466}{100}\)=54 \(\frac{66}{100}\).
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 9 \(\frac{11}{100}\)=
9 + \(\frac{11}{100}\)= (9 X 100 + 11) by 100 = \(\frac{911}{100}\)
now we multiply it with the whole, 6 X \(\frac{911}{100}\) now we write in unit fraction
and multiply  6 X 911 X \(\frac{1}{100}\)= 5466 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) =
\(\frac{5466}{100}\), we can write the product as mixed fraction as 100 goes in 54 times.
54 will be our whole number 100 X 54 is 5400 and we have 66 left over (5466−5400).
66 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 100= \(\frac{5466}{100}\)=
54 \(\frac{66}{100}\).

Question 10.
Reasoning
How can you check whether your answer in Exercise 9 is reasonable?
Answer:
Exercise 9 is reasonable.

Explanation:
In the above problem 6 X 9 \(\frac{11}{100}\) we got product as
\(\frac{5466}{100}\) =54 \(\frac{66}{100}\)  we can write the product as mixed fraction
as 100 goes in 54 times. 54 will be our whole number 100 X 54 is 5400 and 5466-5400,
leaving 66 as remainder so we consider the whole part 54,As 54 is reasonable close to 100.

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the product of 9 and 6\(\frac{1}{3}\). Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 86
Answer:
Yes friend is correct.

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 6 \(\frac{1}{3}\)= 6 + \(\frac{1}{3}\)= (6 X 3 + 1) by 3 = \(\frac{19}{3}\) now we multiply it with the whole, 9 X \(\frac{19}{3}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  9 X 19 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)= 171 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{171}{3}\), As 3 goes 57 times leaving no remainder so we get 9 X 6 \(\frac{1}{3}\)=57 which matches with the friend’s product so friend is correct.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Without multiplying, can you tell which expression is greater, Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 87 ? Explain.
Answer:
5 X 6 \(\frac{1}{4}\) < 6 X 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:

By drawing models also we can say

If the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction.
The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction, But first we write the mixed number as a fraction
so in 5 X 6 \(\frac{1}{4}\), 6 \(\frac{1}{4}\)= 6+ \(\frac{1}{4}\)=
(6 X 4 +1) by 4 =  \(\frac{25}{4}\) now we multiply it with the whole as
5 X \(\frac{25}{4}\) now we write the mixed fraction 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
as 5+ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 5 x 4 +1 by 4=5 \(\frac{21}{4}\)
now we multiply it with  the whole as 6 X \(\frac{21}{4}\) ,
Now comparing 5 X  \(\frac{25}{4}\)  and  6 X \(\frac{21}{4}\)
in both denominators are same and numerators 5 X \(\frac{25}{4}\) is less than
6 X \(\frac{21}{4}\) so 5 X 6 \(\frac{1}{4}\) < 6 X 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
An elephant sleeps 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours in 1 day. A koala sleeps 6 times as long as the elephant in the same day. How many hours does the koala sleep that day?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 87.1
Multiply the number of hours the elephant sleeps by 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 88
Answer:
The koala sleeps 5 hours that day.

Explanation:
First we write mixed fraction as fraction so 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) =( 2 X 2 + 1 ) by 2
= \(\frac{5}{2}\) , now we multiply with whole number 2 = 2 X \(\frac{5}{2}\) =
2 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 10 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{10}{2}\)
further it can be simplified as both 10,2 can be divided by 2 so \(\frac{10}{2}\) = 5 hours that day.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
A small bag of popcorn has 1\(\frac{7}{8}\) cups of popcorn. A large bag has 7 times as many cups of popcorn as the small bag. How many cups of popcorn are in the large bag?
Answer:
The large bag has \(\frac{105}{8}\) cups of popcorn or 13 \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups of popcorn.

Explanation:
Given A small bag of popcorn has 1\(\frac{7}{8}\) cups of popcorn so first we write mixed fraction
as fraction as 1 \(\frac{7}{8}\)= ( 1 X 8 + 7 ) by 8 =\(\frac{15}{8}\) ,as a large bag has
7 times as many cups of popcorn as the small bag so 7 times \(\frac{15}{8}\)=
7 X 15 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)=105 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)=\(\frac{105}{8}\) cups of popcorn.
We can write the product as mixed fraction as 8 goes in 13 times.
13 will be our whole number 8 X 13 is 104 and we have 1 left over (105−104).
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 8= \(\frac{105}{8}\)=
13 \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups of popcorn.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
A deli worker prepares 4 packages of meat. Each package contains 3\(\frac{1}{3}\) pounds of meat.
Your friend says the deli worker uses between 12 and 13 pounds of meat. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer:
No, friend is not correct as deli worker uses between 13 and 14 pounds of meat,
not between 12 and 13 pounds of meat.

Explanation:
Given each package contains 3\(\frac{1}{3}\) pounds of meat.
First we write mixed fraction as fraction as ( 3 X 3 +1 ) by 3= \(\frac{10}{3}\)
now deli worker prepares 4 packages of meat so 4 times  \(\frac{10}{3}\)=
4 X 10 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)= 40 X \(\frac{1}{3}\)=\(\frac{40}{3}\) ,
we will write the product as mixed fraction as 3 goes in 13 times. 13 will be our whole number
3 X 13 is 39 and we have 1 left over (40−39). 1 will be our numerator and our denominator
will be the same 3= \(\frac{105}{8}\)= 13 \(\frac{1}{3}\),
so the whole number is greater than 13 means deli worker uses between 13 and 14 pounds of meat
not between 12 and 13 pounds of meat.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
An athlete’s goal is to run at least 80 miles in 1 week. He runs 5\(\frac{3}{4}\) miles 2 times each day for 1 week. Does the athlete meet his goal? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 89
Answer:
Athlete runs more than 80 miles in 1 week so he meets his goal.

Explanation:
Given an athlete runs 5\(\frac{3}{4}\) miles 2 times each day, First we write mixed fraction
as fraction as ( 5 X 4 +3) by 4 =\(\frac{23}{4}\) now we multiply by 2 ,
2 X \(\frac{23}{4}\)= 2 X 23 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)=46 x \(\frac{1}{4}\)=
\(\frac{46}{4}\), Now for 1 week it is 7 X \(\frac{46}{4}\)= 7 X 46 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)=
322 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)= \(\frac{322}{4}\) now we will write the product as mixed fraction
as 4 goes in 80 times. 80 will be our whole number 4 X 80 is 320 and we have 2 left over (322−320).
2 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 4= \(\frac{322}{4}\)= 80 \(\frac{2}{4}\) ,
As 80 \(\frac{2}{4}\) is greater than 80,  athlete runs more than 80 miles in 1 week he meets his goal.

Multiply Whole Numbers and Mixed Numbers Homework & Practice 9.4

Multiply

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 90
Answer:
2 X 1 \(\frac{1}{12}\) = \(\frac{26}{12}\) = \(\frac{13}{6}\)=
2 \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 1 \(\frac{1}{12}\) =
1 + \(\frac{1}{12}\) = ( 1 X 12 + 1 )by 12 = \(\frac{13}{12}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
2 X \(\frac{13}{12}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  2 X 13 X \(\frac{1}{12}\)=
26 X \(\frac{1}{12}\) = \(\frac{26}{6}\), Now the fraction can be further divided by 2
as 26,6 both goes in 2 after dividing it becomes as \(\frac{13}{6}\) now we can write the product
as mixed fraction as 6 goes in 2 times. 2 will be our whole number 6 X 2 is 12 and we have 1 left over (13−12).
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 6= \(\frac{13}{6}\)=
2 \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 91
Answer:
2 X 3\(\frac{5}{6}\)=\(\frac{46}{6}\) = \(\frac{23}{3}\)= 7 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 3 \(\frac{5}{6}\) =
3 + \(\frac{5}{6}\) =(3 X 6 + 5) by 6 = \(\frac{23}{6}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
2 X \(\frac{23}{6}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  2 X 23 X \(\frac{1}{6}\)=
46 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{46}{6}\), Now the fraction can be further divided by 2
as 46,6 both goes in 2 after dividing it becomes as 23,3 = \(\frac{23}{3}\)
now we can write the product as mixed fraction as 3 goes in 7 times. 3 X 7  is 21 ,
7 will be our whole number and  (23−21) we have 2 left over. 2 will be our numerator and
our denominator will be the same 3= \(\frac{23}{3}\)= 7 \(\frac{2}{3}\).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 92
Answer:
4 X 3 \(\frac{6}{10}\) = \(\frac{144}{10}\) = \(\frac{72}{5}\) = 14 \(\frac{2}{5}\).

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 3 \(\frac{6}{10}\) =
3 + \(\frac{6}{10}\) =( 3 X 10 + 6 ) by 10 = \(\frac{36}{10}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
4 X \(\frac{36}{10}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  4 X 36 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)=
144 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) = \(\frac{144}{10}\), Now the fraction can be further divided by 2
as 144,10 both goes in 2 after dividing it becomes as 72,5 = \(\frac{72}{5}\)
now we can write the product as mixed fraction as 5 goes in 14 times. 5 X 14  is 70 ,14 will be our whole number
and  (72−70) we have 2 left over. 2 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 5
= \(\frac{72}{5}\)= 14 \(\frac{2}{5}\).

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 93
Answer:
2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) X 5 = \(\frac{95}{8}\) =11 \(\frac{7}{8}\).

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) =
2 + \(\frac{3}{8}\) =(2 X 8 + 3) by 8 = \(\frac{19}{8}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
5 X \(\frac{19}{8}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  5 X 19 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)=
95 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{95}{8}\), Now we can write the product as mixed fraction as
8 goes in 11 times. 8 X 11  is 88 ,11 will be our whole number and  (95−88) we have 7 left over.
7 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 8= \(\frac{95}{8}\)=
11 \(\frac{7}{8}\).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 94
Answer:
4 X 6 \(\frac{4}{5}\) = \(\frac{136}{5}\) = 27 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 6 \(\frac{4}{5}\) =
6 + \(\frac{4}{5}\) =(6 X 5 + 4) by 5 = \(\frac{34}{5}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
4 X \(\frac{34}{5}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  4 X 34 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
136 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{136}{5}\), now we can write the product as mixed fraction as
5 goes in 27 times. 5 X 27  is 135 , 27 will be our whole number and  (136−135) we have 1 left over.
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 5 = \(\frac{136}{5}\)=
27 \(\frac{1}{5}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 95
Answer:
8 \(\frac{20}{100}\) X 10 = \(\frac{8200}{100}\) = 82.

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 8 \(\frac{20}{100}\) =
8 + \(\frac{20}{100}\) = ( 8 X 100 + 20 ) by 100 = \(\frac{820}{100}\)
now we multiply it with the whole, 100 X \(\frac{820}{100}\) now we write in unit fraction
and multiply  10 X 820 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) = 8200 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) =
\(\frac{8200}{100}\), Now the fraction can be further divided by 100 as 8200,100
both goes in 100 after dividing by 100  it becomes as 82.

Question 7.
Reasoning
Without calculating, is the product of 7 and 5\(\frac{3}{4}\) greater than or less than 35? Explain.
Answer:
7 X 5 \(\frac{3}{4}\) is greater than ( > ) 35.

Explanation:
Given to compare between 7 X 5 \(\frac{3}{4}\) and 35, first we take 7 X 5 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
to this expression if we apply distributive property means if multiplying the sum of two or more addends
by a number will give the same result as multiplying each addend individually by the number and
then adding the products together. example a X b \(\frac{c}{d}\) = a X b + a X \(\frac{c}{d}\)
So 7 X 5 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 7 X 5 + 7 X \(\frac{3}{4}\) means 35 + 7 X  \(\frac{3}{4}\)
So by comparing left side it is addition of 35 plus some value ,it will be more than 35 only and right hand side
it it 35 so obiviously 7 X 5 \(\frac{3}{4}\) is greater than ( > ) 35.

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the product of 4 and 2\(\frac{8}{10}\). Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 96
Answer:
Yes friend is correct, because the value is same as 11 \(\frac{2}{10}\) .

Explanation:
To caluculate the value of 4 X 2 \(\frac{8}{10}\) , First we write the mixed number as a
fraction then multiply, so 2 \(\frac{8}{10}\) = 2 + \(\frac{8}{10}\) =
( 2 X 10 + 8 ) by 10 = \(\frac{28}{10}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
4 X \(\frac{28}{10}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  4 X 28 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)=
112 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) = \(\frac{112}{10}\), now we can write the product as mixed fraction
as 10 goes in 11 times. 10 X 11  is 110 , 11 will be our whole number and  (112−110) we have 2 left over.
2 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 10= \(\frac{112}{10}\)=
11 \(\frac{2}{10}\) is same as friend, So friend is correct.

Question 9.
Number Sense
Between which two whole numbers does the product of 9 and 7 \(\frac{1}{8}\) lie?
Answer:
The product of 9 and 7 \(\frac{1}{8}\) lies in between 64 and 65.

Explanation:
First we write the mixed number 7 \(\frac{1}{8}\) as a fraction then multiply, so 7 \(\frac{1}{8}\) =
7 + \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 7 X 8 + 1 by 8 = \(\frac{57}{8}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
9 X \(\frac{57}{8}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  9 X 57 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) =
513 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{513}{8}\), now we can write the product as mixed fraction as
8 goes in 64 times. 8 X 64  is 512 , 64 will be our whole number and  (513−512) we have 1 left over.
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 8 = \(\frac{513}{8}\)= 64
\(\frac{1}{8}\). Any how we got 64 whole number and next whole number is 65 means
the product of 9 and 7 \(\frac{1}{8}\) lies in between 64 and 65.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
Athlete A holds a 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) – kilogram plate while doing squats. Athlete B holds a plate that is 4 times heavier than Athlete A’s. How many kilograms is the plate held by Athlete B?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 97
Answer:
Athlete B holds 10 kilograms of plate while doing squats.

Explanation:
Given Athlete A hold a 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) kilogram plate while doing squats,
Athlete B holds a plate that is 4 times heavier than Athlete A’s, So Athlete B holds
4 X 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\), First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply,
so 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = ( 2 X 2 + 1 ) by 2 = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
now we multiply it with the whole, 4 X \(\frac{5}{2}\) now we write in unit fraction and
multiply  4 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 20 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{20}{2}\)
as 20,2 goes by 2 we further divide both by 2 we get 10,1 = \(\frac{20}{2}\) = 10,
therefore Athlete B holds 10 kilograms of plate while doing squats.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
A zoo nutritionist orders 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) tons of apples and 7\(\frac{2}{4}\)tons of bananas each year to feed the animals. She orders 6 times as many tons of herbivore pellets than tons of fruit. How many tons of herbivore pellets does the nutritionist order?
Answer:
Explanation:

Review & Refresh

Subtract.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 98
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 98= \(\frac{12}{4}\) = 3
Explanation:

First we write the mixed numbers into fractions and subtract, So 9 \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
9 +\(\frac{1}{4}\) = (9 x 4 + 1) by 4 = \(\frac{37}{4}\) and  6 \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
6 + \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 6 X 4 + 1 by 4 = \(\frac{25}{4}\) now subtracting
\(\frac{37}{4}\) – \(\frac{25}{4}\) to subtract a fraction from another
we need to first make sure both fractions have the same denominator as both denominators
have same value 4 now we can subtract one numerator from the other to make one fraction as 37 – 25 by 4 = \(\frac{12}{4}\) as 12, 4 goes by 4 we further can divide both by 4 we get 12,1 = \(\frac{12}{4}\) = 3 .

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 99
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 99 = \(\frac{11}{3}\) = 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed numbers into fractions and subtract, So 6 \(\frac{1}{3}\) =
6 +\(\frac{1}{3}\) =(6 x 3 + 1) by 3 = \(\frac{19}{3}\) and  2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) =
2 + \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 2 X 3 + 2 by 3 = \(\frac{8}{3}\) now subtracting
\(\frac{19}{3}\) – \(\frac{8}{3}\) to subtract a fraction from another
we need to first make sure both fractions have the same denominator as both denominators
have same value 3 now we can subtract one numerator from the other to make one fraction as 19 – 8 by 3
= \(\frac{11}{3}\) since the numerator is greater than the denominator,
we can further simplify it into a mixed fraction as 3 goes in 3 times. 3 X 3  is 9 , 3 will be our
whole number and  (11−9) we have 2 left over. 2 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 3
= \(\frac{11}{3}\) = 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) .

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 100
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 100= \(\frac{78}{12}\) = 6 \(\frac{6}{12}\) or
\(\frac{78}{12}\) = \(\frac{39}{6}\) = \(\frac{13}{2}\) =  6 \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Explanation:
First we write the mixed numbers into fractions and subtract, So 8 \(\frac{4}{12}\) =
8 +\(\frac{4}{12}\) = ( 8 x 12 + 4 ) by 12 = \(\frac{100}{12}\) and  1 \(\frac{10}{12}\) = 1 + \(\frac{10}{12}\) = 1 X 12 + 10 by 12 = \(\frac{22}{12}\) now subtracting \(\frac{100}{12}\) – \(\frac{22}{12}\) to subtract a fraction from another we need to first make sure both fractions
have the same denominator as both denominators have same value 3 now we can subtract one numerator
from the other to make one fraction as 100 – 22 by 12 = \(\frac{78}{12}\) since the numerator
is greater than the denominator , we can further simplify it into a mixed fraction as 12 goes in 6 times.
12 X 6  is 72 , 6 will be our whole number and  (78−12) we have 6 left over. 6 will be our numerator and
our denominator will be the same 12, 6 \(\frac{6}{12}\) , Further \(\frac{78}{12}\)
can be simplified as 78,12 both goes by  2 making them as 39, 6=\(\frac{39}{6}\),
even further \(\frac{39}{6}\) can be simplified as 39,6 both goes by 3 making them as 13,2
=\(\frac{13}{2}\), Since the numerator is greater than the denominator , we can further simplify
it into a mixed fraction as 2 goes in 6 times. 6 X 2  is 12 , 6 will be our whole number and  (13−12) we have 1 left over.
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 3 = \(\frac{78}{12}\) =
6 \(\frac{6}{12}\) or \(\frac{78}{12}\) = \(\frac{39}{6}\) = \(\frac{13}{2}\) =
6 \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Lesson 9.5 Problem Solving: Fraction Operations

Explore and Grow

You want to make 3 batches of the recipe. Explain how to find how much of each ingredient you need.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 101

Reasoning
Explain how you can tell whether you need more than or less than 6 cups of blueberries without calculating
Answer:
To make 3 batches of recipe we require \(\frac{21}{4}\) pounds of strawberries or
5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds of strawberries required,
\(\frac{3}{2}\) cups of orange juice or 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of orange juice,
12 tablespoons of lemon juice,12 tablespoons of honey and
\(\frac{27}{4}\) cups of blue berries are required or 6 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of blueberries are required.
We require more than 6 cups of blueberries why because if we see product required is
3 X 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of blue berries without calculating , Applying distributive property
we get (3 X 2 ) + ( 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) ) = 6 + ( 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) ) it clearly shows that
we require more than 6 cups of blueberries.

Explanation:
Given  to make 1 batch of Recipe Ladybug Ice pops we require  1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) pounds of strawberries ,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of orange juice , 4 tablespoons of lemon juice, 4 tablespoons of honey,
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of blue berries.
To find out how much of each ingredient needed to make 3 batches of recipe we multiply each ingredient with 3.
Strawberries needed are 3 X 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\), First we write the mixed number as a
fraction then multiply so 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = ( 1 X 4 + 3 ) by 4 = \(\frac{7}{4}\) ,
so 3  X  \(\frac{7}{4}\)  now we write in unit fraction and multiply  3 X 7 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
21 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{21}{4}\) pounds of strawberries required,
Since the numerator is greater than the denominator , we can further simplify it into a mixed fraction as
4 goes in 5 times. 5 X 4  is 20 , 5 will be our whole number and  (21−20) we have 1 left over.
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 4 =5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
pounds of strawberries required,
Orange juice required 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) already it is in unit fraction
so we require \(\frac{3}{2}\) cups of orange juice Since the numerator is greater than the denominator ,
we can further simplify it into a mixed fraction as 2 goes in 1 times. 1 X 2 is 2, 1 will be our whole number and (3-2),
we have 1 left over. 1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same
2 = 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of orange juice.
Lemon juice required is 3 X 4 = 12 tablespoons of lemon juice, 3 X 4 = 12 tablespoons of honey,
now blue berries required are 3 X 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups, First we write the mixed number as a
fraction then multiply so 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = ( 2 X 4 + 1 ) by 4 = \(\frac{9}{4}\) ,
now  3  X  \(\frac{9}{4}\)  now we write in unit fraction and multiply  3 X 9 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
27 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{27}{4}\) cups of blue berries are required,
Since the numerator is greater than the denominator , we can further simplify it into a mixed fraction as
4 goes in 6 times. 6 X 4 is 24, 6 will be our whole number and (27-24) we have 3 left over.
3 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 4 = 6 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of blueberries are required.
Now comparing blueberries we require more than 6 cups of blueberries why because we use is
3 X 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of blue berries are required without calculating,
Applying distributive property  we get (3 X 2 ) +( 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) )=
6 +( 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)), it clearly shows that we require more than 6 cups of blueberries.

Think and Grow: Problem Solving: Fraction Operations

Example
To convert a temperature from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit, multiply the Celsius temperature by \(\frac{9}{5}\), then add 32. What is the temperature shown by the thermometer in degrees Fahrenheit?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 102
Answer:
The temperature shown by the thermometer is 500 Fahrenheit.

Explanation:
We know to convert a temperature from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit is Fahrenheit =
Celsius temperature X \(\frac{9}{5}\) + 32 .
So multiply the Celsius temperature by \(\frac{9}{5}\), then add 32,
Given the Celsius temperature as 100 in the figure above, First we write \(\frac{9}{5}\) in unit fraction and
multiply by Celsius temperature so \(\frac{9}{5}\)=9 X \(\frac{1}{5}\)
now we multiply by 10 as 10 X 9 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 90 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
\(\frac{90}{5}\) this value can be further simplified as 90,5 both goes by  5 making them as 18,1,
Now we got result as 18 , We add 18 + 32  we will get 500 Fahrenheit.

Understand the Problem

What do you know?

  • To convert a temperature from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit, multiply the Celsius temperature by \(\frac{9}{5}\), then add 32.
  • The thermometer shows 10 degrees Celsius.
    What do you need to find?
  • You need to find the temperature shown by the thermometer in degrees Fahrenheit.

Make a Plan

How will you solve?

  • First, multiply the Celsius temperature, 10 degrees, by \(\frac{9}{5}\).
  • Then add 32 to the product.

Solve
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 103
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 104
So, the temperature shown by the thermometer is _500_ degrees Fahrenheit.
Answer:
The temperature shown by the thermometer is 500 Fahrenheit.

Explanation :
To convert a temperature from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit, Let us take  p as multiply of
Celsius temperature by \(\frac{9}{5}\), Now we take f as p+32,
First we write \(\frac{9}{5}\) in unit fraction and multiply by Celsius temperature,
so \(\frac{9}{5}\)=9 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) now multiply by 10 = 10 X 9 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
90 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{90}{5}\) this value we take as p this can be further simplified
as 90,5 both goes by  5 making them as 18, Now we got p as 18 we add 32 to p ,
we get f, So f = 18 + 32 = 500
So the temperature shown by the thermometer is 500 Fahrenheit.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Show how to solve the example above using one equation.
Answer:
F= C X \(\frac{9}{5}\) + 32 degrees.

Explanation:
To solve the example above using one equation, Let us take Fahrenheit as F ,
Celsius as C so to convert a temperature from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit we multiply
C with \(\frac{9}{5}\) and add 32.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.

Answer:
We know Celsius temperature, We need to find the temperature shown by the thermometer in degrees Fahrenheit.

Explanation:
Given the temperature in Celsius and we know the formula to convert from Celsius temperature to
Fahrenheit as F= C X \(\frac{9}{5}\) + 32 degrees so we substitute the values and find the temperature.

Question 2.
You make a friendship bracelet with 3 pink strings and 2 blue strings. Each string is 3\(\frac{3}{4}\) feet long.
How many feet of string do you use?

Answer:
\(\frac{75}{4}\) feet long strings is used or 18 \(\frac{3}{4}\) feet long strings is used.

Explanation:
Given to make a friendship bracelet we use 3 pink strings , 2 blue strings means total 5 strings are needed
and each string is 3\(\frac{3}{4}\) feet long, First we convert mixed fraction into fraction as
( 3 X 4 + 3 ) by 4 = \(\frac{15}{4}\) ,Now we will convert into unit fraction as 15 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)
now we multiply with 5 , 5 X 15 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =\(\frac{75}{4}\),
since the numerator is greater than the denominator , we can further simplify it into a mixed fraction as
4 goes in 18 times. 18 X 4 is 72, 18 will be our whole number and (75-72) we have 3 left over.
3 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 4 = 18 \(\frac{3}{4}\),
So \(\frac{75}{4}\) feet long strings is used or 18 \(\frac{3}{4}\) feet long strings is used.

Question 3.
A smoothie store worker makes 4 peanut butter banana smoothies and 2 fruit smoothies. The worker uses \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of bananas in each smoothie. How many cups of bananas does the worker need?

Answer:
The worker needed  \(\frac{12}{3}\) cups of bananas or 4 cups of bananas are needed to make smoothie.

Explanation:
Given a smoothie store worker makes 4 peanut butter banana smoothies and 2 fruit smoothies.
The worker uses \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of bananas in each smoothie so the number of cups of bananas
the worker needed are 4 X latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] plus 2 X \(\frac{2}{3}\) first we convert
both into unit fractions and multiply 4 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 8 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =
\(\frac{8}{3}\)  of peanut butter banana smoothies and 2 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =
4 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{3}\) fruit smoothies, now we add both \(\frac{8}{3}\) +
\(\frac{4}{3}\) as both denominators are same we add numerators as 8 + 4 =12 as numerator and
denominator as 3 = \(\frac{12}{3}\) as numerator is greater than denominator further can be simplified and
12 divides by 3 gives 4 with 0 remainder so the worker needed  \(\frac{12}{3}\) cups of bananas or
4 cups of bananas are needed to make smoothie.

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.

Question 4.
Your friend walks her dog for \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile each day. She then runs 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) miles each day.
How many total miles does she walk her dog and run in 1 week?

Answer:
Total 21 miles my friend walks her dog and run in 1 week.

Explanation:
Given my friend walks her dog for \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile each day , She then runs
2\(\frac{3}{4}\) miles each day. So in each day she walk her dog and run  is
\(\frac{1}{4}\) mile + 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) miles, Then we multiply with
7 because we have to calculate for 1 week. First we convert mixed fraction into fraction
2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) , ( 2 X 4 + 3 ) by 4 = \(\frac{11}{4}\), Now we add with
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{11}{4}\) = \(\frac{12}{4}\)
as numerator is greater than denominator further can be simplified and 12 divides by 4
gives 3 with 0 remainder, so 3 miles for each day, Now for 1 week it is 7 X 3  = 21 miles.
My friend walks 21 miles her dog and run in 1 week.

Question 5.
Hair donations must be 12 inches longer. Your friend’s hair is 7 inches long. Her hair grows
about \(\frac{1}{2}\) inch each month. Can she donate her hair in 8 months?

Answer:

No friend cannot donate her hair in 8 months as in 8 months it grows to 11 inches long and for
hair donations it must be 12 inches longer.

Explanation:

Given friend’s hair is 7 inches long. Her hair grows about \(\frac{1}{2}\) inch each month.
In 8 months it grows 8  X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{8}{2}\) as numerator is
greater than denominator further can be simplified and 8 divides by 2 gives 4 with 0 remainder,
in 8 months it will grow 4 inches , So after 8 months it will be 7 + 4 =11 inches long as 11 is less than 12
and hair donations must be 12 inches longer so friend cannot donate her hair in 8 months.

Question 6.
Today you walk \(\frac{6}{10}\) mile from the Martin Luther King Jr. Memorial to the Washington Monument. Tomorrow you will walk about 4 times as far from the Washington Monument to the White House. About how much farther will you walk tomorrow?

Answer:

Tomorrow i will walk father \(\frac{18}{10}\) miles  or \(\frac{9}{5}\) miles or 1 \(\frac{4}{5}\) .

Explanation:

Given today i walked \(\frac{6}{10}\) mile from the Martin Luther King Jr. Memorial
to the Washington Monument, Tomorrow i will walk about 4 times as far from the Washington Monument
to the White House , So number of miles walked tomorrow will be 4 X \(\frac{6}{10}\)
first we write in unit fraction 4 X 6 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 24 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)  =
\(\frac{24}{10}\) as numerator is greater than denominator further can be simplified as
24,10 both can be divided by 2 gives 12,5 so \(\frac{24}{10}\) = \(\frac{12}{5}\)
now farther i will walk tomorrow will be \(\frac{24}{10}\) – \(\frac{6}{10}\) as denominator
of both are same we substract numerators , 24 – 6 =18 and denominator will remain same 10 =
\(\frac{18}{10}\) miles or further can be simplified and 18,10 both can be divided by by 2
gives 9, 5 = \(\frac{18}{10}\) miles = \(\frac{9}{5}\) miles as numerator is greater than
denominator we can write it in mixed fraction as 5 goes in 1 times. 5 X 1 is 5 , 1 will be our whole number and
(9−5) we have 4 left over. 4 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 5 = 1 \(\frac{4}{5}\) .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A 20-pound dog and a 60-pound dog eat the recommended amounts of dog food each day. How much more food does the 60-pound dog eat in 1 week than the 20-pound dog?
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 105
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 106
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 107
So, the 60-pound dog eats 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\)  more cups of food than the 20-pound dog in 1 week.

Answer:

The 60-pound dog eats 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\)  more cups of food than the 20-pound dog in 1 week.

Explanation:

Given A 20-pound dog eats 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups  and a 60-pound dog eats 3 cups,
the recommended amount of food each day. Now we need to calculate how much more food does
the 60-pound dog eat in 1 week than the 20-pound dog,
So Step 1 : First we find how much food the 20-pound dog eats in 1 week,
let us take it as b = 7 X 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) we write mixed fraction as fraction
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = ( 1 X 2 + 1 )by 2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\) now multiply by 7 =
7 X \(\frac{3}{2}\) we write into unit fraction 7 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) =
21 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{21}{2}\) cups,
Step 2: Now we find how much food the 60-pound dog eats in 1 week let us take it as c = 7 X 3 = 21 cups,
Step 3: Subtract b from c to find how much more food the 60-pound dog eats in 1 week.
c- b = 21 – \(\frac{21}{2}\) to subtract first we make both denominators same,
we multiply and divide 21 by 2 making as (21 x 2) by 2 = \(\frac{42}{2}\) –\(\frac{21}{2}\)
as denominators are same we subtarct numerators 42-21=21 will be numerator and denominator is same 2
=\(\frac{21}{2}\) as numerator is greater than denominator and 2 goes 10 times, 2 X 10 is 20 ,
10 will be our whole number and  (21−20) we have 1 left over. 1 will be our numerator and our denominator
will be the same 2 = 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\) . Therefore the 60-pound dog eats 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
more cups of food than the 20-pound dog in 1 week.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
Use the table above. A 40-pound dog and a 100-pound dog eat the recommended amounts of dog food each day. How much food is needed to feed both dogs for 1 week?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 108

Answer:
To feed the food for both dogs for 1 week we require \(\frac{182}{4}\) cups or \(\frac{91}{2}\) or 45 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups.

Explanation:
From the table 40-pound dog eats 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) and 100-pound dog eats
4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) the recommended amounts of dog food each day,
to find how much food is needed to feed both dogs for 1 week first we calculate for
40-pound dog= 7 X 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) we write the mixed fraction as a fraction
2 x 4 + 1 by 4 = \(\frac{9}{4}\) and multiply by 7 , 7 X \(\frac{9}{4}\)
now we write in unit fraction 7 X 9 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 63 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
\(\frac{63}{4}\) now we calculate for 100-pound dog eats 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) in 1 week is
7 X 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) we write the mixed fraction as a fraction ( 4 X 4 + 1 )by 4 =
\(\frac{17}{4}\) and multiply by 7 , 7 X \(\frac{17}{4}\) now we write in unit fraction
7 X 17 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 119 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{119}{4}\).
Now to feed the food for both dogs for 1 week is \(\frac{63}{4}\) + \(\frac{119}{4}\)
as denominators are same we add numerators we get 63 + 119 = 182 as numerator, \(\frac{182}{4}\)
further can be simplifed as 182 and 4 goes by 2 we write as \(\frac{91}{2}\) numerator is greater
we can write in mixed fraction as 2 goes 45 times, 2 X 45 is 90 , 45 will be our whole number and
(91−90) we have 1 left over. 1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 2,
making as 45 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups.

Problem Solving: Fraction Operations Homework & Practice 9.5

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.

Question 1.
Your friend makes strawberry jam and raspberry jam. He makes enough strawberry jam to fill \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a jar. He makes 5 times as much raspberry jam as strawberry jam. How many full jars of raspberry jam does he make?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 109
Answer:
Friend makes \(\frac{5}{2}\) jars= 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) jars in that full jars are 2,
So 2 jars of raspberry jam he makes.

Explanation:
Given friend makes strawberry jam to fill \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a jar and makes 5 times as
much raspberry jam as strawberry jam means he makes 5 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) of jars of
raspberry jam now we write as fraction \(\frac{5}{2}\) as numerator is greater,
we can write in mixed fraction as 2 goes 2 times, 2 X 2 is 4 , 2 will be our whole number and
(5−4) we have 1 left over. 1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 2,
making as 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) ,here 2 is whole there fore full jars of raspberry jam is 2.
So friend makes \(\frac{5}{2}\) jars= 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) jars in that full jars are 2,
So 2 jars of raspberry jam he makes.

Question 2.
You buy a pair of jeans that originally cost $22. The pair of jeans is \(\frac{1}{2}\) off the original price.
You pay with a $20 bill. How much change do you receive?
Answer:
I receive $9 as change.
Explanation:
The pair of jeans is \(\frac{1}{2}\) off the original price and original cost is $ 22,
So the cost to be paid is $22 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{22}{2}\)
further this can be simplified as both can be divided by 2 numerator becomes 11 and denominator as 1 = 11,
therefore the original cost for the pair of jeans is $ 11, Now i have paid $ 20bill,
i will receive a change that is $20 – $11= $9, i receive $9 as a change.

Question 3.
The observation deck of the Space Needle in Seattle is 520 feet above ground.
The tip of the Space Needle is 85 feet above the observation deck.
An artist makes a replica that is \(\frac{1}{100}\) the height of the entire Space Needle. How tall is the replica?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 110
Answer:
The height of replica is \(\frac{605}{100}\) =\(\frac{121}{20}\) or
6 \(\frac{1}{20}\) feet.

Explanation:
Given the observation deck of the Space Needle in Seattle is 520 feet above ground and
the tip of the Space Needle is 85 feet above the observation deck means the height of
the entire Space Needle is 520 + 85 = 605 feet above the ground to tip,
now an artist makes a replica that is \(\frac{1}{100}\)
the height of the entire Space Needle. So the height of the replica is
605 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) = \(\frac{605}{100}\)
further can be simplifed as 605 and 100 goes by 5 we get numerator as 121 and denominator as 20 =
\(\frac{121}{20}\) as numerator is greater we can write in mixed fraction as 20 goes
6 times, 20 X 6 is 120 , 6 will be our whole number and  (121−120) we have 1 left over.
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 20, making as 6 \(\frac{1}{20}\) feet tall.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
How many sheets of orange and black paper does a teacher need so that 30 students can each complete the art project?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 111
Answer:
For 30 students to complete the Art Project orange sheets required are 11 \(\frac{2}{8}\) and
18 \(\frac{6}{8}\)  black sheets of paper is required.

Explanation:
Given paper needed for Art Project orange is \(\frac{3}{8}\) and for 30 students it is
30 X \(\frac{3}{8}\) we write in unit fraction as 30 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) =
90 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{90}{8}\) as numerator is greater we can write in mixed fraction
as 8 goes 11 times, 8 X 11 is 88, 11 will be our whole number and  (90−88) we have 2 left over.
2 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 8, making as
11 \(\frac{2}{8}\) sheets of orange is required, given black paper needed for
Art Project is \(\frac{5}{8}\) and for 30 students it is 30 X \(\frac{5}{8}\)
we write in unit fraction as 30 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 150 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) =
\(\frac{150}{8}\) as numerator is greater we can write in mixed fraction as 8 goes 18 times,
8 X 18 is 144, 18 will be our whole number and  (150−144) we have 6 left over.
6 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 8, making as
18 \(\frac{6}{8}\) black sheets are required.
Therefore for 30 students to complete the Art Project orange sheets required are
11 \(\frac{2}{8}\) and 18 \(\frac{6}{8}\) black sheets of paper is required.

Question 5.
Writing
Write and solve a two-step word problem with mixed numbers that can be solved using multiplication.

Answer:
A two-step problem is a word problem that requires two operations to solve it.
We take two mixed numbers and slove using multiplication. In step one
we use multiplication and add and in another step we use addition and again use multiplication
as explained below with an example,

Explanation:
For example: Percy walks 2 \(\frac{5}{4}\) kilometers for 2 days and
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) kilometers for 5 days , how many kilometers does Percy walks in 1 week?
Given in first 2 days Percy walks 2 \(\frac{5}{4}\) kilometers so In first step
we change mixed fraction to fraction by using multiplication and then add 2 X 4 + 5 by 4 =
\(\frac{13}{4}\) kilometers for 1 day for 2 days it is 2 X \(\frac{13}{4}\) =
2 X 13 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 26 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{26}{4}\) kilometers for 2 days ,
Now for rest of 5 days we calculate. Here 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) we change the mixed fraction to fraction as
( 1 X 4 + 1 ) by 4 = \(\frac{5}{4}\) for 1 day, For 5 days it will be 5 X \(\frac{5}{4}\),
5 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 25 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{25}{4}\) kilometers for rest 5 days ,
Now total number of kilometers Percy walks is  \(\frac{26}{4}\) + \(\frac{25}{4}\) as denominators
are same we add numerators we get 26 + 25 as 51 and denominator being same as 4 = \(\frac{51}{4}\) kilometers
Percy walks in 1 week and further can be simplified as numerator is greater we can write in mixed fraction as
4 goes 12 times, 4 X 12 is 48, 12 will be our whole number and  (51−48) we have 3 left over.
3 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 4, making as
12 \(\frac{3}{4}\) kilometers Percy walks in 1 week.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
In science class, you test how many grams different-sized bundles of spaghetti can hold. You predict that a bundle of 5 spaghetti noodles can hold 10 quarters before breaking. You predict that a bundle of 10 spaghetti noodles can hold 20 quarters before breaking. Each quarter 5\(\frac{67}{100}\) grams. According to your predictions, how many more grams can the bundle of 10 noodles hold than the bundle of 5 noodles?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 112
Answer:
\(\frac{970}{100}\) grams more the bundle of 10 noodles hold than the bundle of 5 noodles
or \(\frac{97}{10}\) grams more the bundle of 10 noodles hold than the bundle of 5 noodles
or 9 \(\frac{7}{10}\) grams more the bundle of 10 noodles hold than the bundle of 5 noodles.
Explanation:
Given that bundle of 5 noodles can hold 10 quarters means 5 noodles can hold
10 X 5 \(\frac{67}{100}\) grams first we change mixed fraction to fraction by
using multiplication and then add as 5 \(\frac{67}{100}\) = 5 X 6 + 67 by 100 =
\(\frac{97}{100}\) now we multiply by 10, 10 X \(\frac{97}{100}\) =
10 X 97 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) = 970 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) = \(\frac{970}{100}\) grams ,
so 5 spaghetti noodles can hold \(\frac{970}{100}\) grams before breaking,
Now given 10 spaghetti noodles can hold 20 quarters means 10 spaghetti noodles can hold
20 X 5 \(\frac{67}{100}\) grams again first we change mixed fraction to fraction
by using multiplication and then add as 5 \(\frac{67}{100}\) = ( 5 X 6 + 67 ) by 100 =
\(\frac{97}{100}\) now we multiply by 20, 20 X \(\frac{97}{100}\) =
20 X 97 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) = 1940 X \(\frac{1}{100}\) = \(\frac{1940}{100}\) grams ,
so 10 spaghetti noodles can hold \(\frac{1940}{100}\) grams before breaking now to calculate
how many more grams can the bundle of 10 noodles hold than the bundle of 5 noodles we subtract
\(\frac{1940}{100}\) grams – \(\frac{970}{100}\) grams as denominators are same first
we substract numerators as 1940 – 970 = 970 as numerator and denominator being same 100
we get \(\frac{970}{100}\) grams more the bundle of 10 noodles hold than the bundle of 5 noodles,
further can be simplified as 970 and 100 both can be divided by 10 making it as \(\frac{97}{10}\) grams
more the bundle of 10 noodles hold than the bundle of 5 noodles and as numerator is greater ,
we can write in mixed fraction as 10 goes 9 times, 10 X 9 is 90, 9 will be our whole number and  (97−90)
we have 7 left over. 7 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 10,
making as 9 \(\frac{7}{10}\) grams more the bundle of 10 noodles hold than the bundle of 5 noodles.

Review & Refresh

Compare

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 113
Answer:
\(\frac{9}{10}\) is greater than > \(\frac{4}{5}\) or
\(\frac{9}{10}\) is greater than > \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Explanation:
In order to compare the fractions we must first turn their different denominators into
the same denominators to make denominators same we multiply \(\frac{4}{5}\)
with both numerator and denominator by 2 the value will not change =
\(\frac{4}{5}\)  X \(\frac{2}{2}\)= \(\frac{8}{10}\)
now as denominators are same 10 we can compare only numerators
\(\frac{9}{10}\) with \(\frac{8}{10}\) as 9 is greater than 8,
So \(\frac{9}{10}\) is greater than > \(\frac{8}{10}\) or
\(\frac{9}{10}\) is greater than > \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 114
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{8}\) < is less than \(\frac{5}{6}\) or
\(\frac{9}{24}\) < is less than \(\frac{20}{24}\).

Explanation:
In order to compare the fractions we must first turn their different denominators into
the same denominators to make denominators same ,
we find the least common multiplier of 8 ,6 as ( 2 X 2 X 2 X 3 ) = 24,
solution

Now convert each one of \(\frac{3}{8}\) and \(\frac{5}{6}\)
into an equivalent fraction having  as denominator,
\(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\) X \(\frac{3}{3}\) =
\(\frac{9}{24}\) and \(\frac{5}{6}\) = \(\frac{5}{6}\) X \(\frac{4}{4}\) =
\(\frac{20}{24}\) now as denominators are same 24 we can compare only numerators
\(\frac{9}{24}\) with \(\frac{20}{24}\) as 9 is less than 20,
so \(\frac{9}{24}\) < is less than \(\frac{20}{24}\) or
\(\frac{3}{8}\) < is less than \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 115
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{3}\) = is equal to  \(\frac{4}{12}\) or
\(\frac{1}{3}\) = is equal to  \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Explanation:
Here first we simplify \(\frac{4}{12}\) as both can be divided by 4 if we dividey
both numerator and denominator by 4 we get numerator as 1 and denominator as 4 =
\(\frac{1}{3}\) now comparing both sides, as values are same
so \(\frac{1}{3}\) = is equal to  \(\frac{4}{12}\) or
\(\frac{1}{3}\) = is equal to  \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions Performance Task

Question 1.
You use identical glass jars, colored water, and a spoon to learn about sounds. When you tap a spoon on a jar, the vibrations make a sound. The jar that has the least amount of water makes the lowest sound.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 116
a. You fill each glass using a \(\frac{3}{4}\)-cup measuring cup. Complete the table to find the total amount of water in each jar.
b. How much more water is in the purple jar than the green jar?
c. How many cups of water are used in all?
d. Each jar can hold 4 cups of water. Is it possible to add another \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water to the purple jar? Explain.
e. Which jars are more than half full?
f. You add another \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water to the green jar. How does that affect the sound?
Answer:
a.
b. Purple jar is 3 cups more than the Green jar or Purple jar is \(\frac{12}{4}\) cups more than the Green jar.
c. Total number of cups of water used in all is \(\frac{45}{4}\) cups or 11 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups.
d. No, it is not possible to add another \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water to the purple jar as if we add it will become \(\frac{18}{4}\) cups = 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\) = 4 + \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups of water
to the purple jar cups which is more than 4 cups it will overflow so it is not possible to add another
\(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water to the purple jar.
e. Jars which are more than half full are Orange, Red and Purple.
f. After adding add another \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water to the green jar it becomes
\(\frac{6}{4}\) which is equal to blue color jar, we know the jar that has the least amount of water
makes the lowest sound before it was the green jar which had least amount of water so it had lowest sound,
so now after adding \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water to green jar it has become equal to blue jar
so now both green and blue jar has least amount of water so they both make the lowest sound.

Explanantion:
a. Given we fill each glass \(\frac{3}{4}\)-cup measuring cup so total water cups used for each color are
Green 1 means 1 X \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup = \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup
Blue 2 of \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 2 X \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 2 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
6 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)= \(\frac{6}{4}\) cups , as both numerator and denominator
can be divided by 2 we get \(\frac{3}{2}\) cups
Orange 3 of \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 3 X \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 3 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
9 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{9}{4}\) cups
Red 4 of \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 4 X \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 4 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
12 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{12}{4}\) as both numerator and denominator can be divided by 4
we get numerator as 3 and denominator 1 making Red 4 of \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 3 cups.
Purple 5 of \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 5 X \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 5 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
15 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
\(\frac{15}{4}\) cups.

b. To calculate how much more water is in the Purple jar than the Green jar we subtract
the quantity of purple jar minus quantity in green jar as \(\frac{15}{4}\) cups – \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup,
as denominators are same for the both we will sustract numerators 15-3 = 12 and
denominator remains the same as 4, \(\frac{12}{4}\) as both numerator and
denominator can be divided by 4 we get numerator as 3 and denominator 1 so Purple Jar is 3 cups
more than the Green jar.

c. Total number of cups of water are used in all is adding Green, Blue, Orange, Red,
Purple – \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{6}{4}\) + \(\frac{9}{4}\)  + \(\frac{12}{4}\) +
\(\frac{15}{4}\) as denominators are same we add numerators as 3 + 6 + 9 + 12 + 15 = 45 and
denominator being same as 4 = \(\frac{45}{4}\) as numerator is greater we can also write in mixed fraction
as 4 goes 11 ,X 11 is 44, 11 will be our whole number and  (45−44) we have 1 left over.
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will be the same 4, making as 11 \(\frac{1}{4}\),
therfore total number of cups of water used in all is \(\frac{45}{4}\) cups or 11 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups.

d. We got Purple jar contains \(\frac{15}{4}\) cups to this we will  add another
\(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water = \(\frac{15}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) as denominator is
same we add numerators as 15 + 3 = 18 and denominator is same 4 so now the Purple jar contains
\(\frac{18}{4}\) cups , to find the whole value we write in mixed fraction as 4 goes , 4 X 4 is 16, 4
will be our whole number and  (18−16) we have 2 left over. 2 will be our numerator and our denominator
will be the same 4, making as 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\) = 4 + \(\frac{2}{4}\) and
given that each jar can hold 4 cups of water but as we are getting more than 4 it will overflow,
so it is not possible to add another \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water to the purple jar.
e. Jars more than half full means each jars should be above 2 cups means to check we need
denominator to be same that is 4 so we multiply denominator and numerator by 4,
we get \(\frac{8}{4}\) to be more than half full means each jars numerators should be more than 8 and all jars denominators being same as 4, now we check with green jar, \(\frac{8}{4}\)  and
\(\frac{3}{4}\) as 3 is not greater than 8 so not green jar, blue jar we have \(\frac{6}{4}\) cups
here also numerator 6 is not more than 8 so even we will not conside blue jar,
orange jar \(\frac{9}{4}\) now here numerator 8 is less than 9 so we will consider orange jar,
Now red jar as red jar has 3 cups which is above 2 cups we consider red jar and we have purple jar as
\(\frac{15}{4}\) here numerator 15 is more than numerator 8 so we consider purple jar,
therefore jars with more than half full are Orange, Red and Purple.

f. Now we will add another \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water to the green jar means
\(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) as denominators as same we add numerators
we get \(\frac{6}{4}\) which is equal to blue color jar, we know the jar that has the
least amount of water makes the lowest sound before it was the green jar which had least amount of water,
so it had lowest sound, so now after adding \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of water to green jar it has become equal
to blue jar so now both green and blue jar has least amount of water so they both make the lowest sound.

Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions Activity

Three In a Row: Fraction Multiplication

Directions:

  1. Players take turns.
  2. On your turn, spin both spinners.
  3. Multiply the whole number and the fraction or mixed number. Cover the product.
  4. If the product is already covered, you lose your turn.
  5. The first player to get three in a row wins!

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 117
Answer:

Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions Chapter Practice

9.1 Understand Multiples of Unit Fractions

Write the fraction as a multiple of a unit fraction.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 118
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{10}\)= \(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{10}\)
= 3 X \(\frac{1}{10}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{3}{10}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{3}{100}\)=
\(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{10}\) and
multiplication as unit fraction \(\frac{3}{10}\) represents 3 parts that are \(\frac{1}{10}\) of the whole, \(\frac{3}{10}\) = 3 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 119
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{8}\)= \(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) +
\(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 4 X \(\frac{1}{8}\).

Explanation:
We write \(\frac{4}{8}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{4}{8}\)=
\(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) +
\(\frac{1}{8}\) and multiplication as unit fraction \(\frac{4}{8}\) represents 4 parts
that are \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the whole, \(\frac{4}{8}\) = 4 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{7}{2}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{7}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) +
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) +
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 7 X \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Explanation:
we write \(\frac{7}{2}\) in addition equation as  \(\frac{7}{2}\) =
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+ \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 7 X \(\frac{1}{2}\)
and multiplication as unit fraction \(\frac{7}{2}\) represents 7 parts that are
\(\frac{1}{2}\) of the whole, \(\frac{7}{2}\) = 7 X \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 4.
\(\frac{56}{100}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{56}{100}\)  = \(\frac{14}{25}\) = \(\frac{1}{25}\) +
\(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) +
\(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) +
\(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) +
\(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) +
\(\frac{1}{25}\) = 14 X \(\frac{1}{25}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{56}{100}\) first we simplify as both numerator and denominator can be
divided by 4 we get numerator as 14 and denominatior as 25 =  \(\frac{14}{25}\)
now we write \(\frac{14}{25}\) in addition equation as \(\frac{14}{25}\) =
\(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) +
\(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) +
\(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) +
\(\frac{1}{25}\) + \(\frac{1}{25}\) = 14 X \(\frac{1}{25}\) and multiplication as unit fraction \(\frac{14}{25}\) represents 14 parts that are \(\frac{1}{25}\) of the whole,
\(\frac{14}{25}\) = 14 X \(\frac{1}{25}\) .

Question 5.
Logic
What is Newton’s fraction? Write the fraction as a multiple of a unit fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 120
Answer:
Newton’s fraction is 5 X \(\frac{1}{6}\), The fraction is already a multiple of a unit fraction =
5 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) , 5 is multiple and \(\frac{1}{6}\) is a unit fraction.

Explanation:
Given unit fraction is one sixth of a whole is \(\frac{1}{6}\) and Newton’s fraction is 5 unit fractions
means it is equal to \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) +
\(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 5 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) already the
fraction is a multiple of a unit fraction = 5 X \(\frac{1}{6}\) , 5 is multiple and
\(\frac{1}{6}\) is a unit fraction.

9.2 Understand Multiples of Fractions

Write the product as a multiple of a unit fraction. Then find the product.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 121
Answer:
2 X \(\frac{2}{4}\) = 2 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 4 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{4}{4}\)= 1

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{2}{4}\)  as  \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
2 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) then multiply it by 2 which is  2 X 2 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
4 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{4}{4}\) as numerator and denominator are same
both get cancelled so we get 1 , \(\frac{4}{4}\) = 1.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 122
Answer:
3 X \(\frac{9}{12}\) = 3 X \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 9 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
\(\frac{9}{4}\)

Explanantion:
As \(\frac{9}{12}\) can be simplified as both 9,12 can go with 3 leaving numerator as
3 and denominator as 4= \(\frac{3}{4}\), First we write \(\frac{3}{4}\)  as  \(\frac{1}{4}\) +
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) then multiply it by 3
which is  3 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 9 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) is multiple of unit fraction,
The product is \(\frac{9}{4}\) .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 123
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{5}\) X 4 = 12 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{12}{5}\).

Explanation:
First we write \(\frac{3}{5}\)  as  \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) +
\(\frac{1}{5}\) = 3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) then multiply it by 4 which is
4 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 12 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{12}{5}\).

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 124
Answer:
\(\frac{8}{10}\) X 7= \(\frac{4}{5}\) X 7 = 28 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) is
multiple of unit fraction, The product is \(\frac{28}{5}\).

Explanantion:
As \(\frac{8}{10}\) can be simplified as both 8,10 can go with 2, leaving numerator as 4
and denominator as 5 = \(\frac{4}{5}\), First we write \(\frac{4}{5}\)  as
\(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) then multiply it by 7 which is  7 X 4 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) =
28 X \(\frac{1}{5}\) is multiple of unit fraction, The product is \(\frac{28}{5}\).

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 125
Answer:
8 X \(\frac{6}{3}\) = 8 X 2 = 16 as we got \(\frac{6}{3}\) =2,
So we get results as whole not in fraction.

Explanation:
As \(\frac{6}{3}\) can be simplified as both can be divided by 2, leaving numerator as 2 and denominator as 1 ,  \(\frac{6}{3}\) = 2  , now it is 8 X 2 = 16 as we got \(\frac{6}{3}\) =2, so we get results as whole not in fraction.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 126
Answer:
10 X \(\frac{30}{8}\) = 10 X \(\frac{15}{4}\) = 150 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) =
\(\frac{150}{4}\) = \(\frac{75}{2}\).

Explanation:
As \(\frac{30}{8}\) can be simplified as both can be divided by 2 , we get numerator as 15 and denominator as 4, \(\frac{30}{8}\) = \(\frac{15}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) +
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) +
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) +
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) +
\(\frac{1}{4}\) = 15 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) now multiply with 10 X 15 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 150 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{150}{4}\)  this can be further simplified as 150 and 4 both
can be further divided by 2 making numerator as 75 and denominator as 2 = \(\frac{75}{2}\) .

9.3 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions

Multiply

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 127
Answer:
2 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{2}\) = 1
Explanation:
Already it is in unit fraction so 2 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{2}\) = 1.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 128
Answer:
4 X \(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{20}{8}\) = \(\frac{10}{4}\) =
\(\frac{5}{2}\).

Explanation :
First we write \(\frac{5}{8}\) in unit fraction as 5 X \(\frac{1}{8}\)
now we multiply with whole 4 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{20}{8}\)
further can be simplifed as 20,8 both can be divided by 4 we get numerator as 5 and denominator 2,
therefore 4 X \(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\) .

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 129
Answer:
3 X \(\frac{9}{6}\) = \(\frac{9}{2}\).

Explanantion:
We can simplify \(\frac{9}{6}\) as both goes by 3 giving numerator as 3 and
denominator as 2 so we get \(\frac{9}{6}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\) now we write in unit fraction
as 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) now we multiply by 3, 3 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) =
9 X \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{9}{2}\).

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 130
Answer:
5 X  \(\frac{7}{12}\) = \(\frac{35}{12}\).

Explanation:
first we write \(\frac{7}{12}\) as unit fraction = 7 X \(\frac{1}{12}\),
now we multiply with 5 as 5 X 7 X \(\frac{1}{12}\) = 35 X \(\frac{1}{12}\) =
\(\frac{35}{12}\) .

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 131
Answer:
7 X \(\frac{30}{100}\) = 7 X \(\frac{3}{10}\) = \(\frac{21}{10}\).

Explanation:
We can simplify \(\frac{30}{100}\) as both goes by 10 giving numerator as 3 and
denominator as 10 so we get \(\frac{3}{10}\)  now we write in unit fraction as
3 X \(\frac{1}{10}\) and multiply by 7 , 7 X 3 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)  = 21 X \(\frac{1}{10}\)
=  \(\frac{21}{10}\) .

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 132
Answer:
\(\frac{8}{4}\) X 9 = 2 X 9 = 18.

Explanantion:
We can simplify \(\frac{8}{4}\) as both goes by 4 giving numerator as 2 and denominator
as 1 so we get 2 as whole, now we multiply with 9 we get 2 X 9 = 18.

9.4 Multiply Whole Numbers and Mixed Numbers

Multiply

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 133
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 133= \(\frac{5}{2}\)= 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)=
1 + \(\frac{1}{4}\)= (1 X 4 + 1) by 4 = \(\frac{5}{4}\) now we multiply it with the whole,
2 X \(\frac{5}{4}\) now we write in unit fraction and multiply  2 X 5 X \(\frac{1}{4}\)=
10 X \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{10}{4}\) further we can simplify as 10,4
both can be divided by 2 we get numerator as 5 and denominator as 2, \(\frac{5}{2}\)
as numerator is greater than denominator we can write in mixed fraction as 2 goes in 2 times.
2 will be our whole number 2 X 2 is 4 and we have 1 left over (54), 1 will be our numerator and our
denominator will stay the same 2, \(\frac{5}{2}\)= 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 134
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 134= \(\frac{69}{6}\) = \(\frac{23}{2}\) = 11 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 3 \(\frac{10}{12}\)=
( 3 X 12 + 10 ) by 12 = \(\frac{46}{12}\) this can be further simplified as both 46,12 goes by 2
we get numerator as 23 and denominator as 6 , \(\frac{23}{6}\) now we multiply by 3 =
3 X \(\frac{23}{6}\) = \(\frac{69}{6}\) it can be more simplified as both 69,6 goes by 3
we get numerator as 23 and denominator as 2 making \(\frac{69}{6}\) as \(\frac{23}{2}\)
as numerator is greater than denominator we can write in mixed fraction as 2 goes in 11 times.
11 will be our whole number 2 X 11 is 22 and we have 1 left over (23−22), 1 will be our numerator
and our denominator will stay the same 2, \(\frac{23}{2}\) = 11 \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 135
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 135= \(\frac{84}{8}\) = \(\frac{21}{2}\) = 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Explanantion:

First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 2 \(\frac{5}{8}\) =
( 2 X 8 + 5 ) by 8 = \(\frac{21}{8}\) now we multiply by 4 we get 4 X \(\frac{21}{8}\) =
4 X 21 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 84 X \(\frac{1}{8}\) =\(\frac{84}{8}\)
further can be simplified as both 84,8 goes by 4 we get numerator as 21 and denominator as 2
=\(\frac{21}{2}\) as numerator is greater than denominator we can write in mixed fraction
as 2 goes in 10 times. 10 will be our whole number 2 X 10 is 20 and we have 1 left over (21−20),
1 will be our numerator and our denominator will stay the same 2,
\(\frac{21}{2}\) = 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 136
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 136= \(\frac{40}{3}\) = 13 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) =
( 2 X 6 + 4 ) by 6 = \(\frac{16}{6}\) this can be simplified as 16,6 both goes by 2
we get numerator as 8 and denominator as 3 we get  \(\frac{8}{3}\)
now we multiply by 5 we get 5 X \(\frac{8}{3}\) = 5 X 8 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =
40 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{40}{3}\) as numerator is greater than denominator
we can write in mixed fraction as 3 goes in 13 times. 13 will be our whole number 3 X 13 is 39 and
we have 1 left over (40−39), 1 will be our numerator and our denominator will stay the same 3,
we get mixed fraction as 13 \(\frac{1}{3}\) .

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 137
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 137= \(\frac{140}{3}\)  = 46 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 6 \(\frac{2}{3}\) =
( 6 X 3 + 2 ) by 3 = \(\frac{20}{3}\)  now we multiply by 7  X \(\frac{20}{3}\) =
7 X 20 x \(\frac{1}{3}\)  = 140 X \(\frac{1}{3}\) =\(\frac{140}{3}\)
as numerator is greater than denominator we can write in mixed fraction as 3 goes in 46 times.
46 will be our whole number 3 X 46 is 138 and we have 2 left over (140−138), 2 will be our numerator
and our denominator will stay the same 3, we get mixed fraction as 46 \(\frac{2}{3}\) .

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 138
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions 138= \(\frac{470}{5}\) = 94
Explanation:
First we write the mixed number as a fraction then multiply, so 9 \(\frac{2}{5}\) =
( 9 X 5 + 2 ) by 5 = \(\frac{47}{5}\) now we multiply by 10 = 10 X \(\frac{47}{5}\) =
\(\frac{470}{5}\) this can be further simplified as both can be divided by 5 we get numerator as
94 and denominator as 1 so we get only whole number 94.

9.5 Problem Solving: Fraction Operations

Question 24.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend rides her bike \(\frac{2}{6}\) mile to your house and \(\frac{2}{6}\)
mile back home 4 times in 1 week. How far does she bike in all?
Answer:
My friend rides her bike by \(\frac{8}{3}\) miles or 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) miles.

Explanation:
Given friend rides her bike \(\frac{2}{6}\) mile to your house and \(\frac{2}{6}\) mile
back home, first we calculate for 1 time, so first we will add \(\frac{2}{6}\) + \(\frac{2}{6}\)
as both have same denominators we will add numerators as ( 2 + 2 = 4 ).
So we get \(\frac{4}{6}\) miles for 1 time , now she rides 4 times means 4 X \(\frac{4}{6}\) =
\(\frac{16}{6}\) this can be further simplified as 16,6 both goes by 2 we get numerator as 8 and
denominator as 3 = \(\frac{8}{3}\) as numerator is greater than denominator we can write in
mixed fraction as 3 goes in 2 times. 2 will be our whole number 3 X 2 is 6 and
we have 2 left over (8−6), 2 will be our numerator and our denominator will stay the same 3,
we get mixed fraction as 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) miles.

Conclusion:

Access the links given in the Big Ideas Math Book 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions and practice well for the exams. We have solved all the questions in an easy and simple manner. We hope the information provided in this article has brought a smile to your face. Share Big Ideas Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 9 Multiply Whole Numbers and Fractions.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Polygons present here will help you get good ideas on the associated lessons in it easily. Utilize the quick resources available here for Big Ideas Math Geometry Ch 7 Solutions and attempt the final exam with confidence. Solving the BIM Book Geometry Ch 7 Quadrilaterals and Polygons will boost up your confidence and improve your speed and accuracy while writing the exam. Download the Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers via quick links and ace up your preparation.

Big Ideas Math Book Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Ch 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons include the topics such as how to measure angles of a polygon, properties of different shapes, finding diagonals on a polygon, etc. If you need any help on the BIM Book Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons concepts you can always use this quick reference. With Consistent Practice using the Big Ideas Math Geometry Ch 7 Solutions you will no longer feel any difficulty in understanding the concepts.

 

Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Solve the equation by interpreting the expression in parentheses as a single quantity.

Question 1.
4(7 – x) = 16
Answer:
The given equation is:
4 (7 – x) = 16
7 – x = \(\frac{16}{4}\)
7 – x = 4
7 – 4 = x
x = 3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 3

Question 2.
7(1 – x) + 2 = – 19
Answer:
The given equation is:
7 (1 – x) + 2 = -19
7 (1 – x) = -19 – 2
1 – x = –\(\frac{21}{7}\)
1 – x = -3
1 + 3 = x
x = 4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 4

Question 3.
3(x – 5) + 8(x – 5) = 22
Answer:
The given equation is:
3 (x – 5) + 8 (x – 5) = 22
(x – 5) (3 + 8) = 22
x – 5 = \(\frac{22}{11}\)
x – 5 = 2
x = 2 + 5
x = 7
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 7

Determine which lines are parallel and which are perpendicular.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 1
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 1
From the given figure,
The coordinates of line a are: (-2, 2), (4, -2)
The coordinates of line b are: (-3, -2), (0, -4)
The coordinates of line ‘c’ are: (-3, 0), (3, -3)
The coordinates of line ‘d’ are: (1, 0), (3, 4)
Compare the given coordinates with (x1, y1), (x2, y2)
Now,
We know that,
The slope of the line (m) = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
So,
The slope of line a = \(\frac{-2 – 2}{4 + 2 }\)
= \(\frac{-4}{6}\)
= –\(\frac{2}{3}\)
The slope of line b = \(\frac{-4 + 2}{0 + 3}\)
= \(\frac{-6}{3}\)
= -2
The slope of line c = \(\frac{-3 – 0}{3 + 3}\)
= \(\frac{-3}{6}\)
= –\(\frac{1}{2}\)
The slope of line d = \(\frac{4 – 0}{3 – 1}\)
= \(\frac{4}{2}\)
= 2
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that line c and line d are perpendicular lines

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 2
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 2
From the given figure,
The coordinates of line a are: (3, 1), (0, -3)
The coordinates of line b are: (0, 1), (-3, -3)
The coordinates of line ‘c’ are: (2, 1), (-2, 4)
The coordinates of line ‘d’ are: (4, -4), (-4, 2)
Compare the given coordinates with (x1, y1), (x2, y2)
Now,
We know that,
The slope of the line (m) = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
So,
The slope of line a = \(\frac{-3 – 1}{0 – 3}\)
= \(\frac{-4}{-3}\)
= \(\frac{4}{3}\)
The slope of line b = \(\frac{-3 – 1}{-3 – 0}\)
= \(\frac{-4}{-3}\)
= \(\frac{4}{3}\)
The slope of line c = \(\frac{2 + 4}{-4 – 4}\)
= \(\frac{6}{-8}\)
= –\(\frac{3}{4}\)
The slope of line d = \(\frac{4 + 2}{-4 – 4}\)
= \(\frac{6}{-8}\)
= –\(\frac{3}{4}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
line a and line b are parallel lines
line c and line d are parallel lines
line b and line c and line a and line c are perpendicular lines

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 3
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 3
From the given figure,
The coordinates of line a are: (4, -4), (-2, -2)
The coordinates of line b are: (-3, -2), (-2, 2)
The coordinates of line ‘c’ are: (3, 1), (2, -3)
The coordinates of line ‘d’ are: (0, 3), (-4, 4)
Compare the given coordinates with (x1, y1), (x2, y2)
Now,
We know that,
The slope of the line (m) = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
So,
The slope of line a = \(\frac{-2 + 4}{-2 – 4}\)
= \(\frac{2}{-6}\)
= –\(\frac{1}{3}\)
The slope of line b = \(\frac{2 + 2}{-2 + 3}\)
= \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= 4
The slope of line c = \(\frac{-3 – 1}{2 – 3}\)
= \(\frac{-4}{-1}\)
= 4
The slope of line d = \(\frac{4 – 3}{-4 – 0}\)
= \(\frac{1}{-4}\)
= –\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
line b and line c are parallel lines
line b and line d and line c and line d are perpendicular lines

Question 7.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Explain why interpreting an expression as a single quantity does not contradict the order of operations.
Answer:
We know that,
In the order of operations, “Parenthesis” occupies the top position according to the BODMAS rule
So,
The interpreting of an expression as a single quantity or as different quantities don’t change the result
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the interpreting of an expression as a single quantity does not contradict the order of operations

Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons Mathematical Practices

Monitoring Progress

Use the Venn diagram below to decide whether each statement is true or false. Explain your reasoning.

Question 1.
Some trapezoids are kites.
Answer:
The given statement is:
Some trapezoids are kites
From the given Venn diagram,
We can observe that there is no relation between trapezoids and kites
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given statement is false

Question 2.
No kites are parallelograms.
Answer:
The given statement is:
No kites are parallelograms
From the given Venn diagram,
We can observe that there is no relation between kites and parallelograms
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given statement is true

Question 3.
All parallelograms are rectangles.
Answer:
The given statement is:
All parallelograms are rectangles
From the given Venn diagram,
We can observe that rectangles are a part of parallelograms but not all parallelograms are rectangles because parallelograms contain rhombuses, squares, and rectangles
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given statement is false

Question 4.
Some quadrilaterals are squares.
Answer:
The given statement is:
Some quadrilaterals are squares
From the given Venn diagram,
We can observe that squares are a small part of quadrilaterals and quadrilaterals contain other than squares
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given statement is true

Question 5.
Example 1 lists three true statements based on the Venn diagram above. Write six more true statements based on the Venn diagram.
Answer:
The given Venn diagram is:

From the above Venn diagram,
The six more true statements based on the Venn diagram are:
a. Some parallelograms are rhombuses
b. Some parallelograms are squares
c. Some parallelograms are rectangles
d. Some quadrilaterals are kites
e. Some quadrilaterals are trapezoids
f. Some quadrilaterals are parallelograms

Question 6.
A cyclic quadrilateral is a quadrilateral that can be circumscribed by a circle so that the circle touches each vertex. Redraw the Venn diagram so that it includes cyclic quadrilaterals.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 4
Answer:
it is given that a cyclic quadrilateral is a quadrilateral that can be circumscribed by a circle so that the circle touches each vertex.
Hence,
The completed Venn diagram that includes cyclic quadrilaterals is:

7.1 Angles of Polygons

Exploration 1

The Sum of the Angle Measures of a Polygon

Work with a partner. Use dynamic geometry software.

a. Draw a quadrilateral and a pentagon. Find the sum of the measures of the interior angles of each polygon.
Sample
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 5
Answer:
The representation of the quadrilateral and the pentagon are:

From the above figures,
The angle measures of the quadrilateral are 90°, 90°, 90°, 90°, and 90°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of a quadrilateral = 90° + 90° + 90° + 90°
= 360°
Now,
From the above figure,
The angle measures of a pentagon are: 108°, 108°, 108°, 108°, and 108°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of a pentagon = 108° + 108° + 108° + 108° + 108°
= 540°

b. Draw other polygons and find the sums of the measures of their interior angles. Record your results in the table below.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 6
Answer:
We know that,
The sum of the angle measures of a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
Where
n is the number of sides
Hence,
The completed result of the sums of the internal measures of their internal angles is:

c. Plot the data from your table in a coordinate plane.
Answer:
The table from part (b) is:

Hence,
The representation of the data in the table in the coordinate plane is:

d. Write a function that fits the data. Explain what the function represents.
CONSTRUCTING VIABLE ARGUMENTS
To be proficient in math, you need to reason inductively about data.
Answer:
From part (c),
When we observe the coordinate plane,
The function that fits the data is:
y = 180 (x – 2)
Where
y is the sum of the measures of the internal angles
x is the number of sides

Exploration 2

The measure of one Angle in a Regular Polygon

Work with a partner.

a. Use the function you found in Exploration 1 to write a new function that gives the measure of one interior angle in a regular polygon with n sides.
Answer:
From Exploration 1,
From part (d),
The function that fits the sum of the angle measures of the internal angles of n sides is:
y = 180° (n – 2) ——-(1)
Now,
To find the one interior angle in a regular polygon with n sides,
Divide eq. (1) by n
Hence,
The measure of an interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)

b. Use the function in part (a) to find the measure of one interior angle of a regular pentagon. Use dynamic geometry software are to check your result by constructing a regular pentagon and finding the measure of one of its interior angles.
Answer:
From part (a),
We know that,
The measure of an interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
So,
The measure of an interior angle of a regular pentagon = \(\frac{180° (5 – 2)}{5}\)
= \(\frac{180° (3)}{5}\)
= 36° × 3
= 108°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the measure of an interior angle of a regular pentagon is: 108°

c. Copy your table from Exploration 1 and add a row for the measure of one interior angle in a regular polygon with n sides. Complete the table. Use dynamic geometry software to check your results.
Answer:
The completed table along with the column of “Measure of one interior angle in a regular polygon” is:

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
What is the sum of the measures of the interior angles of a polygon?
Answer:
We know that,
The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a polygon is:
Sum = 180° (n – 2)
Where
n is the number of sides

Question 4.
Find the measure of one interior angle in a regular dodecagon (a polygon with 12 sides).
Answer:
We know that,
The measure of one interior angle in a regular polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
Where
n is the number of sides
So,
For a regular dodecagon, i.e., a polygon with 12 sides
The measure of one interior angle in a regular dodecagon = \(\frac{180° (12 – 2)}{12}\)
= \(\frac{180° (10)}{12}\)
= 15 × 10
= 150°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the measure of one interior angle in a regular dodecagon is: 150°

Lesson 7.1 Angles of Polygons

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
The Coin shown is in the shape of an 11-gon. Find the sum of the measures of the interior angles.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7
Answer:
It is given that the coin shown is in the shape of an 11-gon
So,
The number of sides in a coin (n) = 11
We know that,
The sum pf the measures of the interior angles = 180° (n – 2)
= 180° (11 – 2)
= 180° (9)
= 1620°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the sum of the measures of the interior angles in a coin is: 1620°

Question 2.
The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a convex polygon is 1440°. Classify the polygon by the number of sides.
Answer:
It is given that the sum of the measures of the interior angles of a convex polygon is 1440°
We know that,
The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
Where
n is the number of sides
So,
1440° = 180° (n – 2)
n – 2 = \(\frac{1440}{180}\)
n – 2 = 8
n = 8 + 2
n = 10
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the polygon with 10 sides is called “Decagon”

Question 3.
The measures of the interior angles of a quadrilateral are x°, 3x°. 5x°. and 7x° Find the measures of all the interior angles.
Answer:
It is given that the measures of the interior angles of a quadrilateral are x°, 3x°, 5x°, and 7x°
We know that,
The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a quadrilateral is: 360°
So,
x° + 3x° + 5x° + 7x° = 360°
16x° = 360°
x° = \(\frac{360}{16}\)
x° = 22.5°
So,
The measures of all the interior angles of a quadrilateral are:
x° = 22.5°
3x° = 3 (22.5)° = 67.5°
5x° = 5 (22.5)° = 112.5°
7x° = 7 (22.5)° = 157.5°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the measures of the internal angles of a quadrilateral are:
22.5°, 67.5°, 112.5°, and 157.5°

Question 4.
Find m∠S and m∠T in the diagram.

Answer:
The given figure is:

From the given figure,
We can observe that the number of the sides is 5
We know that,
The sum of the measures of the interior angles of the pentagon = 540°
Let
∠S = ∠T = x°
So,
93° + 156° + 85° + x° + x° = 540°
2x° + 334° = 540°
2x° = 540° – 334°
2x° = 206°
x° = \(\frac{206}{2}\)
x° = 103°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠S = ∠T = 103°

Question 5.
Sketch a pentagon that is equilateral but not equiangular.
Answer:
e know that,
The “Equilateral” means all the sides are congruent
The “Equiangular” means all the angles are congruent
Hence,
A pentagon that is equilateral but not equiangular is:

Question 6.
A convex hexagon has exterior angles with measures 34°, 49°, 58°, 67°, and 75°. What is the measure of an exterior angle at the sixth vertex?
Answer:
It is given that a convex hexagon has exterior angles with measures 34°, 49°, 58°, 67°, and 75°
We know that,
A hexagon has 6 number of sides
We know that,
The sum of the measures of the exterior angles of any polygon is: 360°
Let the exterior angle measure at the sixth vertex of a convex hexagon be: x°
So,
34° + 49° + 58° + 67° + 75° + x° = 360°
283° + x° = 360°
x° = 360° – 283°
x° = 77°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the measure of the exterior angle at the sixth vertex of the convex hexagon is: 77°

Question 7.
An interior angle and an adjacent exterior angle of a polygon form a linear pair. How can you use this fact as another method to find the measure of each exterior angle in Example 6?
Answer:
It is given that an interior angle and an adjacent exterior angle of a polygon form a linear pair i.e, it forms a supplementary angle
So,
Interior angle measure + Adjacent exterior angle measure = 180°
So,
By using the above property,
The sum of the angle measure of the exterior angle of any polygon = 180° × 4 = 360°
So,
The measure of each exterior angle = \(\frac{360}{4}\)
= 90°

Exercise 7.1 Angles of Polygons

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
Why do vertices connected by a diagonal of a polygon have to be nonconsecutive?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 1

Question 2.
WHICH ONE DOESNT BELONG?
Which sum does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.

The sum of the measures of the interior  angles of a quadrilateralThe sum of the measures of the exterior angles of a quadrilateral
The sum of the measures of the interior  angles of a pentagonThe sum of the measures of the exterior angles of a pentagon

Answer:
The given statements are:
a. The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a quadrilateral
b. The sum of the measures of the exterior angles of a quadrilateral
c. The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a pentagon
d. The sum of the measures of the exterior angles of a pentagon
We know that,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
The sum of the angle measures of the exterior angles of any polygon is: 360°
We know that,
The number of sides of a quadrilateral is: 4
The number of sides of a pentagon is: 5
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a quadrilateral = 180° ( 4 – 2)
= 180° (2)
= 360°

The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a pentagon = 180° ( 5 – 2)
= 180° (3)
= 540°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the statement (c) does not belong with the other three

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3-6, find the sum of the measures of the interior angles of the indicated convex po1gon.

Question 3.
nonagon
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 3

Question 4.
14-gon
Answer:
The given convex polygon is: 14-gon
So,
The number of sides of 14-gon is: 14
We know that,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of 14-gon = 180° (14 – 2)
= 180° (12)
= 2160°

Question 5.
16-gon
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 5

Question 6.
20-gon
Answer:
The given convex polygon is: 20-gon
So,
The number of sides of 20-gon is: 20
We know that,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of 20-gon = 180° (20 – 2)
= 180° (18)
= 3240°

In Exercises 7-10, the sum of the measures of the interior angles of a convex polygon is given. Classify the polygon by the number of sides.

Question 7.
720°
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 7

Question 8.
1080°
Answer:
It is given that
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a convex polygon is: 1080°
We know that,
The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
So,
1080° = 180° (n – 2)
n – 2 = \(\frac{1080}{180}\)
n – 2 = 6
n = 6 + 2
n = 8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of sides is: 8
Hence,
The given polygon is: Octagon

Question 9.
2520°
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 9

Question 10.
3240°
Answer:
It is given that
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a convex polygon is: 3240°
We know that,
The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
So,
3240° = 180° (n – 2)
n – 2 = \(\frac{3240}{180}\)
n – 2 = 18
n = 18 + 2
n = 20
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of sides is: 20
Hence,
The given polygon is: 20-gon or Icosagon

In Exercises 11-14, find the value of x.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 9
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 9
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The polygon has 4 sides
The given angle measures of a polygon with 4 sides are:
103°, 133°, 58°, and x°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a polygon with 4 sides = 180° (4 – 2)
= 180° (2)
= 360°
So,
103° + 133° + 58° + x° = 360°
294° + x° = 360°
x° = 360° – 294°
x° = 66°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 66°

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 13

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 11
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 11
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The polygon has 4 sides
The given angle measures of a polygon with 4 sides are:
101°, 68°, 92°, and x°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a polygon with 4 sides = 180° (4 – 2)
= 180° (2)
= 360°
So,
101° + 68° + 92° + x° = 360°
261° + x° = 360°
x° = 360° – 261°
x° = 99°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 99°

In Exercises 15-18, find the value of x.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 15

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 13
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 13
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The polygon has 5 sides
The given angle measures of a polygon with 5 sides are:
140°, 138°, 59°, x°, and 86°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a polygon with 5 sides = 180° (5 – 2)
= 180° (3)
= 540°
So,
140° + 138° + 59° + x° + 86° = 540°
423° + x° = 540°
x° = 540° – 423°
x° = 117°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 117°

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 14
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 17

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 15
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 15
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The polygon has 8 sides
The given angle measures of a polygon with 8 sides are:
143°, 2x°, 152°, 116°, 125°, 140°, 139°, and x°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a polygon with 8 sides = 180° (8 – 2)
= 180° (6)
= 1080°
So,
143° + 2x° + 152° + 116° + 125° + 140° + 139° + x° = 1080°
815° + 3x° = 1080°
3x° = 1080° – 815°
3x° = 265°
x° = \(\frac{265}{3}\)
x° = 88.6°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 88.6°

In Exercises 19 – 22, find the measures of ∠X and ∠Y.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 19

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 17
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 17
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The polygon has 5 sides
We know that,
If the angles are not mentioned in a polygon, the consider that angles as equal angles
Now,
The given angle measures of a polygon with 5 sides are:
47°, 119°, 90°, x°, and x°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a polygon with 5 sides = 180° (5 – 2)
= 180° (3)
= 540°
So,
47° + 119° + 90° + x° + x° = 540°
256° + 2x° = 540°
2x° = 540° – 256°
2x° = 284°
x° = \(\frac{284}{2}\)
x° = 142°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠X = ∠Y = 142°

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 21

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 19
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 19
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The polygon has 6 sides
We know that,
If the angles are not mentioned in a polygon, the consider that angles as equal angles
Now,
The given angle measures of a polygon with 6 sides are:
110°, 149°, 91°, 100°,  x°, and x°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles of a polygon with 6 sides = 180° (6 – 2)
= 180° (4)
= 720°
So,
110° + 149° + 91° + 100 +  x° + x° = 720°
440° + 2x° = 720°
2x° = 720° – 440°
2x° = 280°
x° = \(\frac{280}{2}\)
x° = 140°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠X = ∠Y = 140°

In Exercises 23-26, find the value of x.

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 20
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 23

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 21
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 21
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The polygon has 7 sides
The given angle measures of a polygon with 7 sides are:
50°, 48°, 59°, x°, x°, 58°, and 39°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the exterior angles of any polygon is: 360°
So,
50° + 48° + 59° +  x° + x° + 58° + 39° = 360°
254° + 2x° = 360°
2x° = 360° – 254°
2x° = 106°
x° = \(\frac{106}{2}\)
x° = 53°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 53°

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 22
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 25

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 23
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 23
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The polygon has 5 sides
The given angle measures of a polygon with 5 sides are:
45°, 40°, x°, 77°, and 2x°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of the exterior angles of any polygon is: 360°
So,
45° + 40° +  x° + 77° + 2x° = 360°
162° + 3x° = 360°
3x° = 360° – 162°
3x° = 198°
x° = \(\frac{198}{3}\)
x° = 66°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 66°

In Exercises 27-30, find the measure of each interior angle and each exterior angle of the indicated regular polygon.

Question 27.
pentagon
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 27

Question 28.
18-gon
Answer:
The given polygon is: 18-gon
So,
The number of sides of 18-gon is: 18
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
So,
The measure of each interior angle of 18-gon = \(\frac{180° (18 – 2)}{18}\)
= \(\frac{180° (16)}{18}\)
= 160°
The measure of each exterior angle of 18-gon = \(\frac{360°}{18}\)
= 20°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The measure of each interior angle of 18-gon is: 160°
The measure of each exterior angle of 18-gon is: 20°

Question 29.
45-gon
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 29

Question 30.
90-gon
Answer:
The given polygon is: 90-gon
So,
The number of sides of 90-gon is: 90
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
So,
The measure of each interior angle of 90-gon = \(\frac{180° (90 – 2)}{90}\)
= \(\frac{180° (88)}{90}\)
= 176°
The measure of each exterior angle of 90-gon = \(\frac{360°}{90}\)
= 4°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The measure of each interior angle of 90-gon is: 176°
The measure of each exterior angle of 90-gon is: 4°

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 31 and 32, describe and correct the error in finding the measure of one exterior angle of a regular pentagon.

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 24
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 31

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 25
Answer:
It is given that there are 10 exterior angles, two at each vertex
So,
The number of sides based on 10 exterior angles is: 10
We know that,
The measure of each exterior angle of any polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
So,
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon with 10 sides = \(\frac{360°}{10}\)
= 36°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the measure of each exterior angle in a polygon of 10 sides is: 36°

Question 33.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The base of a jewelry box is shaped like a regular hexagon. What is the measure of each interior angle of the jewelry box base?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 33

Question 34.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The floor of the gazebo shown is shaped like a regular decagon. Find the measure of each interior angle of the regular decagon. Then find the measure of each exterior angle.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 33
Answer:
It is given that the floor of the gazebo shown above is shaped like a regular decagon
Now,
We know that,
The number of sides of a regular decagon is: 10
Now,
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
So,
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a regular decagon = \(\frac{180° (10 – 2)}{10}\)
= \(\frac{180° (8)}{10}\)
= 144°
The measure of each exterior angle of a regular decagon = \(\frac{360°}{10}\)
= 36°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The measure of each interior angle of a regular decagon is: 144°
The measure of each exterior angle of a regular decagon is: 36°

Question 35.
WRITING A FORMULA
Write a formula to find the number of sides n in a regular polygon given that the measure of one interior angle is x°.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 35

Question 36.
WRITING A FORMULA
Write a formula to find the number of sides n in a regular polygon given that the measure of one exterior angle is x°.
Answer:
It is given that the measure of one exterior angle is: x°
We know that,
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
Where
n is the number of sides
So,
x° = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
n = \(\frac{360°}{x°}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The formula to find the number of sides n in a regular polygon given that the measure of one exterior angle is:
n = \(\frac{360°}{x°}\)

REASONING
In Exercises 37-40, find the number of sides for the regular polygon described.

Question 37.
Each interior angle has a measure of 156°.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 37

Question 38.
Each interior angle has a measure of 165°.
Answer:
It is given that each interior angle has a measure of 165°
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
So,
165° = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
165n = 180 (n – 2)
165n = 180n – 360
180n – 165n = 360
15n = 360
n = \(\frac{360}{15}\)
n = 24
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of sides with each interior angle 165° is: 24

Question 39.
Each exterior angle has a measure of 9°.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 39

Question 40.
Each exterior angle has a measure of 6°.
Answer:
It is given that each exterior angle has a measure of 6°
We know that,
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
So,
6° = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
6n = 360
n = \(\frac{360}{6}\)
n = 60
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of sides with each exterior angle 6° is: 60

Question 41.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
Which of the following angle measures are possible interior angle measures of a regular polygon? Explain your reasoning. Select all that apply.
(A) 162°
(B) 171°
(C) 75°
(D) 40°
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 41

Question 42.
PROVING A THEOREM
The Polygon Interior Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.1) states that the sum of the measures of the interior angles of a convex n-gon is (n – 2) • 180°. Write a paragraph proof of this theorem for the case when n = 5.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 26
Answer:
Polygon Interior Angles Theorem:
Statement:
The sum of the measures of the interior angles of a convex n-gon is: 180° (n – 2)

Proof of the Polygon Interior Angles Theorem:
Interior Angles of a Polygon
ABCDE is an “n” sided polygon. Take any point O inside the polygon. Join OA, OB, OC.
For “n” sided polygon, the polygon forms “n” triangles.
We know that the sum of the angles of a triangle is equal to 180 degrees
Therefore,
The sum of the angles of n triangles = n × 180°
From the above statement, we can say that
Sum of interior angles + Sum of the angles at O = 2n × 90° ——(1)
But, the sum of the angles at O = 360°
Substitute the above value in (1), we get
Sum of interior angles + 360°= 2n × 90°
So, the sum of the interior angles = (2n × 90°) – 360°
Take 90 as common, then it becomes
The sum of the interior angles = (2n – 4) × 90°
Therefore,
The sum of “n” interior angles is (2n – 4) × 90°
Hence,
When n= 5,
The sum of interior angles = ([2 × 5] – 4) × 90°
= (10 – 4) × 90°
= 6 × 90°
= 540°

Question 43.
PROVING A COROLLARY
Write a paragraph proof of the Corollary to the Polygon Interior Angles Theorem (Corollary 7. 1).
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 43

Question 44.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend claims that to find the interior angle measures of a regular polygon. you do not have to use the Polygon Interior Angles Theorem (Theorem 7. 1). You instead can use the Polygon Exterior Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.2) and then the Linear Pair Postulate (Postulate 2.8). Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Yes, your friend is correct

Explanation:
It is given that your friend claims that to find the interior angle measures of a regular polygon. you do not have to use the Polygon Interior Angles Theorem. You instead can use the Polygon Exterior Angles Theorem and then the Linear Pair Postulate.
We know that
In a polygon,
The sum of the angle measures of exterior angles + The sum of the angle measures of interior angles = 180°
So,
The sum of the angle measures of interior angles = 180° – (The sum of the angle measures of exterior angles)
So,
From the above,
We know that
According to Linear Pair Postulate
The sum of the exterior angle and interior angle measures is: 180°
The angle measures of the exterior angles can be found out by using the “Polygon Exterior Angles Theorem”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the claim of your friend is correct

Question 45.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
In an equilateral hexagon. four of the exterior angles each have a measure of x°. The other two exterior angles each have a measure of twice the sum of x and 48. Find the measure of each exterior angle.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 45

Question 46.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING
For a concave polygon, is it true that at least one of the interior angle measures must be greater than 180°? If not, give an example. If so, explain your reasoning.
Answer:
We know that,
For a concave polygon,
The angle measure of at least one interior angle should be greater than 180°
Now,
The word “Concave” implies that at least 1 interior angle is folding in and so this “Folding in” should be greater than 180° to produce the required shape
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that it is true that at least one of the interior angle measures must be greater than 180°

Question 47.
WRITING EXPRESSIONS
Write an expression to find the sum of the measures of the interior angles for a concave polygon. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 27
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 47.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 47.2

Question 48.
ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
Polygon ABCDEFGH is a regular octagon. Suppose sides \(\overline{A B}\) and \(\overline{C D}\) are extended to meet at a point P. Find m∠BPC. Explain your reasoning. Include a diagram with your answer.
Answer:
It is given that polygon ABCDEFGH is a regular polygon and \(\overline{A B}\) and \(\overline{C D}\) are extended to meet at a point P.
So,
The representation of the regular octagon is:

We know that,
The angle measure of each exterior angle = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
Where
n is the number of sides
It is given that a polygon is: Octagon
So,
The number of sides of the Octagon is: 8
So,
The angle measure of each exterior angle = \(\frac{360°}{8}\)
= 45°
We know that,
All the angles in the Octagon are equal
So,
From the given figure,
We can observe that ΔBPC is an Isosceles triangle
So,
From ΔBPC,
∠B = ∠C = 45°, ∠P = x°
We know that,
the sum of the angle measures of a given triangle is: 180°
So,
45° + x° + 45° = 180°
x° + 90° = 180°
x° = 180° – 90°
x° = 90°
Hence, from the above,
∠BPC = 90°

Question 49.
MULTIPLE REPRESENTATIONS
The formula for the measure of each interior angle in a regular polygon can be written in function notation.

a. Write a junction h(n). where n is the number of sides in a regular polygon and h(n) is the measure of any interior angle in the regular polygon.
b. Use the function to find h(9).
c. Use the function to find n when h(n) = 150°.
d. Plot the points for n = 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. What happens to the value of h(n) as n gets larger?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 49.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 49.2

Question 50.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Is the hexagon a regular hexagon? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 28
Answer:

Question 51.
PROVING A THEOREM
Write a paragraph proof of the Polygon Exterior Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.2). (Hint: In a convex n-gon. the sum of the measures of an interior angle and an adjacent exterior angle at any vertex is 180°.)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 51

Question 52.
ABSTRACT REASONING
You are given a convex polygon. You are asked to draw a new polygon by increasing the sum of the interior angle measures by 540°. How many more sides does our new polygon have? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
It is given that you are given a convex polygon and you are asked to draw a new polygon by increasing the sum of the interior angle measures by 540°
So,
We know that
The sum of the angle measures of the interior angles in a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
Let the number of sides of a new polygon be x
So,
180° (x – 2) + 540° = 180° (n – 2)
180x – 360° + 540° = 180n – 360°
180x – 180n = -540°
180 (x – n) = -540°
x – n = \(\frac{540}{180}\)
x – n = -3
n – x = 3
n = x + 3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
We have to add 3 more sides to the original convex polygon

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Find the value of x.

Question 53.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 29
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 53

Question 54.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 30
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 30
From the given figure,
We can observe that
113° and x° are the corresponding angles
We know that,
According to the “Corresponding Angles Theorem”, the corresponding angles are congruent i.e., equal
So,
x° = 113°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 113°

Question 55.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 31
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.1 a 55

Question 56.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 32
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 32
From the given figure,
We can observe that
(3x + 10)° and (6x – 19)° are the corresponding angles
We know that,
According to the “Corresponding angles Theorem”, the corresponding angles are congruent i.e., equal
So,
(3x + 10)° = (6x – 19)°
6x – 3x = 19° + 10°
3x° = 29°
x° = \(\frac{29}{3}\)
x° = 9.6°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 9.6°

7.2 Properties of Parallelograms

Exploration 1

Discovering Properties of Parallelograms

Work with a partner: Use dynamic geometry software.

a. Construct any parallelogram and label it ABCD. Explain your process.
Sample
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 34
Answer:
The representation of parallelogram ABCD is:

b. Find the angle measures of the parallelogram. What do you observe?
Answer:
The representation of parallelogram ABCD with the angles is:

Hence,
From the parallelogram ABCD,
We can observe that
∠A = 105°, ∠B = 75°, ∠D = 105°, and ∠C = 75°

c. Find the side lengths of the parallelogram. What do you observe?
Answer:
The representation of the parallelogram ABCD along with the side lengths is:

Hence,
From the parallelogram ABCD,
We can observe that
AB = CD = 5cm, and AC = BD = 2.8cm

d. Repeat parts (a)-(c) for several other parallelograms. Use your results to write conjectures about the angle measures and side lengths of a parallelogram.
Answer:
The representation of parallelogram ABCD along with its angles and the side lengths is:

Hence,
From the parallelogram ABCD,
We can conclude that
a. The opposite sides (i.e., AB and CD; AC and BD) are congruent i.e., equal
b. The opposite angles (i.e., A and C; B and D) are congruent i.e, equal

Exploration 2

Discovering a Property of Parallelograms

Work with a partner: Use dynamic geometry software.

a. Construct any parallelogram and label it ABCD.
Answer:
The representation of the parallelogram ABCD is:

b. Draw the two diagonals of the parallelogram. Label the point of intersection E.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 35
Answer:
The representation of the parallelogram ABCD along with its diagonals is:

From the parallelogram ABCD,
We can observe that
The diagonals of parallelogram ABCD are: AC and BD
The intersection point of AC and BD is: E

c. Find the segment lengths AE, BE, CE, and DE. What do you observe?
Answer:
The representation of the parallelogram ABCD along the segment lengths is:

Hence,
From the parallelogram ABCD,
We can observe that
AE = DE = 1.9 cm
CE = BE = 2.7 cm

d. Repeat parts (a)-(c) for several other parallelograms. Use your results to write a conjecture about the diagonals of a parallelogram.
MAKING SENSE OF PROBLEMS
To be proficient in math, you need to analyze givens, constraints, relationships, and goals.
Answer:
The representation of the parallelogram ABCD along with the length of the diagonals is:

Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The diagonals bisect each other
The lengths of the diagonals are:
AD = 3.8 cm and BC = 5.4 cm

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
What are the properties of parallelograms?
Answer:
The properties of parallelograms are:
a. The opposite sides are parallel.
b. The opposite sides are congruent.
c. The opposite angles are congruent.
d. Consecutive angles are supplementary.
e. The diagonals bisect each other.

Lesson 7.2 Properties of Parallelograms

Monitoring progress

Question 1.
Find FG and m∠G.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 36
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 36
It is given that
EH = 8 and ∠E = 60°
We know that,
In a parallelogram,
a. The opposite sides are congruent
b. The opposite angles are congruent
So,
From the given figure,
We can say that
FG = HE and GH = FE
∠G = ∠E and ∠H = ∠F
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
FG = 8 and ∠G = 60°

Question 2.
Find the values of x and y.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 37
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 37
From the given parallelogram,
We can observe that
JK = 18 and LM = y + 3
∠J = 2x° and ∠L = 50°
We know that,
In a parallelogram,
a. The opposite sides are congruent
b. The opposite angles are congruent
So,
JK = LM and ∠J = ∠L
So,
y + 3 =18
y = 18 – 3
y = 15
2x° = 50°
x° = \(\frac{50}{2}\)
x° = 25°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the values of x and y are: 25° and 15

Question 3.
WHAT IF?
In Example 2, find in m∠BCD when m∠ADC is twice the measure of ∠BCD.
Answer:
From Example 2,
It is given that ABCD is a parallelogram
In the parallelogram ABCD,
It is given that
∠ADC = 110°
We know that,
In a parallelogram,
The sum of the angle measure of the consecutive angles is supplementary
So,
From Example 2,
We can observe that
∠ADC + ∠BCD = 180°
So,
∠BCD = 180° – 110°
= 70°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠BCD = 70°

Question 4.
Using the figure and the given statement in Example 3, prove that ∠C and ∠F are supplementary angles.
Answer:

Question 5.
Find the coordinates of the intersection of the diagonals of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51STUV with vertices S(- 2, 3), T(1, 5), U(6, 3), and V(3, 1).
Answer:
The given coordinates of the parallelogram STUV are:
S (-2, 3), T (1, 5), U (6, 3), and V (3, 1)
Compare the given points with (x1, y1), (x2, y2)
We know that,
The opposite vertices form a diagonal
So,
In the parallelogram STUV,
SU and TV are the diagonals
So,
We know that,
The intersection of the diagonals means the midpoint of the vertices of the diagonals because diagonals bisect each other
So,
The midpoint of SU = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
= (\(\frac{6 – 2}{2}\), \(\frac{3 + 3}{2}\))
= (\(\frac{4}{2}\), \(\frac{6}{2}\))
= (2, 3)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the intersection of the diagonals of parallelogram STUV is: (2, 3)

Question 6.
Three vertices of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51ABCD are A(2, 4), B(5, 2), and C(3, – 1). Find the coordinates of vertex D.
Answer:
The given vertices of parallelogram ABCD are:
A (2, 4), B (5, 2), and C (3, -1)
Let the fourth vertex of the parallelogram ABCD be: (x, y)

We know that,
In a parallelogram,
The diagonals bisect each other i.e., the angle between the diagonals is 90°
So,
We can say that the diagonals are the perpendicular lines
So,
In the given parallelogram,
AC and BD are the diagonals
Now,
Slope of AC = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{-1 – 4}{3 – 2}\)
= \(\frac{-5}{1}\)
= -5
Slope of BD = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{y – 2}{x – 5}\)
We know that,
AC and BD are the perpendicular lines
SO,
The product of the slopes of the perpendicular lines is equal to -1
So,
(Slope of AC) × (Slope of BD) = -1
-5 × \(\frac{y – 2}{x – 5}\) = -1
\(\frac{y – 2}{x – 5}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Equate the numerator and denominator of both expreesions
We get,
y – 2 = 1                    x – 5 = 5
y = 1 + 2                   x = 5 + 5
y = 3                          x = 10
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the vertex D are: (10, 3)

Exercise 7.2 Properties of Parallelograms

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
Why is a parallelogram always a quadrilateral, but a quadrilateral is only sometimes a parallelogram?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 1

Question 2.
WRITING
You are given one angle measure of a parallelogram. Explain how you can find the other angle measures of the parallelogram.
Answer:
The parallelogram is:

It is given that you have one angle measure of a polygon
Let the one angle measure of the given parallelogram be ∠A
We know that,
In a parallelogram,
The opposite angles are congruent i.e., equal
The consecutive angles have the sum 180°
So,
From the given figure,
We can say that
∠A = ∠C and ∠B = ∠D
Hence, from the above,
We can measure the other angles of the parallelogram by using the property of “The opposite angles are congruent”

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3-6, find the value of each variable in the parallelogram.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 38
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 39
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 39
We know that,
According to the Parallelogram Opposite sides Theorem,
AB = CD and AD = BC
So,
From the given figure,
We can say that
n = 12          m + 1 = 6
n = 12          m = 6 – 1
n = 12          m = 5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the values of m and n are: 5 and 12

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 40
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 41
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 41

We know that,
According to the parallelogram Opposite sides Theorem,
AB = CD and AD = BC
According to the parallelogram Opposite Angles Theorem,
∠A = ∠C and ∠B = ∠D
Hence, from the figure,
(g + 4)° = 65°             16 – h = 7
g° = 65° – 4°                h = 16 – 7
g° = 61°                       h = 9
Hence, from he above,
We can conclude that the values of g and h are: 61° and 9

In Exercises 7 and 8. find the measure of the indicated angle in the parallelogram.

Question 7.
Find m∠B.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 7

Question 8.
Find m ∠ N.
Answer:
The given figure is:

We know that,
According to the parallelogram Consecutive angles Theorem,
The sum of the consecutive angle measures is equal to: 180°
So,
From the given figure,
∠M + ∠N = 180°
95° + ∠N = 180°
∠N = 180° – 95°
∠N = 85°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of ∠N is: 85°

In Exercises 9-16. find the indicated measure in Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51LMNQ. Explain your reasoning.

Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 42

Question 9.
LM
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 9

Question 10.
LP
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 42
From the given figure,
We can observe that
LN = 7
We know that,
In the parallelogram,
The diagonals bisect each other. So, the length of each diagonal will be divided into half of the value of the diagonal length
So,
LN can be divided into LP and PN
So,
LP = \(\frac{LN}{2}\)
LP = \(\frac{7}{2}\)
LP = 3.5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of LP is: 3.5

Question 11.
LQ
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 11

Question 12.
MQ
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 42
Hence,
From the given figure,
We can observe that
MQ = 8.2
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of MQ is: 8.2

Question 13.
m∠LMN
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 13

Question 14.
m∠NQL
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 42
We know that,
According to the parallelogram Consecutive angles Theorem,
The sum of the consecutive angle measures is: 180°
So,
From the figure,
∠L + ∠M = 180°
100° + ∠M = 180°
∠M = 180° – 100°
∠M = 80°
We know that,
According to the parallelogram Opposite angles Theorem,
The opposite angles are congruent i.e., equal
So,
From the figure,
∠M = ∠Q
So,
∠Q = 80°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of ∠NQL is: 80°

Question 15.
m∠MNQ
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 15

Question 16.
m∠LMQ
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 42
We know that,
According to the parallelogram Consecutive angles Theorem,
The sum of the consecutive angle measures is: 180°
So,
From the figure,
∠L + ∠M = 180°
100° + ∠M = 180°
∠M = 180° – 100°
∠M = 80°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of ∠LMQ is: 80°

In Exercises 17-20. find the value of each variable in the parallelogram.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 43
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 17

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 44
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 44
We know that,
According to the parallelogram Opposite Angles Theorem,
∠A = ∠C and ∠B = ∠D
According to the parallelogram Consecutive angles Theorem,
∠A + ∠B = 180° and ∠C + ∠D = 180° and ∠A + ∠D = 180° and ∠B + ∠C = 180°
So,
From the given figure,
(b – 10)° + (b + 10)° = 180°
2b° = 180°
b° = \(\frac{180}{2}\)
b° = 90°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of b is: 90°

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 45
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 19

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 46
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 46
We know that,
In the parallelogram,
The diagonals bisect each other
So,
From the given figure,
We can say that
\(\frac{v}{3}\) = 6                       2u + 2 = 5u – 10
v = 6 (3)                                                     5u – 2u = 10 + 2
v = 18                                                        3u = 18
v = 18                                                         u = \(\frac{18}{3}\)
v = 18                                                          u = 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the values of u and v are: 6 and 18

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 21 and 22, describe and correct the error in using properties of parallelograms.

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 47
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 21

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 48
Answer:
We know that,
According to the properties of the parallelogram,
GJ and HK are the diagonals of the parallelogram and F is the perpendicular bisector of the diagonals
So,
Snce F is the perpendicular bisector,
We know that,
GF = FJ and KF = FH
Hence, from the baove,
We can conclude that because quadrilateral GHJK is a parallelogram,
\(\overline{G F}\) = \(\overline{F J}\)

PROOF
In Exercises 23 and 24, write a two-column proof.

Question 23.
Given ABCD and CEFD are parallelograms.
Prove \(\overline{A B} \cong \overline{F E}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 49
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 23

Question 24.
Given ABCD, EBGF, and HJKD are parallelograms.
Prove ∠2 ≅∠3
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 50
Answer:
Given:
ABCD, EBGF, and HJKD are parallelograms
Prove:
∠2 ≅ ∠3

In Exercises 25 and 26, find the coordinates of the intersection of the diagonals of the parallelogram with the given vertices.

Question 25.
W(- 2, 5), X(2, 5), Y(4, 0), Z(0, 0)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 25

Question 26.
Q(- 1, 3), R(5, 2), S(1, – 2), T(- 5, – 1)
Answer:
The given coordinates of the parallelogram are:
Q (-1, 3), R (5, 2), S (1, -2), and T (-5, -1)
Compare the given coordinates with (x1, y1), and (x2, y2)
We know that,
By the parallelogram Diagonals Theorem, the diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other
So,
From the given coordinates,
The diagonals of the parallelogram are: QS and RT
So,
The midpoint of QS = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
= (\(\frac{1 – 1}{2}\), \(\frac{3 – 2}{2}\))
= (0, \(\frac{1}{2}\))
The midpoint of RT = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
= (\(\frac{5 – 5}{2}\), \(\frac{2 – 1}{2}\))
= (0, \(\frac{1}{2}\))
Hence from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the intersection of the diagonals of the given parallelogram are:
(0, \(\frac{1}{2}\))

In Exercises 27-30, three vertices of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51DEFG are given. Find the coordinates of the remaining vertex.

Question 27.
D(0, 2), E(- 1, 5), G(4, 0)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 27

Question 28.
D(- 2, – 4), F(0, 7), G(1, 0)
Answer:
The given vertices of parallelogram are:
D (-2, -4), F (0, 7), and G (1, 0)
Let the fourth vertex of the parallelogram be: (x, y)
We know that,
In a parallelogram,
The diagonals bisect each other i.e., the angle between the diagonals is 90°
So,
We can say that the diagonals are the perpendicular lines
So,
In the given parallelogram,
DF and EG are the diagonals
Now,
Slope of DF = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{7 + 4}{0 + 2}\)
= \(\frac{11}{2}\)
Slope of EG = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{y – 0}{x – 1}\)
= \(\frac{y}{x – 1}\)
We know that,
DF and EG are the perpendicular lines
So,
The product of the slopes of the perpendicular lines is equal to -1
So,
(Slope of DF) × (Slope of EG) = -1
\(\frac{11}{2}\) × \(\frac{y}{x – 1}\) = -1
\(\frac{y}{x – 1}\) = –\(\frac{2}{11}\)
Equate the numerator and denominator of both expreesions
We get,
y = -2                        x – 1 = 11
y = -2                        x = 11 + 1
y = -2                        x = 12
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the fourth vertex are: (12, -2)

Question 29.
D(- 4, – 2), E(- 3, 1), F(3, 3)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 29

Question 30.
E (1, 4), f(5, 6), G(8, 0)
Answer:
The given vertices of a parallelogram are:
E (1, 4), F (5, 6), and G (8, 0)
Let the fourth vertex of the parallelogram be: (x, y)
We know that,
In a parallelogram,
The diagonals bisect each other i.e., the angle between the diagonals is 90°
So,
We can say that the diagonals are the perpendicular lines
So,
In the given parallelogram,
FH and EG are the diagonals
Now,
Slope of FH = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{y – 6}{x – 5}\)
Slope of EG = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{0 – 4}{8 – 1}\)
= \(\frac{-4}{7}\)
= –\(\frac{4}{7}\)
We know that,
FH and EG are the perpendicular lines
So,
The product of the slopes of the perpendicular lines is equal to -1
So,
(Slope of FH) × (Slope of EG) = -1
–\(\frac{4}{7}\) × \(\frac{y – 6}{x – 5}\) = -1
\(\frac{y – 6}{x – 4}\) = \(\frac{7}{4}\)
Equate the numerator and denominator of both expreesions
We get,
y – 6 = 7                    x – 4 = 4
y = 7 + 6                   x = 4 + 4
y = 13                        x = 8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the fourth vertex are: (8, 13)

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
In Exercises 31 and 32. find the measure of each angle.

Question 31.
The measure of one interior angle of a parallelogram is 0.25 times the measure of another angle.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 31

Question 32.
The measure of one interior angle of a parallelogram is 50 degrees more than 4 times the measure of another angle.
Answer:
It is given that the measure of one interior angle of a parallelogram is 50 degrees more than 4 times the measure of another angle.
So,
The measure of one interior angle is: x°
The measure of another interior angle is: 50° + 4x°
We know that,
The opposite angles of the parallelogram are equal
The sum of the angles of the parallelogram is: 360°
So,
x° + 4x + 50° + x° + 4x + 50° = 360°
10x° + 100° = 360°
10x° = 360° – 100°
10x° = 260°
x° = \(\frac{260}{10}\)
x° = 26°
So,
The angle measures of the parallelogram are:
x° = 26°
4x° + 50° = 4 (26°) + 50°
= 104° + 50°
= 154°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the angle measures are: 26° and 154°

Question 33.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
In quadrilateral ABCD.
m∠B = 124°, m∠A = 56°, and m∠C = 124°.
Your friend claims quadrilateral ABCD could be a parallelogram. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 33

Question 34.
ATTENDING TO PRECISION
∠J and ∠K are Consecutive angles in a parallelogram. m∠J = (3t + 7)°. and m∠K = (5t – 11)°. Find the measure of each angle.
Answer:
It is given that ∠J and ∠K are the consecutive angles in a parallelogram
So,
∠J + ∠K = 180°
Now,
It is given that
∠J = (3t + 7)° and ∠K = (5t – 11)°
So,
(3t + 7)° + (5t – 11)° = 180°
8t° – 4 = 180°
8t° = 180° + 4°
8t° = 184°
t° = \(\frac{184}{8}\)
t° = 23°
So,
∠J = (3t + 7)°
= 3 (23)° + 7
= 69° + 7°
= 76°
∠K = (5t – 11)°
= 5 (23)° – 11
= 115° – 11°
= 104°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the measure of each angle is: 76° and 104°

Question 35.
CONSTRUCTION
Construct any parallelogram and label it ABCD. Draw diagonals \(\overline{A C}\) and \(\overline{B D}\). Explain how to use paper folding to verify the Parallelogram Diagonals Theorem (Theorem 7.6) for Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51ABCD.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 35

Question 36.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The feathers on an arrow from two congruent parallelograms. The parallelograms are reflections of each other over the line that contains their shared side. Show that m ∠ 2 = 2m ∠ 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 52
Answer:

Question 37.
PROVING A THEOREM
Use the diagram to write a two-column proof of the Parallelogram Opposite Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.4).
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 53
Given ABCD is a parallelogram.
Prove ∠A ≅ ∠C, ∠B ≅ ∠D
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 37.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 37.2

Question 38.
PROVING A THEOREM
Use the diagram to write a two-column proof of the Parallelogram Consecutive Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.5).
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 54
Given PQRS is a parallelogram.
Prove x° + y° = 180°
Answer:
Given:
PQRS is a parallelogram
Prove:
x° + y° = 180°

Question 39.
PROBLEM-SOLVING
The sides of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51MNPQ are represented by the expressions below. Sketch Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51MNPQ and find its perimeter.
MQ = – 2x + 37 QP = y + 14
NP= x – 5 MN = 4y + 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 39

Question 40.
PROBLEM SOLVING
In Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51LMNP, the ratio of LM to MN is 4 : 3. Find LM when the perimeter of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51LMNP is 28.
Answer:
It is given that
In the parallelogram LMNP,
The ratio of LM to MN is: 4 : 3
It is also given that
The perimeter of the parallelogram LMNP is: 28
So,
Let the length of LM be 4x
Let the length of MN be 3x
We know that,
The opposite sides of the parallelogram are equal
The perimeter is the sum of all the sides
So,
4x + 3x + 4x + 3x = 28
8x + 6x = 28
14x = 28
x = \(\frac{28}{14}\)
x = 2
So,
The length of LM = 4 x
= 4 (2)
= 8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of LM is: 8

Question 41.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Can you prove that two parallelograms are congruent by proving that all their corresponding sides are congruent? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 41

Question 42.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The mirror shown is attached to the wall by an arm that can extend away from the wall. In the figure. points P, Q, R, and S are the vertices of a parallelogram. This parallelogram is one of several that change shape as the mirror is extended.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 55
a. What happens to m∠P as m∠Q increases? Explain.
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can observe that
∠P and ∠Q are the consecutive angles
So,
∠P + ∠Q = 180°
Now,
To make the sum 180°, if one angle measure increases, then the other angle measure has to decrease
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that when ∠Q increases, ∠P has to decrease

b. What happens to QS as m∠Q decreases? Explain.
Answer:
From the given figure,
QS is a diagonal of the parallelogram
Q and S are the opposite angles
We know that,
The opposite angles are equal
So,
As ∠Q decreases, the length of QS may also decrease or may also increase

c. What happens to the overall distance between the mirror and the wall when m∠Q decreases? Explain.
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can observe that,
As the angle between Q and the wall increases,
The overall distance between the mirror and the wall increase

Question 43.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
In Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51STUV m∠TSU = 32°, m∠USV = (x2)°, m∠TUV = 12x°, and ∠TUV is an acute angle. Find m∠USV.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 56
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 43

Question 44.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING
Is it possible that any triangle can be partitioned into four congruent triangles that can be rearranged to form a parallelogram? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Yes, it is possible that any triangle can be partitioned into four congruent triangles that can be rearranged to form a parallelogram

Explanation:
We know that,
In any quadrilateral,
The diagonals bisect each other and the angles may or may not be 90° in the diagonals
So,
After the bisecting with the diagonals in a quadrilateral,
We can observe that the quadrilateral is divided into four triangles
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that it is possible that any triangle can be partitioned into four congruent triangles that can be rearranged to form a parallelogram

Question 45.
CRITICAL THINKING
Points W(1. 2), X(3, 6), and Y(6, 4) are three vertices of a parallelogram. How many parallelograms can be created using these three vertices? Find the coordinates of each point that could be the fourth vertex.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 45.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 45.2

Question 46.
PROOF
In the diagram. \(\overline{E K}\) bisects ∠FEH, and \(\overline{F J}\) bisects ∠EFG. Prove that \(\overline{E K}\) ⊥ \(\overline{F J}\). (Hint: Write equations using the angle measures of the triangles and quadrilaterals formed.)
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 57
Answer:

Question 47.
PROOF
Prove the congruent Parts of Parallel Lines Corollary: If three or more parallel lines cut off congruent segments on one transversal, then they cut off congruent segments on every transversal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 58
Given Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 59
Prove \(\overline{H K}\) ≅ \(\overline{K M}\)
(Hint: Draw \(\overline{K P}\) and \(\overline{M Q}\) such that quadrilatcral GPKJ and quadrilateral JQML are parallelorams.)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 47.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 47.2

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Determine whether lines l and m are parallel. Explain your reasoning.

Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 60
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 60
From the given figure,
We can observe that the given angles are the corresponding angles i.e., an interior angle and an exterior angle
Hence,
According to the Corresponding Angles Theorem,
We can conclude that l and m are parallel lines

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 61
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.2 a 49

Question 50.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 62
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 62
From the given figure,
We can observe that the given angles are the consecutive interior angles
We know that,
The sum of the angle measures of the consecutive interior angles is: 180°
But, from the given figure,
The sum of the angle measures is not 180°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that l is not parallel to m

7.3 Proving That a Quadrilateral is a Parallelogram

Exploration 1

Proving That a Quadrilateral is a Parallelogram

Work with a partner: Use dynamic geometry software.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 63
a. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD whose opposite sides are congruent.
Answer:

b. Is the quadrilateral a parallelogram? Justify your answer.
Answer:
We know that,
If a quadrilateral which has opposite sides congruent and each angle measure not equal to 90° and the diagonals bisected each other, then that quadrilateral is called the “Parallelogram”
Hence,
The representation of the quadrilateral ABCD as a parallelogram is:

c. Repeat parts (a) and (b) for several other quadrilaterals. Then write a conjecture based on your results.
Answer:

From the above quadrilateral,
The conjecture about the quadrilaterals is:
If the opposite sides of a quadrilateral are equal, then the opposite angles of a quadrilateral are equal

d. Write the converse of your conjecture. Is the Converse true? Explain.

REASONING ABSTRACTLY
To be proficient in math, you need to know and flexibly use different properties of objects.
Answer:
From part (c),
The conjecture about quadrilaterals is:
If the opposite sides of a quadrilateral are equal, then the opposite angles of a quadrilateral are equal
The converse of your conjecture is:
If the opposite angles of a quadrilateral are equal, then the opposite sides of a quadrilateral are equal
Now,
From the below figure,

We can observe that
When ∠B and ∠D are 90°,
AD = BC = 2.9
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the converse of the conjecture from part (c) is true

Exploration 2

Proving That a Quadrilateral Is a Parallelogram

Work with a partner: Use dynamic geometry software.

a. Construct any quadrilateral ABCD whose opposite angles are congruent.
Answer:

b. Is the quadrilateral a parallelogram? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 64
Answer:

We know that,
For a quadrilateral to be a parallelogram,
The opposite sides are equal and the opposite angles are equal
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that the given quadrilateral ABCD is a parallelogram

c. Repeat parts (a) and (b) for several other quadrilaterals. Then write a conjecture based on your results.
Answer:
From parts (a) and (b),
The conjecture about the quadrilaterals is given as:
If the opposite angles of a quadrilateral are equal, then the opposite sides of a quadrilateral are equal

d. Write the converse of your conjecture. Is the converse true? Explain.
Answer:
From part (c),
The conjecture about quadrilaterals is given as:
If the opposite angles of a quadrilateral are equal, then the opposite sides of a quadrilateral are equal
Hence,
The converse of the conjecture of the quadrilaterals is given as:
If the opposite sides of a quadrilateral are equal, then the opposite angles of a quadrilateral are equal

Communicate Your Answer

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 65

Question 3.
How can you prove that a quadrilateral is a parallelogram?
Answer:
The number of ways to prove that a quadrilateral is a parallelogram are:
a. The opposite sides are congruent
b. The opposite angles are congruent
c. The opposite sides are parallel
d. The consecutive angles are supplementary
e. An angle is supplementary to both its consecutive angles

Question 4.
Is the quadrilateral at the left a parallelogram? Explain your reasoning
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can observe that the opposite angles are equal
So,
From the conjecture of the quadrilateral,
If the opposite angles of the quadrilateral are equal, then the opposite sides of the quadrilateral are equal
We know that,
if the opposite angles are equal and the angles are not 90°, then the quadrilateral is called the “parallelogram”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the quadrilateral ate the left is the “Parallelogram”

Lesson 7.3 Proving that a Quadrilateral is a Parallelogram

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
In quadrilateral WXYZ, m∠W = 42°, m∠X = 138°, and m∠Y = 42°. Find m∠Z. Is WXYZ a parallelogram’? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
It is given that
In quadrilateral WXYZ,
∠W = 42°, ∠X = 138°, and ∠Y = 42°
Let
∠Z = x°
We know that,
The sum of the angles of a quadrilateral is 360°
So,
∠W + ∠X + ∠Y + ∠Z = 360°
42° + 138° + 42° + x° = 360°
84° + 138° + x° = 360°
x° = 360° – 222°
x° = 138°
So,
∠Z = 138°
Now,
We know that,
If the opposite angles of a quadrilateral are equal and the angle is not equal to 90°, then that quadrilateral is called the “Parallelogram”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that WXYZ is a parallelogram

Question 2.
For what values of x and y is quadrilateral ABCD a parallelogram? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 66
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 66
We know that,
For a quadrilateral to be a parallelogram,
The opposite angles are equal
So,
From the given figure,
4y° = (y + 87)°                                    2x° = (3x – 32)°
4y° – y° = 87°                                      3x° – 2x° = 32°
3y° = 87°                                              x° = 32°
y° = 87 / 3                                            x° = 32°
y° = 29°                                                x° = 32°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that for
x° = 32° and y° = 29°
The quadrilateral ABCD is a parallelogram

State the theorem you can use to show that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 67
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 67
From the given figure,
We can observe that the opposite sides are equal and are parallel
Hence,
According to the “Opposite sides parallel and congruent Theorem”,
The given quadrilateral is a parallelogram

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 68
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 68
From the given figure,
We can observe that the opposite sides are congruent and are parallel
Hence,
According to the “Opposite sides parallel and congruent Theorem”,
The given quadrilateral is a parallelogram

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 69
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 69
From the given figure,
We can observe that the opposite angles are equal and are parallel
Hence,
According to the “Opposite angles parallel and congruent Theorem”,
The given quadrilateral is a parallelogram

Question 6.
For what value of x is quadrilateral MNPQ a parallelogram? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 70
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 70
From the “Parallelogram Diagonals Converse Theorem”,
MP and NQ bisect each other
So,
MP = NQ
From the given figure,
It is given that
MP = 10 – 3x
NQ = 2x
So,
2x = 10 – 3x
2x + 3x = 10
5x = 10
x = \(\frac{10}{5}\)
x = 2
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that for x = 2, the quadrilateral MNPQ is a parallelogram

Question 7.
Show that quadrilateral JKLM is a parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 71
Answer:
From the given coordinate plane,
The coordinates of the quadrilateral JKLM are:
J (-5, 3), K (-3, -1), L (2, -3), and M (2, -3)
Now,
For the quadrilateral JKLM to be a parallelogram,
The opposite sides of the quadrilateral JKLM must be equal
So,
JL = KM
We know that,
The distance between the 2 points = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
JL = \(\sqrt{(5 + 2)² + (3 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(7)² + (6)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{49 + 36}\)
= \(\sqrt{85}\)
= 9.21
KM = \(\sqrt{(5 + 2)² + (3 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(7)² + (6)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{49 + 36}\)
= \(\sqrt{85}\)
= 9.21
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The quadrilateral JKLM is a parallelogram according to the “Opposite sides parallel and congruent Theorem”

Question 8.
Refer to the Concept Summary. Explain two other methods you can use to show that quadrilateral ABCD in Example 5 is a parallelogram.
Concept Summary
Ways to Prove a Quadrilateral is a Parallelogram
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 72
Answer:
The other ways to prove a quadrilateral parallelogram are:
a. Prove that the sum of the consecutive angles is supplementary
b. Prove that an angle is supplementary to both the consecutive angles

Exercise 7.3 Proving that a Quadrilateral is a Parallelogram

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
WRITING
A quadrilateral has four congruent sides. Is the quadrilateral a parallelogram? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 1

Question 2.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.

Construct a quadrilateral with opposite sides congruent.Construct a quadrilateral with one pair of parallel sides.
Construct a quadrilateral with opposite angles congruent,Construct a quadrilateral with one pair of opposite sides congruent and parallel.

Answer:
The given statements are:
a. Construct a quadrilateral with opposite sides congruent
b. Construct a quadrilateral with opposite angles congruent
c. Construct a quadrilateral with one pair of parallel sides
d. Construct a quadrilateral with one pair of opposite sides congruent and parallel
Now,
We know that,
For constructing a parallelogram,
We need
a. 2 pairs of opposite sides congruent and parallel
b. 2 pairs of opposite angles congruent and parallel
Now,
From the given sattements,
Statements a., b., and d are needed for onstructing a parallelogram whereas statement c. is unnecessary

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3-8, state which theorem you can use to show that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 73
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 74
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 74
From the given figure,
We can observe that the opposite sides are congruent and parallel
Hence,
By using the “Parallelogram Opposite sides Congruent and Parallel Theorem”,
We can say that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 75
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 76
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 76
From the given figure,
We can observe that the opposite sides are congruent and parallel
Hence,
By using the “Parallelogram Opposite sides Congruent and Parallel Theorem”,
We can say that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 77
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 78
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 78
From the given figure,
We can observe that the diagonals of the quadrilateral bisected each other
Hence,
By using the “Parallelogram Diagonals Converse Theorem”,
We can say that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram

In Exercises 9-12, find the values of x and y that make the quadrilateral a parallelogram.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 79
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 80
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 80
It is given that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram
So,
We know that,
According to the “Parallelogram Opposite sides congruent and parallel Theorem”,
The lengths of the opposite sides of the given quadrilateral are equal
So,
x = 16 and y = 9
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that for the given quadrilateral to be a parallelogram,
The alues of x and y are:
x = 16 and y = 9

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 81
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 82
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 82
It is given that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram
Now,
We know that,
According to the “Opposite angles Theorem”,
The opposite angles of the parallelogram are equal
So,
(4x + 13)° = (5x – 12)°
4x° – 5x° = -12° – 13°
x° = -25°
x° = 25°
(3x – 8)° = (4y + 7)°
3x – 8 – 7 = 4y°
4y° = 3 (25°)  15
4y° = 75 – 15
4y° = 60°
y° = \(\frac{60}{4}\)
y° = 15°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that for a given quadrilateral to be a parallelogram,
The values of x and y are:
x = 25° and y = 15°

In Exercises 13-16, find the value of x that makes the quadrilateral a parallelogram.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 83
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 13

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 84
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 84
It is given that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram
Now,
We know that,
According to the “Parallelogram Opposite angles parallel and congruent Theorem”,
The lengths of the opposite sides of the parallelogram are equal
So,
2x + 3 = x + 7
2x – x = 7 – 3
x = 4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that for a given quadrilateral to be a parallelogram,
The value of x is:
x = 4

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 85
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 15

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 86
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 86
It is given that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram
Now,
We know that,
According to the “Parallelogram Diagonals Converse Theorem”,
The diagonals bisect each other
So,
6x = 3x + 2
6x – 3x = 2
3x = 2
x = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that for a given quadrilateral to be a parallelogram,
The value of x is:
x = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

In Exercises 17-20, graph the quadrilateral with the given vertices in a coordinate plane. Then show that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram.

Question 17.
A(0, 1), B(4, 4), C(12, 4), D(8, 1)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 17

Question 18.
E(- 3, 0), F(- 3, 4), G(3, – 1), H(3, – 5)
Answer:
The given vertices of the quadrilateral are:
E (-3, 0), F (-3, 4), G (3, -1), and H (3, -5)
So,
The representation of the vertices of a quadrilateral in the coordinate plane is:

Now,
We know that,
For a quadrilateral to be a parallelogram,
The length of the opposite sides of a parallelogram are congruent and parallel
We know that,
The distance between 2 points = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
EF = \(\sqrt{(4 + 0)² + (3 – 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)² + (0)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{16 + 0}\)
= 4

GH = \(\sqrt{(5 – 1)² + (3 – 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)² + (0)²}\)
= 4
Hence,
According to the “Parallelogram opposite sides parallel and congruent Theorem”,
We can conclude that the quadrilateral with the given vertices is a parallelogram

Question 19.
J(- 2, 3), K(- 5, 7), L(3, 6), M(6, 2)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 19

Question 20.
N(- 5, 0), P(0, 4), Q(3, 0), R(- 2, – 4)
Answer:
The given vertices of the quadrilateral are:
N (-5, 0), P (0, 4), Q (3, 0), R (-2, -4)
So,
The representation of the vertices of the quadrilateral in the coordinate plane is:

Now,
We know that,
The distance between 2 points = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
NP = \(\sqrt{(4 – 0)² + (0 + 5)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)² + (5)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{16 + 25}\)
= 6.40

QR = \(\sqrt{(4 + 0)² + (3 + 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)² + (5)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{16 + 25}\)
= 6.40
Hence,
According to the “Parallelograms Opposite sides parallel and congruent Theorem”,
We can conclude that the quadrilateral with the given vertices is a parallelogram

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 21 and 22, describe and correct the error in identifying a parallelogram.

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 87
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 21

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 88
Answer:
In the given quadrilateral JKLM,
The lengths of the 2 sides are given and the given 2 lengths are congruent and are parallel to each other
Hence,
The quadrilateral JKLM is said to be a parallelogram by the “Parallelogram Opposite sides parallel and congruent Theorem”

Question 23.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
What value of x makes the quadrilateral a parallelogram? Explain how you found your answer.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 89
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 23

Question 24.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend says you can show that quadrilateral WXYZ is a parallelogram by using the Consecutive Interior Angles Converse (Theorem 3.8) and the Opposite Sides Parallel and Congruent Theorem (Theorem 7.9). Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 90
Answer:
Yes, your friend is correct

Explanation:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 90
From the given figure,
We can observe that the given angles are the consecutive angles and the sum of the angles are supplementary
We know that,
For the quadrilateral WXYZ to be a parallelogram, any one of the be low condition has to be satisfied:
a. The opposite sides are congruent
b. The sum of the consecutive interior angles are supplementary
So,
From the given figure,
We can observe that the sum of the consecutive interior angles is supplementary
Now,
Your friend says you can show that quadrilateral WXYZ is a parallelogram by using the Consecutive Interior Angles Converse and the Opposite Sides Parallel and Congruent Theorem.
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that your friend is correct

ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
In Exercises 25-27, write the indicated theorems as a biconditional statement.

Question 25.
Parallelogram Opposite Sides Theorem (Theorem 7.3) and Parallelogram Opposite Sides Converse (Theorem 7.7)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 25

Question 26.
Parallelogram Opposite Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.4) and Parallelogram Opposite Angles Converse (Theorem 7.8)
Answer:
The given Theorems are:
Parallelograms Opposite angles Theorem and Parallelogram Opposite Angles Converse
Hence,
The representation of Theorems as a biconditional statement is:
A quadrilateral is a parallelogram if and only if both pairs of opposite angles are congruent

Question 27.
Parallclorarn Diagonals Theorem (Theorem 7.6) and
Parallelogram Diagonals Converse (Theorem 7.10)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 27

Question 28.
CONSTRUCTION
Describe a method that uses the Opposite Sides Parallel and Congruent Theorem (Theorem 7.9) to construct a parallelogram. Then construct a parallelogram using your method.
Answer:
The steps to construct a parallelogram using the Opposite Sides parallel and Congruent Theorem are:
a.
Draw a segment of length x cm (Say) and name the segment as AB
b.
Take one endpoint as B and draw another segment of length y cm (Say) and name the segment as BC
c.
By using the Opposite sides parallel and congruent Theorem,
The lengths of AB and CD must be equal
So,
AB = CD = x cm
d.
By using the Opposite sides parallel and congruent Theorem,
The lengths of BC and DA must be equal
So,
BC = DA = y cm
Hence,
The representation of the parallelogram by using the above steps is:

Question 29.
REASONING
Follow the steps below to construct a parallelogram. Explain why this method works. State a theorem to support your answer.
Step 1: Use a ruler to draw two segments that intersect at their midpoints.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 91

Step 2: Connect the endpoints of the segments to form a parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 92
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 29

Question 30.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your brother says to show that quadrilateral QRST is a parallelogram. you must show that \(\overline{Q R}\) || \(\overline{T S}\) and \(\overline{Q T}\) || \(\overline{R S}\). Your sister says that you must show that \(\overline{Q R} \cong \overline{T S}\) and \(\overline{Q T} \cong \overline{R S}\). Who is correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 93
Answer:
It is given that the quadrilateral QRST is a parallelogram
So,
According to the Opposite Sides Parallel and Congruent Theorem,
In the quadrilateral QRST,
QR ≅TS and QT ≅ RS
QR || TS and QT || RS
Now,
According to your brother,
You have to show that
QR || TS and QT || RS
According t your sisiter,
You have to show that
QR ≅TS and QT ≅ RS
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that to make the quadrilateral QRSt a parallelogram,
Your brother and sister both are correct

REASONING
In Exercises 31 and 32, our classmate incorrectly claims that the marked information can be used to show that the figure is a parallelogram. Draw a quadrilateral with the same marked properties that are clearly not a parallelogram.

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 94
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 31

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 95
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 95
It is given that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram
Hence,
The representation of the given quadrilateral that is not a parallelogram is:

Question 33.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You shoot a pool ball, and it rolls back to where it started, as shown in the diagram. The ball bounces off each wall at the same angle at which it hits the wall.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 96
a. The ball hits the first wall at an angle of 63°. So m∠AEF = m∠BEH = 63°. What is m∠AFE? Explain your reasoning.
b. Explain why m∠FGD = 63°.
c. What is m∠GHC? m∠EHB?
d. Is quadrilateral EFGH a parallelogram? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 33

Question 34.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
In the diagram of the parking lot shown, m∠JKL = 60°, JK = LM = 21 feet, and KL = JM = 9 feet.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 97
a. Explain how to show that parking space JKLM is a parallelogram.
Answer:
It is given that
JK = LM = 21 feet
KL = JM = 9 feet
From the parking lot JKLM,
We can observe that the shape of the parking lot is a quadrilateral
We can also observe that
JK and LM are the opposite sides
JM and KL are the opposite sides
It is given that
JK = LM and JM = KL
We know that,
If the opposite sides are congruent and parallel, then according to the Opposite sides congruent and parallel Theorem,
We can say that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the parking space JKLM is a parallelogram

b. Find m∠JML, m∠KJM, and m∠KLM.
Answer:
It is given that
∠JKL = 60°
We know that,
The parking space JKLM is a parallelogram
So,
∠K = ∠M and ∠J = ∠L
So,
∠K = ∠M = 60°
We know that,
In a parallelogram,
The sum of the consecutive interior angles is 180°
So,
∠K + ∠L = 180°
∠L = 180° – ∠K
∠L = 180° – 60°
∠L = 120°
So,
∠J = ∠L = 120°
Hence, from the above,
We can coclude that
∠K = ∠M = 60°
∠J = ∠L = 120°

c. \(\overline{L M}\)||\(\overline{N O}\) and \(\overline{N O}\) || \(\overline{P Q}\) which theorem could you use to show that \(\overline{J K}\) || \(\overline{P Q}\)?
Answer:
It is given that
LM || NO and NO || PQ
So,
From the given data,
We can say that JKPQ is a parallelogram
Hence,
We can conclude that
According to the Opposite sides parallel and Congruent Theorem,
JK || PQ

REASONING
In Exercises 35-37. describe how to prove that ABCD is a parallelogram.

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 98
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 35

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 99
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 99
From the given figure,
We can observe that the opposite angles are congruent
So,
∠B = ∠D
Hence,
We can conclude that
According to the Opposite Angles Converse Theorem,
The given quadrilateral ABCD is a parallelogram

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 100
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 37

Question 38.
REASONING
Quadrilateral JKLM is a parallelogram. Describe how to prove that ∆MGJ ≅ ∆KHL.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 101
Answer:

Question 39.
PROVING A THEOREM
Prove the Parallelogram Opposite Angles Converse (Theorem 7.8). (Hint: Let x° represent m∠A and m∠C. Let y° represent m∠B and m∠D. Write and simplify an equation involving x and y)
Gien ∠A ≅ ∠C, ∠B ≅∠D
Prove ABCD is a parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 102
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 39.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 39.2

Question 40.
PROVING A THEOREM
Use the diagram of PQRS with the auxiliary line segment drawn to prove the Opposite Sides Parallel and Congruent Theorem (Theorem 7.9).
Given \(\overline{Q R}\) || \(\overline{P S}\). \(\overline{Q R} \cong \overline{P S}\)
Prove PQRS is a parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 103
Answer:

Question 41.
PROVING A THEOREM
Prove the Parallelogram Diagonals Converse (Theorem 7.10).
Given Diagonals \(\overline{J L}\) and \(\overline{K M}\) bisect each other.
Prove JKLM is a parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 104
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 41

Question 42.
PROOF
Write the proof.
Given DEBF is a parallelogram.
AE = CF
Prove ABCD is a parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 105
Answer:

Question 43.
REASONING
Three interior angle measures of a quadrilateral are 67°, 67°, and 113°, Is this enough information to conclude that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 43

Question 44.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
A music stand can be folded up, as shown. In the diagrams. AEFD and EBCF are parallelograms. Which labeled segments remain parallel as the stand is folded?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 106
Answer:
The given music stand when folded and not folded is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 106
It is given that AEFD and EBCF are the parallelograms
Hence,
The segments that remain parallel as the music stand folded are:
In the parallelogram AEFD,
AE || FD and AD || EF
In the parallelogram EBCF,
EB || CF and EF || BC

Question 45.
CRITICAL THINKING
In the diagram, ABCD is a parallelogram, BF = DE = 12, and CF = 8. Find AE. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 107
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 45

Question 46.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING
Create a regular hexagon using congruent parallelograms.
Answer:
The representation of a regular hexagon using congruent parallelograms are:

Hence, from the above regular hexagon,
ABCF and CDEF are the consecutive parallelograms

Question 47.
WRITING
The Parallelogram Consecutive Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.5) says that if a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its consecutive angles are supplementary. Write the converse of this theorem. Then write a plan for proving the converse. Include a diagram.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 47

Question 48.
PROOF
Write the proof.
Given ABCD is a parallelogram.
∠A is a right angle.
Prove ∠B, ∠C, and ∠D are right angles.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 108
Answer:

Question 49.
ABSTRACT REASONING
The midpoints of the sides of a quadrilateral have been joined to turn what looks like a parallelogram. Show that a quadrilateral formed by connecting the midpoints of the sides of any quadrilateral is always a parallelogram. (Hint: Draw a diagram. Include a diagonal of the larger quadrilateral. Show how two sides of the smaller quadrilateral relate to the diagonal.)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 109
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 49

Question 50.
CRITICAL THINKING
Show that if ABCD is a parallelogram with its diagonals intersecting at E, then you can connect the midpoints F, G, H, and J of \(\overline{A E}\), \(\overline{B E}\), \(\overline{C E}\), and \(\overline{D E}\), respcetively, to form another parallelogram, FGHJ.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 110
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical proficiency

Classify the quadrilateral.

Question 51.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 111
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 51

Question 52.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 112
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 112
From the given quadrilateral,
We can observe that the opposite sides are congruent and parallel and the angles are 90°
We know that,
A quadrilateral that has congruent and parallel opposite sides and an angle 90° is called a “Rectangle”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given quadrilateral is a rectangle

Question 53.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 113
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.3 a 53

Question 54.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 114
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 114
From the given quadrilateral,
We can observe that all the sides are congruent but the angle measures are not 90°
We know that,
A quadrilateral that has 4 congruent sides but not an angle equal to 90° is called a “Rhombus”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given quadrilateral is a rhombus

7.1 – 7.3 Quiz

Find the value of x.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 115
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 115
We know that,
The sum of the angle measures of a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
Where,
n is the number of sides
So,
The sum of the angle measures of a polygon = 180° (4 – 2)
= 180° (2)
= 360°
So,
115° + 95° + 70° + x° = 360°
280° + x° = 360°
x° = 360° – 280°
x° = 80°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 80°

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 116
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 116
We know that,
The sum of the angle measures of a polygon = 180° (n – 2)
Where,
n is the number of sides
So,
The sum of the angle measures of a polygon = 180° (5 – 2)
= 180° (3)
= 540°
So,
150° + 120° + 60° + x° + 75° = 540°
405° + x° = 540°
x° = 540° – 405°
x° = 135°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 135°

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 117
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 117
We know that,
The sum of the exterior angles of any polygon is: 360°
So,
60° + 30° + 72° + 46° + 55° + x° = 360°
263° + x° = 360°
x° = 360° – 263°
x° = 97°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 97°

Find the measure of each interior angle and each exterior angle of the indicated regular polygon.

Question 4.
decagon
Answer:
The given polygon is: Decagon
We know that,
The number of sides of Decagon is: 10
Now,
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
Where,
n is the number of sides
So,
The measure of each interior angle of Decagon = \(\frac{180° (10 – 2)}{10}\)
= \(\frac{180° (8)}{10}\)
= 144°
The measure of each exterior angle of a Decagon = \(\frac{360°}{10}\)
= 36°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The measure of each interior angle of Decagon is: 144°
The measure of each exterior angle of Decagon is:36°

Question 5.
15-gon
Answer:
The given polygon is: 15-gon
We know that,
The number of sides of 15-gon is: 15
Now,
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
Where,
n is the number of sides
So,
The measure of each interior angle of 15-gon = \(\frac{180° (15 – 2)}{15}\)
= \(\frac{180° (13)}{15}\)
= 156°
The measure of each exterior angle of a 15-gon = \(\frac{360°}{15}\)
= 24°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The measure of each interior angle of 15-gon is: 156°
The measure of each exterior angle of 15-gon is: 24°

Question 6.
24-gon
Answer:
The given polygon is: 24-gon
We know that,
The number of sides of 24-gon is: 24
Now,
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
Where,
n is the number of sides
So,
The measure of each interior angle of 24-gon = \(\frac{180° (24 – 2)}{24}\)
= \(\frac{180° (22)}{24}\)
= 165°
The measure of each exterior angle of a 24-gon = \(\frac{360°}{24}\)
= 15°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The measure of each interior angle of 24-gon is: 165°
The measure of each exterior angle of 24-gon is: 15°

Question 7.
60-gon
Answer:
The given polygon is: 60-gon
We know that,
The number of sides of 60-gon is: 60
Now,
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
The measure of each exterior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
Where,
n is the number of sides
So,
The measure of each interior angle of 60-gon = \(\frac{180° (60 – 2)}{60}\)
= \(\frac{180° (58)}{60}\)
= 174°
The measure of each exterior angle of a 60-gon = \(\frac{360°}{60}\)
= 6°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The measure of each interior angle of 60-gon is: 174°
The measure of each exterior angle of 60-gon is: 6°

Find the indicated measure in Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51ABCD. Explain your reasoning.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 118

Question 8.
CD
Answer:
The given parallelogram is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 118
We know that,
The lengths of the opposite sides of the parallelogram are equal
So,
In parallelogram ABCD,
AB = CD
In the given figure,
It is given that
AB = 16
So,
CD = 16
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of the CD is: 16

Question 9.
AD
Answer:
The given parallelogram is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 118
We know that,
The lengths of the opposite sides of the parallelogram are equal
So,
In parallelogram ABCD,
AD = BC
In the given figure,
It is given that
BC = 7
So,
AD = 7
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of the AD is: 7

Question 10.
AE
Answer:
The given parallelogram is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 118
We know that,
The diagonals of the parallelogram bisect each other
So,
In parallelogram ABCD,
AE = EC
In the given figure,
It is given that
EC = 7
So,
AE = 7
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of the AE is: 7

Question 11.
BD
Answer:
The given parallelogram is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 118
We know that,
The diagonals of the parallelogram bisect each other
So,
In parallelogram ABCD,
AC ⊥ BD
In the given figure,
It is given that
ED = 10.2
We know that,
BD = BE + ED
BE = ED
So,
BD = 20.4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of the BD is: 20.4

Question 12.
m∠BCD
Answer:
The given parallelogram is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 118
We know that,
The opposite angles of the parallelogram are equal
So,
In parallelogram ABCD,
∠A = ∠C
In the given figure,
∠A = 120°
So,
∠C = 120°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of ∠BCD is: 120°

Question 13.
m∠ABC
Answer:
The given parallelogram is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 118
We know that,
The sum of the consecutive angles of the parallelogram are supplementary
So,
In parallelogram ABCD,
∠A + ∠B = 180°
In the given figure,
∠A = 120°
So,
∠B = 180° – 120°
= 60°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of ∠ABC is: 60°

Question 14.
m∠ADC
Answer:
The given parallelogram is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 118
We know that,
The opposite angles of the parallelogram are equal
So,
In parallelogram ABCD,
∠B = ∠D
From Exercise 13,
∠B = 60°
So,
∠D = 60°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of ∠ADC is: 60°

Question 15.
m∠DBC
Answer:
The given parallelogram is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 118
We know that,
The opposite angles of the parallelogram are equal
So,
In parallelogram ABCD,
∠B = ∠D
In the given figure,
∠D = 60°
So,
∠B = 60°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of ∠DBC is: 60°

State which theorem you can use to show that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 119
Answer:
The given quadrilateral is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 119
From the given quadrilateral,
We can observe that the length of the opposite sides are equal and parallel
Hence,
According to the Parallelograms Opposite sides congruent and parallel Theorem,
We can conclude that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 120
Answer:
The given quadrilateral is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 120
From the given quadrilateral,
We can observe that the diagonals bisect each other
Hence,
According to the Diagonals Congruent Converse Theorem,
We can conclude that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 121
Answer:
The given quadrilateral is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 121
From the given quadrilateral,
We can observe that,
The opposite angles of the given quadrilateral are congruent and the angle measures are not 90°
Hence,
According to the Parallelograms Opposite Angles Theorem,
We can conclude that the given quadrilateral is a parallelogram

Graph the quadrilateral with the given vertices in a coordinate plane. Then show that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram.

Question 19.
Q(- 5, – 2) R(3, – 2), S(1, – 6), T(- 7, – 6)
Answer:
The given vertices of a quadrilateral are:
Q (-5, -2), R (3, -2), S (1, -6), and T (-7, -6)
From the given vertices of a quadrilateral,
QS and RT are the opposite vertices
Now,
The representation of the quadrilateral in the coordinate plane is:

We know that,
For the given quadrilateral to be a parallelogram,
The lengths of the opposite sides must be equal
The opposite sides must be parallel
Now,
We know that,
The slope between 2 points = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
The distance between 2 points = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
QS = \(\sqrt{(6 – 2)² + (1 + 5)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)² + (6)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{16 + 36}\)
= 7.2
RT = \(\sqrt{(6 – 2)² + (3 + 7)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)² + (10)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{16 + 100}\)
= 10.77
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given vertices of a quadrilateral are not parallelogram since the lengths of the opposite sides are not equal

Question 20.
W(- 3, 7), X(3, 3), Y(1, – 3), Z(- 5, 1)
Answer:
The given vertices of a quadrilateral are:
W (-3, 7), X (3, 3), Y (1, -3), Z (-5, 1)
From the given vertices of a quadrilateral,
WY and XZ are the opposite vertices
Now,
The representation of the quadrilateral in the coordinate plane is:

We know that,
For the given quadrilateral to be a parallelogram,
The lengths of the opposite sides must be equal
The opposite sides must be parallel
Now,
We know that,
The slope between 2 points = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
The distance between 2 points = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
WY = \(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² + (7 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)² + (10)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{16 + 100}\)
= 10.77
XZ = \(\sqrt{(3 – 1)² + (3 + 5)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2)² + (8)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{4 + 64}\)
= 8.24
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given vertices of a quadrilateral are not parallelogram since the lengths of the opposite
sides are not equal

Question 21.
A stop sign is a regular polygon. (Section 7.1)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 122
a. Classify the stop sign by its number of sides.
Answer:
The given stop sign is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 122
It is given that the sign is a regular polygon
From the given stop sign,
We can observe that the number of sides is: 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the stop sign is in the shape of a “Hexagon”

b. Find the measure of each interior angle and each exterior angle of the stop sign.
Answer:
We know that,
The measure of each interior angle of a polygon = \(\frac{180° (n – 2)}{n}\)
The measure of each exterior angle of any polygon = \(\frac{360°}{n}\)
Now,
From part (a),
The stop sign is in the shape of a regular hexagon
We know that,
The number of sides of a regular hexagon is: 6
So,
The measure of each interior angle of a hexagon = \(\frac{180° (6 – 2)}{6}\)
= 120°
The measure of each exterior angle of a hexagon = \(\frac{360°}{6}\)
= 60°

Question 22.
In the diagram of the staircase shown, JKLM is a parallelogram, \(\overline{Q T}\) || \(\overline{R S}\), QT = RS = 9 feet, QR = 3 feet, and m∠QRS = 123°.
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 123

a. List all congruent sides and angles in Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51JKLM. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
We know that,
In a parallelogram,
The opposite sides and the angles are congruent
Hence,
In the parallelogram JKLM,
The congruent sides are:
JK || LM and JM || KL
The congruent angles are:
∠J = ∠L and ∠K = ∠M

b. Which theorem could you use to show that QRST is a parallelogram?
Answer:
It is given that
QT = RS = 9 feet
QR = 3 feet
Hence,
According to the “Parallelograms Opposite sides congruent and parallel Theorem”,
We can conclude that QRST is a parallelogram

c. Find ST, m∠QTS, m∠TQR, and m∠TSR. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
It is given that
QT = RS = 9 feet
QR = 3 feet
m∠QRS = 123°
From part (b),
We know that,
QRST is a parallelogram
So,
From the parallelogram QRST,
QR = ST
So,
ST = 3 feet
Now,
From the parallelogram QRST,
By using the opposite angles Theorem,
∠T = ∠R and ∠Q = ∠S
It is given that
∠R = 123°
So,
∠T = 123°
From the parallelogram QRST,
∠Q + ∠R = 180°
So,
∠Q = 180° – 123°
∠Q = 57°
So,
∠S = 57°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
ST = 3 feet
m∠QTS = 123°
m∠TQR = 57°
m∠TSR = 57°

7.4 Properties of Special Parallelograms

Exploration 1

Identifying Special Quadrilaterals

Work with a partner: Use dynamic geometry software.

Sample
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 124

a. Draw a circle with center A.
Answer:
The representation of a circle with center A is:

b. Draw two diameters of the circle. Label the endpoints B, C, D, and E.
Answer:
The representation of the two diameters of the circle is:

c. Draw quadrilateral BDCE.
Answer:
The representation of quadrilateral BDCE is:

d. Is BDCE a parallelogram? rectangle? rhombus? square? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
The representation of quadrilateral BDCE is:

From the above quadrilateral,
We can observe that the opposite sides and the opposite angles are equal
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the quadrilateral BDCE is a rhombus

e. Repeat parts (a)-(d) for several other circles. Write a conjecture based on your results.
Answer:
From parts (a) – (d) of the circles,
We can observe that the quadrilaterals formed will be either a rhombus,a parallelogram, or a  square

Exploration 2

Identifying Special Quadrilaterals

Work with a partner: Use dynamic geometry software.

Sample
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 125

a. Construct two segments that are perpendicular bisectors of each other. Label the endpoints A, B, D, and E. Label the intersection C.
Answer:
The representation of a line segment and its perpendicular bisector is:

b. Draw quadrilateral AEBD.
Answer:

c. Is AEBD a parallelogram? rectangle? rhombus? square? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
The representation of the quadrilateral AEBD is:

Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the quadrilateral AEBD is a rhombus because all the sides are equal and the angles bisect each other at 90°

d. Repeat parts (a)-(c) for several other segments. Write a conjecture based on your results.
CONSTRUCTING VIABLE ARGUMENTS
To be proficient in math, you need to make conjectures and build a logical progression of statements to explore the truth of your conjectures.
Answer:
From parts (a) – (c),
We can conclude that the quadrilaterals formed from the perpendicular bisectors will be only a “Rhombus”

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
What are the properties of the diagonals of rectangles, rhombuses, and squares?
Answer:
The properties of diagonals of rectangles, rhombuses, and squares are:
Rhombuses:
The two diagonals of the rhombus are perpendicular
Rectangles:
The diagonals are congruent and bisect each other
Squares:
The diagonals bisect each other and the angle is 90°

Question 4.
Is RSTU a parallelogram? rectangle? rhombus? square? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 126
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 126
From the given figure,
We can observe that the diagonals bisect each other at 90 degrees and the diagonals are congruent to each other
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given quadrilateral is a rhombus

Question 5.
What type of quadrilateral has congruent diagonals that bisect each other?
Answer:
We know that,
The quadrilateral that has congruent diagonals that bisect each other is called a “Rectangle”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the quadrilateral that has congruent diagonals that bisect each other is called a “Rectangle”

Lesson 7.4 Properties of Special Parallelograms

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
For any square JKLM, is it always or sometimes true that \(\overline{J K}\) ⊥ \(\overline{K L}\)? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a square bisect each other at 90°
All 4 angles of a square are equal i.e., 90°
So,
The angles between any 2 adjacent sides in a square is also 90° i.e., the two adjacent sides are perpendicular
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that for any square JKLM, it is always true that
\(\overline{j K}\) ⊥ \(\overline{K L}\)

Question 2.
For any rectangle EFGH, is it always or sometimes true that \(\overline{F G} \cong \overline{G H}\)? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
We know that,
The opposite sides of a rectangle are congruent
So,
In rectangle EFGH,
EF and GH are the parallel sides
FG and EH are the parallel sides
So,
EF ≅GH
FG ≅ EH
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that for a rectangle EFGH, it is always false that \(\overline{F G} \cong \overline{G H}\)

Question 3.
A quadrilateral has four congruent sides and four congruent angles. Sketch the quadrilateral and classily it.
Answer:
We know that,
A quadrilateral that has 4 congruent sides and 4 congruent angles is called a “Square”
Hence,
The representation of a square is:

Question 4.
In Example 3, what are m∠ADC and m∠BCD?
Answer:

From the given figure,
We know that,
The sum of the angle measures of a triangle is: 180°
So,
From ΔBCD,
∠B + ∠C + ∠D = 180°
Now,
By using the Vertical Angles Theorem,
∠D = ∠4
By using the Corresponding Angles Theorem,
∠4 = ∠C
So,
∠4 = ∠D = 61°
∠C = 61°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠ADC = ∠BCD = 61°

Question 5.
Find the measures of the numbered angles in rhombus DEFG.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 127
Answer:

Question 6.
Suppose you measure only the diagonals of the window opening in Example 4 and they have the same measure. Can you conclude that the opening is a rectangle? Explain.
Answer:
The representation of the window opening as mentioned in Example 4 is:

From the given figure,
We observe that the opposite sides of the opening window are equal
It is given that the diagonals of the opening window have the same measure
We know that,
By the Rectangle Diagonals measure Theorem,
A parallelogram is said to be a rectangle only when the length of the diagonals are congruent
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the opening window is a rectangle

Question 7.
WHAT IF?
In Example 5. QS = 4x – 15 and RT = 3x + 8. Find the lengths of the diagonals of QRST.
Answer:
The given lengths of the diagonals of the rectangle QRST are:
QS = 4x – 15 and RT = 3x + 8
We know that,
By Rectangle Diagonal Measure Theorem,
The diagonals of a rectangle are congruent
So,
In a rectangle QRST,
QS = RT
So,
4x – 15 = 3x + 8
4x – 3x = 15 + 8
x = 23
Now,
QS = 4x – 15
= 4 (23) – 15
= 92 – 15
= 77
RT = 3x + 8
= 3 (23) + 8
= 69 + 8
= 77
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the lengths of the diagonals of the rectangle QRST are:
QS = RT = 77

Question 8.
Decide whether Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51PQRS with vertices P(- 5, 2), Q(0, 4), R(2, – 1), and S(- 3, – 3) is a rectangle, a rhombus, or a square. Give all names that apply.
Answer:
The given vertices of the parallelogram PQRS is:
P (-5, 2), Q (0, 4), R (2, -1), and S (-3, -3)
Compare the given points with (x1, y1), and (x2, y2)
Hence,
The representation of the given vertices of the parallelogram PQRS in the coordinate plane is:

Now,
We know that,
The distance between the 2 points = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
PR = \(\sqrt{(2 + 5)² + (2 + 1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(7)² + (3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{49 + 9}\)
= 7.61
QS = \(\sqrt{(0 + 3)² + (4 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(7)² + (3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{49 + 9}\)
= 7.61
So,
The diagonals of the parallelogram PQRS are congruent
So,
The parallelogram PQRS must be either a rectangle or a square
So,
Now,
PQ = \(\sqrt{(0 + 5)² + (4 – 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5)² + (2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{25 + 4}\)
= 5.38
QR = \(\sqrt{(4 + 1)² + (2 – 0)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5)² + (2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{25 + 4}\)
= 5.38
RS = \(\sqrt{(2 + 3)² + (3 – 1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5)² + (2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{25 + 4}\)
= 5.38
SP = \(\sqrt{(3 + 2)² + (5 – 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5)² + (2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{25 + 4}\)
= 5.38
So,
We can observe that the lengths of all the sides are congruent
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the parallelogram ABCD is a square since the diagonals are congruent and all the sides are congruent

Exercise 7.4 Properties of Special Parallelograms

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
What is another name for an equilateral rectangle?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 1

Question 2.
WRITING
What should you look for in a parallelogram to know if the parallelogram is also a rhombus?
Answer:
When you want to look at whether the given parallelogram is a rhombus or not, there are 2 conditions. They are:
a. Check whether the diagonals are not congruent
b. Check whether the angle measures will not be equal to 90°

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3-8, for any rhombus JKLM, decide whether the statement is always or sometimes true. Draw a diagram and explain your reasoning.

Question 3.
∠L ≅∠M
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 3

Question 4.
∠K ≅∠M
Answer:
We know that,
The opposite angles of a rhombus are always congruent

Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that ∠K is always congruent with ∠M

Question 5.
\(\overline{J M} \cong \overline{K L}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 5

Question 6.
\(\overline{J K} \cong \overline{K L}\)
Answer:
We know that,
In a rhombus, the opposite sides are congruent

From the figure,
We can say that JK and KL are the adjacent sides
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
\(\overline{J K} \cong \overline{K L}\) is sometimes true when the rhombus is a square

Question 7.
\(\overline{J L} \cong \overline{K M}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 7

Question 8.
∠JKM ≅ ∠LKM
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a rhombus bisect each other at the right angles i.e., 90°

Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠JKM ≅ ∠LKM is always true

In Exercises 9-12. classify the quadrilateral. Explain your reasoning.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 128
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 129
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 129
From the given figure,
We can observe that the opposite sides are congruent and all the angles are the right angles
We know that,
A rectangle has opposite sides that are congruent and all the angles are 90°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given figure is in the form of a rectangle

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 130
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 131
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 131
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The adjacent angle measures are equal to 180°
The opposite sides are congruent
The opposite angles are congruent
The diagonals are not congruent
We know that,
A rhombus has the above properties
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given figure is a rhombus

In Exercises 13-16. find the measures of the numbered angles in rhombus DEFG.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 132
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 13

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 133
Answer:

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 134
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 15

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 135
Answer:

In Exercises 17-22, for any rectangle WXYZ, decide whether the statement is always or sometimes true. Draw a diagram and explain your reasoning.

Question 17.
∠W ≅ ∠X
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 17

Question 18.
\(\overline{W X} \cong \overline{Y Z}\)
Answer:
We know that,
A rectangle has the congruent opposite sides
So,
From the rectangle WXYZ,
The opposite sides are:
WX, YZ, WZ, and XY
The representation of the rectangle WXYZ is:

Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\overline{W X} \cong \overline{Y Z}\) is always true

Question 19.
\(\overline{W X} \cong \overline{X Y}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 19

Question 20.
\(\overline{W Y} \cong \overline{X Z}\)
Answer:
We know that,
The length of the diagonals is the same in a rectangle
So,
In the rectangle WXYZ,
The diagonals are:
WY and XZ
The representation of the rectangle WXYZ is:

Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\overline{W Y} \cong \overline{X Z}\) is always true

Question 21.
\(\overline{W Y}\) ⊥ \(\overline{X Z}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 21

Question 22.
∠WXZ ≅∠YXZ
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a rectangle bisect each other at the right angle i.e., 90°
The representation of the rectangle WXYZ is:

Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠WXZ ≅∠YXZ is always true

In Exercises 23 and 24, determine whether the quadrilateral is a rectangle.

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 136
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 23

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 137
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 137
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The length of the opposite sides are congruent
The one angle is a right angle i.e., 90°
We can also observe that
We don’t know anything about the other three angles
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given quadrilateral is not a rectangle

In Exercises 25-28, find the lengths of the diagonals of rectangle WXYZ.

Question 25.
WY = 6x – 7
XZ = 3x + 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 25

Question 26.
WY = 14x + 10
XZ = 11x + 22
Answer:
We know that,
The length of the diagonals are congruent in a rectangle
So,
WY = XZ
So,
14x + 10 = 11x + 22
14x – 11x = 22 – 10
3x = 12
x = \(\frac{12}{3}\)
x = 4
So,
WY = 14 (4) + 10
= 56 + 10
= 66
XZ = 11 (4) + 22
= 44 + 22
= 66
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of the diagonals are:
WY = XZ = 66

Question 27.
WY = 24x – 8
XZ = – 18x + 13
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 27

Question 28.
WY = 16x – 2
XZ = 36x – 6
Answer:
We know that,
The length of the diagonals are congruent in a rectangle
So,
WY = XZ
So,
16x – 2 = 36x – 6
16x – 36x = -6 + 2
-20x = -4
20x = 4
x = \(\frac{4}{20}\)
x = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
So,
WY = 16 (\(\frac{1}{5}\)) – 2
= 3.2 – 2
= 1
XZ = 36 (\(\frac{1}{5}\)) – 6
= 7 – 6
= 1
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of the diagonals is:
WY = XZ = 1

In Exercises 29-34, name each quadrilateral – parallelogram, rectangle, rhombus, or square – for which the statement is always true.

Question 29.
It is equiangular.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 29

Question 30.
It is equiangular and equilateral.
Answer:
The quadrilateral that is both equiangular and equilateral is a “Square”

Question 31.
The diagonals are perpendicular.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 31

Question 32.
The opposite sides are congruent.
Answer:
The quadrilaterals where the opposite sides are congruent are:
Parallelogram, Rectangle, Square, and Rhombus

Question 33.
The diagonals bisect each other.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 33

Question 34.
The diagonals bisect opposite angles.
Answer:
The quadrilaterals that the diagonals bisect opposite angles are:
Square, and Rhombus

Question 35.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Quadrilateral PQRS is a rectangle. Describe and correct the error in finding the value of x.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 138
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 35

Question 36.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Quadrilateral PQRS is a rhombus. Describe and correct the error in finding the value of x.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 139
Answer:
We know that,
The sum of the adjacent angles of a rhombus is: 180°
So,
∠Q + ∠R = 180°
37° + x° = 180°
x° = 180° – 37°
x° = 143°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x° is: 143°

In Exercises 37 – 42, the diagonals of rhombus ABCD intersect at E. Ghen that m∠BAC = 53°, DE = 8, and EC = 6, find the indicated measure.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 140

Question 37.
m∠DAC
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 37

Question 38.
m∠AED
Answer:
By using the Rhombus Opposite Angles Theorem,
∠A = ∠E
So,
∠E = 53°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of ∠AED is: 53°

Question 39.
m∠ADC
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 39

Question 40.
DB
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a rhombus are equal
So,
DB = 2 (DE)
It is given that
DE = 8
So,
DB = 2 (8)
DB = 16
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of DE is: 16

Question 41.
AE
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 41

Question 42.
AC
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a rhombus are equal
So,
AC = 2 (AE)
It is given that
AE = 6
So,
AC = 2 (6)
AC = 12
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of AC is: 12

In Exercises 43-48. the diagonals of rectangle QRST intersect at P. Given that n∠PTS = 34° and QS = 10, find the indicated measure.

Question 43.
m∠QTR
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 43

Question 44.
m∠QRT
Answer:
We know that,
The opposite angles of a rectangle are equal
So,
From Exercise 43,
We can observe that,
∠QTR = 56°
So,
By using the Rectangle opposite angles Theorem,
∠QRT = 56°
Hence, from te above,
We can conclude that
∠QRT = 56°

Question 45.
m∠SRT
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 45

Question 46.
QP
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a rectangle are congruent and bisect each other
It is given that
QS = 10
So,
By using the Diagonals Congruent Theorem,
QP = PS
So,
QP = \(\frac{10}{2}\)
QP = 5
Hence, from the above,
We can coclude that the length of QP is: 5

Question 47.
RT
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 47

Question 48.
RP
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of arectangle are congruent
So,
QS = RT = 10
Now,
We know that,
The diagonals of a rectangle are congruent and bisect each other
So,
By using the rectangle diagonals Theorem,
RP = PT
So,
RP = \(\frac{10}{2}\)
RP = 5
Hece, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of RP is: 5

In Exercises 49-54. the diagonals of square LMNP intersect at K. Given that LK = 1. find the indicated measure.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 142

Question 49.
m∠MKN
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 49

Question 50.
m∠LMK
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a square are congruent and they are perpendicular
So,
∠LMK = 90°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of ∠LMK is: 90°

Question 51.
m∠LPK
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 51

Question 52.
KN
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a square are congruent and bisect each other
So,
By using the Square Dagonals Congruent Theorem,
LN = LK + KN
LK = KN
So,
KN = 1
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of KN is: 1

Question 53.
LN
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 53

Question 54.
MP
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a square are congruent and are perpendicular to each other
So,
By using the Square Diagonals Congruent Theorem,
LN = MP
So,
MP = 2
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of MP is: 2

In Exercises 55-69. decide whetherBig Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51JKLM is a rectangle, a rhombus. or a square. Give all names that apply. Explain your reasoning.

Question 55.
J(- 4, 2), K(0, 3), L(1, – 1), M(- 3, – 2)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 55

Question 56.
J(- 2, 7), K(7, 2), L(- 2, – 3), M(- 11, 2)
Answer:
The given vertices are :
J (-2, 7), K (7, 2), L (-2, -3), M (-11, 2)
Now,
The diagonals of the parallelogram JKLM are: JL and KM
Now,
JL = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (7 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0)² + (10)²}\)
= 10
KM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (7 + 11)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0)² + (18)²}\)
= 18
JK = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(7 – 2)² + (7 + 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5)² + (9)²}\)
= 10.29
KL = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 + 3)² + (7 + 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5)² + (9)²}\)
= 10.29
LM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(11 – 2)² + (2 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(9)² + (5)²}\)
= 10.29
MJ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(11 – 2)² + (7 – 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(9)² + (5)²}\)
= 10.29
JL = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{-3 – 7}{2 – 2}\)
= -10
KM = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{2 – 2}{-11 – 7}\)
= -18
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the parallelogram JKLM is a rhombus

Question 57.
J(3, 1), K(3, – 3), L(- 2, – 3), M(- 2, 1)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 57

Question 58.
J(- 1, 4), K(- 3, 2), L(2, – 3), M(4, – 1)
Answer:
The given vertices are :
J (-1, 4), K (-3, 2), L (2, -3), M (4, -1)
Now,
The diagonals of the parallelogram JKLM are: JL and KM
Now,
JL = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 + 1)² + (4 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3)² + (7)²}\)
= 7.61
KM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 + 3)² + (2 + 1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(7)² + (3)²}\)
= 7.61
JK = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 – 1)² + (4 – 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2)² + (2)²}\)
= 2.82
KL = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 + 3)² + (2 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5)² + (5)²}\)
= 7.07
LM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 2)² + (1 – 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2)² + (2)²}\)
= 2.82
MJ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 + 1)² + (4 + 1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5)² + (5)²}\)
= 7.07
JL = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{-3 – 4}{2 + 1}\)
= –\(\frac{7}{3}\)
KM = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{-1 – 2}{4 + 3}\)
= –\(\frac{3}{7}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the parallelogram JKLM is a rectangle

Question 59.
J(5, 2), K(1, 9), L(- 3, 2), M(1, – 5)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 59

Question 60.
J(5, 2), K(2, 5), L(- 1, 2), M(2, – 1)
Answer:
The given vertices are :
J (5, 2), K (2, 5), L (-1, 2), M (2, -1)
Now,
The diagonals of the parallelogram JKLM are: JL and KM
Now,
JL = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (5 + 1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0)² + (6)²}\)
= 6
KM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (5 + 1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0)² + (6)²}\)
= 6
JK = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 – 2)² + (5 – 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3)² + (3)²}\)
= 4.24
KL = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 + 1)² + (5 – 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3)² + (3)²}\)
= 4.24
LM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(-1 – 2)² + (2 + 1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3)² + (3)²}\)
= 4.24
MJ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 – 2)² + (2 + 1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3)² + (3)²}\)
= 4.24
KM = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{-1 – 5}{2 – 2}\)
= Undefined
JL = \(\frac{y2 – y1}{x2 – x1}\)
= \(\frac{2 – 2}{-1 – 5}\)
= 0
So,
JL ⊥ KM
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the parallelogram JKLM is a square

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
In Exercises 61 and 62, classify the quadrilateral. Explain your reasoning. Then find the values of x and y.

Question 61.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 143
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 61

Question 62.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 144
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 144
From the given figure,
We can observe that all the angles are 90° and the diagonals are perpendicular
So,
The given figure is a Square
We know that,
The opposite angles are congruent in a square
So,
5x° = (3x + 18)°
5x° – 3x° = 18°
2x° = 18°
x° = \(\frac{18}{2}\)
x° = 9°
2y° = 10
y° = \(\frac{10}{2}\)
y° = 5°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The given figure is a Square
The values of x and y are: 9 and 2 respectively

Question 63.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
In the window, \(\overline{B D}\) ≅ \(\overline{D F}\) ≅ \(\overline{B H}\) ≅ \(\overline{H F}\). Also, ∠HAB, ∠BCD, ∠DEF, and ∠FGH are right angles.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 145
a. Classify HBDF and ACEG. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 63

b. What can you conclude about the lengths of the diagonals \(\overline{A E}\) and \(\overline{G C}\)? Given that these diagonals intersect at J, what can you conclude about the lengths of \(\overline{A J}\), \(\overline{J E}\), \(\overline{C J}\) and \(\overline{J G}\)? Explain.
Answer:
From part (a),
We can observe that ACEG is a rectangle
We know that,
The diagonals of a rectangle are congruent and bisect each other
So,
AE and GC are the diagonals in the rectangle ACEG
So,
AE = GC
Since we know that the diagonals of a rectangle bisect each other,
AJ = JE and CJ = JG

Question 64.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Order the terms in a diagram so that each term builds off the previous term(s). Explain why each figure is in the location you chose.

Answer:
We know that,
The figure that has 4 sides is called a “Quadrilateral”
Ex:
Parallelogram, Square etc
Hence,
The order of the terms in a diagram so that each term builds off the previous term is:
a. Quadrilateral – No equal sides
b. Parallelogram – The parallel sides are equal and the angles are not 90°
c. Rectangle – The parallel sides are equal and all the angles are 90°
d. Square – All the sides are equal and all the angles are 90°
e. Rhombus – All the sides are equal but only one angle is 90°

CRITICAL THINKING
In Exercises 65-70, complete each statement with always, sometimes, or never. Explain your reasoning.
Question 65.
A square is ____________ a rhombus.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 65

Question 66.
A rectangle is __________ a square.
Answer:
A rectangle is sometimes a square because a rectangle has the congruent opposite sides whereas a square has all the congruent sides

Question 67.
A rectangle _____________ has congruent diagonals.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 67

Question 68.
The diagonals of a square _____________ bisect its angles.
Answer:
The diagonals of a square always bisect its angles by using the Square Diagonals Congruent Theorem

Question 69.
A rhombus __________ has four congruent angles.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 69

Question 70.
A rectangle ____________ has perpendicular diagonals.
Answer:
A rectangle sometimes has perpendicular diagonals because the diagonals of a rectangle bisect each other ut not perpendicular to each other whereas a square has the perpendicular diagonals

Question 71.
USING TOOLS
You want to mark off a square region for a garden at school. You use a tape measure to mark off a quadrilateral on the ground. Each side of the quadrilateral is 2.5 meters long. Explain how you can use the tape measure to make sure that the quadrilateral is a square.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 71

Question 72.
PROVING A THEOREM
Use the plan for proof below to write a paragraph proof for one part of the Rhombus Diagonals Theorem (Theorem 7. 11).
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 146
Given ABCD is a parallelogram.
\(\overline{A C}\) ⊥ \(\overline{B D}\)
Prove: ABCD is a rhombus.
Plan for Proof: Because ABCD is a parallelogram. its diagonals bisect each other at X. Use \(\overline{A C}\) ⊥ \(\overline{B D}\) to show that ∆BXC ≅ ∆DXC. Then show that \(\overline{B C}\) ≅ \(\overline{D C}\). Use the properties of a parallelogram to show that ABCD is a rhombus.

PROVING A THEOREM
In Exercises 73 and 74, write a proof for parts of the Rhombus Opposite Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.12).

Question 73.
Given: PQRS is a parallelogram.
\(\overline{P R}\) bisects ∠SPQ and ∠QRS.
\(\overline{S Q}\) bisects ∠PSR and ∠RQP.
Prove: PQRS is a rhombus.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 147
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 73.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 73.2

Question 74.
Given: WXYZ is a rhombus
Prove: \(\overline{W Y}\) bisects ∠ZWX and ∠XYZ.
\(\overline{Z X}\) bisects ∠WZY and ∠YXW.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 148
Answer:

Question 75.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Will a diagonal of a square ever divide the square into two equilateral triangles? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 75

Question 76.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Will a diagonal of a rhombus ever divide the rhombus into two equilateral triangles? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
We know that,
The diagonals of a rhombus are not congruent
We know that,
Sometimes, the interior angles of a rhombus are 120°, 120°, 60°, and 60°
We know that,
The interior angles of an equilateral triangle are: 60°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that it is possible that a diagonal of a rhombus divides the rhombus into two equilateral triangles

Question 77.
CRITICAL THINKING
Which quadrilateral could be called a regular quadrilateral? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 77

Question 78.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
What other information do you need to determine whether the figure is a rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 149
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can observe that the opposite sides are congruent and all the interior angles of the given figure are 90°
We know that,
A quadrilateral that has the congruent opposite sides and all the interior angles are 90° is called a “Rectangle”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given figure is a rectangle

Question 79.
REASONING
Are all rhombuses similar? Are all squares similar? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 79

Question 80.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Use the Rhombus Diagonals Theorem (Theorem 7. 1I) to explain why every rhombus has at least two lines of symmetry.
Answer:

PROVING A COROLLARY
In Exercises 81-83, write the corollary as a conditional statement and its converse. Then explain why each statement is true.

Question 81.
Rhombus Corollary (Corollary 7.2)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 81

Question 82.
Rectangle Corollary (Corollary 7.3)
Answer:
Conditional statement:
If a quadrilateral is a rectangle, then it has four right angles
Converse:
If a quadrilateral has four right angles, then it is a rectangle
The conditional statement is true since a quadrilateral is a rectangle, it has 4 right angles
The corollary is not right because by having 4 right angles, the quadrilateral should be either a rectangle or a square

Question 83.
Square Corollary (Corollary 7.4)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 83

Question 84.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend claims a rhombus will never have congruent diagonals because it would have to be a rectangle. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
We know that,
If a rhombus has congruent diagonals, then it would have to be a square only when all the angles will be 90°
But, it is not possible
A rhombus with non-congruent diagonals will never be a rectangle because a rhombus won’t have all the angles 90°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the claim of your friend is not correct

Question 85.
PROOF
Write a proof in the style of your choice.
Gien ∆XYZ ≅ ∆XWZ, ∠XYW ≅ ∠ZWY
Prove WVYZ is a rhombus.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 150
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 85

Question 86.
PROOF
Write a proof in the style of your choice.
Given Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 151
Prove ABCD is a rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 152
Answer:

PROVING A THEOREM
In Exercises 87 and 88. write a proof for part of the Rectangle Diagonals Theorem (Theorem 7.13).

Question 87.
Given PQRS is a rectangle.
Prove \(\overline{P R} \cong \overline{S Q}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 87

Question 88.
Given PQRS is a parallelogram.
\(\overline{P R} \cong \overline{S Q}\)
Prove PQRS is a rectangle.
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

\(\overline{D E}\) is a midsegment of ∆ABC. Find the values of x and y.

Question 89.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 153
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 89

Question 90.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 154
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 154
It is given that \(\overline {D E}\) is a midsegment of ΔABC
So,
Now,
From the above figure,
We can say that
AD = DB
So,
y = 6
Now,
BC = 2 (DE)
BC = 2 (7)
BC = 14
x = 14
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the values of x and y are: 14 and 6 respectively

Question 91.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 155
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.4 a 91

7.5 Properties of Trapezoids and Kites

Exploration 1

Making a conjecture about Trapezoids

Sample
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 156

Work with a partner. Use dynamic geometry software.

a. Construct a trapezoid whose base angles are congruent. Explain your process.
Answer:

b. Is the trapezoid isosceles? Justify your answer.
Answer:

c. Repeat parts (a) and (b) for several other trapezoids. Write a conjecture based on your results.
PERSEVERE IN SOLVING PROBLEMS
To be proficient in math, you need to draw diagrams of important features and relationships, and search for regularity or trends.
Answer:

Exploration 2

Discovering a Property of Kites

Work with a partner. Use dynamic geometry software.

Sample
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 157

a. Construct a kite. Explain your process.
Answer:

b. Measure the angles of the kite. What do you observe?
Answer:

c. Repeat parts (a) and (b) for several other kites. Write a conjecture based on your results.
Answer:

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
What are some properties of trapezoids and kites?
Answer:

Question 4.
Is the trapezoid at the left isosceles? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 158
Answer:

Question 5.
A quadrilateral has angle measures of 7o, 70°, 1100, and 110°, Is the quadrilateral a kite? Explain.
Answer:

Lesson 7.5 Properties of Trapezoids and Kites

Monitoring progress

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 159

Question 1.
The points A(- 5, 6), B(4, 9) C(4, 4), and D(- 2, 2) form the vertices of a quadrilateral. Show that ABCD is a trapezoid. Then decide whether it is isosceles.
Answer:

In Exercises 2 and 3, use trapezoid EFGH.

Question 2.
If EG = FH, is trapezoid EFGH isosceles? Explain.
Answer:

Question 3.
If m∠HEF = 70° and ,m∠FGH = 110°, is trapezoid EFGH isosceles? Explain.
Answer:

Question 4.
In trapezoid JKLM, ∠J and ∠M are right angles, and JK = 9 centimeters. The length of midsegment \(\overline{N P}\) of trapezoid JKLW is 12 centimeters. Sketch trapezoid JKLM and its midsegment. Find ML. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Question 5.
Explain another method you can use to find the length of \(\overline{Y Z}\) in Example 4.
Answer:

Question 6.
In a kite. the measures of the angles are 3x° 75°, 90°, and 120°. Find the value of x. What are the measures of the angles that are congruent?
Answer:

Question 7.
Quadrilateral DEFG has at least one pair of opposite sides congruent. What types of quadrilaterals meet this condition?
Answer:

Give the most specific name for the quadrilateral. Explain your reasoning.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 160
Answer:

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 161
Answer:

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 162
Answer:

Exercise 7.5 Properties of Trapezoids and Kites

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
WRITING
Describe the differences between a trapezoid and a kite.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 1

Question 2.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 163
Is there enough information to prove that trapezoid ABCD is isosceles?
Answer:

Is there enough information to prove that \(\overline{A B}\) ≅ \(\overline{D C}\)?
Answer:

Is there enough information to prove that the non-parallel sides of trapezoid ABCD are congruent?
Answer:

Is there enough information to prove that the legs of trapezoid ABCD are congruent?
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3-6, show that the quadrilateral with the given vertices is a trapezoid. Then decide whether it is isosceles.

Question 3.
W(1, 4), X(1, 8), Y(- 3, 9), Z(- 3, 3)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 3

Question 4.
D(- 3, 3), E(- 1, 1), F(1, – 4), G(- 3, 0)
Answer:

Question 5.
M(- 2, 0), N(0, 4), P(5, 4), Q(8, 0)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 5

Question 6.
H(1, 9), J(4, 2), K(5, 2), L(8, 9)
Answer:

In Exercises 7 and 8, find the measure of each angle in the isosceles trapezoid.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 164
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 165
Answer:

In Exercises 9 and 10. find the length of the midsegment of the trapezoid.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 166
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 167
Answer:

In Exercises 11 and 12, find AB.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 168
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 169
Answer:

In Exercises 13 and 14, find the length of the midsegment of the trapezoid with the given vertices.

Question 13.
A(2, 0), B(8, – 4), C(12, 2), D(0, 10)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 13

Question 14.
S(- 2, 4), T(- 2, – 4), U(3, – 2), V(13, 10)
Answer:

In Exercises 15 – 18, Find m ∠ G.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 170
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 15

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 171
Answer:

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 172
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 17

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 173
Answer:

Question 19.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in finding DC.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 174
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 19

Question 20.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in finding m∠A.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 175
Answer:

In Exercises 21 – 24. given the most specific name for the quadrilateral. Explain your reasoning.

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 176
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 21

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 177
Answer:

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 178
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 23

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 179
Answer:

REASONING
In Exercises 25 and 26, tell whether enough information is given in the diagram to classify the quadrilateral by the indicated name. Explain.

Question 25.
rhombus
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 180
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 25

Question 26.
Square
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 181
Answer:

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
In Exercises 27 and 28, find the value of x.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 182
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 27

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 183
Answer:

Question 29.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
In the diagram, NP = 8 inches, and LR = 20 inches. What is the diameter of the bottom layer of the cake?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 184
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 29

Question 30.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You and a friend arc building a kite. You need a stick to place from X to Wand a stick to place from W to Z to finish constructing the frame. You want the kite to have the geometric shape of a kite. How long does each stick need to be? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 185
Answer:

REASONING
In Exercises 31 – 34, determine which pairs of segments or angles must be congruent so that you can prove that ABCD is the indicated quadrilateral. Explain our reasoning. (There may be more than one right answer.)

Question 31.
isosceles trapezoid
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 186
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 31

Question 32.
Kite
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 187
Answer:

Question 33.
Parallelogram
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 188
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 33

Question 34.
square
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 189
Answer:

Question 35.
PROOF
Write a proof
Given \(\overline{J L} \cong \overline{L N}\), \(\overline{K M}\) is a midsegment of ∆JLN
Prove Quadrilateral JKMN is an isosceles trapezoid.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 190
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 35

Question 36.
PROOF
Write a proof
Given ABCD is a kite.
\(\overline{A B} \cong \overline{C B}\), \(\overline{A D} \cong \overline{C D}\)
Prove \(\overline{C E} \cong \overline{A E}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 191
Answer:

Question 37.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Point U lies on the perpendicular bisector of \(\overline{R T}\). Describe the set of points S for which RSTU is a kite.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 192
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 37

Question 38.
REASONING
Determine whether the points A(4, 5), B(- 3, 3), C(- 6, – 13), and D(6, – 2) are the vertices of a kite. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

PROVING A THEOREM
In Exercises 39 and 40, use the diagram to prove the given theorem. In the diagram, \(\overline{E C}\)’ is drawn parallel to \(\overline{A B}\).

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 193

Question 39.
Isosceles Trapezoid Base Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.14)
Given ABCD is an isosceles trapezoid.
\(\overline{B C}\) || \(\overline{A D}\)
Prove ∠A ≅ ∠D, ∠B ≅ ∠BCD
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 39

Question 40.
Isosceles Trapezoid Base Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.15)
Given ABCD is a trapezoid
∠A ≅ ∠D, \(\overline{B C}\) || \(\overline{A D}\)
Prove ABCD is an isosceles trapezoid.
Answer:

Question 41.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your cousin claims there is enough information to prove that JKLW is an isosceles trapezoid. Is your cousin correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 194
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 41

Question 42.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
The bases of a trapezoid lie on the lines y = 2x + 7 and y = 2x – 5. Write the equation of the line that contains the midsegment of the trapezoid.
Answer:

Question 43.
CONSTRUCTION
\(\overline{A C}\) and \(\overline{B D}\) bisect each other.
a. Construct quadrilateral ABCD so that \(\overline{A C}\) and \(\overline{B D}\) are congruent. hut not perpendicular. Classify the quadrilateral. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 43

b. Construct quadrilateral ABCD so that \(\overline{A C}\) and \(\overline{B D}\) are perpendicular. hut not congruent. Classify the quadrilateral. Justify your answer.
Answer:

Question 44.
PROOF Write a proof.
Given QRST is an isosceles trapezoid.
Prove ∠TQS ≅ ∠SRT
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 195
Answer:

Question 45.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
A plastic spiderweb is made in the shape of a regular dodecagon (12-sided polygon). \(\overline{A B}\) || \(\overline{P Q}\), and X is equidistant from the vertices of the dodecagon.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 196
a. Are you given enough information to prove that ABPQ is an isosceles trapezoid?
b. What is the measure of each interior angle of ABPQ
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 45

Question 46.
ATTENDING TO PRECISION
In trapezoid PQRS, \(\overline{P Q}\) || \(\overline{R S}\) and \(\overline{M N}\) is the midsegment of PQRS. If RS = 5 . PQ. what is the ratio of MN to RS?
(A) 3 : 5
(B) 5 : 3
(C) 1 : 2
(D) 3 : 1
Answer:

Question 47.
PROVING A THEOREM
Use the plan for proof below to write a paragraph proof of the Kite Opposite Angles Theorem (Theorem 7.19).
Given EFGH is a Kite.
\(\), \(\)
Prove ∠E ≅ ∠G, ∠F Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 197 ∠H
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 198
Plan for Proof: First show that ∠E ≅ ∠G. Then use an indirect argument to show that ∠F Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 197∠H.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 47

Question 48.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
One of the earliest shapes used for cut diamonds is called the table cut, as shown in the figure. Each face of a cut gem is called a facet.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 199
a. \(\overline{B C}\) || \(\overline{A D}\), and \(\overline{A B}\) and \(\overline{D C}\) are not parallel. What shape is the facet labeled ABCD?
b. \(\overline{D E}\) || \(\overline{G F}\), and \(\overline{D G}\) and \(\overline{E F}\) are congruent but not parallel. What shape is the facet labeled DEFG?
Answer:

Question 49.
PROVING A THEOREM
In the diagram below, \(\overline{B G}\) is the midsegment of ∆ACD. and \(\overline{G E}\) is the midsegment of ∆ADF Use the diagram to prove the Trapezoid Midsegment Theorem (Theorem 7.17).
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 200
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 49

Question 50.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Is SSASS a valid congruence theorem be kites? Justify your answer.
Answer:

Question 51.
PROVING A THEOREM
To prove the biconditional statement in the Isosceles Trapezoid Diagonals Theorem (Theorem 7.16), you must prove both Parts separately.
a. Prove part of the Isosceles Trapezoid Diagonals Theorem (Theorem 7. 16).
Given JKLM is an isosecles trapezoid.
\(\overline{K L}\) || \(\overline{J M}\), \(\overline{J L} \cong \overline{K M}\)
Prove \(\overline{J L} \cong \overline{K M}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 201
b. Write the other parts of the Isosceles Trapezoid Diagonals Theorem (Theorem 7. 16) as a conditional. Then prove the statement is true.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 51.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 51.2

Question 52.
PROOF
What special type of quadrilateral is EFGH? Write a proof to show that your answer is Correct.
Given In the three-dimensional figure, \(\overline{J L} \cong \overline{K M}\). E, F, G, and H arc the midpoints of \(\overline{J L}\). \(\overline{K l}\), \(\overline{K M}\), and \(\overline{J M}\). respectively.
Prove EFGH is a ____________ .
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 202
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Describe a similarity transformation that maps the blue preimage to the green image.

Question 53.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 203
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 7.5 a 53

Question 54.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 204
Answer:

Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons Review

7.1 Angles of Polygons

Question 1.
Find the sum of the measures of the interior angles of a regular 30-gon. Then find the measure of each interior angle and each exterior angle.
Answer:

Find the va1ue of x.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 205
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 206
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 207
Answer:

7.2 Properties of Parallelograms

Find the value of each variable in the parallelogram.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 208
Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 209
Answer:

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 210
Answer:

Question 8.
Find the coordinates of the intersection of the diagonals of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51QRST with vertices Q(- 8, 1), R(2, 1). S(4, – 3), and T(- 6, – 3).
Answer:

Question 9.
Three vertices of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51JKLM are J(1, 4), K(5, 3), and L(6, – 3). Find the coordinates of vertex M.
Answer:

7.3 Proving that a Quadrilateral is a Parallelogram

State which theorem you can use to show that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 211
Answer:

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 212
Answer:

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 213
Answer:

Question 13.
Find the values of x and y that make the quadrilateral a parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 214
Answer:

Question 14.
Find the value of x that makes the quadrilateral a parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 215
Answer:

Question 15.
Show that quadrilateral WXYZ with vertices W(- 1, 6), X(2, 8), Y(1, 0), and Z(- 2, – 2) is a parallelogram.
Answer:

7.4 Properties of Special Parallelograms

Classify the special quadrilateral. Explain your reasoning.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 216
Answer:

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 217
Answer:

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 218
Answer:

Question 19.
Find the lengths of the diagonals of rectangle WXYZ where WY = – 2y + 34 and XZ = 3x – 26.
Answer:

Question 20.
Decide whether Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51JKLM with vertices J(5, 8), K(9, 6), L(7, 2), and M(3, 4) is a rectangle. a rhombus, or a square. Give all names that apply. Explain.

Answer:

7.5 Properties of Trapezoids and Kites

Question 21.
Find the measure of each angle in the isosceles trapezoid WXYZ.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 219
Answer:

Question 22.
Find the length of the midsegment of trapezoid ABCD.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 220
Answer:

Question 23.
Find the length of the midsegment of trapezoid JKLM with vertices J(6, 10), K(10, 6), L(8, 2), and M(2, 2).
Answer:

Question 24.
A kite has angle measures of 7x°, 65°, 85°, and 105°. Find the value of x. What are the measures of the angles that are congruent?
Answer:

Question 25.
Quadrilateral WXYZ is a trapezoid with one pair of congruent base angles. Is WXYZ all isosceles trapezoid? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Give the most specific name for the quadrilateral. Explain your reasoning.

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 221
Answer:

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 222
Answer:

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 223
Answer:

Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons Test

Find the value of each variable in the parallelogram.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 224
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 225
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 226
Answer:

Give the most specific name for the quadrilateral. Explain your reasoning.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 227
Answer:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 228
Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 229
Answer:

Question 7.
In a convex octagon. three of the exterior angles each have a measure of x°. The other five exterior angles each have a measure of (2x + 7)°. Find the measure of each exterior angle.
Answer:

Question 8.
Quadrilateral PQRS has vertices P(5, 1), Q(9, 6), R(5, 11), and 5(1, 6), Classify quadrilateral PQRS using the most specific name.
Answer:

Determine whether enough information is given to show that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram. Explain your reasoning.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 230
Answer:

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 231
Answer:

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 232
Answer:

Question 12.
Explain why a parallelogram with one right angle must be a rectangle.
Answer:

Question 13.
Summarize the ways you can prove that a quadrilateral is a square.
Answer:

Question 14.
Three vertices of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51JKLM are J(- 2, – 1), K(0, 2), and L(4, 3),
a. Find the coordinates of vertex M.
Answer:

b. Find the coordinates of the intersection of the diagonals of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 51JKLM.
Answer:

Question 15.
You are building a plant stand with three equally-spaced circular shelves. The diagram shows a vertical cross section of the plant stand. What is the diameter of the middle shell?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 233
Answer:

Question 16.
The Pentagon in Washington. D.C., is shaped like a regular pentagon. Find the measure of each interior angle.
Answer:

Question 17.
You are designing a binocular mount. If \(\overline{B C}\) is always vertical, the binoculars will point in the same direction while they are raised and lowered for different viewers. How can you design the mount so \(\overline{B C}\) is always vertical? Justify your answer.
Answer:

Question 18.
The measure of one angle of a kite is 90°. The measure of another angle in the kite is 30°. Sketch a kite that matches this description.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 234
Answer:

Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons Cummulative Assessment

Question 1.
Copy and complete the flowchart proof of the Parallelogram Opposite Angles Theorem (Thm. 7.4).
Given ABCD is a parallelogram.
Prove ∠A ≅ ∠C, ∠B ≅ ∠D
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 235
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 236
Answer:

Question 2.
Use the steps in the construction to explain how you know that the circle is inscribed within ∆ABC.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 237
Answer:

Question 3.
Your friend claims that he can prove the Parallelogram Opposite Sides Theorem (Thm. 7.3) using the SSS Congruence Theorem (Thm. 5.8) and the Parallelogram Opposite Sides Theorem (Thin. 7.3). Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Question 4.
Find the perimeter of polygon QRSTUV Is the polygon equilateral? equiangular? regular? Explain your reasoni ng.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 238
Answer:

Question 5.
Choose the correct symbols to complete the proof of the Converse of the Hinge Theorem (Theorem 6. 13).
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 239
Given Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 240
Prove m ∠ B > m ∠ E
Step 1 Assume temporarily that m ∠ B Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 241 m ∠ E. Then it follows that either m∠B____ m∠E or m∠B ______ m ∠ E.

Step 2 If m ∠ B ______ m∠E. then AC _____ DF by the Hinge Theorem (Theorem 6. 12). If, m∠B _______ m ∠ E. then ∠B _____ ∠E. So. ∆ABC ______ ∆DEF by the SAS Congruence Theorem (Theorem 5.5) and AC _______ DF.

Step 3 Both conclusions contradict the given statement that AC _______ DF. So, the temporary assumption that m ∠ B > Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 241 m ∠ E Cannot be true. This proves that m ∠ B ______ m ∠ E.
>     <    =    ≠    ≅
Answer:

Question 6.
Use the Isosceles Trapctoid Base Angles Conersc (Thm. 7.15) to prove that ABCD is an isosceles trapezoid.
Given \(\overline{B C}\) || \(\overline{A D}\). ∠EBC ≅ ∠¿ECB, ∠ABE ≅ ∠DCE
Prove ABCD is an isoscelcs trapezoid.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 242
Answer:

Question 7.
One part of the Rectangle Diagonals Theorem (Thm. 7.13) says. “If the diagonals of a parallelogram are congruent, then it is a rectangle.” Using the reasons given. there are multiple ways to prove this part of the theorem. Provide a statement for each reason to form one possible proof of this part of the theorem.
Given QRST is a parallelogram
\(\overline{Q S} \cong \overline{R T}\)
Prove QRST is a rectangle
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 7 Quadrilaterals and Other Polygons 243

StatementsReasons
1. \(\overline{Q S} \cong \overline{R T}\)1. Given
2. __________________________2. Parallelogram Opposite Sides Theorem (Thm. 7.3)
3. __________________________3. SSS Congruence Theorem (Thm. 5.8)
4. __________________________4. Corresponding parts of congruent triangles are congruent.
5. __________________________5. Parallelogram Consecutive Angles Theorem (Thm. 7.5
6. __________________________6. Congruent supplementary angles have the same measure.
7. __________________________7. Parallelogram Consecutive Angles Theorem (Thm. 7.5)
8. __________________________8. Subtraction Property of Equality
9. __________________________9. Definition of a right angle
10. __________________________10. Definition of a rectangle

Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions

For the best practice, the Big Ideas Math Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions Answer Sheet is given here. A detailed explanation of solutions prepared by great math experts which are included in the below sections. Click on the Big Ideas Math Book Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions link on our website and start your preparation. Get the free pdfs here in the following sections.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions preparation material is here. Candidates can quickly get this material without much search because we are giving the lesson-wise information in detail here. This will act as a guide for your complete preparation. Get a clear idea of ratios and their tables. Follow the below sections and know more about Ratios and Proportions.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions

Feeling difficult to get the best solutions for all the math problems? If you get a guide with clear explanations and short solutions, then you will feel it easy and fun learning. Therefore, check out Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions Pdf here which is given with a clear explanation. Know the various topics involved in ratios and proportions.

Various topics like graphs of proportional relationships, rates, and unit rates, identifying proportional relationships, writing and solving proportions, ratios, and ratio tables, scale drawings, and so on. Check Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions solved examples in the next sections.

Performance Task

Lesson: 1 Ratios and Ratio Tables

Lesson: 2 Rates and Unit Rates

Lesson: 3 Identifying Proportional Relationships

Lesson: 4 Writing and Solving Proportions

Lesson: 5 Graphs of Proportional Relationships

Lesson: 6 Scale Drawings

Chapter: 5 – Ratios and Proportions

Ratios and Proportions STEAM Video/ Performance Task

STEAM Video

Painting a Large Room
Shades of paint can be made by mixing other paints. What colors of paints can you mix to make green paint?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 1
Watch the STEAM Video “Painting a Large Room.” Then answer the following questions.
1. Enid estimates that they need 2 gallons of paint to apply two coats to the wall shown. How many square feet does she expect \(\frac{1}{2}\) gallon of paint will cover?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 2

Answer:
1/2 gallon of paint will cover 60 sq feet.

Explanation:
Enid estimates that they need 2 gallons of paint to apply two coats to the wall of 240 sq ft
The area of the shown figure = 24 x 10
= 240 square feet
To know how many sq feet does 1/2 gallon of paint will cover (240 . 1/2) . 1/2
= 240 . 1/4
= 60
So, 1/2 gallon of paint will cover 60 sq feet.

2. Describe a room that requires 5\(\frac{1}{2}\) gallons of paint to apply one coat of paint to each of the four walls.

Answer:
The room has 4 walls each wall is 330 sq feet.

Explanation:
A room requires 5(1/2) gallons of paint to apply one coat of paint to each of the four walls.
Enid estimates that they need 2 gallons of paint to apply two coats to the wall of 240 sq ft
If they coat only once, she would require 1 gallon of paint for a wall of 240 sq feet.
If she wants to use 5(1/2) = 11/2 gallons of paint, then the area of walls will be
= 240 . (11/2)
= 120 . 11 = 1320 Square feet
Each wall = 1320/4 =330 sq feet
The room has 4 walls each wall is 330 sq feet.

Performance Task

Mixing Paint
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given the amounts of each tint used to make different colors of paint. For example:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 3
You will be asked to solve various ratio problems about mixing paint. Given any color of paint, how can you make the paint slightly lighter in color?

Ratios and Proportions Getting Ready for Chapter 5

Chapter Exploration

The Meaning of a Word Rate
When you rent snorkel gear at the beach, rate you should pay attention to the rental. The rental rate is in dollars per hour.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 4
1. Work with a partner. Complete each step.
• Match each description with a rate.
• Match each rate with a fraction.
• Give a reasonable value for each fraction. Then give an unreasonable value.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5
2. Work with a partner Describe a situation to which the given fraction can apply. Show how to rewrite each expression as a division problem. Then simplify and interpret your result.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 6
Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
proportional
constant of proportionality
scale drawing

Lesson 5.1 Ratios and Ratio Tables

EXPLORATION 1

Describing Ratio Relationships
Work with a partner. Use the recipe shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 1
a. Identify several ratios in the recipe.
b. You halve the recipe. Describe your ratio relationships in part (a) using the new quantities. Is the relationship between the ingredients the same as in part(a)? Explain.

Answer:
a. Stewed tomatoes : chicken broth = 9 ounces : 15 ounces
Stewed tomatoes : Chopped Spinach = 9 ounces : 9 ounces = 1 : 1
Chopped Spinach : chicken broth = 9 ounces : 15 ounces
Chopped Chicken : grated parmesan = 1 cup : 5 tablespoons
Chicken broth : Chopped Chicken = 15 ounces : 1 cup
Stewed tomatoes : chopped chicken = 9 ounces : 1 cup = Chopped Spinach : chopped chicken
Stewed tomatoes : grated parmesan = 9 ounces : 5 tablespoons = Chopped Spinach : grated parmesan
chicken broth : grated parmesan = 15 ounces : 5 tablespoons = 5 ounces : 1 tablespoon
b. The relationship between the ingredients the same as in part(a).

Explanation:
a. The several ratios of the recipe are Stewed tomatoes : chicken broth = 9 ounces : 15 ounces
Stewed tomatoes : Chopped Spinach = 9 ounces : 9 ounces = 1 : 1
Chopped Spinach : chicken broth = 9 ounces : 15 ounces
Chopped Chicken : grated parmesan = 1 cup : 5 tablespoons
Chicken broth : Chopped Chicken = 15 ounces : 1 cup
Stewed tomatoes : chopped chicken = 9 ounces : 1 cup = Chopped Spinach : chopped chicken
Stewed tomatoes : grated parmesan = 9 ounces : 5 tablespoons = Chopped Spinach : grated parmesan
chicken broth : grated parmesan = 15 ounces : 5 tablespoons = 5 ounces : 1 tablespoon
b. The relationship between the ingredients the same as in part(a).

EXPLORATION 2

Completing Ratio Tables
Work with a partner. Use the ratio tables shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 2
a. Complete the first ratio table using multiple operations. Use the same operations to complete the second ratio table.
b. Are the ratios in the first table equivalent? the second table? Explain.
c. Do the strategies for completing ratio tables of whole numbers work for completing ratio tables of fractions? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
a. Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 2
b. Yes

Explanation:
a. 5 x 2 = 10, 1 x 2 = 2, 1/4 x 2 = 1/2, 1/2 x 2 = 1
5 x 1.5 = 7.5, 1 x 1.5 = 1.5, 1/4 x 3/2 = 3/8, 1/2 x 3/2 = 3/4
5 x 4 = 20, 1 x 4 = 4, 1/4 x 4 = 1, 1/2 x 4= 2
b. Yes the ratios in the first table are equivalent to the second table.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 3

Try It

Question 1.
You mix \(\frac{2}{3}\) teaspoon of baking soda with 3 teaspoons of salt. Find and interpret the value of the ratio of baking soda to salt.

Answer:
The ratio of baking soda to salt is 2 : 1.

Explanation:
Given that,
You mix \(\frac{2}{3}\) teaspoon of baking soda with 3 teaspoons of salt.
The ratio of baking soda to salt = 2/3 to 3 = 2/3 : 3
= 2/3 / 3 = 2/3 . 3/1 = 2/1 = 2 : 1
The ratio of baking soda to salt is 2 : 1.

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 4

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 3

Explanation:
The missing values in the ratio table are
4 x 4 = 16. So, 5/2 x 4 = 10
5/2 . x = 5
x = 2
So, 4 . 2 = 8
The equivalent ratios are 5/2 : 4, 10 : 16, 5 : 8.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 5

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 4

Explanation:
0.4 . x = 1.2
x = 1.2/0.4 = 3
So, 0.75 . 3 = 2.25
0.4 . y = 1.6
y = 1.6/0.4 = 4
So, 0.75 . 4 = 3
The equivalent ratios are 0.4 : 0.75, 1.2 : 2.25, 1.6 : 3

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
WRITING AND INTERPRETING RATIOS
You include \(\frac{1}{2}\) tablespoon of essential oils in a solution for every 12 tablespoons of jojoba oil. Find and interpret the value of the ratio of jojoba oil to essential oils.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 6

Answer:
The amount of jojoba oil in the solution is the 24th amount of essential oil.

Explanation:
You include \(\frac{1}{2}\) tablespoon of essential oils in a solution for every 12 tablespoons of jojoba oil
The ratio of jojoba oil to essential oil = 12 : 1/2
= 12 ÷ 1/2
= 12 . 2/1
= 24
The amount of jojoba oil in the solution is the 24th amount of essential oil.

Question 5.
NUMBER SENSE
Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 7

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 5

Explanation:
1/12 . x = 2/3
x = 2/3 . 12
x = 8
So, Pounds = 3/2 . 8 = 12
3/2 . 7 = 21/2
1/12 . 7 = 7/12
The equivalent ratios are 3/2 : 1/12, 12 : 2/3, 21/2 : 7/12

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
A satellite orbiting Earth travels 14\(\frac{1}{2}\) miles every 3 seconds. How far does the satellite travel in \(\frac{3}{4}\) minute?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 8

Answer:
The satellite travels 217(1/2) miles in 3/4 minutes.

Explanation:
A satellite orbiting Earth travels 14\(\frac{1}{2}\) miles every 3 seconds.
So, it travels 14.5/3 miles = 29/6 miles in every 1 second
3/4 minutes = 3/4 . 60
= 45 seconds
Therefore, it travels 45 . 29/6 miles in 3/4 minutes
= 217(1/2) miles in 3/4 minutes.
Hence, the satellite travels 217(1/2) miles in 3/4 minutes.

Question 7.
An engine runs on a mixture of 0.1 quart of oil for every 3.5 quarts of gasoline. You make 3 quarts of the mixture. How much oil and how much gasoline do you use?

Answer:
We use 0.083 quarts of oil and 2.917 quarts of gasoline.

Explanation:
The ratio of oil to gasoline = 0.1 : 3.5 = 1 : 35
use the ratio table to find an equivalent ratio in which the total mixture is 3 quarts.
For 3 quarts mixture
Oil required is 1/36 * 3 = 3/36
= 1/12 = 0.083 quarts
Gasoline required is
35/36 * 3 = 35/12 = 2.917 quarts
We use 0.083 quarts of oil and 2.917 quarts of gasoline.

Ratios and Ratio Tables Homework & Practice 5.1

Review & Refresh

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 1.
4p + 7 ≥ 19

Answer:
p ≥ 3
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 6

Explanation:
Given that,
4p + 7 ≥ 19
Subtract 7 from both sides
4p + 7 – 7 ≥ 19 – 7
4p ≥ 12
Divide both sides by 4
4p/4 ≥ 12/4
p ≥ 3

Question 2.
14 < – 6n – 10

Answer:
-4 > n
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 7

Explanation:
Given that,
14 < – 6n – 10
Add 10 to both sides
14 + 10 < -6n – 10 + 10
24 < -6n
Divide both sides by -6
24/-6 > -6n/-6
-4 > n

Question 3.
– 3(2 + d) ≤ 15

Answer:
d ≥ -7
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 8

Explanation:
Given that,
– 3(2 + d) ≤ 15
Divide both sides by -3
– 3(2 + d)/-3 ≥ 15/-3
2 + d ≥ -5
d ≥ -5 – 2
d ≥ -7

Find the quotient. Write fractions in simplest form.
Question 4.
\(\frac{2}{9}\) ÷ \(\frac{4}{3}\)

Answer:
\(\frac{2}{9}\) ÷ \(\frac{4}{3}\) = 1/6 = 0.166

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{9}\) ÷ \(\frac{4}{3}\) = 2/9 . 3/4
= (2 . 3) / (9 . 4)
= 1/6
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 9

Question 5.
10.08 ÷ 12

Answer:
10.08 ÷ 12 = 3024/25 = 120.96

Explanation:
10.08 ÷ 12 = 1008/100 ÷ 12
= 1008/100 . 12/1
= (1008 . 12)/100
= (100.8 . 3)/25
= 3024/25 = 120.96
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 10

Question 6.
– \(\frac{5}{6}\) ÷ \(\frac{3}{10}\) = -25/9 = -2.7777

Answer:
– \(\frac{5}{6}\) ÷ \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Explanation:
– \(\frac{5}{6}\) ÷ \(\frac{3}{10}\) = -5/6 . 10/3
= (-5 . 10)/(3 . 6)
= -25/9 = -2.7777
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 11

Question 7.
Which ratio can be represented by the tape diagram?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 9
A. 3 : 4
B. 4 : 5
C. 4 : 9
D. 8 : 12

Answer:
D. 8 : 12

Explanation:
Quantity 1 has 2 boxes, quantity 2 has 3 boxes.
Out of all given ratios, 8 : 12 satisfy the condition
The ratio of given quantity = 2 : 3
2 * 4 : 3 * 4 = 8 : 12

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

OPEN-ENDED Complete the ratio table using multiple operations. Are the ratios in the table equivalent? Explain. (See Exploration 2, p. 183.)
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 10

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 12

Explanation:
4 x 2 = 8, 10  2 = 20
8 x 2 = 16, 20 x 2 = 40
16/8 = 2, 40/8 = 5
The equivalent ratios are 4:10, 8:20, 16:40, 2:5.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 11

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 14

Explanation:
4/5 x 10 = 8, 1/2 x 10 = 5
4/5 x 5 = 4, 1/2 x 5 = 5/2
4 x 1/25 = 4/25, 5/2 x 1/25 = 1/10

WRITING AND INTERPRETING RATIOS Find the ratio. Then find and interpret the value of the ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 12
Question 10.
club soda : white grape juice

Answer:
club soda : white grape juice = 2 : 1

Explanation:
Club soda = 4 cups
white grape juice = 2 cups
club soda : white grape juice = 4 : 2
= 2 : 1

Question 11.
mint leaves : chopped watermelon

Answer:
mint leaves : chopped watermelon = 1 : 6

Explanation:
mint leaves = 1/2 cup
chopped watermelon = 3 cups
mint leaves : chopped watermelon = 1/2 : 3
= 1 : 3 x 2
= 1 : 6

Question 12.
white grape juice to sugar

Answer:
white grape juice : sugar = 8 : 3

Explanation:
white grape juice = 2 cups
sugar=3/4 cup
white grape juice : sugar = 2 : 3/4
= 2 x 4: 3
= 8 : 3

Question 13.
lime juice to mint leaves

Answer:
lime juice to mint leaves is 3 : 2

Explanation:
lime juice = 3/4 cup
mint leaves = 1/2 cup
lime juice to mint leaves = 3/4 : 1/2
= 3/2 : 1
= 3 : 2

Question 14.
You have blue ribbon and red ribbon in the ratio \(\frac{1}{2}\) : \(\frac{1}{5}\) . Your friend finds the value of the ratio. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 13

Answer:
Wrong.

Explanation:
1/2 : 1/5 = 1/2 ÷ 1/5
= 1/2 . 5/1 = 5/2

COMPLETING A RATIO TABLE Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 14

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 15

Explanation:
To find the missing values,
1/6 . x = 2/3
x = 2/3 . 6
x = 4
So, calories = 20 . 4 = 80
20 . y = 10
y = 10/20 = 1/2
Miles = 1/6 . 1/2 = 1/12
10 . z = 90
z = 90/10
z = 9
Miles = 1/12 . 9 = 3/4
The equivalent ratios are 20 : 1/6, 80 : 2/3, 10 : 1/12, 90 : 3/4

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 15

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 16

Explanation:
To find the missing values,
8/2 = 4
Minutes = 1/3/2 = 1/3 . 2 = 1/6
1/3 . x = 1/4
x = 1/4 . 3 = 3/4
Meters = 8 . 3/4 = 6
1/3 . y = 5/12
y = 5/12 . 3 = 5/4
Meters = 8 . 5/4 = 10
The equivalent ratios are 8 : 1/3, 4 : 2/3, 6 : 1/4, 10 : 5/12

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 16

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 17

Explanation:
To find the missing values,
1/2 . x = 1
x = 2
1/24 . 2 = 1/12 = Feet
1/24 . y = 1/8
y = 1/8 . 24 = 3
Inches = 1/2 . 3 = 3/2
1/2 . z = 1/4
z = 1/4 . 2 = 1/2
Feet = 1/24 . 1/2 = 1/48
The equivalent ratios are 1/24 : 1/2, 1/12 : 1, 1/8 : 3, 1/48 : 1/4

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 17

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 18

Explanation:
To find missing values,
1.5 . x = 1
x = 1/1.5 = 2/3
Tea = 3.75 . 2/3 = 2.5
1.5 . y = 3.5
y = 35/15 = 7/3
Tea = 3.75 . 7/3 = 8.75
1.5 . z = 2.5
z = 5/3
3.75 . 5/3 = 6.25

Question 19.
CRITICAL THINKING
Are the two statements equivalent? Explain your reasoning.
The ratio of boys to girls is 2 to 3.
The ratio of girls to boys is 3 to 2.

Answer:
Yes, both the statements are equivalent.

Explanation:
The ratio of boys to girls is 2 to 3.
boys : girls = 2 : 3
The ratio of girls to boys is 3 to 2.
girls : boys = 3 : 2

Question 20.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A city dumps plastic shade balls into a reservoir to prevent water from evaporating during a drought. It costs $5760 for 16,000 shade balls. How much does it cost for 12,000 shade balls?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 18

Answer:
The cost for 12,000 shade balls is $4320

Explanation:
It costs $5760 for 16,000 shade balls.
The cost for 12,000 shade balls = (5760 x 12,000)/16000
= 69120/16
= 4320
So, the The cost for 12,000 shade balls is $4320

Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
An oil spill spreads 25 square meters every \(\frac{1}{6}\) hour. What is the area of the oil spill after 2 hours?

Answer:
The area that the oil spill covers after 2 hours is 300 sq meters.

Explanation:
An oil spill spreads 25 square meters every 1/6 hour
The unit rate = 25 ÷ 1/6
= 25 x 6 = 150 square meters per hour
Every 1 hour spreads 150 square meters
The area that the oil spill covers after 2 hours = 2 x 150 = 300 sq meters

Question 22.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You mix 0.25 cup of juice concentrate for every 2 cups of water to make 18 cups of juice. How much juice concentrate do you use? How much water do you use?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 19

Answer:
To make 18 cups of juice we use 16 cups of water and 2 cups of juice concentrate

Explanation:
The ratio between cups of water and cups of juice concentration is 2 to 1/4
The unit rate = 2 / 1/4
= 2 x 4 = 8 cups of water per cup of juice concentrate
So, to make 9 cups of juice we use 8 cups of water and 1 cup of juice concentrate
To make 18 cups of juice we use 16 cups of water and 2 cups of juice concentrate

Question 23.
A store sells 2\(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds of mulch for every 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds of gravel sold. The store sells 180 pounds of mulch and gravel combined. How many pounds of each item does the store sell?

Answer:
Mulch = 108 pounds, gravel = 72 pounds

Explanation:
Let 2(1/4)x = 9/4 x be the amount of mulch so that 1(1/2)x = 3x/2 is the amount of gravel the store sell, both in pounds.
Given that thestore sells a total of 180 pounds of mulch and gravel, we can write
9x/4 + 3x/2 = 180
9x + 6x = 180 x 4
15x = 720
x = 720/15
x = 48
So, the store sells 9/4(48) = 108 pounds of mulch and 3/2(48) = 72 pounds of gravel.

Question 24.
DIG DEEPER!
You mix \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of red paint for every \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of blue paint to make 3 gallons of purple paint.
a. How much red paint do you use? How much blue paint do you use?
b. You decide that you want to make a lighter purple paint. You make the new mixture by adding \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of white paint for every \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of red paint and \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of blue paint. How much red paint, blue paint, and white paint do you use to make 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) gallons of the lighter purple paint?

Answer:
a. We use 12 cups of red paint, 24 cups of blue paint
b. white paint = 6 cups, red paint = 6 cups, blue paint = 12 cups.

Explanation:
You mix \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of red paint for every \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of blue paint to make 3 gallons of purple paint.
a. The ratio of red paint to blue paint = 1/4 : 1/2
1/4x + 1/2x = (x + 2x)/4 = 3x/4
3x/4 = 3
x = 3 . 4/3
x = 4 cups
1 cup = 1/16 gallons
So, 4 cups = 4/16 = 1/4 gallons
12 . 4 = 48 cups = 1/4 . 12 = 3 gallons
So, 1/4(48) = 12 cups of red paint and 1/2(48) = 24 cups of blue paint is required to make 3 gallons
b. You make the new mixture by adding \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of white paint for every \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of red paint and \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of blue paint.
(1/4 + 1/4 +1/2) = 1
1 cup = 1/16 gallons
The total lighter purple paint = 1(1/2) = 3/2 gallons
Total number of cups = (3/2) 16
= 24
white paint = 1/4 (24) = 6 cups
red paint = 1/4 (24) = 6 cups
blue paint = 1/2 (24) = 12 cups

Lesson 5.2 Rates and Unit Rates

EXPLORATION 1

Writing Rates
Work with a partner.
a. How many degrees does the minute hand on a clock move every 15 minutes? Write a rate that compares the number of degrees moved by the minute hand to the number of hours elapsed.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 1
b. Can you use the rate in part(a) to determine how many degrees the minute hand moves in \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour? Explain your reasoning.
c. Write a rate that represents the number of degrees moved by the minute hand every hour. How can you use this rate to find the number of degrees moved by the minute hand in 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours?
d. Draw a clock with hour and minute hands. Draw another clock that shows the time after the minute hand moves 900°. How many degrees does the hour hand move in this time? in one hour? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 2

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 3

Try It

Question 1.
There is \(\frac{1}{4}\) gram of fat for every \(\frac{1}{3}\) tablespoon of powdered peanut butter. How many grams of fat are there for every tablespoon of the powder?

Answer:
We have 3/4 grams of fat for every tablespoon of the powder.

Explanation:
There is \(\frac{1}{4}\) gram of fat for every \(\frac{1}{3}\) tablespoon of powdered peanut butter.
There are 1/4 / 1/3 = 1/4. 3 = 3/4 grams of fat for every tablespoon of the powder.

Question 2.
WHAT IF?
The scientist later states that the iron travels 3 feet every 10 minutes. Does this change your answer in Example 2? Explain.

Answer:
The liquid iron travels about 432 feet in 1 day.

Explanation:
The iron travels 3 feet for every 10 minutes
The ratio of feet to minutes is 3 : 10
Divide the quantity by 10 to get the unit rate per minute. Then multiply each quantity by 1440 to find the distance traveled in 24 hours.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 19
So, the liquid iron travels about 432 feet in 1 day.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
VOCABULARY
How can you tell when a rate is a unit rate?

Answer:
A unit rate is described as hoe many units of the first type of quantity corresponds to one unit of the second type of quantity. When the denominator is 1, then you can say that that rate is a unit rate. Few examples of unit rate are m/sec, feet/hour.

Question 4.
WRITING
Explain why rates are usually written as unit rates.

Answer:
Generally, a rate is a ratio of two quantities. Rates are usually written as unit rates because they are easier to read, easier to understand and easier to compare.

Find the unit rate.
Question 5.
$1.32 for 12 ounces

Answer:
$0.11 for 1 ounce

Explanation:
$1.32 for 12 ounces = 1.32 : 12
= 1.32/12 : 12/12
= 0.11 : 1

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) gallon for every \(\frac{3}{10}\) mile

Answer:
5/6 gallon for every 1 mile

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{4}\) gallon for every \(\frac{3}{10}\) mile = 1/4 : 3/10
= 1/4 x 10/3 : 3/10 x 10/3
= 5/6 : 1

Question 7.
USING TOOLS
Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the unit rate of grams per cup and the unit rate of cups per gram.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 4

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 1
The unit rate of grams per cup = 15/4 : 1
The unit rate of cups per gram = 1 : 4/15

Explanation:
2/3 . x = 1/6
x = 1/6 . 3/2 = 1/4
1/4 . 5/2 = 5/8 = grams
5/2 . y = 1
y = 1 . 2/5 = 2/5
2/3 . 2/5 = 4/15 = cups
5/2 . 3/2 = 15/4
So, 2/3 . 3/2 = 1 = cups
2/3 . z = 4
z = 4 . 3/2 = 6
So, 5/2 . 6 = 15
grams: cups = 5/2 : 2/3
The unit rate of grams per cup = 5/2 . 3/2 : 1 = 15/4 : 1
cups : grams = 4/15 : 1

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
Two people compete in a five-mile go-kart race. Person A travels \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile every 15 seconds. Person B travels \(\frac{3}{8}\) mile every 48 seconds. Who wins the race? What is the difference of the finish times of the competitors?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 5

Answer:
Person B wins the race.
The difference of the finish times of the competitors = 1.833 minutes

Explanation:
Two people compete in a five-mile go-kart race.
Person A travels 1/10 miles for 15 seconds = 1/10 : 15
Person A unit rate = 1/150 : 1
It means, A travels 1/150 miles per1 second
So, person A completes the race in 5 x 150 = 750 seconds = 750/60 = 12.5 minutes
Person B travels 3/8 mile for 48 seconds = 3/8 : 48
Person B unit rate = 3/384 : 1
It means B travels 3/384 miles in 1 second.
So, person B completes the race in 5 . (384/3) = 1920/3 = 640
= 640/60 = 10.666 minutes
Hence, person B wins the race.
The difference of the finish times of the competitors = 12.5 – 10.66 = 1.8333 minutes

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
A bus travels 0.8 mile east every 45 seconds. A second bus travels 0.55 mile west every 30 seconds. The buses start at the same location. Use two methods to determine how far apart the buses are after 15 minutes. Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
Two buses are 1/2 mile apart after 15 minutes.

Explanation:
A bus travels 0.8 mile east every 45 seconds = 0.8 : 45
The unit rate = 0.8/45 : 1
A second bus travels 0.55 mile west every 30 seconds = 0.55 : 30
The unit rate = 0.55/30 : 1
Find how much distance, busses travelled after 15 minutes = 15 x 60 = 900 seconds
First bus travels (0.8/45) x 900 = 16 miles
Second bus travels (0.55/30) x 900 = 16.5 miles
The difference in their distances = 16.5 – 16 = 1/2 mile

Rates and Unit Rates Homework & Practice 5.2

Review & Refresh

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 6

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 2
The equivalent ratios are 3/4 : 1/3, 3/2 : 2/3, 3 : 3/4, 1 : 4/9

Explanation:
To find the missing values,
1/3 . x = 2/3
x = 2
3/4 . 2 = 3/2 = flour
3/4 . y = 3
y = 4
1/3 . 4 = 4/3 = oats1
3/4 . z = 1
z = 4/3
4/3 . 1/3 = 4/9 = oats2
The equivalent ratios are 3/4 : 1/3, 3/2 : 2/3, 3 : 3/4, 1 : 4/9

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 7

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 3
The equivalent ratios are 1/4 : 1/2, 3/4 : 3/2, 3/2 : 3, 5 : 10

Explanation:
To find the missing values,
1/4 . x = 3/4
x = 3
1/2 . 3 = 3/2 = minutes1
1/2 . y = 3
y = 6
1/4 . 6 = 3/2 = pages
1/4 . z = 5
z = 20
1/2 . 20 = 10 = minutes 2
The equivalent ratios are 1/4 : 1/2, 3/4 : 3/2, 3/2 : 3, 5 : 10

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 8

Answer:
9/2 > 8/3

Explanation:
9/2 = 4.5
8/3 = 2.6666
So, 9/2 > 8/3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 9

Answer:
-8/15 < 10/18

Explanation:
-8/15 = -0.5333
10/18 = 0.555
So, -8/15 < 10/18

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 10

Answer:
-6/24 = -2/8

Explanation:
-6/24 = -0.25
-2/8 = -0.25
So, -6/24 = -2/8

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

WRITING RATES Find the number of degrees moved by the minute hand of a clock in the given amount of time. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 189.)
Question 6.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) hour

Answer:
240 degrees.

Explanation:
The minute hand passes through 60 minutes ( = 360 degrees) in 1 hour.
In 2/3 hours it passes through 2/3 * 360 = 240 degrees.

Question 7.
\(\frac{7}{12}\) hour

Answer:
210 degrees

Explanation:
The minute hand passes through 60 minutes ( = 360 degrees) in 1 hour.
In 7/12 hours it passes through 7/12 * 360 = 210 degrees

Question 8.
1\(\frac{1}{4}\) hours

Answer:
450 degrees = (360 + 90) degrees

Explanation:
The minute hand passes through 60 minutes ( = 360 degrees) in 1 hour.
In 1(1/4) = 5/4 hours it passes through 5/4 * 360 = 450 degrees

FINDING UNIT RATES Find the unit rate.
Question 9.
180 miles in 3 hours

Answer:
6 miles per 1 hour

Explanation:
180 miles in 3 hours = 18 : 3
The unit rate is 18/3 : 1 = 6 : 1

Question 10.
256 miles per 8 gallons

Answer:
32 miles per 1 gallon

Explanation:
256 miles per 8 gallons = 256 : 8
The unit rate is 256/8 : 1 = 32 : 1

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) pound : 5 days

Answer:
1/10 pounds for 1 day

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) pound : 5 days = 1/2 : 5
The unit rate is 1/2/5 : 1
= 1/10 : 1

Question 12.
4 grams for every \(\frac{3}{4}\) serving

Answer:
16/3 grams per serving

Explanation:
4 grams for every \(\frac{3}{4}\) serving = 4 : 3/4
The unit rate is = 4 x (4/3) : 1
= 16/3 : 1

Question 13.
$9.60 for 4 pounds

Answer:
$2.4 per 1 pound

Explanation:
$9.60 for 4 pounds = 9.60 : 4
The unit rate is 9.60/4 : 1
= 2.4 : 1

Question 14.
$4.80 for 6 cans

Answer:
$0.8 per 1 can

Explanation:
$4.80 for 6 cans = 4.80 : 6
The unit rate is 4.80/6 : 1
= 0.8 : 1

Question 15.
297 words in 5.5 minutes

Answer:
54 words in 1 minute

Explanation:
297 words in 5.5 minutes = 297 : 5.5
The unit rate is 297/5.5 : 1
= 54 : 1

Question 16.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) kilogram: \(\frac{2}{3}\) foot

Answer:
1/2 kilogram per 1 foot

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\) kilogram: \(\frac{2}{3}\) foot = 1/3 : 2/3
The unit rate is 1/3 x (3/2) : 1
= 1/2 : 1

Question 17.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) ounce per \(\frac{1}{4}\) pint

Answer:
5/2 ounce per 1 pint

Explanation:
\(\frac{5}{8}\) ounce per \(\frac{1}{4}\) pint = 5/8 : 1/4
The unit rate is 5/8 x 4 : 1
= 5/2 : 1

Question 18.
21\(\frac{3}{4}\) meters in 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours

Answer:
87 meters in 1 hour

Explanation:
21\(\frac{3}{4}\) meters in 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours = 21(3/4) : 2(1/2)
= 87/4 : 5/2
The unit rate is 87/4 x (2/5) : 1
= 87/10 : 1

USING TOOLS Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 11

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 5
The equivalent ratios are 25 : 1/3, 50 : 2/3, 75 : 1, 100 : 4/3

Explanation:
To find the missing values,
25 . x = 50
x = 50/25 = 2
1/3 . 2 = 2/3 = servings
1/3 . y = 1
y = 3
25 . 3 = 75 = calories1
1/3 . z = 4/3
z = 4
25 . 4 = 100 = calories2
The equivalent ratios are 25 : 1/3, 50 : 2/3, 75 : 1, 100 : 4/3

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 12

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 4
The equivalent ratios are 4 : 3/4, 4/3 : 1/4, 16/3 : 1, 16 : 3

Explanation:
To find the missing values,
4x = 4/3
x = 1/3
3/4 . 1/3 = 1/4 = time1
3/4 y = 1
y = 4/3
4 . 4/3 = 16/3 = oxygen
4z = 16
z = 16/4 = 4
3/4 . 4 = 3 = time2
The equivalent ratios are 4 : 3/4, 4/3 : 1/4, 16/3 : 1, 16 : 3

Question 21.
PROBLEM SOLVING
In January 2012, the U.S.population was about 313 million people. In January 2017, it was about 324 million. What was the average rate of population change per year?

Answer:
The average rate of population change per year = 2.2 million

Explanation:
In January 2012, the U.S.population was about 313 million people
In January 2017, it was about 324 million
After 5 years, the population change = 324 – 313 = 11 million
The average rate of population change per year = 11/5 = 2.2 million

Question 22.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You can sand \(\frac{4}{9}\) square yard of wood in \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour. How many square yards can you sand in 3.2 hours? Justify your answer.

Answer:
128/45 square yards can you sand in 3.2 hours.

Explanation:
You can sand \(\frac{4}{9}\) square yard of wood in \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour
In 3.2 hours, you can sand 4/9 x 3.2 x 2 sq yads
= 25.6/9 = 128/45
So, 128/45 square yards can you sand in 3.2 hours.

Question 23.
REASONING
Tell whether the rates are equivalent. Justify your answer.
Question 23.
75 pounds per 1.5 years
38.4 ounces per 0.75 year

Answer:
Rates are not equivalent.

Explanation:
75 pounds per 1.5 years = 75 : 1.5
= 750/15 = 50
38.4 ounces per 0.75 year = 38.4 : 0.75
= 384 : 7.5 = 51.2
So, rates are not equivalent

Question 24.
7\(\frac{1}{2}\) miles for every \(\frac{3}{4}\) hour
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mile for every 3 minutes

Answer:
Rates are not equivalent.

Explanation:
7\(\frac{1}{2}\) miles for every \(\frac{3}{4}\) hour = 7(1/2) : 3/4
= 15/2 : 3/4
= 15/2 . 4/3 = 10
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mile for every 3 minutes = 1/2 : 3
= 1 : 6
So, rates are not equivalent

Question 25.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table shows nutritional information for three beverages.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 13
a. Which has the most calories per fluid ounce?
b. Which has the least sodium per fluid ounce?

Answer:
a. whole milk has the most calories per fluid ounce
b. Oange juice has the least sodium per fluid ounce.

Explanation:
a.
Convert serving size to fluid ounce
Whole Milk = 1 c = 8 fl oz
Orange juice = 1 pt = 16 fl oz
Whole milk = 146 : 8 = 146/8 : 1
= 18.25
There are 18.25 calories in 1 fluid ounce of Whole Milk.
Orange juice = 210 : 16 = 210/16 : 1
= 13.125
There are 13.125 calories in 1 fluid ounce of Orange Juice.
Apple juice = 351 : 24
= 351/24 : 1
There are 14.625 calories in 1 fluid ounce of Apple Juice.
So, whole milk has the most calories per fluid ounce
b. Whole milk = 98 : 8
= 98/8 : 1
= 12.25
Orange juice = 10 : 16
= 10/16 : 1
= 0.625
Apple juice = 21 : 24
= 21/24 : 1
= 0.875
So, orange juice has the least sodium per fluid ounce.

Question 26.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A shuttle leaving Earth’s atmosphere travels 15 miles every 2 seconds. When entering the Earth’s atmosphere, the shuttle travels 2\(\frac{3}{8}\) miles per \(\frac{1}{2}\) second. Find the difference in the distances traveled after 15 seconds when leaving and entering the atmosphere.

Answer:
The difference in the distances traveled is 2503 miles.

Explanation:
A shuttle leaving Earth’s atmosphere travels 15 miles every 2 seconds. = 15 : 2
= 15/2 : 1
= 7.5 miles for every second
When entering the Earth’s atmosphere, the shuttle travels 2\(\frac{3}{8}\) miles per \(\frac{1}{2}\) second = 2(3/8) : /2
= 19/8 : 1/2
= 19/8 . 2 = 19/4
= 4.75 miles per second
After 15 minutes = 15 x 60 = 900 seconds,
A shuttle leaving Earth’s atmosphere travels = 7.5 x 900
= 6750 miles
When entering the Earth’s atmosphere, the shuttle travels = 4.75 x 900
= 4247 miles
The difference in the distances traveled = 6750 – 4247
= 2503 miles

Question 27.
RESEARCH
Fire hydrants are one of four different colors to indicate the rate at which water comes from the hydrant.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 14
a. Use the Internet to find the ranges of rates indicated by each color.
b. Research why a fire fighter needs to know the rate at which water comes out of a hydrant.

Answer:
a. Blue – 1500 or more gallons per minute
Green – 1000 to 1499 gallons per minute
Red – Less than 500 gallons per minute
Orange – 500 to 999 gallons per minute
b. Fire hydrants are flow-tested at a residual pressure of 20 psi. Therefore, firefighters should understand the typical flow rates of fire hydrants at a pressure. They should not expect that the fire hydrant will be supplied at an increased pressure, resulting in a greater flow rate.

Explanation:
a. Blue – 1500 or more gallons per minute
Green – 1000 to 1499 gallons per minute
Red – Less than 500 gallons per minute
Orange – 500 to 999 gallons per minute

Question 28.
DIG DEEPER!
You and a friend start riding bikes toward each other from opposite ends of a 24-mile biking route. You ride 2\(\frac{1}{6}\) miles every \(\frac{1}{4}\) hour. Your friend rides 7\(\frac{1}{3}\) miles per hour.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.2 15
a. After how many hours do you meet?
b. When you meet, who has traveled farther? How much farther?

Answer:
a. They meet after 1(1/2) hour.
b. You have traveled farther 2 miles.

Explanation:
You ride 2\(\frac{1}{6}\) miles every \(\frac{1}{4}\) hour.
= 2(1/6) : 1/4
= 13/6 : 1/4
= 13/6 . 4 = (13 . 2)/3 = 26/3 : 1
Your friend rides 7\(\frac{1}{3}\) miles per hour.
= 7(1/3) : 1
= 22/3 : 1
After 1 hour, you traveled = 26/3 miles, your friend traveled 22/3 miles
= 26/3 + 22/3 = 48/3
= 16 miles
Since you and your friend moving towards each other at 16 miles per hour
we can write 24/16 = 3/2 = 1.5 hours.
So, they meet after 1(1/2) hour.
b. You have traveled 26/3 (1.5) = 13 miles at the time of the meeting
Your friend has traveled 22/3 (1.5) = 11 miles at the time of the meeting.
You have traveled farther 2 miles.

Lesson 5.3 Identifying Proportional Relationships

EXPLORATION 1

Determining Proportional Relationships
Work with a partner.
a. You can paint 50 square feet of a surface every 40 minutes. How long does it take you to paint the mural shown? Explain how you found your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 1
b. The number of square feet you paint is proportional to the number of minutes it takes you. What do you think it means for a quantity to be proportional to another quantity?
c. Assume your friends paint at the same rate as you. The table shows how long it takes you and different numbers of friends to paint a fence. Is x proportional to y in the table? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 2
d. How long will it take you and four friends to paint the fence? Explain how you found your answer.

Answer:
a. It takes 3 hours to paint the mural.
b. It means if the number of squares feet increases or decreases then the number of minutes to paint also increases or decreases respectively.
c. x is not proportional to y.

Explanation:
a. The area of mural = 25 x 9 = 225 sq ft
You can paint 50 square feet of a surface every 40 minutes
To paint the given mural it takes (40 x 225)/50 = 180 minutes = 3 hours
b. The number of square feet you paint is proportional to the number of minutes it takes you.
It means if the number of squares feet increases or decreases then the number of minutes to paint also increases or decreases respectively.
c. x : y = 1 : 4, 2 : 2 = 1 : 1
3 : 4/3 = 9 : 4, 4 : 1
All those are not equa so, x is not proportional to y.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 3

Try It

Tell whether the ratios form a proportion.
Question 1.
1 : 2 and 5 : 10

Answer:
1 : 2 and 5 : 10 form a proportion.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
1/2
5/10 = (5 ÷ 5) / (10 ÷ 5) = 1/2
The values of the ratios are equivalent
So, 1 : 2 and 5 : 10 form a proportion.

Question 2.
4 : 6 and 18 : 24

Answer:
4 : 6 and 18 : 24 do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
4/6 = (4 ÷ 2)/(6 ÷ 2) = 2/3
18/24 = (18 ÷ 6)/(24 ÷ 6) = 3/4
The values of the ratios are not equivalent
So, 4 : 6 and 18 : 24 do not form a proportion.

Question 3.
4.5 to 3 and 6 to 9

Answer:
4.5 to 3 and 6 to 9 do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
4.5/3 = 45/30
= (45 ÷ 15) / (30 ÷ 15) =3/2
6/9 = (6 ÷ 3) / (9 ÷ 3)
= 2/3
The values of the ratios are not equivalent
So, 4.5 to 3 and 6 to 9 do not form a proportion.

Question 4.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) to \(\frac{1}{4}\) and 8 to 4

Answer:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) to \(\frac{1}{4}\) and 8 to 4 form a proportion

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
1/2 : 1/4 = (1/2) / (1/4)
= 1/2 . 4 = 2 : 1
8 : 4 = (8 ÷ 4) / (4 ÷ 4) = 2 : 1
The values of the ratios are equivalent
So, \(\frac{1}{2}\) to \(\frac{1}{4}\) and 8 to 4 form a proportion

Tell whether the ratios form a proportion.
Question 5.
6 : 2 and 12 : 1

Answer:
6 : 2 and 12 : 1 do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
6 : 2 = (6 ÷ 2) : (2 ÷ 2) = 3 : 1
12 : 1 = (12 ÷ 1) : (1 ÷ 1) = 12 : 1
The values of the ratios are not equivalent
So, 6 : 2 and 12 : 1 do not form a proportion.

Question 6.
8 : 12 and \(\frac{2}{3}\) : 1

Answer:
8 : 12 and \(\frac{2}{3}\) : 1 form a proportion

Explanation:
Use the cross product property to determine whether the ratios form a proportion.
8/12 = 2/3 : 1
8/12 = 2/3
8 . 3 = 12 . 2
24 = 24
The cross productsare equal.
So, 8 : 12 and \(\frac{2}{3}\) : 1 form a proportion

Tell whether x and y are proportional.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 4

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
1/2, 2/4 = 1/2, 3/6 = 1/2, 4/8 = 1/2
The values of the ratios are equivalent.
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 5

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
2/4 = 1/2, 4/2 = 2, 6/1 = 6, 8/1/2 = 16, 10/1/4 = 40
The values of the ratios are not equivalent.
So, x and y are not proportional.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

PROPORTIONS Tell whether the ratios form a proportion.
Question 9.
4 : 14 and 12 : 40

Answer:
4 : 14 and 12 : 40 do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
Use the cross product property to determine whether the ratios form a proportion.
4/14 = 12/40
Cross multiply
4 . 40 = 12 . 14
160 ≠ 168
The cross products are not equal
So, 4 : 14 and 12 : 40 do not form a proportion

Question 10.
9 : 3 and 45 : 15

Answer:
9 : 3 and 45 : 15 form a proportion.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
9/3 = (9 ÷ 3) / (3 ÷ 3) = 3/1
45/15 = (45 ÷ 15) / (15 ÷ 15) = 3/1
The ratios are equivalent
So, 9 : 3 and 45 : 15 form a proportion

Question 11.
VOCABULARY
Explain how to determine whether two quantities are proportional.

Answer:
The two quantities are proportional means they are having equivalent ratios.

Question 12.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which ratio does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 6

Answer:
3/5 does not belong with the other three.

Explanation:
4/10 = 2/5
2/5
3/5
6/15 = 2/5
So, 3/5 does not belong with the other three.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 13.
After making 20 servings of pasta, a chef has used 30 cloves of garlic. The chef used 6 cloves to make the first 4 servings. How many cloves of garlic are used to make 10 servings? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 7

Answer:
15 cloves of garlic are used to make 10 servings?

Explanation:
After making 20 servings of pasta, a chef has used 30 cloves of garlic.
The ratio of garlic cloves to serving of pasta = 30 : 20
= 30/20 : 1
= 3/2 : 1
The chef used 6 cloves to make the first 4 servings
The ratio of garlic cloves to serving of pasta = 6 : 4
= 6/4 : 1
= 3/2 : 1
It means 1.5 garlic cloves are used to make 1 serving.
The ratios are proportional
So, to make 10 servings, multiply 1.5 by 10
= 1.5 x 10 = 15 cloves
Therefore, 15 cloves of garlic are used to make 10 servings.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
A runner completes a 25-mile race in 5 hours. The runner completes the first 7.5 miles in 1.5 hours.
a. Do these rates form a proportion? Justify your answer.
b. Can you determine, with certainty, the time it took the runner to complete 10 miles? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
a. Yes, these form a proportion
b. It takes 2 hours for the runner to complete 10 miles.

Explanation:
a. A runner completes a 25-mile race in 5 hours.
The ratio of miles to hours = 25 : 5
= 25/5 : 1
= 5 : 1
The runner completes the first 7.5 miles in 1.5 hours.
The ratio of miles to hours = 7.5/1.5
= 75/15 : 1
= 5 : 1
It means the runner completes 5 miles in 1 hour
The ratios are proportional
b. So, it takes 10/5 = 2 hours for the runner to complete 10 miles.

Identifying Proportional Relationships Homework & Practice 5.3

Review & Refresh

Find the unit rate.
Question 1.
30 inches per 5 years

Answer:
6 inches per 1 year

Explanation:
30 inches per 5 years = 30 : 5
= 30/5 : 1
= 6 : 1
6 inches per 1 year

Question 2.
486 games every 3 seasons

Answer:
162 games every season

Explanation:
486 games every 3 seasons = 486 : 3
= 486/3 : 1
= 162 : 1
162 games every season

Question 3.
8750 steps every 1.25 hours

Answer:
7000 steps every hour

Explanation:
8750 steps every 1.25 hours = 8750 : 1.25
= 8750/1.25 : 1
= 7000 : 1
7000 steps every hour

Question 4.
3.75 pints out of every 5 gallons

Answer:
0.75 prints out of every gallon

Explanation:
3.75 pints out of every 5 gallons = 3.75 : 5
= 3.75/5 : 1
= 3/4 : 1
0.75 prints out of every gallon

Add or subtract.
Question 5.
– 28 + 15

Answer:
– 28 + 15 = -13

Explanation:
– 28 + 15 = -13

Question 6.
– 6 + (- 11)

Answer:
– 6 + (- 11) = -17

Explanation:
– 6 + (- 11) = -6 – 11
= -17

Question 7.
– 10 – 8

Answer:
– 10 – 8 = -18

Explanation:
– 10 – 8 = -18

Question 8.
– 17 – (- 14)

Answer:
– 17 – (- 14) = -3

Explanation:
– 17 – (- 14) = -17 + 14
= -3

Solve the equation.
Question 9.
\(\frac{x}{6}\) = 25

Answer:
x = 150

Explanation:
\(\frac{x}{6}\) = 25
Multiply both sides by 6
x/6 • 6 = 25 • 6
x = 150

Question 10.
8x = 72

Answer:
x = 9

Explanation:
8x = 72
Divide both sides by 8
8x/8 = 72/8
x = 9

Question 11.
150 = 2x

Answer:
x = 75

Explanation:
150 = 2x
Divide both sides by 2
150/2 = 2x/2
75 = x

Question 12.
35 = \(\frac{x}{4}\)

Answer:
x = 140

Explanation:
35 = \(\frac{x}{4}\)
Multiply both sides by 4
35 • 4 = x/4 • 4
140 = x

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

REASONING You can paint 75 square feet of a surface every 45 minutes. Determine how long it takes you to paint a wall with the given dimensions. (See Exploration 1, p. 195.)
Question 13.
8 ft × 5 ft

Answer:
24 minutes

Explanation:
You can paint 75 square feet of a surface every 45 minutes
= 75 : 45
= 75/45 : 1
= 5/3 : 1
So, you can paint 5/3 sq feet of a surface in 1 minute.
The given area is 8 ft × 5 ft = 40 sq ft
Divide 40 by 5/3
= 40 / 5/3
= 40 . 3/5
= 24 minutes

Question 14.
7 ft × 6 ft

Answer:
25 minutes 12 seconds

Explanation:
The given area is 7 ft × 6 ft = 42 sq ft
Divide 42 by 5/3
= 42/5/3
= 42 . 3/5
= 126/5
= 25(1/5)
= 25 minutes 12 seconds

Question 15.
9 ft × 9 ft

Answer:
48 minutes 36 seconds

Explanation:
The given area is 9 ft × 9 ft = 81 sq ft
Divide 81 by 5/3
= 81/5/3
= 81 . 3/5
= 243/5
= 48(3/5)
= 48 minutes 36 seconds

PROPORTIONS Tell whether the ratios form a proportion.
Question 16.
1 to 3 and 7 to 21

Answer:
1 to 3 and 7 to 21 form a proportion.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
1 to 3 = 1 : 3
7 to 21 = 7 : 21
= (7 ÷ 7) : (21 ÷ 7)
= 1 : 3
The ratios are equivalent
So, 1 to 3 and 7 to 21 form a proportion.

Question 17.
1 : 5 and 6 : 30

Answer:
1 : 5 and 6 : 30 form a proportion

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
1 : 5 = 1/5
6 : 30 = (6 ÷ 6) : (30 ÷ 6)
= 1/5
The ratios are equivalent
So, 1 : 5 and 6 : 30 form a proportion

Question 18.
3 to 4 and 24 to 18

Answer:
3 to 4 and 24 to 18 do not form a proportion

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
3 to 24 = 3 : 24
= (3 ÷ 3) : (24 ÷ 3)
= 1 : 8
24 to 18 = 24 : 18
= (24 ÷ 6) : (18 ÷ 6)
= 4 : 3
The ratios are not equivalent
So, 3 to 4 and 24 to 18 do not form a proportion

Question 19.
3.5 : 2 and 14 : 8

Answer:
3.5 : 2 and 14 : 8 do not form a proportion

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
35 : 2 = 35/2
14 : 8 = (14 ÷ 2) : (8 ÷ 2)
= 7 : 4 = 7/4
The ratios are not equivalent
So, 3.5 : 2 and 14 : 8 do not form a proportion

Question 20.
24: 30 and 3 : \(\frac{7}{2}\)

Answer:
24: 30 and 3 : \(\frac{7}{2}\) do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
24 : 30 = 24/30
= (24 ÷ 2)/(30 ÷ 2)
= 12/15
3 : 7/2 = 6 : 7
= 6/7
The ratios are not equivalent
So, 24: 30 and 3 : \(\frac{7}{2}\) do not form a proportion.

Question 21.
\(\frac{21}{2}\) : 3 and 16 : 6

Answer:
\(\frac{21}{2}\) : 3 and 16 : 6 do not form a proportion.

Explanation:

21/2 : 3 = 21 : 6
= (21 ÷ 3) : (6 ÷ 3)
= 7 : 2
16 : 6 = (16 ÷ 2) : (6 ÷ 2)
= 8 : 3
The ratios are not equivalent
So, \(\frac{21}{2}\) : 3 and 16 : 6 do not form a proportion.

Question 22.
0.6 : 0.5 and 12 : 10

Answer:
0.6 : 0.5 and 12 : 10 form a proportion

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
0.6 : 0.5 = 6/5
12 : 10 = (12 ÷ 2) : (10 ÷ 2)
= 6 : 5
The ratios are equivalent
So, 0.6 : 0.5 and 12 : 10 form a proportion

Question 23.
2 to 4 and 11 to \(\frac{11}{2}\)

Answer:
2 to 4 and 11 to \(\frac{11}{2}\) do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
2 to 4 = 2 : 4
= (2 ÷ 2) : (4 ÷ 2)
= 1 : 2
11 to \(\frac{11}{2}\) = 11 : 11/2
= 22 : 11
= (22 ÷ 11) : (11 ÷ 11)
= 2 : 1
The ratios are not equivalent
So, 2 to 4 and 11 to \(\frac{11}{2}\) do not form a proportion.

Question 24
\(\frac{5}{8}\) : \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{1}{4}\) : \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer:
\(\frac{5}{8}\) : \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{1}{4}\) : \(\frac{1}{3}\) do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios
\(\frac{5}{8}\) : \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 5/8 / 2/3
= 5/8 . 3/2
= 15/16
\(\frac{1}{4}\) : \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 1/4 / 1/3
= 1/4 . 3 = 3/4
The ratios are not equivalent
So, \(\frac{5}{8}\) : \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{1}{4}\) : \(\frac{1}{3}\) do not form proportion

IDENTIFYING PROPORTIONAL RELATIONSHIPS Tell whether x and y are proportional.
Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 8

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios x to y.
1/7, 2/8 = 1/4, 3/9 = 1/3
The values of the ratios are not equivalent.
So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 9

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios x to y.
2/5, 4/10 = 2/5, 6/15 = 2/5
The values of the ratios are equivalent
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 10

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios x to y.
0.25/4 = 1/16, 0.5/8 = 1/6, 0.75/12 = 1/16
The values of the ratios are equivalent
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 11

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios x to y.
2/3 / 7/10 = 2/3 . 10/7 = 20/21, 1/3/5 = 1/3 . 5 = 5/3
4/3 / 1/2 = 4/3 . 2 = 8/3
The values of the ratios are not equivalent
So, x and y are not proportional.

YOU BE THE TEACHER Your friend determines whether x and y are proportional. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 12

Answer:
Correct.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios x to y.
8 + 1 = 9
3 + 1 = 4
The values of the ratios x to y are equal.
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 13

Answer:
Wrong

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios x to y.
2/6 = 1/3
4/12 = 1/3
8/18 = 4/9
The values of the ratios x to y are not equal.
So, x and y are not proportional.

PROPORTIONS Tell whether the rates form a proportion.
Question 31.
7 inches in 9 hours;
42 inches in 54 hours

Answer:
Ratios form a proportion.

Explanation:
7 inches in 9 hours = 7 : 9
42 inches in 54 hours = 42 : 54
= (42 ÷ 6) : (54 ÷ 6)
= 7 : 9
The ratios are equivalent
So, ratios form a proportion.

Question 32.
12 players from 21 teams;
15 players from 24 teams

Answer:
The ratios do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
12 players from 21 teams; = 12 : 21
= (12 ÷ 3) : (21 ÷ 3)
= 4 : 7
15 players from 24 teams = 15 : 24
= (15 ÷ 3) : (24 ÷ 3)
= 5 : 8
The ratios are not equivalent
So, ratios do not form a proportion.

Question 33.
385 calories in 3.5 servings; 300 calories in 3 servings

Answer:
385 calories in 3.5 servings; 300 calories in 3 servings do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
385 calories in 3.5 servings = 385 : 3.5
= 110
300 calories in 3 servings = 300 : 3
= 100
The ratios are not equivalent
So, 385 calories in 3.5 servings; 300 calories in 3 servings do not form a proportion.

Question 34.
4.8 laps every 8 minutes; 3.6 laps every 6 minutes

Answer:
4.8 laps every 8 minutes; 3.6 laps every 6 minutes form a proportion.

Explanation:
4.8 laps every 8 minutes = 4.8 : 8
= (4.8 ÷ 8) : (8 ÷ 8)
= 3/5 : 1
3.6 laps every 6 minutes = 3.6 : 6
= (3.6 ÷ 6) : (6 ÷ 6)
= 3/5 : 1
The ratios are equivalent
So, 4.8 laps every 8 minutes; 3.6 laps every 6 minutes form a proportion.

Question 35.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) pound for every 5 gallons; \(\frac{4}{5}\) pound for every 5\(\frac{1}{3}\) gallons

Answer:
\(\frac{3}{4}\) pound for every 5 gallons; \(\frac{4}{5}\) pound for every 5\(\frac{1}{3}\) gallons do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\) pound for every 5 gallons = 3/4 : 5
= 3 : 20
\(\frac{4}{5}\) pound for every 5\(\frac{1}{3}\) gallons = 4/5 : 5(1/3)
= 4/5 : 16/3
= 4/5 . 3/16
= 15/16
The ratios are not equivalent
So, \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound for every 5 gallons; \(\frac{4}{5}\) pound for every 5\(\frac{1}{3}\) gallons do not form a proportion.

Question 36.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You do 90 sit-ups in 2 minutes. Your friend does 126 sit-ups in 2.8 minutes. Do these rates form a proportion? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 14

Answer:
The rates form a proportion

Explanation:
You do 90 sit-ups in 2 minutes = 90/2
= 45 sit-ups in 1 minute
Your friend does 126 sit-ups in 2.8 minutes = 126/2.8
= 45 sit-ups in 1 minute
They are equivalent.
So, the rates form a proportion

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Find the heart rates of you and your friend. Do these rates form a proportion? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 15

Answer:
The rates do not form a proportion

Explanation:
Your heart rate = 22/20
= 11/10
Your friend heat rate = 18/15 = 6/5
The ratios are not equivalent
So, the rates do not form a proportion

Question 38.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You earn $56 walking your neighbor’s dog for 8 hours. Your friend earns $36 painting your neighbor’s fence for 4 hours. Are the pay rates equivalent? Explain.

Answer:
The pay rates are not equivalent.

Explanation:
You earn $56 walking your neighbor’s dog for 8 hours.
= 56 : 8
= 7
Your friend earns $36 painting your neighbor’s fence for 4 hours
= 36 : 4
= 9
So, the pay rates are not equivalent.

Question 39.
GEOMETRY
Are the heights and bases of the two triangles proportional? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 16

Answer:
The heights and bases of the two triangles proportional

Explanation:
Height to base of first triangle = 12 : 15
= (12 ÷ 3) : (15 ÷ 3)
= 4 : 5
Height to base of second triangle = 8 : 10
= (8 ÷ 2) : (10 ÷ 5)
= 4 : 5
The ratios are equivalent
So, the heights and bases of the two triangles proportional

Question 40.
REASONING
A pitcher coming back from an injury limits the number of pitches thrown in bullpen sessions as shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 17
a. Which quantities are proportional?
b. How many pitches that are not curveballs will the pitcher likely throw in Session 5?

Answer:
a. None of the quantities are proportional.
b. Curveballs are 20, pitches are 50.

Explanation:
a. By observing the table we can say that,
None of the quantities are proportional.
b. In session 5, the pitches are 5 . 10 = 50
curveballs are 5 . 4 = 20

Question 41.
STRUCTURE
You add the same numbers of pennies and dimes to the coins shown. Is the new ratio of pennies to dimes proportional to the original ratio of pennies to dimes? If so, illustrate your answer with an example. If not, show why with a counterexample.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 18

Answer:
The new ratio of pennies to dimes is not proportional to the original ratio of pennies to dimes.

Explanation:
Number of pennies to dimes in image a = 3 : 2
Number of pennies to dimes in image b = 4 : 4
= 1 : 1
The ratios are not equivalent
So, the new ratio of pennies to dimes is not proportional to the original ratio of pennies to dimes.

Question 42.
REASONING
You are 13 years old, and your cousin is 19 years old. As you grow older, is your age proportional to your cousin’s age? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
Your age is not proportional to your cousin’s age

Explanation:
You are 13 years old, and your cousin is 19 years old.
= 13 : 19
As you grow older
Suppose after 3 years the ratio is (13 + 3) / (19 + 3) = 16/21
13/19≠ 16/21
So, your age is not proportional to your cousin’s age

Question 43.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The shadow of the moon during a solar eclipse travels 2300 miles in 1 hour. In the first 20 minutes, the shadow traveled 766\(\frac{2}{3}\) miles. How long does it take for the shadow to travel 1150 miles? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 19

Answer:
It takes 30 minutes for the shadow to travel 1150 miles

Explanation:
The shadow of the moon during a solar eclipse travels 2300 miles in 1 hour
= 2300 : 1
In the first 20 minutes, the shadow traveled 766\(\frac{2}{3}\) miles.
= 766(2/3) : 20
= 2300/3 : 20
So, it travels 2300/3 miles in 20 minutes
The time taken for the shadow to travel 1150 miles is 1150 . 20 x (3/2300)
= 69000/2300
= 30
Therefore, The time taken for the shadow to travel 1150 miles is 30 minutes

Question 44.
MODELING REAL LIFE
In 60 seconds, a car in a parade travels 0.2 mile. The car traveled the last 0.05 mile in 12 seconds. How long did it take for the car to travel 0.1 mile? Justify your answer.

Answer:
It takes 32 seconds for the car to travel 0.1 mile.

Explanation:
In 60 seconds, a car in a parade travels 0.2 mile.
Car travels to time = 0.2 : 60
The car traveled the last 0.05 mile in 12 seconds
= 0.05 : 12
So, the car travels (0.2 – 0.05 = 0.15 miles) in (60 – 12 = 48 seconds)
The time taken to travel 0.1 mile = (48 x 0.1)/0.15 = 32 seconds.

Question 45.
OPEN-ENDED
Describe (a) a real-life situation where you expect two quantities to be proportional and (b) a real-life situation where you do not expect two quantities to be proportional. Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
(a) We will the real-life situation as the relationship between the number of gallons of fuel that we put in the tank and the amount of money we have to pay.
(b) The real-life situation is 2 persons buy different items at a store and pay amount.

Explanation:
(a) Let us take two people to put fuel their cars. Person 1 puts 5 gallons of fuel and pays 20 dollars.
Person 2 puts 8 gallons of fuel pays 32 dollars.
The ratio to the number of gallons to dollars is 5 : 20, 8 : 32
= 1 : 4, 1 : 4
So, the ratios are proportional.
(b) Let us assume 2 persons buy different products at the store and pays the bill.
Person 1 buys 2 items per 15 dollars and person 2 buys 4 items for 32 dollars.

Question 46.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A specific shade of red nail polish requires 7 parts red to 2 parts yellow. A mixture contains 35 quarts of red and 8 quarts of yellow. Is the mixture the correct shade? If so, justify your answer. If not, explain how you can fix the mixture to make the correct shade of red.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 20

Answer:
To fix the mixture add 2 more quarts of yellow.

Explanation:
The ratio of nail polish = 7/2 = (7 . 5) / (2 . 5) = 35/10 red/yellow
The ratio of mixture = 35/8 red/yellow
To fix the mixture make the two ratios 35/10 and 35/8 equivalent
Add 2 more quarts of yellow to the mixture
35/10 = 35/(8 + 2)
To fix the mixture add 2 more quarts of yellow.

Question 47.
LOGIC
The quantities x and y are proportional. Use each of the integers 1–5 to complete the table. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 21

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.3 1

Explanation:
The quantities x and y are proportional.
Let us take x/2 = y
So, 10/2 = 5
6/2 = 3
0.5 x 2 = 1
4/2 = 2

Question 48.
CRITICAL THINKING
Ratio A and Ratio B form a proportion. Ratio B and Ratio C also form a proportion. Do Ratio A and Ratio C form a proportion? Justify your answer.

Answer:
Ratio A and Ratio C form a proportion.

Explanation:
Ratio A and Ratio B form a proportion
Ratio B and Ratio C also form a proportion
So, Ratio A : Ratio B = Ratio B : Ratio C
Ratio A = (Ratio B)/Ratio C x Ratio B
Ratio C = (Ratio B x Ratio B)/Ratio A
Ratio A : Ratio C = [(Ratio B)/Ratio C x Ratio B] : [(Ratio B x Ratio B)/Ratio A]
= 1/Ratio C : 1/Ratio A
= Ratio A : Ratio C
So, Ratio A and Ratio C form a proportion

Lesson 5.4 Writing and Solving Proportions

EXPLORATION 1

Solving a Ratio Problem
Work with a partner. A train travels 50 miles every 40 minutes. To determine the number of miles the train travels in 90 minutes, your friend creates the following table.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 1
a. Explain how you can find the value of x.
b. Can you use the information in the table to write a proportion? If so, explain how you can use the proportion to find the value of x. If not, explain why not.
c. How far does the train below travel in 2 hours?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 2
d. Share your results in part(c) with other groups. Compare and contrast methods used to solve the problem.

Answer:
a. x = 112.5
b. yes
c. 120 miles

Explanation:
a. 50/40 = x/90
(50/40) . 90 = x
4500/40 = x
x = 112.5
b. We can use information in the table to write a proportion.
c. The train travels 30 miles in 1/2 hour.
The distance traveled in 2 hours is 30. 2 . 2 = 120 miles

Try It

Solve the proportion.
Question 1.
\(\frac{5}{8}=\frac{20}{d}\)

Answer:
d = 32

Explanation:
\(\frac{5}{8}=\frac{20}{d}\)
cross multiply the fractions
5d = 20 . 8
5d = 160
d = 160/5
d = 32

Question 2.
\(\frac{7}{z}=\frac{14}{10}\)

Answer:
z = 5

Explanation:
\(\frac{7}{z}=\frac{14}{10}\)
cross multiply the fractions
7 . 10 = 14 . z
70 = 14z
70/14 = z
5 = z

Question 3.
\(\frac{21}{24}=\frac{x}{8}\)

Answer:
x = 7

Explanation:
\(\frac{21}{24}=\frac{x}{8}\)
cross multiply the fractions
21 . 8 = 24x
168 = 24x
168/24 = x
x = 7

Solve the proportion.
Question 4.
\(\frac{w}{6}=\frac{6}{9}\)

Answer:
w = 4

Explanation:
\(\frac{w}{6}=\frac{6}{9}\)
cross multiply the fractions
9w = 6 . 6
9w = 36
w = 36/9
w = 4

Question 5.
\(\frac{12}{10}=\frac{a}{15}\)

Answer:
a = 18

Explanation:
\(\frac{12}{10}=\frac{a}{15}\)
cross multiply the fractions
12 . 15 = 10a
180 = 10a
a = 180/10
a = 18

Question 6.
\(\frac{y}{10}=\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer:
y = 6

Explanation:
\(\frac{y}{10}=\frac{3}{5}\)
cross multiply the fractions
5y = 3 . 10
5y = 30
y = 30/5
y = 6

Solve the proportion.
Question 7.
\(\frac{2}{7}=\frac{x}{28}\)

Answer:
x = 8

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{7}=\frac{x}{28}\)
cross multiply the fractions
2 . 28 = 7x
56 = 7x
x = 56/7
x = 8

Question 8.
\(\frac{12}{5}=\frac{6}{y}\)

Answer:
y = 5/2

Explanation:
\(\frac{12}{5}=\frac{6}{y}\)
cross multiply the fractions
12y = 6 . 5
12y = 30
y = 30/12
y = 5/2

Question 9.
\(\frac{40}{z+1}=\frac{15}{6}\)

Answer:
z = 15

Explanation:
\(\frac{40}{z+1}=\frac{15}{6}\)
cross multiply the fractions
40 . 6 = 15(z + 1)
240 = 15z + 15
240 – 15 = 15z
225 = 15z
z = 225/15
z = 15

Find the value of x so that the ratios are equivalent.
Question 10.
2 : 4 and x : 6

Answer:
x = 3

Explanation:
2/4 = x/6
cross multiply the fractions
2 . 6 = 4x
12 = 4x
x = 12/4
x = 3

Question 11.
x : 5 and 8 : 2

Answer:
x = 20

Explanation:
x/5 = 8/2
x/5 = 4
x = 4 . 5
x = 20

Question 12.
4 to 3 and 10 to x

Answer:
x = 15/2

Explanation:
4/3 = 10/x
cross multiply the fractions
4x = 3 . 10
4x = 30
x = 30/4
x = 15/2

Question 13.
Write a proportion that can be used to find the number of tomatoes in the new recipe.

Answer:
The number of tomatoes in the new recipe are 4.

Explanation:
In the original recipe, the ratio of the black beans to the number of tomatoes is 1.5 : 1
For the new recipe to be proportional to the original recipe, these ratios must be equivalent.
So the vales of the ratios must be equal
1.5/1 = 6/x
1.5 = 6/x
1.5x = 6
x = 6/1.5
x = 4

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

SOLVING A PROPORTION Solve the proportion.
Question 14.
\(\frac{5}{12}=\frac{b}{36}\)

Answer:
b = 15

Explanation:
\(\frac{5}{12}=\frac{b}{36}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
(5 x 36) = 12b
180 = 12b
b = 180/12
b = 15

Question 15.
\(\frac{6}{p}=\frac{42}{35}\)

Answer:
p = 5

Explanation:
\(\frac{6}{p}=\frac{42}{35}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
6 x 35 = 42p
210 = 42p
p = 210/42
p = 5

Question 16.
WRITING AND SOLVING A PROPORTION
Find the value of x so that the ratios x : 9 and 5 : 6 are equivalent.

Answer:
x = 15/2

Explanation:
The ratios x : 9 and 5 : 6 are equivalent.
x/9 = 5/6
Cross multiply the fractionsx
6x = 9 . 5
6x = 45
x = 45/6
x = 15/2

Question 17.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 3

Answer:
Solve 12/x = 3/8 is different, x = 32
For remaining x = 2

Explanation:
3/x = 12/8
3 • 8 = 12x
24 = 12x
x = 2
3 : x and 12 : 8 are equivalent
3/x = 12/8
So, x = 2
3 : 12 and x : 8 are equivalent
3/12 = x/8
3 • 8 = 12x
x = 2
12/x = 3/8
12 • 8 = 3x
3x= 96
x = 96/3 = 32

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 18.
You burn 35 calories every 3 minutes running on a treadmill. You want to run for at least 15 minutes, but no more than 30 minutes. What are the possible numbers of calories that you will burn? Justify your answer.

Answer:
The possible number of calories burned in between 560/3 and 350.

Explanation:
You burn 35 calories every 3 minutes running on a treadmill.
35 : 3
= 35/3 : 1
You want to run for at least 15 minutes, but no more than 30 minutes means you want to run in between 16 and 30 minutes
If you run for 16 minutes then, the number of calories burn = (35/3) x 16
= 560/3
If you run for 30 minutes, then the number of calories burn = (35/3) x 30
= 1050/3 = 350
So, the possible number of calories burned in between 560/3 and 350.

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
Two boats travel at the same speed to different destinations. Boat A reaches its destination in 12 minutes. Boat B reaches its destination in 18 minutes. Boat B travels 3 miles farther than Boat A. How fast do the boats travel? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 4

Answer:
The boat travels with 1/2 mile/hr.

Explanation:
Boat A reaches its destination in 12 minutes
Boat B reaches its destination in 18 minutes
Let us take the speed as x miles/minute
So, Boat A travels 12x miles
Boat B travels 18x miles
Boat B travels 3 miles farther than Boat A
18x + 3 = 12x
18x – 12x = -3
6x = -3
x = 3/6
x = 1/2 mile/hr
So, the boat travels with 1/2 mile/hr

Writing and Solving Proportions Homework & Practice 5.4

Review & Refresh

Tell whether and are proportional.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 5

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios x to y
4/6 = 2/3
6/8 = 3/4
8/10 = 4/5
The values of the ratios are not equivalent
So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 6

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of the ratios x to y
2/5/3 = 2/15
4/5/6 = 2/15
4/30 = 2/15
The values of the ratios are equivalent
So, x and y are proportional.

Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane.
Question 3.
A (- 5, – 2)

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 1

Explanation:
In point A (- 5, – 2)
The x coordinate and y coordinate values are negative.
so, the point lies in 3rd quadrant.
Take 5 units on the x-axis, 2 units on the y-axis, and locate the point.

Question 4.
B (- 3, 0)

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 2

Explanation:
In the point B (- 3, 0)
The x coordinate, y coordinates are negative and zero.
So, the point lies in the x-axis.

Question 5.
C (- 1, 2)

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 3

Explanation:
In point C (- 1, 2) has x coordinate negative value and y coordinate positive value.
so, the point lies in the 2nd quadrant.
Take -1 units on the x-axis, 2 units on the y-axis, and mark the point.

Question 6.
D (1, 4)

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 4

Explanation:
In point D (1, 4) the x, y coordinates are positive.
So, the point lies in quadrant 1.
Take 1 unit on the x-axis, 4 units on the y-axis, and mark the point.

Question 7.
Which expression is equivalent to (3w – 8) – 4(2w + 3)?
A. 11w + 4
B. – 5w – 5
C. – 5w + 4
D. – 5w – 20

Answer:
D. – 5w – 20

Explanation:
(3w – 8) – 4(2w + 3) = 3w – 8 – 8w – 12
= -5w -20

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

SOLVING A RATIO PROBLEM Determine how far the vehicle travels in 3 hours. (See Exploration 1, p. 203.)
Question 8.
A helicopter travels 240 miles every 2 hours.

Answer:
The helicopter travels 360 miles in 3 hours.

Explanation:
A helicopter travels 240 miles every 2 hours = 240 : 2
= 240/2 : 1
= 120 : 1
The helicopter travels 120 miles in 1 hour
The distance traveled by the vehicle in 3 hours = 120 * 3
= 360 miles

Question 9.
A motorcycle travels 25 miles every 0.5 hour.

Answer:
A motorcycle travels 150 miles in 3 hours.

Explanation:
A motorcycle travels 25 miles every 0.5 hour = 25 : 0.5
= 25/0.5 : 1
= 50 : 1
The motorcycle travels 50 miles in 1 hour
So, the distance traveled by the vehicle in 3 hours = 50 * 3 = 150 miles

Question 10.
A train travels 10 miles every \(\frac{1}{4}\) hour.

Answer:
A train travels 120 miles in 3 hours.

Explanation:
A train travels 10 miles every \(\frac{1}{4}\) hour = 10 : 1/4
= 4 * 10 : 1
= 40 : 1
A train travels 40 miles in 1 hour
So, the distance traveled by the vehicle in 3 hours = 40 * 3 = 120 miles

Question 11.
A ferry travels 45 miles every 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours.

Answer:
A ferry travels 90 miles in 3 hours

Explanation:
A ferry travels 45 miles every 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours = 45 : 1(1/2)
= 45 : 3/2
= 45 * 2 : 3
= 90 : 3
= 30 : 1
A ferry travels 30 miles in 1 hour
So, the distance traveled by the vehicle in 3 hours = 30 * 3 = 90

SOLVING A PROPORTION Solve the proportion. Explain your choice of method.
Question 12.
\(\frac{1}{4}=\frac{z}{20}\)

Answer:
z = 5

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{4}=\frac{z}{20}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
20 = 4z
z = 20/4
z = 5

Question 13.
\(\frac{3}{4}=\frac{12}{y}\)

Answer:
y = 16

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}=\frac{12}{y}\)
The product of 3 and waht number is 12?
Because the product pf 3 and 4 is 12, multiply the denominator by 4 to find y
4 * 4 = 16
So, y = 16

Question 14.
\(\frac{35}{k}=\frac{7}{3}\)

Answer:
k = 15

Explanation:
\(\frac{35}{k}=\frac{7}{3}\)
Divide both sides by 35
(35/k)/35 = (7/3)/35
1/k = 1/15
k = 15

Question 15.
\(\frac{b}{36}=\frac{5}{9}\)

Answer:
b = 20

Explanation:
\(\frac{b}{36}=\frac{5}{9}\)
Cross multiply the proportions
9b = 5 * 36
9b = 180
b = 180/9
b = 20

Question 16.
\(\frac{x}{8}=\frac{3}{12}\)

Answer:
x = 2

Explanation:
\(\frac{x}{8}=\frac{3}{12}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
12x = 3 * 8
12x = 24
x = 24/12
x = 2

Question 17.
\(\frac{3}{4}=\frac{v}{14}\)

Answer:
v = 21/2

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}=\frac{v}{14}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
3 * 14 = 4v
42 = 4v
v = 42/4
v = 21/2

Question 18.
\(\frac{15}{8}=\frac{45}{c}\)

Answer:
c = 24

Explanation:
\(\frac{15}{8}=\frac{45}{c}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
15c = 45 * 8
15c = 360
c = 360/15
c = 24

Question 19.
\(\frac{35}{28}=\frac{n}{12}\)

Answer:
n = 15

Explanation:
\(\frac{35}{28}=\frac{n}{12}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
35 * 12 = 28n
420 = 28n
n = 420/28
n = 15

Question 20.
\(\frac{a}{6}=\frac{15}{2}\)

Answer:
a = 45

Explanation:
\(\frac{a}{6}=\frac{15}{2}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
2a = 15 * 6
2a = 90
a = 90/2
a = 45

Question 21.
\(\frac{y}{9}=\frac{44}{54}\)

Answer:
y = 22/3

Explanation:
\(\frac{y}{9}=\frac{44}{54}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
54y = 44 * 9
54y = 396
y = 396/54
y = 22/3

Question 22.
\(\frac{4}{24}=\frac{c}{36}\)

Answer:
c = 6

Explanation:
\(\frac{4}{24}=\frac{c}{36}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
4 * 36 = 24c
144 = 24c
c = 144/24
c = 6

Question 23.
\(\frac{20}{16}=\frac{d}{12}\)

Answer:
d = 15

Explanation:
\(\frac{20}{16}=\frac{d}{12}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
20 * 12 = 16d
240 = 16d
d = 240/16
d = 15

Question 24.
\(\frac{10}{7}=\frac{8}{k}\)

Answer:
k = 5.6

Explanation:
Cross multiply the fractions
10k = 8 * 7
10k = 56
k = 56/10
k = 5.6

Question 25.
\(\frac{5}{n}=\frac{16}{32}\)

Answer:
n = 10

Explanation:
\(\frac{5}{n}=\frac{16}{32}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
5 * 32 = 16n
160 = 16n
n = 160/16
n = 10

Question 26.
\(\frac{9}{10}=\frac{d}{6.4}\)

Answer:
d = 5.76

Explanation:
\(\frac{9}{10}=\frac{d}{6.4}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
10d = 6.4 * 9
10d = 57.6
d = 57.6/10
d = 5.76

Question 27.
\(\frac{2.4}{1.8}=\frac{7.2}{k}\)

Answer:
k = 5.4

Explanation:
\(\frac{2.4}{1.8}=\frac{7.2}{k}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
2.4k = 7.2 * 1.8
2.4k = 12.96
k = 12.96/2.4
k = 5.4

Question 28.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend solves the proportion \(\frac{m}{8}=\frac{15}{24}\). Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 7

Answer:
Correct

Explanation:
m/8 = 15/24
Cross multiply the fractions
24m = 15 * 8
24m = 120
m = 120/24
m = 5

Question 29.
NUMBER SENSE
Without solving, determine whether \(\frac{x}{4}=\frac{15}{3}\) and \(\frac{x}{15}=\frac{4}{3}\) have the same solution. Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
Both have same solution.

Explanation:
\(\frac{x}{4}=\frac{15}{3}[/latex
Cross multiply the fractions
3x = 15 * 4
[latex]\frac{x}{15}=\frac{4}{3}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
3x = 4 * 15
We got same equation
So, both have same solution.

WRITING A PROPORTION Use the table to write a proportion.
Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 8

Answer:
6/7 = 18/w, w = 6

Explanation:
12/14 = 18/w
Cross multiply the fractions
12w = 18 * 4
w = 72/12
w = 6
12/14 = 18/w
6/7 = 18/w

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 9

Answer:
n/85 = 1/5, n = 17

Explanation:
n/85 = 34/170
n/85 = 1/5
Cross multiply the fractions
5n = 85
n = 85/5
n = 17

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 10

Answer:
15/2.5 = m/4, m = 24

Explanation:
15/2.5 = m/4
Cross multiply the fractions
15 * 4 = 2.5m
60 = 2.5m
m = 60/2.5
m = 24

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 11

Answer:
x = 11.2

Explanation:
100/x = 200/22.4
Cross multiply the fractions
100 * 22.4 = 200x
2240 = 200x
x = 2240/200
x = 11.2

WRITING AND SOLVING A PROPORTION Find the value of x so that the ratios are equivalent.
Question 34.
1 : 8 and 4 : x

Answer:
x = 32

Explanation:
1/8 = 4/x
Cross multiply the fractions
x = 8 * 4
x = 32

Question 35.
4 to 5 and x to 20

Answer:
x = 16

Explanation:
4/5 = x/20
Cross multiply the fractions
20 * 4 = 5x
80 = 5x
x = 80/5
x = 16

Question 36.
3 : x and 12 : 40

Answer:
x = 10

Explanation:
3/x = 12/40
Cross multiply the fractions
3 * 40 = 12x
120 = 12x
x = 120/12
x = 10

Question 37.
x to 0.25 and 6 to 1.5

Answer:
x = 1

Explanation:
x/0.25 = 6/1.5
Cross multiply the fractions
1.5x = 6 * 0.25
1.5x = 1.5
x = 1.5/1.5
x = 1

Question 38.
x : \(\frac{5}{2}\) and 8 : 10

Answer:
x = 2

Explanation:
x : 5/2 = 8 : 10
Cross multiply the fractions
10x = 8 * 5/2
10x = 20
x = 20/10
x = 2

Question 39.
\(\frac{7}{4}\) to 14 and x to 32

Answer:
x = 4

Explanation:
7/4 : 14 = x : 32
Cross multiply the fractions
14x = 32 * (7/4)
14x = 56
x = 56/14
x = 4

Question 40.
WRITING A PROPORTION
Your science teacher has a photograph of the space shuttle Atlantis. Every 1 centimeter in the photograph represents 200 centimeters on the actual shuttle. Which of the proportions can you use to find the actual length x of Atlantis? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 12

Answer:
1/200 = x/19.5

Explanation:
Every 1 centimeter in the photograph represents 200 centimeters on the actual shuttle
= 1 : 200
Length of atlantis on model = 19.5
The actual length on Atlantis = x
Scale 1:200
When length on model = 1
Actual length = 200
When actual length = x
Length on model = 19.5
Scale = x : 19.5
Equating both scales
1/200 = x/19.5

Question 41.
MODELING REAL LIFE
In an orchestra, the ratio of trombones to violas is 1 to 3. There are 9 violas. How many trombones are in the orchestra?

Answer:
There are 3 trombones in the orchestra.

Explanation:
t/9 = 1/3
3t = 9
t = 9/3
t = 3
There are 3 trombones in the orchestra.

Question 42.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A dance team has 80 dancers. The ratio of seventh-grade dancers to all dancers is 5:16. Find the number of seventh-grade dancers on the team.

Answer:
The number of seventh-grade dancers on the team is 25.

Explanation:
A dance team has 80 dancers
Let us take the seventh-grade dancers as x
The ratio of seventh-grade dancers to all dancers is 5:16
x : 80 = 5 : 16
x/80 = 5/16
Cross multiply the fractions
16x = 5 *80
16x = 400
x = 400/16
x = 25
The number of seventh-grade dancers on the team is 25.

Question 43.
MODELING REAL LIFE
There are 144 people in an audience. The ratio of adults to children is 5 to 3. How many are adults?

Answer:
The number of adults in the audience are 18.

Explanation:
The ratio of adults to children is 5 to 3
adults : children = 5 : 3
There are 144 people in an audience.
5x + 3x = 144
8x = 144
x = 144/8
x = 18
So, the number of adults in the audience are 18.

Question 44.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You have $50 to buy T-shirts. You can buy 3 T-shirts for $24. Do you have enough money to buy 7 T-shirts? Justify your answer.

Answer:
No.

Explanation:
You can buy 3 T-shirts for $24
= 24 : 3
= 24/3 : 1
= 8 : 1
So, you can buy 1 T-shirt per $8.
The money required to buy 7 T-shirts = 7 * 8 = $56
The remaining money after buying 3 T-shirts is 50 – 24 = $26
$26 is not enough to buy 7 T-shirts.

Question 45.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You buy 10 vegetarian pizzas and pay with $100. How much change do you receive?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 13

Answer:
The change you receive = $15

Explanation:
3 vegetarian pizzas for $25.50 = 25.50 : 3
= 25.50/3 : 1
= 8.5 : 1
So, you have to pay $8.5 for 1 vegetarian pizza
If you buy 10 vegetarian pizzas, then amount is 10 * 8.5 = $85
The change you receive = 100 – 85 = 15

Question 46.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A person who weighs 120 pounds on Earth weighs 20 pounds on the Moon. How much does a 93-pound person weigh on the Moon?

Answer:
The weight of a 93-pound person weigh on the Moon is 15.5 pounds

Explanation:
The ratio of a person weight on earth to moon = 120 : 20
= 120/20 : 1
= 6 : 1
The weight of a 93-pound person weigh on the Moon is 93/6 = 31/2 = 15.5 pounds.

Question 47.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Three pounds of lawn seed covers 1800 square feet. How many bags are needed to cover 8400 square feet?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 14

Answer:
The number of bags required to cover 8400 sq ft is 14.

Explanation:
Three pounds of lawn seed covers 1800 square feet.
The ratio of lawn to seed cover = 1800 : 3
= 1800/3 : 1
= 600 : 1
So, 1 seed bag covers 600 sq ft
The number of bags required to cover 8400 sq ft is 8400/600
= 14 bags

Question 48.
MODELING REAL LIFE
There are 180 white lockers in a school. There are 3 white lockers for every 5 blue lockers. How many lockers are in the school?

Answer:
There are 480 lockers in the school.

Explanation:
There are 3 white lockers for every 5 blue lockers
= 3 : 5
Let b be the number of blue lockers
3/5 = 180/b
3b = 180 * 5
3b = 900
b = 900/3
b = 300
300 + 180 = 400
So, there are 480 lockers in the school.

CONVERTING MEASURES Use a proportion to complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 15

Answer:
3.73 miles

Explanation:
1 km = 0.621371
6 km = 6 * 0.621371
= 3.72823 miles
= 3.73 miles

Question 50.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 16

Answer:
0.66 gal

Explanation:
1 L = 0.264172 gal
2.5 L = 0.264172 * 2.5
= 0.66043
2.5 L = 0.66 gal

Question 51.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 17

Answer:
40.82 kg

Explanation:
1 lb = 0.453592 kgs
90 lb = 0.453592 * 90
= 40.8233
90 lb = 40.82 kg

SOLVING A PROPORTION Solve the proportion.
Question 52.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 18

Answer:
x = 3/2

Explanation:
2x/5 = 9/15
Cross-multiply the fractions
15 * 2x = 9 * 5
30x = 45
x = 45/30
x = 3/2

Question 53.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 19

Answer:
d = 12

Explanation:
5/2 = (d – 2)/4
Cross-multiply the fractions
20 = 2(d – 2)
20 = 2d – 4
20 + 4 = 2d
24 = 2d
d = 24/2
d = 12

Question 54.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 20

Answer:
k = 4

Explanation:
4/(k + 3) = 8/14
Cross-multiply the fractions
14 * 4 = 8(k + 3)
56 = 8k + 24
56 – 24 = 8k
32 = 8k
k = 32/8
k = 4

Question 55.
LOGIC
It takes 6 hours for 2 people to build a swing set. Can you use the proportion \(\frac{2}{6}=\frac{5}{h}\) to determine the number of hours h it will take 5 people h6to build the swing set? Explain.

Answer:
It will take 15 hours for 5 people to build the swing set.

Explanation:
It takes 6 hours for 2 people to build a swing set
2 people – 6 hours
5 people – ?
We have a proportion,
2/6 = 5/h
2h = 6 * 5
2h = 30
h = 30/2
h = 15
It will take 15 hours for 5 people to build the swing set.

Question 56.
STRUCTURE
The ratios a : b and c : d are equivalent. Which of the following equations are proportions? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.4 21

Answer:
a/d = c/b is not equivalent proportion.

Explanation:
a/b = c/d
ad = bc
b/a = d/c
bc = ad
a/c = b/d
ad = bc
a/d = c/b
ab = cd
c/a = d/b
bc = ad
So, a/d = c/b is not equivalent proportion.

Question 57.
CRITICAL THINKING
Consider the proportions \(\frac{m}{n}=\frac{1}{2}\) and \(\frac{n}{k}=\frac{2}{5}\). What is \(\frac{m}{k}\) ? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
m/k = 1/5

Explanation:
m/n = 1/2
So m = x, n = 2x
n/k = 2/5
n = 2x, k = 5x
So, m/k = x/5x
= 1/5

Lesson 5.5 Graphs of Proportional Relationships

EXPLORATION 1

Representing Relationships Graphically

Work with a partner. The tables represent two different ways that red and blue food coloring are mixed.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 1
a. Represent each table in the same coordinate plane. Which graph represents a proportional relationship? How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 2
b. Find the unit rate of the proportional relationship. How is the unit rate shown on the graph?
c. What is the multiplicative relationship between x and y for the proportional relationship? How can you use this value to write an equation that relates y and x?

Answer:
Mixture 1
a. Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 5
Mixture 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 6
b. If the line passes through the origin, then x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
a.The points in mixture 1 are A (1, 2), B (2, 4), C (3, 6), D (4, 8)
The points in mixture 2 are E (0, 2), F (2, 4), G (4, 6), H (6, 8)
b. If the line passes through the origin, then x and y are proportional.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 3

Try It

Tell whether x and y are proportional. Explain your reasoning.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 4

Answer:
The line does not pass through the origin. So, x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 7
The line does not pass through the origin. So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 5

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 8
The line pass through the origin. So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 6

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 9
The line pass through the origin. So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 4.
WHAT IF
Does your answer change when you use the point (\(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{4}\))to find the speed of the subway car? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
No.

Explanation:
The point (1/2, 1/4) indicates that the subway car travels 1/4 mile every 1/2 minutes.
1/4 : 1/2
= 2/4 : 1
= 1/2 : 1
So, the unit rate is 1/2 mile per minute
The speed of the subway car is 1/2 mile per minute.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 7
Question 5.
IDENTIFYING A PROPORTIONAL RELATIONSHIP Use the graph shown to tell whether x and y are proportional. Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
x/y = 0/0
1.5/1 = 15/10 = 3/2
4.5/3 = 45/30 = 3/2
As the line pass through the origin, so, x and y are proportional.

Question 6.
FINDING A UNIT RATE
Interpret each plotted point in the graph. Then identify the unit rate, if possible.

Answer:
The unit rate is 1.5

Explanation:
time : distance = 1.5/1
= 15/10 = 3/2
The unit rate is 1.5

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
The table shows the temperature (in degrees Fahrenheit), hours after midnight.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 8
a. Describe a proportional relationship between time and temperature shown by the table. Explain your reasoning.
b. Find the temperature 3.5 hours after midnight.

Answer:
b. 161 degrees Fahrenheit

Explanation:
a. The table shows the proportional relationship between hours and temperature.
0.5/44 = 1/88
1/46
1.5/48 = 1/32
The temperature after 3.5 hours, is 3.5 * 46 = 161 degrees Fahrenheit

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Show how you can use a proportional relationship to plan the heights of the vertical supports of a waterskiing ramp. Then explain how increasing the steepness of the ramp affects the proportional relationship.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 9

Answer:
The vertical supports tell the height of the ramp. As the height of the ramp increases the distance from the ramp is increases.

Graphs of Proportional Relationships Homework & Practice 5.5

Review & Refresh

Find the value of x so that the ratios are equivalent.
Question 1.
2 : 7 and 8 : x

Answer:
x = 28

Explanation:
2/7 = 8/x
Cross multiply the fractions
2x = 8 * 7
2x = 56
x = 56/2
x = 28

Question 2.
3 to 2 and x to 18

Answer:
x = 27

Explanation:
3/2 = x/18
Cross multiply the fractions
3 * 18 = 2x
54 = 2x
x = 54/2
x = 27

Question 3.
9 : x and 54 : 8

Answer:
x = 4/3

Explanation:
9/x = 54/8
Cross multiply the fractions
54x = 9 * 8
54x = 72
x = 72/54
x = 4/3

Find the quotient, if possible.
Question 4.
36 ÷ 4

Answer:
36 ÷ 4 = 9

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers of the same sign is positive.
36 ÷ 4 = 9

Question 5.
42 ÷ (- 6)

Answer:
42 ÷ (- 6) = -7

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers of the different signs is negative.
42 ÷ (- 6) = -7

Question 6.
– 39 ÷ 3

Answer:
– 39 ÷ 3 = -13

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers of the different signs is negative.
– 39 ÷ 3 = -13

Question 7.
– 44 ÷ (- 4)

Answer:
– 44 ÷ (- 4) = 11

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers of the same sign is positive.
– 44 ÷ (- 4) = 11

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 8.
– \(\frac{x}{3}\) < 2

Answer:
x > -6
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 10

Explanation:
– \(\frac{x}{3}\) < 2
Multiply each side by 3
-x/3 . 3 < 2 . 3
-x < 6
x > -6

Question 9.
\(\frac{1}{3}\)p ≥ 4

Answer:
p ≥ 12
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 11

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\)p ≥ 4
Multiply each side by 3
\(\frac{1}{3}\)3p ≥ 4 . 3
p ≥ 12

Question 10.
– 8 < \(\frac{2}{3}\)n

Answer:
-24 < n
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 12

Explanation:
– 8 < \(\frac{2}{3}\)n
Multiply each side by 3/2
-8 x (3/2) < 2n/3 x (3/2)
-24 < n

Question 11.
– 2w ≤ 10

Answer:
w ≥ 5
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 13

Explanation:
– 2w ≤ 10
Divide each side by 2
– 2w/2 ≤ 10/2
-w ≤ 5
w ≥ 5

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

REPRESENTING RELATIONSHIPS GRAPHICALLY Represent the table graphically. Does the graph represent a proportional relationship? How do you know? (See Exploration 1, p. 211.)
Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 10

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 14
The line does not pass through the origin.
So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 11

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 15
The line pass through the origin.
So, x and y are proportional.

IDENTIFYING A PROPORTIONAL RELATIONSHIP Tell whether x and y are proportional. Explain your reasoning.
Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 12

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
x/y = 1/2
2/4 = 1/2
3/6 = 1/2
4/8 = 1/2
The ratios are equivalent.
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 13

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
x/y = -2/0 = 0
-1/2
0/4 = 0
1/6
The ratios are not equivalent
So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 14

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
x/y = -1/-2 = 1/2
0/-1 = 0
1/0 = 0
2/1
All the ratios are not equivalent
So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 15

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
x/y = 3/2
6/4 = 3/2
9/6 = 3/2
12/8 = 3/2
All the ratios are equivalent
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 16

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
x/y = 1/3
2/4 = 1/2
3/5
4/6 = 2/3
All the ratios are not equivalent
So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 17

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
x/y = 1/0.5 = 2
3/1.5 = 2
5/2.5 = 2
7/3.5 = 2
The ratios are equivalent
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 20.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses the graph to determine whether x and y are proportional. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 18

Answer:
The line does not pass through the origin.
so, x and y are not proportional.

FINDING A UNIT RATE Interpret each plotted point in the graph. Then identify the unit rate.
Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 19

Answer:
Tnit rate is 1/15

Explanation:
The points are (1, 15), (4, 60)
x/y = 1/15
4/60 = (4 ÷ 4)/(60 ÷ 4)
= 1/15
So, unit rate is 1/15

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 20

Answer:
The unit rate is 0.2 seconds per feet.

Explanation:
The points are (1, 5), (6, 30)
x/y = 1/5
6/30 = 1/5
The unit rate is 0.2 seconds per feet.

IDENTIFYING A PROPORTIONAL RELATIONSHIP Tell whether x and y are proportional. If so, identify the constant of proportionality. Explain your reasoning.
Question 23.
x – y = 0

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
x – y = 0
x = 0 + y
x = y
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 16
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 24.
\(\frac{x}{y}\) = 2

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
\(\frac{x}{y}\) = 2
x = 2y
If y = 0, then x = 2(0) = 0
If y = 1, then x = 2(1) = 2
If y = 2, then x = 2(2) = 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 17
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 25.
8 = xy

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
8 = xy
y = 8/x
If x = 0, then y = 8/0 = 0
If x = 1, then y = 8/1 = 8
If x = 2, then y = 8/2 = 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 18
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 26.
x2 = y

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
x2 = y
If x = 0, then y = 0
If x = 1, then y = 1
If x = 2, then y = 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 19
So, x and y are proportional.

WRITING AN EQUATION The variables and are proportional. Use the values to find the constant of proportionality. Then write an equation that relates x and y.
Question 27.
When y = 72, x = 3.

Answer:
y = 24x

Explanation:
y/x = 72/3
y/x = 24
y = 24x

Question 28.
When y = 20, x = 12.

Answer:
5x = 3y

Explanation:
y/x = 20/12
y/x = 5/3
Cross multiply the fractions
3y = 5x

Question 29.
When y = 45, x = 40.

Answer:
9x = 8y

Explanation:
y/x = 45/40
y/x = 9/8
Cross multiply the fractions
8y = 9x

Question 30.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the profit y for recycling x pounds of aluminum. Find the profit for recycling 75 pounds of aluminum.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 21

Answer:
The profit for recycling 75 pounds of aluminum is $33.75

Explanation:
The profit is $4.50 for recycling 10 pounds of aluminum
= 4.50 : 10
= 4.50/10 : 1
= 0.45 : 1
The profit is 40.45 for recycling 1 pound of aluminum.
The profit for recycling 75 pounds of aluminum is $135/4

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The graph shows the cost of buying concert tickets. Tell whether x and y are proportional. If so, find and interpret the constant of proportionality. Then find the cost of 14 tickets.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 22

Answer:
x and y are proportional.
The cost for buying 14 tickets is $182
13x = y

Explanation:
The line in the graph passes through the origin. so, x and y are proportional.
The cost for buying 2 tickets is 26
= 26 : 2
=13 : 1
The cost for buying 1 ticket is $13.
So, the cost for buying 14 tickets is 14 * 13 = $182
x/y = 2/26
x/y = 1/13
Cross multiply the fractions
13x = y

Question 32.
REASONING
The graph of a proportional relationship passes through (12, 16) and (1, y) Find y.

Answer:
y = 4/3

Explanation:
12/16 = 1/y
3/4 = 1/y
Cross multiply the fractions
3y = 4
y = 4/3

Question 33.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The amount of chlorine in a swimming pool is proportional to the volume of water. The pool has 2.5 milligrams of chlorine per liter of water. How much chlorine is in the pool?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 23

Answer:
The amount of chlorine in the pool is 75708.225 milligrams.

Explanation:
The amount of chlorine in a swimming pool varies directly with the volume of water. The pool has 2.5 milligrams of chlorine per liter of water.
1 gallon = 3.78541 litre
8000 gallons = 8000 * 3.78541 = 30283.29 litres
The amount of chlorine in the pool = 30283.29 * 2.5
= 75708.225 milligrams.

Question 34.
DIG DEEPER!
A vehicle travels 250 feet every 3 seconds. Find the value of the ratio, the unit rate, and the constant of proportionality. How are they related?

Answer:
The ratio is 250 : 3
The unit rate is 250/3 : 1
3x = 250y

Explanation:
A vehicle travels 250 feet every 3 seconds
= 250 : 3
= 250/3 : 1
The unit rate is 250/3 : 1
x/y = 250/3
Cross multiply the proportions
3x = 250y

Lesson 5.6 Scale Drawings

EXPLORATION 1

Creating a Scale Drawing

Work with a partner. Several sections in a zoo are drawn on 1-centimeter grid paper as shown. Each centimeter in the drawing represents 4 meters.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 1
a. Describe the relationship between the lengths of the fences in the drawing and the actual side lengths of the fences.
b. Describe the relationship between the areas of the sections in the drawing and the actual areas of the sections.
c. Are the relationships in parts (a) and (b) the same? Explain your reasoning.
d. Choose a different distance to represent each centimeter on a piece of 1-centimeter grid paper. Then create a new drawing of the sections in the zoo using the distance you chose. Describe any similarities or differences in the drawings.

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 2

Try It

Question 1.
What is the actual distance between Traverse City and Marquette?

Answer:
The distance between Traverse City and Marquette is 150 miles

Explanation:
Use the centimeter ruler to find the distance on the map between traverse city and Marquette.
the map distance is about 3 centimeters
Use the scale 1 cm : 50 mi and the ratio 3 cm : d mi to write and solve a proportion
1/50 = 3/d
d = 50 * 3
d = 150
So, the distance between Traverse City and Marquette is 150 miles

Question 2.
A drawing has a scale of 1 mm : 20 cm. What is the scale factor of the drawing?

Answer:
The scale factor is 1/200

Explanation:
Write the scale with the same units. Use the factor 1 cm = 10 mm
1 mm : 20 cm = 1 mm : (20 • 10) mm
= 1 : 200
So, the scale factor is 1/200

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
VOCABULARY
In your own words, explain the meaning of the scale and scale factor of a drawing or model.

Answer:
A scale factor is a number that multiplies times a given quantity to produce a smaller or longer version of the original number. It is also defined as the ratio of a drawing or blueprint to the actual object or distance.
The measurements in scale drawings are proportional to the measurements of the actual object. The scale is the ratio that compares the measurements of the drawings with the actual measurements.

Question 4.
FINDING AN ACTUAL DISTANCE
Consider the scale drawing of Balanced Rock in Arches National Park. What is the actual height of the structure?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 3

Answer:
h = 1/975.36

Explanation:
scale drawing is 1 cm : 32 ft
1 foot = 30.48 cm
So, 32 ft = 975.36 cm
1 cm : 32 ft = 1 : 975.36
h = 1/975.36

Question 5.
FINDING A SCALE FACTOR
A drawing has a scale of 3 in. : 2 ft. What is the scale factor of the drawing?

Answer:
The scale factor is 1/8

Explanation:
3 in. : 2 ft
1 foot = 12 inches
2 ft = 24 inches
The scale is 3 : 24 inches = 1/8

Question 6.
REASONING
Describe the scale factor of a model that is (a) larger than the actual object and (b) smaller than the actual object.

Answer:
If the scale of the factor is larger than the actual object, then every point is considered larger in the image. It means we represent a lion in a smaller box.
If the scale of the factor is less than the actual object, it means we represent the pen as a larger box.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
A scale drawing of the Parthenon is shown. Find the actual perimeter and area of the rectangular face of the Parthenon. Then recreate the scale drawing with a scale factor of 0.2. Find the perimeter and area of the rectangular face in your drawing.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 4

Answer:
The actual perimeter of the rectangular face of the Parthenon is 26 ft
The actual area of the rectangular face of the Parthenon is 36 sq ft
the perimeter of the rectangular face in your drawing is 5.2 ft
area of the rectangular face in your drawing is 1.44 sq ft.

Explanation:
Perimeter of the rectangular face of the Parthenon = 2(l + b)
= 2(4 + 9) = 13 * 2
= 26 ft
Area of the rectangular face of the Parthenon = l * b
= 4 * 9
= 36 sq ft
Scale factor = 0.2
The length of the rectangular face in your drawing = 0.2 * 9
= 1.8
The breadth of the rectangular face in your drawing = 4 * 0.2
= 0.8
Perimeter is 2(1.8 + 0.8) = 5.2
Area is 0.8 * 1.8 = 1.44

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You are in charge of creating a billboard advertisement that is 16 feet long and 8 feet tall. Choose a product. Create a scale drawing of the billboard using words and a picture. What is the scale factor of your design?

Answer:
The scale factor is 2

Explanation:
The details of the billboard advertisement is 16 : 8
= 2 : 1
1 unit is 4 units on the scale
So, the billboard advertisement is 16 * 4 : 8 * 4
= 64 : 32
= 2 : 1
So, the scale factor is 2

Scale Drawings Homework & Practice 5.6

Review & Refresh

Tell whether x and y are proportional. Explain your reasoning.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 5

Answer:
x and y are not proportional

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
10/5 = 2
9/4 = 2.25
8/3 = 2.6666
7/2 = 3.5
The ratios are not equivalent
So, x and y are not proportional

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 6

Answer:
x and y are proportional

Explanation:
Compare the values of ratios x to y
6/7
12/14 = 6/7
18/21 = 6/7
24/28 = 6/7
The ratios are equivalent
So, x and y are proportional

Simplify the expression.
Question 3.
7p + 6p

Answer:
7p + 6p = 13p

Explanation:
The given expression is 7p + 6p
= 13p

Question 4.
8 + 3d – 17

Answer:
8 + 3d – 17 = 3d – 9

Explanation:
The given expression is 8 + 3d – 17
= 3d – 9

Question 5.
– 2 + \(\frac{2}{5}\)b – \(\frac{1}{4}\)b + 6

Answer:
– 2 + \(\frac{2}{5}\)b – \(\frac{1}{4}\)b + 6 = 4 + 3b/20

Explanation:
The given expression is – 2 + \(\frac{2}{5}\)b – \(\frac{1}{4}\)b + 6
= 4 + (8b – 5b)/20
= 4 + 3b/20

Write the word sentence as an inequality.
Question 6.
A number is less than – 3.

Answer:
n < -3

Explanation:
Let us the number as n
n < -3

Question 7.
7 plus a number z is more than 5.

Answer:
7 + z > 5, z > -2

Explanation:
more than means > symbol
7 + z > 5
z > 5 – 7
z > -2

Question 8.
The product of a number m and 6 is no less than 30.

Answer:
6m > 30

Explanation:
No less than means >
m . 6 > 30
6m > 30
Divide both sides by 6
6m/6 > 30/6
m > 30/6

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

CREATING A SCALE DRAWING Each centimeter on the 1-centimeter grid paper represents 8 inches. Create a proportional drawing of the figure that is larger or smaller than the figure shown. (See Exploration 1, p. 217.)
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 7

Answer:
The base of the traingle is 16 inches

Explanation:
1 cm = 8 inches
The base of triangle = 2 cm
= 2 * 8 = 16 inches
Actually, 1 cm = 0.393701 inches
The size of drawing/real size = 1/8
2/real size = 1/8
16 = real size

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 8

Answer:
The bottom surface is 24 inches, the height is 24 inches, the top surface is 8 inches.

Explanation:
1 cm = 8 inches
Bottom surface is 3 cm
= 3 * 8 = 24 inches
Height is 3 cm
= 3 * 8 = 24 inches
Top surface = 1 cm
= 1 * 8 = 8 inches

FINDING AN ACTUAL DISTANCE Use the map in Example 1 to find the actual distance between the cities.
Question 11.
Kalamazoo and Ann Arbor

Answer:
The distance between Kalamazoo and Ann Arbor is 100 miles.

Explanation:
Use the centimeter ruler to find the distance on the map between Kalamazoo and Ann Arbor
The map distance is about 2 cm
Use the scale 1 cm : 50 mi and the ratio 2 cm : d mi to write and solve a proportion
1/50 = 2/d
d = 50 * 2
d = 100
So, the distance between Kalamazoo and Ann Arbor is 100 miles.

Question 12.
Lansing and Flint

Answer:
The distance between Lansing and Flint is 50 miles.

Explanation:
Use the centimeter ruler to find the distance on the map between Lansing and Flint
The map distance is about 1 cm
Use the scale 1 cm : 50 mi and the ratio 1 cm : d mi to write and solve a proportion
1/50 = 1/d
d = 50 * 1
d = 50
So, the distance between Lansing and Flint is 50 miles.

Question 13.
Grand Rapids and Escanaba

Answer:
The distance between Grand Rapids and Escanaba is 200 miles.

Explanation:
Use the centimeter ruler to find the distance on the map between Grand Rapids and Escanaba
The map distance is about 4 cm
Use the scale 1 cm : 50 mi and the ratio 4 cm : d mi to write and solve a proportion
1/50 = 1/d
d = 50 * 4
d = 200
So, the distance between Grand Rapids and Escanaba is 200 miles.

Question 14.
Saginaw and Alpena

Answer:
The distance between Saginaw and Alpena is 150 miles.

Explanation:
Use the centimeter ruler to find the distance on the map between Saginaw and Alpena
The map distance is about 3 cm
Use the scale 1 cm : 50 mi and the ratio 4 cm : d mi to write and solve a proportion
1/50 = 1/d
d = 50 * 3
d = 150
So, the distance between Saginaw and Alpena is 150 miles.

USING A SCALE Find the missing dimension. Use the scale 1 : 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 9

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 1

Explanation:
15. 1 inch = 12 inches
So, 6.25 x 12 = 75 inches
16. 1 ft = 12 inches
x in = 15 * 12
x in = 180 inches
17. 1 m = 100 cm
32 cm = 0.32 m
32 * 1 = .32 * 12
= 3.84 m
18. 1 ft = 0.333333 yard
5.4 ft = 5.4 * 0.333333
= 1.8 yard * 12 = 21.6 yard
19. 1 cm = 10 mm
21 cm = 210 mm
210 * 12 = 2520 mm

FINDING A SCALE FACTOR Use a centimeter ruler to find the scale and the scale factor of the drawing.
Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 10

Answer:
1 cm = 30 m

Explanation:
Using the centimeter ruler, the length is 4 cm
So, 4 cm = 120 m
1 cm = 120/4
1 cm = 30 m

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 11

Answer:
1 cm = 8 mm

Explanation:
Using the centimeter ruler, the length is 3 cm
So, 3 cm = 24 mm
1 cm = 24/3
= 8 mm

Question 22.
CRITICAL THINKING
You know the length and the width of a scale model. What additional information do you need to know to find the scale of the model? Explain.

Answer:
You need to know the scale factor to know the scale of the model.

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Central Park is a rectangular park in New YorkCity.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 12
a. Find the perimeter and the area of the scale drawing of Central Park.
b. Find the actual perimeter and area of Central Park.

Answer:
a. The perimeter of the scale drawing of Central Park = 26 cm
The area of the scale drawing of Central Park = 30 sq cm
b. The perimeter of the scale drawing of Central Park = 8320 cm
The area of the scale drawing of Central Park = 3072000 sq cm

Explanation:
a. The length of the central park is 10 cm
The breadth of the central park is 3 cm
The perimeter of the scale drawing of Central Park = 2(10 + 3)
= 2(13)
= 26 cm
The area of the scale drawing of Central Park = 10 * 3
= 30 sq cm
b. 1 cm = 320 m
The length of the central park is 10 * 320 = 3200
The breadth of the central park is 3 * 320 = 960
The perimeter of the scale drawing of Central Park = 2(3200 + 960)
= 8320 cm
The area of the scale drawing of Central Park = 3200 * 960
= 3072000 sq cm

Question 24.
PROBLEM SOLVING
In a blueprint,each square has a side length of \(\frac{1}{4}\) inch.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 13
a. Ceramic tile costs $5 per square foot. How much does it cost to tile the bathroom?
b. Carpet costs $18 per square yard. How much does it cost to carpet the bedroom and living room?

Answer:
a. The cost to the bathroom = $0.06075
b. The cost to carpet the bedroom and living room = $0.02430

Explanation:
Square side length = 1/4 inch
1 feet = 12 inch
1 inch : 16 ft = 1 : 16 * 12 = 1 : 192
a. one square side length is 1/4
1 foot = 12 inch
So, the length of the bathroom = 4(1/4) = 1 = 1 * 0.0833333
= 0.0833333
The breadth of the bathroom = 7(1/4) = 7/4
= (7 * 0.0833333)/4
= 0.583333/4
= 0.14583325
The area of bathroom = 0.0833333 * 0.14583325
= 0.01215 sq in
Ceramic tile costs $5 per square foot
The cost to the bathroom = 0.01215 * 5 = $0.06075
b. 1 inch = 0.0277778 yard
length of bathroom + living room = 1 * 0.0277778 = 0.0277778
breadth of bathroom + living room = 7/4 (0.0277778)
= 0.04861115
The area of bathroom + living room = 0.0277778 * 0.04861115
= 0.00135031080247
Carpet costs $18 per square yard.
The cost to carpet the bedroom and living room = 0.00135031080247 * 18 = $0.02430

REPRODUCING A SCALE DRAWING Recreate the scale drawing so that it has a scale of 1 cm : 4 m.
Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 14

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 2

Explanation:
1 m = 100 cm
Actual length = 1 cm * (1 cm / 400 cm)
= 1/400 cm
Actual breadth = 8 m * (1 cm / 4 m)
= 2 cm

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 15

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 3

Explanation:
1 cm = 100 m
Actual length = 1 cm * (1 cm / 400 cm)
= 1/400 cm
Actual breadth = 2 m * ( 1 cm / 4 m)
= 1/2 cm

Question 27.
DIG DEEPER!
Make a conjecture about the relationship between the scale factor of a drawing and the quotients Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 16. Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
drawing perimeter/ actual perimeter = scale factor
drawing area/actual area = scale factor

Ratios and Proportions Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan
Question 1.
The table shows the toll y(in dollars) for traveling x miles on a turnpike. You have $8.25 to pay your toll. How far can you travel on the turnpike?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cc 1
Understand the problem.
The table shows the tolls for traveling several different distances on a turnpike. You have $8.25 to pay the toll. You are asked to find how far you can travel on the turnpike with $8.25 for tolls.

Make a plan.
First, determine the relationship between x and y and write an equation to represent the relationship. Then use the equation to determine the distance you can travel.

Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.

Answer:
You can travel 55 miles with $8.25 for tolls.

Explanation:
x : y = 40 : 6
= 40/6 : 1
= 20/3 : 1
You need to pay $1 for 20/3 miles
So, 20/3 : 1 = x : 8.25
8.25 (20/3) = x
55 = x
So, you can travel 55 miles with $8.25 for tolls.

Question 2.
A company uses a silo in the shape of a rectangular prism to store bird seed. The base of the silo is a square with side lengths of 20 feet. Are the height and the volume of the silo proportional? Justify your answer.

Answer:
The height and the volume of the silo proportional

Explanation:
The base of the silo is a square with side lengths of 20 feet.
The area of silo = side² = 20²
= 400 sq ft
Height = h
Volume = lwh
= 400h
h : 400h = 1 : 400
The height and the volume of the silo proportional

Question 3.
A rectangle is drawn in a coordinate plane as shown. In the same coordinate plane, create a scale drawing of the rectangle that has a vertex at (0, 0) and a scale factor of 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cc 2

Answer:
The length of rectangle = 2/3
Breadth = 1/3

Explanation:
The length of rectangle = 2 units
The breadth of rectangle = 1 unit
length : breadth = 2 : 1
length = 2breadth
The scale factor = 3
The length of rectangle = 2/3
Breadth = 1/3

Performance Task

Mixing Paint
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Painting a Large Room.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cc 3

Ratios and Proportions Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 1

Graphic Organizers

You can use an Example and Non-Example Chart to list examples and non-examples of a concept. Here is an Example and Non-Example Chart for scale factor.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 2

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 3
1. ratio
2. equivalent ratios
3. rate
4. unit rate
5. equivalent rates
6. proportion
7. cross products
8. proportional
9. scale

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 4

5.1 Ratios and Ratio Tables (pp. 183–188)
Learning Target: Understand ratios of rational numbers and use ratio tables to represent equivalent ratios.

Write the ratio. Then find and interpret the value of the ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 5
Question 1.
salt: flour

Answer:
1/2 : 2

Explanation:
salt : flour = 1/2 cup : 2 cups

Question 2.
water to flour

Answer:
3/4 cup : 2 cups

Explanation:
water to flour = 3/4 : 2

Question 3.
salt to water

Answer:
1/2 cup : 3/4 cup

Explanation:
salt to water = 1/2 cup : 3/4 cup

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 6

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 21
The equivalent ratios are 3/2 : 1/2, 3 : 1, 9/2 : 3/2, 6 : 2

Explanation:
The missing values in the ratio table are
3/2 • x = 3
x = 3 • 2/3
x = 2
Milk1 = 2 • 1/2 = 1
1/2 • y = 3/2
y = 3
Flour1 = 3/2 • 3
= 9/2
1/2 • z = 2
z = 4
Flour2 = 3/2 • 4
= 6
The equivalent ratios are 3/2 : 1/2, 3 : 1, 9/2 : 3/2, 6 : 2

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 7

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.1 22
The equivalent ratios are 45 : 0.75, 135 : 2.25, 180 : 3, 90 : 1.5

Explanation:
The missing values in the ratio table are
45 • x = 135
x = 135/45
x = 3
Hours1 = 0.75 • 3
= 2.25
0.75 • y = 3
y = 3/0.75
y = 4
Miles1 = 45 • 4 = 180
45 • z = 90
z = 90/45 = 2
Hours2 = 0.75 • 2 = 1.5
The equivalent ratios are 45 : 0.75, 135 : 2.25, 180 : 3, 90 : 1.5

Question 6.
The cost for 16 ounces of cheese is $3.20. What is the cost for 20 ounces of cheese?

Answer:
The cost for 20 ounces of cheese is $3.95

Explanation:
The cost for 16 ounces of cheese is $3.20
The cost for 1 ounce of cheese is 3.20/16
The cost for 20 ounces of cheese is 20(3.20/16)
= 63.2/16
= 3.95

5.2 Rates and Unit Rates (pp. 189–194)
Learning Target: Understand rates involving fractions and use unit rates to solve problems.

Find the unit rate.
Question 7.
289 miles on 10 gallons

Answer:
28.9 miles per 1 gallon

Explanation:
289 miles on 10 gallons
= 289 : 10
= 289/10 : 1
= 28.9 : 1

Question 8.
6 \(\frac{2}{5}\) revolutions in 2\(\frac{2}{3}\) seconds

Answer:
2.4 revolutions in 1 second

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{2}{5}\) revolutions in 2\(\frac{2}{3}\) seconds = 32/5 : 8/3
= 32/5 • 3/8 : 1
= 12/5 : 1

Question 9.
You can mow 23,760 square feet in \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour. How many square feet can you mow in 2 hours? Justify your answer.

Answer:
95040 sq ft you can mow in 2 hours.

Explanation:
You can mow 23,760 square feet in \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour
= 23760 : 1/2
= 23760 • 2 : 1
= 47520 : 1
So you can mow 47520 sq ft in 1 hour
The number of sq ft you can mow in 2 hours = 47520 • 2
= 95040

Tell whether the rates are equivalent. Justify your answer.
Question 10.
60 centimeters every 2.5 years
30 centimeters every 15 months

Answer:
The rates are equivalent.

Explanation:
60 centimeters every 2.5 years = 60 : 2.5
= 600 : 25
= 24 : 1
24 cm every year
= 24 : 12
= 2 : 1
2 cm every month
30 centimeters every 15 months = 30 : 15
= 2 : 1
So, The rates are equivalent.

Question 11.
2.56 per \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound
$0.48 per 6 ounces

Answer:
The ratios are not equivalent.

Explanation:
2.56 per \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound = 2.56 : 1/2
= 2.56 * 2 : 1
= 5.12 : 1
1 pound = 16 ounces
$0.48 per 6 ounces = 0.48 : 6
= 0.48 : 6 * 16
= 0.48 : 96
= 1 : 200
So, the ratios are not equivalent.

5.3 Identifying Proportional Relationships (pp. 195–202)
Learning Target: Determine whether two quantities are in a proportional relationship.

Tell whether the ratios form a proportion.
Question 12.
4 to 9 and 2 to 3

Answer:
The rates do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
4 to 9 = 4 : 9
2 to 3 = 2 : 3
So, the rates do not form a proportion.

Question 13.
12 : 22 and 18 : 33

Answer:
The rates form a proportion.

Explanation:
12 : 22 = 12 : 22
= 6 : 11
18 : 33 = 18 : 33
= 6 : 11
So, the rates form a proportion.

Question 14.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) : 2 and \(\frac{1}{4}\) : \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Answer:
The rates do not form a proportion

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) : 2 = 1 : 4
\(\frac{1}{4}\) : \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 1/4 : 1/10
= 10 : 4
= 5 : 2
So, the rates do not form a proportion.

Question 15.
3.2 to 8 and 1.2 to 3

Answer:
The ratios are equivalent.

Explanation:
3.2 to 8 = 3.2 : 8
= 2/5
1.2 to 3 = 1.2 : 3
= 2/5
So, the ratios are equivalent.

Question 16.
Tell whether x and y are proportional.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 16

Answer:
The x and y are proportional

Explanation:
x/y = 1/4
3/12 = (3 • 1)/(4 • 3) = 1/4
6/24 = (6 • 1)/(6 • 4) = 1/4
8/32 = (8 • 1)/(8 • 4) = 1/4
So, the x and y are proportional.

Question 17.
You can type 250 characters in 60 seconds. Your friend can type 375 characters in 90 seconds. Do these rates form a proportion? Explain.

Answer:
The rates form a proportion.

Explanation:
You can type 250 characters in 60 seconds = 250 : 60
= (25 • 10) : (6 • 10) = 25 : 6
Your friend can type 375 characters in 90 seconds = 375 : 90
= (25 • 15) : (6 • 15)
= 25 : 6
So, the rates form a proportion.

5.4 Writing and Solving Proportions (pp. 203–210)
Learning Target: Use proportions to solve ratio problems.

Solve the proportion. Explain your choice of method.
Question 18.
\(\frac{3}{8}=\frac{9}{x}\)

Answer:
x = 24

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{8}=\frac{9}{x}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
3x = 9 * 8
x = 3 * 8
x = 24

Question 19.
\(\frac{x}{4}=\frac{2}{5}\)

Answer:
x = 8/5

Explanation:
\(\frac{x}{4}=\frac{2}{5}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
5x = 2 * 4
5x = 8
x = 8/5

Question 20.
\(\frac{5}{12}=\frac{y}{15}\)

Answer:
y = 75/12

Explanation:
\(\frac{5}{12}=\frac{y}{15}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
15 * 5 = 12y
75 = 12y
y = 75/12

Question 21.
\(\frac{s+1}{4}=\frac{4}{8}\)

Answer:
s = 1

Explanation:
\(\frac{s+1}{4}=\frac{4}{8}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
8(s + 1) = 4 * 4
8s + 8 = 16
8s = 16 – 8
8s = 8
s = 1

Use the table to write a proportion.
Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 22

Answer:
6/12 = 8/m, m = 12

Explanation:
The ratios are proportional.
6/12 = 8/m
Cross multiply the fractions
6m = 8 * 12
6m = 96
m = 96/8
m = 12

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 23

Answer:
15/h = 18/2.5

Explanation:
The ratios are proportional.
So, 15/h = 18/2.5

Question 24.
Find the value of x so that the ratios 8 : 20 and 6 : x are equivalent.

Answer:
x = 15

Explanation:
8/20 = 6/x
Cross multiply the fractions
8x = 6 * 20
8x = 120
x = 120/8
x = 15

Question 25.
Swamp gas consists primarily of methane, a chemical compound consisting of a 1 : 4 ratio of carbon to hydrogen atoms. If a sample of methane contains 1564 hydrogen atoms, how many carbon atoms are present in the sample?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 25

Answer:
The number of carbon atoms present in the sample is 391.

Explanation:
Swamp gas consists primarily of methane, a chemical compound consisting of a 1 : 4 ratio of carbon to hydrogen atoms
The number of carbon atoms present in the sample is 1564/4
= 391

5.5 Graphs of Proportional Relationships (pp. 211–216)
Learning Target: Represent proportional relationships using graphs and equations.

Question 26.
Tell whether x and y are proportional. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 26

Answer:
x and y are proportional

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.5 20
The line passes through origin.
So, x and y are proportional

Question 27.
The graph shows the number of visits your website received over the past 6 months. Interpret each plotted point in the graph. Then identify the unit rate.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 27

Answer:
50 : 1

Explanation:
Number of visitors : months = 150 : 3
= 150/3 : 1
= 50 : 1

Tell whether x and y are proportional. If so, identify the constant of proportionality. Explain your reasoning.
Question 28.
x + y = 6

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
x + y = 6
y = 6 – x
If x = 1, then y = 6 – 1 = 5
If x = 2, then y = 6 – 2 = 4
If x = 3, y = 6 – 3 = 3
1/5, 2/4, 3/3 are not equivalent ratios
So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 29.
y – x = 0

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
y – x = 0
y = x
If x = 1, then y = 1
If x = 2, then y = 2
If x = 3, then y = 3
1/2, 2/2, 3/3 are equivalent ratios
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 30.
\(\frac{x}{y}\) = 20

Answer:
x and y are proportional.

Explanation:
\(\frac{x}{y}\) = 20
x = 20y
If y = 1, then x = 20(1) = 20
If y = 2, then x = 20(2) = 40
If y = 3, then x = 20(3) = 60
20/1, 40/2, 60/3 are equivalent ratios
So, x and y are proportional.

Question 31.
x = y + 2

Answer:
x and are not proportional.

Explanation:
x = y + 2
If y = 1, then x = 1 + 2 = 3
If y = 2, then x = 2 + 2 = 4
If y = 3, then x = 3 + 2 = 6
3/1, 4/2, 6/3 are not equivalent
So, x and are not proportional.

Question 32.
The variables x and y are proportional. When y = 4, x = \(\frac{1}{2}\). Find the constant of proportionality. Then write an equation that relates x and y.

Answer:
x = 8y

Explanation:
x/y = k
(1/2)/4 = k
k = 1/8
x/y = 8
x = 8y

5.6 Scale Drawings (pp. 217–222)
Learning Target: Solve problems involving scale drawings.

Find the missing dimension. Use the scale factor 1 : 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 33

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions 5.6 4

Explanation:
33. Scale factor = 1/20
Use the scale 1 : 20
90(1/20) = 9/2 = 4.5
34. x/20 = 3.75
x = 3.75 * 20
x = 75
Actual legth = 75 ft

Use a centimeter ruler to find the scale and the scale factor of the drawing.
Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 35

Answer:
The scale is 7.62, scale factor is 39.3701 in

Explanation:
The length of drawing = 10 cm
10 cm = 30 in
1 cm = 0.393701
10 cm = 39.3701 in
10 cm : 30 in = 1 cm : 3 in
3 inch = 7.62
The actual length is 39.3701 inch
So, the scale is 7.62, scale factor is 39.3701 in

Question 36
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cr 36

Answer:
The scale is 19.05, scale factor is 19.05

Explanation:
Uisng the centimeter ruler, length is 4 cm
4 cm = 7.5 in
1 cm = 0.393701
4 cm = 1.5748 in
4 cm : 7.5 in
7.5 inch = 19.05
4 cm : 7.5 inch = 4 cm : 19.05 cm
the scale is 19.05, scale factor is 19.05

Question 37.
A scale model of a lighthouse has a scale of 1 in.: 8ft. The scale model is 20 inches tall. How tall is the lighthouse?

Answer:

Explanation:
A scale model of a lighthouse has a scale of 1 in.: 8ft
The scale model is 20 inches tall

Ratios and Proportions Practice Test

Find the unit rate.
Question 1.
84 miles in 12 days

Answer:
7 miles in 1 day

Explanation:
84 miles in 12 days
= 84 : 12
= 84/12 : 1
= 7 : 1

Question 2.
2 \(\frac{2}{5}\) kilometers in 3\(\frac{3}{4}\) minutes

Answer:
48 kilometers in 75 minutes.

Explanation:
2 \(\frac{2}{5}\) kilometers in 3\(\frac{3}{4}\) minutes = 12/5 : 15/4
= 12/5 • 4/15 : 1
= 48/75 : 1

Tell whether the ratios form a proportion.
Question 3.
1 to 0.4 and 9 to 3.6

Answer:
The ratios form a proportion.

Explanation:
1 to 0.4 = 1 : 0.4
= 5/2
9 to 3.6 = 9 : 3.6
= 5/2
So, the ratios form a proportion.

Question 4.
2 : \(\frac{8}{3}\) and \(\frac{2}{3}\) : 6

Answer:
The ratios do not form a proportion.

Explanation:
2 : \(\frac{8}{3}\) = 6 : 8
= 3/4
\(\frac{2}{3}\) : 6 = 2 : 18
= 1/9
So, the ratios do not form a proportion.

Tell whether and are proportional. Explain your reasoning.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions pt 5

Answer:
x and y are proportional

Explanation:
x/y = 2/10 = 1/5
4/20 = 1/5
6/30 = 1/5
8/40 = 1/5
So, x and y are proportional

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions pt 6

Answer:
x and y are not proportional.

Explanation:
x/y = 1/3, 3/7, 5/11, 7/15
So, x and y are not proportional.

Question 7.
Use the table to write a proportion.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions pt 7

Answer:
1/30 = 8/m

Explanation:
the ratios are proportional
so, 6/180 = 8/m
1/30 = 8/m

Solve the proportion.
Question 8.
\(\frac{x}{8}=\frac{9}{4}\)

Answer:
x = 18

Explanation:
\(\frac{x}{8}=\frac{9}{4}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
4x = 9 * 8
4x = 72
x = 72/4
x = 18

Question 9.
\(\frac{17}{4}=\frac{y}{6}\)

Answer:
y = 51/2

Explanation:
\(\frac{17}{4}=\frac{y}{6}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
17 * 6 = 4y
102 = 4y
y = 102/4
y = 51/2

Tell whether and are proportional. If so, identify the constant of proportionality. Explain your reasoning.
Question 10.
xy – 11 = 5

Answer:
x, y are not proportional.

Explanation:
xy – 11 = 5
xy = 5 + 11
xy = 16
x = 16/y

Question 11.
\(\frac{y}{x}\) = 8

Answer:
x and y are proportional

Explanation:
\(\frac{y}{x}\) = 8
y = 8x
So, x and y are proportional

Question 12.
A recipe calls for \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup flour for every cup sugar. Write the ratio of sugar to flour. Then find and interpret the value of the ratio.

Answer:
The ratio of sugar to flour is 3 : 2.

Explanation:
A recipe calls for \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup flour for every cup sugar
Flour : sugar = 2/3 : 1
Sugar to flour = 1 : 2/3
= 3 : 2

Question 13.
The graph shows the number of cycles of a crosswalk signal during the day and during the night.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions pt 13
a. Write equations that relate x and y for both the day and night periods.
b. Find how many more cycles occur during the day than during the night for a six-hour period.

Answer:
a. The equation for day is 40 x = y
the equation for night is 30x = y
b. 60 more cycles occur during the day than during the night for a six-hour period.

Explanation:
a. For day, 2 hours is 80 cycles
x/y = 2/80 = 1/40
40x = y
For night, 3 hours is 90
x/y = 3/90 = 1/30
30x = y
a. For day, the number of cycles for 3 hours is 90
90 : 3 = 30 : 1
So, 30 cycles per 1 hour
The number of cycles per 6 hours is 30 * 6 = 180
For night,
the number of cycles is 80 for 2 hours
80 : 2 = 40 : 1
The number of cycles for 6 hours is 40 * 6 = 240
240 – 180 = 60

Question 14.
An engineer is using computer-aided design (CAD) software to design a component for a space shuttle. The scale of the drawing is 1 cm : 60 in. The actual length of the component is 12.75 feet. What is the length of the component in the drawing?

Answer:
The length of the component in the drawing is 25 cm

Explanation:
Write the proportion relating the model length to the actual length. the scale has inches for the actual length units so you must use 12.5 feet = 15 inches in the proportion
model/actual = 1 cm/60 in = x cm/150 in
60x = 150
x = 150/6
= 25

Question 15.
A specific shade of green glaze is made of 5 parts blue glaze to 3 parts yellow glaze. A glaze mixture contains 25 quarts of blue glaze and 9 quarts of yellow glaze. How can you fix the mixture to make the specific shade of green glaze?

Answer:
25 parts blue to 15 parts yellow

Explanation:
25 blue to 9 yellow
The rate is not equal to the specific rate, 5 parts blue to 3 parts yellow
25 parts blue to 15 parts yellow

Ratios and Proportions Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 1
Question 1.
The school store sells 4 pencils for $0.80. What is the unit cost of a pencil?
A. $0.20
B. $0.80
C. $3.20
D. $5.00

Answer:
A. $0.20

Explanation:
The school store sells 4 pencils for $0.80
= 0.80 : 4
= 0.80/4 : 1
= 0.2 : 1

Question 2.
What is the simplified form of the expression?
3x – (2x – 5)
F. x – 5
G. x + 5
H. 5x – 5
I. – x – 5

Answer:
G. x + 5

Explanation:
The given expression is 3x – (2x – 5)
= 3x – 2x + 5
= x + 5

Question 3.
Which fraction is equivalent to – 1.25?”
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 3

Answer:
B.

Explanation:
-1.25 = -125/100
= -5/4
-1(1/4) = -5/4

Question 4.
What is the value of for the proportion \(\frac{8}{12}=\frac{x}{18}\)?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 4

Answer:
x = 12

Explanation:
\(\frac{8}{12}=\frac{x}{18}\)
Cross multiply the fractions
8 * 18 = 12x
144 = 12x
x = 144/12
x = 12

Question 5.
What inequality is represented by the graph?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 5
F. x – 3 < 7
G. x + 6 ≤ 10
H. – 5 + x < – 1 I. x – 8 > – 4

Answer:
G. x + 6 ≤ 10

Explanation:
the graph represents x ≤ 4.
Solve all the given options
x – 3 < 7
x < 7 + 3
x < 10
G. x + 6 ≤ 10
x ≤ 10 – 6
x ≤ 4
H. – 5 + x < – 1
x < -1 + 5
x < 4
I. x – 8 > – 4
x > -4 + 8
x > 4

Question 6.
What is the missing value in the ratio table?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 6

Answer:
B. 30

Explanation:
2/3 • x = 10/3
x = 10/3 • 3/2
x = 5
6 • 5 = 30

Question 7.
Which expression shows factoring 12x + 54 using the GCF?
F. 2(6x + 27)
G. 3(4x + 18)
H. 6(2x + 9)
I. 12(x + \(\frac{9}{2}\))

Answer:
H. 6(2x + 9)

Explanation:
12x = 3 • 2 • 2 • x
54 = 2 • 3 • 9
The common prime factors are 3 • 2 = 6
So, the GCF of 12x + 54 is 6
12x + 54 = 6(2x) + 6(9)
= 6(2x + 9)

Question 8.
The distance traveled by a high-speed train is proportional to the number of hours traveled. Which of the following is not a valid interpretation of the graph?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 8
A. The train travels 0 kilometers in 0 hours.
B. The unit rate is 200 kilometers per hour.
C. After 4 hours, the train is traveling 800 kilometers per hour.
D. The train travels 800 kilometers in 4 hours.

Answer:
B. The unit rate is 200 kilometers per hour.

Explanation:
The distance traveled by a high-speed train is proportional to the number of hours traveled
200 proportional to 1 = 200 : 1

Question 9.
Which graph represents a number that is at most – 2?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 9

Answer:
H.

Explanation:
At most means less than or equal to
x ≤ -2

Question 10.
A map of the state where your friend lives has the scale \(\frac{1}{2}\) in. : 10 mi.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 10
Part A Your friend measured the distance between her town and the state capital on the map. Her measurement was 4\(\frac{1}{2}\) inches. Based on your friend’s measurement, what is the actual distance (in miles) between her town and the state capital? Show your work and explain your reasoning.
Part B Your friend wants to mark her favorite campsite on the map. She knows that the campsite is 65 miles north of her town. What distance on the map (in inches) represents an actual distance of 65 miles? Show your work and explain your reasoning.

Answer:
A. 90 miles
B. 3(1/4) inch

Explanation:
A. Write the proportion relating the model distance on the map to the actual distance where x is the actual distance. Then solve the proportion by cross multiplying
model/actual = 1/2/10 = 4(1/2)/x
0.5/10 = 4.5/x
0.5x = 45
x = 45/0.5
x = 90 miles
B. Write the proportion relating the model distance to the actual distance where y is the model distance.
0.5/10 = y/65
cross multiply
10y = 0.5 * 65
10y = 32.5
y = 32.5/10
y = 3.25
= 3(1/4) inch

Question 11.
What is the value of the expression – 56 ÷ (- 8)?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 4

Answer:
– 56 ÷ (- 8) = 7

Explanation:
– 56 ÷ (- 8)
The quotient of two negative integers is positive
56 ÷ 8 = 7

Question 12.
The quantities and are proportional. What is the missing value in the table?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions cp 12
A. 38
B. 42
C. 46
D. 56

Answer:
D. 56

Explanation:
Two quantities are proportional
5/7x = 4
x = 4 (7/5)
x = 28/5
Missing value = 10(28/5) = 2(28) = 56

Question 13.
To begin a board game, you place a playing piece at START. On your first three turns, you move ahead 8 spaces, move back 3 spaces, and then move ahead 2 spaces. How many spaces are you from START?
F. 2
G. 3
H. 7
I. 13

Answer:
H. 7

Explanation:
For the first three turns, you move ahead 8 spaces and move back 3 spaces
= 8 – 3 = 5
move ahead 2 spaces
5 + 2 = 7

Final Words:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions detailed pdf is here. Check Big Ideas Math Book Grade 7 Chapter 5 Ratios and proportions and make the learning easy. Therefore collect Big Ideas Math 7th Grade Chapter 5 Ratios and Proportions Answer Key and complete your preparation. Stay tuned to our website to know the trending information regarding Ratios and Proportions. Bookmark our page to know all the details of Grade 7. We wish all the best for all students.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3

Middle School Students who are struggling with the concepts of Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Ch 3 Angles and Triangles need not worry anymore. Big Ideas Math Book 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles help you finish your homework in time and gives you assistance whenever you need it. Detailed Solutions provided in Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Answers Chapter 3 make it easy for you to attain knowledge regarding the particular topic in a matter of seconds. Access the BIM Book Grade 8 Ch 3 Angles and Triangles Answer Key via direct links and prepare effectively.

Big Ideas Math Book 8th Grade Answer Key Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles

Access the Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Ch 3 Angles and Triangles Answers includes questions from the Lessons, Chapter Tests, Assessment Tests, Cumulative Practice, etc. Kick start your preparation and attempt the exam with confidence and stand out from the rest of the crowd. Refer to the direct links available for Grade 8 BIM Book Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles Solution Key and prepare the respective topic accordingly in no time.

Performance

Lesson: 1 Parallel Lines and Transversals

Lesson: 2 Angles of Triangles

Lesson: 3 Angles of Polygons

Lesson: 4 Using Similar Triangles

Chapter 3 – Angles and Triangles

Angles and Triangles STEAM Video/Performance

STEAM Video

Each cell in a honeycomb is in the shape of a regular hexagon. Why might bees use this shape?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 1

Watch the STEAM Video “Honeycombs.” Then answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Enid and Tony show regular tilings made out of squares, equilateral triangles, and regular hexagons. What is the sum of the interior angle measures of the tiling made from equilateral triangles, outlined below in yellow?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 2

Answer:
The sum of interior angles of the equilateral triangle = 180°
x + x + x = 180°
3x° = 180°
x = 180/3
x° = 60°

Question 2.
The cells in a honeycomb use a tiling pattern of the regular hexagon shown. A cell is 10 millimeters deep. About how much honey can one cell hold? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 3

Performance Task

Turtle Shells

After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given angle measures of shapes seen on a turtle shell.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 5
You will be asked to find angle sums and missing angle measures. What other animals have features that resemble geometric shapes?

Angles and Triangles Getting Ready for Chapter 3

Chapter Exploration

When an object is transverse, it is lying or extending across something. In the drawing, the fallen tree lying across the railroad track is transverse to the track.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 6
1. Work with a partner.
• Discuss what it means for two lines to be parallel. Decide on a strategy for drawing parallel lines. Then draw two parallel lines.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 7
• Draw a third line that intersects the parallel lines. This line is called a transversal
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 8
a. How many angles are formed by the parallel lines and the transversal? Label each angle.

Answer: 8 angles are formed by the parallel lines and the transversal
b. Which of these angles have equal measures? Explain your reasoning.

Vocabulary

The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what the terms might mean and record your thoughts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 9

Lesson 3.1 Parallel Lines and Transversals

EXPLORATION 1

Work with a partner. Use geometry software and the lines A and B shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 10
a. Are line A and B line parallel? Explain your reasoning.
b. Draw a line that intersects both line A and line B. What do you notice about the measures of the angles that are created?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 11
c. Rotate line A or line B until the angles created by the intersection of line A and line C are congruent to the angles created by the intersection of line B and line C. What do you notice about line A and line B?
d. Rotate line to create different angle measures. Are the angles that were congruent in part(c) still congruent?
e. Make a conjecture about the measures of the angles created when a line intersects two parallel lines.

3.1 Lesson

Try It

Use the figure to find the measure of the angle. Explain your reasoning

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 12

Question 1.
∠1

Answer: 63°

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Answers Chapter 3 img_1
∠1 and 63° angle are corresponding angles are formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠1 is 63°

Question 2.
∠2

Answer: 117°

Explanation:
BIM Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and triangles answer key img_2
∠1 and ∠2 are supplementary angle.
∠1 + ∠2 = 180°
63° + ∠2 = 180°
∠2 = 180° – 63°
∠2 = 117°
So, the measure of ∠2 = 117°

Try It

Question 3.
Use the figureto find the measures of the numbered angles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 13

Answer:
∠1 and 59° are the supplementary angles
∠1 + 59° = 180°
∠1 = 180° – 59°
∠1 = 121°
∠2 and 59° are vertical angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠1 is 121°
∠3 and 59° are supplementary angles.
∠3 + 59° = 180°
∠3 = 180° – 59°
∠3 = 121°
∠4, ∠5, ∠6, ∠7 corresponding angles are congruent because they are formed by a transversal intersecting parallel side.
the measure of  ∠4 is 121°
the measure of ∠5 is 59°
the measure of  ∠6 is 121°
the measure of ∠7 is 59°

Try It

In Example 3, the measure of ∠4 is 84°. Find the measure of the angle. Explain your reasoning.

Question 4.
∠3

Answer:
Bigideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles img_3
The measure of ∠4 is 84°.
∠3 and ∠4 are supplementary angles.
∠3 + ∠4 = 180°
∠3 + 84° = 180°
∠3 = 180° – 84°
∠3 = 96°

Question 5.
∠5

Answer:
∠4 and ∠5 are alternate interior angles formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠5 is 84°

Question 6.
∠6

Answer:
∠3 and ∠6 are alternate exterior angles formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠6 is 96°

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

FINDING ANGLE MEASURES
Use the figure to find the measures of the numbered angles.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 14

Answer:
∠1 and 120° are the supplementary angles.
∠1 + 120° = 180°
∠1 = 180 – 120
∠1 = 60°
Thus the measure of ∠1 is 60°
∠2 and 120° are the vertical angles. They are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠2 is 120°
∠3 and 120° are the supplementary angles.
∠3 + 120° = 180°
∠3 = 180 – 120
∠3 = 60°
∠4, ∠5, ∠6, ∠7 are corresponding angles are formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠4 is 60°
Thus the measure of ∠5 is 120°
Thus the measure of ∠6 is 120°
Thus the measure of ∠7 is 60°

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 15

Answer:
∠1 and 35° are the supplementary angles.
∠1 + 35° = 180°
∠1 = 180 – 35
∠1 = 145°
Thus the measure of ∠1 is 145°
∠2 and 35° are the supplementary angles.
∠2 + 35° = 180°
∠2 = 180 – 35
∠2 = 145°
Thus the measure of ∠2 is 145°
∠3 and 35° are the vertical angles. They are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠3 is 35°
∠4, ∠5, ∠6, ∠7 are corresponding angles are formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠4 is 35°
Thus the measure of ∠5 is 145°
Thus the measure of ∠6 is 145°
Thus the measure of ∠7 is 35°

Question 9.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which angle measure does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 16

Answer:
∠2, ∠6 are corresponding angles are formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines.
∠6, ∠8 are vertical angles are formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines.
∠5 does not belong to the other three because all the other three measure are equal.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
A cross section of a pier is shown. Find the value of a. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 17

Answer:
The angle a and the angle of 70 degrees are complementary angles because they belong to a right triangle, where the third angle is the right angle.
∠a + 70 = 90
∠a = 90 – 70
∠a = 20°

Question 11.
The head tube angle of a bike determines how easy the bike is to steer. A bike frame with angle approximations is shown. What is the head tube angle of the bike?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 18

Answer:
The lines AB and CD are parallel.
ABC and BCD are the corresponding angles formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines.
∠BCD = 55°
∠BAC + ∠ABC + ∠ACB = 180°
The sum of the angles in a triangle is 180°
∠BAC + 55°+ 52° = 180°
∠BAC + 107° = 180°
∠BAC = 180° – 107°
∠BAC = 73°
So, the head tube angle of a bike is 73°

Parallel Lines and Transversals Homework & Practice 3.1

Review & Refresh

Find the values of the ratios (red to blue) of the perimeters and areas of the similar figures.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 19

Answer:
perimeter of red hexagon/perimeter of blue hexagon = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
The values of the ratios of the perimeter is \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Area of red hexagon/Area of blue hexagon = (\(\frac{3}{5}\))² = \(\frac{9}{25}\)
The values of the ratios of the area is \(\frac{9}{25}\)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 20

Answer:
perimeter of red trapezium /perimeter of blue trapezium = \(\frac{7}{6}\)
The values of the ratios of the perimeter is \(\frac{7}{6}\)
Area of red hexagon/Area of blue hexagon = (\(\frac{7}{6}\))² = \(\frac{49}{36}\)
The values of the ratios of the area is \(\frac{49}{36}\)

Evaluate the expression.

Question 3.
4 + 32

Answer:
4 + 9 = 13

Question 4.
5(2)2 – 6

Answer:
5(4) – 6
20 – 6 = 14

Question 5.
11 + (-7)2 – 9

Answer:
11 + 49 – 9
11 + 40 = 50

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
EXPLORING INTERSECTIONS OF LINES
Use a protractor to determine whether lines a and b are parallel. (See Exploration 1, p. 103.)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 21

Answer:
Use a protractor to measure ∠1 and ∠2
∠1 ≈ 60°
∠2 ≈ 60°
∠1 and ∠2, it means the two angles are congruent. The angles are exterior alternate angles.
According to the converse of the exterior alternate angles theorem, the two lines are parallel.
a || b

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 22

Answer:
Use a protractor to measure ∠1 and ∠2
∠1 ≈ 50°
∠2 ≈ 60°
∠1 and ∠2, it means the two angles are not congruent. The angles are exterior alternate angles.
According to the converse of the exterior alternate angles theorem, the two lines are not parallel.

FINDING ANGLE MEASURES
Use the figure to find the measures of the numbered angles. Explain your reasoning.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 23

Answer:
∠1 and 107° are corresponding angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠1 is 107°.
∠1 and ∠2 are supplementary angles.
∠1 + ∠2 = 180°
107° + ∠2 = 180°
∠2 = 180° – 107°
∠2 = 73°
So, the measure of ∠2 is 73°

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 24

Answer:
∠3 and 95° are corresponding angles. They are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠3 is 95°
∠3 and ∠4 are supplementary angles.
∠3 + ∠4 = 180°
95° + ∠4 = 180°
∠4 = 180 – 95
∠4 = 85°
So the measure of ∠4 is 85°

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 25

Answer:
∠5 and 49° are corresponding angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠5 is 49°
∠5 and ∠6 are supplementary angles.
∠5 + ∠6 = 180°
49° + ∠6 = 180°
∠6 = 180° – 49°
∠6 = 131°
So, the measure of ∠6 is 131°

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend describes a relationship between the angles shown. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 26

Answer:
Since the two lines are not parallel. Hence ∠5 is not congruent to ∠6.
By this, we can say that your friend is not correct.

Question 12.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The painted lines that separate parking spaces are parallel. The measure of ∠1 is 60°. What is the measure of ∠2? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 27

Answer:
∠1 and ∠2 are corresponding angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
The measure of ∠1 is 60° so the measure of ∠2 is 60°

Question 13.
OPEN-ENDED
Describe two real-life situations that use parallel lines.

Answer:
Example 1: The railroad tracks and the tram tracks are parallel lines.
Example 2:  The shelves of a bookcase.

USING CORRESPONDING ANGLES
Use the figure to find the measures of the numbered angles.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 28

Answer:
∠1 and 60° are corresponding angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
∠1 and ∠2 are supplementary angles.
∠1 + ∠2 = 180°
60° + ∠2 = 180°
∠2 = 180° – 60°
∠2 = 119°
So, the measure of ∠2 is 119°
∠3 and ∠1 are vertical angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠3 is 61°
∠4 and ∠2 are vertical angles. They are congruent.
∠5, ∠6, ∠7 corresponding angles are congruent because they are formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines.
So, the measure of ∠5 is 119°
So, the measure of ∠6 is 61°
So, the measure of ∠7 is 119°

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 29

Answer:
∠1 and 99° are supplementary angles.
∠1 + 99° = 180°
∠1 = 180° – 99°
∠1 = 81°
Thus the measure of ∠1 is 81°
∠2 and 99° are vertical angles. They are congruent.
The measure of ∠2 is 99°
∠3 and ∠1 are vertical angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠3 is 81°
∠4, ∠5, ∠6, ∠7 corresponding angles are congruent because they are formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines.
So, the measure of ∠4 is 99°
So, the measure of ∠5 is 81°
So, the measure of ∠6 is 99°
So, the measure of ∠7 is 81°

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 30

Answer:
∠1 and 90° are supplementary angles.
∠1 + 90° = 180°
∠1 = 180° – 90°
∠1 = 90°
Thus the measure of ∠1 is 90°
∠2 and 90° are vertical angles. They are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠2 is 90°
∠3 and ∠1 are vertical angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠3 is 90°
∠4, ∠5, ∠6, ∠7 corresponding angles are congruent because they are formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines.
So, the measure of ∠4 is 90°
So, the measure of ∠5 is 90°
So, the measure of ∠6 is 90°
So, the measure of ∠7 is 90°

USING CORRESPONDING ANGLES
Complete the statement. Explain your reasoning.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 30.1

Question 17.
If the measure of ∠1 = 124°, then the measure of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 31

Answer:
∠1 and ∠8 are corresponding angles. They are congruent.
The measure of ∠1 = 124°, then the measure of ∠8 is 124°
∠8 and ∠4 are supplementary angles.
∠8 + ∠4 = 180°
124° + ∠4 = 180°
∠4 = 180° – 124°
∠4 = 56°
So, the measure of ∠4 is 56°

Question 18.
If the measure of ∠2 = 48°, then the measure of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 32

Answer:
∠2 and ∠7 are corresponding angles. They are congruent.
The measure of ∠2 = 48°, then the measure of ∠7 is 48°
∠7 and ∠3 are supplementary angles.
∠7 + ∠3 = 180°
48° + ∠3 = 180°
∠3 = 180° – 48°
∠3 = 132°
Thus the measure of ∠3 = 132°

Question 19.
If the measure of ∠4 = 55°, then the measure of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 33

Answer:
∠4 and ∠2 are alternate interior angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠2 is 55°

Question 20.
If the measure of ∠6 = 120°, then the measure of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 34

Answer:
∠6 and ∠8 are alternate exterior angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠8 is 120°

Question 21.
If the measure of ∠7 = 50.5°, then the measure of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 35

Answer:
∠7 and ∠2 are corresponding angles. They are congruent.
The measure of ∠7 is 50.5°, so the measure of ∠2 is 50.5°
∠2 and ∠6 are supplementary angle.
∠2 + ∠6 = 180°
50.5° + ∠6 = 180°
∠6 = 180° – 50.5°
∠6 = 129.5°
So, the measure of ∠6 is 129.5°

Question 22.
If the measure of ∠3 = 118.7°, then the measure of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 35.1

Answer:
∠3 and ∠6 are corresponding angles. They are congruent.
The measure of ∠3 is 118.7°
So, the measure of ∠6 is 118.7°
∠6 and ∠2 are supplementary angles.
∠6 + ∠2 = 180°
118.7° + ∠2 = 180°
∠2 = 180° – 118.7°
∠2 = 61.3°
So, the measure of ∠2 is 61.3°

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A rainbow forms when sunlight reflects of raindrops at different angles. For blue light, the measure ∠2 is 40°. What is the measure of ∠1?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 31.1

Answer:
∠4 and ∠5 are alternate interior angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠1 is 40°

Question 24.
REASONING
Is there a relationship between exterior angles that lie on the same side of a transversal? interior angles that lie on the same side of a transversal? Explain.

Answer:
∠7 and ∠8 are Exterior angles that lie on the same side of the transversal. Hence ∠7 and ∠8 are supplementary angles.
Big Ideas Math Answers grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles img_4
∠3 and ∠4 are interior angles that lie on the same side of the transversal. Hence ∠3 and ∠4 are supplementary angles.

Question 25.
REASONING
When a transversal is perpendicular to two parallel lines, all the angles formed measure 90°. Explain why.

Answer:
When a transversal is perpendicular to two parallel lines, all the angles formed measure 90°.
Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Answers Chapter 3 img
All the angles formed are 90 degrees because perpendicular lines form 90 degree angles.

Question 26.
REASONING
Two horizontal lines are cut by a transversal. What is the least number of angle measures you need to know to find the measure of every angle? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
BIM Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and triangles answers img_6
In the below example two horizontal lines a and b are cut by a transversal line t, we know only one angle 61 the measure of all the angles are find with the help of one known measure, 61°
∠1 and 61° are corresponding angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. the angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠1 is 61°
∠1 and ∠2 are supplementary angles.
∠1 + ∠2 = 180°
61° + ∠2 = 180°
∠2 = 180° – 61°
∠2 = 119°
Thus the measure of ∠2 is 119°
∠3 and ∠1 are vertical angles. They are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠3 is 61°
∠4 and ∠2 are vertical angles. They are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠4 is 119°
∠5, ∠6, ∠7 corresponding angles are formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠5 is 119°
Thus the measure of ∠6 is 61°
Thus the measure of ∠7 is 119°

Question 27.
LOGIC
Describe two ways you can show that ∠1 is congruent to ∠7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 32.1

Answer:
∠1 and ∠7 are alternate exterior angles formed by a transeversal intersecting parallel lines. So, ∠1 and ∠7 are congruent.
∠1 and ∠5 are corresponding angles formed by a transeversal intersecting parallel lines. So, ∠1 and ∠5 are congruent.
∠5 and ∠7 are vertical angles so they are congruent.
Hence ∠1 and ∠7 are congruent.

FINDING A VALUE
Find the value of x.

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 33.1

Answer:
∠1 and 50° are alternate interior angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠1 is 50°
∠2 and ∠1 are corresponding angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠2 is 50°
∠2 and x are supplementary angle.
∠2 + x = 180°
50° + x = 180°
x = 180° – 50°
x = 130°
So, the measure of x is 130°

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 34.1

Answer:
∠1 and 115° are corresponding angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠1 is 115°
∠1 and x are alternate exterior angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of x is 115°

Question 30.
PROJECT
Trace line p and line t on a piece of paper. Label ∠1. Move the paper so that ∠1 aligns with ∠8. Describe the transformations that you used to show that ∠1 is congruent to ∠8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 35.2

Answer: 180° rotation, translation about line t.

Question 31.
OPEN-ENDED
Refer to the figure.
a. Do the horizontal lines appear to be parallel? Explain.

Answer: The three horizontal lines seem to spread apart, even though in reality they are parallel.

b. Draw your own optical illusion using parallel lines.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 36

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Solution Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 img_7

Question 32.
DIG DEEPER!
The figure shows the angles used to make a shot on an air hockey table.
a. Find the value of x.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 37

Answer:
As the lines AB and CD are parallel and ∠BCD are alternate interior angles transversal BC, they are congruent.
∠ABC ≅ ∠BCD
x = 64
b. How does the angle the puck hits the edge of the table relate to the angle it leaves the edge of the table?

Answer:
m∠MBA + m∠ABC + m∠CBN = 180°
58 ° + 64° + m∠CBN = 180°
122 ° + m∠CBN = 180°
m∠CBN = 180° – 122 °
m∠CBN = 58°

Lesson 3.2 Angles of Triangles

EXPLORATION 1

Exploring Interior and Exterior Angles of Triangles
Work with a partner.
a. Draw several triangles using geometry software. What can you conclude about the sums of the angle measures?
b. You can extend one side of a triangle to form an exterior angle as shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 38
Use geometry software to draw a triangle and an exterior angle. Compare the measure of the exterior angle with the measures of the interior angles. Repeat this process for several different triangles. What can you conclude?

Answer:

EXPLORATION 2
Using Parallel Lines and Transversals
Work with a partner. Describe what is shown in the figure below. Then use what you know about parallel lines and transversals to justify your conclusions in Exploration 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 39

Answer:

3.2 Lesson

Try It

Find the measures of the interior angles of the triangle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 40

Answer: 81°, 25°, 74°

Explanation:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 81° + 25° = 180°
x° = 180° – 81° – 25°
x = 74°
Thus the measure of the interior angle is 74°

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 41

Answer: 43°, 51°, 86°

Explanation:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + (x – 35)° + 43° = 180°
x° + x° – 35° + 43° = 180°
2x° + 8° = 180°
2x° = 180° – 8°
2x° = 172°
x° = 172°/2
x° = 86°
The measure of the interior angle of the triangle
(x – 35)° = 86 – 35
(x – 35)° = 51°
x° = 51° + 35°
x° = 86°

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
VOCABULARY
How many exterior angles does a triangle have at each vertex? Explain.

Answer:
BIM 8th Grade Answers Chapter 3 img_8
At each vertex of a triangle, there are two exterior angles, which are congruent.

FINDING ANGLE MEASURES
Find the value of x.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 42

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 25° + 40° = 180°
x° + 65° = 180°
x° = 180°
x° = 180° – 65°
x° = 115°
Thus the value of x is 115°

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 43

Answer:
x° = 50° + 55°
x° = 105°
Thus the value of x is 105°

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
The Historic Triangle in Virginia connects Jamestown, Williamsburg, and Yorktown. The interior angle at Williamsburg is 120°. The interior angle at Jamestown is twice the measure of the interior angle at Yorktown. Find the measures of the interior angles at Jamestown and Yorktown. Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
The interior angle at Williamsburg is 120°.
Let the interior angles at Jamestown be x°
Let the interior angles at Yorktown be 2x°
Big Ideas math Answers Grade 8 ch3 angles and triangle img_9
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 2x° + 120° = 180°
3x° + 120° = 180°
3x° = 180° – 120°
3x° = 60°
x° = 60/3
x° = 20°
The interior angles at Jamestown be x° = 20°
The interior angles at Yorktown be 2x° = 2(20)° = 40°

Question 8.
A helicopter travels from point C to point A to perform a medical supply drop. The helicopter then needs to land at point B. How many degrees should the helicopter turn at point A to travel towards point B? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 44

Answer:
Given,
A helicopter travels from point C to point A to perform a medical supply drop.
The helicopter then needs to land at point B.
A = 90° + 32°
A = 122°
Thus the helicopter should turn 122° at point A to travel towards point B.

Angles of Triangles Homework & Practice 3.2

Review & Refresh

Use the figure to find the measure of the angle. Explain your reasoning.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 45

Question 1.
∠2

Answer: 82°

∠2 and 82° are alternate exterior angles formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠2 is 82°

Question 2.
∠6

Answer: 82°

∠6 and 82° are vertical angles formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠6 is 82°

Question 3.
∠4

Answer: 82°

∠4 and 82° are corresponding angles formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠4 is 82°

Question 4.
∠1

Answer: 98°

∠4 and 82° are corresponding angles formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠4 is 82°
∠4 and ∠1 are supplementary angles
∠4 + ∠1 = 180°
82° + ∠1 = 180°
∠1 = 180° – 82°
∠1 = 98°

You spin the spinner shown.

Question 5.
What are the favorable outcomes of spinning a number less than 4?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 46

Answer: 1, 2, 3

Explanation:
The favorable outcome of spinning a number less than 4 is 1, 2, and 3.

Question 6.
In how many ways can spinning an odd number occur?

Answer: two ways
Odd numbers = 1 and 3
So, in two ways spinning an odd number can occur.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING PARALLEL LINES AND TRANSVERSALS
Consider the figure below. (See Exploration 2, p. 111.)

Question 7.
Use a protractor to find the measures of the labeled angles.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 47

Answer:
Use a protractor to determine the measures of the angles A, B, C.
m∠A = 30°
m∠B = 105°
m∠C = 45°
m∠D = 150°
m∠E = 75°
m∠F = 105°
m∠G = 30°

Question 8.
Is ∠F an exterior angle of Triangle ABC ? Justify your answer.

Answer:
An exterior angle is the angle between one side of a triangle and the extension of an adjacent side. ∠F is not an exterior angle of triangle ABC because it has a side of triangle ABC, but not the extension of the adjacent side DF.

USING INTERIOR ANGLE MEASURES
Find the measures of the interior angles of the triangle.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 48

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 90° + 30° = 180°
x° + 120° = 180°
x° = 180° – 120°
x° = 60°

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 49

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 65° + 40° = 180°
x° + 105° = 180°
x° = 180° – 105°
x° = 75°

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 50

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 35° + 45° = 180°
x° + 80° = 180°
x° = 180° – 80°
x° = 100°

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 51

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + (x + 65)° + 25° = 180°
x° + x° + 65° + 25° = 180°
2x° + 90° = 180°
2x° = 180° – 90°
2x° = 90°
x° = 90°/2
x° = 45°
(x + 65)° = 45 + 65 = 110
x° = 25°

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 52

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + (x – 44)° + 48° = 180°
x° + x° – 44° + 48° = 180°
2x° + 4° = 180°
2x° = 180° – 4°
2x° = 176°
x° = 176°/2
x° = 88°
(x – 44)° = 88 – 44 = 44
x° = 44°

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 53

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + (x – 11)° + 73° = 180°
x° + x° – 11° + 73° = 180°
2x° + 62° = 180°
2x° = 180° – 62°
2x° = 118°
x° = 118°/2
x° = 59°
(x – 11)° = 59 – 11 = 48
x° = 48°

FINDING EXTERIOR ANGLE MEASURES
Find the measure of the exterior angle.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 54

Answer:
x° = 38° + 90°
x° = 128°
The measure of exterior angle is 128°

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 55

Answer:
k° = 64° + 76°
k° = 140°
The measure of an exterior angle is 140°

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 56

Answer:
2a° = (a + 10°) + 44°
2a° = a + 54°
2a° – a° = 54
a° = 54
The measure of the exterior angle = 2a = 2(54°) = 108°

Question 18.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A tornado is located between city hall and a cell phone tower and is heading towards the cell phone tower. By what angle does the tornado’s direction need to change so that it passes over the radar station instead? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 57

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 75° + 75° = 180°
x° + 150° – 150° = 180° – 150°
x° = 30°
Thus the angle that tornado direction needs to change is 30°.

Question 19.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the measure of the exterior angle shown. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 58

Answer:
Your friend is not correct because the measure of the exterior angle is equal to the sum of two non-adjacent interior angles.

Question 20.
REASONING
The ratio of the interior angle measures of a triangle is 2 : 3 : 5. What are the angle measures?

Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 59

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
2x° + 3x° + 5x° = 180°
10x° = 180°
x = 180/10
x = 18°
2x° = 2(18°) = 36°
3x° = 3(18) = 54°
5x° = 5(18) = 90°

Question 21.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The support for a window air-conditioning unit forms a triangle and an exterior angle. What is the measure of the exterior angle?

Answer:
The measure of the exterior angle DBC is
m∠DBC = m∠ABC + m∠ACB
m∠ABC + m∠ACB = 90°
5x – 6 + 3x = 90
8x – 6 = 90
8x = 90 + 6
8x = 96
x = 96/8
x = 12
m∠DBC = m∠BAC+ m∠ACB
= 90° + 3(12)°
= 126°

Question 22.
REASONING
A triangle has an exterior angle with a measure of 120°. Can you determine the measures of the interior angles? Explain.

Answer:
A triangle has an exterior angle with a measure of 120°
m∠ACB = m∠A + m∠B
m∠A + m∠B = 120°
According to the exterior angles
We have
m∠C + m∠ACD = 180°
m∠C + 120° = 180°
m∠C = 180° – 120°
m∠C = 60°

ANGLES OF TRIANGLES

Determine whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain your reasoning.

Question 23.
Given three angle measures, you can construct a triangle.

Answer:
We can construct a triangle if the sum of the measure of the 3 angles is 180°.
As a matter of fact, if the sum of the measures of the 3 angles is 180°
We can build an infinity of triangles that are similar.

Question 24.
The acute interior angles of a right triangle are complementary.

Answer:
Let A, B, C be the angles of a right triangle with m∠A = 90°
m∠A + m∠B + m∠C = 180°
90° + m∠B + m∠C = 180°
m∠B + m∠C = 180° – 90°
m∠B + m∠C = 90°
This means ∠B and ∠C are complementary.

Question 25.
A triangle has more than one vertex with an acute exterior angle.

Answer:
An exterior angle of a triangle and the adjacent triangle’s angle are complementary. If an exterior angle is acute, it means the adjacent triangle’s angle is obtuse.
Since we are given that more than one exterior angle is acute, it means the triangle would have more than one obtuse angle, which is impossible.
The statement is never true.

Question 26.
DIG DEEPER!
Using the figure at the right, show that z = x + y. (Hint: Find two equations involving w.)
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 60

Answer:
The angles z and w are supplementary
z + w = 180°
The sum of a triangle is 180°
x + y + w = 180°
z = 180° – w
x + y = 180° – w
z = x + y

Lesson 3.3 Angles of Polygons

EXPLORATION 1
Work with a partner. In parts (a)-(f), use what you know about the interior angle measures of triangles to find the sum of the interior angle measures of each figure.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 61
g. REPEATED REASONING
Use your results in parts (a)–(f) to complete the table. Then write an equation that represents the sum of the interior angle measures of a polygon with n sides.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 62

Answer:

3.3 Lesson

Try It

Find the sum of the interior angle measures of the green polygon.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 63

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (7 – 2) . 180°
S = 5 . 180°
S = 900°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 900°

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 64

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (6 – 2) . 180°
S = 4 . 180°
S = 720°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 720°

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
WRITING
Explain how to find the sum of the interior measures of a polygon.

Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 65

Answer:
Steps to find the sum of the interior measurements of the polygon:
1. Count the number of sides of the polygon.
2. Subtract the number of sides by 2.
3. Multiply the result of the subtraction by 180°

Question 6.
FINDING THE SUM OF INTERIOR ANGLE MEASURES
Find the sum of the interior angle measures of the green polygon.

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (4 – 2) . 180°
S = 2 . 180°
S = 360°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 360°

FINDING AN INTERIOR ANGLE MEASURE

Find the value of x.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 66

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (5 – 2) . 180°
S = 3 . 180°
S = 540°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 540°
x° + 160° + 110° + 105° + 95° = 540°
x° + 470° = 540°
x° = 540° – 470°
x° = 70°
Thus the value of x is 70°.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 67

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (9 – 2) . 180°
S = 7 . 180°
S = 1260°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1260°
x° + 165° + 155° + 150° + 140° + 135° + 130° + 125° + 110° = 1260°
x° + 1105° = 1260°
x° = 1260° – 1105°
x° = 155°
Thus the value of x is 155°

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 9.
A company installs an octagonal swimming pool.
a. Find the value of a for the pool shown at the left.

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (8 – 2) . 180°
S = 6 . 180°
S = 1080°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1080°
a° + 120° + a° + 120° + a° + 120° + a° + 120° = 1080°
4a° + 480° = 1080°
4a° = 1080° – 480°
4a° = 600°
a° = 600/4
a° = 150°
Thus the value of x is 150°.

b. The company installs a different pool that is also in the shape of an octagon. The second pool has twice the length and one-third the width of the first pool. Are the sums of the interior angles of the pools different? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 67.1

Answer:
No for any octagon the sum of the interior angles is 1080 degrees.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
A Bronze Star Medal A is shown.
a. How many interior angles are there?

Answer: 10 interior angles are there

b. What is the sum of the interior angle measures?
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 68

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (10 – 2) . 180°
S = 8 . 180°
S = 1440°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1440°

Angles of Polygons Homework & Practice 3.3

Find the value of x.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 69

Answer: 60°

Explanation:
Sum of all the angles = 180°
x° + 60° + 60° = 180°
x° + 120° = 180°
x° = 180° – 120°
x° = 60°

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 70

Answer: 45°

Explanation:
Sum of all the angles = 180°
x° + x° + 90° = 180°
2x° + 90° = 180°
2x° = 180° – 90°
2x° = 90°
x° = 45°

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 71

Answer: 113°

Explanation:
x° = 65° + 48°
x° = 113°
Thus the measure of an exterior angle is 113°

Solve the proportion.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 72

Answer: 9

Explanation:
\(\frac{x}{12}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
12 . \(\frac{x}{12}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\) . 12
x = 3 . 3
x = 9

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 73

Answer: 2

Explanation:
\(\frac{14}{21}\) = \(\frac{x}{3}\)
3 . \(\frac{14}{21}\) = \(\frac{x}{3}\) . 3
x = 2

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 74

Answer: 3

Explanation:
\(\frac{9}{x}\) = \(\frac{6}{2}\)
2. \(\frac{9}{x}\) = 6
18 = 6x
x = 3

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
EXPLORING INTERIOR ANGLES OF POLYGONS
Use triangles to find the sum of the interior angle measures of the polygon. (See Exploration 1, p. 117.)

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 75

Answer: 360°

Explanation:
Number of sides = 4
Number of interior triangles in the given figure = 2
The Sum of the measures of the interior angles using triangle = 2 . 180° = 360°

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 76

Answer: 1260°

Explanation:
Number of sides = 9
Number of interior triangles in the given figure = 7
The Sum of the measures of the interior angles using triangle = 7 . 180° = 1260°

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 77

Answer: 540°

Explanation:
Number of sides = 5
Number of interior triangles in the given figure = 3
The Sum of the measures of the interior angles using triangle = 3 . 180° = 540°

FINDING THE SUM OF INTERIOR ANGLE MEASURES
Find the sum of the interior angle measures of the polygon.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 78

Answer: 360°

Explanation:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (4- 2) . 180°
S = 2 . 180°
S = 360°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 360°

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 79

Answer: 1080°

Explanation:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (8- 2) . 180°
S = 6 . 180°
S = 1080°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1080°

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 80

Answer: 1260°

Explanation:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (9- 2) . 180°
S = 7 . 180°
S = 1260°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1260°

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the sum of the interior angle measures of a 13-gon. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 81

Answer:
To find the sum of the interior angle measures he should subtract 2 from the number of sides of the polygon and then multiply by 180°
S = (n – 2) . 180°
By this, we can say that your friend is not correct.

FINDING AN INTERIOR ANGLE MEASURE
Find the value of x.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 82

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (4- 2) . 180°
S = 2 . 180°
S = 360°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 360°
x° + 155° + 25° + 137° = 360°
x° + 317° = 360°
x° = 360° – 317°
x° = 43°

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 83

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (6- 2) . 180°
S = 4 . 180°
S = 720°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 720°
x° + x° + x° + x° + 90° + 90° = 720°
4x° + 180° = 720°
4x° = 720° – 180°
4x° = 540°
x° = 540/4
x° = 135°

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 84

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (6- 2) . 180°
S = 4 . 180°
S = 720°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 720°
3x° + 45° + 135° + x° + 135° + 45° = 720°
4x° + 360° = 720°
4x° = 720° – 360°
4x° = 360°
x° = 360/4
x° = 90°

FINDING A MEASURE
Find the measure of each interior angle of the regular polygon.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 85

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (3- 2) . 180°
S = 1 . 180°
S = 180°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 180°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 3.
180 ÷ 3 = 60°

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 86

Answer:

S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (9 – 2) . 180°
S = 7 . 180°
S = 1260°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1260°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 9.
1260 ÷ 9 = 140°

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 87

Answer:

S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (12 – 2) . 180°
S = 10 . 180°
S = 1800°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1800°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 12.
1800 ÷ 12 = 150°

Question 20.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the measure of each interior angle of a regular 20-gon. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 88

Answer:
No, my friend is not correct because to find the measure of each interior angle of a regular 20-gon, he should divide the sum of the measured interior angles by the number of interior angles, in this case, 20 but your friend divide it by 18 so he is not correct.

Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A firehydrant bolt is in the shape of a regular pentagon.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 89
a. What is the measure of each interior angle?

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (5- 2) . 180°
S = 3 . 180°
S = 540°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 540°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 5.
540÷ 5 = 108°

b. RESEARCH
Why are firehydrants made this way?

Question 22.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The interior angles of a regular polygon each measure 165°. How many sides does the polygon have?

Answer:
(n – 2) . 180 = 165 . n
180n – 360 = 165n
180n – 360 + 360 – 165n = 165n + 360 – 165n
15n = 360
n = 360/15
n = 24
Therefore the polygon has 24 sides

Question 23.
STRUCTURE
A molecule can be represented by a polygon with interior angles that each measure 120°. What polygon represents the molecule? Does the polygon have to be regular? Justify your answers.

Answer:
(n – 2) . 180 = 120 . n
180n – 360 = 120n
180n – 120n = 360
60n = 360
n = 6

Question 24.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The border of a Susan B. Anthony dollar is in the shape of a regular polygon.
a. How many sides does the polygon have?

Answer: The polygon has 11 sides.

b. What is the measure of each interior angle of the border? Round your answer to the nearest degree.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 91

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (11 – 2) . 180°
S = 9 . 180°
S = 1620°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1620°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 11.
1620 ÷ 11 = 147°

Question 25.
REASONING
The center of the stained glass window is in the shape of a regular polygon. What are the measures of the interior angles of the green triangle?

Answer:
(n-2)180°/n = (8-2)180°/8 = 135°
m∠OAB = m∠OBA = 135/2 = 67.5°
m∠AOB + m∠OAB + m∠OBA = 180°
m∠AOB + 67.5° + 67.5° = 180°
m∠AOB + 135° = 180°
m∠AOB = 180° – 135°
m∠AOB = 45°

Question 26.
GEOMETRY
Draw a pentagon that has two right interior angles, two 45° interior angles, and one 270° interior angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 92

Answer:
Big Ideas Math 8th Grade Solution Key Ch 3 Angles and Triangles img_9
Big Ideas Math 8th Grade Solution Key Ch 3 Angles and Triangles img_10

Question 27.
DIG DEEPER!
The floor of a gazebo is in the shape of a heptagon, a seven-sided polygon. Four of the interior angles measure 135°. The other interior angles have equal measures. Find their measures.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 93

Answer:
The given polygon has 7 sides.
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (7 – 2) . 180°
S = 5 . 180°
S = 900°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 900°
4 . 135° + 3 . x° = 900°
540° + 3x° = 900°
3x° = 900° – 540°
3x° = 360°
x° = 360/3
x° = 120°

Lesson 3.4 Using Similar Triangles

Using Similar Triangles

EXPLORATION 1

Work with a partner. Use geometry software.
a. Draw a triangle that has a 50° angle and a 30° angle. Then draw a triangle that is either larger or smaller that has the same two angle measures. Are the triangles congruent? similar? Explain your reasoning.
a. Choose any two angle measures whose sum is less than 180°. Repeat part(a) using the angle measures you chose.
c. Compare your results in parts (a) and (b) with other pairs of students. Make a conjecture about two triangles that have two pairs of congruent angles.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 93.1

Answer:

EXPLORATION 2
Using Indirect Measurement
Work with a partner. Use the fact that two rays from the Sun are parallel to make a plan for how to find the height of the flagpole. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 94

Answer:

3.4 Lesson

Try It

Tell whether the triangles are similar. Explain.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 95

Answer: No

Explanation:
x° + 28° + 80° = 180°
x° + 108° = 180°
x° = 180° – 108°
x° = 72°
BIM Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Angles and triangles img_11
y° + 28° + 71° = 180°
y° + 99° = 180°
y° = 180° – 99°
y° = 81°
The triangles do not have two pairs of congruent angles.
So, the triangles are not similar.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 96

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
x° + 66° + 90° = 180°
x° + 156° = 180°
x° = 180° – 156°
x° = 24°
y° + 24° + 90° = 180°
y° + 114° = 180°
y° = 180° – 114°
y° = 66°
The triangles have two pairs of congruent angles.
Thus the triangles are similar.

Try It

Question 3.
Can you determine whether △PQR and △TSRand are similar? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 97

Answer: No

Explanation:
We are not given any information about the lengths of the sides either, therefore with only a pair of congruent angles, we cannot tell whether the triangles are similar.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
IDENTIFYING SIMILAR TRIANGLES
Tell whether the triangles are similar. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 98

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
x° + 54° + 63° = 180°
x° + 107° = 180°
x° = 180° – 107°
x° = 63°

Question 5.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 98.1
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 99

Answer: Option B

Explanation:
ΔPQR and ΔTSR are congruent as TS || PQ leads to two pairs of correspondent congruent angles.
ΔPQR is a dilation of ΔTSR because their sides are proportional, the constant of proportionality being greater than 1.
ΔPQR is a scale drawing of ΔTSR because their sides are proportional.
The question that does not fit is
“Are ΔPQR and ΔTSR the same size and shape?”
because the triangles do not have the same size, but they have the same shape.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
Engineers plan to construct an aqueduct to transport water from the top of a ridge to farmland. A portion of the project is complete. Find the length of the entire aqueduct.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 100
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 101

Answer:
Aqueduct/2.6 = 5/1
Aqueduct = 5 × 2.6
Aqueduct = 13
Thus the length of the Aqueduct is 13 km.

Question 7.
You want to go on a swamp tour. How long does it take a swamp vehicle that travels at 3.2 miles per hour to travel across the swamp, from point Z to point Y? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 102

Answer:
a/10 = 3/6
6 × a = 3 × 10
6a = 30
a = 30/6
a = 5
The length from point Z to point Y is 5 miles.
Time to travel from point Z to point Y = 5/3.5 = 1.56 hour

Using Similar Triangles Homework & Practice 3.4

Review & Refresh

Find the measure of each interior angle of the regular polygon.

Question 1.
octagon

Answer: The measure of each interior angle is 135°

Explanation:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (8- 2) . 180°
S = 6 . 180°
S = 1080°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1080°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 8.
1080÷ 8= 135°

Question 2.
decagon

Answer: The measure of each exterior angle is 144°

Explanation:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (10 – 2) . 180°
S = 8 . 180°
S = 1440°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1440°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 10.
1440÷ 10= 144°

Question 3.
18-gon

Answer: The measure of each interior angle is 160°

Explanation:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (18- 2) . 180°
S = 16 . 180°
S = 2880°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 2880°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 18.
2880 ÷ 18= 160°

Solve the equation. Check your solution.

Question 4.
3.5 + y = -1

Answer:
Given the equation
3.5 + y = -1
y = -1 – 3.5
y = -4.5

Question 5.
9x = 54

Answer:
Given the equation
9x = 54
x = 54/9
x = 6

Question 6.
-4 = \(\frac{2}{7}\)p

Answer:
Given the equation
-4 = \(\frac{2}{7}\)p
-4 × 7 = 2p
2p = -28
p = -28/2
p = -14

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
CREATING SIMILAR TRIANGLES
Draw a triangle that is either larger or smaller than the one given and has two of the same angle measures. Explain why the new triangle is similar to the original triangle. (See Exploration 1, p. 123.)

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 103

Answer:
BIM Answers for Grade 8 chapter 3 img_12
The above triangle and the given triangle are similar because the two angles in both the triangles are the same so the third angle is also the same.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 104

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 104
The above triangle and the given triangle are similar because the two angles in both the triangles are the same so the third angle is also the same.

IDENTIFYING SIMILAR TRIANGLES
Tell whether the triangles are similar. Explain.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 105

Answer: The triangles have two pairs of congruent angles.
So, the third angles are congruent, and the triangles are similar.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 106

Answer:
x° + 36° + 72° = 180°
x° + 108° = 180°
x° = 180° – 108°
x° = 72°
y° + 33° + 72° = 180°
y° + 105° = 180°
y° = 180° – 105°
y° = 72°
The triangles do not have two pairs of congruent angles.
Therefore the triangles are not similar.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 107

Answer:
x° + 64° + 85° = 180°
x° + 149° = 180°
x° = 180° – 149°
x° = 31°
y° + 26° + 85° = 180°
y° + 111° = 180°
y° = 180° – 111°
y° = 69°
The triangles do not have two pairs of congruent angles.
Therefore the triangles are not similar.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 108

Answer:
x° + 48° + 81° = 180°
x° + 129° = 180°
x° = 180° – 129°
x° = 51°
y° + 48° + 51° = 180°
y° + 99° = 180°
y° = 180° – 99°
y° = 81°
The triangles have two pairs of congruent angles.
Therefore the triangles are similar.

Question 13.
GEOMETRY
Which of the rulers are similar in shape? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 109

Answer:
2x + 90 = 180°
2x = 180 – 90°
2x = 90°
x = 90/2
x = 45°
The ruler on the left and the ruler on the right both have the shape of a right triangle with 45° angles, therefore they are similar in shape, while the middle ruler has 60°, 30° angles.

STRUCTURE
Tell whether the triangles are similar. Explain.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 110

Answer:
m∠APB + m∠B = 90°
m∠APB + 51° = 90°
m∠APB = 90° – 51°
m∠APB = 39°
m∠APB + m∠BPD + m∠DPC = 180°
39° + 102° + m∠DPC = 180°
m∠DPC + 141° = 180
m∠DPC = 180 – 141°
m∠DPC = 39°
m∠A = m∠C
m∠APB = m∠DPC

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 111

Answer:
∠APB ≅ ∠CPD
m∠APB = m∠CPD
m∠APB = 29°
m∠A + m∠B + m∠APB = 180°
m∠A + 88° + 29° = 180°
m∠A  + 117° = 180°
m∠A = 180° – 117°
m∠A = 63°
m∠PDC + m∠PDE = 180°
m∠PDC + 91° = 180°
m∠PDC = 180° – 91°
m∠PDC = 89°

IDENTIFYING SIMILAR TRIANGLES
Can you determine whether the triangles are similar? Explain.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 112

Answer:
PS || QR
∠PSQ and ∠SQR are interior angles using the transversal QS, thus they are congruent.
∠PSQ ≅ ∠SQR

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 113

Answer:
As AB || DE there are two pairs of congruent alternate interior angles, using the transversals AE and BD.
∠A≅ ∠E
∠B≅ ∠D
The two pairs of congruent angles are enough to prove that the triangles are similar.
ΔABC ∼ ΔEDC

Question 18.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A water sample must be taken from water atleast 20 feet deep. Find the depth of the water 50 feet from shore. Is this an appropriate location for a water sample?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 114

Answer:
ΔAMN ∼ ΔABC
MN/BC = AM/AB
1.5/d = 5/50
d = 1.5 × 10
d = 15 feet
Therefore 15 feet is not an appropriate location.

Question 19.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A map shows the number of steps you must take to get to a treasure. However, the map is old, and the last dimension is unreadable. Explain why the triangles are similar. How many steps do you take from the pyramids to the treasure?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 115

Answer:
The two triangles are similar because they are right triangles and ∠AXB ≅ ∠PXQ because they are vertical angles.
PQ/300 = 80/240
240PQ = 24000
PQ = 24000/240
PQ = 100 steps

Question 20.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A person who is 6 feet tall casts a 3-foot-long shadow. A nearby pine tree casts a 15-foot-long shadow. What is the height h of the pine tree?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 116

Answer:
Given,
A person who is 6 feet tall casts a 3-foot-long shadow.
A nearby pine tree casts a 15-foot-long shadow.
ΔXAB ∼ ΔXPQ
AB/PQ = XB/XQ
6/PQ = 3/15
PQ = 30 ft

Question 21.
OPEN-ENDED
You place a mirror on the ground 6 feet from the lamppost. You move back 3 feet and see the top of the lamppost in the mirror. What is the height of the lamppost?

Answer:
Grade 8 BIM Chapter 3 Answer Key img_13
ΔXAB ∼ ΔXPQ
AB/PQ = XB/XQ
h/PQ = 6/3
h = 2PQ

Question 22.
DIG DEEPER!
In each of two right triangles, one angle measure is two times another angle measure. Can you determine that the triangles are similar? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
We are given the right triangle ABC
m∠A = 2m∠B
Case 1:
m∠A = 90°
90° = 2m∠B
m∠B = 45°
m∠C = 180° – 90° – 45° = 45°
Case 2:
m∠B = 90°
m∠A = 2 × 90° = 180°
Case 3:
m∠C = 90°
m∠A + m∠B = 180 – m∠C = 180° – 90° = 90°
2m∠B + m∠B = 90°
3m∠B = 90°
m∠B = 30°
m∠A = 2 . 30° = 60°

Question 23.
GEOMETRY
In the diagram, \(\overline{B G}\), \(\overline{C F}\) and \(\overline{D E}\) are parallel. The length of \(\overline{B D}\) is 6.32 feet, and the length of \(\overline{D E}\) is 6 feet. Name all pairs of similar triangles in the diagram. Then find the lengths of \(\overline{B G}\) and \(\overline{C F}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 117

Answer:
ΔABG ∼ ΔACF
ΔACF ∼ ΔADE
ΔABG ∼ ΔADE
AB = BC = CD = BD/2 = 6.32/2 = 3.16
AB/CD = BG/DE
3BG = 6
BG = 2 feet
ΔACF ∼ ΔADE
AC/AD = CF/DE
2/3 = CF/6
3CF = 2(6)
CF = 4 feet

Angles and Triangles Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
A dog park is divided into sections for large and small dogs. The ratio of the perimeter of the small dog section to the perimeter of the entire dog park is 7 : 12. Find the area of each section.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 118

Understand the problem
You know two dimensions of a dog park and the ratio of the perimeter of the small dog section to the perimeter of the entire park. You are asked to find the area of each section.
Make a plan
Verify that the small triangle and the large triangle are similar. Then use the ratio of the perimeters to find the base or the height of each triangle and calculate the areas.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.

Answer:

Question 2.
You rotate lines m and t 180° about point P. The image of line m is parallel to the original line. Use the diagram to show that when a transversal intersects parallel lines, each of the following pairs of angles are congruent. Explain your reasoning.
a. alternate interior angles
b. alternate exterior angles
c. corresponding angles
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 119

Answer:

Performance Task

Turtle Shells

At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Honeycombs.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 120

Angles and Triangles Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 121

Graphic Organizers
You can use an Example and Non-Example to list examples and non-examples of a concept. Here is an Example and Non-Example Chart for transversals.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 122

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.

  1. interior angles formed by parallel lines and a transversal
  2. exterior angles formed by parallel lines and a transversal
  3. interior angles of a triangle
  4. exterior angles of a triangle
  5. polygons
  6. similar triangles

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 123

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 124

3.1 Parallel Lines and Transversals (pp. 103–110)

Use the figure to find the measure of the angle. Explain your reasoning.

Question 1.
∠8

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 125

Answer: 140°

Explanation:
∠8 and 140 degrees angle are alternate exterior angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠8 is 140°

Question 2.
∠5

Answer: 140°

Explanation:
∠5 and 140 degrees angle are corresponding angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠5 is 140°

Question 3.
∠7

Answer: 40°

Explanation:
∠5 and 140 degrees angle are corresponding angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠5 is 140°
∠5 and ∠7 are supplementary angle.
∠5 + ∠7 = 180°
140° + ∠7 = 180°
∠7 = 180° – 140°
∠7 = 40°
So, the measure of ∠7 is 40°

Question 4.
∠2

Answer: 40°

Explanation:
140 and ∠2 are supplementary angle.
140° + ∠2 = 180°
∠2 = 180° – 140°
∠2 = 40°
So, the measure of ∠2 is 40°

Question 5.
∠6

Answer: 40°

Explanation:
∠5 and 140 degrees angle are corresponding angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠5 is 140°
∠5 and ∠6 are supplementary angle.
140° + ∠6 = 180°
∠6 = 180° – 140°
∠6 = 40°
So, the measure of ∠6 is 40°

Complete the statement. Explain your reasoning.

Question 6.
If the measure of ∠1 = 123°, then the measure of ∠7 = Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 126

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 127

Answer: 123°

Explanation:
∠1 and ∠7 are alternate exterior angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠7 is 123°

Question 7.
If the measure of ∠2 = 58°, then the measure of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 127.1

Answer: 122°

Explanation:
∠2 and ∠6 are corresponding angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠6 is 58°
∠5 and ∠6 are supplementary angle.
∠5 + ∠6 = 180°
58° + ∠5 = 180°
∠5 = 180° – 58°
∠5 = 122°
So, the measure of ∠5 is 122°

Question 8.
If the measure of ∠5 = 119°, then the measure of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 128

Answer: 119°

Explanation:
∠3 and ∠5 are alternate interior angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠3 is 119°

Question 9.
If the measure of ∠4 = 60°, then the measure of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 129

Answer: 60°

Explanation:
∠4 and ∠6 are alternate exterior angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠4 is 60°

Question 10.
In Exercises 6–9, describe the relationship between ∠2 and ∠8.

Answer: ∠2 ≅ ∠8

Question 11.
In a park, a bike path and a horse riding path are parallel. In one part of the park, a hiking trail intersects the two paths. Find the measures of ∠1 and ∠2. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 129.1

Answer: ∠1 = 108°, ∠2 = 108°

Explanation:
∠3 and 72° are alternate interior angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠3 is 72°
∠3 + ∠1 = 180°
72° + ∠1 = 180°
∠1 = 180° – 72°
∠1 = 108°
So, the measure of ∠1 is 108°
∠1 and ∠2 are alternating interior angles. They are congruent.

3.2 Angles of Triangles (pp. 111 – 116)

Find the measures of the interior angles of the triangle.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 129.2

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 50° + 55° = 180°
x° + 105° = 180°
x° = 180° – 105°
x° = 75°

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 130

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + (x + 8)° + 90° = 180°
2x° + 8° + 90° = 180°
2x° + 98° = 180°
2x° = 180° – 98°
2x° = 82
x° = 82/2
x° = 41°
(x + 8)° = (41 + 8)° = 49°

Find the measure of the exterior angle.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 131

Answer:
s° = 50° + 75°
s° = 125°
Thus the measure of the exterior angle is 125°

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 132

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
t° + (t + 10)° + (t + 20)° = 180°
3t° + 10° + 20° = 180°
3t° + 30° = 180°
3t° = 180° – 30°
3t° = 150°
t° = 150/3
t° = 50°
Exterior angle:
t° + (t + 10)°
t° + t° + 10°
2t° + 10°
2(50)° + 10°
= 100° + 10°
= 110°
Thus the measure of the exterior angle is 110°.

Question 16.
What is the measure of each interior angle of an equilateral triangle? Explain.

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (3- 2) . 180°
S = 1 . 180°
S = 180°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 180°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 3.
180 ÷ 3 = 60°

Question 17.
You draw the Leo constellation. You notice that the three stars Denebola, Zosma, and Chertan form a triangle. In your drawing, you find the measure of the interior angle at Denebola is 30° and the measure of the interior angle of the triangle at Zosma is 56°. What is the measure of the interior angle of the triangle at Chertan?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 133

Answer:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 30° + 56° = 180°
x° + 86° = 180°
x° = 180° – 86°
x° = 94°
Thus the measure of the interior angle of the triangle at Chertan = 94°

3.3 Angles of Polygons (pp. 117–122)

Find the sum of the interior angle measures of the polygon.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 134

Answer:
The polygon has 13 sides
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (13- 2) . 180°
S = 11 . 180°
S = 1980°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1980°

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 135

Answer:
The polygon has 9 sides
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (9- 2) . 180°
S = 7 . 180°
S = 1260°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1260°

Find the value of x.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 136

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (4 – 2) . 180°
S = 2 . 180°
S = 360°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 360°
x° + 60° + 128° + 95° = 360°
x° + 283° = 360°
x° = 360° – 283°
x° = 77°
Thus the value of x is 77°.

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 137

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (7 – 2) . 180°
S = 5 . 180°
S = 900°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 900°
x° + 135° + 125° + 135° + 105° + 150° + 140° = 900°
x° + 790° = 900°
x° = 900° – 790°
x° = 110°

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 138

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (6 – 2) . 180°
S = 4 . 180°
S = 720°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 720°
x° + 120° + 140° + 92° + 125° + 130° = 720°
x° + 607° = 720°
x° = 720° – 607°
x° = 113°
The value of x° is 113°

Question 23.
Find the measure of each interior angle of the regular polygon.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 139

Answer:
The given polygon is an octagon. It has 8 sides.
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (8 – 2) . 180°
S = 6 . 180°
S = 1080°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1080°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 8.
1080 ÷ 3 = 135°

3.4 Using Similar Triangles (pp. 123–128)

Tell whether the triangles are similar. Explain.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 140

Answer:
x° + 68° + 90° = 180°
x° = 180° – 158°
x° = 22°
y° + 22° + 90° = 180°
y° + 112° = 180°
y° = 180° – 112°
y° = 68°
The triangles have two pairs of congruent angles.
So, the triangles are similar.

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 141

Answer:
x° + 100° + 30° = 180°
x° + 130° = 180°
x° = 180° – 130°
x° = 50°
y° + 100° + 50° = 180°
y° + 150° = 180°
y° = 180° – 150°
y° = 30°
The triangles have two pairs of congruent angles.
So, the triangles are similar.

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 142

Answer:
x° + 50° + 85° = 180°
x° + 135° = 180°
x° = 180° – 135°
x° = 45°
y° + 85° + 35° = 180°
y° + 120° = 180°
y° = 180° – 120°
y° = 60°
The triangles do not have two pairs of congruent angles.
So, the triangles are not similar.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 143

Answer:
∠B ≅ ∠D
∠A ≅ ∠C
∠AXB ≅ ∠CXD
∠AXB and ∠CXD are vertical angles.
ΔAXB ∼ ΔCXD

Question 28.
A person who is 5 feet tall casts a shadow that is 4 feet long. A nearby building casts a shadow that is 24 feet long. What is the height of the building?

Answer:
Given,
A person who is 5 feet tall casts a shadow that is 4 feet long.
A nearby building casts a shadow that is 24 feet long.
Let the height of the building = x ft
x/24 = 5/4
24 . x/24 = 5/4 . 24
x = 30
Thus the height of the building is 30 ft.

Angles and Triangles Practice Test

Practice Test

Use the figure to find the measure of the angle. Explain your reasoning.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 144

Question 1.
∠7

Answer: 47°

Explanation:
∠7 and 47° angles are alternate exterior angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠7 is 47°

Question 2.
∠6

Answer: 47°

Explanation:
∠6 and 47° angles are corresponding angles formed by a transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠6 is 47°

Question 3.
∠4

Answer: 133°

Explanation:
∠4 and 47° are supplementary angles.
47° + ∠4 = 180°
∠4 = 180° – 47°
∠4 = 133°
Thus the measure of ∠4 = 133°

Question 4.
∠5

Answer: 133°

Explanation:
∠6 and 47° angles are corresponding angles formed by transversal intersecting parallel lines. The angles are congruent.
Thus the measure of ∠6 is 47°
∠6 + ∠5 = 180°
47° + ∠5 = 180°
∠5 = 180° – 47°
∠5 = 133°
Thus the measure of ∠5 = 133°

Question 5.
Find the value of x.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 144.1

Answer: 28°

Explanation:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + 129° + 23° = 180°
x° + 152° = 180°
x° = 180° – 152°
x° = 28°
Thus the value of x° is 28°

Question 6.
Find the measures of the interior angles.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 145

Answer: 68°

Explanation:
Sum of all the angles in a triangle = 180°
x° + (x – 24)° + 68° = 180°
x° + x° – 24° + 68° = 180°
2x° + 44° = 180°
2x° = 180° – 44°
2x° = 136°
x° = 68°
(x – 24)° = (68 – 24)° = 44°

Question 7.
Find the measure of the exterior angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 146

Answer:
j° = 40° + 90°
j° = 130°
The measure of an exterior angle is 130°.

Question 8.
Find the measure of the interior angle measures of the border of the coin.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 147

Answer:
The coin has 7 sides.
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (7 – 2) . 180°
S = 5 . 180°
S = 900°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 900°

Question 9.
Find the value of x.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 148

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (5 – 2) . 180°
S = 3 . 180°
S = 540°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 540°
2x° + 125° + 90° + 2x° + 125° = 540°
4x° + 340° = 540°
4x° = 540° – 340°
4x° = 200°
x° = 200/4
x° = 50°
The value of x° is 50°

Question 10.
Find the measure of each interior angle of the regular polygon.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 149

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (6 – 2) . 180°
S = 4 . 180°
S = 720°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 720°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 6.
720 ÷ 6 = 120°

Tell whether the triangles are similar. Explain.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 150

Answer:
To find x°:
x° + 61° + 70° = 180°
x° + 131° = 180°
x° = 180° – 131°
x° = 49°
To find y°:
x° + 39° + 70° = 180°
x° + 109° = 180°
x° = 180° – 109°
x° = 71°
The triangles do not have two pairs of congruent angles.
So, the triangles are not similar.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 151

Answer:
∠A ≅ ∠QPB
∠C ≅ ∠PQB
ΔBPQ ∼ ΔBAC

Question 13.
Describe two ways you can find the measure of ∠5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 152

Answer:
One way: ∠3 and 65° are supplementary angles. ∠5 and ∠3 are alternate interior angles.
Another way: ∠8 and 65° are alternate exterior angles. ∠5 and ∠8 are supplementary angles.

Question 14.
You swim 3.6 kilometers per hour. How long (in minutes) will it take you to swim the distance d across the pond?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 153

Answer:
Given,
You swim 3.6 kilometers per hour.
d/105 = 80/140
105 . d/105 = 80/140 . 105
d = 60
The length of the pond is 60 m.
Speed = 3.6 km per hour = 1 m sec
Distance = d = 60m
Time it will take to swim across the pond
= distance/speed
= 60/1
= 60 sec = 1 min

Angles and Triangles Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
The border of a Canadian one-dollar coin is shaped like an 11-sided regular polygon. The shape was chosen to help visually impaired people identify the coin. How many degrees are in each interior angle along the border? Round your answer to the nearest degree.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 154
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 154.1

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (11 – 2) . 180°
S = 9 . 180°
S = 1620°
Thus the sum of the interior angle measure is 1620°
In a regular polygon, each interior angle is congruent. So, divide the sum of the interior angle measures by the number of interior angles, 11.
1620 ÷ 11 = 147°

Question 2.
A public utility charges its residential customers for natural gas based on the number of therms used each month. The formula shows how the monthly cost tin dollars is related to the number of terms used.
C = 11 + 1.6t
Solve this formula for t.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 155

Answer:
C = 11 + 1.6t
C – 11 = 1.6t
1.6t = C – 11
t = (C – 11)/1.6
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 3.
What is the value of x?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 156

Answer:
5(x – 4) = 3x
5x – 20 = 3x
5x – 3x = 20
2x = 20
x = 20/2
x = 10
Thus the correct answer is option I.

Question 4.
In the figures, △PQR is similar to △STU. What is the value of x?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 157
A. 9.6
B. 10\(\frac{2}{3}\)
C. 13.5
D. 15

Answer:
△PQR is similar to △STU
PQ = 12
ST = 16
SU = 20
TU = 18
PQ/ST = QR/TU
12/16 = X/18
16X = 12 × 18
X = 216/16
X = 13.5 cm
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
What is the value of x?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 158

Answer:
∠y and 125° are supplementary angles.
125° + ∠y = 180°
∠y = 180° – 125°
∠y = 55°
So, the measure of ∠y = 55°
∠x and ∠y are alternate interior angles. They are congruent.
So, the measure of ∠x = 55°

Question 6.
Your friend was solving an equation in the box shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 159
What should your friend do to correct the error that she made?
F. Multiply both sides by –\(\frac{5}{2}\) instead of –\(\frac{2}{5}\).
G. Multiply both sides by \(\frac{2}{5}\) instead of –\(\frac{2}{5}\).
H. Distribute –\(\frac{2}{5}\) to get 4x – 6.
I. Add 15 to -30.

Answer:
My friend made the error by multiplying both sides by –\(\frac{2}{5}\).
To correct the error she should multiply both sides by –\(\frac{5}{2}\) instead of –\(\frac{2}{5}\)
Thus the correct answer is option F.

Question 7.
In the coordinate plane below, ∆XYZ is plotted and its vertices are labeled.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 160
Which of the following shows ∆X’Y’Z’, the image of ∆XYZ after it is reflected in the y-axis?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 161

Answer:
Given,
X(-6,-1)
Y(-3,-5)
X(-2,-3)
Reflecting a point (x,y) in the y-axis.
(x, y) = (-x, y)
X(-6,-1) = X'(6, -1)
Y(-3,-5) = Y'(3, -5)
X(-2,-3) = Z'(2, -3)
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 8.
The sum S of the interior angle measures of a polygon with n sides can be found by using a formula.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 162
Part A
Write the formula.

Answer:
S = (n – 2) . 180°
Part B
A quadrilateral has angles measuring 100°, 90°, and 90°. Find the measure of its fourth angle. Show your work and explain your reasoning.

Answer:
The quadrilateral has 4 sides
S = (n – 2) . 180°
S = (4 – 2) . 180°
S = 2 . 180°
S = 360 °
Thus the sum of the interior angles is 360 °
x° + 100° + 90° + 90° = 360°
x° + 280° = 360°
x° = 360° – 280°
x° = 80°
Thus the value of x° is 80°

Part C
The sum of the measures of the angles of the pentagon shown is 540°. Divide the pentagon into triangles to show why this must be true. Show your work and explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles 163

Answer:
Number of sides = 3
The number of interior triangles in the given figure = 3
Sum of the interior angles measure using triangle = 3 × 180° = 540

Conclusion:

I wish the details prevailed in the above article is beneficial for all the 8th grade students. Hope our Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 3 Angles and Triangles helped you a lot to overcome the difficulties in this chapter. Feel free to post your comments in the comment box. Stay tuned to our ccssmathanswers.com to get step by step explanation for all the Grade 8 chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12

Elementary school grade 3 students can get Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade 12th Chapter Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Solutions in the following sections. This BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Answer Key has the answers for all the questions of 8 lessons and performance task. Students who want to become a pro in maths can just download Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Solutions pdf and start their preparation. We are giving the answers pdf for free of cost.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass

Are you worried about completing maths homework in time? No need to worry. We are giving the direct link to download BIM Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Answer Key pdf. This pdf contains problems from Measure Mass, Understand and Estimate, Measure Liquid Volume, Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume, Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems, Measure Elapsed Time across the Hour, Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour, and Time to the Nearest Minute.

The success criteria of students after solving Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade 12th Chapter Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Solutions questions is solving time interval problems, get the appropriate way to measure an object, compare one measurement to another. Get the quick links for all lessons in the below sections and begin preparation.

Lesson 1 – Time to the Nearest Minute

Lesson 2 – Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour

Lesson 3 – Measure Elapsed Time across the Hour

Lesson 4 – Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems

Lesson 5 – Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume

Lesson 6 – Measure Liquid Volume

Lesson 7 – Understand and Estimate

Lesson 8 – Measure Mass

Performance Task

12.1 Time to the Nearest Minute

Explore and Grow

Write each time.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 1

Precision
How did you find each time ?
Answer:
The short hand is on 2 and the minute hand is on 1. So the time for the first clock is 2:05
The short hand is on 2 and the minute hand exceeded 1. So the time for the second clock is 2:06
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-1

Think and Grow: Tell Time to the Nearest Minute:

Example
What time does the clock show? What are some other ways to say the time?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 2
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 3
It takes 1 minute for the minute hand to move from one mark to the next.
Step 1: Look at the hour hand.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 4

  • The hour hand is between the 4
  • So, it is after 4:00 and before 5 : 00.

Step 2: Look at the minute hand.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 5

  • Count by 5s from the 12 to the 7.
  • Count on by 1s from the 7 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.

So, the time is ___ : ____
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“___ minutes after 4.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“___ minutes before 5.”
Answer:
The time is 04 : 37
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“37 minutes after 4.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“23 minutes before 5.”

Show and Grow

Write the time. Write another way to say the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 6
Answer: 09:13

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-6

Explanation:
Look at the hour hand.
The hour hand is between the 9 and 10.
The minute hand is between the 2 and 3.
The time between 2 and 3 is 5 minutes.
Count on by 1s from the 3 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.
The time is 09 : 13
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“13 minutes after 9.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“47 minutes before 10.”

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 7
Answer: 11:29
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-7

Explanation:

Look at the hour hand.
The hour hand is between the 11 and 12.
The minute hand is between the 5 and 6.
The time between 5 and 6 is 5 minutes.
Count on by 1s from the 4 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.
The time is 11 : 29
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“29 minutes after 11.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“31 minutes before 12.”

Apply and Grow

Write the time. Write another way to say the time.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 8
Answer: 05:14

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-8
Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“14 minutes after 5.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“46 minutes before 6.”
The time is 05:14

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 9
Answer:07:57

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-9

Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“57 minutes after 7.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“3 minutes before 8.”
The time is 07:57

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 10

Answer: 12:43

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-10
Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“43 minutes after 12.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“17 minutes before 1.”
The time is 12:43

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 300

Answer: 01:28
Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“28 minutes after 1.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“32 minutes before 2.”
The time is 01:28

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 301

Answer:10:32

Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“32 minutes after 10.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“28 minutes before 11.”
The time is 10:32

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 302

Write the time.
Answer: 06:06
Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“6 minutes after 6.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“54 minutes before 7.”
The time is 06:06

Question 9.
24 minutes after 3
Answer: 03:24

Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“24 minutes after 3.”
The time is 03:24

Question 10.
13 minutes before 9
Answer: 08:47

Explanation:
Count the minutes before the hour. Say,“13 minutes before 9.”
The time is 08:47

Question 11.
7 minutes before 1
Answer: 12:53

Explanation:
Count the minutes before the hour. Say,“53 minutes before 1.”
The time is 12:53

Question 12.
Which One Doesn’t Belong? Which time does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 11
Answer:  Digital clock does not belong with the other three
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-11
Explanation: as in digital clock its shows 5:33  i.e, 33 minutes after 5
so, Digital clock does not belong with the other three

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A train leaves a station at 12 minutes before 8. Show and write the time the train leaves the station.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 12
Answer: 07:48
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-12
Explanation: The time train leaves the station at 48 minutes after 7
07:48

Show and Grow

Question 13.
You go for a walk at 26 minutes after 2. Show and write the time you go for a walk.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 13
Answer: 02:26

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-13
walk at 26 minutes after 2
so the time is 02:26

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton and Descartes start playing a game at 3 : 11. They play for 47 minutes. Show and write the time they stop playing the game.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 14
Answer: 03:58

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-14
Newton and Descartes start playing a game at 3 : 11. They play for 47 minutes.
3 hour 11 minutes + 47 minutes we get 3 hour 58 minutes
So they stop playing the game at 03:58

Question 15.
You eat breakfast at 34 minutes before 9. You eat dinner at 42 minutes after 6. Show and write the times. Circle A.M. or P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 15
Which time is earlier? Explain
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-15

Count the minutes before the hour. Say,“34 minutes before 9.”
The time is 08:26
So, the breakfast time is 8:26 A.M
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“42 minutes before 6.”
The time is 06:42 P.M
Thus the dinner time is 6:42 P.M

Time to the Nearest Minute Homework & Practice 12.1

Write the time. Write another way to say the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 16
Answer: 11 minutes after 2

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-16
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“11 minutes after 2.”
The time is 02:11

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 310

Answer: 2 minutes before 5

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-310
Count the minutes before the hour. Say,“2 minutes before 4.”
The time is 04:58

Write the time. write two other ways to say the time.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 17
Answer:
1. 03:49
2. Count the minutes before the hour. Say, 11 minutes before 4

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 18
Answer:
08:32
count the minutes after the hour say 32 minutes after 8

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 19
Write the time
Answer:
1. 12:04
2.count the minutes after the hour say 4 minutes after 12

Question 6.
32 minutes after 10
Answer: 10:32

Explaination:
Count the time after hour say 32 minutes after 10
so the time is 10:32

Question 7.
8 minutes before 6
Answer: 05:52

Explanation:
Count the time before hour say 8 minutes before 6
so the time is 05:52

Question 8.
16 minutes before 8
Answer: 07:44

Explanation:
Count the time before hour say 16 minutes before 8
so the time is 07:44

Question 9.
Writing
Explain when you would stop counting by 5s and start counting by 1s when telling time to the nearest minute.
Answer:

Question 10.
Precision
Explain where the hands of an analog clock point at 1:27.
Answer:
Look at the hour hand.
The hour hand is between the 1 and 2.
The minute hand is between the 5 and 6.
The time between 5 and 6 is 5 minutes.
Count on by 1s from the 2 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.
The time is 01 : 27

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You start practicing taekwondo 19 minutes before 7. Show and write the time you start practicing.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 312
Answer: 06:41
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-312
Look at the hour hand.
The hour hand is between the 6 and 7.
The minute hand is between the 10 and 11.
The time between 10 and 11 is 5 minutes.
Count on by 1s from the 1 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.
the time you start practicing  is 06 : 41

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
some friends start jumping rope at 12:22. They jump rope for 24 minutes. Show and write the time they stop jumping rope.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 20
Answer: 12:46
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-20
Given they start jumping rope at 12:22
They jump rope for 24 minutes
so add 12:22 + 24 minutes we get 12:46
hence they stop jumping at 12:46

Review & Refresh

Question 13.
Estimate: ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 21
Answer: 330

Explanation:
The estimated number of 526 is 530.
The estimated number of 203 is 200.
530
-200
330

Question 14.
Estimate: ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 22
Answer: 590

Explanation
The estimated number of 945 is 950
The estimated number of 362 is 360
950
–  360
590

Question 15.
Estimate: ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 23
Answer: 260
Explanation:
The estimated number of 412 is 410
The estimated number of 145 is 150
410
–  150
   260

Lesson 12.2 Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour

Explore and Grow

Write each time. How much time has passed?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 24
___ minutes have passed.

Reasoning
How many more minutes until a half hour has passed? Explain.
Answer: 23 minutes have passed and 7 more minutes until half hour has passed
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-24

The start time is 05:00
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“23 minutes after 5.”
The time is 05:23
23 minutes have passed and 7 more minutes until half hour has passed

Think and Grow: Measure Elapsed Time

Elapsed time is the amount of time that passes from a starting time to an ending time.
Example
Find the elapsed time between 2:05 P.M. and 2:43 P.M.
Example
One Way: Use an analog clock.
Step 1: Draw the starting time.
Step 2: Mark the ending time.
Step 3: Count the minutes by5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 25
So, the elapsed time is ____ minutes.
Answer: 37 minutes

Another Way: Use a number line.
Step 1: Plot the starting time on a number line.
Step 2: Count on until you reach the ending time.
Step 3: Add the jumps to find the elapsed time.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 26
So, the elapsed time is ___ minutes.
Answer: 37 minutes

Show and Grow

Find the elapsed time.

Question 1.
Start: 11:10 A.M. End: 11:43 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 27
Answer: 33 minutes

Explanation:

Question 2.
Start: 1:25 P.M. End: 1:56 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 28
Answer: 31 minutes

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the elapsed time

Question 3.
Start: 7:30 A.M. End: 7:53 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 29
Answer: 23 minutes

Question 4.
Start: 5:15 P.M. End: 5:41 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 30
Answer: 26 minutes

Question 5.
Start: 10:50 A.M. End: 10:59 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 31
Answer: 9 minutes

Question 6.
Start: 8:05 P.M. End: 8:37 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 32
Answer: 32 minutes

Question 7.
Structure
Find the elapsed time and the end time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 33
Answer: Elapsed time 25 minutes end time is 09:52 Am

Question 8.
Writing
Explain how to use an analog clock to find the elapsed time from 6:20 P.M. to 6:38 P.M.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A magic show starts at 3:15 P.M. It ends at 3:57 P.M. How long is the show?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 34
Model:
The show is ___ minutes long.
Answer: 42 minutes
magic show starts at 03:15 P.M. it ends at 03:57 pm
so we have to subtract start time and end time to find how long the show run
03:57-03:15 is 42 minutes.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
A nature walk starts at 10:30 A.M. It ends at 10:46 A.M. How long is the walk?
Answer: 16 minutes
Given,
A nature walk starts at 10:30 A.M. It ends at 10:46 A.M.
To find how long is the walk we have to subtract the start time from end time.
10: 46 – 10:30 = 16 minutes

Question 10.
An Internet video is 13 minutes long. You start the video at 1:23 P.M. At what time does the video end?
Answer: 01:36 P.M.

Explanation:

Given,
Internet video is 13 minutes
video start at 1:23 P.M.
so add 13 minutes to 1:23 P.M1:23+13 = 1:36 P.M

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You play hopscotch for 27 minutes. You stop at 4:40 P.M. At what time did you start playing hopscotch?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 35
Answer: 04:13

Explanation:
given played hopscotch for 27 minutes
play stoped at 4:40 P.M
so to know at what time playing hopscotch start we need to Subtract stoped time and played minutes
therefore 4:40-27minutes = 04:13 P.M
Hence at 04:13 P.M playing hopscotch started.

Question 12.
You practice the guitar from 12:06 P.M. to 12:35 P.M. on Saturday and from 9:25 A.M. to 9:47 A.M. on Sunday. How long did you spend practicing the guitar in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 36

Answer: 29+22= 51 Minutes.

Explanation:
Given,
practice the guitar from 12:06 P.M to 12:35 P.M.
so  minutes practiced is subtract from 12:35 – 12:06 = 29 minutes
practiced on Saturday from 9:25 A.M. to 9:47 A.M
So minutes practiced on Saturday. subtract from 9:47-9:25 =22 minutes
therefore to find how long spend on practicing the guitar overall is to add the first and second session  29 minutes + 22 minutes = 51 minutes

Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour Homework & Practice 12.2

Find the elapsed time.

Question 1.
Start: 6:05 A.M. End: 6:44 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 37
Answer: 39 minutes

Question 2.
Start: 3:30 P.M. End: 3:51 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 38
Answer: 21 minutes

Find the elapsed time.

Question 3.
Start: 4:10 P.M. End: 4:56 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 39
Answer: 46 minutes

Question 4.
Start: 9:25 A.M. End: 9:33 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 40
Answer: 8 minutes

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 41
Answer: No. the correct answer is 28 minutes

Question 6.
Writing
Explain how to use a number line to find the elapsed time from 10:15 A.M. to 10:49 A.M.
Answer: 34 minutes

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
Your teacher places a beaker of water over a burner at 2:15 P.M. The water boils at 2:26P.M. How long does it take for the water to boil?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 42
Answer: 11 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
The teacher places a beaker of water over a burner at 2:15 P.M
water boils at 2:26 P.M
so to find how long water to boil is to subtract from 2:26 P.m and 2:15 P.m
So we get 2:26-2:15 = 11 minutes
it takes 11 minutes for the water to boil.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Descartes plays outside from 1:32 P.M. to 1:45 P.M. He stops to eat lunch. Then he plays outside from 2:20 P.M. to 2:47 P.M. How long did he play outside in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 43
Answer: 13+27=40 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
Descartes plays outside from 1:32 P.M. to 1:45 P.M
so subtract from 1:45 P.M. and 1:32 we get 13 minutes.
after lunch, he plays outside from 2:20 P.M. to 2:47 P.M
so subtract from 2:20 P.M. to 2:47 P.M we get 27 minutes
To find how long did he play outside in all is  add both sessions 13 minutes+ 27 minutes = 40 minutes

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
There are 134 third graders and 106 fourth graders at a state park. There are 220 fewer teachers than students at the park. How many teachers are at the park?
Answer:

Lesson 12.3 Measure Elapsed Time Across the Hour

Explore and Grow

Write each time. How much time has passed?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 44
___ minutes have passed.
Answer: 20 minutes

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-44
as shown in the analog clock start time is 02:45 P.M and the end time is 03:05 P.M
s0 subtract from the end time and start time
we get 03:05-02:45=20 minutes
hence  20 minutes have passed.

Critique Reasoning
Newton says one hour has passed because the digit for the hour increased by 1. Why is Newton incorrect?

Think and Grow: Measure Elapsed Time Across an Hour

Example
Find the elapsed time between 7:45 A.M. and 8:12 A.M.
One Way: Use an analog clock.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 45
Step 1: Draw the starting time.
Step 2: Mark the ending time.
Step 3: Count the minutes by 5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
So, the elapsed time is __ minutes.
Answer: 21 minutes

Another Way: Use a number line.
Step 1: Plot the starting time on a number line.
Step 2: Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Step 3: Add the jumps to find the elapsed time.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 46
So, the elapsed time is ___ minutes.
Answer: 27 minutes

Show and Grow

Find the elapsed time.

Question 1.
Start: 3:55 P.M. End: 4:41 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 47
Answer: 46 minutes

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-47
Explanation:
Draw the starting time.
Mark the ending time.
Count the minutes by 5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
the elapsed time is 46minutes.

Question 2.
Start: 10:40 A.M. End: 11:19 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 48
Answer: 39 minutes

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-48

Explanation:
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 39 minutes is the elapsed time.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the elapsed time.

Question 3.
Start: 1:35 P.M. End: 2:11 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 49
Answer: 36 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-49
Explanation:
Draw the starting time.
Mark the ending time.
Count the minutes by 5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
the elapsed time is 36minutes.

Question 4.
Start: 8:50 A.M. End: 9:34 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 50
Answer: 44 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-50
Explanation:
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 44 minutes is the elapsed time.

Question 5.
Start: 5:25 P.M. End: 6:07 P.M.
Answer: 42 minutes

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-50 (1)
Explanation:
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 42 minutes is the elapsed time.

Question 6.
Start: 11:30 A.M. End: 12:26 P.M.
Answer: 56 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-50
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 56 minutes is the elapsed time

Question 7.
Reasoning
Find the end time.
start: 4:42 P.M.
Elapsed time : 38 minutes
End: ___P.M.
Answer: 5:20 P.M.

Explanation:
Given start time 4:42 P.M.
Elapsed time: 38 minutes
To find End  add 4:42 P.M + 38 minutes.
so the end time is 5:20 P.M

Question 8.
Writing
Explain two different ways to find the elapsed time from 6:55 A.M. to 7:29 A.M.
Answer:  34 minutes

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A volleyball game begins at 5:45 P.M. It ends at 6 : 17 P.M. How long is the game?
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 51
The game is ___ minutes long.
Answer: 32 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
The volleyball game begins at 5:45 P.M
the game ends at 6:17 P.M
to find how long the is to subtract from end time to start time we get 6:17-5:45 = 32 minutes
Hence the game is 32 minutes.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
You start playing a virtual reality game at 1:50 P.M. You stop playing at 2:09 P.M. How long do you play the game?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 320
Answer: 19 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
The game starts Playing at 1:50 P.M.
Stopped playing at 2:09 P.M
To find how long the game played is to subtract from end time to start time 2:09-1:50=19 minutes
19 minutes game was played.

Question 10.
You listen to an audiobook that is 47 minutes long. The book ends at 10:25 A.M. At what time did you start the book?
Answer: 09:38 A.M.

Explanation:
Given,
audiobook listen for 47 minutes long
the book ends at 10:25 A.M.
to find at what time the book start we need to subtract 47 minutes from end-time 10:25 A.M., we get 09:38 A.M.
at 09:38 A.M started the book.

Question 11.
Newton roller-skates from 11:35A.M. to 12:12P.M. Descartes roller-skates from 3:40 P.M. to 4:26 P.M. Who skates longer?
Answer: Descartes skates longer 46 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
Newton roller-skates from 11:35 A.M. to 12:12 P.M.
so subtract from end time to start time we get 12:12 P.M – 11:35 A.M = 37 Minutes
Descartes roller-skates from 3:40 P.M. to 4:26 P.M.
so subtract from end time to start time we get 4:26 P.M. – 3:40 P.M = 46 Minutes
so Descartes skates longer 46 minutes.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You practice juggling from 10:40 A.M. to 11:04 A.M. Your friend practices juggling for the same amount of time as you. She stops at 11:21 A.M. At what time did your friend start juggling?
Answer: 10:57  A.M

Explanation:
Given in the question that Friend practices juggling for the same amount of time as you.
So that you started practice at 10:40 A.M to 11:04 A.M
So the amount of time you practiced subtract from end time to start time we get 11:04-10:40= 24 minutes
so your friend  stops at 11:21 A.M
Hence to find your friend and started at  is subtract 24 minutes of your practice time in to end time of your friend that is 11:21 A.M
we get 11:21 A.M. – 24 minutes = 10:57 A.M
so the answer is 10:57 A.M.

Measure Elapsed Time Across the Hour Homework & Practice 12.3

Find the elapsed time.

Question 1.
Start: 3:50 P.M. End: 4:06 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 52
Answer: 16 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-52
Explanation:
Draw the starting time.
Mark the ending time.
Count the minutes by 5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
the elapsed time is 16minutes.

Question 2.
Start: 9:35 A.M. End: 10:23 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 53
Answer: 48 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-53
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 48 minutes is the elapsed time

Find the elapsed time

Question 3.
Start: 2:20 P.M. End: 3:03 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 54
Answer: 43 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-53 (1)
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 43 minutes is the elapsed time

Question 4.
Start: 11:15 P.M. End: 12:12 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 55
Answer: 57 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-53 (2)
Explanation:
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 57 minutes is the elapsed time

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Descartes correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 56
Answer: Wrong the correct answer is 42 minutes

Question 6.
Writing
Write a word problem that requires finding an elapsed time.
Answer:
Start: 11:15 P.M. End: 12:12 A.M.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-53 (2)
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 57 minutes is the elapsed time

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
You start looking for animals tracks at 10:25 A.M. You find some at 11:06 A.M. How long does it take you to find the tracks?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 316
Answer: 41 minutes

Explanation:
Given
We start looking for animals tracks at 10:25 A.M
we find some at 11:06 A.M
so subtract 11:06 – 10:25 = 41 minutes

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You create pictographs from 4:40 P.M. to 5:02 P.M. Your friend creates pictographs for the same amount of time as you. He stops at 6:16 P.M. What time did your friend start creating pictographs?
Answer: 5:56 P.M

Explanation:
Given in the question that your friend creates pictographs for the same amount of time as you
so you created pictographs from 04:40 P.M to 05:02 P.M.
to find the amount of time you created pictographs we need to subtract the start and end time we get
05:02 P.M. – 04:40 P.M =  22 minutes.
Your friend stops creating pictographs at 06:16 P.M.
Now to find your friend start time of creating pictographs
we need to Subtract your 22 minutes of creating a time of pictographs as given that you and your friend create pictographs for the same time
so we get  06:16 P.M. – 22 minutes = 05:56 P.M.
Hence your friend starts creating pictographs at 05:56 P.M.

Review & Refresh
Question 9.
Plot \(\frac{11}{6}\) on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 317
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-317

Lesson 12.4 Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems

Explore and Grow

You wait in line for 16 minutes to ride a roller coaster. Then you wait in line for 15 minutes to ride a Ferris wheel. How much time do you spend waiting in the lines altogether?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 57
Make Sense of Problems
Write an equation for the problem. What operation did you use? Why?

Think and Grow: Solve Time Interval Problems

A time interval is an amount of time.

Example
Some friends have 60 minutes to solve a mystery. They have been working for 44 minutes. How much time do they have left to solve the mystery?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 58

Understand the Problem

What do you know?

  • Some friends have ___ minutes to solve a mystery.
  • They have been working for __ minutes.

What do you need to find?

  • You need to find how much ___ they have left to solve the mystery.

Make a Plan

  • Subtract ___ from ___ to find how much ___ they have left.

Solve

Use a number line to represent the problem and show the time intervals.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 59
So, the friends have __ minutes left to solve the mystery.
Answer: 16 minutes

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You spend 26 minutes playing games on a tablet and 17 minutes listening to music on a tablet. How much time do you spend using the tablet?
Answer: 43 minutes

Explanation:
Given You spend playing games on a tablet is 26 minutes.
and listening to music on a tablet is 17 Minutes.
Now to find how much time you spend using the tablet is
So we need to add both the spending times on tablet that is
26 minutes + 17 minutes = 43 minutes
Hence you have spent 43 minutes using the tablet

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
You have 30 minutes to play outside before dinner. You already played for 19 minutes. How much time do you have left to play?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 60
Answer: 11 minutes

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-57
Given you have 30 minutes to play outside
and you have played 19 minutes already
to find how much time you have left to play we need to Subtract from the total given time by time you have played till now
we get 30 minutes – 19 minutes = 11 minutes
Hence 11 minutes of time you have left to play.

Question 3.
Library class is 43 minutes long. During class, you spend 15 minutes searching for books and the rest of the time reading. How much time do you spend reading?
Answer: 28 minutes

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-57 (1)
Given Duration of the library class is 43 minutes
you spend searching for books in 15 minutes
to find how much time do you spend reading we need to subtract from the total duration of library class and search for books time
we get 43 minutes – 15 minutes= 28 minutes.
Hence you have spent 28 minutes reading.

Question 4.
You spend 13 fewer minutes planning a constellation picture than creating it. You spend 12 minutes planning the picture. How much time do you spend creating it?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 61
Answer:

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
You spend 3 hours at an adventure park. Which equations show how many minutes you spend at the park?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 62
Answer:  180 minutes

Explanation:
Given you spent 3 hours in the adventure park
as we know that 1 hour is equal to 60 minutes.
so we can use two equations one is 3 hours multiplied by 60 minutes that is 3 × 60 = 180 minutes
or we spent 3 hours = 1 hour + 1 hour + 1 hour =  60 min +60 min +60 min = 180 minutes
Hence you spent 180 minutes in the park

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You write and illustrate a short story. You spend 36 minutes writing the story, 15 minutes drawing the pictures, and 13 minutes coloring the pictures. How many more minutes do you spend writing than illustrating?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 63
Understand the problem:
Make a plan:
Solve:
You spend __ more minutes writing the story.
Answer: 8 minutes

Explanation:
Given you spend writing the story is 36 minutes
and took  15 minutes for drawing and 13 minutes for coloring the picture’s
so add both illustrating minutes total of 15 minutes + 13 minutes = 28 minutes
Now to find how many more minutes spent writing than illustrating by subtracting writing 36 minutes and illustrating  28 minutes.
we get  36- minutes – 28 minutes = 8 minutes
Hence you spend 8 more minutes writing the story

Show and Grow

Question 6.
A play with three acts is 57 minutes long. The first act is 24 minutes long, and the second act is 19 minutes long. How long is the third act?
Answer: 14 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
play with three acts is 57 minutes long.
the first act is 24 minutes long,
and the second act is 19 minutes long
To find how long is the third act we have to add the first act and second act duration minutes
we get 24 minutes + 19 minutes = 43 minutes.
Now subtract the 43 minutes with Play with three-act 57 minutes.
we get 57 minutes – 43 minutes = 14 minutes.
Hence the third act is 14 minutes long.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
How many more minutes do you spend playing sports after school than doing homework? How much time do you spend on all of your after-school activities?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 64
You start your math homework at 3:35 P.M. You start your science homework immediately after you finish your math homework. At what time do you finish your science homework? Explain.
Answer: 04:16 P.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-64
You start math homework at 3:35 P.M.
as per the given table duration of math homework is 23 minutes
Math Homework finishes at   3:35 P.M + 23 minutes = 3:58 P.M
Science home works start after completing math homework is 3:58 P.M
To find science homework finishes as given in table duration is 18 minutes so add to start time
we get 3:58 + 18 minutes = 4:16 P.M.
At 4:16 P.M. finished science homework

Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems Homework & Practice 12.4

Question 1.
You spend 28 fewer minutes stretching than practicing. You practice for 40 minutes. How much time do you spend stretching?
Answer:

Question 2.
You spend 11 more minutes playing a board game than you do creating it. You spend 49 minutes playing the board game. How much time do you spend creating the board game?
Answer:

Question 3.
Open-Ended
A dog groomer has 60 minutes togive3 dogs a bath. Each bath takes at least 15 minutes, and the first bath takes the longest. What is one way the 60 minutes can be divided among the three baths?
Bath 1: ___ minutes
Bath 2: ___ minutes
Bath 3: ___ minutes
Answer:
Bath 1: _30__ minutes
Bath 2: _15__ minutes
Bath 3: _15__ minutes

Question 4.
Which two events can be done back-to-back in less than a half hour? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 65
Answer: Caricature and Horse Ride

Explanation:
Given in the picture That
Tractor pull takes 19 minutes
Horse Ride: 14 minutes
Caricature : 12 minutes
So to conduct two back to back events within half-hour
Consider two lowest minutes so we can notice Caricature 12 minutes and Horse ride 14 minutes so 12 minutes + 14 minutes = 26 minutes
So 26 minutes back to back event will be completed with in half hour

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You have 55 minutes to find 3 items. You find the first item in 26 minutes, and you find the second item in 9 minutes. How many minutes do you have left to find the third item?
Answer: 20 Minutes

Explanation:
Given,
You have 55 minutes to find 3 items
Found the first item in 26 minutes
The second item in 9 minutes
To find how many minutes we have left for the third item
Subtract first and second item duration with the total time given for 3 items we get
55 minutes – 26 minutes – 9 minutes = 20 minutes
Hence it takes 20 minutes for the third item.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
How many more minutes do you spend dancing than playing musical instruments? How much time do you spend on all of your activities?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 66
Answer: You spend 18 minutes you spend dancing than playing musical instruments and you spend 100 minutes on all of your activities.

Explanation:
Given in table that
Time spend for step dance and hip-hop dance is  25 min and 34 minutes
Total time for the dance we get 25 minutes + 34 minutes = 58 minutes
Time spend on play drums and play the piano is 22 minutes and 19 minutes
Total time for instruments we get 22 minutes + 19 minutes = 41 minutes
so to find how many more minutes you spend dancing than playing instruments is
difference between total time for dancing and total time for playing instrument weget
58 minutes – 41 minutes = 18 minutes
And to find the total time spend on all of your activities is to add all the durations in the table we get
25 minutes + 34 minutes + 22 minutes + 19 minutes = 100 minutes.
Hence You spend 18 minutes you spend dancing than playing musical instruments and you spend 100 minutes on all of your activities.

 

You start playing the drums at 5:25 P.M. You start playing the piano immediately after you finish playing the drums. At what time do you finish playing musical instruments? Explain.
Answer: 06:06 P.M

Explanation:
Given
You start playing the drum at 5:25 P.M
As per the given table duration for playing drums is 22 minutes
Add duration to 5:25 P.M we get 5:47 P.M
Also given you started playing piano immediately after finishing playing drums that is at 5:47 P.M
As per the given table duration for playing the piano is 19 minutes
add duration to 5:47 P.m we get 06:06 P.M
Hence at 6:06 P.M, we finish playing musical instruments

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 67
Answer:7/7

Explanation:
Given 5/5 by dividing we get 1
in the same way 7/7 we get 1
so the value is 7/7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 68
Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given 1/2 by dividing we get 0.5
in the same way 2/4 we get 0.5
so the value is 2/4

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 69
Answer: 4/8

Explanation:
Given 2/4 by dividing we get 0.5
in the same way 4/8 we get 0.5
so the value is 4/8

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 70
Answer: 1/3

Explanation:
Given 2/6 by dividing we get 1/3
in the same way, 1/3
so the value is 1/3

Lesson 12.5 Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume

Explore and Grow

About how many bottles of water would fill the pot?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 74

Reasoning
The bottle holds 1 litre of water. How can you estimate the number of litres of water the pot can hold?
Answer: 5 litres

Explanation:
Given bottle holds 1 litre of water
we need to estimate the number of litres of water the pot can hold
by observing the pot we can estimate that the pot can hold up to 5 litres
Hence the answer is 5 litres bottles

Think and Grow: Understand Liquid Volume

Liquid volume is the amount of liquid in a container.
A litre (L) is the standard metric unit used to measure liquid volume.
A millilitre (mL) is another metric unit used to measure liquid volume.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 75

Example
Which units should you use to measure the liquid volume, litres millilitres or ? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 76
A fishbowl contains ___ liquid than a water bottle.
Answer: More liquid than a water bottle

Explanation:
One bottle contains one litre of liquid
by observing the picture we know that the water in the fishbowl is more than a litre bottle
Hence A fishbowl contains more liquid than a water bottle.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 77
A small glass contains ___ liquid than a 1-litre water bottle.
Answer: Less

Explanation:
AS we know that 1-litre water bottle contains more water than a glass of water
Hence A small glass contains less liquid than a 1-litre water bottle.

Show and Grow

Which units should you use to measure the liquid volume, or millilitres? Explain.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 78
Answer: Liquid volume millilitres

Explanation:
As we know that Tea cup dint hold litre volume
Hence A Hence tea cup to measure the liquid millilitres.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 79
Answer: Liquid volume litres

Explanation:
bucket of liquid contains litres of liquid.
by observing the picture we know that the liquid is in litres of liquid contain in litres

Apply and Grow: Practice

Which units should you use to measure the liquid volume, litres or millilitres ? Explain.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 80
Answer: Millilitres

Explanation:
One drop of liquid contains one millilitres of liquid
by observing the picture we know that the liquid
One millilitres of liquid contain one millilitres

4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 81
Answer: Liquid volume in litre

Explanation:
Tea pot of liquid contains one litres of liquid
by observing the picture we know that the liquid is in litres of liquid contain litres

Choose the better estimate.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 82
Answer: 250 L

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the bowl volume can hold 250 L so the better estimate is 250 L

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 83
Answer: 15 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the water bottle cannot hold 15 L so the better estimate is 15 mL

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 84
Answer: 30 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the water key chain cannot hold 3L so the better estimate is 30 mL

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 85
Answer: 4 L
Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the fountain hold 40L so the better estimate is 4L

Question 9.
Reasoning
Match
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 86
Answer: 60 mL and 200 mL are match and 4L and 2L are a match

Explanation: In the given picture we can observe that Liters L and mL are shown
Hence we can match liters L and mL separately
so 60 mL and 200 mL are match and 4L and 2L are a match

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Use Picture A to estimate the liquid volume shown in Picture B.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 87
Compare:
The liquid volume is about ___ liters.
Answer: 20 L

Explanation:
Given in picture A contains 5L
we can estimate liquid volume is picture B as the volume is full of can
hence The liquid volume is about 20 liters.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Use Picture C to estimate the liquid volume shown in Picture D
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 88
Answer: 250 mL

Explanation:
Given in Picture D volume is 125 mal which is half of the bottle
So we can estimate in Picture D is 250 mL as it is filled completely with volume

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Use Picture X to estimate the liquid volumes shown in Pictures Y and Z.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 89
Answer: picture Y 75 L and picture Z 150 liters

Explanation:
Given Picture X is 25L
so we can estimate the Picture Y 75 L as the container is filled fully which is 3 times than picture X
whereas Picture Z we can estimate 150 L as its double the size of the Picture Y

Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume Homework & Practice 12.5

Which units should you use to measure the liquid volume, liters or milliliters ? Explain.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 90
Answer: liquid volume Liters

Explanation:
By observing the picture the can be estimated in liquid volume Liters as it contains more than milliliters and measuring in liters is flexible

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 91
Answer: milliliters

Explanation:
By observing the picture the can be estimated in liquid volume milliliters as it contains less than liters and measuring in milliliters is flexible

Choose the better estimate.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 92
Answer: 300 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the balloon cannot hold 300L so the better estimate is 300 mL

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 93
Answer: 6L

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the Tube is more than 6 mL because the boy observing boy height  so the better estimate is 6 L

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 94
Answer: 270 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the Glass and spoon volume cannot hold 27 L so the better estimate is 270 mL

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 95
Answer: 1 L

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the bowl  volume cannot hold 10 L so the better estimate is 1 L

Question 7.
Descartes wants to estimate how much water Newton used to fill his dog pool. Would 1,000 milliliters or 100 liters be a better estimate? Explain.
Answer: 100 liters

Explanation:
Given 1000 milliliters is equal to 1 liter which is a smaller quantity for a dog pool
and also given 100 liters which is enough to fill the dog pool.
hence 100 liters is  better

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the liquid volume in the bowl is less than 10 milliliters. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 96
Answer: wrong

Explanation:
Given in the pictured bowl filled with 10 L
Hence the liquid in the bowl is more than 10 milliliters as liter is always greater than milliliters

Question 9.
Number Sense
Order the liquid volumes from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 97
Answer: 1 mL, 50mL, 2000 mL, 5L

Explanation:
as we know that milliliters mL is smaller than liters L
hence  the order is from least to greatest is
1 mL, 50mL, 2000 mL, 5L

Question 10.
Reasoning
An elephant can hold up to10 liters of water in its not trunk. Which of the following is the amount of water an elephant can hold? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 98
Answer: 1 L, 1000 mL, and 100 mL

Explanation:
Given that elephant can hold up to 10 liters
so 1 L, 1000 mL, and 100 mL are less than 10 liters where elephant can hold
But 100L is more than the capacity which an elephant can hold.
Hence 1 L, 1000 mL, and 100 mL amount of water an elephant can hold

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Use Picture A to estimate the liquid volume shown in Picture B.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 99
Answer: 500 mL

Explanation:
by observing Picture A the glass is filled with half which is 350 ml
hence the estimated volume of the Full glass of Picture B is 500 mL

Review & Refresh

Question 12.
Your friend saves $5 each week for 6 weeks. He spends all of the money on 3 toys that each cost the same amount. How much does each toy cost?
Answer: 10 $

Explanation:
A given friend saved $5 each week
he saved for 6 weeks so multiply $5 with 6 weeks we get $30
To find the cost of each toy divide the total six weeks amount by 3 toys as said he spend all of the money on 3 toys
so we get  $30 divided by  = $10
each toy cost $10

Lesson 12.6 Measure Liquid Volume

Explore and Grow

Estimate the capacities of four different containers. Then use a 1-liter beaker to fill each container with liquid. What is the actual liquid volume in each container?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 100
Precision
How can you use your results to get a better estimate for a fifth container?
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-100

Think and Grow: Measure Liquid Volume

Example
What is the liquid volume in each container?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 101

The liquid volume in the soup can is ___ milliliters.
Answer: 5 mL
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 102
The liquid volume in the coffeepot is ___ liters ___ milliliters.
Answer:   2 ml

Show and Grow

What is the liquid volume in the container?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 103
Answer: 1 mL

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 104
Answer: 2 mL

Write the total liquid volume shown

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 105
Answer: 1 liter and 600mL

Explanation:
By observing the containers we know that each container is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the second container is above the 500 mL mark which is near the 600 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 1 liter and 600mL

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 106
Answer: 2 Liters and 200 mL
Explanation:
By observing the containers we know that both containers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the Third container is near  the 200 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 200 mL

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 107
Answer: 4 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we know that 4 drops are in the trolley
Hence the estimated volume is 4 mL

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 108
Answer: 3 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we know that 3 drops are in the bottle
Hence the estimated volume is 3 mL

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 109
Answer: 2 liters and 500 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 1st and 3rd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the second beakers is near  the 500 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 500 mL

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 110
Answer: 3 liters

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that all 3 beakersare 1 L with measuring volumes on it
hence the estimated volume is 3 liters

Question 9.
Which One Doesn’t Belong? Which group of beakers does not have the same liquid volume as the other two?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 111
Answer: 2nd-row beakers containers are Doesn’t Belong

Explanation:
By observing the pictures we can know that row one and three beakers contain 1 liter 800 mL
whereas Second-row beakers contains 1 liter 900 mL
Hence 2nd-row beakers containers are Doesn’t Belong

Question 10.
Precision
How much water did the basketball team drink during practice? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 112
Answer: 10 L

Explanation:
Given in picture before practice jar contains 17L
after observing measurements on the jar after practice the water level is at 7 L
So subtract from before practice volume by after practice volume we get 17 L-7L= 10L

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You drink two of the cartons of milk shown. How many milliliters of milk do you drink?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 113
Equation:
You drink ___ milliliters of milk.
Answer: 472 milliliters of milk

Explanation:
Given You drink two of the cartons of milk shown
each carton contains 236 mL
so 2 carton multiply by 236 mL we get 472 mL
hence 472 milliliters of milk do you drink

Show and Grow

Question 11.
You pour 250 milliliters of the juice shown into a cup. How many milliliters of juice are left in the jug?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 114
Answer: 696 mL

Explanation:
Given jar volume on the picture is 946 mL
You pour 250 milliliters of the juice shown into a cup
so the juice left in a jar will be 946 mL – 250 mL = 696 mL
Hence 696 milliliters of juice are left in the jug

Question 12.
A school custodian repaints 5 classrooms. He needs 9 liters of paint for each classroom. How many liters of paint does he need in all?
Answer: 45 liters

Explanation:
Given 9 liters of paint for each classroom
custodian repaints 5 classrooms
so to find How many liters of paint does he need in all is multiply 5 class rooms with 9 liters each
we get 5 × 9 liters = 45 liters
Hence 45 liters of paint does he need in all

Question 13.
A baby pool holds 72 liters of water. You use an 8-liter bucket to fill the pool with water. How many times do you fill the bucket?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 115
Answer: 9 times

Explanation:
Given baby pool holds 72 liters of water
8-liter bucket to fill the pool with water
So to find How many times do you fill the bucket
is divide 72 by 8 liters we get number times to fill
we get 72/8 = 9 Times
hence 9 Times you fill the bucket

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
A frozen treat tray has 6 molds. Each mold holds 90 milliliters of liquid. You mix 375 milliliters of orange juice with 175 milliliters of pineapple juice. Do you have enough juice to fill the tray? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 116
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Given frozen treat tray has 6 molds and Each mold holds 90 milliliters of liquid.
you mix 375 milliliters of orange juice with 175 milliliters of pineapple juice
so Add 375 milliliters of orange juice and 175 milliliters of pineapple juice we get 550 milliliters
Now divde 550 milliliters with 90 milliliters we get 6.1 Molds
so yes you have enough juice to fill the tray

Measure Liquid Volume Homework & Practice 12.6

Write the total liquid volume shown.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 117
Answer: 200 mL and 2 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture in the beaker the volume is 200 mL and from coconut is 2 mL

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 118
Answer: 1 liter and 502 mL

Explanation
By observing the picture in 2 beakers the volume is 1 liter and 500 mL and from the jar is 2 mL
Hence 1 liter and 502 mL

Explanation

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 119
Answer: 2 liters 600 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 1st and 3rd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the second beakers is near the 600 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 600 mL

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 120
Answer: 1 liter 900 mL

Explanation:
By observing the containers we know that each container is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the second container is below the 1 L mark which is near the 900 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 1 liter and 900mL

Question 5.
Precision
You mix the two juices shown. How much juice do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 121
Answer: 900 mL

Explanation:
Given Blue, Rasberry juice is 300 mL
Lemonade is 600 mL
Add both the volumes we get 600 mL + 300 mL = 900 mL
900 mL juice do you have in all

Question 6.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the liquid volume of the beaker is 100 liters. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 318
Answer: incorrect

Explanation:
by observing the picture the volume in the beaker is 100 mL which is less than 100 liters
Hence your friend is incorrect

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
You and your friend each drink one of the juice bottles shown. How many milliliters of juice do you and your friend drink in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 122
Answer: 592 mL

Explanation:
Given You and your friend each drink one of the juice bottles shown
Each bottle contains 296 mL
so multiply 296 mL with 2 we get 592 mL
hence 592 mL of juice do you and your friend drink in all

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You use 120 milliliters of water from the spray bottle shown. How many milliliters of water are left in the bottle?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 123
Answer: 95 mL

Explanation:
Given You use 120 milliliters of water from the spray bottle shown
in picture its given spary bottle contains 215 mL
So subtract 215 mL with 120 mL we get 215 mL-120mL = 95 mL
Hence 95 milliliters of water are left in the bottle

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
You use 20 liters of water to water a garden. You use a 5-liter watering can to water the garden. How many times do you fill they can? Explain.
Answer: 4 times

Explanation:
Given You use 20 liters of water to water a garden.
You use a 5-liter watering can to water the garden
to find how many times  we need to divide 20 liters by 5 liters we get 4 times
Hence 4 times do you fill the can

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
A muffin tray has 6 molds. Each mold holds 60 milliliters of batter. You make 184 milliliters of blueberry batter and 145 milliliters of banana batter. Do you have enough batter to fill the tray? Explain.
Answer: No

Explanation:
Given A muffin tray has 6 molds. Each mold holds 60 milliliters of batter
You make 184 milliliters of blueberry batter and 145 milliliters of banana batter.
add both 184 milliliters of blueberry batter and 145 milliliters of banana batter we get 329 milliliters
Now divide 329 milliliters with 60 milliliters we get 5.48 molds
So No, you dont have enough batter to fill the tray

Review & Refresh

Circle the value of the underlined digit.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 124
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-124

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 125
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-125

Lesson 12.7 Understand and Estimate Mass

Explore and Grow
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 126

Which object has more mass ?

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 127
Answer: scissor , and blue cubes

Reasoning
Examine a $ 1 and a $ 10 bill. What do you notice about the masses and the values?

Think and Grow: Understand Mass

Mass is the amount of matter in an object.
A gram (g) is the standard metric unit used to measure mass.
A kilogram (kg) is another metric unit used to measure mass.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 128
Example
Which units should you use to measure the mass, grams or kilograms? Explain
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 129
An apple has _less__ matter than a basketball bat.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 130
A watermelon has _less__ matter than a baseball bat.
Answer: less

Show and Grow

Which units should you use to measure the mass, or kilograms? Explain.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 131
Answer: Mass is in kilogram

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is a chair which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. and chair is easy to estimate in kilograms
hence chair use to measure the Mass is in kilogram units

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 132
Answer: grams

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is a crayon which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. easy to estimate in grams
hence crayon is small and  use to measure in  grams units

Apply and Grow: Practice

Which units should you use to measure the mass, or kilograms? Explain.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 133
Answer: Mass in kilograms

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is a boat which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. the boat heavy and  is easy to estimate in kilograms
hence boat to measure in kilograms units

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 134
Answer: Grams

Explanation:
A gram (g) is the standard metric unit used to measure the mass
easy to estimate in grams as it is small

Choose the better estimate.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 135
Answer: 300 g

Explanation:
As shown in the picture the book is small and it won’t be 300Kgs heavy as books are easy to carry
Hence estimation is 300 g

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 136
Answer: 27 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture Dog will not be 27 g less weight
so the estimated weight is 27 kg

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 137
Answer: 1 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture book will not be 8 g less weight
so the estimated weight is 1 kg

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 138
Answer: 15 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture Goggles  will not be heavier weight like 150g
so the estimated weight is 15 g

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says 50 grams is a greater unit of measurement than 50 kilograms because 50 liters is greater than 50 milliliters. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer: wrong/incorrect

Explanation:
as we know 1 Kilogram = 1000 grams
and 1 liter = 1000 milliliters
so your friend says 50 grams is greater than 50 kgs statement is incorrect
and  50 liters is greater than 50 milliliters is correct.
So the correct statement is 50 grams is lesser than 50 kgs

Question 10.
Reasoning
A bowling ball and a beach ball are the same size. Do the objects have about the same mass? Explain.
Answer: No

Explanation:
as we know that a Bowling ball weight is heavier than the beach ball as it filled with air inside
Hence objects don’t have the same mass

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Use the mass of the small bag of potatoes to estimate the mass of the large bag of potatoes.
Compare:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 139

Show and Grow

Question 11.
Use the mass of the banana to estimate the mass of the bunch of bananas.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 140
Answer: 480 g

Explanation:
Given one banana weights 120 g
So the second image shows 4 bananas so multiply 120 by 4 we get 480 g

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Use the mass of the small egg carton to estimate the mass of the larger egg cartons.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 141
Answer:  580 g and 870 g

Explanation:

Given in the first image that 6 eggs  weights 290 grams so 1 egg weights 48.3 g
so to find 12 eggs weight in second image  multiply with 48.3 by 12 eggs we get 580 g
so to find 18 eggs weight in third image  multiply with 48.3 by 18 eggs we get 870 g

Understand and Estimate Mass Homework & Practice 12.7

Which units should you use to measure the mass, grams or kilograms ? Explain.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 142
Answer: Grams

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is groundnut which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. easy to estimate in grams
hence groundnut is small and uses to measure in  grams units

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 143
Answer: Kilograms

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is a cot/ bed which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. easy to estimate in kilograms
hence cot/ bed is large and uses to measure in  kilograms units

Choose the better estimate

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 144
Answer: 30 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture cover pack will not be heavier weight like 30 kg
so the estimated weight is 30 g

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 145
Answer: 9 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture cycle will not be 9 g weight
so the estimated weight is 9 kg

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 146
Answer: 100 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture Scarf will not be heavier weight like 10 kg
so the estimated weight is 100 g

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 147
Answer: 2 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture oranges will not be heavier weight like 20 kg
so the estimated weight is 2 kg

Question 7.
Logic
Which objects have a mass greater than 1 kilogram?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 148
Answer: Computer, Desk, Microwave

Explanation:
Given objects
the pencil cherry and scissors will not have more than 1-kilogram mass
A computer is heavy so it will have more than 1-kilogram mass
The desk and microwave are also heavy so it will have more than 1-kilogram mass
So we get Computer, Desk, Microwave have a mass greater than 1 kilogram

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the mass of the kangaroo is greater than 25 grams. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 149
Answer: Yes, Correct

Explanation:
Given in the picture that kangaroo mass is 25 kg
Hence the kangaroo is greater than 25 grams
so the kangaroo is greater than 25 grams.
Yes, your friend correct

Question 9.
Number Sense
Order the masses from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 150
Answer: 6g, 1 kg, 3000g, 20 kg

Explanation:
As we know that Kilograms are greater than grams
as 1 kilogram is equal to 1000 Grams
so the Order of the masses from least to greatest is
6g, 1 kg, 3000g, 20 kg

Question 10.
Writing
Explain how grams and kilograms are related.
Answer:
In the metric system, “milli” means 1/1,000 and “kilo” means 1000.
This means that a milligram is 1/1000 of a gram, and a kilogram is 1000 grams.
So a kilogram is much heavier than a milligram
in fact, a kilogram is a million times as heavy as a milligram

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Use the mass of the lightbulb to estimate the mass of the box of lightbulbs.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 151
Answer: 148 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture that one bulb mass is 37 g
So to find 4 bulb mass multiply 37 g with 4
we get 148g
estimate the mass of the box of lightbulbs is 148 g

Review & Refresh

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 152
Answer: 3/4 is greater than 3/6

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 153
Answer: 3/4 is greater than 1/2

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 154
Answer: 6/8 is greater than 5/8

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 155
Answer: 3/3 is greater than 1/3

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 156
Answer: 2/4 equals to 4/8

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 157
Answer: 7/8 is greater than 5/6

Lesson 12.8 Measure Mass

Explore and Grow

Estimate the masses of four different objects. Then use a balance and weights to measure the actual mass of each object to the nearest gram or kilogram.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 158
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 159
Precision
How can you use your results to get a better estimate for a fifth object?
Answer:

Think and Grow:
Example
What is the mass of each object?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 160
The mass of the tub of clay is ___ grams.
Answer: 151 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture the weights are 100 g, 10g,10g,10g,10g,10g, and 1g
so add the weights we get 151 g

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 161
The mass of the candle is ___ kilogram ___ grams.
Answer: 1 kg 205 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture the weights are 1 Kg ,100 g,100g,5g
so add the weights we get 1 kg 205 grams
The mass of the candle is 1 kilogram 205 grams

Show and Grow

Write the total mass shown.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 162
Answer: 4 kg

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 4 1 kg weights
So the total mass is by adding 4 1 kg weights we get 4 kgs
the total mass is 4 kg

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 163
Answer: 327 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 100g, 100g, 100g, 10g, 10g, 5g, 1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 327 g
the total mass is 327 g

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 164
Answer: 842 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 500g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 10g, 10g,10g,10g, 1g, 1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 842 g
the total mass is 842 g

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 165
Answer: 2 kgs 595 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 500g, 10g, 10g, 10g, 10g, 10g,10g,10g, 10g, 10g,5g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 2 kgs 595 grams
the total mass is 2 kgs 595 grams

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the total mass shown.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 166
Answer: 3 kg 702 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 1 kg, 500g, 100g, 100g, 1g, 1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 3 kg 702 grams
the total mass is 3 kg 702 grams

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 167
Answer: 2 kg 458 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 100g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 10g, 10g,10g,10g, 10g, 5g,1g, 1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 2 kg 458 grams
the total mass is 2 kg 458 grams

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 168
Answer:  5 kg 213 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 1kg, 1kg, 1kg, 100g, 100g, 10g,1g,1g, 1g,  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 5 kg 213 grams
the total mass is 5 kg 213 grams

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 169
Answer: 2 kg 836 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 10g, 10g, 10g, 500g, 5g, 10g,100g,100g, 100g, 1g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 2 kg 836 grams
the total mass is 2 kg 836 grams

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the stuffed animal has a mass that is less than 25 grams. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 170
Answer: No, Incorrect

Explanation:
Given weights 25g
As we observe the image the animal has more mass than the weights 25 grams
So Your friend says the stuffed animal has a mass that is less than 25 grams. Is incorrect

Question 10.
Choose Tools
Choose the best tool to measure each time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 171
The liquid volume of a bowl: ___
The length of a spoon: ___
The mass of an orange: ___
The number of minutes you jog: ___
Answer:
The liquid volume of a bowl:  C
The length of a spoon: B
The mass of an orange: A
The number of minutes you jog: D

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Third graders should eat 454 grams of vegetables each day. You eat the vegetables shown on the balance. How many more grams of vegetables should you eat today?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 172
Equation:
You should eat __ more grams of vegetables.
Answer: 232 grams

Explanation:
Given Third graders should eat 454 grams of vegetables each day
You eat the vegetables shown on the balance we get 226 grams
so to find How many more grams of vegetables should you eat today is 454 grams – 226 grams
we get 232 grams

Show and Grow

Question 11.
A tablet’s mass is 324 grams more than the cell phone’s mass. What is the mass of the tablet?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 173
Answer: 553 grams

Explanation:
Given A tablet’s mass is 324 grams more than the cell phone’s mass
as shown in the balance cell phone’s mass is 229 g by adding weights
so to find the mass of the tablet add both values 324 grams and 229 grams
we get 553 grams
Hence the mass of the tablet is 553 grams

Question 12.
The mass of a nickel is 5 grams. There are 40 nickels in a standard roll. What is the mass of a standard roll of nickels?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 174
Answer: 200 grams

Explanation:
Given The mass of a nickel is 5 grams
There are 40 nickels in a standard roll.
to find the mass of a standard roll of nickels multiply 5 grams with 40 nickels
we get 200 grams
hence 200 grams is the mass of a standard roll of nickels

Question 13.
Newton eats 6 kilograms of dog food each week. He buys a 24-kilogram bag of dog food. For how many weeks will Newton eat from the bag of dog food?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 175
Answer:  4 weeks

Explanation:
Given Newton eats 6 kilograms of dog food each week.
buys a 24-kilogram bag of dog food
now to find how many weeks will Newton eat from the bag of dog food
we need to divide 24 kilograms with 6 kilograms we get 4 weeks
Hence in 4 weeks, Newton eat from the bag of dog food

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
You make fruit smoothies using 369 grams of strawberries, 227 grams of raspberries, and 283 grams of blueberries. Do you use more than 1 kilogram of fruit? Explain.
Answer: No

Explanation:
Given You make fruit smoothies using 369 grams of strawberries,
227 grams of raspberries,
and 283 grams of blueberries
So by adding all the mass we get 879 grams
Hence 879 grams is less than 1 kilogram of fruit.

Measure Mass Homework & Practice 12.8

Write the total mass shown.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 176
Answer: 5 kg

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 5 1 kg weights
So the total mass is by adding 5 1 kg weights we get 5 kgs
the total mass is 5 kg

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 177
Answer:  923 grams
Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 500g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 10g,10g,1g,1g,1g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 923 grams
the total mass is 923 grams

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 178
Answer: 4 kg 732 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 1kg, 1kg, 500g, 100g, 100g, 10g,10g,10g, 1g,1g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 4 kg 732 grams
the total mass is 4 kg 732 grams

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 179
Answer: 1 kg 449 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 5g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 1g, 1g,1g,1g, 10g,10g,10g,10g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 1 kg 449 grams
the total mass is 1 kg 449 grams

Question 5.
Open-Ended
Choose two objects that have different masses. Draw the objects on the balance with one object on each side.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 180
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-170

Question 6.
Precision
Use each measurement once to complete the list.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 181
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-181

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
216 grams of strawberries count as a daily serving of fruit for children. You eat the berries shown. How many more grams of berries should you eat today?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 182
Answer: 54 grams

Explanation:
Given 216 grams of strawberries count as a daily serving of fruit for children.
You eat the berries shown. 162 grams
so subtract from actual 216 grams – 162 grams we get 54 grams
54 more grams of berries should you eat today

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A Japanese one-yen coin weighs 1 gram. Newton and Descartes each have 70 one-yen coins. What is the mass of all of their one-yen coins?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 183
Answer: 140 grams

Explanation:
Given A Japanese one-yen coin weighs 1 gram.
Newton and Descartes each have 70 one-yen coins. total of 140 coins combined
so by multiplying with 1 gram as per given data we get 140 grams
the mass of all of their one-yen coins is 140 grams.

Review & Refresh

What fraction of the whole is shaded?

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 154
Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) is shaded

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-154

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 185
Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) is shaded

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-185

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Performance Task

Question 1.
You decide to keep track of the weather today
a. The rain begins 14 minutes before 1. The rain stops at 2:45. How many minutes does the rain last?
b. Write another way to say the time the rain stops.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 186
c. The rain starts again 48 minutes after it stopped the first time. Show the time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 187
Answer:
a. The rain begins 14 minutes before 1. The rain stops at 2:45. How many minutes does the rain last
Given The rain begins 14 minutes before 1 hence the time is 12:46
so to find how many minutes does the rain last is subtract from stop time 2:45 – 12:46 = 181 minutes

b. another way to say the time the rain stops is the rain started at 12:46 and ended at 2:45

c. The rain starts again 48 minutes after it stopped the first time. Show the time.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-187
stopes at 3:33

Question 2.
This morning, you set a beaker outside before it started to rain.
a. You check the beaker after the first time the rain stops. Write the amount.
b. You check the beaker after the last time the rain stops. The beaker has 200 more milliliters of water. What is the total amount of water in the beaker today?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 188
c. Did you collect more or less than half of a liter of water today? Explain.
Answer:
a. the beaker after the first time the rain stops.  the amount of water is 400 ml as shown in the picture
b. check the beaker after the last time the rain stops. The beaker has 200 more milliliters of water. What is the total amount of water in the beaker today is 400 ml + 200 ml = 600 ml
c. collect more than half of a liter of water today as 600 ml is greater than 500 ml

Question 3.
You color the model to show the number of days it rained last week. What fraction of the week did it not rain?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 189
Answer: 3/7

Explanation:
as per the given data in the image
in a week it rained 4 days
and 3 times it doesn’t rain
Hence the fraction is 3/7

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Activity

Roll to Cover: Elapsed Time

Directions:

  1. Take turns rolling a die. Find a problem on the board with the number you rolled.
  2. Find the elapsed time. Tell whether the time is greater than or less than a half hour.
  3. Cover the answer and the problem. The player with the most answers covered wins!

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 190
Answer:
1. Take turns rolling a die got 1
a problem on the board with the number you rolled is start time 7:04 A.M end  7:44 A.M
2. the elapsed time is 40 mins the time is greater than a half-hour.
3. Cover the answer and the problem. The player with the most answers covered wins.

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Chapter Practice

12.1 Time to the Nearest Minute

Write the time. Write two other ways to say the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 192
Answer:
1. 1:39
2. Count the minutes after the hour say 39 minutes after 1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 193
Answer:
1. 7:12
2. Count the minutes after the hour say 12 minutes after 7

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 194
Answer:
1. 10:24
2. Count the minutes after the hour say 24 minutes after 10

Write the time.

Question 4.
8 minutes after 9
Answer: 9:08

Question 5.
14 minutes before 5
Answer: 4:46

Question 6.
3 minutes before 1
Answer: 12:57

12.2 Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour

Question 7.
Find the elapsed time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 195

Answer: 0 minutes

Explanation:
By observing the given picture there is no time elapsed hence 0 minutes

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A model rocket takes 23 minutes to build. You start building the rocket at 11:36 A.M. At what time do you finish it?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 196
Answer: 11:59 A.M

Explanation:
Given A model rocket takes 23 minutes to build
You start building the rocket at 11:36 A.M.
Hence at 11:59 A.M you finished it

12.3 Measure Elapsed Time Across the Hour

Question 9.
Find the elapsed time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 197
Answer: 0 minutes

Explanation:
By observing the given picture there is no time elapsed hence 0 minutes

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
Newton naps from 2:50 P.M. to 3:17 P.M. Descartes naps from 3:55 P.M. to 4:23 P.M. Who naps longer?
Answer: Both naps equally

Explanation:
Newton naps from 2:50 P.M. to 3:17 P.M. = 27 minutes
Descartes naps from 3:55 P.M. to 4:23 P.M. = 27 minutes
Both naps equally

12.4 Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems

Question 11.
You spend 24 more minutes creating a sculpture than you do painting it. You spend 18 minutes painting the sculpture. How much time do you spend creating the sculpture?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 198
Answer: 42 minutes.

Explanation:
Given You spend 24 more minutes creating a sculpture show than you do painting it
spend 18 minutes painting the sculpture
time do you spend creating the sculpture 24 minutes + 18 minutes = 42 minutes
time do you spend creating the sculpture is 42 minutes.

Question 12.
You spend 43 minutes on a puppet show. You spend 28 minutes writing the story and the rest performing the show. How many minutes do you spend performing the show?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 199
Answer: 15 minutes

Explanation:
Given You spend 43 minutes on a puppet show as shown in piture
You spend 28 minutes writing the story
the rest performing the show so we get 43 minutes- 28 minutes = 15 minutes
spent performing the show is 15 minutes

12.5 Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume

Choose the better estimate.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 200
Answer: 3 L

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the paint can will be more than 3 mL so the better estimate is 3L

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 201
Answer: 55 mL

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the Sprinkler cannot hold 55L so the better estimate is 55 mL

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 202
Answer: 1 L

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the Tea can can hold 1 L so the better estimate is 1 L

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 203
Answer: 4 L

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the Plastic can  cannot hold 40 L so the better estimate is 4 L

12.6 Measure Liquid Volume

Write the total liquid volume shown

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 204
Answer: 200 mL

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the volume is 200 mL as its indicated 0n the beaker

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 205
Answer: 1 liter 100 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture in 2 beakers the volume is 1 liter and 100 mL
Hence 1 liter and 100 mL

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 206
Answer: 2 liter 400 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 1st and 2nd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the third beaker is near  the 400 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 400 mL

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 207
Answer: 1 liter 700 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture in 2 beakers the volume is 1 liter and 700 mL
Hence 1 liter and 700 mL

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 208
Answer: 2 liter 600 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 2nd and 3rd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the 1st beaker is near  the 600 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 600 mL

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 209
Answer:  2 liter 800 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 1st and 3rd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the 2nd beaker is near  the 800 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 800 mL

12.7 Understand and Estimate Mass

Choose the better estimate.

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 210
Answer: 50 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture the watch will not be heavier weight like 50 kg
so the estimated weight is 50 g

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 211
Answer: 6 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture Pumpkin will not be 6 g less weight
so the estimated weight is 6 kg

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 212
Answer: 285 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture the rat will not be heavier weight like 28 kg
so the estimated weight is 285 g

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 213
Answer: 3 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture the brick will not be heavier weight like 30 kg
so the estimated weight is 3kg

12.8 Measure Mass

Write the total mass shown.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 214
Answer: 3 kg

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 3 1 kg weights
So the total mass is by adding 3 1 kg weights we get 3 kgs
the total mass is 3 kg

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 215
Answer: 734 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 500g, 100g, 100g, 10g, 10g,10g,1g, 1g, 1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 734g
the total mass is 734g

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 216
Answer: 2 kg 622 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 500g, 100g, 10g, 10g,1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 2 kg 622 g
the total mass is 2 kg 622 g

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 217
Answer: 1 kg 819 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 1 kg, 500g, 100g, 100g, 100g,10g,5g, 1g,1g,1g,1g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get1 kg 819 grams
the total mass is1 kg 819 grams

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Which array matches the equation 3 × 4?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 218
Answer: c

Explanation:

By observing the picture the option C has 3 rows and 4 columns
hence the array matches the equation 3 × 4 is option C

Question 2.
Which fractions name the point plotted on the number line?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 219
Answer: 4/8

Explanation:
As shown in the figure, the point plotted on the number line
the mark is plotted at 4 and the total markings are 8
hence the fraction is 4/8

Question 3.
What time does the clock show?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 500
Answer: Option B 5:47

Explanation:
Count the minutes After the hour. Say,“47 minutes after 5.”
The time is 5:47

Question 4.
A package of batteries has 5 rows of 6 batteries. You use not 8 batteries. How many batteries are used?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 221
Answer: Option B 22

Explanation:
Given A package of batteries has 5 rows of 6 batteries. that is 30 batteries
You use not 8 batteries
To find batteries are used that is 30 – 8 we get 22 batteries

Question 5.
Which statement is true?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 222
Answer:  Option C
The option C statement is true

Question 6.
The mass of a horse is 582 kilograms. The mass of a pig is 355 kilograms less than the mass of the horse. What is the mass of the pig?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 223
Answer: 227 kilograms

Explanation:
Given The mass of a horse is 582 kilograms.
The mass of a pig is 355 kilograms less than the mass of the horse. that is 582 kg- 355 kg we get 227 kgs
Hence the mass of the pig is 227 kilograms

Question 7.
Which number makes the equation true?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 224
Answer:  Option A

Explanation:
As shown 6 /    = 1
so 6 / 6 = 1
hence the true equation is 6/6 and the empty value is 6

Question 8.
A parade starts at the time shown on the clock. It ends at 1:18 P.M. How long is the parade?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 225
Answer: 38 minutes

Explanation:

As shown in the clock parade start at 12:20 P.M
and it ends at 1:18 P.M.
hence the difference is 38 minutes
38 minutes long is the parade

Question 9.
Which fraction is not equivalent to the number 2?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 226
Answer: Option C

Explanation:
as option C 6/3 is not dividable on both side with 2 unlike other options

Question 10.
Which models show \(\frac{1}{6}\) shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 227
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-227

after observing the model figure the tick parked in the image shows \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 11.
Which set of fractions is in order from least to greatest?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 228
Answer: Options A and C

Explanation:
By dividing the given options and arranging them in the lowest we will get the answers which are in the least to greatest

Question 12.
A customer buys a game console that costs $229 and 3 video games that cost $60 each. How much money does the customer spend?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 229
Part A
Write an equation to represent the problem. Use a letter to represent the unknown number.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 230
Part B
Solve the problem. Explain how you solved it.
Part C
Check whether your answer is reasonable. Explain.
Answer: $ 409

Explanation:
Given A customer buys a game console that costs $229
3 video games that cost $60 each. that is 3×$60 = $180
To find How much money does the customer spend is $229 + $ 180 we get $ 409

Question 13.
Which equation does show the Distributive Property?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 231
Answer: Option A

Explanation:
As we know that For all real numbers a, b, and c, a(b+c)=ab+ac. What this means is that when a number multiplies an expression inside parentheses, you can distribute the multiplication to each term of the expression individually
so while observing options in the picture the option A  9×(10+10) = (9 × 10) + ( 9 × 10)  has the distributive property.

Question 14.
A photographer has 478 photos of people and 326 photos of nature. About how many photos does the photographer have in all?
A. 700
B. 200
C. 800
D. 900
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 232
Answer: Option C

Explanation:
A photographer has 478 photos of people
326 photos of nature
To find how many photos does the photographer have in all add both given
we get 478+326 = 804
Hence the nearest option is C which is 800

Question 15.
Which liquid volumes should be measured in liters?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 233
Answer: all can be measured in liters

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 234
Answer: all the fraction shows

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Steam Performance Task 1-12

Question 1.
Newton and Descartes are warming up for a baseball game.
a. Which units should be used to measure grams the mass of the baseball bat, grams or kilograms? Explain.
b. Which units should be used to measure the liquid volume of the team water jug, milliliters or liter? Explain.
c. Who practices baseball longer, Newton or Descartes? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 235
Answer:
a. in kilogram units should be used to measure grams the mass of the baseball bat, as the mass of the bat  is easy to calculate in kilograms compared to grams
b. Liter units should be used to measure the liquid volume of the team water jug, as the volume of the jug s easy to calculate in liters compared to milliliters
c. No data was given about who practices longer

Question 2.
Your doctor recommends that you exercise about an hour each day, get plenty of sleep, and drink about 1,500 milliliters of water daily.
a. What are some ways you like to exercise?
b. You drink 3 cups of water. Each cup holds 300 milliliters. Did you drink enough water to meet your doctor’s recommendation?
Answer:
a. by doing jogging, cycling and stretching are some ways you like to exercise
b. No, 3 cups of water each cup holds 300 milliliters that are 3 multiply with 300 mL we get 900 milliliters
Hence the target 1500 milliliters didn’t complete

Question 3.
Your heart rate is the number of times your heart beats in 1 minute. Your heart rate is lower when you are at rest and higher when you are active. One way doctors measure your health is by finding your resting heart rate.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 236
a. You count the number of times your heart beats in 6 seconds. How can you use this number to find the number of times your heart beats in 1 minute?
b.Your heart beats 8 times in 6 seconds while you are at rest. What is your resting heart rate?
c. After playing outside, your heart beats 13 times in 6 seconds. How much greater, in beats per minute, is your heart rate now than when you were at rest?
d. Your friend says that another way to find the number of beats per minute is to multiply the number of times your heart beats in 10 seconds by 6. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 237
Answer:
a.  by checking we get 8 times our heartbeats in 6 seconds.
so to find the number of times our heart beats in 1 minute
as we know that 1 minute is equal to 60 seconds
so for 6 seconds our heart beat 8 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 80 times
b.  our heart beats 8 times in 6 seconds while you are at rest.
so to find the number of times our heart beats in 1 minute
as we know that 1 minute is equal to 60 seconds
so for 6 seconds our heart beat 8 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 80 times our heart beats at rest
c. Given
After playing outside, your heart beats 13 times in 6 seconds.
as we know that at rest our heart beats 80 times in one minute
so for 6 seconds, our heart beat 13 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 130 times our heart beats
50 times greater, in beats per minute, is your heart rate now than when you were at rest
d. yes, a friend says that another way to find the number of beats per minute is to multiply the number of times your heart beats in 10 seconds by 6. Is correct
if our heart beats 8 times in 6 seconds while you are at rest.
so to find the number of times our heart beats in 1 minute
as we know that 1 minute is equal to 60 seconds
so for 6 seconds, our heart beat 8 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 80 times our heart beats at rest

Question 4.
You can use your pulse to find your heart rate.
a. How many times does your heart beat in 6 seconds? Use this number to find your resting heart rate.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 238
b. Count the number of times your heart beats in one minute. How does this number compare to your answer above? Explain.
Answer:
a. 8 times our heart beat in 6 seconds
so to find the number of times our heart beats in 1 minute
as we know that 1 minute is equal to 60 seconds
so for 6 seconds, our heart beat 8 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 80 times our heart beats
b. By Count the number of times our heart beats in one minute is 80 times.
when we compare the above answer and our heart rate is the same
as were checking at the resting rate in both situations.

Conclusion:

I hope that the information provided here regarding Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass is helpful for you to learn the subject. If you have any doubts or queries you can post them at the comment section. Bookmark our site to get the latest edition of solutions for all remaining Big Ideas Grade 3 Answers.

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations

If you are seeking homework help to complete the chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations Questions then stay connected with us. Here we have shared the best solution for your concerns ie., Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations Pdf Exercise-wise. This guide will aid students in enhancing their problem-solving and subject knowledge skills. You can easily understand the concepts of Ch 9 Solving Quadratic Equations with the help of the BIM Algebra 1 Textbook Solution Key and perform well in various tests. Utilize this Ch 9 Algebra 1 Big Ideas Math Book Answers for exam revision guide and score high in all examinations.

Lesson-wise Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Textbook Solutions

Big Ideas math book Algebra 1 ch 9 Answer key cover all required preparation materials such as Questions from Exercises 9.1 to 9.6, Chapter Tests, Practice Tests, Cumulative Assessment, Review Tests, etc. By solving all these resources of the BIM Answer Key, you can easily understand each and every concept of Algebra 1 chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations. Access and download the needed exercise of the Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Ch 9 Solving Quadratic Equations from the below links and ace up your preparation to become a pro at mathematics.

Solving Quadratic Equations Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Factor the trinomial.
Question 1.
x2 + 10x + 25
Answer:

Question 2.
x2 – 20x + 100
Answer:

Question 3.
x2 + 12x + 36
Answer:

Question 4.
x2 – 18x + 81
Answer:

Question 5.
x2 + 16x + 64
Answer:

Question 6.
x2 – 30x + 225
Answer:

Solve the system of linear equations by graphing.
Question 7.
y = -5x + 3
y = 2x – 4
Answer:

Question 8.
y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)x – 2
y = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)x + 5
Answer:

Question 9.
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x + 4
y = -3x – 3
Answer:

Question 10.
ABSTRACT REASONING
What value of c makes x2 + bx + c a perfect square trinomial?
Answer:

Solving Quadratic Equations Mathematical Practices

Mathematically proficient students monitor their work and change course as needed.

Monitoring Progress

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 1
Question 1.
Use the graph in Example 1 to approximate the negative solution of the equation x2 + x – 1 = 0 to the nearest thousandth.
Answer:

Question 2.
The graph of y = x2 + x – 3 is shown. Approximate both solutions of the equation x2 + x – 3 = 0 to the nearest thousandth.
Answer:

Lesson 9.1 Properties of Radicals

Essential Question How can you multiply and divide square roots?

EXPLORATION 1

Operations with Square Roots
Work with a partner. For each operation with square roots, compare the results obtained using the two indicated orders of operations. What can you conclude?
a. Square Roots and Addition
Is \(\sqrt{36}\) + \(\sqrt{64}\) equal to \(\sqrt{36+64}\)?
In general, is \(\sqrt{a}\) + \(\sqrt{b}\) equal to \(\sqrt{a+b}\)? Explain your reasoning.

b. Square Roots and MultiplicationIs \(\sqrt{4}\) • \(\sqrt{9}\) equal to \(\sqrt{{4} \cdot 9}\)?
In general, is \(\sqrt{a}\) • \(\sqrt{b}\) equal to \(\sqrt{{a} \cdot b}\)? Explain your reasoning.

c. Is \(\sqrt{36}\) – \(\sqrt{64}\) equal to \(\sqrt{36+64}\)?
In general, is \(\sqrt{a}\) – \(\sqrt{b}\) equal to \(\sqrt{a-b}\)? Explain your reasoning.

d. Square Roots and Division
Is \(\frac{\sqrt{100}}{\sqrt{4}}\) equal to \(\sqrt{\frac{100}{4}}\)?
In general, is \(\frac{\sqrt{a}}{\sqrt{b}}\) equal to \(\sqrt{\frac{a}{b}}\)? Explain your reasoning.

EXPLORATION 2

Writing Counter examples
Work with a partner. A counterexample is an example that proves that a general statement is not true. For each general statement in Exploration 1 that is not true, write a counterexample different from the example given.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 1

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you multiply and divide square roots?
Answer:

Question 4.
Give an example of multiplying square roots and an example of dividing square roots that are different from the examples in Exploration 1.
Answer:

Question 5.
Write an algebraic rule for each operation.
a. the product of square roots
b. the quotient of square roots
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Simplify the expression.
Question 1.
\(\sqrt{24}\)
Answer:

Question 2.
–\(\sqrt{80}\)
Answer:

Question 3.
\(\sqrt{49 x^{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 4.
\(\sqrt{49 n^{5}}\)
Answer:

Simplify the expression.
Question 5.
\(\sqrt{\frac{23}{9}}\)
Answer:

Question 6.
–\(\sqrt{\frac{17}{100}}\)
Answer:

Question 7.
\(\sqrt{\frac{36}{z^{2}}}\)
Answer:

Question 8.
\(\sqrt{\frac{4 x^{2}}{64}}\)
Answer:

Question 9.
\(\sqrt[3]{54}\)
Answer:

Question 10.
\(\sqrt[3]{16 x^{4}}\)
Answer:

Question 11.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{a}{-27}}\)
Answer:

Question 12.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{25 c^{7} d^{3}}{64}}\)
Answer:

Simplify the expression.
Question 13.
\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{5}}\)
Answer:

Question 14.
\(\frac{\sqrt{10}}{\sqrt{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 15.
\(\frac{7}{\sqrt{2 x}}\)
Answer:

Question 16.
\(\sqrt{\frac{2 y^{2}}{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 17.
\(\frac{5}{\sqrt[3]{32}}\)
Answer:

Question 18.
\(\frac{8}{1+\sqrt{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 19.
\(\frac{\sqrt{13}}{\sqrt{5}-2}\)
Answer:

Question 20.
\(\frac{12}{\sqrt{2}+\sqrt{7}}\)
Answer:

Question 21.
WHAT IF?
In Example 6, how far can you see when your eye level is 35 feet above the water?
Answer:

Question 22.
The dimensions of a dance floor form a golden rectangle. The shorter side of the dance floor is 50 feet. What is the length of the longer side of the dance floor?
Answer:

Simplify the expression.
Question 23.
3\(\sqrt{2}\) – \(\sqrt{6}\) + 10\(\sqrt{2}\)
Answer:

Question 24.
4\(\sqrt{7}\) – 6\(\sqrt{63}\)
Answer:

Question 25.
4\(\sqrt [3]{ 5x }\) – 11\(\sqrt [3]{ 5x }\)
Answer:

Question 26.
\(\sqrt{3}\)(8\(\sqrt{2}\) + 7\(\sqrt{32}\))
Answer:

Question 27.
(2\(\sqrt{5}\) – 4)2
Answer:

Question 28.
\(\sqrt [3]{ -4 }\)(\(\sqrt [3]{ 2 }\) – \(\sqrt [3]{ 16 }\))
Answer:

Properties of Radicals 9.1 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
The process of eliminating a radical from the denominator of a radical expression is called _______________.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 1

Question 2.
VOCABULARY
What is the conjugate of the binomial \(\sqrt{x}\) + 4?
Answer:

Question 3.
WRITING
Are the expressions \(\frac{1}{3} \sqrt{2 x}\) and \(\sqrt{\frac{2 x}{9}}\) equivalent? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 3

Question 4.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which expression does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 2
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 5–12, determine whether the expression is in simplest form. If the expression is not in simplest form, explain why.
Question 5.
\(\sqrt{19}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 5

Question 6.
\(\sqrt{\frac{1}{7}}\)
Answer:

Question 7.
\(\sqrt{48}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 7

Question 8.
\(\sqrt{34}\)
Answer:

Question 9.
\(\frac{5}{\sqrt{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 9

Question 10.
\(\frac{3 \sqrt{10}}{4}\)
Answer:

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{2+\sqrt[3]{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 11

Question 12.
\(6-\sqrt[3]{54}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 13–20, simplify the expression.
Question 13.
\(\sqrt{20}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 13

Question 14.
\(\sqrt{32}\)
Answer:

Question 15.
\(\sqrt{128}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 15

Question 16.
–\(\sqrt{72}\)
Answer:

Question 17.
\(\sqrt{125b}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 17

Question 18.
\(\sqrt{4 x^{2}}\)
Answer:

Question 19.
\(-\sqrt{81 m^{3}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 19

Question 20.
\(\sqrt{48 n^{5}}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 21–28, simplify the expression.
Question 21.
\(\sqrt{\frac{4}{49}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 21

Question 22.
\(-\sqrt{\frac{7}{81}}\)
Answer:

Question 23.
\(-\sqrt{\frac{23}{64}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 23

Question 24.
\(\sqrt{\frac{65}{121}}\)
Answer:

Question 25.
\(\sqrt{\frac{a^{3}}{49}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 25

Question 26.
\(\sqrt{\frac{144}{k^{2}}}\)
Answer:

Question 27.
\(\sqrt{\frac{100}{4x^{2}}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 27

Question 28.
\(\sqrt{\frac{25 v^{2}}{36}}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 29–36, simplify the expression.
Question 29.
\(\sqrt [3]{ 16 }\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 29

Question 30.
\(\sqrt [3]{ -108 }\)
Answer:

Question 31.
\(\sqrt[3]{-64 x^{5}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 31

Question 32.
–\(\sqrt[3]{343 n^{2}}\)
Answer:

Question 33.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{6 c}{-125}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 33

Question 34.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{8 h^{4}}{27}}\)
Answer:

Question 35.
\(-\sqrt[3]{\frac{81 y^{2}}{1000 x^{3}}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 35

Question 36.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{21}{-64 a^{3} b^{6}}}\)
Answer:

ERROR ANALYSIS In Exercises 37 and 38, describe and correct the error in simplifying the expression.
Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 37

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 4
Answer:

In Exercises 39–44, write a factor that you can use to rationalize the denominator of the expression.
Question 39.
\(\frac{4}{\sqrt{6}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 39

Question 40.
\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{13 z}}\)
Answer:

Question 41.
\(\frac{2}{\sqrt[3]{x^{2}}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 41

Question 42.
\(\frac{3 m}{\sqrt[3]{4}}\)
Answer:

Question 43.
\(\frac{\sqrt{2}}{\sqrt{5}-8}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 43

Question 44.
\(\frac{5}{\sqrt{3}+\sqrt{7}}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 45–54, simplify the expression.
Question 45.
\(\frac{2}{\sqrt{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 45

Question 46.
\(\frac{4}{\sqrt{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 47.
\(\frac{\sqrt{5}}{\sqrt{48}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 47

Question 48.
\(\sqrt{\frac{4}{52}}\)
Answer:

Question 49.
\(\frac{3}{\sqrt{a}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 49

Question 50.
\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2 x}}\)
Answer:

Question 51.
\(\sqrt{\frac{3 d^{2}}{5}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 51

Question 52.
\(\frac{\sqrt{8}}{\sqrt{3 n^{3}}}\)
Answer:

Question 53.
\(\frac{4}{\sqrt[3]{25}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 53

Question 54.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{1}{108 y^{2}}}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 55–60, simplify the expression.
Question 55.
\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{7}+1}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 55

Question 56.
\(\frac{2}{5-\sqrt{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 57.
\(\frac{\sqrt{10}}{7-\sqrt{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 57

Question 58.
\(\frac{\sqrt{5}}{6+\sqrt{5}}\)
Answer:

Question 59.
\(\frac{3}{\sqrt{5}-\sqrt{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 59

Question 60.
\(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{\sqrt{7}+\sqrt{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 61.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The time t (in seconds) it takes an object to hit the ground is given by t = \(\sqrt{\frac{h}{16}}\), where his the height (in feet) from which the object was dropped.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 5
a. How long does it take an earring to hit the ground when it falls from the roof of the building?
b. How much sooner does the earring hit the ground when it is dropped from two stories (22 feet) below the roof?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 61

Question 62.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The orbital period of a planet is the time it takes the planet to travel around the Sun. You can find the orbital period P (in Earth years) using the formula P = \(\sqrt{d^{3}}\), where d is the average distance (in astronomical units, abbreviated AU) of the planet from the Sun.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 6
a. Simplify the formula.
b. What is Jupiter’s orbital period?
Answer:

Question 63.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The electric current I (in amperes) an appliance uses is given by the formula I = \(\sqrt{\frac{P}{R}}\), where P is the power (in watts) and R is the resistance (in ohms). Find the current an appliance uses when the power is 147 watts and the resistance is 5 ohms.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 63

Question 64.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You can find the average annual interest rate r (in decimal form) of a savings account using the formula r = \(\sqrt{\frac{V_{2}}{V_{0}}}\) – 1, where V0 is the initial investment and V2 is the balance of the account after 2 years. Use the formula to compare the savings accounts. In which account would you invest money? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 8
Answer:

In Exercises 65–68, evaluate the function for the given value of x. Write your answer in simplest form and in decimal form rounded to the nearest hundredth.
Question 65.
h(x) = \(\sqrt{5x}\); x = 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 65

Question 66.
g(x) = \(\sqrt{3x}\); x = 60
Answer:

Question 67.
r(x) = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 x}{3 x^{2}+6}}\); x = 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 67

Question 68.
p(x) = \(\sqrt{\frac{x-1}{5 x}}\); x = 8
Answer:

In Exercises 69–72, evaluate the expression when a = −2, b = 8, and c = \(\frac{1}{2}\). Write your answer in simplest form and in decimal form rounded to the nearest hundredth.
Question 69.
\(\sqrt{a^{2}+b c}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 69

Question 70.
\(-\sqrt{4 c-6 a b}\)
Answer:

Question 71.
\(-\sqrt{2 a^{2}+b^{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 71

Question 72.
\(\sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}\)
Answer:

Question 73.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The text in the book shown forms a golden rectangle. What is the width w of the text?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 73

Question 74.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The flag of Togo is approximately the shape of a golden rectangle. What is the width w of the flag?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 10
Answer:

In Exercises 75–82, simplify the expression.
Question 75.
\(\sqrt{2}\) – 2\(\sqrt{2}\) + 6\(\sqrt{2}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 75

Question 76.
\(\sqrt{5}\) – 5\(\sqrt{13}\) – 8\(\sqrt{5}\)
Answer:

Question 77.
2\(\sqrt{6}\) – 5\(\sqrt{54}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 77

Question 78.
9\(\sqrt{32}\) + \(\sqrt{2}\)
Answer:

Question 79.
\(\sqrt{12}\) + 6\(\sqrt{3}\) + 2\(\sqrt{6}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 79

Question 80.
3\(\sqrt{7}\) – 5\(\sqrt{14}\) + 2\(\sqrt{28}\)
Answer:

Question 81.
\(\sqrt[3]{-81}\) + 4\(\sqrt[3]{3}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 81

Question 82.
6\(\sqrt[3]{128 t}\) – 2\(\sqrt[3]{2 t}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 83–90, simplify the expression.
Question 83.
\(\sqrt{2}\)(\(\sqrt{45}\) + \(\sqrt{5}\))
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 83

Question 84.
\(\sqrt{3}\)(\(\sqrt{72}\) – 3\(\sqrt{2}\))
Answer:

Question 85.
\(\sqrt{5}\)(2\(\sqrt{6x}\) – \(\sqrt{96x}\))
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 85

Question 86.
\(\sqrt{7y}\)(\(\sqrt{27y}\) + 5\(\sqrt{12y}\))
Answer:

Question 87.
(4\(\sqrt{2}\) – \(\sqrt{98}\))2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 87

Question 88.
(\(\sqrt{3}\) + \(\sqrt{48}\)) (\(\sqrt{20}\) – \(\sqrt{5}\))
Answer:

Question 89.
\(\sqrt[3]{3}(\sqrt[3]{4}+\sqrt[3]{32})\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 89

Question 90.
\(\sqrt[3]{2}(\sqrt[3]{135}-4 \sqrt[3]{5})\)
Answer:

Question 91.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The circumference C of the art room in a mansion is approximated by the formula C ≈ \(\sqrt\frac{a^{2}+b^{2}}{2}\). Approximate the circumference of the room.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 11
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 91

Question 92.
CRITICAL THINKING
Determine whether each expression represents a rational or an irrational number. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 12
Answer:

In Exercises 93–98, simplify the expression.
Question 93.
\(\sqrt[5]{\frac{13}{5 x^{5}}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 93

Question 94.
\(\sqrt[4]{\frac{10}{81}}\)
Answer:

Question 95.
\(\sqrt[4]{256 y}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 95

Question 96.
\(\sqrt[5]{160 x^{6}}\)
Answer:

Question 97.
\(6 \sqrt[4]{9}-\sqrt[5]{9}+3 \sqrt[4]{9}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 97

Question 98.
\(\sqrt[5]{2}(\sqrt[4]{7}+\sqrt[5]{16})\)
Answer:

REASONING In Exercises 99 and 100, use the table shown.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 13
Question 99.
Copy and complete the table by (a) finding each sum ( 2 + 2, 2 + \(\frac{1}{4}\), etc. ) and (b) finding each product ( 2 • 2, 2 • \(\frac{1}{4}\), etc. )
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 99.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 99.2

Question 100.
Use your answers in Exercise 99 to determine whether each statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Justify your answer.
a. The sum of a rational number and a rational number is rational.
b. The sum of a rational number and an irrational number is irrational.
c. The sum of an irrational number and an irrational number is irrational.
d. The product of a rational number and a rational number is rational.
e. The product of a nonzero rational number and an irrational number is irrational.
f. The product of an irrational number and an irrational number is irrational.
Answer:

Question 101.
REASONING
Let m be a positive integer. For what values of m will the simplified form of the expression \(\sqrt{2^{m}}\) contain a radical? For what values will it not contain a radical? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 101

Question 102.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The edge length s of a cube is an irrational number, the surface area is an irrational number, and the volume is a rational number. Give a possible value of s.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 14
Answer:

Question 103.
REASONING
Let a and b be positive numbers. Explain why \(\sqrt{ab}\) lies between a and b on a number line. (Hint: Let a< b and multiply each side of a < b by a. Then let a < b and multiply each side by b.)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 103

Question 104.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend says that you can rationalize the denominator of the expression \(\frac{2}{4+\sqrt[3]{5}}\) by multiplying the numerator and denominator by 4 – \(\sqrt[3]{5}\). Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer:

Question 105.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The ratio of consecutive terms \(\frac{a_{n}}{a_{n}-1}\) in the Fibonacci sequence gets closer and closer to the golden ratio \(\frac{1+\sqrt{5}}{2}\) as n increases. Find the term that precedes 610 in the sequence.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 105.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 105.2

Question 106.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Use the golden ratio \(\frac{1+\sqrt{5}}{2}\) and the golden ratio conjugate \(\frac{1-\sqrt{5}}{2}\) for each of the following.
a. Show that the golden ratio and golden ratio conjugate are both solutions of x2 – x – 1 = 0.
b. Construct a geometric diagram that has the golden ratio as the length of a part of the diagram.
Answer:

Question 107.
CRITICAL THINKING
Use the special product pattern (a + b)(a2 – ab + b2) = a3 + b3 to simplify the expression \(\frac{2}{\sqrt[3]{x}+1}\). Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 107

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Graph the linear equation. Identify the x-intercept.
Question 108.
y = x – 4
Answer:

Question 109.
y = -2x + 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 109

Question 110.
y = –\(\frac{1}{3}\)x – 1
Answer:

Question 111.
y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)x + 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 111

Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 112.
32 = 2x
Answer:

Question 113.
27x = 3x – 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 113

Question 114.
(\(\frac{1}{6}\))2x = 2161 – x
Answer:

Question 115.
625x = (\(\frac{1}{25}\))x + 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 a 115

Lesson 9.2 Solving Quadratic Equations by Graphing

Essential Question How can you use a graph to solve a quadratic equation in one variable?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 1
Based on what you learned about the x-intercepts of a graph in Section 3.4, it follows that the x-intercept of the graph of the linear equation
y = ax + b 2 variables
is the same value as the solution of
ax + b = 0. 1 variable
You can use similar reasoning to solve quadratic equations.

EXPLORATION 1

Solving a Quadratic Equation by Graphing
Work with a partner.
a. Sketch the graph of y = x2 – 2x.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 2
b. What is the definition of an x-intercept of a graph? How many x-intercepts does this graph have? What are they?
c. What is the definition of a solution of an equation in x? How many solutions does the equation x2 – 2x = 0 have? What are they?
d. Explain how you can verify the solutions you found in part (c).

EXPLORATION 2

Solving Quadratic Equations by Graphing
Work with a partner. Solve each equation by graphing.
a. x2 – 4 = 0
b. x2 + 3x = 0
c. -x2 + 2x + 1 = 0
d. x2 – 2x + 1
e. x2 – 3x + 5 = 0
f. -x2 + 3x – 6 = 0

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you use a graph to solve a quadratic equation in one variable?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 3
Answer:

Question 4.
After you find a solution graphically, how can you check your result algebraically? Check your solutions for parts (a)-(d) in Exploration 2 algebraically.
Answer:

Question 5.
How can you determine graphically that a quadratic equation has no solution?
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Solve the equation by graphing. Check your solutions.
Question 1.
x2 – x – 2 = 0
Answer:

Question 2.
x2 + 7x = -10
Answer:

Question 3.
x2 + x = 12
Answer:

Solve the equation by graphing.
Question 4.
x2 + 36 = 12x
Answer:

Question 5.
x2 + 4x = 0
Answer:

Question 6.
x2 + 10x = -25
Answer:

Question 7.
x2 = 3x – 3
Answer:

Question 8.
x2 + 7x = -6
Answer:

Question 9.
2x + 5 = -x2
Answer:

Question 10.
Graph f(x) = x2 + x – 6. Find the zeros of f.
Answer:

Question 11.
Graph f(x) = -x2 + 2x + 2. Approximate the zeros of f to the nearest tenth.
Answer:

Question 12.
WHAT IF?
After how many seconds is the football 65 feet above the ground?
Answer:

Solving Quadratic Equations by Graphing 9.2 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
What is a quadratic equation?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 1

Question 2.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which equation does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 4
Answer:

Question 3.
WRITING
How can you use a graph to find the number of solutions of a quadratic equation?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 3

Question 4.
WRITING
How are solutions, roots, x-intercepts, and zeros related?
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 5–8, use the graph to solve the equation.
Question 5.
-x2 + 2x + 3 = 0
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 5

Question 6.
x2 – 6x + 8 = 0
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 6
Answer:

Question 7.
x2 + 8x + 16 = 0
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 7

Question 8.
-x2 – 4x – 6 = 0
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 8
Answer:

In Exercises 9–12, write the equation in standard form.
Question 9.
4x2 = 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 9

Question 10.
-x2 = 15
Answer:

Question 11.
2x – x2 = 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 11

Question 12.
5 + x = 3x2
Answer:

In Exercises 13–24, solve the equation by graphing.
Question 13.
x2 – 5x = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 13

Question 14.
x2 – 4x + 4 = 0
Answer:

Question 15.
x2 – 2x + 5 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 15

Question 16.
x2 – 6x – 7 = 0
Answer:

Question 17.
x2 – 6x = 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 17

Question 18.
-x2 = 8x + 20
Answer:

Question 19.
x2 = -1 – 2x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 19

Question 20.
x2 = -x – 3
Answer:

Question 21.
4x – 12 = -x2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 21

Question 22.
5x – 6 = x2
Answer:

Question 23.
x2 – 2 = -x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 23

Question 24.
16 + x2 = -8x
Answer:

Question 25.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in solving x2 + 3x = 18 by graphing.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 25

Question 26.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in solving x2 + 6x + 9 = 0 by graphing.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 10
Answer:

Question 27.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The height y (in yards) of a flop shot in golf can be modeled by y = -x2 + 5x, where x is the horizontal distance (in yards).
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 11
a. Interpret the x-intercepts of the graph of the equation.
b. How far away does the golf ball land?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 27

Question 28.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The height h (in feet) of an underhand volleyball serve can be modeled by h = -16t2 + 30t + 4, where t is the time (in seconds).
a. Do both t-intercepts of the graph of the function have meaning in this situation? Explain.
b. No one receives the serve. After how many seconds does the volleyball hit the ground?
Answer:

In Exercises 29–36, solve the equation by using Method 2 from Example 3.
Question 29.
x2 = 10 – 3x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 29

Question 30.
2x – 3 = x2
Answer:

Question 31.
5x – 7 = x2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 31

Question 32.
x2 = 6x – 5
Answer:

Question 33.
x2 + 12x = -20
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 33

Question 34.
x2 + 8x = 9
Answer:

Question 35.
-x2 – 5 = -2x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 35

Question 36.
-x2 – 4 = -4x
Answer:

In Exercises 37–42, find the zero(s) of f.
Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 37

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 13
Answer:

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 14
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 39

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 15
Answer:

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 41.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 41.2

Question 42
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 17
Answer:

In Exercises 43–46, approximate the zeros of f to the nearest tenth.
Question 43.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 43

Question 44.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 19
Answer:

Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 20
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 45

Question 46.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 21
Answer:

In Exercises 47–52, graph the function. Approximate the zeros of the function to the nearest tenth, if necessary.
Question 47.
f(x) = x2 + 6x + 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 47.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 47.2

Question 48.
f(x) = x2 – 3x + 2
Answer:

Question 49.
y = -x2 + 4x – 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 49.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 49.2

Question 50.
y = -x2 + 9x – 6
Answer:

Question 51.
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x2 + 2x – 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 51.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 51.2

Question 52.
f(x) = -3x2 + 4x + 3
Answer:

Question 53.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
At a Civil War reenactment, a cannonball is fired into the air with an initial vertical velocity of 128 feet per second. The release point is 6 feet above the ground. The function h = -16t2 + 128t + 6 represents the height h (in feet) of the cannonball after t seconds.
a. Find the height of the cannonball each second after it is fired.
b. Use the results of part (a) to estimate when the height of the cannonball is 150 feet.
c. Using a graph, after how many seconds is the cannonball 150 feet above the ground?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 22
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 53.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 53.2

Question 54.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You throw a softball straight up into the air with an initial vertical velocity of 40 feet per second. The release point is 5 feet above the ground. The function h = -16t2 + 40t + 5 represents the height h (in feet) of the softball after t seconds.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 23
a. Find the height of the softball each second after it is released.
b. Use the results of part (a) to estimate when the height of the softball is 15 feet.
c. Using a graph, after how many seconds is the softball 15 feet above the ground?
Answer:

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS In Exercises 55 and 56, use the given surface area S of the cylinder to find the radius r to the nearest tenth.
Question 55.
S = 225 ft2
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 24
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 55

Question 56.
S = 750 m2
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 25
Answer:

Question 57.
WRITING
Explain how to approximate zeros of a function when the zeros are not integers.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 57

Question 58.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Consider the graph shown.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 26
a. How many solutions does the quadratic equation x2 = -3x + 4 have? Explain.
b. Without graphing, describe what you know about the graph of y = x2 + 3x – 4.
Answer:

Question 59.
COMPARING METHODS
Example 3 shows two methods for solving a quadratic equation. Which method do you prefer? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 59

Question 60.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
How many different parabolas have -2 and 2 as x-intercepts? Sketch examples of parabolas that have these two x-intercepts.
Answer:

Question 61.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
To keep water off a road, the surface of the road is shaped like a parabola. A cross section of the road is shown in the diagram. The surface of the road can be modeled by y = -0.0017x2 + 0.041x, where x and y are measured in feet. Find the width of the road to the nearest tenth of a foot.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 27.1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 61

Question 62.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
A stream of water from a fire hose can be modeled by y = -0.003x2 + 0.58x + 3,where x and y are measured in feet. A firefighter is standing 57 feet from a building and is holding the hose 3 feet above the ground. The bottom of a window of the building is 26 feet above the ground. Your friend claims the stream of water will pass through the window. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer:

REASONING In Exercises 63–65, determine whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Justify your answer.
Question 63.
The graph of y = ax2 + c has two x-intercepts when a is negative.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 63

Question 64.
The graph of y = ax2 + c has no x-intercepts when a and c have the same sign.
Answer:

Question 65.
The graph of y = ax2 + bx + c has more than two x-intercepts when a ≠ 0.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 65

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Determine whether the table represents an exponential growth function, an exponential decay function, or neither. Explain.
Question 66.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 27
Answer:

Question 67.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 28
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.2 a 67

Lesson 9.3 Solving Quadratic Equations Using Square Roots

Essential Question How can you determine the number of solutions of a quadratic equation of the form ax2 + c = 0?

EXPLORATION 1

The Number of Solutions of ax2 + c = 0
Work with a partner. Solve each equation by graphing. Explain how the number of solutions of ax2 + c = 0 relates to the graph of y = ax2 + c.
a. x2 – 4 = 0
b. 2x2 + 5 = 0
c. x2 = 0
d. x2 – 5 = 0

EXPLORATION 2

Estimating Solutions
Work with a partner. Complete each table. Use the completed tables to estimate the solutions of x2 – 5 = 0. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 1

EXPLORATION 3

Using Technology to Estimate Solutions
Work with a partner. Two equations are equivalent when they have the same solutions.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 2
a. Are the equations x2 – 5 = 0 and x2 = 5 equivalent? Explain your reasoning.
b. Use the square root key on a calculator to estimate the solutions of x2 – 5 = 0. Describe the accuracy of your estimates in Exploration 2.
c. Write the exact solutions of x2 – 5 = 0.

Communicate Your Answer

Question 4.
How can you determine the number of solutions of a quadratic equation of the form ax2 + c = 0?
Answer:

Question 5.
Write the exact solutions of each equation. Then use a calculator to estimate the solutions.
a. x2 – 2 = 0
b. 3x2 – 18 = 0
c. x2 – 8
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Solve the equation using square roots.
Question 1.
-3x2 = -75
Answer:

Question 2.
x2 + 12 = 10
Answer:

Question 3.
4x2 – 15 = -15
Answer:

Question 4.
(x + 7)2 = 0
Answer:

Question 5.
4(x – 3)2 = 9
Answer:

Question 6.
(2x + 1)2 = 36
Answer:

Solve the equation using square roots. Round your solutions to the nearest hundredth.
Question 7.
x2 + 8 = 19
Answer:

Question 8.
5x2 – 2 = 0
Answer:

Question 9.
3x2 – 30 = 4
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 3
Question 10.
WHAT IF?
In Example 4, the volume of the tank is 315 cubic feet. Find the length and width of the tank.
Answer:

Question 11.
The surface area S of a sphere with radius r is given by the formula S = 4πr2. Solve the formula for r. Then find the radius of a globe with a surface area of 804 square inches.
Answer:

Solving Quadratic Equations Using Square Roots 9.3 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
The equation x2 = d has ____ real solutions when d > 0.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 1

Question 2.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 4
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3–8, determine the number of real solutions of the equation. Then solve the equation using square roots.
Question 3.
x2 = 25
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 3

Question 4.
x2 = -36
Answer:

Question 5.
x2 = -21
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 5

Question 6.
x2 = 400
Answer:

Question 7.
x2 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 7

Question 8.
x2 = 169
Answer:

In Exercises 9–18, solve the equation using square roots.
Question 9.
x2 – 16 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 9

Question 10.
x2 + 6 = 0
Answer:

Question 11.
3x2 + 12 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 11

Question 12.
x2 – 55 = 26
Answer:

Question 13.
2x2 – 98 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 13

Question 14.
-x2 + 9 = 9
Answer:

Question 15.
-3x2 – 5 = -5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 15

Question 16.
4x2 – 371 = 29
Answer:

Question 17.
4x2 + 10 = 11
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 17

Question 18.
9x2 – 35 = 14
Answer:

In Exercises 19–24, solve the equation using square roots.
Question 19.
(x + 3)2 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 19

Question 20.
(x – 1)2 = 4
Answer:

Question 21.
(2x – 1)2 = 81
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 21

Question 22.
(4x + 5)2 = 9
Answer:

Question 23.
9(x + 1)2 = 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 23

Question 24.
4(x – 2)2 = 25
Answer:

In Exercises 25–30, solve the equation using square roots. Round your solutions to the nearest hundredth.
Question 25.
x2 + 6 = 13
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 25

Question 26.
x2 + 11 = 24
Answer:

Question 27.
2x2 – 9 = 11
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 27

Question 28.
5x2 + 2 = 6
Answer:

Question 29.
-21 = 15 – 2x2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 29

Question 30.
2 = 4x2 – 5
Answer:

Question 31.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in solving the equation 2x2 – 33 = 39 using square roots.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 31

Question 32.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
An in-ground pond has the shape of a rectangular prism. The pond has a depth of 24 inches and a volume of 72,000 cubic inches. The length of the pond is two times its width. Find the length and width of the pond.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 6
Answer:

Question 33.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
A person sitting in the top row of the bleachers at a sporting event drops a pair of sunglasses from a height of 24 feet. The function h = -16x2 + 24 represents the height h (in feet) of the sunglasses after x seconds. How long does it take the sunglasses to hit the ground?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 33

Question 34.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend says that the solution of the equation x2 + 4 = 0 is x = 0. Your cousin says that the equation has no real solutions. Who is correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Question 35.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The design of a square rug for your living room is shown. You want the area of the inner square to be 25% of the total area of the rug. Find the side length x of the inner square.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 35

Question 36.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
The area A of a circle with radius r is given by the formula A = πr2.
a. Solve the formula for r.
b. Use the formula from part (a) to find the radius of each circle.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 8
c. Explain why it is beneficial to solve the formula for r before finding the radius.
Answer:

Question 37.
WRITING
How can you approximate the roots of a quadratic equation when the roots are not integers?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 37

Question 38.
WRITING
Given the equation ax2 + c = 0, describe the values of a and c so the equation has the following number of solutions.
a. two real solutions
b. one real solution
c. no real solutions
Answer:

Question 39.
REASONING
Without graphing, where do the graphs of y = x2 and y = 9 intersect? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 39

Question 40.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The graph represents the function f(x) = (x – 1)2. How many solutions does the equation (x – 1)2 = 0 have? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 9
Answer:

Question 41.
REASONING
Solve x2 = 1.44 without using a calculator. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 41

Question 42.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
The quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0can be rewritten in the following form. \(\left(x+\frac{b}{2 a}\right)^{2}=\frac{b^{2}-4 a c}{4 a^{2}}\) Use this form to write the solutions of the equation.
Answer:

Question 43.
REASONING
An equation of the graph shown is y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)(x – 2)2 + 1. Two points on the parabola have y-coordinates of 9. Find the x-coordinates of these points.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 43

Question 44.
CRITICAL THINKING
Solve each equation without graphing.
a. x2 – 12x + 36 = 64
b. x2 + 14x + 49 = 16
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Factor the polynomial.
Question 45.
x2 + 8x + 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 45

Question 46.
x2 – 4x + 4
Answer:

Question 47.
x2 – 14x + 49
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 47

Question 48.
x2 + 18x + 81
Answer:

Question 49.
x2 + 12x + 36
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 a 49

Question 50.
x2 – 22x + 121
Answer:

Solving Quadratic Equations Study Skills: Keeping a Positive Attitude

9.1–9.3 What Did You Learn?

Core Vocabulary
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 11

Core Concepts
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 12

Mathematical Practices

Question 1.
For each part of Exercise 100 on page 488 that is sometimes true, list all examples and counterexamples from the table that represent the sum or product being described.
Answer:

Question 2.
Which Examples can you use to help you solve Exercise 54 on page 496?
Answer:

Question 3.
Describe how solving a simpler equation can help you solve the equation in Exercise 41 on page 502.
Answer:

Study Skills: Keeping a Positive Attitude

Do you ever feel frustrated or overwhelmed by math? You’re not alone. Just take a deep breath and assess the situation. Try to find a productive study environment, review your notes and the examples in the textbook, and ask your teacher or friends for help.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.3 13

Solving Quadratic Equations 9.1 – 9.3 Quiz

Simplify the expression.
Question 1.
\(\sqrt{112 x^{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 2.
\(\sqrt{\frac{18}{81}}\)
Answer:

Question 3.
\(\sqrt[3]{-625}\)
Answer:

Question 4.
\(\frac{12}{\sqrt{32}}\)
Answer:

Question 5.
\(\frac{4}{\sqrt{11}}\)
Answer:

Question 6.
\(\sqrt{\frac{144}{13}}\)
Answer:

Question 7.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{54 x^{4}}{343 y^{6}}}\)
Answer:

Question 8.
\(\sqrt{\frac{4 x^{2}}{28 y^{4} z^{5}}}\)
Answer:

Question 9.
\(\frac{6}{5+\sqrt{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 10.
2\(\sqrt{5}\) + 7\(\sqrt{10}\) – 3\(\sqrt{20}\)
Answer:

Question 11.
\(\frac{10}{\sqrt{8}-\sqrt{10}}\)
Answer:

Question 12.
\(\sqrt{6}\)(7\(\sqrt{12}\) – 4\(\sqrt{3}\))
Answer:

Use the graph to solve the equation.
Question 13.
x2 – 2x – 3 = 0
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations q 1
Answer:

Question 14.
x2 – 2x + 3 = 0
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations q 2
Answer:

Question 15.
x2 + 10x + 25 = 0
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations q 3
Answer:

Solve the equation by graphing.
Question 16.
x2 + 9x + 14 = 0
Answer:

Question 17.
x2 – 7x = 8
Answer:

Question 18.
x + 4 = -x2
Answer:

Solve the equation using square roots.
Question 19.
4x2 = 64
Answer:

Question 20.
-3x2 + 6 = 10
Answer:

Question 21.
(x – 8)2 = 1
Answer:

Question 22.
Explain how to determine the number of real solutions of x2 = 100 without solving.
Answer:

Question 23.
The length of a rectangular prism is four times its width. The volume of the prism is 380 cubic meters. Find the length and width of the prism.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations q 4
Answer:

Question 24.
You cast a fishing lure into the water from a height of 4 feet above the water. The height h (in feet) of the fishing lure after t seconds can be modeled by the equation h = -16t2 + 24t + 4.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations q 5
a. After how many seconds does the fishing lure reach a height of 12 feet?
b. After how many seconds does the fishing lure hit the water?
Answer:

Lesson 9.4 Solving Quadratic Equations by Completing the Square

Essential Question How can you use “completing the square” to solve a quadratic equation?

EXPLORATION 1

Solving by Completing the Square
Work with a partner.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 1
a. Write the equation modeled by the algebra tiles. This is the equation to be solved.
b. Four algebra tiles are added to the left side to “complete the square.” Why are four algebra tiles also added to the right side?
c. Use algebra tiles to label the dimensions of the square on the left side and simplify on the right side.
d. Write the equation modeled by the algebra tiles so that the left side is the square of a binomial. Solve the equation using square roots.

EXPLORATION 2

Solving by Completing the Square
Work with a partner.
a. Write the equation modeled by the algebra tiles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 2
b. Use algebra tiles to “complete the square.”
c. Write the solutions of the equation.
d. Check each solution in the original equation.

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you use “completing the square” to solve a quadratic equation?
Answer:

Question 4.
Solve each quadratic equation by completing the square.
a. x2 – 2x = 1
b. x2 – 4x = -1
c. x2 + 4x = -3
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Complete the square for the expression. Then factor the trinomial.
Question 1.
x2 + 10x
Answer:

Question 2.
x2 – 4x
Answer:

Question 3.
x2 + 7x
Answer:

Solve the equation by completing the square. Round your solutions to the nearest hundredth, if necessary.
Question 4.
x2 – 2x = 3
Answer:

Question 5.
m2 + 12m = -8
Answer:

Question 6.
3g2 – 24g + 27 = 0
Answer:

Determine whether the quadratic function has a maximum or minimum value. Then find the value.
Question 7.
y = -x2 – 4x + 4
Answer:

Question 8.
y = x2 + 12x + 40
Answer:

Question 9.
y = x2 – 2x – 2
Answer:

Determine whether the function could be represented by the graph in Example 6. Explain.
Question 10.
h(x) = (x – 8)2 + 10
Answer:

Question 11.
n(x) = -2(x – 5)(x – 20)
Answer:

Question 12.
WHAT IF?
Repeat Example 7 when the function is y = -16x2 + 128x.
Answer:

Question 13.
WHAT IF?
You want the chalkboard to cover 4 square feet. Find the width of the border to the nearest inch.
Answer:

Solving Quadratic Equations by Completing the Square 9.4 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
The process of adding a constant c to the expression x2 + bx so that x2 + bx + c is a perfect square trinomial is called ________________.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 1

Question 2.
VOCABULARY
Explain how to complete the square for an expression of the form x2 + bx.
Answer:

Question 3.
WRITING
Is it more convenient to complete the square for x2 + bx when b is odd or when b is even? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 3

Question 4.
WRITING
Describe how you can use the process of completing the square to find the maximum or minimum value of a quadratic function.
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 5–10, find the value of c that completes the square.
Question 5.
x2 – 8x + c
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 5

Question 6.
x2 – 2x + c
Answer:

Question 7.
x2 + 4x + c
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 7

Question 8.
x2 + 12x + c
Answer:

Question 9.
x2 – 15x + c
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 9

Question 10.
x2 + 9x + c
Answer:

In Exercises 11–16, complete the square for the expression. Then factor the trinomial.
Question 11.
x2 – 10x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 11

Question 12.
x2 – 40x
Answer:

Question 13.
x2 + 16x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 13

Question 14.
x2 + 22x
Answer:

Question 15.
x2 + 5x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 15

Question 16.
x2 – 3x
Answer:

In Exercises 17–22, solve the equation by completing the square. Round your solutions to the nearest hundredth, if necessary.
Question 17.
x2 + 14x = 15
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 17

Question 18.
x2 – 6x = 16
Answer:

Question 19.
x2 – 4x = -2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 19

Question 20.
x2 + 2x = 5
Answer:

Question 21.
x2 – 5x = 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 21

Question 22.
x2 + 11x = -10
Answer:

Question 23.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The area of the patio is 216 square feet.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 3
a. Write an equation that represents the area of the patio.
b. Find the dimensions of the patio by completing the square.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 23

Question 24.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
Some sand art contains sand and water sealed in a glass case, similar to the one shown. When the art is turned upside down, the sand and water fall to create a new picture. The glass case has a depth of 1 centimeter and a volume of 768 cubic centimeters.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 4
a. Write an equation that represents the volume of the glass case.
b. Find the dimensions of the glass case by completing the square.
Answer:

In Exercises 25–32, solve the equation by completing the square. Round your solutions to the nearest hundredth, if necessary.
Question 25.
x2 – 8x + 15 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 25

Question 26.
x2 + 4x – 21 = 0
Answer:

Question 27.
2x2 + 20x + 44 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 27

Question 28.
3x2 – 18x + 12 = 0
Answer:

Question 29.
-3x2 – 24x + 17 = -40
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 29

Question 30.
-5x2 – 20x + 35 = 30
Answer:

Question 31.
2x2 – 14x + 10 = 26
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 31

Question 32.
4x2 + 12x – 15 = 5
Answer:

Question 33.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in solving x2 + 8x = 10 by completing the square.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 33

Question 34.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in the first two steps of solving 2x2 – 2x – 4 = 0 by completing the square.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 6
Answer:

Question 35.
NUMBER SENSE
Find all values of b for which x2 + bx + 25 is a perfect square trinomial. Explain how you found your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 35

Question 36.
REASONING
You are completing the square to solve 3x2 + 6x = 12. What is the first step?
Answer:

In Exercises 37–40, write the function in vertex form bycompleting the square. Then match the function with its graph.
Question 37.
y = x2 + 6x + 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 37

Question 38.
y = -x2 + 8x – 12
Answer:

Question 39.
y = -x2 – 4x – 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 39

Question 40.
y = x2 – 2x + 4
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 7

In Exercises 41–46, determine whether the quadratic function has a maximum or minimum value. Then find the value.
Question 41.
y = x2 – 4x – 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 41

Question 42.
y = x2 + 6x + 10
Answer:

Question 43.
y = -x2 – 10x – 30
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 43

Question 44.
y = -x2 + 14x – 34
Answer:

Question 45.
f(x) = -3x2 – 6x – 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 45

Question 46.
f(x) = 4x2 – 28x + 32
Answer:

In Exercises 47–50, determine whether the graph could represent the function. Explain.
Question 47.
y = -(x + 8)(x + 3)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 47

Question 48.
y = (x – 5)2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 9
Answer:

Question 49.
y = \(\frac{1}{4}\)(x + 2)2 – 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 49

Question 50.
y = -2(x – 1)(x + 2)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 11
Answer:

In Exercises 51 and 52, determine which of the functions could be represented by the graph. Explain.
Question 51.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 51.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 51.2

Question 52.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 13
Answer:

Question 53.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The function h = -16t2 + 48t represents the height h (in feet) of a kickball t seconds after it is kicked from the ground.
a. Find the maximum height of the kickball.
b. Find and interpret the axis of symmetry.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 53

Question 54.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You throw a stone from a height of 16 feet with an initial vertical velocity of 32 feet per second. The function h = -16t2 + 32t + 16 represents the height h (in feet) of the stone after t seconds.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 14
a. Find the maximum height of the stone.
b. Find and interpret the axis of symmetry.
Answer:

Question 55.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You are building a rectangular brick patio surrounded by a crushed stone border with a uniform width, as shown. You purchase patio bricks to cover 140 square feet. Find the width of the border.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 15
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 55.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 55.2

Question 56.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You are making a poster that will have a uniform border, as shown. The total area of the poster is 722 square inches. Find the width of the border to the nearest inch.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 16
Answer:

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS In Exercises 57 and 58, find the value of x. Round your answer to the nearest hundredth, if necessary.
Question 57.
A = 108 m2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 17
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 57

Question 58.
A = 288 in.2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 18
Answer:

In Exercises 59–62, solve the equation by completing the square. Round your solutions to the nearest hundredth, if necessary.
Question 59.
0.5x2 + x – 2 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 59

Question 60.
0.75x2 + 1.5x = 4
Answer:

Question 61.
\(\frac{8}{3}\) x – \(\frac{2}{3}\)x2 = –\(\frac{5}{6}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 61

Question 62.
\(\frac{1}{4}\)x2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)x – \(\frac{5}{4}\) = 0
Answer:

Question 63.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The distance d (in feet) that it takes a car to come to a complete stop can be modeled by d = 0.05s2 + 2.2s, where s is the speed of the car (in miles per hour). A car has 168 feet to come to a complete stop. Find the maximum speed at which the car can travel.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 63

Question 64.
PROBLEM SOLVING
During a “big air” competition, snowboarders launch themselves from a half-pipe, perform tricks in the air, and land back in the half-pipe. The height h (in feet) of a snowboarder above the bottom of the half-pipe can be modeled by h = -16t2 + 24t + 16.4, where t is the time (in seconds) after the snowboarder launches into the air. The snowboarder lands 3.2 feet lower than the height of the launch. How long is the snowboarder in the air? Round your answer to the nearest tenth of a second.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 19
Answer:

Question 65.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You have 80 feet of fencing to make a rectangular horse pasture that covers 750 square feet. A barn will be used as one side of the pasture, as shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 20
a. Write equations for the amount of fencing to be used and the area enclosed by the fencing.
b. Use substitution to solve the system of equations from part (a). What are the possible dimensions of the pasture?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 65.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 65.2

Question 66.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The graph represents the quadratic function y = x2 – 4x + 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 21
a. Use the graph to estimate the x-values for which y = 3.
b. Explain how you can use the method of completing the square to check your estimates in part (a).
Answer:

Question 67.
COMPARING METHODS
Consider the quadratic equation x2 + 12x + 2 = 12.
a. Solve the equation by graphing.
b. Solve the equation by completing the square.
c. Compare the two methods. Which do you prefer? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 67.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 67.2

Question 68.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Sketch the graph of the equation x2 – 2xy + y2 – x – y = 0. Identify the graph.
Answer:

Question 69.
REASONING
The product of two consecutive even integers that are positive is 48. Write and solve an equation to find the integers.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 69

Question 70.
REASONING
The product of two consecutive odd integers that are negative is 195. Write and solve an equation to find the integers.
Answer:

Question 71.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
You purchase stock for $16 per share. You sell the stock 30 days later for $23.50 per share. The price y (in dollars) of a share during the 30-day period can be modeled by y = -0.025x2 + x + 16, where x is the number of days after the stock is purchased. Your friend says you could have sold the stock earlier for $23.50 per share. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 22
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 71

Question 72.
REASONING
You are solving the equation x2 + 9x = 18. What are the advantages of solving the equation by completing the square instead of using other methods you have learned?
Answer:

Question 73.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are knitting a rectangular scarf. The pattern results in a scarf that is 60 inches long and 4 inches wide. However, you have enough yarn to knit 396 square inches. You decide to increase the dimensions of the scarf so that you will use all your yarn. The increase in the length is three times the increase in the width. What are the dimensions of your scarf?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 23
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 73.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 73.2

Question 74.
WRITING
How many solutions does x2 + bx = c have when c < -(\(\frac{b}{2}\))2 ? Explain.
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Write a recursive rule for the sequence.
Question 75.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 24
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 75

Question 76.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 25
Answer:

Question 77.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 26
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 77

Simplify the expression \(\sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}\) for the given values.
Question 78.
a = 3, b = -6, c = 2
Answer:

Question 79.
a = -2, b = 4, c = 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.4 a 79

Question 80.
a = 1, b = 6, c = 4
Answer:

Lesson 9.5 Solving Quadratic Equations Using the Quadratic Formula

Essential Question How can you derive a formula that can be used to write the solutions of any quadratic equation in standard form?

EXPLORATION 1

Deriving the Quadratic Formula
Work with a partner. The following steps show a method of solving ax2 + bx + c = 0. Explain what was done in each step.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 1

EXPLORATION 2

Deriving the Quadratic Formula by Completing the Square
Work with a partner.
a. Solve ax2 + bx + c = 0 by completing the square. (Hint: Subtract c from each side, divide each side by a, and then proceed by completing the square.)
b. Compare this method with the method in Exploration 1. Explain why you think 4a and b2 were chosen in Steps 2 and 3 of Exploration 1.

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you derive a formula that can be used to write the solutions of any quadratic equation in standard form?
Answer:

Question 4.
Use the Quadratic Formula to solve each quadratic equation.
a. x2 + 2x – 3 = 0
b. x2 – 4x + 4 = 0
c. x2 + 4x + 5 = 0
Answer:

Question 5.
Use the Internet to research imaginary numbers. How are they related to quadratic equations?
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 2
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Solve the equation using the Quadratic Formula. Round your solutions to the nearest tenth, if necessary.
Question 1.
x2 – 6x + 5 = 0
Answer:

Question 2.
\(\frac{1}{2}\)x2 + x – 10 = 0
Answer:

Question 3.
-3x2 + 2x + 7 = 0
Answer:

Question 4.
4x2 – 4x = -1
Answer:

Question 5.
WHAT IF?
When were there about 60 wolf breeding pairs?
Answer:

Question 6.
The number y of bald eagle nesting pairs in a state x years since 2000 can be modeled by the function y = 0.34x2 + 13.1x + 51.
a. When were there about 160 bald eagle nesting pairs?
b. How many bald eagle nesting pairs were there in 2000?
Answer:

Determine the number of real solutions of the equation.
Question 7.
-x2 + 4x – 4 = 0
Answer:

Question 8.
6x2 + 2x = -1
Answer:

Question 9.
\(\frac{1}{2}\)x2 = 7x – 1
Answer:

Find the number of x-intercepts of the graph of the function.
Question 10.
y = -x2 + x – 6
Answer:

Question 11.
y = x2 – x
Answer:

Question 12.
f(x) = x2 + 12x + 36
Answer:

Solve the equation using any method. Explain your choice of method.
Question 13.
x2 + 11x – 12 = 0
Answer:

Question 14.
9x2 – 5 = 4
Answer:

Question 15.
5x2 – x – 1 = 0
Answer:

Question 16.
x2 = 2x – 5
Answer:

Solving Quadratic Equations Using the Quadratic Formula 9.5 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
What formula can you use to solve any quadratic equation? Write the formula.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 1

Question 2.
VOCABULARY
In the Quadratic Formula, what is the discriminant? What does the value of the discriminant determine?
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3–8, write the equation in standard form. Then identify the values of a, b, and c that you would use to solve the equation using the Quadratic Formula.
Question 3.
x2 = 7x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 3

Question 4.
x2 – 4x = -12
Answer:

Question 5.
-2x2 + 1 = 5x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 5

Question 6.
3x + 2 = 4x2
Answer:

Question 7.
4 – 3x = -x2 + 3x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 7

Question 8.
-8x – 1 = 3x2 + 2
Answer:

In Exercises 9–22, solve the equation using the Quadratic Formula. Round your solutions to the nearest tenth, if necessary.
Question 9.
x2 – 12x + 36 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 9

Question 10.
x2 + 7x + 16 = 0
Answer:

Question 11.
x2 – 10x – 11 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 11

Question 12.
2x2 – x – 1 = 0
Answer:

Question 13.
2x2 – 6x + 5 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 13

Question 14.
9x2 – 6x + 1 = 0
Answer:

Question 15.
6x2 – 13x = -6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 15

Question 16.
-3x2 + 6x = 4
Answer:

Question 17.
1 – 8x = -16x2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 17

Question 18.
x2 – 5x + 3 = 0
Answer:

Question 19.
x2 + 2x = 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 19

Question 20.
5x2 – 2 = 4x
Answer:

Question 21.
2x2 + 9x + 7 = 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 21

Question 22.
8x2 + 8 = 6 – 9x
Answer:

Question 23.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
A dolphin jumps out of the water, as shown in the diagram. The function h = -16t2 + 26t models the height h (in feet) of the dolphin after t seconds. After how many seconds is the dolphin at a height of 5 feet?
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 23

Question 24.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The amount of trout y (in tons) caught in a lake from 1995 to 2014 can be modeled by the equation y = -0.08x2 + 1.6x + 10, where x is the number of years since 1995.
a. When were about 15 tons of trout caught in the lake?
b. Do you think this model can be used to determine the amounts of trout caught in future years? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

In Exercises 25–30, determine the number of real solutions of the equation.
Question 25.
x2 – 6x + 10 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 25

Question 26.
x2 – 5x – 3 = 0
Answer:

Question 27.
2x2 – 12x = -18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 27

Question 28.
4x2 = 4x – 1
Answer:

Question 29.
–\(\frac{1}{4}\)x2 + 4x = -2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 29

Question 30.
-5x2 + 8x = 9
Answer:

In Exercises 31–36, find the number of x-intercepts of the graph of the function.
Question 31.
y = x2 + 5x – 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 31

Question 32.
y = 4x2 + 4x + 1
Answer:

Question 33.
y = -6x2 + 3x – 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 33

Question 34.
y = -x2 + 5x + 13
Answer:

Question 35.
f(x) = 4x2 + 3x – 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 35

Question 36.
f(x) = 2x2 + 8x + 8
Answer:

In Exercises 37–44, solve the equation using any method. Explain your choice of method.
Question 37.
-10x2 + 13x = 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 37

Question 38.
x2 – 3x – 40 = 0
Answer:

Question 39.
x2 + 6x = 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 39

Question 40.
-5x2 = -25
Answer:

Question 41.
x2 + x – 12 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 41

Question 42.
x2 – 4x + 1 = 0
Answer:

Question 43.
4x2 – x = 17
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 43

Question 44.
x2 + 6x + 9 = 16
Answer:

Question 45.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in solving the equation 3x2 – 7x – 6 = 0 using the Quadratic Formul
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 45

Question 46.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in solving the equation -2x2 + 9x = 4 using the Quadratic Formula.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 5
Answer:

Question 47.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
A fountain shoots a water arc that can be modeled by the graph of the equation y = -0.006x2 + 1.2x + 10, where x is the horizontal distance (in feet) from the river’s north shore and y is the height (in feet) above the river. Does the water arc reach a height of 50 feet? If so, about how far from the north shore is the water arc 50 feet above the water?
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 47

Question 48.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
Between the months of April and September, the number y of hours of daylight per day in Seattle, Washington, can be modeled by y = -0.00046x2 + 0.076x + 13, where x is the number of days since April 1.
a. Do any of the days between April and September in Seattle have 17 hours of daylight? If so, how many?
b. Do any of the days between April and September in Seattle have 14 hours of daylight? If so, how many?
Answer:

Question 49.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend uses the discriminant of the equation 2x2 – 5x – 2 = -11 and determines that the equation has two real solutions. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 49

Question 50.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The frame of the tent shown is defined by a rectangular base and two parabolic arches that connect the opposite corners of the base. The graph of y = -0.18x2 + 1.6x models the height y (in feet) of one of the arches x feet along the diagonal of the base. Can a child who is 4 feet tall walk under one of the arches without having to bend over? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 7
Answer:

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS In Exercises 51 and 52, use the given area A of the rectangle to find the value of x. Then give the dimensions of the rectangle.
Question 51.
A = 91 m2
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 51.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 51.2

Question 52.
A = 209 ft2
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 9
Answer:

COMPARING METHODS In Exercises 53 and 54, solve the equation by (a) graphing, (b) factoring, and (c) using the Quadratic Formula. Which method do you prefer? Explain your reasoning.
Question 53.
x2 + 4x + 4 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 53.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 53.2

Question 54.
3x2 + 11x + 6 = 0
Answer:

Question 55.
REASONING
How many solutions does the equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 have when a and c have different signs? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 55

Question 56.
REASONING
When the discriminant is a perfect square, are the solutions of ax2 + bx + c = 0 rational or irrational? (Assume a, b, and c are integers.) Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

REASONING In Exercises 57–59, give a value of c for which the equation has (a) two solutions, (b) one solution, and (c) no solutions.
Question 57.
x2 – 2x + c = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 57.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 57.2

Question 58.
x2 – 8x + c = 0
Answer:

Question 59.
4x2 + 12x + c = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 59.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 59.2

Question 60.
REPEATED REASONING
You use the Quadratic Formula to solve an equation.
a. You obtain solutions that are integers. Could you have used factoring to solve the equation? Explain your reasoning.
b. You obtain solutions that are fractions. Could you have used factoring to solve the equation? Explain your reasoning.
c. Make a generalization about quadratic equations with rational solutions.
Answer:

Question 61.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The fuel economy y(in miles per gallon) of a car can be modeled by the equation y = -0.013x2 + 1.25x + 5.6, where 5 ≤ x ≤ 75 and x is the speed (in miles per hour) of the car. Find the speed(s) at which you can travel and have a fuel economy of 32 miles per gallon.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 61

Question 62.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The depth d (in feet) of a river can be modeled by the equation d = -0.25t2 + 1.7t + 3.5, where 0 ≤ t ≤ 7 and t is the time (in hours) after a heavy rain begins. When is the river 6 feet deep?
Answer:

ANALYZING EQUATIONS In Exercises 63–68, tell whether the vertex of the graph of the function lies above, below, or on the x-axis. Explain your reasoning without using a graph.
Question 63.
y = x2 – 3x + 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 63

Question 64.
y = 3x2 – 6x + 3
Answer:

Question 65.
y = 6x2 – 2x + 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 65

Question 66.
y = -15x2 + 10x – 25
Answer:

Question 67.
f(x) = -3x2 – 4x + 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 67

Question 68.
f(x) = 9x2 – 24x + 16
Answer:

Question 69.
REASONING
NASA creates a weightless environment by flying a plane in a series of parabolic paths. The height h (in feet) of a plane after t seconds in a parabolic flight path can be modeled by h = -11t2 + 700t + 21,000. The passengers experience a weightless environment when the height of the plane is greater than or equal to 30,800 feet. For approximately how many seconds do passengers experience weightlessness on such a flight? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 69

Question 70.
WRITING EQUATIONS
Use the numbers to create a quadratic equation with the solutions x = -1 and x = –\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 11
Answer:

Question 71.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A rancher constructs two rectangular horse pastures that share a side, as shown. The pastures are enclosed by 1050 feet of fencing. Each pasture has an area of 15,000 square feet.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 12
a. Show that y = 350 – \(\frac{4}{3}\)x.
b. Find the possible lengths and widths of each pasture.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 71.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 71.2

Question 72.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A kicker punts a football from a height of 2.5 feet above the ground with an initial vertical velocity of 45 feet per second.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 13
a. Write an equation that models this situation using the function h = -16t2 + v0t + s0, where h is the height (in feet) of the football, t is the time (in seconds) after the football is punted, v0 is the initial vertical velocity (in feet per second), and s0 is the initial height (in feet).
b. The football is caught 5.5 feet above the ground, as shown in the diagram. Find the amount of time that the football is in the air.
Answer:

Question 73.
CRITICAL THINKING
The solutions of the quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 are x = \(\frac{-b+\sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\) and x = \(\frac{-b-\sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\). Find the mean of the solutions. How is the mean of the solutions related to the graph of y = ax2 + bx + c? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 73

Question 74.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Match each graph with its discriminant. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 14
a. b2 – 4ac > 0
b. b2 – 4ac = 0
c. b2 – 4ac < 0
Answer:

Question 75.
CRITICAL THINKING
You are trying to hang a tire swing. To get the rope over a tree branch that is 15 feet high, you tie the rope to a weight and throw it over the branch. You release the weight at a height s0 of 5.5 feet. What is the minimum initial vertical velocity v0 needed to reach the branch? (Hint: Use the equation h = -16t2 + v0 t + s0)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 75

Question 76.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Consider the graph of the standard form of a quadratic function y = ax2 + bx + c. Then consider the Quadratic Formula as given by
x = \(-\frac{b}{2 a} \pm \frac{\sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\)
Write a graphical interpretation of the two parts of this formula.
Answer:

Question 77.
ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
Find the sum and product of \(\frac{-b+\sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\) and \(\frac{-b-\sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\). Then write a quadratic equation whose solutions have a sum of 2 and a product of \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 77.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 77.2

Question 78.
WRITING A FORMULA
Derive a formula that can be used to find solutions of equations that have the form ax2 + x + c = 0. Use your formula to solve -2x2 + x + 8 = 0.
Answer:

Question 79.
MULTIPLE REPRESENTATIONS
If p is a solution of a quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0, then (x – p) is a factor of ax2 + bx + c.
a. Copy and complete the table for each pair of solutions.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 15
b. Graph the related function for each equation. Identify the zeros of the function.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 79.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 79.2
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 79.3

CRITICAL THINKING In Exercises 80–82, find all values of k for which the equation has (a) two solutions, (b) one solution, and (c) no solutions.
Question 80.
2x2 + x + 3k = 0
Answer:

Question 81.
x2 = 4kx + 36 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 81.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 81.2

Question 82.
kx2 + 5x – 16 = 0
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Solve the system of linear equations using any method. Explain why you chose the method.
Question 83.
y = -x + 4
y = 2x – 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 83

Question 84.
x = 16 – 4y
3x – 4y = 8
Answer:

Question 85.
2x – y = 7
2x + 7y = 31
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 1 Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.5 a 85

Question 86.
3x – 2y = -20
x + 1.2y = 6.4
Answer:

Lesson 9.6 Solving Nonlinear Systems of Equations

Essential Question How can you solve a system of two equations when one is linear and the other is quadratic?

EXPLORATION 1
Solving a System of Equations
Work with a partner. Solve the system of equations by graphing each equation and finding the points of intersection.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 1
System of Equations
y = x + 2 Linear
y = x2 + 2x

EXPLORATION 2

Analyzing Systems of Equations
Work with a partner. Match each system of equations with its graph. Then solve the system of equations.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 2

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you solve a system of two equations when one is linear and the other is quadratic?
Answer:

Question 4.
Write a system of equations (one linear and one quadratic) that has (a) no solutions, (b) one solution, and (c) two solutions. Your systems should be different from those in Explorations 1 and 2.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 3
Answer:

Monitoring Progress

Solve the system by graphing.
Question 1.
y = x2 + 4x – 4
y = 2x – 5
Answer:

Question 2.
y = -x + 6
y = -2x2 – x + 3
Answer:

Question 3.
y = 3x – 15
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x2 – 2x – 7
Answer:

Solve the system by substitution.
Question 4.
y = x2 + 9 5.
y = 9
Answer:

Question 5.
y = -5x
y = x2 – 3x – 3
Answer:

Question 6.
y = -3x2 + 2x + 1
y = 5 – 3x
Answer:

Solve the system by elimination.
Question 7.
y = x2 + x
y = x + 5
Answer:

Question 8.
y = 9x2 + 8x – 6
y = 5x – 4
Answer:

Question 9.
y = 2x + 5
y = -3x2 + x – 4
Answer:

Use the method in Example 4 to approximate the solution(s) of the system to the nearest thousandth.
Question 10.
y = 4x
y = x2 + x + 3
Answer:

Question 11.
y = 4x2 – 1
y = -2(3)x + 4
Answer:

Question 12.
y = x2 + 3x
y = -x2 + x + 10
Answer:

Solve the equation. Round your solution(s) to the nearest hundredth.
Question 13.
3x – 1 = x2 – 2x + 5
Answer:

Question 14.
4x2 + x = -2 (\(\frac{1}{2}\))x + 5
Answer:

Solving Nonlinear Systems of Equations 9.6 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
Describe how to use substitution to solve a system of nonlinear equations.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 1

Question 2.
WRITING
How is solving a system of nonlinear equations similar to solving a system of linear equations? How is it different?
Answer:

In Exercises 3–6, match the system of equations with its graph. Then solve the system.
Question 3.
y = x2 – 2x + 1
y = x + 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 3

Question 4.
y = x2 + 3x + 2
y = -x – 3
Answer:

Question 5.
y = x – 1
y = -x2 + x – 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 5

Question 6.
y = -x + 3
y = -x2 – 2x + 5
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 4

In Exercises 7–12, solve the system by graphing.
Question 7.
y = 3x2 – 2x + 1
y = x + 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 7

Question 8.
y = x2 + 2x + 5
y = -2x – 5
Answer:

Question 9.
y = -2x2 – 4x
y = 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 9

Question 10.
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x2 – 3x + 4
y = x – 2
Answer:

Question 11.
y = \(\frac{1}{3}\) x2 + 2x – 3
y = 2x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 11.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 11.2

Question 12.
y = 4x2 + 5x – 7
y = -3x + 5
Answer:

In Exercises 13–18, solve the system by substitution.
Question 13.
y = x – 5
y = x2 + 4x – 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 13

Question 14.
y = -3x2
y = 6x + 3
Answer:

Question 15.
y = -x + 7
y = -x2 – 2x – 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 15

Question 16.
y = -x2 + 7
y = 2x + 4
Answer:

Question 17.
y – 5 = -x2
y = 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 17

Question 18.
y = 2x2 + 3x – 4
y – 4x = 2
Answer:

In Exercises 19–26, solve the system by elimination.
Question 19.
y = x2 – 5x – 7
y = -5x + 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 19

Question 20.
y = -3x2 + x + 2
y = x + 4
Answer:

Question 21.
y = -x2 – 2x + 2
y = 4x + 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 21

Question 22.
y = -2x2 + x – 3
y = 2x – 2
Answer:

Question 23.
y = 2x – 1
y = x2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 23

Question 24.
y = x2 + x + 1
y = -x – 2
Answer:

Question 25.
y + 2x = 0
y = x2 + 4x – 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 25.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 25.2

Question 26.
y = 2x – 7
y + 5x = x2 – 2
Answer:

Question 27.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in solving the system of equations by graphing.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 27

Question 28.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Describe and correct the error in solving for one of the variables in the system.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 6
Answer:

In Exercises 29–32, use the table to describe the locations of the zeros of the quadratic function f.
Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 29

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 8
Answer:

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 31

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 10
Answer:

In Exercises 33–38, use the method in Example 4 to approximate the solution(s) of the system to the nearest thousandth.
Question 33.
y = x2 + 2x + 3
y = 3x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 33.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 33.2

Question 34.
y = 2x + 5
y = x2 – 3x + 1
Answer:

Question 35.
y = 2(4)x – 1
y = 3x2 + 8x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 35.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 35.2

Question 36.
y = -x2 – 4x – 4
y = -5x – 2
Answer:

Question 37.
y = -x2 – x + 5
y = 2x2 + 6x – 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 37.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 37.2

Question 38.
y = 2x2 + x – 8
y = x2 – 5
Answer:

In Exercises 39–46, solve the equation. Round your solution(s) to the nearest hundredth.
Question 39.
3x + 1 = x2 + 7x – 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 39

Question 40.
-x2 + 2x = -2x + 5
Answer:

Question 41.
x2 – 6x + 4 = -x2 – 2x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 41

Question 42.
2x2 + 8x + 10 = -x2 – 2x + 5
Answer:

Question 43.
-4 (\(\frac{1}{2}\))x = -x2 – 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 43

Question 44.
1.5(2)x – 3 = -x2 + 4x
Answer:

Question 45.
8x-2 + 3 = 2 (\(\frac{3}{2}\))x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 45

Question 46.
-0.5(4)x = 5x – 6
Answer:

Question 47.
COMPARING METHODS
Solve the system in Exercise 37 using substitution. Compare the exact solutions to the approximated solutions.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 47.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 47.2

Question 48.
COMPARING METHODS
Solve the system in Exercise 38 using elimination. Compare the exact solutions to the approximated solutions.
Answer:

Question 49.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The attendances y for two movies can be modeled by the following equations, where x is the number of days since the movies opened.
y = -x2 + 35x + 100 Movie A
y = -5x + 275 Movie B
When is the attendance for each movie the same?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 49

Question 50.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You and a friend are driving boats on the same lake. Your path can be modeled by the equation y = -x2 – 4x – 1, and your friend’s path can be modeled by the equation y = -2x + 8. Do your paths cross each other? If so, what are the coordinates of the point(s) where the paths meet?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 11
Answer:

Question 51.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The arch of a bridge can be modeled by y = -0.002x2 + 1.06x, where x is the distance (in meters) from the left pylons and y is the height (in meters) of the arch above the water. The road can be modeled by the equation y = 52. To the nearest meter, how far from the left pylons are the two points where the road intersects the arch of the bridge?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 51

Question 52.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend says that a system of equations consisting of a linear equation and a quadratic equation can have zero, one, two, or infinitely many solutions. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer:

COMPARING METHODS In Exercises 53 and 54, solve the system of equations by (a) graphing, (b) substitution, and (c) elimination. Which method do you prefer? Explain your reasoning.
Question 53.
y = 4x + 3
y = x2 + 4x – 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 53.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 53.2

Question 54.
y = x2 – 5
y = -x + 7
Answer:

Question 55.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The function y = -x2 + 65x + 256 models the number y of subscribers to a website, where x is the number of days since the website launched. The number of subscribers to a competitor’s website can be modeled by a linear function. The websites have the same number of subscribers on Days 1 and 34.
a. Write a linear function that models the number of subscribers to the competitor’s website.
b. Solve the system to verify the function from part (a).
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 55.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 55.2

Question 56.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The diagram shows the graphs of two equations in a system that has one solution.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 13
a. How many solutions will the system have when you change the linear equation to y = c + 2?
b. How many solutions will the system have when you change the linear equation to y = c – 2?
Answer:

Question 57.
WRITING
A system of equations consists of a quadratic equation whose graph opens up and a quadratic equation whose graph opens down. Describe the possible numbers of solutions of the system. Sketch examples to justify your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 57

Question 58.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The population of a country is 2 million people and increases by 3% each year. The country’s food supply is sufficient to feed 3 million people and increases at a constant rate that feeds 0.25 million additional people each year.
a. When will the country first experience a food shortage?
b. The country doubles the rate at which its food supply increases. Will food shortages still occur? If so, in what year?
Answer:

Question 59.
ANALYZING GRAPHS
Use the graphs of the linear and quadratic functions.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 14
a. Find the coordinates of point A.
b. Find the coordinates of point B.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 59.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 59.2

Question 60.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Is it possible for a system of two quadratic equations to have exactly three solutions? exactly four solutions? Explain your reasoning. (Hint: Rotations of the graphs of quadratic equations still represent quadratic equations.)
Answer:

Question 61.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Solve the system of three equations shown.
y = 2x – 8
y = x2 – 4x – 3
y = -3(2)x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 61

Question 62.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Find the point(s) of intersection, if any, of the line y = -x – 1 and the circle x2 + y2 = 41.
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Graph the system of linear inequalities.
Question 63.
y > 2x
y > -x + 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 63

Question 64.
y ≥ 4x + 1
y ≤ 7
Answer:

Question 65.
y – 3 ≤ -2x
y + 5 < 3x Answer: Question 66. x + y > -6
2y ≤ 3x + 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 65

Graph the function. Describe the domain and range.
Question 67.
y = 3x2 + 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 67

Question 68.
y = -x2 – 6x
Answer:

Question 69.
y = -2x2 + 12x – 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 a 69

Question 70.
y = 5x2 + 10x – 3
Answer:

Solving Quadratic Equations Performance Task: Form Matters

9.4–9.6 What Did You Learn?

Core Vocabulary
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 15

Core Concepts
Section 9.4
Completing the Square, p. 506

Section 9.5
Quadratic Formula, p. 516
Interpreting the Discriminant, p. 518

Section 9.6
Solving Systems of Nonlinear Equations, p. 526

Mathematical Practices
Question 1.
How does your answer to Exercise 74 on page 514 help create a shortcut when solving some quadratic equations by completing the square?
Answer:

Question 2.
What logical progression led you to your answer in Exercise 55 on page 522?
Answer:

Question 3.
Compare the methods used to solve Exercise 53 on page 532. Discuss the similarities and differences among the methods.
Answer:

Performance Task Form Matters

Each form of a quadratic function has its pros and cons. Using one form, you can easily find the vertex, but the zeros are more difficult to find. Using another form, you can easily find the y-intercept, but the vertex is more difficult to find. Which form would you use in different situations? How can you convert one form into another? To explore the answers to these questions and more, go to.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answer Key Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations 9.6 16

Solving Quadratic Equations Chapter Review

9.1 Properties of Radicals (pp. 479–488)

Simplify the expression.
Question 1.
\(\sqrt{72 p^{7}}\)
Answer:

Question 2.
\(\sqrt{\frac{45}{7 y}}\)
Answer:

Question 3.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{125 x^{11}}{4}}\)
Answer:

Question 4.
\(\frac{8}{\sqrt{6}+2}\)
Answer:

Question 5.
4\(\sqrt{3}\) + 5\(\sqrt{12}\)
Answer:

Question 6.
15\(\sqrt [ 3 ]{ 2 }\) – 2\(\sqrt [ 3 ]{ 54 }\)
Answer:

Question 7.
(3\(\sqrt{7}\) + 5)2
Answer:

Question 8.
\(\sqrt{6}\)(\(\sqrt{18}\) + \(\sqrt{8}\))
Answer:

9.2 Solving Quadratic Equations by Graphing (pp. 489–496)

Solve the equation by graphing
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations cr 9
Question 9.
x2 – 9x + 18 = 0
Answer:

Question 10.
x2 – 2x = -4
Answer:

Question 11.
-8x – 16 = x2
Answer:

Question 12.
The graph of f(x) = (x + 1)(x2 + 2x – 3) is shown. Find the zeros of f.
Answer:

Question 13.
Graph f(x) = x2 + 2x – 5. Approximate the zeros of f to the nearest tenth.
Answer:

9.3 Solving Quadratic Equations Using Square Roots (pp. 497–502)

Solve the equation using square roots. Round your solutions to the nearest hundredth, if necessary.
Question 14.
x2 + 5 = 17
Answer:

Question 15.
x2 – 14 = -14
Answer:

Question 16.
(x + 2)2 = 64
Answer:

Question 17.
4x2 + 25 = -75
Answer:

Question 18.
(x – 1)2 = 0
Answer:

Question 19.
19 = 30 – 5x2
Answer:

9.4 Solving Quadratic Equations by Completing the Square (pp. 505–514)

Solve the equation by completing the square. Round your solutions to the nearest hundredth, if necessary.
Question 20.
x2 + 6x – 40 = 0
Answer:

Question 21.
x2 + 2x + 5 = 4
Answer:

Question 22.
2x2 – 4x = 10
Answer:

Determine whether the quadratic function has a maximum or minimum value. Then find the value.
Question 23.
y = -x2 + 6x – 1
Answer:

Question 24.
f(x) = x2 + 4x + 11
Answer:

Question 25.
y = 3x2 – 24x + 15
Answer:

Question 26.
The width w of a credit card is 3 centimeters shorter than the length ℓ. The area is 46.75 square centimeters. Find the perimeter.
Answer:

9.5 Solving Quadratic Equations Using the Quadratic Formula (pp. 515–524)

Solve the equation using the Quadratic Formula. Round your solutions to the nearest tenth, if necessary.
Question 27.
x2+ 2x – 15 = 0
ans;

Question 28.
2x2 – x + 8 = 16
Answer:

Question 29.
-5x2 + 10x = 5
ans;

Find the number of x-intercepts of the graph of the function.
Question 30.
y = -x2 + 6x – 9
Answer:

Question 31.
y = 2x2 + 4x + 8
Answer:

Question 32.
y = – \(\frac{1}{2}\)x2 + 2x
Answer:

9.6 Solving Nonlinear Systems of Equations (pp. 525–532)

Solve the system using any method.
Question 33.
y = x2 – 2x – 4
y = -5
Answer:

Question 34.
y = x2 – 9
y = 2x + 5
Answer:

Question 35.
y = 2(\(\frac{1}{2}\))x – 5
y = -x2 – x + 4
Answer:

Solving Quadratic Equations Chapter Test

Solve the equation using any method. Explain your choice of method.
Question 1.
x2 – 121 = 0
Answer:

Question 2.
x2 – 6x = 10
Answer:

Question 3.
-2x2 + 3x + 7 = 0
Answer:

Question 4.
x2 – 7x + 12 = 0
Answer:

Question 5.
5x2 + x – 4 = 0
Answer:

Question 6.
(4x + 3)2 = 16
Answer:

Question 7.
Describe how you can use the method of completing the square to determine whether the function f(x) = 2x2 + 4x – 6 can be represented by the graph shown.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations ct 7
Answer:

Question 8.
Write an expression involving radicals in which a conjugate can be used to simplify the expression.
Answer:

Solve the system using any method.
Question 9.
y = x2 – 4x – 2
y = -4x + 2
Answer:

Question 10.
y = -5x2 + x – 1
y = -7
Answer:

Question 11.
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)(4)x + 1
y = x2 – 2x + 4
Answer:

Question 12.
A skier leaves an 8-foot-tall ramp with an initial vertical velocity of 28 feet per second. The function h = -16t2 + 28t + 8 represents the height h (in feet) of the skier after t seconds. The skier has a perfect landing. How many points does the skier earn?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations ct 12
Answer:

Question 13.
An amusement park ride lifts seated riders 265 feet above the ground. The riders are then dropped and experience free fall until the brakes are activated 105 feet above the ground. The function h = -16t2 + 265 represents the height h (in feet) of the riders t seconds after they are dropped. How long do the riders experience free fall? Round your solution to the nearest hundredth.
Answer:

Question 14.
Write an expression in simplest form that represents the area of the painting shown.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Answers Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations ct 14
Answer:

Question 15.
Explain how you can determine the number of times the graph of y = 5x2 – 10x + 5 intersects the x-axis without graphing or solving an equation.
Answer:

Question 16.
Consider the quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 Find values of a, b, and c so that the graph of its related function has (a) two x x-intercepts, (b) one x-intercepts.and (c) no x-intercepts.
Answer:

Question 17.
The numbers y of two types of bacteria after x hours are represented by the models below.
y = 3x2 + 8x + 20 Type A
y = 27x + 60 Type B
a. When are there 400 Type A bacteria?
b. When are the number of Type A and Type B bacteria the same?
c. When are there more Type A bacteria than Type B? When are there more Type B bacteria than Type A? Use a graph to support your answer.
Answer:

Solving Quadratic Equations Cumulative Assessment

Question 1.
The graphs of four quadratic functions are shown. Determine whether the discriminants of the equations formed by setting each function equal to zero are positive, negative, or zero.f(x) = 0, g(x) = 0, h(x) = 0, and j(x) = 0
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations ca 1
Answer:

Question 2.
The function f(x) = a(1.08)x represents the total amount of money (in dollars) in Account A after x years. The function g(x) = 600(b)x represents the total amount of money (in dollars) in Account B after x years. Fill in values for a and b so that each statement is true.
a. When a = ____ and b = ____, Account B has a greater initial amount and increases at a faster rate than Account A.
b. When a = ____ and b = ____, Account B has a lesser initial amount than Account A but increases at a faster rate than Account A.
c. When a = ____ and b = ____, Account B and Account A have the same initial amount, and Account B increases at a slower rate than Account A.
Answer:

Question 3.
Your friend claims to be able to find the radius r of each figure, given the surface area S. Do you support your friend’s claim? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations ca 3
Answer:

Question 4.
The tables represent the numbers of items sold at a concession stand on days with different average temperatures. Determine whether the data represented by each table show a positive, a negative, or no correlation.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations ca 4
Answer:

Question 5.
Which graph shows exponential growth?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations ca 5
Answer:

Question 6.
Which statement best describes the solution(s) of the system of equations?
y = x2 + 2x – 8
y = 5x + 2
A. The graphs intersect at one point, (-2, -8). So, there is one solution.
B. The graphs intersect at two points, (-2, -8) and (5, 27). So, there are two solutions.
C. The graphs do not intersect. So, there is no solution.
D. The graph of y = x2 + 2x – 8 has two x-intercepts. So, there are two solutions.
Answer:

Question 7.
Which expressions are in simplest form?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 1 Solutions Chapter 9 Solving Quadratic Equations ca 7
Answer:

Question 8.
The domain of the function shown is all integers in the interval -3 < x ≤ 3. Find all the ordered pairs that are solutions of the equation y = f(x).
f(x) = 4x – 5
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6

Make your learning fun and interesting with the help of Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication Answer Key. Here students can find the solutions for all the questions in pdf format. So, students who are searching for the Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 6th Chapter Relate Area to Multiplication Solutions can download the pdf for free of cost.

Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication

Students must have a look at the topics of Relate Area to Multiplication chapter before going to start their preparation. The various lessons included in BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication are Understand Area, Measure Area Using Standard Units, Find Area by Multiplying, Area and the Distributive Property, and Find Areas of More Shapes.

By solving the questions of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication, you can know how to use the formula for suitable problems. Hence make use of the below links and learn the fundaments from the elementary level itself.

Lesson: 1 Understand Area

Lesson: 2 Measure Area Using Standard Units

Lesson: 3 Find Area by Multiplying

Lesson: 4 Area and the Distributive Property

Lesson: 5 Find Areas of More Shapes

Performance Task

Lesson 6.1 Understand Area

Explore and Grow

Try to cover the rectangle with the given number of color tiles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 1
How many color tiles do you need to completely cover the rectangle with no gaps or overlaps?
____ color tiles
Answer:
6 + 10 + 8 = 24 tiles are needed to cover the rectangle

Precision
Why is it important to line up the tiles side to side?
Think and Grow: Counting to Find Area

Answer:
It is important to line up tiles side to side with out gaps so that we can count tiles to find area of the shape.
Area is the amount of surface a shape covers. The area of a unit square is 1 square unit.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 2
12 unit squares cover the rectangle with no gaps or overlaps. So, the area of the rectangle is 12 square units.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 3

Example
Find the area of the rectangle. Count the unit squares needed to cover the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 4.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 4
___ unit squares cover the rectangle.
So, the area is ___ square units.

Answer:
18 unit squares cover the rectangle.
So, the area is 18 square units.

Explanation:
There are 3 rows with 6 color tiles each in the grid
6+6+6=18.
18 unit squares cover the rectangle.
So, The area is 18 square units.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the area of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 5
___ unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is ___ square units.
Answer:
16 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 16 square units.

Explanation:
There are 4 color tiles in row and there are 4 such rows of color tiles in the shape.
So, 4+4+4+4=16
Therefore 16 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 16 square units.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 6
___ unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is ___ square units.

Answer:
10 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 10 square units.

Explanation:
There are 5 color tiles in a row and there are 2 such rows in the shape.
So, 5×2=10
Therefore
10 unit squares cover the shape.
So, The area is 10 unit squares.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area of the shape.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 7
___ unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is ___ square units.

Answer:
16 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 16 square units.

Explanation:
So, There are 8 color tiles in a row and there are 2 such rows in the shape.
8×2=16
Therefore 16 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 16 unit squares.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 8
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area =10 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 10 color boxes.
So, the area of the given shape is 10 square units.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 9
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 11 square units.

Explanation:

In the above grid there are 11 color boxes
so, the area of the shape is 11 square units.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 10
Area = ___ square units.
Answer:
Area =18 square units.

Explanation:
There are 2 color boxes in first row and there are 4 color boxes in the following 4 rows.
So, 2+4+4+4+4=18
Therefore the area of the shape is 18 square units.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 11
Area = square units.
Answer:
Area = 10 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 2 color boxes in the first row ,last row and 3 color boxes each in middle two rows.
So,2+3+3+2=10
Therefore the area of the shape is 10 square units.

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 12
Newton uses 4 color tiles to cover the rectangle. He says the area is 4 square units. Is he correct? Explain.
Answer:
No, Newton is not correct. To find the area of the shape using tiles they must be arranged side by side without any gaps or overlaps. In the above picture there are gaps between the color tiles.

Question 9.
Open-Ended
Draw a shape that has an area of 16 square units
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 13
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Part of a zoo map is shown. What is the area of the lion exhibit?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 14
The lion exhibit is ___ square units.

Answer:
The lion exhibit is  50 square units.

Explanation:
In the above zoo map the area of lion exhibit is represented using yellow colored tiles.
There are 10 yellow colored tiles in a row and there are 5 such rows of yellow color tiles.
So,10×5=50
Therefore the area of the lion exhibit in the zoo is 50 square units.

Show and Grow

Use the field day map to answer the question.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 15

Question 10.
What is the area of the relay race section?

Answer:
Area of Relay Race section is 23 square units.

Explanation:
In the above field day map Relay Race section is represented using blue colored tiles.
There are 3 tiles in first row and 10 tiles in the following two rows.
So,3+10+10=23
Therefore the area of the Relay Race section is 23 square units.

Question 11.
Which area is greater, the ring toss section or the relay race section? Explain.

Answer:
The ring toss section is greater than relay race section.

Explanation:
The area of ring toss section is 30 square units and the area of the relay race section is 23 square units.so the ring toss section is greater than relay race section.

Understand Area Homework & practice 6.1

Find the area of the shape.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 16
___ unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is ___ square units.

Answer:
18 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 18 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there is 1 blue color tile in first row followed by 3 tiles in the next,5 tiles in the later and 9 tiles at the end.
So,1+3+5+9=18
18 color tiles cover the area.
Therefore the area of the given shape is 18 square units.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 17
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 20 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 4 red colored tiles in a row and there are 5 such rows.
So,4×5=20
20 tiles cover the shape.
Therefore the area of the given shape is 20 square units.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 18
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 17 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 17 purple colored tiles.
Therefore the area of the given shape is 17 square units.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 19
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 14 square units.

Explanation:
There are 6 yellow colored tiles in 2 rows each followed  by 2 more tiles in the third row.
So,6+6+2=14
14 tiles cover the shape.
Therefore the area of the shape is 14 square units.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 20
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 11 square units.

Explanation:
There are 3 green colored boxes in the first and third row of the above shape and 5 boxes in the middle row.
So,3+5+3=11
11 color tiles cover the shape.
Therefore the area of the shape is 11 square units.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 21
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area =12 square units.

Explanation:
There are 6 color tiles each in two rows.
So,6+6=12
12 color tiles cover the shape
Therefore the area of the shape is 12 square units.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 22
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 20 square units.

Explanation:
There are 20 color tiles in the above grid.
So, the area of the shape is 20 square units.

Question 8.
Your friend says each shape has an area of 8 square units. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 23

Answer:
My friend is incorrect.

Explanation:
One of the shape in in the above grid has gaps.

Modeling Real Life
Use the amusement park map to answer the question.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 24
Answer:

Question 9.
What is the area of the food court section?

Answer:
The area of the food court is 51 square units.

Explanation:
There are 9 green tiles in first 2 rows each and 11 green tiles in the following 3 rows.
So,9+9+11+11+11=51
51 green tiles cover the food court area
Therefore the area of the food court is 51 square units.

Question 10.
Which area is greater, the kiddie land section or the picnic tables section? Explain.

Answer:
Area of kiddie land section is greater than area of picnic tables.

Explanation:
The kiddie land section is covered with 39 color tiles and the picnic tables section is covered with 35 color tiles.

Review & Refresh

Find the quotient.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 25
Answer:6
Explanation:(2×6=12)

Question 12
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 26
Answer:4
Explanation:(7×4=28)

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 27
Answer:9
Explanation:(6×9=54)

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 28
Answer:7
Explanation:(7×7=49)

Lesson 6.2 Measure Area Using Standard Units

Explore and Grow

Use the colored squares.
How many blue squares do you think it will take to cover the rectangle?
___ blue squares
How many red squares do you think it will take to cover the rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 29
Answer:

Find the area of the rectangle using the blue squares.
Area = ___ blue square units
Find the area of the rectangle using the red squares.
Area = ___ red square units
Answer:

Reasoning
Why is the number of blue squares needed to cover the rectangle different from the number of red squares needed?

Answer:
The number of blue squares needed to cover the rectangle is different from the number of red squares as sizes of the squares are different.

Think and Grow: Measuring Area Using Standard Units

You can measure area using different standard units. Here are some standard units of length and area.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 31
Unit squares can represent different standard units.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 32
Each side is 1 unit. The area is 1 square unit.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 33
Each Side represents 1 inch. The area is 1 square inch.

Example
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 34
Find the area of the rectangle
___ unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents
___________________
So, the area is _____

Answer:
In the above grid there are 3 yellow colored tiles in a row and there are 4 such rows.
So,3×4=12
12 unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square meter.
So, the area is 12 square meters.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 35.1
Find the area of the shape.
___ unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents
________
So, the area is ____

Answer:
In the above grid there are 7 color tiles.
7 unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square foot.
So, the area is 7 square feet.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area of the shape.
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 35
Area = ____
Answer:

There are 14 color tiles in the above grid.
14 unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square foot.
So, the area is 14 square feet.

 

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 36
Area = ___

Answer:
There are 16 color tiles in the above grid.
16 unit squares cover the area.
Each unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
So, the area is 16 square centimeters.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 37
Area = ____

Answer:
There are 18 color tiles in the grid
18 square units cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square inch.
So, the area is 18 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 38
Area = ___

Answer:
There are 8 color boxes in the above grid.
8 unit squares cover the shape.
Each unit square represents 1 square meter.
So, the area is 8 square meters.

Question 6.
Number Sense
Which rectangle has an area of 12 square inches?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 39

Answer:
In the above grid  the green rectangle has 12 colored tiles, Yellow rectangle has 15 colored tiles and the orange rectangle also has 12 colored tiles but the unit square representation of orange rectangle is square meter. As green rectangle unit square representation is square inch, Green colored rectangle has the area of 12 square inches.

Question 7.
Reasoning
Is the area of a blanket more likely to be 30 square feet or 30 square centimeters? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 40
Answer:
Centimeter is the smaller when compared to feet. usually we have blankets in bigger size so that a person fits in to it.
Therefore the area of the blanket will more likely be 30 square feet.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Whose puzzle has a greater area?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 41

Answer:
Newton’s puzzle is covered with 48 tiles and Descartes puzzle is covered with 40 tiles.
Area of Newton’s puzzle is 48 square inches and area of  Descartes’s puzzle is 40 square inches.
48>40.
Therefore Newton’s puzzle has the greater area.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Compare the area of Newton’s puzzle shown above to the area of your friend’s puzzle. Whose puzzle has a greater area?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 42

Answer:
In the above given puzzle there are 49 colored tiles .
The area of my friend’s puzzle is 49 square inches.
The area of Newton’s puzzle is 48 square inches.
48<49
Therefore Area of my friend’s puzzle is greater.

Question 9.
You want to weave a rectangular rug that has an area of 12 square feet. Draw and shade a rectangle to represent the rug.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 43

Answer:

Measure Area Using Standard Units  Homework & Practice 6.2

Find the area of the shape.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 44

Answer:
Area = 8 square centimeters

Explanation:
There are 8 colored unit squares in the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
So, area is 8 square centimeters.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 45
Area = ___

Answer:
Area = 15 square meters

Explanation:
There are 15 colored unit squares in the above rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square meter.
So, area is 15 square meters.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 46
Area = ___

Answer:
Area = 16 square feet

Explanation:
There are 16 color unit squares in the above grid.
Each unit square represents 1 square foot.
So, area of the shape is 16 square feet.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 47
Area = ___

Answer:
Area = 20 square centimeters

Explanation:
There are 20 colored unit squares in above grid.
Each unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
So, area of the shape is 20 square centimeters.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 48
Area = ___

Answer:
Area = 10 square inches

Explanation:
There are 10 colored unit squares in the above grid.
Each unit square represents 1 square inch.
So, area of the shape is 10 square inches.

Question 6.
Precision
Your friend says the area of the shape is 13. What is wrong with her answer?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 49

Answer:
My friend’s answer wrong as he/she didn’t mention the units of the area.
There are 13 color unit squares in the above grid.
Each unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
Therefore area is 13 square centimeters.

Question 7.
Number Sense
Find the area of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 50

Answer:
Area = 32 square feet

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 32 color unit squares.
Each unit square represents 1 square foot.
Therefore area of the given shape is 32 square feet.

 

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Compare the areas of your bookmark and your friend’s bookmark. Whose bookmark has a greater area?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 51

Answer:
My book mark has 12 colored unit squares and my friend’s book mark has 5 colored unit squares.
So area of my book mark is 12 square inches and my friend’s book mark is 5 square inches.
12>5
So, area of my book mark is greater.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Find the product of 4 × 5.
Number of jumps: ___
Size of jumps: ___
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 52
4 × 5 = ___

Answer:
Number of jumps =4
Size of jumps=5
4×5=20.

Lesson 6.3 Find Area by Multiplying

Explore and Grow

Write an equation for the array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 1

Answer: 2×3=6

Cover the rectangle with color tiles. Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 2
Answer:

Structure
How can you use an array to find the area of rectangle?

Answer:
We can count the number of unit squares in a row and number of unit squares in a column and note them in the form of an array.
The answer of the equation will be the area of the rectangle.

Think and Grow: Find Area by Multiplying

Example
Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 3
One Way:
Count the unit squares to find the area.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 4
There are ___ unit squares

Another Way:
Think of the rectangle as an array.
Then use repeated addition or multiplication to find the area.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 5
3 rows of ____ unit squares
7 + 7 + 7 = ____
3 × 7 = _____
So, the area is _____.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 6

Answer:
There are 5 rows of 2 unit squares in each row.
So, 5 rows of 2 unit squares
2+2+2+2+2=10
Area=10 unit squares

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 7

Answer:
6ft×4ft=24ft
Area =24 square feet.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area of the rectangle
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 8
____ × _____ = ____
Area = _____

Answer:
There are 4 rows of 1 unit square in each row.so,
4×1=4
Area=4 square centimeter.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 9
____ × _____ = ____
Area = _____

Answer:
There are 5 rows with 3 unit squares in each roe.so,
5×3=15
Area =15 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 10
___ × ____ = ____
Area = _____

Answer:
7ft×6ft=42ft
Area=42 square feet

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 11
____ × _____ = ____
Area = ______

Answer:
8m×4m=32m
Area=32 square meters.

Question 7.
Open-Ended
Draw and label two different rectangles that each have an area of 12 square meters.

Answer:

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Explain how to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 12

Answer:
We can find area of the given rectangle by counting the number of square units in a row and in a column and multiplication of both is the area of the rectangle.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Space Poster Your rectangular animal poster is 4 feet long and 1 foot wide. Which poster has a greater area, your animal poster or your space poster?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 13
Understand the problem:
Make a plan:

Solve:
Area of my  animal poster is
4ft×1ft=4 square feet.
Area of my space poster is
3ft×2ft=6 square feet.
4<6
So, my space poster has a greater area.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Descartes’s rectangular tablet is 10 inches long and 7 inches wide. Whose tablet has a greater area, Newton’s tablet or Descartes’s?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 14

Answer:
Area of Newton’s table is
9in.×6in.=54 square inches.
Area of Descartes’s table is
10in.×7in.=70 square inches.
54<70
Therefore Descartes’s table has greater area.

Question 10.
Your friend paints a rectangular tile that is 8 inches long and 4 inches wide. You paint a square tile that is 6 inches long. Whose tile has a greater area?

Answer:
Area of rectangular tile is
8in.×4in.=32 square inches.
Area of square tile is
6in.×6in.=36 square inches.
32<36
So, square tile has greater area.

 

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
A sign has an area of 18 square feet. The sign is 6 feet long. How wide is the sign?

Answer:
There is a sign with an area of 18 square feet and length of 6 feet.
We have to find width of sign
Area=length ×width
18=6×width Or 6×width=18
Calculate and check 6 table 6×1=6,6×2=12,6×3=18
Therefore width of the sign is 3 feet.

 

Find Area by Multiplying Homework & Practice 6.3

Find the area of the rectangle
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 15
____ × ____ = ____
Area = _____

Answer:
There are 4 rows with 4 unit squares in each row.
4×4=16
Area =16 square feet.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 16
____ × _____ = _____
Area = _____

Answer:
There are 3 rows with 8 unit squares in each row.
3×8=24
Area=24 square centimeters.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 17
____ × _____ = _____
Area = _____

Answer:
6 in.×2 in.=12
Area=12 square inches.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 18
____ × _____ = _____
Area = _____

Answer:
7 m×4 m=28
Area=28 square meters.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing side length.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 19

Answer:
Given Area of rectangle =30 square centimeters
Length =10 square meters
We have to find the length of the other side called breadth or width
Area= length ×width
30=10×width or 10×width=30
Count 10 table10×1=10,10×2=20,10×3=30
Therefore width or the length of the other side is 3 square meters.

Question 6.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says he only needs the length of one side of a square to find the area. Is he correct? Explain.

Answer:
Yes he is correct. A square has sides with equal lengths on all sides.so length of one side is sufficient to measure the area of a square.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
A picture of your friend is 6 inches long and 4 inches wide. Which picture has a greater area, the picture of your friend or the picture of your pets?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 20

Answer:
Area of my friend’s picture is
6 in.×4 in.=24 square inches.
Area of my pets picture is
7 in.×5 in.=35 square inches.
24<35
Therefore pets picture has greater area.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
A city street parking spot has an area of 72 square feet. The parking spot is 9 feet long. How wide is the parking spot?

Answer:
The city street parking spot has an area of 72 square feet. The length of the parking spot is 9 feet
We have to find the width of the parking spot.
Area =length × breadth
72=9×width or 9×width=72
So 9×1=9,9×2=18,———9×8=72
Therefore Width of the parking spot is 8 feet.

Review & Refresh

Use the Distributive Property to fill in the blanks
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 21

Answer:
9×3= 9×(2+1)
= (9×2)+(9×1)
= 18+9
= 27

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 22

Answer:
6×7 = (5+1)×7
= (5×7)+(1×7)
= 35+7
= 42

Lesson 6.4 Area and the Distributive Property

Explore and Grow

Find the area of the rectangle two different ways.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 1

Structure
How does the area of the large rectangle compare to the areas of the smaller rectangles? What property does this show?

Answer:
The area of larger rectangle is divided in two smaller rectangles so the sum of the areas of smaller rectangles will be equal to area of larger rectangle.

Think and Grow: Area and the Distributive Property

You can use the Distributive Property to find the area of a rectangle. First, break apart the large rectangle into smaller rectangles. Then find the sum of the areas of the smaller rectangles.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 2

Example
Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 3
So, the area is _____.

Show and Grow

The area  of  large rectangle=sum of area of smaller rectangles
In the above grid there are 6 rows and 9 columns in the larger rectangle and this rectangle is divided into two smaller rectangles with 5 and 4 columns each.

Therefore
6×9=6×(5+4)
6×9=(6×5)+(6×4)
6×9=30+24
6×9=54
So, the area is 54 square inches.

Question 1.
Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 4

Answer:
In the above rectangle there are 4 rows and 5 columns. This is divided  into smaller rectangles with 3 and 2 columns each.
Therefore
4×5=4×(3+2)
4×5=(4×3)+(4×2)
4×5=12+8
4×5=20
Area=20 square centimeters.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 5

Answer:
There are 6 columns in the above large rectangle so the columns of  smaller rectangles are 4 and
2 columns each.
Therefore
7×6=7×(4+2)
7×6=(7×4)+(7×2)
7×6=28+14
7×6=42
Area=42 square meters.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 6

Answer:
Here we divide the rectangle using rows.
There are 3 rows in the above rectangle. so, the rows of the smaller rectangles are 2 and 1 each.
3×4=(2+1)×4
3×4=(2×4)+(1×4)
3×4=8+4
3×4=12
Area=12 square feet

Question 4.
Structure
Which equation represents the area of the rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 7
5 × 7 = 5 × (6 + 1) = (5 × 6) + (5 × 1)
5 × 8 = 5 × (6 + 2) = (5 × 6) + (5 × 2)
5 × 7 = 5 × (2 + 5) = (5 × 2) + (5 × 5)

Answer:
Form the above grid we can understand that the large rectangle has 7 columns is divided into two smaller rectangles with 2 and 5 columns each. Therefore the 3rd equation represents the area of the rectangle.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!Explain how to use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 8

Explanation:
To find the area of the rectangle using distributive property we have to divide the length of the rectangle into two and make two small rectangles.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Descartes cuts 1 rectangular piece of construction paper into2 rectangles. One rectangle is 8 inches wide and 10 inches long. The other rectangle is 8 inches wide and2 inches long. What were the dimensions and total area of the paper before it was cut?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 9
Draw a picture:
Multiplication equation:
Distributive Property:

The piece of paper was _____ inches wide and ____ inches long before it was cut.
The total area of the piece of paper was _____ square inches.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
You cut 1 rectangular piece of fabric into 2 rectangles. One rectangle is 3 feet wide and 6 feet long. The other rectangle is3 feet wide and 9 feet long. What were the dimensions and total area of the fabric before it was cut?
Answer:

The piece of paper was 3 feet wide and 15 long before it was cut.
The total area of the piece of paper was 45 square feets.

Area of rectangle 1: 3×6=18 square feet
Area of rectangle 2: 3×9=27 square feet.
Area of paper is area of rectangle 1+2=18+27=45 square feet

Area and the Distributive Property Homework & Practice 6.4

Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 10

Answer:
In the above large rectangle there are 9 rows so, using Distributive Property we will find the area of large rectangle by dividing it  into two smaller rectangles of 5 and 4 rows each.
9×4=(5+4)×4
9×4=(5×4)+(4×4)
9×4=20+16
9×4=36
Therefore Area=36 square feet.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 11

Answer:
In the above large rectangle there are 5 columns so, using Distributive Property we will find the area of the large rectangle by dividing it into two smaller rectangles of 3 and 2 columns each.
6×5=6×(3+2)
6×5=(6×3)+(6×2)
6×5=18+12
6×5=30
Area=30 square centimeters.

Structure
Draw rectangle for the expression
Question 3.
6 × (4 + 5)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 12
Answer:

6x(4+5)= (6×4)+(6×5)
=24+30
=54.

 

Question 4.
(7 + 1) × 3
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 13
Answer:

 

(7+1)x3=(7×3)+(1×3)
= 21+3
=24

Question 5.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which is not a way to break apart the rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 14
5 × (4 + 4)
5 × (4 + 1)
(4 + 1) × 8
(2 + 3) × 8

Answer:
5×(4+1) is not a way to break apart the given rectangle as the columns given in the rectangle are 8 and the equation shows only 5 columns.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You cut a rectangular piece of wrapping paper into2 rectangles. One rectangle is 10 inches wide and 6 inches long. The other rectangle is 10 inches wide and 5 inches long. What werethe dimensions and the total area of the wrapping paper before it was cut?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 15

Answer:
As we know that the area of the larger rectangle is the sum of the areas of the smaller rectangles. So the areas of 2 rectangles are
Rectangle 1: 10 in. ×6 in.=60 square inches.
Rectangle 2: 10 in. ×5 in.=50 square inches.
Therefore Total Area=110(60+50) square inches.

Review & Refresh

Write the fact family for the numbers.
Question 7.
3, 8, 24
___ × ____ = _____
___ × ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____

Answer:
Fact family of the numbers  3,8,24 is given below.
3×8=24
8×3=42
24÷3=8
24÷8=3

Question 8.
4, 9, 36
___ × ____ = _____
___ × ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____

Answer:
Fact family of the numbers 4,9,36 is given below.
4×9=36
9×4=36
36÷4=9
36÷9=4

Question 8.
2, 7, 14
___ × ____ = _____
___ × ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____

Answer:
Fact family of the numbers 2,7,14 is given below.
2×7=14
7×2=14
14÷2=7
14÷7=2

Lesson 6.5 Find Areas of More Shapes

Explore and Grow

Break apart the shape into two rectangles. Color each rectangle a different color. Find the area of each rectangle. Then find the total area of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 1
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle 1: _____ × ____ = _____ square inches
Rectangle 2: _____ × ____ = ______ square inches
Total Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square inches

Answer:
We have broken the shape into two rectangles
Rectangle 1:3×10=30 square inches
Rectangle 2: 5×7  =35 square inches
Total Area of Shape: 30+35=75 square inches.

Reasoning
Break apart the shape into two different rectangles and find the total area. What do you notice? Why is this true?

Answer:
When we broke apart the shape into two rectangles we noticed that the counting of rows and columns or units squares became possible. yes it is right to break the shape to find the area.

Think and Grow: Find Areas of More Shapes

Example
Find the area of the shape
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 2

One Way:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 3
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle A: 5 × 4 = _____ square feet
Rectangle B: 2 × 4 = ______ square feet
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square feet

Another Way:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 4
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle A: 3 × 4 = _____ square feet
Rectangle B: 2 × 8 = ______ square feet
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square feet

Answer:
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle A:3×4=12 square feet
Rectangle B:2×8=16 square feet
Area of the shape:12+16=28 square feet.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the area of the shape
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 5
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle A: _____ × ____ = _____ square meters
Rectangle B: _____ × ____ = ______ square meters
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square meters

Answer:


Rectangle A:3×4=12 square meters
Rectangle B:4×2=8 square meters
Area of shape:12+8=20 square meters.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area of the shape
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 6
Areas of Rectangle A: _____ × ____ = _____ square inches
Areas of Rectangle B: _____ × ____ = ______ square inches
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square inches

Answer:


Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 3 rows and 5 columns 2nd rectangle with 2 rows and 7 columns
Area of Rectangle A:3×5=15 square inches
Area of Rectangle B:2×7=14 square inches
Area of shape:15+14=29 square inches.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 7
Area = _____

Answer:

Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 2 rows and 6 columns 2nd rectangle with 3 rows and 3 columns
Area of Rectangle 1: 2×6=12 square centimeters
Area of Rectangle 2: 3×3=9 square centimeters
Area of shape: 12+9=21 square centimeters.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 8
Area = ____

Answer:


Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 1 row and 6 columns 2nd rectangle with 3 rows and 4 columns
Area of Rectangle 1: 1×6=6 square inches
Area of Rectangle 2: 3×4=12 square inches
Area of shape: 6+12=18 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 9
Area = ____

Answer:


Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 4 rows and 5 columns 2nd rectangle with 6 rows and 2 columns
Area Of Rectangle 1:4×5=20 square feet
Area of Rectangle 2:6×2=12 square feet
Area of shape : 20+12=32 square feet.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 10
Area = _____

Answer:


Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 3 rows and 8 columns 2nd rectangle with 2 rows and 5 columns
Area of Rectangle 1:3×8=24 square meters
Area of Rectangle 2:2×5=10 square meters
Area of shape:24+10=34 square meters.

Question 7.
YOU BE THE ANSWER
Your friend says there is only one way to break apart the shape. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 11

Answer:
No my friend is correct if we break the shape in any other way we will not get 2 rectangles.we may get 1 square and 1 rectangle.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton uses square tiles to make the design. Each tile is 2 inches long. What is the area of the design? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 12

Answer:
Given: Each tile is 2 inches long and tile is square shape
Therefore area of each square tile is 2×2=4 square inches.
In the above shape we have 4 tiles
So, Area of shape = 4 × (area of tile) = 4 ×4=16 square inches.
Area=16 square inches.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

What is the area of the balcony?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 13

Answer:
The area of the balcony is 46 square feet

Explanation:
Area of Rectangle A:5×8=40 square feet , Area of Rectangle B:3×2=6 square feet
Area of the balcony:46 square feet

Show and Grow

Find the area of the miniature golf hole.
Question 9.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 14

Answer:
Area of Rectangle A:4×(8+6)=4×(14)=56 square feet
Area of Rectangle B:6×(10-4)=6×6=36 square feet
Area of the golf hole:56+36=92 square feet

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 15

Answer:
Area=52 square feet

Explanation:
To find area here we need to calculate the total area and subtract the middle area from it. Total shape Length =6+4=10 , width =2+3+2=7 , Area of total shape =10×7=70 square feet, Part to be subtracted length =3 ,width =6
Area =3×6=18 square feet
Therefore area of the shape =Total area-area of part to be subtracted
=70‐18=52 square feet.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
The floors of the classroom and closet have an area of 98 square meters. What is the area of the closet floor? Explain
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 16

Answer:
Area of closets =8 square meters.

Explanation:
Given here that total area is 98 square meters. As shown in the figure above area of class room is 9×10=90 square meters.
Therefore Area of closets = Total area – Area of class room
=98-90=8
Area of closets =8 square meters.

Find Areas of More Shapes Homework & Practice 6.5

Find the area of the shape
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 17
Areas of Rectangle A: _____ × ____ = _____ square feet
Areas of Rectangle B: _____ × ____ = ______ square feet
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square feet

Answer:


Area of Rectangle A:4×2=8 square feet
Area of Rectangle B:=1×7=7 square feet
Area of shape:=8+7=15 square feet.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 18
Area = ____

Answer:


Area of Rectangle A: 2×3=6 square meters
Area of Rectangle B: 3×6=18 square meters
Area of shape: 6+18=24 square meters.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 19
Area = _____

Answer:


Area of Rectangle A: 3×7=21 square feet
Area of Rectangle B: 2×3=6 square feet
Area of shape: 21+6=27 square feet.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 20
Area = _____

Answer:


Area of Rectangle A:2×6=12 square inches.
Area of Rectangle B:4×8=36 square inches.
Area of shape :12+36=48 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 21
Area = _____

Answer:


Area of square A:4×4=16 square centimeters
Area of square B:4×4=16 square centimeters
Area of shape:16+16=32 square centimeters.

Question 6.
Number Sense
Newton makes a design with squares. What is the total area of his design?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 22

Answer:
Area of blue square is 2×2=4 square meters
Area of yellow square is 4×4=16 square meters
Area of green square is 6×6=36 square meters
Therefore Area of shape=4+16+36=56 square meters

Question 7.
Precision
A landscaper sketches a design for a yard.How much greater is the area of the grass than the area of the rocks?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 23

Answer:
Area of rock is 3×4=12 square feet.
To find area of the grass we divide it into 2 rectangles with 3 rows, 7 columns and 6 rows and 3 columns.
Area=(3×7)+(7×6) =21+42=63.
Area of grass- area of rock=63‐12=51.
So, area of grass is 53 square feet more than area of rock.

Question 8.Modeling Real Life
What is the area of the counter top?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 24

Answer:
Divide the shape into 2 parts
1:8ft×3ft=24 square feet
2:6ft×2ft=12 square feet
Area of counter top = 21+12=33 square feet.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
The floors of the barn stall and feeding area havean area of 22 square meters. What is the area of the barn stall floor? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 25

Answer:
The total area of bran stall and feeding areas 22 square meters. Feeding area =3×2=6 square meters
The area of only barn stall floor =Total area ‐feeding area
=22‐6 = 16 square meters
Therefore area of barn stall floor is 16 square meters.

Review & Refresh

Complete the table.
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 26
Answer:

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 27
Answer:

Relate Area to Multiplication Performance Task

Question 1.
The map shows the top view of an obstacle course.
a. What is the area of the net?
b. What is the area of the hopscotch track?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 53
c. The area of the mud pit under the monkey bars is 10 square feet. What is the missing side length of the mud pit?
d. Each stepping-stone in the sandbox covers 1 square foot. What not is the area of the sandbox not covered with stones?
e. What is the area of just the grass?
Answer:

a.

Area of net=length ×width =3×2=6 square feet
Therefore area of net =6 square feet

b.

To find area of hopscotch track we have to find length of the track.
Total length of obstacle course is 10 ft
Length below the hopscotch= total length-length of sand box and net ie 10-4+3=3
Length above the hopscotch is 2 ft
Therefore Length of hopscotch =total length- length above and below the track=10-(2+3)=5ft
So, area of hopscotch course =5ft×1ft=5 square feet.

c.

Area of mud pit under the monkeys bars is 10 square feet.
Length of monkeys bars is 5ft
Length of the other side of monkeys bars is total area divided by length
Width of other side=10÷5=2
Therefore length of other side of mud pit is 2 feet.

d.

The total area of sand box is
8×2=16 square feet + 2×2=4 square feet
Area=20 square feet
As given in the question each sandbox covers 1 square foot of area.
As there are 7 sandboxes area of sandboxes is 7 square feet.
Therefore area of sandbox not covered with stones is 20-7 = 13 square feet.

e.

The area of just grass is the total area subtracted with area of all courses .
Total area=10×10= 100 square feet.
Area of net=6 square feet, Area of hopscotch =5 square feet, Area of monkeys bar=10 square feet, Area of sandbox = 20 square feet
Area of just grass= 100‐(6+5+10+20)=100‐41
Therefore area of just grass=59 square feet.

Question 2.
The obstacle course opens at 1 o’clock. It is half past 12. How many more minutes until the course opens?

Answer:
1 hour = 60 minutes, Half past 12 indicates 12:30
As Obstacle course opens at 1 o’ clock so, There are 30 more minutes until the course open.

Relate Area to Multiplication Activity

Area Roll and Conquer

Directions:

  1. Players take turns rolling two dice.
  2. On your turn, create a rectangle with the numbers on the dice as the side lengths. Your rectangle cannot cover another rectangle.
  3. Shade the rectangle in your color. Record the multiplication equation for the rectangle.
  4. If you cannot create a rectangle on the board, then you lose your turn. Play 10 rounds, if possible.
  5. The player with the greatest area covered wins!

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 54
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 55
Answer:

Relate Area to Multiplication Chapter Practice

6.1 Understand Area

Find the area of the shape.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 56
Area = ___ square units

Answer:
In the above grid there are 8 color tiles.
1 tile is equal to 1 square unit.
So, area =8 square units.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 57
Area = ___ square units

Answer:
In the above grid there are 15 color tiles.
1 tile is equal to 1 square unit.
So, area =15 square units.

6.2 Measure Area Using Standard Units

Find the area of the shape.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 58
Area = ___

Answer:
In the above grid there are 4 colored unit squares.
1 unit represents 1 square meter.
Therefore Area=4 square meters.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 59
Area = ___

Answer:
In the above grid there are 3 colored unit squares.
1 unit square represents 1 square inch.
Therefore Area=3 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 60
Area = ___

Answer:
In the above grid there are 30 colored unit squares.
1 unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
Therefore Area=30 square centimeters.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 61
Area = ___

Answer:
In the above grid there are 16 colored unit squares.
1 unit square represents 1 square foot.
Therefore Area=16 square feet.

6.3 Find Area by Multiplying

Question 7.
Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 62

Answer:
The above rectangle is 7ft long and 4 feet wide
So area of the rectangle is length ×breadth
7ft×4ft=28 square feet.
Therefore Area=28 square feet.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A textbook cover has an area of 80 square inches. The cover is 8 inches wide. How long is the cover?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 63

Answer:
Area of the book is 80 square inches and width is 8 inches, We have to find the length of the book
Area=length × width
So, 80=length ×8 or 8×length=80 square inches
Count 8 table: 8×1=8,8×2=16,——8×10=80.
Therefore Length f the book is 10 inches.

6.4 Area and the Distributive Property

Question 9.
Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 64

Answer:
The above rectangle has 9 columns and to find  the area of rectangle using Distributive property this is divided into two smaller rectangles with  6 and 3 columns each.
6×9=6×(6+3)
6×9=(6×6)+(6×3)
6×9=36+18
6×9=54
Area=54 square meters.

6.5 Find Area of More Shapes

Question 10.
Find the area of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 65
Area=________

Answer:
To find the area of the shape we can divide the shape into two rectangles. Rectangle A:3 rows and 8 columns Rectangle B:4 rows and 3 columns
Area of rectangle A:3×8=24 square feet
Area of rectangle B:4×3=12 square feet
Therefore area of shape:24+12=35 square feet.

Conclusion:

We wish that the Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 6th Chapter Relate Area to Multiplication Solution Key provided here is helpful to score good marks in the exams. It also helps the teachers and parents to explain problems to their child. Feel free to clarify your doubts by leaving a comment below. Stay tuned to our site to check the answer keys of other chapters of grade 3.